325 079 Key Systems Maintenance Manual Volume 2 Oct78
325-079_Key_Systems_Maintenance_Manual_Volume_2_Oct78 325-079_Key_Systems_Maintenance_Manual_Volume_2_Oct78
User Manual: manual pdf -FilePursuit
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 980
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
KEY SYSTEMS
SERVICE MANUAL
VOLUME II
.
,
,
,
- r
-
\
--.........-------
~:."'-
~
@ Bell System
:~ 25- 079
,
OCTOBER 1978
I
I
I
I
Key System Manual Vol II
I
I
Comments concerning content, usability, and adequacy of this manual
will be welcomed. This sheet may be removed and mailed directly to
the Bell System Practices Organization. This sheet is not to be used
for ordering manuals. The following page will give you ordering
information.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Mail To:
Bell System
Data Design Engineering Manager
2400 Reynolda Road
Winston-Salem, N. C. 27106
Orders for these manuals should be placed on:
Western Electric
Indiana Publications Center
P. O. Box 26205
Indianapolis, Indiana 46226
Issue 5
NOVEMBER 1978
KEY SYSTEMS
SERVICE MANUAL
VOL II
NOTICE
Not for use or disclosure outside the
Bell System except under written agreement
Printed in U.S.A.
INTRODUCTION
The Key Systems Service Manual consists of Volumes I, II, and III. Volume I
contains three parts: Common Key System Information, General Apparatus,
and Telephone Sets. Volume II contains information concerning lA, lAl,
and lA2 Key Telephone Systems. Volume III includes those BSPs unique to
COM KEY* services. The sections are compiled in the manual numerically
and not in the order they appear in the Table of Contents.
This manual supports plant craft personnel in their daily work operations.
The sections contained in the manual provide information necessary for installing and maintaining key systems.
For information not included in this manual, refer to the standard BSP files.
"Trademark of AT&T Company
TABLE OF CONTENTS
VOL I
Section
Number
Section
Number
Subject
Issue
COMMON INFORMA nON
460·110·130
•
•
Marking Physicol location of Station Equipment
and Coble
•
461·200·101
Connector Cables -
•
461·604·100
Connecting Blocks 66-Type Tools,
Terminating, Adopters, and Maintenance
Add 461·604·101
461·604·101
•
•
•
461·604·102
•
Connecting Blocks Identification
66-Type -
Numbering
66A, B, C, and M 1 Types
461·604·103
Connecting Blocks - 66E3-25, 66E4-25, and
66E8-25 Identification and Installation
461·608·100
Connecting Blocks and Wiring Blocks Type
502·110·102
502 ·500· 120
463·130·100
463· 140·1 00
Add 463·210·100
463·210·100
•
501·150·102
Matrix Block - lA 1 -Identification, Installation,
Wiring, and Maintenance
12
Backboards -
Identification and Installation
EqlJipment Cabinets and Apparatus Mountings
Identification
lamp Indicators -
Identification and InstaUation
Designation Strips and Cards
Key Telephone Sets - Standard Features and
Options Basic Wiring Requirements
Nonkey Telephone Sets - Conversion for Use
With 1A 1 or I A2 Key Telephone Systems
Telephone Sets -
SERVICE
88-
540, 560,1560, and 2560
Series - Common Installation and Maintenance
Information
502·600·100
Telephone Sets -
512·210·101
Separately Mounted Keys - 6017, 6026, and
KS-21254 lever Types Identification,
Installation, and Connections
512·210·103
630, 1630, and 2630 Series
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
6040, 6041, 6050, and 6051 Types -
Identification, Installation, and Connections
•
167·440·201
•
167.446·101
167·447·101
Add 167·449·101
167·449·101
10 lG U867311 Power Plants Installation, and Connections
502·541·410
565HD
502·541·414
565GK and 565GKM
502·541·415
565HK and 565HKM
502.541·416
565LK and 565LKM
502·543·403
2565GK and 2565GKM
502·543·405
2565HK and 2565HKM
2565LK and 2565LKM
•
•
502·582·400
2500M and MM
502·610·406
630A, B, C, D and 631 A, B, C, D
502·610·407
630DA, 630DAM, 631 DA, ond 6310AM
502·610·409
634A, B, C, D and 635A, C, D
502·610·410
636A, B, C and 637 A, B,
•
502·610·417
634DA, 634DAM, 635DA, and 635DAM
•
502·610·418
636CA, 636CAM, 637DA, and 637DAM
502·612·400
2630D and 26310
502·612·401
2630DA, 2630DAM, 2631 DA, and 2631 DAM
502·612·403
2634D and 2635D
502·612·404
2636· and 2637· Type
502·612·409
2634DA, 2634DAM, 2635DA, and 2635DAM
•
Power Units - 29- and 30- Type -Identification,
Installalion, and Connections
Power Unils - 34B 1and 34C 1-Identification,
Installation, and Connections
Power Unit - 47C -Identification, Inslallation,
and Connections
564HK, 564HL, and 564HLM
500L/ M and 500MM
Identification,
Power Units- 19- and 20- Type -Identification,
Installation, Connections, and Maintenance
564HD
502·541·407
502·580·405
GENERAL APPARATUS
167.416·201
502·541·406
502·543·406
Separately Mounted Keys, Illuminated Pushbutton
-
•
Adopters for Use With Connector Cables
461·620·100
•
•
Subject
TELEPHONE SETS
Add 502·110·100
502·110·100
•
•
Connecting Blocks and Wiring Plan
Identification
Issue
Add 461·200·102
461·200·102
•
C,
D
Section
Section
Number
Subject
Issue
•
•• Add 503·601·101
503·601·101
502·612·410
Number
2636CA, 2636CAM, 2637DA, and 2637DAM
851· and 2851·Type
Subject
Issue
•
503·701·101
830· and 2830. Type
•
503·702·101
831· and 2831·Type
VOL II
KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS -
lA, IAI, AND IA2
REFERENCE -
COMMON INFORMATION
•
•
518·010·101
Centralized Key Telephone Installations
518·010·105
Key Telephone System Grounding and
Special Protection Requirements
•
SERVICE -
518·010·106
518·010·107
Power Unit Selection - Key Telephone Systems
and Key Service Units
Key Telephone Systems 47C Power Unit
-
Reserve Power
•
•
518·010·108
Common Audible Signaling Systems
518·010·109
Voice Station Signaling on Manual Intercoms
•
518·010·110
2A 1 Matrix Block - Identification, Installation,
Connection, and Maintenance
•
•
518·010·111
Message Waiting Consoles Used With lAI A 1, or I A2 Key Telephone Systems
518·010·115
Hands-Free Answering on Intercom IA 1,
IA2, and 6A Key Telephone Systems
SERVICE -
Key Telephone'
I A KTS
518·112·420
50- Type Packaged Units
518·112·421
Tie line and Control Services
518·112·422
Intercom Services
••
I A2 KTS
518·215·100
lA2 KTS
Add 518·215·400
518·215·400
•
• 518·215·402
• 518·215·403
• 518·215·404
•• Add 518·215·405
518·215·405
518·215·401
•
518·215·407
• 518·215·410
•• Add 518·215·417
518·215·417
• 518·215·418
• 518·215·419
Add 518·114·110
518·114·110
Key Telephone Units
Add 518·114·115
518·114·115
Packaged Key Telephone Units
•• Add 518·215.420
518·215·420
• 518·215·421
• 518·215·422
Add 518·411·100
•• 518·411·100
• 518·300·413
TOUCH. TONE" Adapters
•
REFERENCE -
IAI KTS
518·114·116
Identification and Arrangements
518·300·417
Key Telephone Units -
line Services
Key Telephone Units -
Auxiliary line Services
Key Telephone Units -
Intercom Services
Key Telephone Units -
Control Services
501- and 502-Type Key Service Units
Key Service Units- 513·, 514·, and 5 IS· Type
Key Service Units -
550- and 551-Type
Panels -
583- and 584-Type
Panels -
597· and 598·Type
Panels -
601·, 602·, and 603·Type
Modular Panels -
620A, 641A, and 642A
Apparatus Mountings -
Modular Panel -
698, 0, and G
626A
Apparatus Mounting -
IIOA
68 Key Telephone System -
DIALOG* Intercom
System
259· Type Key Telephorie Unit 272A Key Telephone Unit -
Identification
Identification
COMMON KTU.
SERVICE -
•
1AI KTS
Key TeJephone Units
518·114·430
200F, G, and K Packaged Key Telephone Units
518·114·431
• Add 518·114·431
518·114·432
ii
•
518·114·425
518·310·401
.:.... Audible and Visual Signaling and Connections
Identification
518·310·405
Station line Concentrators- 235- and 236-Type
Identification and
Key Telephone Units Connections
518·310·407
Key Telephone Unit - 237 -Type, Identification,
Operation, and Connections.
200H Packaged Units
Key Service Units
227A IMDI and 2276 Key Telephone Units
VOL III
Section
Number
Section
Issue
Subject
COM KEY· TaEPHONE SETS
•
503-701-110
832- and 2832-Type
•
503-702-110
833- and 2833-Type
Number
•
•
•
Issue
Subject
518-450-102
14A Communication System (COM KEY 1434)
518-450-105
4A Communication System (COM KEY 416)
518-450-106
4A Communication System (COM KEY 416)
Using 981/2981- and 983/2983-Type
COM KEY SYSTEMS
518-450-100
7 A Communication System (COM KEY 7 181
•
•
Add 518-450-110
518-450-110
21A Communication System (COM KEY 2152)
iii
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT&TCo Standard
SECTION 518-010-101
Issue 2, March 1976
CENTRALIZED KEY TELEPHONE INSTALLATIONS
1.
and Outside Plant Engineering, to ensure standardization
of apparatus and services provided by these groups.
GENERAL
This section contains information on centralized
key telephone installations using color-coded
modular backboards, 88-type wiring blocks and
600-series modular panels in equipment rooms,
riser closets, apparatus closets, satellite closets,
and satellite locations.
1.01
1.02
This section is reissued to:
• Add information on 187B1 and 188A1
backboards
• Add infOl:mation on 88-type wiring blocks
and 600-series modular panels
• Include information formerly contained in
Section 461-100-101.
Since this reissue covers a general revision, arrows
ordinarily used to indicate changes have been
omitted.
This section covers the majority of basic
Key Telephone System (KTS) services currently
in use in an effort to create a standard centralized
KTS installation. In some cases the scheme will
not be clearly applicable and local improvisation
will be required. In this case, the guidelines should
be followed as closely as possible.
1.03
Certain terms used to describe the standards
for cross-connecting, terminating and cabling
of KTS installations may be unfamiliar to the user.
The following paragraphs define these terms.
1.06
(a) Terminal Room: Location (usually in the
basement) inside a building where the entrance
cable from the central office (CO) terminates.
The CO pairs are cross-connected to the pairs
that radiate throughout the building. PBX, key
and/or special equipment may also be terminated
ill this room.
(b) Equipment Room: Location generally used
to house PBX equipment. It may also contain
KTS apparatus and terminating facilities.
(c) Apparatus Closet or Room: A location
for terminating the inputs and outputs of
CO, PBX, key and special equipment. The
equipment is usually located in the apparatus
closet. Locating the equipment in the closet
provides the following advantages:
• Equipment-operating noise is eliminated from
office area.
• Office appearance is improved.
A well-planned terminal arrangement is
essential for installation of all KTSs. Proper
planning will ensure standard construction practices
so craft personnel working on Key Telephone System
installations will see the same layouts at all terminals.
This planning should result in lower initial installation
costs, maintenance expense, and improved housekeeping.
The installation should also be planned with expansion
in mind, rather than just to accommodate the
customer's current demands.
(d) Riser Closets: Location on each floor where
riser cables terminate for further distribution
on that floor. A riser closet may also serve as
an apparatus or satellite closet.
When' planning new installations, close
coordination is required between the Architects
and Builders Service, Station Installation, Marketing,
(e) Satellite Closet: Houses terminating facilities
for KTS services, stations, and CO/PBX
lines. It does not contain KTS apparatus.
• Work operations cause little disturbance to
customer.
1.04
1.05
• Equipment space is minimized and common
equipment can be shared.
NOTICE
Not for use or disclosure outside the
Ben System except under written agreement
Printed in U,S,A,
Page 1
SECTION 518-010-101
Satellite Location: Serves same function
as a satellite closet. It may be a flush-mounted
wall cabinet or box, a surface-mounted terminal
box, or a terminal facility mounted in some
other area.
• 461-604-102-Connecting Blocks, 66A, B, C
and Ml·Type, Identification
(g) Key Telephone Stations: Multikey telephone .
sets which are used to receive and initiate
calls.
• 518-215-419-Service, lA2 KTS Panels, 620-,
641-, and 642-Type.
(f)
(h) Key Telephone Systems: Building block
units of station apparatus designed to provide
multiline pickup, line lamp signals, common
audible signaling, intercom, and auxiliary service.
These units are installed on customer premises.
(i)
Service Features: Categorized as follows:
• Basic line
• Intercom
• Auxiliary
Basic Line Services: Include line pickup,
line hold, and call status indications in the
form of lamp signals for multiple lines appearing
at key telephone stations.
(j)
(k) Intercom Service: Provides internal
communication among stations without the
need for connections through CO or PBX facilities.
(I)
AuxiliaryServices: Provide special features,
such as:
• 461-608-100-Connecting Blocks and Wiring
Blocks, 88-Type
2.
IDENTIFICATION
The backboard and wiring block color scheme
presented in this section is a standard plan
to be followed when making terminations and
cross-connections on customer premises. This plan·
calls for all inputs and outputs from KTS equipment
located in a specific area to appear on one
cross-connection field along with the termination
of CO/PBX lines and station lines serving that area.
There are four classes of lines that require
cross-connections. These lines and the color backboard
or wiring block field assigned to them are as
follows:
2.01
BACKBOARD/WIRING
BLOCK COLOR
green
1. Toward central office
blue
2. Toward station sets
red
3. To and from KTS equipment
yellow
4. To and from auxiliary equipment
Note: Purple has been designated PBX
connections but will not be covered in detail
since this section deals primarily with key
system installations.
• Exclusion
• Power failure transfer
• Incoming call transfer
• Auxiliary lamp control
LINES
This standardized plan allows easy identification
of the terminations of the telephone services
involved. See Table A for backboard selection
and Taple B for wiring block selection.
2.02
• Common audible signals.
3.
PLANNING
References
A telephone closet (apparatus or satellite)
contains the apparatus necessary to provide
telephone service to the area served by the closet.
This apparatus may also be housed in an equipment
room. See Fig. 15 for a typical layout showing
the relationship between closets.
3.01
For additional information, refer to the
following sections:
1.07
• 461-604-100-Connecting Blocks, 66-Type;
Tools, Terminating, Adapters and Maintenance
Page 2
ISS 2, SECTION 518-010-101
TABLE A
BACKBOARD SELECTION
COOE
COLOR
SEE
FIG_
MATERIAL
E/W
89B
BRACKETS
E/W
66B4-25
CONNECTING
BLOCKS
EIW
OISTRIBUTING
RINGS
P-43X237
MAXIMUM NUMBER
TERMINATIONS (PAIRS)
USING CONNECTING BLOCKS
66M1-25*
66Ml-50*
66B4-25
4
100
200
4
100
200
YELLOW
4
100
200
183B1
BLUE
8
200
400
183B2
GREEN
8
200
400
183B3
RED
8
200
400
183B5
YELLOW
8
200
400
184A1
RED
3
2
6
50
184B1
RED
4
4
12
100
184B2
RED
5
183A1
BLUE
183A2
GREEN
183A5
1
2
METAL
4
100
185A1
YELLOW
6
PARTICLE
BOARD
187B1
WHITE
7
METAL
16
188A1t WHITE
8
METAL
4
6
* Connecting blocks must be ordered separately_
t Use with 88-type wiring blocks only_
3.02
Each closet should meet the following
requirements:
• A minimum of one ceiling light with a wall
switch located near the door_
• Walls to be used to mount equipment should
be lined with 3/4-inch plywood_
• A 20-ampere circuit with two nO-volt duplex
receptacles .
• Walls to be used to mount backboards should
be equipped with 3/4-inch furring strips
spaced on lO-inch horizontal centers starting
even with the top of the top backboard.
Note: 88-type wiring blocks may be mounted
directly on the wall using fasteners appropriate
for the type of wall surface_
For optimum working conditions, one closet
should be provided for each 10,000 square
feet of usable floor space. The cabling should be
laid out so that all cable runs between the apparatus
closet and the key equipment are as short as
possible. Loop resistance should not exceed 50
ohms or approximately 1000 feet of 24-gauge cable.
3.03
Page 3
SECTION 518-010-101
TABLE B
3.04
See Tables C and D to estimate closet space
required for KTS apparatus.
SS-TYPE WIRING BLOCKS
3.05
MAX. NO. OF
TERMINATIONS
(PAIRSI
SEE
FIG.
88AW1-100
100
9
88AWl-300
300
10
88BWl-25
25*
11
88BWl-25C t
25*
12
88BWl-75
75t
13
88BWl-75C :j:
75t
CODE
(NOTE 11
COLOR
(NOTE 21
White
See Tables E and F to estimate horizontal
wall space needed to mount modular backboards
and 88-type wiring blocks in apparatus closets and
satellite closets, respectively.
closet.
3.07
The 88-type wiring blocks may be used in
all indoor applications currently using 66-type
connecting blocks and modular backboards. The
88-type wiring blocks provide the following advantages:
• Require less space
Note 1: 3- or 5-pair 88-type connecting blocks
(Fig. 14) must be installed to provide for crossconnects.
Note 2: Color-coded designation strips are used
to determine application of the wiring blocks
as follows:
Green field - 188AG1-100 (includes cable
pair count)
Yellow field -188BY1-100
Red field
- 188BR1-100 or 188CRl-25
Blue field -188AB1-100 (for tie cablesincludes cable pair count)
- 188BB1-100 (for key stations)
* Five multiples of one 25-pair cable.
t Five multiples of three 25-pair cables.
'I' Factory-wired with a 5-foot length of
connector cable.
Page 4
Fig. 16 shows a typical arrangement of
modular apparatus installed in an apparatus
3.06
• Shorter jumpers and easier jumper tracing
• Easier pair identification for cross-connections.
Fig. 17 shows a typical arrangement of
88-type wiring blocks installed in an apparatus
3.08
closet.
3.09
The 600-series modular panels may be
intermixed in the RED terminal· field with
the 184B-type backboards. See Fig. 18.
4.
INSTALLATION
Backboards-l83- and 184-TypIJ
4.01
The cornerstone of the terminating field is
the green backboard on which the CO/PBX
lines terminate. The minimum number of green
backboards placed will be two, one above the other.
The bottom of the lower backboard should be 12
inches off the floor and the left edge placed at a
predetermined mark. See Fig. 19· and 20 for the
ISS 2, SECTION 518-010-101
TABLE C
lA2 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM APPARATUS MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS
NUMBER OF
APPARATUS MOUNTINGS
AREA SERVED
IN SQUARE FEET
(7 It by 3 It)
*
FLOOR AREA IN
SQUARE FEET REQUIRED
IN CLOSET
(SEE TABLE D)
LINEAR FEET OF
LATERAL WALL SPACE
REQUIRED IN CLOSET
Up to 18,000
1
12
4
18,000
to
2
16
or
32i"
8
36,O()()
'For 1A1 key equipment use, one 7-foot apparatus mounting is required for up to 9000 sq, ft. of served
floor area. For more than 9000 sq. ft., double the number of apparatus mountings.
'i'Required when apparatus mountings are located so that swing-open gate clearance space cannot be used
jointly by both apparatus mountings.
TABLE 0
CLOSETS FOR lA2 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM APPARATUS MOUNTINGS
CLOSET-TYPE
MINIMUM DEPTH
REQ U I REMENTS I REMARK S
Walk-in
3 ft
Provides clearance for swing-open apparatus
mounting gate
One wall can be used
For shallow closet (1-1/2 ft min.), unobstructed
access to corridor 01' office area for swing open
gates
Walk-in
1 ft
If two adj acent walls or opposite walls are used
for apparatus mounting
Walk-in
!) ft
If two opposite walls and common adjacent walls
are used for apparatus mounting
Walk-in
1 ft
If two opposite walls only are used for apparatus
mounting
Shallow Apparatus
1-1/2 ft
(2-1/2 ft max.)
Minimum door height: 6 ft 8 in.
}rinimum door width: 3 ft with center post
eliminated between doors
}Iinimum ceiling height: 7-1/2 ft, to accept 85inch apparatus mounting
Walk-in
::\ ft
JIinimum door height: 6 ft 8 in.
Minimum door width: 3 ft
Minimum ceiling height: 7-1/2 ft, to accept
8!)-inch apparatus mounting
Page 5/6
ISS 2, SECTION 518-010-101
basic mounting patterns for apparatus closets and
satellite closets, respectively. Table G shows the
sequence for mounting 66-type backboards in a
standard configuration. Table H provides a similar
sequence for 88-type apparatus.
600-Series Modular Panel
The 600-series modular panels may be
intermixed with 184B-type connecting blocks
anywhere in the RED terminal field as shown in
Fig. 23 and 24.
4.04
5.
WIRING PATTERNS
Wiring Blocks-88 Type
When outside plant, apparatus, and station
cables have been permanently terminated,
future installation and service changes will be
accomplished by using jumpers.
5.01
The arrangement of the wiring blocks on a
wall depends on the size and type of
installation. A large KTS installation will use a
horizontal arrangement of wiring blocks as shown
in Fig. 21. A small KTS installation may use a
vertical arrangement of wiring blocks as shown in
Fig. 22.
4.02
In general, the color coding covered in 2.01
and the mounting patterns shown in Fig. 19
and 20 also apply to the 88-type wiring blocks.
4.03
Fig. 23 and Table I show jumper patterns
for an apparatus closet which directly serves
stations.
5.02
Fig. 24 and Table J show jumper patterns
for an apparatus closet which directly serves
two satellite closets.
5.03
Page 7
'1
~
TABLE E
!l
CD
CD
00
is
BACKBOARD AND WIRING BLOCK SPACE ESTIMATION FOR APPARATUS CLOSET
BACKBOARD OR
DESIG STRIP
COLOR
SPACE FACTORS
1000
GREEN
Two l83A2 or one l83B2 backboards or one 88AWl-300 wiring block
will accommodate normal outside plant (CO) needs.
YELLOW
One 185Al backboard or one 88AWl-100 wiring block is normally adequate for auxiliary services. When special requirements are known, space
must be provided in the yellow field.
BLUE
z
~
SQUARE FOOTAGE OF FLOOR AREA
BEING SERVED
A
Stations (sq. ft. floor area served by apparatus closet/lOO = A)
B
CALL DIRECTOR® tel sets (A/20 = B)
C
Key tel sets (A - B = C)
D
Number of cable conductor pairs per CALL DIRECTOR
(75 x B = D)
E
1500
2000
5000
~
~
10
15
20
50
100
0
0
1
3
5
10
15
19
47
95
0
0
75
225
375
Number of cable conductor pairs for key tel sets (25 x C = E)
250
375
475
1175
2375
250
375
550
1400
2750
5
8
10
25
50
20
32
40
100
200
2
3
4
10
20
22
35
44
110
220
F
Total number of pairs for stations (D + E = F)
G
Stations (50% of total sq. ft. floor area to be served by satellite
closet/lOO = G)
H
Number of cable conductor pairs for key sets (G x R = H)*
I
Number of cable conductor pairs for miscellaneous
(H x 10/100 = I)
J
Total number of pairs in tie cable to satellite (H + I
= J)
AA
Stations (sq. ft. served by other app. closet/lOO
= AA)
10
15
20
50
100
K
Total number of pairs in tie cable between app. closets
([A + AAJ x 15/100 x R = K)
12
18
24
60
120
L
Total pairs for blue backboards (F + J + K = L) t
284
428
618
1570
3090
-----
~
10,000
i
TABLE E (Cant)
BACKBOARD AND WIRING BLOCK SPACE ESTIMATION FOR APPARATUS CLOSET
BACKBOARD OR
DESIG STRIP
COLOR
BLUE
(Cont)
SQUARE FQQTAGE OF FLOOR AREA
BEING SERVED
SPACE FACTORS
1000
1500
2000
Number of 183A1 backboards, L/200 pairs per 183A1
2
3
Number of 183B1 backboards, L/400 pairs per 183B1
1
2
Number of 88AW1-100 backboards, L/100 pairs per 88AW1-100
3
5
Number of 88AWl-300 backboards, L/300 pairs per 88AWl-300
5000
10.000
4
8
16
2
4
8
7
16
31
1
2
3
6
11
A
Stations served from apparatus closet
10
15
20
50
100
M
Lines (A/1 station per line = M)
10
15
20
50
100
Number of 184A1 backboards, M/10 lines per 184A1
1
2
2
5
10
Number of 184B1 backboards, M/20 lines per 184B1
1
1
1
3
5
RED
HORIZONTAL
CLOSET
SPACE
REQUIREDt
Number of 88BWl-25 wiring blocks, M/5 lines per 88BWl-25
2
3
4
10
20
Number of 88BWl-75 wiring blocks, M/15 lines per 88BWl-75
1
1
2
4
7
184A1 x 8.5 + 8.5
12
1.4
2.2
2.2
4.25
7.8
184B1 x 17 + 8.5
12
2.2
2.2
2.2
5.0
7.8
(88BWl-25) x 10.75 §
6
12
0.9
0.9
0.9
1.8
3.6
(88BWl-75) x 10.75 §
2
12
0.9
0.9
0.9
1.8
3.6
iii
II>
-~
II>
In
*
t
~
..
CD
-0
R = (4 pair per line/1 = 4 (ratio assumed to be greater than one station per line).
!l
For only one apparatus closet and no satellite closets, delete J and K; then L = F.
oz
Total required horizontal wall space is determined by the number of red backboards or wiring blocks times the width, plus the width of the
yellow backboards or wiring blocks to be used.
'"
co
g
§ Raise this result to next highest whole number. The 6 and 2 in the denominator result from a maximum of 6 (100 pairs) and 2 (300 pairs)
wiring blocks per column.
~
g
SECTION 518-010-101
TABLE F
BACKBOARD AND WIRING BLOCK SPACE ESTIMATION FOR SATELLITE CLOSET
BACKBOARD OR
DESIG STRIP
COLOR*
SQUARE FOOTAGE OF FLOOR AREA
BEING SERVED
SPACE FACTORS
A
Stations (sq. ft. floor area served by satellite cioset/IOO = A)
B
CALL DIRECTOR® tel sets (A/20 ~ B)
C
Key tel sets (A - B ~ C)
D
Number of cable conductor pairs per CALL DIRECTOR
1000
1500
2000
5000
10,000
10
15
20
50
100
0
0
1
3
5
10
15
19
47
95
0
0
75
225
375
(75xB~D)
BLUE
RED
HORIZONTAL
CLOSET
SPACE
REQUIREDt
*
E
Number of cable conductor pairs per key tel set (25 x C = E)
250
375
475
1175
2375
F
Total number of pairs for satellite (D + E = F)
250
375
550
1400
2750
Number of 183A1 backboards, F/200 pairs per 183A1
2
2
3
7
14
Number of 183B1 backboards, F/400 pairs per 183B1
1
1
2
4
7
Number of 88AW1-100 wiring blocks, F/I00 pairs per 88AWI-100
3
4
6
14
28
Number of 88AWl-300 wiring blocks, F/300 pairs per 88AWl-300
1
2
2
5
10
AA
Stations served from satellite closet
10
15
20
50
100
G
Lines (AA/l station per line
10
15
20
50
100
H
Number of conductor pairs in tie cable (G x R = H)t
=
G)
40
60
80
200
400
Number of 184A1 backboards, H/50 pairs per 184A1
1
2
2
4
8
Number of 184B1 backboards, H/100 pairs per 184B1
1
1
1
2
4
Number of 88BWl-25 wiring blocks, H/25 pairs per 88BWl-25
2
3
4
8
16
Number of 88BWl-75 wiring blocks, H(75 pairs per 88BWl-75
1
1
2
3
6
184A1 x 8.5 + 8.5
12
1.4
2.2
2.2
3.6
6.4
184A1 x 17 + 8.5
12
2.2
2.2
2.2
3.6
6.4
88BWl-25 x 10.75 §
6
12
0.9
0.9
0.9
1.8
2.7
88BWl-75 x 10.75 §
2
12
0.9
0.9
0.9
1.8
2.7
Green and yellow backboards are usually not required in a satellite closet.
t R ~ (4 pairs/line) ~ 4 (in tie cable).
Total required horizontal wall space is determined by the number of red backboards or wiring blocks to be used.
Raise this result to the next highest whole number. The 6 and 2 in the denominator result from a maximum of 6 (100 pairs) and 2 (300 pairs)
wiring blocks per column.
Page 10
ISS 2, SECTION 518-010-101
TABLE G
INSTALLATION SEQUENCE -180 SERIES BACKBOARDS
COLOR
AND
CODE
Green
183A2
or
183B2
Yellow
185Al:j:
Blue
183Al
or
183B1
White
187Bl*
Red
184Bl
or
184B2t:j:
PROCEDURE
First backboard
Installed by construction forces in lower left corner 1 foot above floor. Horizontal
location selected jointly by outside plant engineer and service foreman.
Second backboard
Above first backboard, bottom butted to first backboard.
Above second GREEN backboard, bottom butted to GREEN backboard.
2 high -lower BLUE 1 foot from floor.
Left side of the first two backboards (2-high) butted to GREEN backboards.
Butt left side of first backboard to YELLOW; extend required number of
backboards horizontally using only one row.
Top row:
Butt left side of first backboard to YELLOW; extend required number of backboards horizontally using only one row.
If inadequate horizontal space, place second row of RED above first row of RED.
If inadequate height, place RED backboards in middle row, at end, inverted. Never
place RED backboard in bottom row.
* Use with 184B2 backboard. See Fig. 9.
t Use with 187Bl backboard. See Fig. 9.
:j: Installations involving GOO-series modular panels eliminate the need for some or all the backboards
in the YELLOW and RED fields (see Fig. 18).
Page 11
SECTION 518-010-101
TABLE H
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE - SS-TYPE WIRING BLOCKS
CODE
(NOTE)
PROCEDURE
First Wiring Block:
88AWI-IOO
or
88AWl-300
(Green Field)
Installed by construction forces on the left side of
the installation with the top of the block 55 inches
above the floor_ Horizontal location selected jointly
by outside plant engineer and service foreman.
Second Wiring Block (if required):
Below the first wiring block; top butted to first
block.
188Al Backboard
(White)
Directly above the first GREEN wiring block.
Extend, as required, horizontally to the right using
only one row.
88AWI-IOO
(Purple Field)
Purple field if required is butted directly above the
WHITE backboard. YELLOW would then go above
PURPLE.
88AWI-IOO
(Yellow Field)
Directly above the 188Al WHITE backboard that
is located above the GREEN wiring blocks.
PURPLE, when required, is butted to the WHITE
backboard.
88BWl-25
or
88BWl-75
(Red Field)
88BWl-25 may be 6 high and 88BWl-75 may be
2 high. Located above the 188Al backboard and
to the right of the YELLOW and/or PURPLE wiring
blocks. Left side butted to YELLOW and/or
PURPLE wiring blocks.
88AWI-IOO
or
88AWl-300
(Blue Field)
88AWI-IOO may be 12 high and 88AWl-300 may
be 4 high. Located below the 188Al backboards
and to the right of the GREEN wiring blocks. Left
side butted to GREEN wiring blocks. The area
below the GREEN wiring blocks may be used,
particularily for tie cables.
Note: All wiring blocks are manufactured in white plastic. The color of the field
is determined by the use of appropriately colored designation strips. See Table B.
Page 12
ISS 2, SECTION 518-010-101
TABLE I
JUMPERS USED IN A TYPICAL APPARATUS CLOSET WHICH
DIRECTLY SERVES STATIONS
ARROW
NO.
LINE
PURPOSE
(FIG. 23)
CO/PBX
1
JUMPERS
2-conductol": from GREEN field (line pickup) to RED field
(key equipment termination)
Key telephone
button with
basic line service
2
6-conductor: from RED field (line service termination) to
BLUE field (key telephone set termination)
3
2-conductor (for ringing): from YELLOW field (auxiliary
apparatus) to RED field (key equipment termination)
Auxiliary
and dial intercommunication
service
4
2-conductor: from YELLOW field (auxiliary apparatus) to
BLUf,: field (key telephone set terminations)
Note: Use F cross-connect wire for jumpers.
TABLE J
JUMPERS USED IN AN APPARATUS CLOSET WHICH DIRECTLY SERVES TWO
SATELLITE CLOSETS
LINE
PURPOSE
CO/PBX
ARROW
NO.
(FIG. 24)
1
JUMPERS
2-conductOl': from GREEN field (line pickup) to RED field
(ke~'
Key telephone
button with
basic line service
(to satellite
closet)
2
Key telephone
button with
basic line service
(in satellite
closet)
3
equipment termination)
(j-conducio,.: from RED fil'ld (line service termination) to
BLUE field (til' cable termination)
2-conducio,. (for ,.inging): from RED field (line service
termination) to BLUE field (tie cable termination)
or from RED field (line service termination to YELLOW
field (auxiliarr services) to BLUE fidd (tie cable termination)
6-conductol": from RED field (line service termination) to
BLUE field (station set termination)
2-conducto,.: from RED field (line service termination) to
BLUE field (station set termination)
Note: Use F cross-connect wire for jumpers.
Page 13
Fig. 1-183A_Type Backboard
Fig. 3-184A I Backboard
JUMPER
CHANNELS
Fig. 2- 183B_Type Backboard
Fig. 4-184B I Backboard
Page 14
ISS 2, SECTION 518-010- 101
I--~
-
17 I N. - - _ _ _ _ __
~
r-------
-----
17-IN _
Fig_ 7-187B1 Backboard
Fig_ 5-184B2 Backboard
Fig_ 8-188A 1 Backboard
Fig_ l>-1 85A 1 Backboard
Fig- 9-88AW1 - 100 Wiring Block
Page 15
SECT/ON S1S-010-10l
Fig. 12-8SBW1_2SC Wiring Block
Fig. I0-8SAW1_300 Wiring Block
Fig. 13-8SBW1_7S Wiring Block
Fig. I 1-8SBW1_2S Wiring Block
Poge 16
ISS 2, SECTION 518-010-101
88 BSWI-S
88BSW I -3
(S PA I R)
(3 PA IR)
• • •
• •
Fig. 14-88BSWI-5 and 88BSWI-3 Connecting Blocks
Page 17
in
VI
~
VI
m
!l
i5
z
Fig. 16--Typical Apparatus Closet Arrangement Using Modular Apparatus
SECTION 518-010-101
Fig. 17-Typical Apparatus Closet Arrangement Using SS-Type Wiring Blocks
Page 20
ISS 2, SECTION 518-010-101
TO STATIONS THROUGH UNDERFLOOR DUCT SYSTE M
Fig. 18-Typical Centralized Terminal Field Arrangement Using 180-Type Backboards, 66-Type Connecting
Blocks, and 600-Series Modular Panels
Page 21
SECTION 518-010-101
r
tt-
20 IN.
MODULE
I
:
AUX AND DIAL
INTERCOM
185AI
BACKBOARD
(YELLOW)
KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS
TERMI NATIONS
LINE SERVICES
184BI OR 184B2 BACKBOARDS
(RED)
L
I
)
I
187BI BACKBOARDS
(WHITE)
I
*
-1
I
I
I
I
I
20 IN.
MODULE
20 IN.
MODULE
I
I
I
I
I
6FT
I
CO/PBX LINES
183A2 OR 183B2
BACKBOARDS
(GREEN)
I
KEY TELEPHONE SET
---------j
TERMINATIONS
183AI OR 183BI BACKBOARDS
I
(BLUE)
I
I
I
------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:
I
12 IN.
* THE 187BI BACKBOARD
FLOOR
IS USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE 184B2 BACKBOARD. IF 184BI
BACKBOARD IS USED, 187BI BACKBOARD IS NOT REQUIRED.
Fig. 19-Apparatus Closet, Basic Pattern, Using lS0-Type Backboards
Page 22
ISS 2, SECTION 518-010-101
KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS
TERMINATIONS
LINE SERVICES, ETC
184BI OR 184B2 BACKBOARDS
(RED)
187BI BACKBOARDS
(WHITE)
*
RED
88BWI-75
RED
88BWI-75
RED
88BWI-75
YELLOW
88AWI-300
RED
88BWI-75
RED
88BWI-75
RED
88BWI-75
188A I
BACKBOARD
188A I
BACKBOARD
188A I
BACKBOARD
188A I
BACKBOARD
GREEN
88AWI-300
BLUE
88AWI-300
BLUE
8BAWI-300
BLUE
88AW 1-300
TI
83 IN.
KEY TELEPHONE SET
TERMINATIONS
183AI OR 183BI BACKBOARDS
(BLUE)
MAX.
BLUE
88AW 1-300
BLUE
88AW 1-300
BLUE
88AW 1-300
BLUE
88AWI-300
BLUE
88AW 1-300
BLUE
88AWI-300
BLUE
88AWI-300
BLUE
88AWI-300
BLUE
88AWI-300
BLUE
88AW 1-300
BLUE
88AW 1-300
BLUE
55 IN.
* CONJUNCTION
THE 187BI BACKBOARD IS USED IN
WITH THE 184B2 BACKBOARD. IF 184B I BACKBOARD IS USED,
187BI BACKBOARD IS NOT REQUIRED.
Fig. 20--Satellite Closet, Bosic Pottern, Using 180-Type
Bockboards
10 3/4
88AWI-300
r
12 IN. MIN
fLOOR
NOTE,
fOR SATELLITE CLOSET, DELETE GREEN
AND YELLOW WIRING BLOCKS. THIS
ARRANGEMENT WILL SERVE 180
KEY STATIONS.
Fig. 21-Apparatus Closet, Basic Pattern, Using
88-Type Wiring Blocks-Horizontal Arrongement
Page 23
SECTION 518-010-101
GREEN
YELLOW
RED
RED
BLUE
72-3/4 IN.
BLUE
BLUE
I. FOR SATELL I TE CLOSET,
DELETE GREEN AND YELL""
IiIRING BLOCKS
2. THIS ARRANGEMENT WILL
SERVE 36 KEY TELEPHONE SETS.
T
12 IN.
MIN.
FLOOR
Fig. 22-Apparatus Closet, Basic Pattern, Using
88-Type Wiring Blocks-Vertical Arrangement
Page 24
ISS 2, SECTION 518-010-101
184BI BACKBOARDS (RED)
OR 600-SERIES MODULAR PANELS
I
------------.
185AI BACKBOARD
(YELLOW
)
1'3'
I
U~ U ll;'
O~ o
0-
0 £00
0 o
0
00
0 o
00
0
0 o
0000 io 00 00 00.0 10000000 0000 booo 00000000 00000000
0 0
rr:v
183A2 BACKBOARDS
(GREEN)
~
~
vl,-k r--V
"r--~
4~
" i'
I...> - - - - - - - - 1 8 3 B I BACKBOARDS (BLUE)------~.I
NOTE:
THESE JUMPER PATTERNS ALSO APPLY
TO 8S-TYPE WIRING BLOCKS.
Fig. 23-Jumper Patterns for an Apparatus Closet Which Directly Serves Stations
Page 25
SECTION 518-010-101
APPARATUS CLOSET
184BI BACKBOARDS (RED)
OR 600-SERIES MODULAR PANELS
I"
185AI BACKBOARD
(YELLOW)____
I
y~I~Q o. df .r-X~
~
O
0 0
000 00
0
0
OO~ 0
000
oo-d'o 0
0
0 0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
00 0000010 00 00 00010 0000000
~
~
183A2 BACKBOARDS
(GREENl~~4F34~~~~~~~~~~~++~+4+4~~~~r+~
NOTE:
THESE JUMPER
PATTERNS ALSO
APPLY TO
.88-TYPE
WIRING BLOCKS
141--+----- 183BI
BACKBOARDS (BLUE)
------+l~1
TIE CABLE
1
18481 BACKBOARDsi
(RED)
OLOO
00000
0000000000000000
000.00'-000
0000000000000000
3
3
~183BI BACKBOARDS~
(BLUE)
SATELLITE CLOSET
SATELLITE CLOSET
Fig. 24-Jumper Patterns for an Apparatus Closet Which Directly Serves. Two Satellite Closets
Page 26
26 Pages
SECTION 518-010-105
Issue 2, September 1975
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT&TCo Standard
KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
GROUNDING AND SPECIAL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS
1.
(f)
GENERAL
This section contains information on grounding
and protection applicable to Key Telephone
System (KTS) installations. It is intended to provide
general background knowledge needed by the
installer. More detailed coverage of related
equipment and procedures can be found in Section
460-100-400, Protection and Grounds.
Surge Current-Sudden high current caused
by a transient voltage.
1.01
(g) Potential-Voltage difference between two
circuit points.
(h) Circuit Ground-In KTS power supplies,
the positive side of the dc output; the
reference point for the negative output voltages
and the return path for grounded signaling.
Physically, it is the terminal labeled "LOC GRD",
HGRD", or HG".
This section is a complete revision of Issue
1 and provides information that is more
usable and easier to understand.
1.02
Frame Ground-The path through which
the frame, case, or chassis of the KTS
power supply is connected to the commercial
power service ground; "green wire" ground
conductor in the power cord. Holds frame at
near zero potential if ac power is accidentally
shorted to power supply frame. Not the same
as circuit ground.
(i)
1.03
The terms listed below are defined here with
respect to their specific usage in this section:
(a) Ground-The arbitrary zero reference point
for an electrical potential. A large conducting
body, such as the earth, used as a common
return for an electrical circuit. Ideally, earth
ground provides a zero-voltage level.
Entrance COnduit-The conduit which carries
the power service cable from the point of
building attachment to the service entrance box
where it is fused and distributed.
(j)
(b) Building Ground-An acceptable ground
connection provided by building construction
steel in contact with earth ground or a bare
copper wire encased in concrete building footing.
(k) Branch Conduit-The conduit which carries
branch power circuit wiring from the service
entrance box to outlet points or secondary service
boxes within the building.
(c) Cold Water Pipe Ground-An acceptable
ground connection provided by a continuous
buried metal pipe with at least 10 feet of length
in moist earth and carrying cold water into the
building where the KTS is installed.
Potential Equalization-A means for
maintaining two or more circuit points at
approximately same potential; usually achieved
by bonding points or by providing a single
connection point for all circuits involved.
(I)
Multigrounded Neutral (MGN) System-A
grounded commercial power distribution
system in which the neutral wire is grounded
at frequent intervals along the distribution
system. MGN service is now in common use
and usually provides a good ground point for a
KTS.
(d)
(e) Transient Voltage-A high-level voltage
pulse of short duration and irregular waveshape
such as might be induced into a telephone or
power line by lightning activity or in power
lines by load switching.
(m) High-Rise Building-A multistory building
utilizing structural steel and/or reinforced
concrete construction. Separate KTS installations
may be located on any or all floors.
2.
BASIC PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS
2.01
Station protection is always required where
telephone or power lines are exposed to
NOTICE
Not for use or disclosure outside the
Bell System except under written agreement
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
SECTION 518-010-105
lightning-induced transients. Protection is also
required when outside plant telephone facilities
(cable, open wire, drops, etc) are exposed to
possible contact with 300-volt (or higher) power line
circuits. Therefore, all KTS installations shall
be grounded and protected in accordance with
this practice unless otherwise specified by local
instructions.
Unprotected telephone equipment can also
be damaged in lightning areas even though
both the telephone and power lines are entirely
buried. In this case, damage can occur when a
lightning stroke causes the earth ground associated
with an installation to rise with respect to the
central office (CO) ground.
2.02
Ideally, a specific telephone ground is provided on
each floor during construction; this ground should
be located and used. Otherwise, proper grounding
must be accomplished through the methods presented
in this practice.
In exposed areas do not install KTS equipment
where the necessary station protection
grounding cannot be provided (ie, if access to the
water system or power ground is not possible and
a ground rod cannot be driven). Advise the local
supervisor or designated company representative
of the situation as soon as possible.
2.07
3.
BASIC PROTECTION THEORY
Carbon Block Operation
2.03
KTS installations usually require station
protection in lightning areas regardless
of power exposure of the telephone plant. This
condition is discussed in more detail in Part 4 of
this practice. Briefly, however, the key station
must be protected from the voltages that can be
developed between any two ground points. These
ground points include the KTS power supply ground,
the commercial power ground, the station protection
ground, and the CO or PBX ground. It is strongly
recommended that protection of KTS Jines
always beconsideredin areas where thunderstorm
activity can occur. The lack or such protection
can result in damage to and failure of circuit pack
and power supply components. Fig. 1 illustrates
a typical installation protected and grounded according
to the requirements presented here.
For detailed information on protector selection,
ground rod installation methods, hardware,
etc, refer to Section 460-100-400.
2.04
This practice outlines grounding and protection
arrangements that will satisfy the requirements
for most installation situations. Illustrations of
both good and poor grounding methods are shown,
but involved theoretical explanations have been
avoided. Situations not adequately covered by this
information should be referred to the responsible
local supervisor or designated company representative.
An electrical current will arc across a gap
(an air space) in a circuit when a specific
level of voltage is impressed across the circuit
points that form the gap. Station-type carbon
block protectors utilize this arcing action to limit
foreign potentials on telephone lines.
3.01
fr
R
~
D
Station protectors must be equipped
with 3-mil carbon blocks (white blocks).
Do not use blue or yellow blocks.
The 3-mil blocks will arc over at a peak voltage
of about 600 volts.
The effect of a protector with 3-mil carbon
blocks on a typically high-voltage waveform
is illustrated in Fig. 2. The blocks operate on
either positive or negative voltage peaks that exceed
the firing point of the gap (approximately 600 volts
in this example).
3.02
2.05
2.06
High-Rise Buildings: The material in this
practice applies equally as well to KTS
installations in high-rise buildings as it does to
smaller structures. It is recognized, however, that
special problems may be encountered in the location
of satisfactory grounding points in high-rise buildings.
Page 2
The waveform in Fig. 2 can represent any
high-voltage condition that can develop on
telephone lines, for example, lightning surges,
switching transients, power crosses, etc. In any
case, the carbon blocks arc over as the voltage
level reaches point A. The current flow associated
with the foreign voltage will be shunted to ground
via the arc path; the voltage on the station telephone
line, with respect to the protector ground terminals,
will be equal to the voltage drop across the carbon
blocks (usually less than 50 volts). These conditions
will be maintained, as illustrated by dark shading,
until the voltage is reduced to the level indicated
by point B. In other words, the arc is sustained
3.03
ISS 2, SECTION 518·010-105
Fig. 1-Properly Grounded 1A2 Key Telephone System
Page 3
SECTION 518-010-105
and the line is held near ground potential until
the voltage declines to a level that will cause the
arc to extinguish. Point B was selected as typical
of most low energy transients for illustration
purposes only; this point can vary considerably
depending on the amount of current involved.
That part of the waveform between points
A and B, indicated by the dashed line,
represents the voltage levels that would have been
impressed across station apparatus (line circuits,
power supply, telephone sets) had station protection
not been provided or had the protector blocks failed
to operate properly.
3.04
3.05
Power Crossed with Telephone Line:
Protectors are also required to protect
telephone equipment and customer premises from
primary power voltages that can become connected
to the telephone line as a result of physical crosses
between lines. This electrical protection is provided
in a manner similar to the operation described
above, except the telephone line will be permanently
grounded if the power cross continues for a sufficient
period of time. Thus, protectors will safely bypass
large currents to ground until the current path is
opened.
3.07
Fuseless and Fused Protectors: Telephone
plant is usually arranged in a way"'that
permits the use of fuseless protectors. These
protectors provide only carbon block-type protection,
but they are capable of handling large currents.
It is necessary, however, that fusible links be
located between the protectors and possible power
contact points to justify use of fuseless protectors.
This is usually accomplished by providing a length
of fine gauge (finer than the cable or drop facilities)
cable pairs or jumper wires between CO lines and
the station drop. For example, a fusible link can
be provided by connecting a terminal to a 22-gauge
cable with a length of 24- or 26-gauge cable. The
length of finer cable acts as a fuse and will burn
open before power levels exceed the rated capacity
of the protectors.
Fused protectors are necessary under certain
conditions, usually where a fusible link is
not installed and the station protection is located
inside a building. The following conditions require
the application of fused protectors.
3.08
(1) The station is served by open or rural wire,
the power system is not MGN, and the
power neutral is not grounded to a water pipe.
(2) The station is served by open or rural wire
and no bridle wire fusible link is provided.
3.06
Gas Tube Type Protectors: Gas tube
protectors function in a manner similar to
carbon block operation, except that the tubes do
not always fail in the shorted mode as carbon
blocks do. (Failure of a protector means that it
does not recover to its normal condition after
carrying a surge current to ground.) Gas tubes
generally have a lower firing voltage than carbon
blocks and a considerably longer life expectancy.
However, they are expensive and do not provide
a greater degree of line protection. Therefore, gas
tubes are to be used only when locally authorized;
they are usually installed in areas where excessive
carbon maintenance is required due to frequent
thunderstorm activity. However, the present
generation of gas tubes may fail in the open mode
(ie, not be able to bypass another surge to ground)
and should not be used in place of carbon blocks,
but rather, in addition to them, strictly to reduce
maintenance visits. This arrangement will insure
that the line will continue to be protected in the
event of a tube failure. (The 123B1A protector
provides carbon blocks and gas tubes in a parallel
arrangement.)
Page 4
(3) Underground service wire is connected by
encapsulated splices to 19- or 22-gauge buried
cable that is jointly buried with power lines.
Where this condition exists, a fused protector
should be specified on the service order.
4.
DESCRIPTION OF REQUIRED KTS PROTECTION
Improper protection of KTSs can result in
station equipment damage that may require
frequent visits to station locations for the purpose
of replacing defective line equipment, power supplies,
lamps, and fuses. Damage of this type is usually
caused by lightning or power-induced voltage
transients. A good protection system can substantially
reduce these problems.
4.01
A telephone station protection system consists
of protection equipment and wiring that
permits only relatively small voltage differences to
develop between telephone equipment and other
electrical equipment or grounded building fixtures
when either lightning or power surge current is
4.02
ISS 2, SECTION 518-010-105
SIMPLIFIED TYPICAL WAVEFORM OF VOLTAGE
INDUCED BY LIGHTNING IN TELEPHONE LINE
V
o
L
T
HIGH VOLTAGE TRANSIENT
STRIKES SERVICE WIRE
A
G
E
"
I \
ARC DEVELOPS ACROSS
CARBON BlOCK CAP
\/HEN TRANS lENT
REACHE S ABOUT
600 VOlTS (NOTE I)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\
I MPUT TRANS lENT C<*Tt NUES
TO BUILD UP TO I'tAK ATENTRl
POI NT. THEN FAL LS (NO TE 2)
,
-----.......
'
'
'
'
,
u_ . .~,
,,-..
nM
..,
TO STA T I ON
TRAMS I ENT VOl TAIOE
WAVEFOIIM ACROSS
LINE IMPEOAIOCE
CARBON
BLOCK
1l:
GROUND
TERM INAL
ARC ACROSS CAP
EXT I NGU I SHES
WHEN TRANSIENT
rALLS TO ABOUT
i '"
~ ~" ,~rr
3-HIL
AIR CAP
VOlTAGE DEVELOPED
BY CURRENT
rLOIIING ACR OS S
CAR BON BlOC K CA P
TO
GROUND
"
/
TRANS I ENT rALLS
TO NOR"'L II NE
VOl TAGE ( NOTE .)
TELEPHONE STAT (ON
LINE AT LOll
VOlTAGE OOR I NO
PERIOO or ARCING
TIME
LEGEND ,
VOlTAGE LEVEL BET\I[[N TELEPHONE STATION LINE AND GROUND.
•
- - - VOlTAGE LEVEL or INPUT TRANS I ENT \/HICH WOULD BE CONNECTED TO
STATION LINE AND STATION IF PROTECTOR DID NOT ARC .
o
:~~~~~~~ ~~~'ON LINE IS AT L<7oi VOlTAGE BE CAUSE or CURRENT
NOTES ,
.,M
SERVICE
GROUNO
WIRE
STATION
WIRE
TYPICAL PROTECTOR
INSTALLED ON
CUSTOMER PREMISES
I . CARBON BlOCK ARC S OVER BErORE TRANS IENT CAN CAUSE OA"'GE TO
LINE AND STAT ION . AVE RAGE ARC POINT or 3-HIL CAP IS BET\I[[N
.00 AND 800 VOlT S .
2. PEAK or TRANSIEN T INOOCED IN LINE "'Y REACH THOUSANDS or VOlT S.
3 . VOlTAGE LEVEL WHICH WI LL NOT SUSTAIN ARC VARIES ACCORDING TO
CAP SPACING AHD "'GNHUDE or CURRENT .
• • TRANS I ENT "'Y IHCREASE IN HECAT I VE DI RECTION AND CAUSE ARCING ACAIN .
Fig. 2-Carbon Block Action on Telephone line Hit by High-Voltage Transient
flowing. The primary danger of a llowing high-voltage
levels to deve lop betwee n g round poin ts is that
current can arc across from one circuit to another
if the pote nt ia l diffe re nce beco mes s u ff icient ly
high. This flow of current can damage equipment.
4.03
KTS protection us ua ll y co ns ists of bas ic
telephone line protection (standard fu sed or
fuse less protecto rs) co nnected to an acce pta ble
g round point. Fig. 3 illu strates a typ ica l KTS
grounding ar rangement that meets protection
req uirements if installed prope rly.
ote t hat all
g rounded points are connected to the cold wate r
pipe eithe r directly or by way of a bond wire.
Utili zation of the same g round poi nt li mits th e
level of potential differe nces t hat can develop
Page 5
SECTION 518-010-105
principles involved can be applied to most KTS
installations.
between system ground points. The water system
was chosen as the system ground in the example
of Fig. 3, but the common system ground could
be building steel, footing ground, power service
ground rod or telephone company ground rod,
depending upon the local job situation.
Telephone Line Protector: The protector
should be located as near as possible to the
cable or drop entry point within a building. The
protector ground wire should be routed to the
nearest acceptable ground available (see 4.06). The
size of the protector ground wire depends upon
the type and number of protectors involved in the
KTS installation (refer to table in Fig. 3).
4.05
In the following paragraphs, the various
components and connections of .the arrangement
in Fig. 3 will be discussed in detail. The basic
4.04
POWER SUPPL Y
PROTECTOR
KSU
400
TO[R
CO
KTU
T
----\
TO OTHER
PROTECTORS
IF REQUIRED
TO
COMMERCIAL
POWER
~
NO. 14
TO OTHER KTS
POWER SUPPLIES
SEE TABLE
FOR WIRE SIZE
FRAME
GRD
BK ......-'---''--..,
W
EARTHr-________-r~-----CO-L-D-W-A-T-ER--P-'-PE----------,,--n
GROUND
POINT~---------L~------------------------~L--/
POWER
SERVICE
ENTRANCE
BOX
®
NO.6
®
POWER
GROUND
ROD
LEGEND:
@
®
@
@
©
®
®
®
PROTECTOR GROUND (PRIMARY KTS GROUND).
POWER SUPPLY LOCAL GROUND (CIRCUIT GROUND) - PROVIDES FOR POTENTIAL EQUALIZATION
BETWEEN TELEPHONE LI NE AND POWER SUPPLY.
GROUND WIRE BONO REQUIRED TO EQUALIZE KTS AND POWER SERVICE GROUNDS. THIS
BONO MUST BE INSTALLED BY TELEPHONE COMPANY IF NOT ALREADY PROVIDED. BONO
CAN BE CONNECTED, ON POWER SIDE, TO A DIFFERENT SERVICE GROUND POINT THAN
SHOWN (FOR EXAMPLE, ANYWHERE ALONG GROUND WIRE@OR TO SERVICE ENTRANCE
CONDUIT® I.
POWER SERVICE GROUND WIRE.
POWER SERVICE ENTRANCE CONDUIT.
POWER SERVICE BRANCH CONDUIT - NOT ACCEPTABlE GROUND POINT FOR TELEPHONE
EQUI PMENT.
GREEN WIRE GROUND - CONNECTS FRAME GROUND OF POWER SUPPLY TO POWER SERVICE
GROUND BY WAY OF GROUND PRONG IN THREE-PRONG PLUG. NEVER CUT orF GROUND
PRONG TO FIT TWO-PRONG OUTLET; USE ADAPTER DESCRIBED IN PARAGRAPH 4.08.
BOND BETWEEN PROTECTORS. GROUND WIRE BETWEEN PROTECTORS SHOULD BE SAME
SIZE AS GROUND WIRE@.
Fig. 3--Typical KTS Grounding Arrangement
Page 6
GROUND WIRE CAPACITY
NO. OF PROTECTED CKTS
SIZE
FUSE LESS
FUSED
3
NO. 14
I
NO. 12
2
6
10
6
7
7 OR MORE
6 OR MORE
NO.
NO. 6
NOTE:
WIRE BETWEEN PROTECTORS SHALL
BE SAME SIZE AS WIRE BETWEEN
PROTECTOR AND GROUND.
ISS 2, SECTION 518-010-105
ground wire as directly as possible to the
nearest one.
Ground Selection
Selection of an acceptable point for connecting
the protector ground wire is of the utmost
importance in achieving a well-protected installation.
The protector ground serves as the primary KTS
ground reference point. The flow chart in Fig. 4
is designed to help the installer identify the best
choices of ground available in most job situations.
The decision blocks contain questions regarding
the installation conditions, the responses to which
will lead to selection of an acceptable ground. The
flow chart should be followed until the last block
in the path is reached. The referenced notes and
figures provide additional information and illustrations
of actual installation procedures.
4.06
4.07
It may sometimes be difficult to decide
whether a ground point is acceptable or
not, and the installer will have to rely on his
experience and judgment. In general, a ground
point is unacceptable if it does not make good
contact with earth ground. The definitions in 1.03
are a practical guide to selecting the right ground,
in conjunction with the use of the flow chart. The
following points must also be considered:
• Noone type of grounding system-power
service, cold water pipe, or building-should
be regarded as basically superior to another.
However, an MGN power system can usually
be counted on for good grounding while
the others may be difficult to verify.
• Always verify that when the ground sources
used for the commercial power service ground
and the telephone protector ground are
different, they are bonded together.
KTS Power Supply Local Ground (Circuit Ground)
After the protector ground wire (A in Fig. 3)
has been connected to the best available
ground (a cold water pipe in the typical situation
shown in Fig. 3), the power supply output circuit
(or local) ground must always be connected to the
protector ground terminal. This connection (B)
provides a necessary ground for the power supply
and also insures that the power supply and protector
ground reference points will be at the same potential
under all surge conditions. The connection should
be made with wire no smaller than 14-gauge.
Route ground wire (B) as physically close as possible
to the telephone lines between the protector and
the key service unit (KSU). This will increase
electrical coupling between the telephone lines and
the ground wire which, in turn, reduces the potential
difference between them and helps prevent arcing.
In the case where several power supplies are used,
strap the ground terminal of each supply (with a
14-gauge wire) to the ground terminal of the one
that is connected to the protector ground.
4.08
Never use branch electrical conduit
(FJ as the ground point for the power
supply local ground (B). Branch
conduit is totally unacceptable as a
KTS ground because good electrical
continuityusuallycannotbeguaranteed,
the actual connection between the
conduit and earth ground can be
difficult to identify, and branch conduit
runs usually involve unknown distances
to ground.
• A metallic cold water pipe is acceptable
only if it is known to meet the requirements
of 1.03(c).
• Plastic pipe is always unacceptable.
Furthermore, even if the interior cold water
pipe is metallic, it is possible that the buried
service pipe is plastic.
• Insulating joints or sections are often installed
in private water systems to reduce noise
and vibration from pumps. They make
metallic pipe useless for grounding unless
they are bonded across to buried metallic
pipe, or unless the pipe is bonded to another
acceptable ground.
• In cases where more than one acceptable
ground is available, route the protector
4.09
KTS Power Supply Frame Ground: The
case or framework of the power supply is
normally grounded through the ac green wire circuit
(G in Fig. 3). The green wire connects to the
power service ground by way of the power supply
cord, the ground prong of the power cord plug,
and the mating connector of a 3-conductor power
outlet. If only a 2-conductor power outlet is
available and the outlet box is known to be grounded,
a Hubbell BL12433 adapter (or equivalent) may be
Page 7
SECTION 518-010-105
HOW TO SELECT A GOOD GROUND FOR KTS PROTECTOR
~~~~S~~
)-~N~O_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _,
POWER
SERVICE
).-':::...-----.....::;;01-1
J
NO
'-....:G::.R:.:O.:,U::.ND:..:E:.:D...J
1
ADV I SE CUSTOMER
TO HAVE POWER
I
If-------..
GROUNDED
1
m
CONT I NUOUS MET ALLI C COLD
WATER PI PE BUR I ED I N EARTH
fOR AT LEAST 10 fEET
OR
GROUNDED BUILDING STEEL
OR
20 fEET Of COPPER WIRE
ENCASED IN BUILDING fOOTING
NO
r\
YES
POWER
SERV I CE
,-~M~G~N~_-1
YES /
NO
POWER SERV I CE
GROUNDED TO
COLD WATER PI PE
OR
~'-_T~O_BU~I~L_D_ITNG_G_R_OU_N_D_->
fO
CONTINUOUS METALLIC COLD
WATER PIPE BURIED IN EARTH
fOR AT LEAST 10 fEET
OR
GROUNDED BUILDING STEEL
OR
20 fEET Of COPPER II I RE
ENCASED IN BUI LDING fOOTING
BOND POWER SERV I CE
GROUND ROD TO
COLD WATER PIPE
OR
TO BUI LDI NG GROUND
1
CONNECT PROTECTOR
GROUND TO POWER
SERV I CE GROUND
SYSTEM (GROUND
WIRE, ENTRANCE
CONDUIT, ROD)
OR
COLD WATER PI PE
OR
BUILDING GROUND,
WHICHEVER RESULTS
I N SHORTEST
GROUND WIRE.
YES
CONNECT PROTECTOR
GROUND TO ANY
PART Of POWER
SERV I CE GROUND
SYSTEM (GROUND
WI RE, ENTRANCE
CONDU IT, ROD)
OR
COLD WATER PIPE
WH I CH I S BONDED
TO POWER GROUND.
CONNECT PROTECTOR
GROUND TO TELCO
GROUND ROD. BOND
TELCO GROUND ROD
TO POWER SERV I CE
GROUND ROD. BOND
COLD WATER PIPE
TO GROUND RODS.
CONNECT PROTECTOR
GROUND TO COLD
WATER PI PE OR
BU I LD I NG GROUND.
BOND COLD WATER
PIPE TO BUILDING
GROUND.
SEE fiG. 10.
SEE fiG. 9.
SEE fiG. 8.
SEE fiG. 5, 6, &. 7.
Fig. 4-Protector Ground Selection
Page 8
CONNECT PROTECTOR
GROUND TO
TELCO GROUND
ROD. BOND COLD
WATER PI PE
TO GROUND ROD.
SEE fiG. II.
ISS 2, SECTION 518·010.105
FROM
PROTECTOR
FROM
PROTECTOR
l-
..~
VERTICAL
STEEL
.~
RISER
CONNECT
PROTECTOR
*~O~~~R~~~E
I
Ll
C
~
~I
ACCEPTABLE
COLD WATER
PIPE ----1i--I+--=~~d\_&=~~?
b=-
POWER
GROUND
BUILDING
STEEL
0
GROUND POINT
A, B,C, 0, OR E
E
SERVICE
ENTRANCE
EQUIPMENT
POWER
GROUND
WIRE---""
WIRE - - - - . , - EARTH
STEEL
PILING
Fig. S-Acceptable Water System or Building
Ground-Power Service Grounded to Cold
Water Pipe or Building Steel
Fig. 7-Acceptable Water System-MGN Power Service
Grounded to Ground Rod
FROM
PROTECTOR
~
-II
BUILDING
STEEL
FROM
PROTr
CONN:CT
PROTECTOR
I!
==~t-~
*~O~~~R~~~E
--"~
GRO~T
A
SERVICE
ENTRANCE
EQUIPMENT
TO POWER
~~~~~C1E
TOR
CONNECT
PROTECTOR
TO SERVICE
ENTRANCE BOX
0
A
*~O~~~R~~~E
---
A,B,C,OR 0
-
B
C
-~
POWER
GROUND
POWER SERVICE
GROUND WIRE--o.II~~....i
WIRE----""\L.._JcI
EARTH
PROVIDE NO.6
GROUND WIRE
BOND IF NOT
ALREADY
BONDED
"
====:::==========~
POWER
GROUND ROD
BUILDING
FOOTING
ACCEPTABLE
COLD WATER
PIPE
PROVIDE NO.6 GROUND WIRE BOND
IF BUILDING STEEL IS USED
Fig. 6-Acceptable Water System or Building
Ground-Power Service Grounded to Building
Ground
PROVIDE NO.6 GROUND WIRE
BOND IF NOT ALREADY
BONDED. REQUIRED EVEN
THOUGH WATER SYSTEM IS
CONSIDERED UNACCEPTABLE.
Fig. 8--Acceptable Water System or Building Ground
Not Available-MGN Power Service Grounded
to Ground Rod
used to match the 3-prong plug to the outlet.
When the available power outlet box is not grounded,
the framework ground of the power supply must
Page 9
SECTION 518.010·105
FROM
PROTECTOR
FRDM
PRDTECTDR
GRDUND WIRE
FRDM NDNMGN
PDWER
SERVICE
UNACCEPTABLE METALLIC
CDLD WATER PI PE
~1=====\~1lF,=
I
BDND CLDSER
I
I
RDD TO. PIPE
WITH N O . 6 :I
JE_~_=)~==G=R=DU=N~D=W='R=E=~==='_=_~
POWER Co..
GRDUND ROD
No..6 GROUND WIRE BDND
J
BUILDING
FDDTING
(NO GROUND
WIRE)
TELEPHONE Co.
GRDUND ROD
Fig. ll-Acceptable Water System or Building Ground
Not Available-Power Service Not Grounded
Fig. 9-Acceptable Water System or Building Graund
Not Available-Non-MGN Power Service
Grounded to Ground Rod
FRDM
PROTECTDR
+
RISER
CDNNECT
PRDTECTDR
*~D~~2R~~TE
B
GRDUND POINT
A ORB
A
ACCEPTABLE
CDLD WATER
PIPE
f
VERTICAL
STEEL
~
---"i--t+--+,===d.===:~~
L_
LC
LL~-
~=-
LL
EARTH
Fig. 10-Acceptable Water System or Building
Ground-Power Service Not Grounded
be directly connected to the nearest acceptable
system ground point through a 14-gauge, or larger,
wire.
Caution: Never modify the power supply
plug by cutting off the ground prong to
adapt it for use with a 2-conductor outlet.
Page 10
4.10
Power Service Ground: The power service
ground wire (D in Fig. 3) is connected
directly to a power system ground rod. The
power service and the KTS should always share a
common ground source; this can be accomplished
by bonding the two grounds together with No. 6
wire (C). If the power company has not already
bonded their power ground rod to the ground
selected for the KTS, the telephone company must
do so as part of the KTS installation.
5.
OPERATION OF A GOOD PROTECTION SYSTEM
(Fig. 12)
The operation of a properly protected KTS
can be described by considering what happens
when a high-voltage transient enters a telephone
line as a result of a lightning stroke.
5.01
Fig. 12 shows a typical lightning surge entry
into a telephone line associated with a
properly protected KTS. The red arrows show
the directions in which current can flow from the
entry point to earth ground. The path toward
the CO is usually high impedance due to the cable
length involved, and only a relatively small current
flows in that direction. High-current levels do
flow, however, toward the telephone station since
the impedance is significantly lower. The current
flows through the drop wire and across the carbon
block air gaps (as described in 3.02) to the water
pipe. The current flow continues through the pipe
system until the energy is finally dissipated into
the earth.
5.02
5.03
Meter M1 (a symbolic way of showing the
magnitude of the voltage difference between
ISS 2, SECTION 518-010-105
points) indicates that the voltage difference between
th e KTS protector ground and th e power se rvice
ground is minimal; they are connected to the same
water pipe. Therefore , since the KTS power supply
ground is co nnected to the protector ground, the
voltage between the power supply and the commercial
power service is small, and the possibility of internal
arcing betwee n circuits is eliminated.
Meters M2 and M3 indicate that a s mall
voltage difference, equal to the firin g voltage
of the carbon blocks, does develop be tween the
telephone line and both the KTS power s upply
and the commercial power service. However, its
maximum peak is not high enough to cause arcing
from one circuit to another.
5.04
6.
KTS INSTALLATIONS EXPOSED TO SURGE DAMAGE
DUE TO IMPROPER GROUND CONNECTIONS
P,otedo, G,ounded to G,ound Rod (Fig. 13)
Fig. 13 illustrates an installation similar to
th e one s hown in Fig. 12, except a ground
6.01
rod rather th an a water pipe was provided as the
protec tor gro und . The difference betwee n these
two in stallati ons mi g ht seem trivial at a glan ce .
but a more detailed evaluation of the possible effects
will demon strate that a vas t difference in protection
capability ca n actually ex ist.
As was t he case in Fig. 12, th e protec tor
blocks will ope rate and surge cu rrents will
fl ow toward earth g round by way of the protector
g round. However, beca use t he current mu ·t fl ow
throu g h th e ground wir e and g r o und r od. a
high-voltage difference (possibl y seve ral kilovolts)
can develop betwee n the protector g round termi nal
and the water pipe sys tem (mete r MI). Since the
line side of th e protec tor is at app roximately the
sam e potentia l as the g round side while the carbon
blocks are conducti ng, the telep hone line potential
(M2) above the power supply local g round (whic h
is connec ted to th e wate r pipe g ro und ) will be
almost th e sa me as that indica ted by MI. Meter
M3 shows that the same pote ntial difference also
exists between the telephone line and the comme rcial
power leads .
6.02
GOOD PROTECTION AND GROUNDING
T. R
4 00
LINE
I
CKT
':~
I
I
I
D
PR OT ECTOR
o
D
POWER
SER VIC E
ENTR AN CE
..
CONDUI T
'
EARTH
'.......
'"
LO - -- --- -- ~
V--
POWE R
GRO
-- -
. . EI/~~:i::::::E=j ··· ~=====~=C!~==============CIt====
,/'
CO LO WAT ER PIP E
or ACC EPT AB L E
WA TER SYSTE M
L EGENO '
'WI.I'V"+ ARCING CUR RENT
- - ) COPPER CURR EN T
Fig. 12-AII G,ound, Bonded to Cold Woter Pipe
Pose 11
SECTION 518-010-105
The red arrows show how current can flow
toward the water pipe ground if sufficient
potential is present to arc from the telephone line
to another circuit path. For example, an arc can
develop between the telephone leads and the power
supply leads on a 400D KTU printed wiring board
at about 2 kilovolts. Therefore, in the case
illustrated by Fig. 13, KTU component damage is
most likely to occur as a result of surge current
flow from the telephone line to the power supply
ground (cold water pipe) through KTU components.
6.03
A surge current that enters a poorly grounded
circuit will seek a better ground path
associated with adjacent circuitry if circuit paths
are close enough together to permit an arc to
develop. Therefore, it is extremely important that
all system grounds be provided from the same
ground source to minimize interaction between
system grounds and reduce damaging potential
differences.
6.04
Fig. 13 also illustrates that an arc path can
develop between the telephone set and nearby
electrical outlets or other grounded systems, resulting
in damage to the set. Another vulnerable area in
this arrangement is the telephone mounting cord
connector, where arcing can occur from the T and
R leads across to the A lead and back to the water
pipe ground through the KTU and the power supply,
resulting in KTU damage.
6.05
The water pipe ground that is shown connected to
the power supply is a better ground (lower resistance)
than the ground rod; therefore, some of the surge
current in the telephone line will attempt to arc
across local circuitry in order to discharge energy
into the better ground.
A ground rod is used to ground all system
points in the installation shown in Fig. 16.
This diagram illustrates how a ground, which is
not the best available, can offer system protection
as long as all grounds are connected to this point.
Note, however, that high-voltage levels can develop
between this system and the local water system
(meter Ml) or with respect to local building steel.
Arcing could occur from some part of this installation
to a nearby water pipe.
6.08
Commercial Power Line Surges: Commercial
power line surges can also cause KTU,
lamp, .and power supply damage. Some system
damage can result when these high-level transient
voltages are coupled through the KTS power supply
by transformer action. However, equipment damage
occurs more frequently as a result of the neutral
wire being connected to a different ground than
the KTS. The arc paths that develop are usually
between the power wiring and the telephone line
or between the primary and secondary windings
of the power transformer.
6.09
7.
Protector and Power Supply Grounded to
Ground Rod (Fig. 14): The grounding
arrangement shown in Fig. 14 eliminates any
possibility of arcing between the telephone line
and the KTS because both the protector and the
power supply are grounded to the same point.
Meter M1 indicates that a peak voltage equal only
to the carbon firing point exists between the
telephone line and the KTS equipment. However,
a large potential can exist between the KTS and
the commercial power system because the latter is
connected to a different ground (M2 and M3).
6.06
Other Combinations of KTS Grounds (Fig. 15 and
16)
Possible circuit arc paths can develop when
more than a single type of ground is provided
for the KTS. For example, Fig. 15 illustrates
another grounding arrangement that exposes the
KTS equipment to possible damage from line surges.
6.07
Page 12
SUMMARY OF REQUIREMENTS FOR ADEQUATE
KTS PROTECTION AND GROUNDING
The following procedures summarize the
basic minimum requirements for achieving
adequate KTS protection and grounding:
7.01
• Connect incoming telephone lines to protectors
if they are exposed to damage from
high-voltage transients.
• Select best available system ground for
protector ground connection (use flow chart
in Fig. 4).
• Connect KTS power supply circuit ground
to protector ground terminal.
• Route ground wire over shortest possible
path.
• Bond power service ground to KTS ground
source if they are not the same.
ISS 2, SECTION S18-010-105
PoeR PROTECTION AND GROUNDING
T.R
~)-':~
---+
?~
~~
r - - -. OO
LI NE
CKT
':.
::.'
..
:
...
\
?"
"'3
'@,
I
I
,
o
I
/
./
I
,
I
c
I
I
EARTH
POWER
SERVICE
ENTR AN CE
CONOUIT
POWER
GRO
.r'
lEGENO '
WV\M> ARCIN G CURRENT
--;)i>
COPPER CURRENT
Fig. 13-Protector Ground Bonded to Ground Rod and KTS Power Supply and AC Power Ground s Bonded to
Cold Water Pipe
e Be su re that KTS power supply frame ground
is connected to commercial power service
ground.
7.02
Certain procedures must be avoided when
protecting a KTS installation:
e Do not use branch ci rcuit conduit for g round .
e Do not splice ground wire more than once.
e Do not connect power upply circuit g round
and frame ground together.
• Do not cut off the ground prong on the
power supply plug.
• Do not use sprink ler sy tern, gas, or hot
water pipes for ground.
Page 13
SECTION 518-010-105
POOR PROTECTION AND GROU NDING
T,R
\
,,
1
400
I...I NE
I
CKT
,
,
I
/
I
I
I
1.11
("- "'Y::::)
tU)\.. - . .,
,
1
\
M2
'@',
1
/
PROTEC T OR
I
, L
c
POWER
SERVICE
ENTRANCE
CONOU IT
"" "" "" ""
LEGE N C:
~
ARCI NG CURRENT
~
COPPER CURRENT
Fig, 14-Protector ond KTS Power Supply Grounds Bonded to Ground Rod and AC Power Ground Banded to
Cold Water Pipe
Page 14
ISS 2, SECTION 518-010-105
POOR PROTECTION AND GROUNDING
r-\
T, R
~:f
1
"--
LINE
1 - -- - - - - '
j
;:.
"~:
.':
1:'
~
':~
400
CKT
1
__ T,R _ _
D
o
D
POWER
SERV ICE
ENTRANCE
CO NDU IT
-'-- -"-@----p==-::==+---,
POWER
GRO
LEG E N 0 :
~
~
AR CIN G CU RRENT
CO PPER CURRENT
Fig. 15--Protector ond AC Power Grounds Bonded to Ground Rod ond KTS Power Supply Ground Bonded to
Cold Woter Pipe
Page 15
SECTION 518-010- 105
MARG IN AL PROTECTIO N AND GROU NDING
T. R
\
\
,
40 0
~.~~:
I
LINE
CK T
I
I
I
"
,,
:~;
1
1
L-
I
."
::~
\
\
..
'.
'~
_ CT~,_R_ _ _~~_ l
o
~
M3
''@r,,
,
'"~
/
/"
o
I
"
,---'-"-_.
I
,
I
I
I
LEGEND :
~
~
ARC IN G CURRENT
COPPER CURR ENT
Fig. 16--AII Grounds Bonded to Ground Rod
Page 16
16 Pages
POWER
SE R VIC E
ENTRANCE
CO NDU IT
SECTION 518-010-106
Issue 3, December 1978
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT& TCo Standard
POWER UNIT SELECTION
KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS
AND
KEY SERVICE UNITS
1.
fasteners, and supplemental apparatus cabinets or
relay racks.
GENERAL
This section provides the methods of selecting
power units having an adequate output
suitable to the type and size of a centralized key
telephone system.
1.01
1.02
This section is reissued to:
• Add 20C3, 79B2, and 90BI power units
(Table C)
• Add 400G, 400H, 407C, 424B, 424C, 454A,
456B, 460B, 468A, 469A, 471B, 473A, 474A,
476A, 478B, 479B, 48IA, 494A, and 498A
KTUs (Table A)
• Delete Table A (Quick Selection Guide for
Power Units)
• Delete Table B (Equivalent Units for IA
and IAI KTUs)
• Delete Table C (Equivalent Units for IA2
KTUs)
Although the output capacity of the
recommended power supply may be less than
that of the calculated connected load, the guide
lines provided herein will ensure adequate power
with very few exceptions. For those installations
where all features provided would be in use at
the same instant, consult your supervisor for
power recommendations.
1.04
2.
POWER UNITS FOR COMBINATIONS OF lA, lAl,
1A2, AND 6A KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS
A power unit for a large installation of
random-mounted key telephone system
equipment is selected by the following method:
2.01
(1) Determine the number and type of KTUs
required.
(2) Find the current drain for each KTU from
Table A (IA2 KTUs) or Table B (IA and
IAI KTUs).
(3) Add the current drain for all KTUs used.
(The total will be in milliamperes.)
• Revise Part 2 and delete Part 3
• Change Table F to Table A
(4) Convert milliamperes to amperes (1000
milliamperes equal 1 ampere).
• Change Table E to Table B
(5) Refer to Table C to determine the type of
power supply required for the installation.
• Change Table D to Table C.
Since this reissue is a general revision, no revision
arrows have been used to denote changes.
Centralized key telephone systems generally
consist of mounting facilities, KTUs, power
supplies, cabling, distribution terminals, adapters,
1.03
Note: When choosing a power supply,
consideration should be given to the lamp
load. Exceeding the lamp power limitation
of the power unit may result in reduced current
available for other voltages.
NOTICE
Not for use or disclosure outside the
Bell System except under written agreement
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
SECTION 518-010- 106
TABLE A
lA2 KTU CURRENT DRAINS AT 20 VOLTS
KTU
KTU
DC DRAIN
INMA
KTU
DC DRAIN
INMA
400D
53
423A
120
456A/B
400G
58
424AjBjC
325
457A
600
400H
60
425B
160
460A/B
190
401A
107
426A
160
461A
122
402A
0
427B
160
467A
31
404A
0
427C
160
468A
85
235
428A
40
469A
0
412A
54
429B
12
471B
40
413A
0
430A
44
473A
90
414A
122
440A
320
474A
7
415A
132
444A
97
476A
90
416A
141
448A
90
478B
110
417A
74
449A
90
479B
70
418A
113
451A/B
0
481A
130
419A
135
452A
93
494A
150
420A
120
453B
0
498A
105
421A
34
454A
150
422B
155
455A
0
407BjC
Page 2
DC DRAIN
INMA
0
ISS 3, SECTION 518-010-106
TABLE B
lA AND lAl KTU CURRENT DRAINS AT 20 VOLTS
KTU
DC DRAIN
INMA
KTU
DC DRAIN
INMA
KTU
DC DRAIN
INMA
1A
0
26B
71
222A
1447
1C
0
29B
40
223A
720
2A
117
30A
44
224B
69
3A
21
31A
110
225A
151
5A
0
33A
200
226B
44
6B
0
34A
0
227B
88
6C
0
56A
300
228A
0
7A
49
201C
0
229B
44
lOA
32
202B
44
230B
470
11A
0
202C
124.5
232B
300
12B
0
2020
124.5
232C
300
13C
112
202E
1222
234A
960
14A
0
203A
160
235B
200
150
0
204A
300
236B
135
16A
0
205A
164
237B
81
17C
32
207C
715
238A
1170
180
94
208A
60
239A
1287
18E
94
210A
132
240B
140
19E
188
211A
100
247B
140
20A
0
213B
68
251A
0
0
214B
227
252A
0
0
215B
157
253B
175
259B
0
22-Type
23A
24A
0
216A
44
25B
94
217B
24
Page 3
SECTION 518-010-106
TABLE C
POWER UNITS FOR CENTRALIZED KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS
OUTPUT AND MOUNTING INFORMATION
AMPERES
UNIT
MAX.
TOTAL
DC
10V
AC
18V
AC
SIG
RING
FREO.
MOUNTING
20V
DC
TALK
20V
DC
SIG
lOlG J86731A, L1 (MD)
0.9
0.6
1.5
2.8
1.4
-
lOIG J86731A, L2 (MD)
0.9
0.6
1.5
2.8
1.4
20
Wall, Floor
lOIG J86731A, L4 (MD)
0.9
0.6
1.5
2.8
1.4
20
Wall, Floor
lOlG J86731A, L5
-
-
-
-
-
20
Wall
lOlG J86731A, L6 (MD)
0.9
0.6
1.5
2.8
1.4
-
Wall
lOlG J86731A (Modified
with J86248, L3)
0.6
1.5
1.5
1.4
1.4
20
lOlG J86731B-2, L1 (MD)
-
-
-
17
-
-
lOlG J86731C-2, L1
-
-
-
-
20
lOIG J86731C-2, L2
-
-
-
-
-
lOIG J86731D-3, L1
0.9
0.6
1.5
2.8
1.4
-
Rack, Cabinet
101J J86471B, L1 (MD)
4.0
4.0
4.0
5.0
1.6
-
Wallar Rack
19A-2
0.6
1.9
1.9
5.5
-
-
Rack
19B-2
0.6
1.5
1.5
4.5
1.4
19C-2
0.6
1.5
1.5
4.5
1.4
-
Rack
19C-3*
0.6
1.9
1.9
5.5
-
-
Cabinet
20A-2
0.6
1.5
1.5
4.5
1.4
30
20B-2
0.6
1.5
1.5
4.5
1.4
30
Wall
20C-2
0.6
1.5
1.5
4.5
1.4
30
Rack
20C-3
0.6
1.9
1.9
4.5
1.4
30
Rack
29B-1,:
1.0
4.0
4.0
12.0
1.6
-
Wall
29C-l
1.0
4.0
4.0
12.0
1.6
-
Rack
30B-1
1.0
4.0
4.0
12.0
1.6
30
Wall
30C-1
1.0
4.0
4.0
12.0
1.6
30
Rack
LAMP
(Hz)
Wall
Wall, Floor
Wall
Rack, Cabinet
20
Wall
Wall
34B-1
-
-
-
25t
-
-
Wall
34C-1
-
-
-
25t
-
-
Rack
67B-1§
-
-
-
12
-
-
Wall
67C-1§
-
-
-
12
-
-
Rack
79B-2
0.6
1.9
1.9
4.5
-
30
Wall
12.0
-
30
Wall
90B-1
1.0
4.0
4.0
* 19C-3 is a 19A-2 assembled in a P-15G705 cabinet.
t 35 amperes if load is intermittent, ie, approximately 5% of any 6·hour period.
::: Kit of parts D-180277 converts 29B1 to 30B1.
.
§ The 67B-l and 67C-1 also provide 10V AC at 0.3 amperes for interrupter motor power.
Page 4
4 Pages
Wall
SECTION 518-010-107
Issue 1, June 1972
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT&TCo Standard
KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS
RESERVE POWER
47C POWER UNIT
1.
GENERAL
• -24V dc for talking (A Bat.)
The 47C power unit (Fig. 1) provides
emergency power to maintain talk and signal
voltages, lamp voltages, and ringing voltage in key
telephone systems during commercial power failures.
1.01
1.02
This issue of the section is based on the
following drawings:
• -10V dc for lamps
When a ringing supply is required for emergency
service, the optional 116A frequency generator is
mounted in the power unit to provide 25 Hz ringing
voltage.
The power unit is approximately 10-1/2 inches
wide by 6-7/8 inches high (including mounting
bracket) by 7-3/16 inches deep. It is designed to
be rack mounted using frame mounting bars. It
can also be mounted in the 502, 513, or 515 key
service units in the regular power supply location
when an external power supply is provided.
2.03
CD-81964-01, Issue 2A
SD-81964-01, Issue 5A
If this section is to be used with equipment or
apparatus reflecting later issues of the drawings,
reference should be made to the CD and SD to
determine the extent of the changes and the
manner in which the section may be affected.
The power supply will provide from 4 to 8
hours of reserve power for up to 13 1A2
line circuits or equivalent lA, 1A1, and 1A2 power
loads. The exact reserve time is dependent on line
usage and lamp multipling for each installation.
The front panel (Fig. 2) of the power unit,
mounting the input and output screw terminals
and fuses, is removable.
2.04
1.03
2.05
The power unit consists of three main parts:
• Control circuit (GIrl circuit pack)
• Battery (KS-20390, L1)
2.
IDENTIFICATION
The 47C power unit provides emergency
power from a KS-20390, List 1 nickel
cadmium battery which is automatically activated
during commercial power failures and disconnected
when commercial power has been restored. The
power unit is normally in a standby state with
the battery on trickle charge. The power unit also
provides mounting space for an optional 116A
frequency generator capable of operating up to six
high impedance ringers.
• Optional ringing generator (116A frequency
generator).
2.01
2.02
The 47C power unit interconnects between
the standard ac power unit and the key
telephone equipment it serves. It provides the
following outputs:
• -24V dc for signaling (B Bat.)
2.06
Control Circuit (G£o1 Circuit Pack): A
plug-in type circuit pack used to:
• Automatically connect emergency ac and dc
supply to key telephone equipment when
commercial power fails, and to disconnect
the emergency power supply when commercial
power is restored.
• Disconnect discharged battery from key
equipment to protect both battery and key
equipment from damage.
Caution: Do not attempt to adjust
potentiometer R6.
© American Telephone and Telegraph Company, 1972
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
SECTION 518-010-107
Fig. 1--47C Power Unit
• Connect the battery for trickle charge (from
the normal use power unit) when the unit
is on standby.
Note: The batteries will normally be fully
recharged in approximately 24 hours.
2.08
Ringing Generator (116A Frequency
Generator): Furnished on an optional basis
since a local ringing supply is required only with
common audible ringing to standard ringers. The
frequency generator has the capability to operate
six high impedance ringers simultaneously.
ORDERING GUIDE
2.07
Battery (KS-20390, List 1): Consists of a
24-volt (dc reserve) and a 10-volt dc (lamp
reserve) battery in a single case. The battery is
mounted in the battery compartment and connected
to the power unit with a connector ended cable
(Fig. 2). The battery will provide approximately
three years of service at ambient temperatures
ranging from 32· to l40·F. A label is provided on
the battery for recording the installation date.
Poge 2
• Unit, Power, 47C
• Battery, KS-20390, Ll
• Interrupter, KS-19384 or KS-19385 (See 3.02)
Replaceable Component
• Assembly, Pack, Circuit, GIrl
ISS 1, SECTION 518-010-107
MOUNTING LUGS FOR
BATTERY
CO NNECTION
PLUG
Fig. 2--47C Power Unit (Front Cover Removed)
OptionBlCOmponen~
3.
INSTALLATION
Planning
• Buzzer, KS·8lO9 , L2 (See 3.01)
3.01
• Generator, Frequency, U6A.
KS-S109, L2 buzzers (24V dc) may be used
for common audibl e signaling. This would
Page 3
SECTION 518-010-107
eliminate the need for the U6A frequency generator.
However, in view of the buzzers high current
drain, their use should be considered only where
the number of buzzers is small and ringing is
a small portion of overall calling.
3.06
To install battery and frequency generator,
proceed as follows:
(1) Remove front cover from power unit (Fig.
2).
3.02
The interrupter normally used in key telephone
system installations operates on 10V ac. It
is necessary to replace the .ac interrupter with
a 24V dc interrupter (KS-193M or KS-19385).
(2) Record installation date on label provided
on battery.
3.03
The KS-20390, L1 battery is shipped in a
discharged stage. It must be charged for
16 hours to attain a fully charged state before
being placed in service. To charge battery, proceed
as follows:
(1) Remove front cover from 47C power unit
(Fig. 2).
(2) Place battery in power unit battery compartment
and connect battery connector to mating
battery connection plug.
Note: Installation date must be recorded so
follow-up replacement can be made. The
battery should be changed after three years
service.
(3) Place fully charged battery (see 3.03) in
battery compartment and connect battery
connector to mating battery connection plug.
(3) Replace front cover.
(4) Slide frequency generator (if used) in place
on mounting lugs.
(4) Connect a 19- or 20-type power unit to the
power unit as shown in Fig. 3 for a minimum
of 16 hours.
(5) Insert frequency generator leads through
hole in front panel.
Note: Since reserve power is not available
until battery is charged, the battery should
be charged at the installation work center
prior to installation at the customer's premises.
3.04
The output of a 47C power unit and 116A
frequency generator are not designed to be
paralleled. In large key telephone installations it
will be necessary to dedicate the power unit and
frequency generator to specific equipment.
(6) Replace front cover on power unit
(7) Connect frequency generator leads to terminals
(Fig. 3) on front panel as follows:
TERM
1
2
3
4
Installing
LEAD
Red
Red-White
Blue
Blue-White
Refer to Section 167-400-200forgeneral
requirements necessary for the proper
installation of the power unit.
For ease of installation, the battery and
optional frequency generator should be
installed in the power unit before it is mounted.
3.07
Mount the power unit at the desired location.
Mounting hardware must be furnished locally.
3.08
Ensure that power unit is properly fused.
See Table A and Fig. 1 for fusing.
3.05
Page 4
ISS 1, SECTION 518-010-107
TABLE A
24V DC SIGNAL
24VDCTALK
10VACLAMP
10V AC LAMP
FREQGEN
2-ampere, No. 24C fuse
2-ampere, No. 24C fuse
2-ampere, No. 24C fuse
2-ampere, No. 24C fuse
3/4-ampere, No. 24D fuse
Check the installation by removing the ac
power to the KTS power supply. Make a
test call to a station in the KTS. The KTS should
operate in a normal manner on receiving the call.
If it does not, the battery is defective, or not
charged, or the power unit is defective. Use a
KS-14510 volt-ohm-milliammeter or equivalent to
check the battery as follows:
4.03
MEASURE BETWEEN
In the associated key telephone equipment,
replace the 10-volt ac interrupter with a
24-volt dc KS-19384 or KS-19385 interrupter.
SIG (-) and GRD (+)
10V and GRD (+)
3.09
4.
CONNECTIONS
If either of the preceding readings is not obtained,
the battery should be recharged and if defective
replaced.
5.
4.01
READINGS
>20.0 Volts
> 9.0 Volts
MAINTENANCE
Connect power unit as shown in Fig. 3.
Keep the 47-type power unit clean and free
of all foreign matter to ensure proper
operation of the unit.
5.01
After connecting the power unit, it should
be operated in the system for a minimum
of 10 minutes on commercial ac power before it is
tested.
4.02
5.02
Periodicaly check the operation of the power
unit in accordance with 4.03.
Page 5
SECTION 518-010-107
P/0 FRONT PANEL OF
47C POWER UNIT
10V
IOV GRD
B BAT
~10V
10V
10V GRD
TO KEY
TELEPHONE
EQU I PMENT
o
B GRD
~
RG
----------------------~--~------------_C~
GRD
RING PWR-:-\
±
A BAT.
01-----1,,...::.:....:..
'-,,,.,--A GRD
TO 6A AND
IA2 KTS INTERCOM (NOTE 2)
TO lA, IAI OR 1.4.2
KTS LI NE CK T (NOTE 2)
PA IR
B GRD
RG
B BAT.
TO KTS
POWER
SUPPL Y
(NOTE 3)
J
TO KTS
FREOUENC'1'
GENERATOR
t I OV AC
10V GRD
A GRD
A BAT.
±IOV AC
TALK
10V GRD
18V GRD
± 18V AC
± IBV
AC
NOTES:
'------------------I. WHEN THE 10-VOLT AC LOAD EXCEEDS 1.4 AMP. THE LOAD SHOULD BE SPLIT AND CONNECTED
TO BOTH PAIRS OF 10V TERMINALS.
2. THE ST TERMINAL SHOULD BE CONNECTED TO THE BYI LEAD OF THE 6A AND IA2 KEY TELEPHONE
SYSTEMS. ANO THE ST LEAD OF EITHER IA. IAI. OR IA2 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM LINE CIRCUIT.
3. AN ADDITIONAL 2-AMPERE FUSE SHOULD BE PLACED IN PARALLEL WITH THE EXISTING 2-AMPERE
SIGNAL FUSE IN THE KTS POWER SUPPLY. THESE FUSES SHOULD BE ARRANGED SO THE INSULATED
SIDES FACE EACH OTHER.
4. LEADS FROM INTERNAL liSA FREQUENCY GENERATOR.
Fig. 3-Connections for 47C Power Unit
Page 6
6 Pages
~gC:~P~~~~~D
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT & TCo Standard
SECTION 518-010-108
Issue 3, October 1976
COMMON AUDIBLE SIGNALING
KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS
1.
GENERAL
This section provides a general descri ption
of common audible signaling arrangements,
especially those using diode matrix or signal control
relays, and describes the need and use of the 141A
protector.
1.01
diode CR1. Diode CR1 allows the positive components
of the ac signal to operate the common audible
signal. Diode CR2 isolates line circuit 2 from this
signal. A call on line 2 will result in relay R in
line circuit 2 operating and applying the ac signal
via CR2.
If the station audible signal (Fig. 1) will be
rung only from lines 1 and 2, and if these
lines will not ring any other station, the diodes
and diode matrix are not required.
2.02
1.02
This section is reissued to provide information
on the 141A protector.
1.03
Common audible signaling provides for:
2.03
• Signaling one station from more than one
CO, Centrex, PBX, or intercom line.
• Signaling more than one station from one
CO, Centrex, PBX, or intercom line.
• Signaling combinations of the above
arrangements. With these combinations, a
diode matrix or signal control relay is
required.
.Common audible signaling arrangements,
which utilize a local frequency generator
(110 volts, 30 Hz) for operating ringers, can be
subjected to voltage spikes of sufficient amplitude
to damage KTUs and/or blow fuses. Depending
on the phase of the current through the ringer
when the current is interrupted, voltage spikes of
either polarity can appear on the RC lead.
Common Ringing Lead: Fig. 2 is a
simplified schematic of one line operating
two station audible signals. A call on line 1
operates relay R, causing contact R to make. The
ac signal is applied through diodes CR1 and CR2.
The positive components of the ac signal operates
both station audible signals.
If no other line will ring station A or B
(Fig. 2), the diodes and matrix are not
required. Ringers in the stations can be rung
directly from tip and ring of the line.
2.04
1.04
To protect against these ringer transients,
a 141A protector is connected between the
B1 and R1 terminals in the station cable to each
ringer .•
1.05
Fig. 3 is a simplified schematic of a 2-line,
3-station common audible signaling arrangement.
A call on line 1 results in a signal at stations A
and B, but not C since diode CR3 blocks the path.
A call on line 2 results in a signal at stations B
and C, but not A due to diode CR2. Station B is
common to lines 1 and 2. Stations A and Bare
common to line 1. Stations Band C are common
to line 2.
2.05
3.
COMMON AUDIBLE SIGNALING APPLICATIONS
An example of a diode matrix installation is
shown in Fig. 4. To the left is a schematic
representation of the 1A1 matrix block at the right.
Diodes (446-type or equivalent) are connected so
their arrows point towards the station audible
signals, permitting five signaling leads to control
six audible signals. The block could also be wired
3.01
2.
COMMON AUDIBLE SIGNALING CIRCUITS-OPERATION
Fig. 1 is a simplified schematic of one audible
signal operated from two lines. A call on
line 1 operates relay R in line circuit 1 causing
contact R to make. The ac signal is applied through
2.01
NOTICE
Not for use or disclosure outside the
Bell System except under written agreement
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
to permit six signaling leads to control five audible
signals by connecting the signaling. leads at the
left side (A-F) and the audible signals at the top
(1-5). For this configuration all diodes must be
connected so their arrows point toward the audible
signals.
All line circuits connected to a diode
matrix must be supplied from the
same ringing supply and interrupter
contact.
A strap is used to connect a signaling lead
to an audible signal if neither is common to
any other signaling lead or audible signal. An
example of this is the strap between signaling lead
5(CA) and audible ,signalF (Fig. 4).
tSignaling leads 1 and 5, corresponding to lines
1 and 5, are not common signaling leads since
they each control only one audible signal.
3.05
For a detailed description of the lAI matrix
blocks, see Section 461-620-100.
3.06
Section .518-215-403. provides functional
schematics of the 402A and 404A (diode
matrix) KTUs.
3.02
Diode control limits the type of audible signal
to either all .ringers. or all ac buzzers (do
not mix). To avoid diode failure, never use
dc buzzers. When ringers are used, the ringing
capacitor of each station should be disconnected
and bypassed and the red ringer lead should be
connected to the diode matrix.
3.03
A positive component results after an
ac signal has passed through a diode
in the. direction of the "arrow'~ This
positive component cannot pa$S through
a diode Ilgainst the arrow.
On
this principle a diode mlltrix
sepllrlltes.audible signllis and
signaling lellds.
ALL DIODES
AND RINGERS (IF USED) MUST
BE POLARIZED IN THE SAME
DIRECTION.
Common audible signaling can also be
accomplished with the use of signal control
relays in place of a diode matrix. The same
principles apply. Instead of diodes, relay contacts
connect the ringing leads to the proper ringers.
Section 518-310-40l provides various connections
using the 227B KTU as a common audible signaling
control.
3.07
4.
.141A PROTECTOR
The 141A protector (Fig. 5) consists of a
68,000 ohm, 1/2-watt resistor in. a blue
molded assembly. The dimensions of the' protector
are 6/lO-inch by 1/2-inch by 31l0-inch, and it is
designed to be installed on 66-type connecting blocks
having quick-connect terminals.
4.01
The 141A protector is inserted between the
B1 and Rl terminals in the station cut-down
field (Blue Field) without affecting the cut-down
multiple. See Fig. 1, 2, and 3.
4.02
The matrix in Fig. 4 is arranged So that:
3.04
CALL ON LINE
STATION(S} SIGNALED
For new KTS installations, every station
served by a local frequency generator should
be protected by 141A protectors. At existing
installations, protectors should be installed for each
station (served by a local frequency generator)
during routine servicing of the installation.•
4.03
It
2
3
4
B
A, B; and C
A, C, and D
A, C, and E
5t
F
Page 2
ISS 3, SECTION SIS-01 0-1 OS
LINE
co
I
l
,
PART OF
LINE CIRCUIT I
T
, ,,
...
'J
DIODE MATRIX
RC OR CA
RI=
CRI
R
STATION
AUDIBLE
SIGNAL
R*
RG(BI)
T~
~
141A PROTECTOR
GRD
AC
R OR RN
SIGNAL
SUPPLY
t
RG
l
TO GRD
T
LINE 2
CO
R*
RC OR CA
C R2
R
LINE CIRCUIT 2
*
RELAY DESIGNATION WI LL VARY DEPENDING ON THE TYPE OF LINE CIRCUIT USED.
Fig. l-tSimplified Schematic of Two Lines and One Audible Signal.
Page 3
SECTION
518-010~108
STATION B
AUDIBLE
SIGNAL
STATION A
AUDIBLE
SIGNAL
RG(BII
RI
RI
141A
PROTECTORS
II f--vvv'!~D-
T
LINE CIRCUIT
rvv
"
CR2
CRI
co [
*
PART OF DIODE MATRIX
ROR RN
AC
SIGNAL
SUPPLY
L
*
RELAY DESIGNATION
WILL VARY DEPENDING ON
THE TYPE OF LINE CIRCUIT USED
RG
TO GRD
Fig. 2-.Simplified Schematic of One Une and Two Audible Signals.
Page 4
~,GRD
f\.fL
.,
\ ' ••
LINE
R
~ 11
TO
RC OR CA
R
RG(BI
ISS 3, SECTION S18-010-108
STATION A
AUDIBLE
SIGNAL
II
STATION B
AUDIBLE
SIGNAL
RG (811
RI
AUDIBLE
SIGNAL
II
I
II
\i
STATION C
RG (811
RI
141A
PROTECTORS
I
RI
TO GRD
TO GRD
RG( 811
TO GRD
141A
PROTECTOR
T
-
co
LINE I
l
LINE CIRCUIT I
r-
~
t
CRI
RC OR CA
R*
CR2
CR3
CR4
PART OF DIODE MATRIX
AC
SIGNAL
SUPPLY
R OR RN
RG
rJRD
~
co 2
LINE
R*
RC OR CA
[
~
LINE CIRCUIT 2
*
RELAY DESIGNATION WILL VARY DEPENDING ON THE TYPE OF CIRCUIT USED.
Fig. 3-.Simplified Schematic of Two Lines and Three Audible Signalsf
Page 5
SECTION 518-010-108
SIGNALING LEADS
FROM LINE CIRCUITS
[~~~~~~~
;;;
1--
2 __
3 __
SIGNALING LEADS
FROM LINE CIRCUITS
2
RC
OR
CA
I
RC
OR
CA
3
4
5
RC
OR
CA
RC
OR
CA
RC
OR
CA
CR 2
CR3
CR7
CRe
CRI
B
rBRI
CR4
CR5
mRI
CR6
~RI
STATION
CR9
AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
t-8
RI
CRIO
~RI
STRAP ...........
r--B
=-
BI
RI
'----J
TO STATIONS
A,B,C,D,E, AND F
Fig. 4-1 A 1 Matrix Block Application
Page 6
ISS 3, SECTION 518-010-108
COVER
BODY
Fig. 5-.141A Protector.
Page 7
7 Pages
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT & TCo Standard
SECTION 518-010-109
Issue 1, August 1976
VOICE STATION SIGNALING
ON MANUAL INTERCOMS
1.
GENERAL
• Clamp, 2A
This section furnishes the identification,
installation, and maintenance information
for voice signaling on manual intercom circuits using
a 107B loudspeaker set and a 6-button telephone
set. A general purpose adapter (similar to the
66E8 connecting block) is being developed to allow
this feature to be used with CALL DIRECTOR"'
telephones and 10- and 20-button telephone sets.
1.01
3.
INSTALLATION
Planning
An external 18- to 22-volt ac or dc power
source is required. This power may be
provided by:
3.01
• A 2012B transformer
1.02
2.
Whenever this section is reissued, the reason
for reissue will be stated in this paragraph.
• The 18-volt ac terminals of available power
plant
• For temporary power supply, a 22.5- to
SO-volt battery.
IDENTIFICATION
2.01
Purpose: To provide voice signaling on
manual intercoms.
2.02
Application: For use with all 6-button
telephone sets shown in Table A.
2.03
Ordering Guide:
When a 2012B transformer is used for
power, the customer must provide a separately
fused ac receptacle NOT under control of a switch.
3.02
The maximum length of IW cable used
between the power supply and loudspeaker
should not exceed 200 feet.
3.03
• Set, Loudspeaker, 107B-*
The maximum length of IW cable used
between the loudspeaker and the associated
telephone set should not exceed 100 feet .
3.04
(a) Replaceable Components
• Cord, Mounting, D6AF-87 (available in 7-,
14-, or 25-foot lengths; specify length desired)
(b) Associated Apparatus (order separately
• Bracket, 77 A
• Transformer, 2012B
• Key, 551A
• Buzzer, KS-20419, L1
When a spare button on telephone set is
used to operate voice signaling on manual
intercoms, the button must be converted from
locking to nonlocking by removing the locking pin.
Refer to section for telephone set being used for
method of removing locking pin. Table A gives a
section reference to the list of 6-button telephone
sets.
3.05
• Refer to Table B for color selection.
if required)
Installing
When an external 551A key is used to operate
voice signaling on manual intercom, mount
key on 77A bracket.
3.06
NOTICE
Not for use or disclosure outside the
Bell System except under written agreement
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
SECTION 518-010-109
3.07
Bring the loudspeaker mounting cord directly
into the telephone set and insulate and store
Rand G leads. The power supply may be brought
into the telephone set over spare cord conductors
and connected to the loudspeaker set cord using
spare terminals as shown in Table A and Fig. 1.
4.
(2) At calling station, lift receiver off-hook,
depress manual intercom line button.
(3) Depress voice signaling button on operating
telephone set and hold depressed during
voice signaling.
The possibility of acoustic feedback
(singing) exists whenever the called
party receiver is off-hook on the
intercom line and the calling party
has the voice signal key depressed.
To avoid this problem, place the
loudspeaker and telephone set as
far apart as possible and set
volume control of loudspeaker as
low as possible.
CONNECTIONS
Connect loudspeaker set mounting cord to
telephone set (see Fig. 1) as follows:
4.01
• Connect (W) lead to tip of manual intercom
line.
• Connect (BL) lead to ring of manual intercom
line.
• Connect (Y) lead to BZ1 lead of telephone
set using spare terminal as shown in Table
A. If BZ1 is not available, use spare
conductor in telephone set mounting cord
(see Fig. 1).
(4) Adjust volume control of 107B loudspeaker
to a satisfactory level.
5.03
Do not turn loudspeaker ON/OFF switch to
the OFF position. This will disable the voice
signaling.
• Connect (BK) lead to SG terminal of telephone
set.
• Connect external 551A key or converted
telephone set button-for 551A key, use
spare conductors in telephone set mounting
cord; for converted telephone set button,
use appropriate cord conductors. See section
pertaining to telephone set being used for
conductor colors.
6.
Note: Fig. 1 shows connections for a buzzer
circuit in addition to intercom signaling. If
buzzer is not required, these connections can
be omitted.
6.02
Maintenance of the 107B loudspeaker is
limited to replacing the mounting cord.
6.03
When it is reported that voice signaling
does not operate, check the following:
OPERATION
5.
The telephone set used to operate the voice
signaling on manual intercom is used in the
normal manner. The handset must be off-hook
and the manual intercom line button depressed.
5.01
5.02
MAINTENANCE
For maintenance of the associated telephone
set, refer to the section covering the type
of set involved.
6.01
• Volume control on 107B loudspeaker turned
too low
• ON/OFF switch on 107B loudspeaker turned
to OFF position
Operate loudspeaker as follows:
• Power source disconnected
(1) Turn the ON-OFF switch of the 107B
loudspeaker set clockwise. This turns the
loudspeaker on.
Page 2
• Wiring of loudspeaker and nonlocking key.
ISS 1, SECTION 518-010-109
25b5Hk
TELEPHONE SET
0
DMF-a7
MTG
CORD
25b5Hk
TELEPHONE SET
k TS EQU 1PMENT
T
T
,..,.
~
~
,..,.R
~
,..,.
,.,.R
(W)
,..,.3
(n
2
,..,.
~
~
B
-24V
0~
B
GRD
~
@,,"-'~0
@
5
,..,.
>10V
L1~
0t
I>
S
PU
BZ
,.,.I>
"-'
(Bk)
,.,.1
(R)
;,.
"-'
-
kS-204 19.
BUZZER
(BLl
"-'
5
,..,.
BZl
~
""
4
,...,
~
"-'
551A[
kEY
tt@
107B LOU DSPEAkER SET
TERM 1NAL BLOCk
(G)
~
"-'
*
lA
kE
55
LEGEND
-I NSULATE AND STORE SPOkESMAN® LEADS
tCDNVERTIBLE NONLOCklNG kEY ON TEL SET
OR EXTERNALLY MOUNTED 551A kEY
EXTERNALLY MDUNTED kEY
G
(lJ
CONVERT 1BLE kEY ON TEL SET
Fig. I-Example of Connections for Voice and Conventional Signaling Arrangements for Manual Intercom
Using 2565HK Telephone Set
Page 3
SECTION 518-010-109
TABLE A
CONNECTIONS FOR SPEAKERPHONE POWER
6-BUTTON
TEL SETS
TERMINALS FOR
BZ/BZ1 LEADS
SPARE
TERMINALS
564HD (MD)
NO. OF
SPARE LEADS
SEE
SECTION
*
4
502-541-406
564HK (MD)
4,3
5,6
2
502-541-407
564HL
4,3
5,6
2
502-541-407
1,2,3,4
4
502-541-410
1,2,5,6,9
5
502-541-414
565HDR (MD)
565GK
565HK
5,6
1,2,3,4
4
502-541-415
565LK
5,6
1,2,3,4
4
502-541-416
2,5,6,9
4
502-543-403
2565GK
2565HK
5,6
2,3,4
3
502-543-405
2565LK
5,6
2,3,4
3
502-543-406
* Auxiliary terminal 812559623 (P-25E962).
TABLE B
COLOR ORDERING GUIDE
APPARATUS
Loudspeaker
Set
Mounting
Cord
Page 4
4 Pages
COLOR
SUFFIX
Black
-03
Moss Green
-51
Yellow
-56
White
-58
Rose Pink
-59
Light Beige
-60
Light Gray
-61
Aqua Blue
-62
Turquoise
-64
Satin-Silver
·87
BEll SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT & TCo Standard
SECTION S 18-0 10-11 0
IHue 1, June 1976
2A 1 MATRIX BLOCK
IDENTIFICATION, INST ALLA TION, CONNECTION, AND MAINTENANCE
1.
GENERAL
This section contains information on the
2A1 matrix block (Fig. 1) which provides
polarity guard circuits for use with key telephones
arranged for multiline conferencing.
1.01
1.02
2.
When this section is reissued, the reason
for reissue will be listed in this paragraph.
IDENTIFICATION
The 2A1 matrix block consists of a molded
plastic block equipped with 3-clip terminals,
KS-21765 L2 diodes, and insulated straps connected
to provide eight polarity guard circuits. One circuit
is required for each conferenceable line at the
associated key telephone sets.
2.01
The block is similar to the 66B3-50 type
connecting block except that the 3-clip
terminals are inserted only where required for
holding the diodes and straps. It is 13.40 inches
long, 2.80 inches wide, and 1.20 inches deep. Lead
designations (T, R) are stamped on the fanning
strips on both sides of the block.
the input T lead. However, the arrangement of
diodes D2 and D4 forces the line current to continue
flowing through the station circuit in the same
direction when this occurs.
3.
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
Mount the 2A1 matrix block on a flat, vertical
surface in a location where leads from the
associated line circuits and the station cut-down
field can be conveniently connected to it. Use D
inside wiring cable to connect the station (right)
side of the block to the cut-down field. Terminate
the leads from the line circuit on the left side of
the block.
3.01
II a station requires line ringing on
a particular line, connect the ringing
leads Irom the key telephone set to
the appropriate terminals on the line
side 01 the matrix block, not to the
station side.
2.02
2.03
The purpose of the polarity guard circuit is
to isolate the associated station from battery
reversals on the T and R line leads (Fig. 2).
Normally, ground is on the input T lead and battery
on the input R lead, and current flows through
diode D1, the station circuit, and D3 in the direction
of the diode arrows. A battery reversal would
place ground on the input R lead and battery on
3.02
Use a 714B tool to make terminations on
the clip terminals of the matrix block. Refer
to Section 461-604-100 for detailed instructions on
the use of the 714B tool and other information on
the 66-type connecting blocks.
4.
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance of 2A1 matrix block is limited
to replacement of defective diodes and
adjustment and alignment of clip terminals.
4.01
NOTICE
Not for use or disclosure outside the
Bell System except under written agreement
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
SECTION S 18-010-110
01
LI NE
STATI ON
CIRCU IT
R
03
Fig. 2-Schematic of Polarity Guard Circuit
LI NE
SI DE
STATI ON
SIDE
Fig . 1- 2A 1 Matrix Block
Page 2
2 Pages
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
SECTION 518-01 0-111
Issue 2, March 1978
AT & TCo Standard
MESSAGE WAITING CONSOLES
USED WITH lA, lAl, OR lA2
KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS
1.
GENERAL
This section provides information for providing
station busy (SB) and message waiting (MW)
features in lA, 1A1, or 1A2 Key Telephone Systems
(KTSs). The arrangement utilizes the MW consoles
(6B1 and 7B1) used with COM KEY* systems
(Fig. 1).
1.01
push-to"operate, push-to-release button associated
with the desired station. This supplies 10V AC to
light a lamp at the station (usually the lamp under
the HOLD key). If the station is off-hook, the SB
lamp located under the MW button of the console
will light under control of the station line switch.
tNote: When more than one MW console is
installed, the MW signal can only be retired
at the console originating the signal since the
key must be physically released.•
"Trademark
This section is reissued to add information
on telephone sets used with station line
concentrators.
1.02
1.03
This issue of the section is based on the
following:
SD-69656-01, Issue 1-6Al and 6B1 Selector
Console Circuit
SD-69657-01, Issue 1-7A1 and 7B1 Selector
Console Circuit
At the stations in the system, the set
normally must be equipped with a lamp in
the HOLD key. In addition, if the SB feature is
supplied, the telephone set must be wired for the
station busy lamp feature. Any set having sufficient
spare leads and an idle lamp can be wired for MW,
but the SB feature cannot be used with those sets
tequipped for headset operation due to an
incompatibility in the method of wiring the busy
lamp.•
2.03
The 6B1 and 7B1 consoles require 10V AC
(for MW) and 18V AC (for SB). Each 6Bl
console requires 1 ampere and each 7Bl requires
2 amperes of l8V ac power. A maximum of three
consoles of either type can be installed but special
treatment of the l8V ac leads is required. More
than one 18V ac lead may be required, depending
on the size and number of consoles installed (Fig. 2
through 7).
2.04
518-450-100, Issue 2-7 A Communication
System
518-450-102, Issue 2-14A Communication
System.
2.
DESCRIPTION
The SB feature provides an attendant at a
KTS installation a visual indication of when
a station is off-hook. The MW feature permits
the attendant to illuminate a lamp, usually the
HOLD key lamp, at a station as a signal for the
station to contact the attendant.
2.01
The features are supplied using a 6B1
(19-station) or 7B1 (39-station) console. For
message waiting the attendant depresses the
2.02
Voltages for the consoles can be supplied
from the associated key system power supply
if sufficient capacity is available. Otherwise, use
a 19-type power unit if one console is to be installed;
or, if two or three consoles are required, use a
19-type for the 10V AC and a 215B1 or 2l5Cl for
the l8V AC. Where space permits, the 215Cl
power unit can be installed in the same mounting
as the key equipment. The 2l5C1 can also be
2.05
'NOTICE
Not for use or disclosure outside the
Bell System except under written agreement
Printed in U.s.A.
Page 1
SECTION 518-010-111
mounted in a l6-type apparatus mounting, 23-inch
relay rack, etc, using 99-type adapters. The 2l5Bl
power unit is electrically equivalent to the 2l5Cl
but is designed for wall mounting externally where
other space is not available. The 2l5Bl is supplied
with a cover.
3.
(4) Make sure l8V ac leads are terminated .and
strapped in multiple installations as shown.
Connect 10V and l8V ac leads from power supply
associated with key system or from a separately
provided supply. The l8V ac leads should be
fused at 2 amperes per lead as shown and should
be at least l8-gauge wire.
INSTALLATION
3.01
Install the SB and/or MW features as follows:
(1) Install console(s) at attendant position(s).
(2) Run a connector cable (use A25B for 6Bl
console or A50B for 7Bl) from each console
to a position convenient to the station cutdown
field and the power supply.
(3) Mount the required 66-type connecting blocks
and terminate cables as shown in Fig. 2
through 7. If a single 6Bl console is installed,
only half the block is used. Multiple 7Bl consoles
require two blocks, one for each binder group.
Page 2
(5) Cross-connect the BL, L, and if necessary,
the LG leads, as required, from the station
cutdown blocks to the 66-type connecting block.
Refer to Tables A and B, depending on the set
involved, for spare leads that can be used.
(6) Modify set to connect HOLD key lamp as
MW indicator and, if necessary, install lamp
in key. If SB is provided, modify set for station
busy lamp according to the service section for
the set involved in the 502 Division.
Note: The station busy consoles are not
compatible with the station busy circuit used
in headset-type CALL DIRECTOR'" sets.
ISS '1 , SEC' ION 5\8-0\0-\\1
A.66 1 CO NSOLE
6. 761 CO NSOLE
fig . \ _68 \ ond 78\ Selector Consoles
poge 3/4
ISS 2, SECTION 518-010-111
SB1
D50AD
MTG CD
SB1
SB2
SB'
SB4
SB5
SB6
SB7
SBB
SB9
SB10
SB11
SB12
SB"
SB14
SB15
SB16
SB17
SB1B
SB19
+18V
+18V
+1BV
+.'ov
MWI
+1BV
+1BV
1!.l1
1!.l2
ttl'
t tl5
ttl6
ttl7
MIIB
ttl9
ttl10
ttl1'
1!.l12
MIl"
ttl14
ttl15
",,16
""17
""1B
1
+10V
6B1 CONSOLE
(NOTE 2)
, OV
+10
+ 0
+ OV
!.10V
A25B
CONN CA
(W-Bl)
Bl-W
WoO
O-W
W-G;
IG-I4;
(W-BR)
(BR-W)
26
1
27
2
,
2B
29
4
5
'1
6
'2
7
"
B
'4
l5
10
'6
11
n ;,.
12
H
'9
14
40
15
41
16
42
17
4'1B
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
4B
2'
49
24
50
25
A
1 B
5
w-s
'0
'B
PIO 66MI-50
CONN BLOCK
(S-W)
R-Bl
Bl-R)
R-O
-R
R-G
G-R
(R-BR)
SR-R
(R-S)
(S-R)
(BK-Bl
Bl-BK)
(BK-O
(O-BK)
BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR:
BR-BK
(BK-5)
S-BK
(Y-Bl)
Bl-Y)
Y-O
O-Y
YoGi
G-Y
Y-BR'
(BR-Y)
(Y-5)
Soy;
V-Bl
Bl-V
V-O
10
15
20
Bl lEAD
TO OTHER
TEL SETS
Bl "
Bl(14
Bl(15)
Bl 16
Bl 17
Bl B
Bl 19)
+ BV
+ B
+1BV
25
+1BV
+lBV
l 1
l 2
,
LS
L-(
+18V
J
A1
OR
SG
TO POWER
SUPPLY
l4
<"
j5
( .~
l 6
l(7
LIB)
l 9)
l(10)
l(11)
l 12
~~s-<
l lEAD
TO OTHER
TEL SETS
LG
TYP ICAL TELEPHONE SET
(NOTE 1)
L"
40
-
V-G
G-V
V-BR'
BR-V
(V-5)
(S-V
BU1)
RLl2)
Bl ,
Bl 4'
Bl(5)
Bl(6)
Bl 7
Bl(B)
Bl 9
Bl(10)
Bl 11
Bl 12
45
l(14)
l 15
l(16)
l(17)
l 1Bi
l 19
+10V
+10V
+10V
+10V
+10V
50
+.~
NOTES:
1. REFER TO TABLE A OR B FOR SET
TERMINATIONS.
2. 5TATION BUSY lAMP IS ASSOCIATED
WITH I!.l BUTTON.
]
TO POWER
SUPPLY
Fig. 2-681 Console Connections
Page 5
SECTION 518-010-111
D100J
MTG CD
PLUG 1
S81
S82
SB1
SB~
MWI
SB4
SB5
SB6
SB7
SBB
S89
SB10
SB11
SB12
SB1l
SB14
S815
SB16
SB17
SB1B
SB19
+18V
+18V
+18V
+18V
+18V
+18V
f!..I1
f!..I2
MW~
CONSOLE
(NOTE 2)
f!..I4
f!..I5
MW6
f!..I7
MW8
f!..I9
MW10
MW11
f!..I12
MW1l
MW14
MW15
MW16
MW17
f!..I1B
MW19
+10V
+10V
+10V
+10V
+10V
+10V
26
27
28
~
29
4
~O
5
~1
6
~2
~~
B
~4
~5
10
%
11
J7
12
~B
1l
~9
14
40
15
41
16
42
17
4~
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
4B
2~
49
24
50
25
A50B
PIO 66M1-50
CONN CA
CONN BLDCK
BL BINDER
A 1 8
(W-BL)
BL-W
WoO
O-W
(W-G
5
(G-W)
W-BR
(BR-W)
W-S
(S-W)
10
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
(O-Rl
15
R-G
G-R'
(R-BR)
BR-R
(R-S
20
(S-R)
(BK-BL)
BL-BK
(BK-O)
(O-BK)
BK-G)
25
G-8K
(8K-BR)
(BR-BK
(BK-S)
(S-8K
~O
(Y-BL)
BL-Y
(Y-O
O-Y
(Y·G)
~5
(G-Y)
(Y-BR)
(BR-Y)
(Y-S)
Soy
40
(V-BL)
BL V
(V-O)
O-V
(V-G)
45
(G-V)
(V-8R)
BR-V
(V-S)
50
S-V
I
BL(1)
BL 2
BL ~
BL(4
BL(5)
BL(6)
BL(7
BL(B)
BL(9
BL(40)
BL 11
BL 12
BL 1l
BL 14
BL 15
BL 16
BL 17
BL(1B
BL(19)
+1BV
+1BV
+18V
+18V
+1BV
+18V
L 1
L(2)
BL LEAD TO
OTHER
TEL SETS
]
LS
TO POWER
SUPPLY
L(~)
L(4)
L 5
L(6)
L(7)
L 8
L 9
L(10)
L(11)
L(12)
L(1l)
L 14)
L 15
L 16
L 7
L(1B)
L 19
+10V
+10V
+10V
~S--<
L LEAD TO
OTHER
TEL SETS
TO POWER
SUPPLY
+~
+10V
+10V
LG
TYP I CAL TELEPHONE SET
(NOTE 1)
NOTES
1. REFER TO TABLE A OR B
FOR SET TERMINATIONS.
2. STAT ION BUSY LAMP IS
ASSOCIATED WITH
MW BUTTON.
J
Fig. 3-7B1 Console Connections (Sheet 1 of 2)
Page 6
BL
A1
OR
SG
ISS 2, SECTION 518-010-111
PIO 66M1-50
CONN BLOCK
BL LEADS TO
TEL SETS
TO P,,"ER
SUPPLY
[
·C
BU20)
BL 21
BL(22)
BL(2l)
BL 24
BL 25
BL(26
BL 27
BL 2B
BL(29)
BL lO)
BL(l1
BL(l2)
BL(ll
BL(l4)
BL l5
BL(l6)
BL l7
BL l8
BL 19)
+18V
.:!:18V
1
mL
~-O
5
10
15
20
~18V
+18V
+1BV
L 20)
L(21)
L(22)
L 2l
L(24)
L 25)
25
lO
L(l6)
L LEADS TO
TEL SETS
[
D
A50B
CONN CA
o BINDER
W-BLl
L 27
L 28
L(29)
L(lO)
L l1
L(l2)
L(ll)
L l4
L(15)
LlG
L(l7)
L(l8)
L(l9)
.:!:1UV
+10V
+ 0
+10V
.:!:. OV
15
40
O-W
W-u
G-W)
W-IlR
BR-W
W-S
s-w
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R)
R-IlR)
(BR-R
_(H.-S
S-Rl
(RK-AI
BL-BK
BK-O
O-BKJ
JlI(-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-8K
BK-S
S-BK
(Y-8L)
BL-Y)
Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-IlR
BR-Y
(Y-S
S-Y
V-BL
BL-V
V-O
o-v
45
50
l
(V-G)
G-V
(V-AoJ
BR-V
V-S
S-V
26
1
27
2
28
l
29
lO
5
l1
6
l2
7
II
l4
9
15
10
lG
11
l7
12
l8
1l
19
14
40
15
41
16
42
17
4l
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
2l
49
24
50
25
D100J
MTG CD
PLUG 2
SB20
SB21
SB22
SB2l
SB24
SB25
SB26
SB27
SB28
SB29
SBlO
SBl1
SBl2
SBll
SBl4
SB3~
SBlG
SBl7
SBlB
SBl9
+18V
+18V
:c'OY
!2"-"
DO'
MW20
MW21
MW22
MW2l
MW24
MW25
MW26
MW27
MW28
MW29
MWlO
MWl1
MWl2
MWll
MWl4
MW15
MWlG
MWl7
MWl8
MWl9
+ UV
7B1 CONSOLE
.! OV
.:!:IUV
.!.10V
+10V
Fig. 3-7B1 Console Connections (Sheet 2 of 2)
Page 7
SECTION 518-010-111
TABLE A
TELEPHONE SET TERMINATIONS FOR PROVIDING MESSAGE
WAITING AND/OR STATION BUSY IN 1A, 1A1, OR 1A2 KTS
(NOTE 1)
MOUNTING CORD LEADS
L LEAD
BL LEAD
TELEPHONE
SET
COLOR
SET
TERMINAL
LG LEAD
MOVE
MOVE
COLOR
COLOR
FROM
TO
5
FROM
TO
1
O-Y
LH
Y-O
565HD
L2
G-Y
HL
Y-G
565GK (Note 2)
L2
SoW
1
G-R
2
2565GK (Note 2)
1
SoW
5
G-R
2
565HK
L2
LH
LG
3
LH
y-o
y-o
4
1
o-y
o-y
3
2565HK
4
LG
564HK/HL
Y-BR
565LK
2565LK
L2
G-BK
1
LH
BK-G
2
LG
1
G-BK
2
LH
BK-G
2
LG
2630, 2631D
6
630/631DA
2630/263IDA
L2
634/635DA
2634DA/DAM
2635DA/DAM
LG
HG
6 or 12
630/631A,B,C,D
634/635D
2634/2635D
6
Connection
Terminal
39 of 235- or
236-Type KTU
(Note 7)
Note 3
Note 3
Note 4
Note 4
R-G
LG
Note 8
830/2830C
831/2831C
y-o
22
O-Y
851/2851B
Y-BR
L2
G-Y
12
G-R
5
Y-G
22
20
21
(Note 6)
Note 5
Y-G
12
(Note 6)
Note 1: Telephone set must be wired for station busy feature. Refer to service section in 502 Division
for telephone set involved.
Note 2: These sets do not have a hold key. Either connect any unused line key lamp or use spare leads
shown and connect to external lamp indicator using spare terminals or D-161488 connectors.
Note 3: Connect hold lamp leads (S-V, V-S) to spare mounting cord leads (G-Y, YoGI in 1st module
using spare terminals or D-161488 connectors.
Note 4: Connect hold lamp leads (G-Y, YoGI to spare mounting cord leads (G-Y, YoGI in 1st module.
Note 5: Move Y-G hold lamp lead from 21 to 4.
Note 6: Disconnect, insulate, and store BL leads.
Note 7: The 235- and 236-type KTU station line concentrators must be optioned for the station busy
feature per Table B, Section 518-310-405.
Note 8: Connect G-Y from lamp 6 to R-G of mounting cord using a spare terminal or D-161488
connector.
Page 8
ISS 2, SECTION 518-010-111
TABLE B
TELEPHONE SET TERMINATIONS
FOR PROVIDING MESSAGE WAITING WITH
HEADSET-EQUIPPED CONCENTRATOR
CALL DIRECTORS
(NOTE 1)
TELEPHONE
SET
HOLD LAMP
LEAD
636, 637 A,B,C,D
2636C, 2637D
636,2636CA
637,2637DA
(Note 2)
COLOR
MOUNTING CORD
LEAD
COLOR
L
S-V
L
G-Y
LG
V-S
LG
Y-G
L
G-Y
L
G-Y
LG
Y-G
LG
Y-G
Note 1: Busy lamp feature cannot be provided witb
these sets.
Note 2: Connect leads using spare terminals or
D-161488 connectors.
Page 9
SECTION 518-010-111
A25B CONN. CABLE
(W-BL)
66M1-25 CONNECTING BLOCK
A
1
B
0
C
BL (1)
(BL-W)
BL (2)
(W-D)
BL (l)
BL (4)
(O-W)
(W-G)
BL (5)
5
(G-W)
BL (6)
(W-OO)
BL (7)
(OO-W)
BL (B)
BL (9)
(W-S)
(S-W)
BL (1D)
10
(R-BL)
BL (11)
(BL-R)
BL (12)
(R-O)
BL (H)
BL (14)
(O-R)
(R-G)
BL (15)
1
(G-R)
BL (16)
(R-BR)
BL (17)
(OO-R)
BL (18)
BL (19)
(R-S)
(S-R)
±1BV
20
(BK-BL)
(BL-BK)
....
(BK-O)
J!l-BK)
TO 1ST
6B1
CONSOLE
(BK-G)
25
L (1)
(BK-BR)
L (2)
(OO-BK)
L (l)
L (4)
(BK-S)
L (5)
lO
(Y-BLl
L (6)
(BL-Y)
L(7)
(Y-O)
L (8)
(O-y)
(Y-G)
L (9)
l5
L (10)
(G-Y)
L (11)
(Y-BR)
L (12)
(OO-Y)
L (n)
(Y-S)
(S-Y)
L (15)
L (16)
(BL-V)
L (171
(V-D)
L (18)
CO-V)
L (19)
110V
45
(G-V)
110V
(V-BR)
110V
(BR-V)
±10V
(V-S)
(S-V)
TO 2ND
6B1
CONSOLE
t10V
±10V
50
Y
Fig. 4-Connections for Two 681 Consoles
Page 10
L LEAD
TO
TEL SETS
L (14)
40
(V-BLl
(V-G)
TO POWER SUPPLY
(2A FUSE - 18 GA
WIRE)
ADD
STRAPS
(G-BK)
(S-8K)
BL LEAD
TO
TEL SETS
TO POWER
SUPPLY
1
ISS 2, SECTION 518-010-111
A258 CONN CABLE
(W-Bl)
66M1-50 CONNECT! NG BLOCK
B
\
C
Bl (1).
Bl (2)
(Bl-W)
(W-O)
(O-W)
(W-G)
Bl m
Bl (4)
J!L16L
Bl (9)
Bl (10)
Bl (11)
10
BLt14l
Bl (15)
15
Bl (16)
Bl (17)
Bl (18)
Bl (19)
.18V
20
)~
)~
(BK-BLl
(Bl-BK)
TO 1ST
6B1
CONSOlE
(BK-O)
(o-BK)
(BK-G)
)~
'0--0
l (41
("
'0
l (6)
l (7)
l~
(91
l (10)
'5
l (11)
l (12)
l (n)
(Y-BR)
(BR-Y)
(Y-S)
TO 2ND
6B1
CONSOLE
l lEAD
TO
TEL SETS
l (14)
l (15)
-in
lj1~
l(1'1l
l (18)
l (19)
.1OY
45
(G-V)
(V-BRI
(BR-V)
(V-S)
(S-V)
(1)
l(~
(G-Y)
(Bl-V)
(V-O)
(O-V)
(V-G)
TO POWER
SUPPLY
(NOTE 1)
J
l (2)
(Y-O)
(S-Y)
(V-Bl)
.18V
)~
25
(BR-BK)
(BK-S)
(O-Y)
(Y-G)
I
) *(
(G-BK)
(BK-BR)
(S-BK)
(Y-Bl)
(Bl-Y)
8l lEAD
TO
TEL SETS
Rl (121
Bl (H)
(G-R)
(R-BR)
(BR-R)
(R-S)
(S-R)
ADD STRAPS - WHERE MORE THAN ONE LEAD
IS REQUIRED ON A TERMINAL, USE 1B'B2
ADAPTER OR CONT INUOUS STRAPP ING.
B (7)
Bl (8)
(14-5)
(Bl-R)
(R-O)
(o-R)
(R-G)
*
Bl (5)
5
(G-W)
(W-BR)
(BR-W)
(S-W)
(R-Bl
NOTES:
1. SEPARATELY FUSE EACH .1BV lEAD AT 2A.
USE 18 GAUGE WIRE.
2. INSTAll B BRIDGING CLIPS BETWEEN COLUMNS
BAND C IN ROWS 1-19 AND 2(",50.
D
.1OY
.1nv
.1OY
.1OY
.1OY
50
V
V
TO POWER
SUPPLY
J
TO 'RD
6B1
CONSOLE
Fig. 5-Connections for Three 6B1 Consoles
Page 11
SECTION 518-010-1 11
A50B CONN CABLE
(BL BINDER)
(W-BL)
1ST 66M1-25 CONNECT! NG BLOCK
A
B
BL (1)
(BL-II)
BL (2)
(W-O)
BL m
(0-11)
(W-G)
BL (4)
BL (5)
5
(G-W)
BL (6)
(W-BR)
BL (7)
(BR-W)
BL (B)
(W-S)
(S-W)
BL (9)
BL (10)
10
(R-BL)
BL (11)
(BL-R)
BL (12)
(R-O)
BL (n)
(O-R)
R-G
BL
15)
BL (16)
(R-BR)
BL (17)
(BR-R)
BL (1B)
(R-S)
BL (19)
+18V
20
(BK-BLl
(8L-BK)
•
(BK-O)
(O-BK)
TO 1ST
781
CONSOL E
(BK-G)
L (1)
L (2)
(BR-BK)
Lm
L (4)
_(BK-S)
L (5)
'0
(V-BL)
L (6)
(BL-V)
L(7)
(V-O)
L (8)
(O-V)
L (9)
L (10)
'5
(G-V)
L (11)
(V-BR)
L (12)
(BR-V
(S-V)
L (15)
40
(V-8L)
L (16)
~L-V)
L (171_
(V-O)
L (18)
L- (19)
(O-V)
(V-G)
45
.1OY
_(G-V)
.1OY
(V-8R)
.1OY
(8R-V)
.1OY
(V-S)
.1OY
(S-V)
L LEADS
TO
TEL SETS
L "
L (14)
(V-S)
TO 2ND
7B1
CONSOLE
AOD
STRAPS
(BK-BR)
(V-G)
TO POWER
SUPPLY
(NOTE)
25
(G-BK)
(S-8K)
8L LEADS
TO
TEL SETS
BL (14)
15
(G-R)
(S-R)
NOTE:
PROY I DE A SEPARATE +18V LEAD TO EACH
CONNECTING BLOCK FUSED AT2A. USE
18 GAUGE WIRE.
0
C
1
50
.1OY
]
TO POWER
SUPPLY
V
Fig. 6-Connections for Two 7B 1 Consoles (Sheet 1 of 2)
Page 12
ISS 2, SECTION 518-0 I 0-111
A50B CONN CABLE
(0 BINDER)
(W Bl)
2ND 66M1-25 CONNECTING BLOCK
B
A
C
0
Bl (20)
1
CBl W)
Bl (21)
rw-O\
Bl (22)
(O-W)
-(W-G)
(G-W)
Bl (2l)
Bl (24)
"
Bl (25)
(Wo-BR)
Bl (26)
(BR-W)
Bl (27)
CWo-S)
IS-Wl
Bl (2B)
Bl (29)
10
(R Bl)
Bl (lO)
IBl-R)
Bl (l1)
IR-O)
Bl (lZ)
CO-Rl
(R-G)
Bl (jj)
Bl (l4)
15
IG R)
Bl (5)
(R-BR)
Bl (l6)
CBR-Rl
Bl (j7)
IR-S)
IS-R)
Bl (lB)
Bl (9)
20
(BK-BLl
±1BV
IBl BK)
);::::::
IBK-O)
10-BK)
TO 1ST
7B1
CONSOLE
(BK G)
25
l (20)
(BK-BR)
l (21)
'"0_""'
l (22)
l (Zl)
l (24)
lO
IV-Bl)
l (25)
CBl-V)
l (26)
IV-01
l
'o_VI
IV-G)
l (29)
l5
l (lO)
(V-BRl
l (l1)
IBR-V)
l Il2)
l (l4)
40
l (35)
IV BLl
(Bl-V)
l (l6)
IV-O)
l Il7)
10 V)
(V-Gl
l (lB)
45
l (l9)
(G-V)
±10V
IV BR)
+10V
(BR-V)
:!:10V
(V-S)
±10V
(S-V)
l lEADS
TO
TEL SETS
l (ll)
IV-S)
TO 2ND
7B1
CONSOLE
27
l (2B)
IG Y)
(S-V)
TO POWER
SUPPLY
(NOTE)
ADD
STRAPS
IG-BK)
'BK S'
(S-BK)
Bl lEADS
TO
TEL SETS
±10V
50
V
]
TO POWER
SUPPLY
Fig. 6-Connections for Two 7BI Consoles (Sheet 2 of 2)
Page 13
SECTION 518-010-111
A50B CONN CABLE
(Bl BINDER)
(II-BLl
1ST 66M1-50 CONNECTING BLOCK
A
Bl (2)
Bl (~)
(Bl-W)
(11-0)
(a-W)
Bl (4)
(II-G)
Bl (5)
(G-W)
Bl (6)
(W-BR)
Bl (7)
(BR-W)
Bl (B)
Bl (11)
(Bl-R)
Bl (12)
(R-O)
Bl (1~)
Bl (15)
Bl (16)
(R-BR)
Bl (17)
(BR-R)
Bl (1B)
(R-S)
Bl (19)
20
-",(B~K-""Bl:L)_ _ _-+-o-_-o::::)
~(B~l~-~BK~)________-+~__~(
(BK-O)
:)
~(O~-~BK~)________~~__o()
TO 1ST
7B1
Bl lEAD
TO
TEL SETS
Bl (14)
15
(G-R)
(S-R)
PLACE STRAPS WHERE MORE THAN ONE lEAD
IS REQUIRED ON A TERMINAL, USE 1B~B2
ADAPTER DR CONT I NUOUS STRAPP I NG.
Bl (10)
10
(R-Bl)
(O-R)
(R-G)
*
Bl (9)
(W-S)
(S-W)
NOTES:
1. SEPARATElV FUSE EACH ±1BV lEAD AT 2A.
USE 1B GAUGE WIRE.
2. I ~TAll B BR lOG I NG CLI PS BETWEEN
COlUM~ BAND C AS FOllOWS:
• BLOCK 1 - ROWS 1-19 AND 26-50
• BLOCK 2 - ROWS 1-20 AND 26-50
Bl (1)
1
~(B~K:::-G~)______--Ik>2=..:5:......0")
±1BV
~
)0----0
J
TO POWER
1L...______.:.±1~B~V_ ~~~~~\)
* )0----0
(~__~4-______~±~1~BV~ TO
~
SHEET 2
(G-BK)
l (1)
(BR-BK)
l
(BK-S)
l (4)
CO~OlE ~(~BK~_~BR~)---------+~--~~--o---~+---------~l~(2~)--~
(S-BK)
~O
m
l (5)
(V-BLl
(Bl-V)
l (7)
l (6)
(V-O)
l (B)
(O-V)
(V-G)
~5
l (9)
l (10)
(G-V)
l (11)
(V-BR)
l (.12)
(BR-V)
l (n)
(V-S)
(S-V)
l (14)
40
l (15)
l (16)
(V-BLl
(Bl-V)
l (17)
(V-O)
l (1B)
(O-V)
l (19)
~~
(G-V)
(V-BR)
TO 2NO
7B1
CONSOLE
l lEAD
TO
TEL SETS
~
~~
±10V
J
±10V
TO ~RD
7B1 CO~OlE
Fig. 7-Connections for Three 781 Consoles (Sheet 1 of 2)
Page 14
ISS 2, SECTION 518-010-111
A50B CONN. CABLE
(0 B INOER)
(W-BLl
2NO 66M1-50 CONNECTi NG BLOCK
A
1
B
C
0
Bl (20
(Bl-W)
Bl (21)
(W-O)
BUnt
Bl (2')
(O-W)
(W-G)
Bl (24)
5
(G-W)
Bl (25)
(W-BR)
(BR-W)
Bl (26)
Bl (27)
(W-S)
(S-W)
Bl (28)
Bl (29)
10
(R-Bl)
Bl (0)
(Bl-R)
Bl (1)
(R-O)
Bl (l2)
(O-R)
(R-G)
Bl 0,)
(G-R)
Bl (4)
Bl (35)
(R-BR)
Bl (6)
(BR-K)
Bl (37)
15
(R-S)
(S-R)
BLOB)
±18V
(BK-O)
(O-BK)
(BK-G)
Bl (9)
20
(BK-Bl)
(Bl-BK)
TO 1ST
7B1
CONSOLE
25
(G-BK)
(BK-BR)
(BR-BK)
~'E
±1BV
l (20)
(71
l (23)
(Bl-Y)
l (25)
l (26)
(y-o)
l (27)
(O-Y)
(Y-G)
l (2B)
l (29)
35
(G-Y)
l (0)
(Y-BR)
l (1)
(BR-Y)
l (l2)
(Y-S)
(s-y)
(Bl-V)
l (4)
l (m
l (36)
(V-O)
l (37)
(o-V)
l (3B)
l (39)
45
(G-V)
±10V
(V-BR)
+10V
(BR-V)
(V-S)
±10V
±10V
(s-v)
l lEADS
TO
TEL SETS
l (33)
40
(V-Bl)
(V-G)
TO
POWER SUPPLY
(NOTE 1)
l (24)
30
(Y-Bl)
TO 2ND
7B1
CONSOLE
I
FROM
SHEET 1
l (22)
(BK-S)
(S-BK)
Bl lEADS
TO
TEL SETS
50
±10V
V
~
]
TO
POWER
SUPPLY
TO 3RD
7B1
CONSOLE
Fig. 7-Connections for Three 7Bl Consoles (Sheet 2 of 2)
Page 15
15 Pages
BEU SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT & TCo Standard
SECTION 518-010-115
Issue 1, November 1976
HANDS-FREE ANSWERING ON INTERCOM
1A 1, 1A2, AND 6A KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS
1.
GENERAL
This section provides information on the
station adjuncts (Fig. 1) used in 1A1, 1A2,
and 6A KTSs to provide Hands-Free Answering on
Intercom (HF AI).
1.01
1.02
Whenever this section is reissued, the reasons
for reissue will be listed in this paragraph.
The HFAI feature is an intercom feature
and is not to be connected to CO/ PBX lines.
The adjuncts are activated by incoming calls only
and cannot be used to originate outgoing calls.
1.03
2.
DESCRIPTION
Addition of the HFAI feature requires the
installation of an adjunct at t he station
location as follows:
2.01
A 2A TRANSMIl TEP.-RECEIVER (SINGLE-PATH)
• HFAI on manual intercom or one intercom
path-2A transmitter-receiver
• HFAI on two or three intercom paths-2B
transmitter-receiver.
If HFAI is installed at a 1- or 2-link 6A KTS
station, a 276A adapter circuit must be wired
between the KTS equipment and the adjunct on a
one-per-adj unct basis.
The 2A transmitter-receiver permits a calling
station to tone-signal another intercom station
through the loudspeaker in the adj unct. If the
called station does not want to receive incoming
calls, depressing the do-not-disturb (DND) button
will block turn-on of the adjunct and will furni sh
a DND tone to both parties. If the DND button
is not depressed, the called party can answer
without going off-hook. Conversation from the
called station can also be blocked by depressing
the MIKE-OFF button without affecting the incoming
speech. A light emitting diode (LED) is provided
2.02
8 . 28 TRA NSMITTER - RECEIVER (THREE-PATH)
Fig. 1-2-Type Transmitter-Receiver
NOTICE
Not for use or disclosure outside t he
Bell System except under written agreement
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
SECTION 518-010-115
to indicate when the microphone is turned on. If
desired, the called station may depress the button
on the key telephone set associated with the intercom
and go off-hook; conversation is then through the
handset. ,
ORDERING GUIDE
• Transmitter-Receiver, 2A *-single-path HFAI
• Transmitter-Receiver, 2B* -3-path HF AI
The 3-path adjunct (2B transmitter-receiver)
operates in a similar manner but, in addition,
is equipped with LEDs which indicate the intercom
path the station is being caIled on. The called
station can depress the associated pickup button
on the key telephone set and go off-hook to use
the handset. The path· indicating LEDs will stay
lit as long as the calling party is off-hook.
2.03
No modification of the intercom system is
required in the lA1, 1A2, or selector-only
6A KTSs for the addition of the adjuncts. The
potential on the R lead (VS lead) from the intercom
selector can .be :1::l0V, ~24V, or :I::105V.
'Refer to Table A for color information.
• Block, Connecting, 66E8-25-order 1 for
each location where adjunct cord cannot be
brought into telephone set (see Note)
Note: If station is already wired using
66E3-25, a 66E8-25 may not be required.
• Circuit, Adapter, 276A-order 1 for each
adjunct installed in a 1- or 2-link 6A KTS.
2.04
3.
INSTAUATION
An adjunct must be installed at each station
to be furnished with the HF AI feature. The
adjunct can be wired by any of the methods outlined
in 3.03, 3.04, or 3.05.
3.01
If the adjuncts are added to a 1- or 2-link
6A KTS, a 276A adapter circuit must be
added for each adjunct (Fig. 5).
2.05
The microphone in the 2A and 2B
transmitter-receiver is located on the bottom
of the base. To assure maximum pickup, the
adjunct should not be placed on a surface that
would obstruct the mike.
3.02
2.06
The adjuncts are equipped with a volume
control for adjusting the loudspeaker level.
The 2-type transmitter-receiver will be
available in. four .colors: black (-03), green
(-51), white (-58), and light beige (-60), and will
be shipped with color-coordinated faceplates. Cords
will be in satin-silver (-87) only.
2.07
In installations where all the leads are
available on screw terminals such as in a
6-button key telephone set, the mounting cord from
the adjunct can be terminated directly in the set
3.03
TABLE A
COLOR SELECTION
FACEPLATE
TRANSMITTER·RECEIVER
COLOR
SUFFIX
CODE
COLOR
SUFFIX
2A
Black
Moss Green
White
Light Beige
-03
-51
-58
-60
73A
Charcoal
Light Green
Light Gray
Muted Beige
-70
-71
-73
-75
2B
Black
Moss Green
White
Light Beige
-03
-51
-58
-60
73B
Charcoal
Light Green
Light Gray
Muted Beige
-70
-71
-73
-75
CODE
Page 2
ISS 1, SECTION 518-010-115
(Fig. 3). The leads from the 2012B transformer,
if used, can also be brought into the set using
spare terminals or D-161488 connectors.
Where it is not desired to terminate the
cords in the set, or where the required
leads are not accessible such as in 10- and 20-button
sets or CALL DIRECTOR sets, a 66E8-25 connecting
block must be used. In 20-button and CALL
DIRECTOR sets, all intercom circuits should appear
on the same key so that all leads can be found in
one plug of the mounting cord and connector cable.
Fig. 4 shows connections for the single-path adjuncts
using a 66E8 connecting block, and Table B shows
the 3-path adjunct connections. Install the 66E8-25
connecting block as follows:
used for intercom signaling if the station is also
wired for common audible. The potential on the
signaling lead from the selector can be ±10V,
-24V, or ±105V.
3.04
(a) Mount block in a location which provides
access to the connection between the mounting
cord and connector cable.
(b) Break the mounting cord-connector cable
connection and plug the cord and cable into
the proper legs on connecting block (Fig. 2B).
At 1- and 2-link 6A KTS installations, a 276A
adapter circuit is required for each adjunct
installed. Install the adapter circuit at a location
permitting access to the required station and KTS
leads, and wire as shown in Fig. 5.
3.08
Power for the adjuncts can be derived either
from a 2012B transformer or from the -24B
supply in the KTS. If a 2012B transformer is used,
the wiring is brought into the set or connecting
block. Power from the KTS requires a spare cable
conductor which is connected to either the AC1 or
AC2 lead.
3.09
Do not power more than one adjunct from
a 2012B transformer. If power is derived
from the KTS, the drain should be figured on the
basis of 90 milliamperes for each adjunct.
3.10
4.
(c) Terminate adjunct mounting cord leads on
connecting block using 161A adapters. Power
leads are terminated on screw terminals AC1
and AC2.
(d) Terminate inside wire from transformer on
AC1 and AC2.
3.05
OPERATION
2A Transmitter-Receiver
4.01
Operation of the single-path adjunct is as
follows:
(a) The calling party dials the proper intercom
code for the adjunct-equipped station.
If the station is fed by inside wiring cable
terminated in a 66E3-25 connecting block,
the proper leads can be accessed on the connecting
block using 161A adapters.
Fig. 3 and 4 assume the intercom circuit is
on the last button of a 6-button set. If
intercom appears on another button, the T, R, A,
Land LG leads must be connected to the leads
associated with the proper button. In a like
manner, Table B assumes the intercom circuits are
on the last three buttons of the set. If they
appear elsewhere, the adjunct cord will have to
be wired to the proper leads.
(b) When dialing is complete, the microphone
in the adjunct is turned on, as indicated by
the MIKE-ON LED, and a single 1I2-second tone
burst is heard by both parties.
3.06
The HF AI adjuncts are signaled over the
R lead from the selector. Signaling for the
adjuncts must be separate from any other audible
arrangements at the station. Buzzers or ringers
cannot be connected on intercom at stations having
an adjunct. This will require a separate lead be
3.07
Note: If the called party does not want to
receive incoming calls on the intercom, the
DND button must be depressed. With the
DND depressed, both parties will hear a
double tone burst when the station is called.
To allow incoming calls, the DND button must
be depressed again, releasing it.
(c) After hearing the single-tone burst, the
calling station can voice-signal the called
station. The called station may answer via the
microphone in the adjunct.
(d) If the called party does not want local
conversation or noise to be heard, the
Page 3
SIlCTION 518-010-115
HFAI
ADJUNCT
Dl0W CORD
TO kEY
EQUIP.
------C=::J
A. INSTALLATION WITH CORDS TER"INATED IN TELEPHONE SET
HFAI
ADJUNCT
s,sssp
a
"OUNTING
CORD
ZOIZB
TRANSFOR"ER
66E1-Z5
CONN.
BLOCk
TO kEY
eoulP.
------{=:=J
B. INSTALLATION USING 66Ea-Z5 CONNECTING BLOCk
Fig. 2- Typical Installations, HFAI Adjuncts
MIKE·OFF button must be depressed, at which
time the LED will turn off. The called party
may return to HF AI by releasing the MIKE·OFF
button.
off-hook, the HFAI feature is canceled for that
call.
28 Transmitter-Receiver
(e) If desired, the called station may also depress
the pickup button associated with the intercom
and go off·hook for 2-way conversation using
the handset. Once the called station goes
i»age 4
4.02
Operation of the a-path adjunct is as follows:
(a) Calling and DND are the same as for single
path.
ISS 1, SECTION 518-010-11 5
TABLE B
CONNECTIONS FOR 2B TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER
TERMINAL ON 66E8 CONN BLOCK
D20RCORD
LEAD
DESIG
COLOR
T1
R1
AH1
LP1
T2
R2
AH2
LP2
T3
R3
AH3
LP3
LG
A1
VS
AC1
AC2
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
R-O
O-R
R-G
BR-R
R-S
S-R
R-BL
WoO
W-BL
BL-W
W-BR
SoW
W-S
O-W
G-R
G-W
W-G
R-BR
BL-R
BR-W
830/2830
TEL SET
831/2831
TEL SET
CALL DIRECTOR
(NOTE)
37
38
22
42
43
44
16
48
49
50
10
46
41
4
34
AC1
AC2
37
38
22
42
43
44
16
48
49
50
10
46
41
5
34
AC1
AC2
19
20
21
24
25
26
27
30
31
32
33
36
17
5
34
AC1
AC2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* Insulate and store_
Note: Adjuncts cannot be used with concentrator-type CALL
DIRECTORS_ Connections shown are for intercom on the
last three buttons of the key.
(b) Upon completion of dialing, the MIKE-ON
LED and the LED associated with the
incoming intercom path are turned on and the
single tone burst is heard at both stations.
wishes to converse over telephone, the intercom
pickup button associated with lit LED must be
depressed and the station go off-hook.
(c) The balance of operation is the same as for
single-path HF AI, except if called station
Page 5
SECTION $18-010.11$
5651Z565Hk
TELSET OR
6040G kEY
TELEPHONE SET
HOUNTI NG CORO
3a
(W-Bll
R
(BL-W)
A
(W-O)
;a
AI
(O-W)
/
LGI
(W-BR)
LP
(BR-W)
LGZ
(W-S)
/
VS
(S-W)
p6
ACZ
(W-G)
/ZJ3
ACI
(G-W)
p4
13
,
39
TO kEY
EOUIP.
40
/ZJ 5R
5H
lB
/ZJ LG
r--
15
37
/ZJ L5
LG
1'>.
18
TO ZOIZB
[
TRANSFORMER
5T
/
T
!
f
r>.
INSIDE
WIRE
Dl0W CORD
ZA
TRANS" IlTER
RECEIVER
NOTE S:
1. CONNECTIONS SHOWN ARE FOR INTERCO" ON THE 5TH PICkUP BUTTON.
IF INTERCO" APPEARS ON ANOTHER BUTTON. THE T. R. A. LGI AND
LP LEADS HUST BE CONNECTED TO PROPER TER"INALS.
Z. AUDIBLE SIGNAL IN SET CANNOT BE CONNECTED ON INTERCOH AT
STATION HAVING VS-HFAI ADJUNCT. CONNECTION SHOWN USE BUZZER
LEAD AS VS LEAD. DISCONNECT BUZZER LEADS IN SET.
3. ZOIZB TRANSFORHER IS SHOWN CONNECTED TO SPARE TER"INALS 3
AND 4. IF THESE TERHINALS ARE IN USE. USE ANY SPARE TERHINALS
OR 0-1614aa CONNECTORS.
4. IF POWER IS OBTAINED FRO" kEY SYSTEH (-Z4B) USE ONE SPARE
LEAD FRO" kTS AND CONNECT TO EITHER ACI OR ACZ.
Fi~. 3-Connections for 2A Transmitter-Receiver in Manual or Single Path Intercoms, With Cord Terminated
in Telephone Set
Page 6
ISS 1, SECTION 518-010-115
--< 2
--<17
--<11
TO kEY
EOUIP.
--<11
--<19
--<40
--<15
---I--''''-l- KTU (AS
t-~r---"6""T"'"R_t S- 3200 A
TO LAMP
POWER
SUPPLY
SR
R
3 ~I'
(R)
T
4
r-+-~1;"f2
~
~AR
'"
3"
r
~I
2UF
(S)
1M
AU..
T2
2
(R)
TS ON
S2A KTU
l=-!,
028
L
/
~
ISS I,SECTION 518-112-420
TS ON
53A KTU
-
CO
TS ON
53A KTU
T
.-------!I----:-='.ttnH 235.n.
-I
\
4T
,;:l4
TO TIE LINE
CIRCUIT AT
01 STANT END
T
2UF
I,HI'
22
2~'
LI
"~5:-ll,:;;:;::~===:....+-__I ___h It'
~t
~P-I---'O":O"'.o."-"1-t
7TF
I.
STR
~
L
6 BR
R
R 2
3B
21
L
f4~2,~,.511;]4.,.BI_I~Q:.I. .2~
'1_A
N
2
__
150.0.2
2000.0.
~I'H"+-__~____~
'!-=
"'3",-'o.4::....--I':O:+-_ _~
~o~
~~~~~~~--~--~~~.~P2~-~10~0~n~__
TO PICKUP KEYS
AT KEY STATIONS
{:
~3
2UF
3
I~
-::-
l
2
.J..!r-,-------fll'
r
5
II
'-=--
Fig. 4--53A Key Telephone Unit, Schematic
TS ON
TO SIG KEYS I N KEY
TEL SET OR TO INTERCOM
STATIONS ARRANGED
TO PICKUP KEYS
AT KEY STATIONS
FOR USE WITH
PRIVATE LINES
7
T
>----Os
40-- 3 5
"
DC POWER
SUPPLY
~
S
TS ON
54A KTU
54A KTU
c-
TO 14-26V
R
i \ GRD
\ BAT_
\
b'3
b,g\
~6
f.'6
15
IS
-C
R14
•
3
TS ON
54~TU
~
1
6
nt 4
I~J22~
TO TIE
LINE CKT
AT DIST END
-=
R
105V
TO
RINGING
SUPPLY
5
I 78
±
2~
2
5
24
RING
G 16
-
~
I
3
I
I
T
2~Tf
I t I
I
r:n
450.o.~~
"~
3
4
4
+
f!!:
I
I
2
Tf2UF
6 ,' 0
5
5BF
PI-iOOll
t
STR
31
7TF
.11
II
~IIH"
:2-100.0.
II~Ji ~11r
2UF
I
LAMP
LG
GRD AND LG} TO LAMP
BAT. OR ± POWER
SUPPLY
L
5B
I
2
TO SIGNAL
'~2
+
TB
RO
21
"}
IUF
Q
SJ~ 317A
V_R IT
_ AND TO
14
LK
22
B
26
ST
25
STI
27
CO
R
i~
TO BASIC
UNIT OR
PRECEDING
UNIT
4~3
,
R
'XlIB
2
20
5T
3B-{f;2500.n.
2t=-± I
R
30A
V_R
Fig. 5--54A Key Telephone Unit, Schematic
Page 7
SECTION 518-112-420
TSDN
55A KTU
co
TSON
~~ {_:"'~_:+:o(Jl:. ,KTf-U
II
r------~~~~,
LG} TO
SIGNAL
L OR LP
LAMP
12
4T
_ _ _ _- '
LI
T
4
22
B
21
L
26
ST
20
A
27
CO
2UF
TB
=-
.---+-+-+~4!,
I 4
34,..,;!.-.....J
"~-L.6
5,
2UF
5BF
PI-loon
7TF
8TR
P2-loon
6BR
I'H"
4.".!3
,,~r.-I---+----11----1--1-0+----""-
TS ON
55A KTU
19
15
.
'-r-"
TO SIG KEYS IN KEY TEL SET
OR TO INTERCOM PICKUP KEYS
AT STATIONS ARRANGED FOR
USE WITH PRIVATE LINES
It:
I-
'---r--"
TO PICKUP KEYS
AT KEY STATIONS
14- TO 26VOLT DC
POWER
SUPPLY
It:
.. It:
'"
010
.
I-
'-r--"
'-r-"
TO
LAMP POWER
SUPPLY
TO
BASIC UNIT
Fig. 6-55A Key Telephone Unit, Schematic
Page 8
25
18
L.-~F=~--------~~=4~~==~-~-~--~f__4~---~-~
.tt
o
I-
TO BASIC
UNIT OR
PRECEDING
UNIT
ISS 1, SECTION 518-112-420
TS (K31
TS (K21
TO CO [ :
®
0
0
®
TO
TJ CONTROLLED
R
STA
TO
TJ MASTER STA
R
PICKUP KEY
MASTER STA
TO ARRANGED
NOT
FOR HOLDING
®
C
RING SUP FOR
AUD SIG AT
CONTROLLED STA
R
B
TO
MASTER STA
ARRANGED
FOR HOLDING
HAND GEN IF
PROVIDED II
H
CR
CT
TO SIG KEY [G
AT MASTER
KEY STA
S
['"'
105V±
T
R
TO
BJ AUD SIG AT
R
MASTER STA
C
R
J
KEY AT
MASTER KEY
STATIONS t
14 TO 26
VOLTS DC
15
['"'
BAT.
16
II IF HAND GENERATOR PROVIDED, OMIT RINGING SUPPLY ON
OF K3 AND lliE 's" AND "G" LEADS ON
AND
OF K2
@)
®
® AND ®
tiN KEY TEL SETS CONNECT GN-W AND R-W CONDUCTORS TO CT TERM I NAL.
IN EXTERNAL KEYS STRAP CT AND LR TERMINALS. EXCEPT FOR THE 6040C
AND 6041C KEY STRAP THE CT AND ONI.
Fig. 7-56A Key Telephone Unit, Connections
Page 9
SECTION 518-112-420
BF
10
• ..-------4'
TO RING
~~~V~~:~
[-'G'0-'5-'"-::.·..,:J-+---,
7
2
It..:.
I 3
CT
I
516
3
I 8
7t I
I 6
"
~,'
8
••
T
I
TTO HAND
GEN (299F
SUBS)
~
,'~~~~
"~
WHEN RING
"!--tll
'O+ 175~1l
128
r---I
SUP IS
NOT
I
S-IIS,{l
PROVIDED
4M
10'
~
5-55.0.
12T
LI
1M
II
2M
~
5511
12
R
~t
P-5S.Q.
3M
7+ :
5+
."
6
7! I
8
I
I
R
I
2 UF
L-~~3
r..~l,~L.~---1-1~~+----1~--,~-+-1---1---------~~-~-If
TO CO
LINE CKT
I~
EQUIPPED
WITH
48V
BATTERY
R
1~2
2
I
S
P2-
son
1M
-
4M
3M
1M
2M PI-
5011
J.
~.
-
J
~t5
7A
BUZZER
L
1M
Al2
~f.
2r A
c..
0--
O-140nt
4M
1M
13
14
CR
CT
,
T
R
'-----'
7t
T
R
~
KEY AT A
TO PICKUP
TO KEYLESS STATIONS
KEY STATION
(NOTE I)
KEYS AT KEY
OR TO PICKUP KEYS AT-KEY
STATIONS NOT ARRANGED
FOR HOLDING
TEL STATIONS
•
\
lOt, P-22<1
T
R
3M
H
5-23.n
~~2
TO PICKUP KEYS AT KEY
STATIONS ARRANGED
FOR HOLDING
(NOTE 3)
Fig. 8--56A Key Telephone Unit, Schematic (Sheet 1)
Page 10
I
T-15.5.n
II
B
,
TO
SH 2
ISS 1, SECTION 518-112-420
,
"----,
-
T
2OO1l
6011Y KEY
2
B
3
RET COIL
J-
200n
4
--'
RI
3
'--
2
3
---.!1
4e
4301l
4T
Iil
2
/
T
4
3
5
/
~
I'HI'
634 YO SUBS WITH
104A INO COIL
GN
L2 GN
2
4
"
3
,-
eK
0.5 UF
eK
C
-
]
FROM
SH I
T~
"
r---i
@
c
TO 211F-3',
SL
~-
211G-3' OR
211£-3F
HAND TEL
SET OR
II
'----:.
II
EQUIVALENT
~
L'
(JF "
R
~BAT.
Y
Y
I
'6
RI
L,,~
s
0.5 UF
3 OR 4-112V
---lC
J~
J" - T~~
TO SIG KEY
AT KEY
STATIONS
WIo£N RING
372511
SUP IS
PROVIDED
,S
NOTES:
I.
IA) WHEN A KEY TEL SET I S USED AT THE KEY STATION, CONNECT
THE GR-W AND R-W C(JoINECTQRS OF THE KEY TEL SET TO TH E
CT TERMINAL.
leI WHEN A HAND TEL SET WI TH SEPARATELY MOUNTED. KEY 5 OTHER
THAN 6040C OR 604IC IS USED AT THE KEY STATION. 5TRA T HE CT AND
LR TERMINALS OF THE KEY. WHEN A 6040C OR 6041C KEY IS USED.
G
0
STRAP CT AND ONI TERMINALS OF KEY.
2. SIOETONE BALANCE IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL INSTRUCTIONS.
"J
e
9'4
I GRD
'------',
16
BAT.
i
@ 0"
TO AUD S'G
AT MASTER
STATION
©
3. CONNECT RINGER AND CAPACITOR OF KEY TEL SET TO T, AND R
TERMINALS IN SET.
o·
TS K2
0" TS K3
TO 14-26Y DC
POWER SUPPLY
Fig. 8-56A Key Telephone Unit, Schematic (Sheet 2)
Page 11
SECTION 518-112-420
~
A GRD
ro",
{
BATTERY
SUPPLY
19
A
B
r---2'lL---""I'--______--!I'
3TF
P-67lt
3BF
T}TO
ANDKEY
TEL CKT
~~~tc~-t-=4=B=R:1
~~:~~~:=7~~~__________________________________________-1~2~______~R ~;t~~~NS
20
A BAT.
;=
C GRD
OR G
24
r--r!"--",,,=..2------II~'
A
A O.SUF
100.11.
B 0.5UF
100~ 0
204E SELECTOR":"""I
~+I
C
bJ
'I f-,.-r
1-O-"'I--A,/'Vv--6-I--~-:~-~-A----.,--t='4O-'3~~] 10 N
TO
AUDIBLE
SIGNAL
POWER
SUPPLY
~
4-O--lI---'V'vv--<:>+.....!....".....~..... I' H
T;~~~;{
T
---.J
2
C BAT.•!. 25
OR 10SV:!:~
B
B} ;~ATlON
14
A
177K NETWORK
B
B
i'
·0....;5
5T
RLS
IL""M"-'
R'-M~
1'+
B
'IH'I
S-700n
4
~
R
16
R 3,
ASUIGDNIBALLE
.g..flL<4.~
5
I
\
~ fa....
/~i
10
2
--..l!.
IS
I
IB
R
s,
~f-!!-< 6 ..
~f-!!-<7
21
..
R
L......-I-04ll.-< B ..
TS A
9,
0 ...
STATION
NUMBERS
B GRD
~~T~~RY {
SUPPLY
B BAT,
~
I
4
21
22
BATOOR± 3
2
1. 3
A
A
I,OOQUF
30.n
L}
KS-1391B
IBJ
TO LAMP {
~~~pEL~
~~GNAL
LAMP
rl-o-t-__--'L""'G
GRD OR G 4
-
-
NOTE. SECOND SELECTOR !lA"
NOT SHOWN, USED ONLY WHEN
FLASHING LINE LAMP IS PROVIDED
Fig. 9--57A Key Telephone Unit, Schematic
Page 12
12 Pages
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT&TCo Standard
SECTION 518-112-421
ISlue 2, November 1973
SERVICE
1A KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
TIE LINE AND CONTROL SERVICES
1.
GENERAL
This section provides connection information
for the various key telephone units that
furnish tie line and control services for the lA Key
Telephone System. A schematic and connection
figure is shown for each key telephone unit.
Because of the many configurations of key telephone
units possible, no attempt is made to show the
various configurations; however, the key telephone
units are grouped according to the services they
provide.
1.01
1.02
reference should be made to the SDs and CDs to
determine the extent of the changes and the
manner in which the section may be affected.
2.
CONNECTION INDEX
Tie Line Service
Fig. 1-7A Key Telephone Unit, Private Line
Circuit
Fig. 41A, IB and IC (MD) Key Telephone
Units, Hold Circui~
This section is reissued to:
• Reinstate l7B KTU and show l7C KTU MD.
Fig. 3-2A and 12B Key Telephone Units,
Battery Feed Circuit
• Add lC KTU which is MD.
Fig. 4-5A Key Telephone Unit, Auxiliary
Hold Circuit
• Reyise Fig. 2, 8, 10, and 14.
1.03
Note: A small quantity of lC and l7C KTUs
have been manufactured. They may be used
as direct replacements for lB and l7B KTU s
except that only two l7C KTUs may be used
in a 105-type apparatus box.
Fig. 5-6B and 6C Key Telephone Units,
Supervisory and Busy Lamp Circuit
This issue of the section is based on the
following drawings:
Fig. 7-l4A Key Telephone Unit, Ringup Relay
Circuit
SD-6909l-0l-Key Telephone System No.
lA, Line and Signaling Circuit
Fig. 8-l5D Key Telephone Unit, Ringup Relay
Circuit (Dual Type)
SD-694l9-0l-Key Telephone System No.
lA, Incoming CO or PBX Line Make Busy
Lamp and Key Circuit
Fig. 9-16A Key Telephone Unit, Common
Audible Control and Lamp Relay Circuit
Fig. 6-l0A Key Telephone Unit, Automatic
Exclusion Circuit
SD-69105-01-Key Telephone System No.
lA, Private Line Circuit
Fig. l417B and l7C (MD) Key Telephone
Unit, Switching Relay and Lamp
Control Circui~
SD-69140-01-Key Telephone System No.
lA, Automatic Exclusion Circuit
Fig. 11-18D and 18E Key Telephone Units,
Busy and Supervisory Relay Circuits
If this section is to be used with equipment or
Fig. 12-19B Key Telephone Unit, Lamp Flashing
Circuit
apparatus reflecting later issues of the drawings,
® American Telephone and Telegraph Company, 1973
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
SECTION 518-112-421
Fig. I3-20A Key Telephone Unit, Common
Audible Control Circuit
TO PL CKT AT
DISTANT END
{"----+-{:
Fig. I4-23A Key Telephone Unit, Noise
Suppression Circuit
Fig. I5---25B (Automatic Cutoff Control Circuit)
and 26B (Automatic Cutoff Circuit)
Key Telephone Units Arranged for
Automatic Cutoff of CO, PBX, or
Private Line Circuits
}--+_--'S'-} TO SIGNALING
KEY
TO BAl: FEED
CKT OR 20{
VOLT TALK ON
J86731A POWER
PLANT
BAT.
GRD
B } TO AUDIBLE
SIGNAL OR
SIGNALING CKT
Fig. 1S-30A Key Telephone Unit, Time-Out
Circuit
>-+-_....:.:..R
GRD
Fig. I7-3IA Key Telephone Unit, Battery
Feed Relay Circuit
TO RINGING
SUPPLY
{
Fig. I8-33A Key Telephone Unit, Lamp Wink
Circuit
TO 14 TO 26
VOLTS DC
{ __
105V
1:
+--<
CONNECTIONS
Fig. I9-34A Key Telephone Unit, Make Busy
Lamp and Key Circuit
8
H 8T
12
(~---o
g___~2~:_L~3 2UF
10
4T~tl
g
01
~
48
~
2,
450tl.
7
~t~R
o
"
1-(- -.....0
2 UF
SCHEMATIC
Fig. 1-7A Key Telephone Unit, Private Line Circuit
Page 2
ISS 2, SECTION 518-112-421
H
A
I
0
T-15.511
4M
2
Q
0
3M
5-2311
3
R
0
R } TO STATIONS
NOT ARRANGED
T
FOR HOLDING
2M
9
R
T
P-2211
1A KTU - SCHEMATIC
T
TO STATIONS
ARRANGED FOR
HOLDING
OR
THROUGH
SIGNALING
CKT,6B,6C
OR laD,laE
140
Il
8
0
TO CO OR
PBX LINE
CKT DIRECT
1M
R2
B
T2
H
8
KS-13486
60UF
"}
T4
T
B
TO AUTO.
CUTOFF CONTROL
CKT
6
18 KTU- SCHEMATIC
H
CONNECTIONS
B
2
KS-13486
60UF
8
6
IC (MDI KTU-SCHEMATIC
.Flg, 2-1A, lB, and lC (MD) Key Telephone Units, Hold Circuit.
Page 3
SECTION 518-112-421
t t p~F
GRD
TO DC
POWER
{
.
BAT.
SUPPLY
PI
~ ~
R}
TO STATIONS ARRANGED
TO PICK UP INTERCOM
LINE OR PL CKT
}-+-_-,Tc..
2A KTU BS.n.
2A KTU 85.n.
12 B KTU 2S.n.
12 B KTU 25Jl.
02
06
CONNECT IONS
07
09
08
SCHEMATIC
Fig. 3-2A and 128 Key Telephone Units, BaHery Feed Circuit
f'
TO CO OR
PBX LINE OR
PL CKT
TO HOLD {H
CKT
.:.B_-t--{
R
T } TO TEL CKT
TI
T4}
TO EXCLUSION KEY AT
RI} STATION NOT ARRANGED
TI
T
~~;~~~~~~ OR
R2
n
TO
TO PICKUP KEY AT
TO HOLD CKT
fAT..
TO LAMP
POWER
SUPPLY
±
GRD
EXCLUDED OR CUTOFF
B
KEY STATIONS ARRANGED
FOR HOLDING
{
TO 14A KTU
RINGUP CKT
TO CUTOFF KEY
}--1---)- OR
GRD
CONNECTIONS
CONNECTIONS
56
0
LI
2M
3
0
4
0
2
0
I
0
2
~'M
~
~I
•3
At
B
7
0
7
25!l.
8
9
0
~
2M~
5
0
4
0
2S.n.tCVIM
1~2
3r:l,
I
A
02
8
8
SCHEMATIC
SCHEMATIC
Fig. 4-5A Key Telephone Unit, Auxiliary Hold Circuit
Fig. 5-68 and 6C Key Telephone Units, Supervisory
and Busy Lamp Circuit
Page 4
ISS 2, SECTION 518-112-421
TO 14-TO 26- {GRD
VOLT DC
POWER SUPPLY
.!B",A,,"J.~_ _+-~
L}
LG
GR.
TO L.AMP POWER
SUPPLY
{
BAT.
OR
!
MULTIPLE TO
R
TO CO OR PBX j..!....4-:- + - (
LINE DIRECT
OR THROUGH
~W~~t'~GCW
}
1--+_..!B!..
TO LINE
LAMPS
}
R} TO AUOIBLE
O
SIGNAL
GR.
TO AUDIBLE
SIGNAL
{
g~T" t.
\.)--,--
105V:t
POWER SUPPLY
..:B,--+_ _+-~
OTHER RINGUP
RELAYS
TO RINGER AT
EXCLUDED
STATIONS
R'
j
H
TO CO, PBX, {
OR PL CKT
:I
R
T
}-+_..!B!..
Tt
CONNECTIONS
FOR SEPARATE LINE LAMPS AND
COMMON AUDIBLE SIGNAL. NONLOCKED-IN
TO STATIONS
TO BE
EXCLUDED
l---I-_~H
CONNECTIONS
0)- VOLT
TERM. e OF
TIME-OUT CKT
R'
TO CO OR PBX
{
UNE CKT
Tt
CONNECTIONS
FOR CONTROLLED UNE L.AMPS AND
COMMON AUDIBLE SIGNAL LOCKED - IN
5
EI
6<>-r-j; 5
II
J>-______=....!IC>il;..2=----,~
18 B 3
' ,-,4----.0
6
0
6
3M
3
0
7
1M
S-1350n
09
0
1M
9
25.lt
5
R
O--J
IUF
SCHEMATIC
Fig. 6--10A Key Telephone Unit, Automotic Exclusion
Circuit
4M
4
I
SCHEMATIC
Fig. 7-14A Key Telephone Unit, Ringup Reloy Circuit
Page 5
SECTION 518-112-421
TO LAMP
POWER SUPPLY
LG}
{~~r ±
TO LAMP
TO LINE
LAMP
L
L
r ~~ ~~R:T~
B)- ~~:LASHING
POWER SUPPLY
GRD
TO 14 TO 26
. } VOLTS DC OR
TERM. 8 OF
TIME-OUT CKT
~4~T~~~~OLT
-( GRD
DC SUPPLY
1.
F
TO TERM. 5
OF 18E KTU
TO TERM. 7 OF
7 AND 2)-
~~OE~~~~.C2K~F
FLASHING CK T
BAl.,
L
.r
t.
:O.±
{
TO AUDIBLE
SIGNAL
TO TERM. 7
OF IBE KTU
g=r,t,
IOSY
}
{
MULTIPLE TO
OTHER RINGUP
CIRCUITS
POWER SUPPLY
TO AUDIBLE
SIGNAL
POWER
SUPPLY
GRD
GRD
R'
TO CO, PBX, {
OR PL CKT
R'
TO CD, PBX, {
TI
OR PI.. CKT
CONNECTIONS
FOR CONTROLLED LINE LAMPS AND
COMMON AUDIBLE SIGNAL LOCKED-IN
TO LAMP
POWER SUPPLY
{
{
SIGNAL
POW'ER SUPPLY
GRO
LG}
CONNECTIONS
FOR CONTROLLED COMBINED LINE AND
BUSY LAMPS AND COMMON AUDIBLE SIONAL
6;
TO LINE
LAMPS
6 R
Z~T.· ±
,~O,
±
}
TO CD, PBX,
{
SIGNAL
317A VARISTOR
CONNECTIONS
FOR SEPA,RATE LINE LAMPS AND
COMMON AUDIBLE SIGNAL NONLOCKEO·IN
SCHEMATIC
• Fig•. 8--150 Key Telephone Unit, Ringup Relay Circuit (Dual Type).
Page 6
0
3
5BF
p-475n
6: B: R1tP
L______-J-----:
~--~6C!.T!lR..:j S-3200n
R'
TI
4
I
5TF
GRD
R
4
oY>2
3~
MULTIPLE TO
OTHER RINGUP
RELAY
B} TO AUDIBLE
OR PI.. CKT
TI
g~T±
L
TO AUDIBLE
±
ISS 2, SECTION 518-112-421
TO LI NE CKT
WI TH DC LAMP [
SUPPLY
TO LAMP
POWER
SUPPLY AT
CONNECTI NG
KEY TEL SYS
OR KEY EQU I P.
LG
LG
TO LI NE CKT
WI TH DC LAMP [
SUPPLY
LOR B
[
BAT.
GRD
LG
J
LOR B
}-+..:::....:.:;-"CONNECT I ONS fOR
LAMP RELAY CIRCUIT
TO SIGNAL LAMP
AT CONNECTI NG
KEY TEL SYS OR
KEY EQUIP. DIRECT
OR THROUGH
LAMP RESISTANCE
UNIT
L OR B
TO LAMP
POWER
[
SUPPLY AT
CONNECT I NG
KEY TEL SYS
OR KEY EQU I P.
BAT.
J
TO SIGNAL LAMP
GRD
LG
LOR B
6)-+"::"":':;"":""
CONNECT IONS fOR
LAMP RELAY CIRCUIT
AT CONNECTI NG
KEY TEL SYS OR
KEY EQUIP. DIRECT
OR THROUGH
LAMP RES I STANCE
UNIT
I ST LEAD
TO BE
TRANSfERRED
}-+----
TO GRD
~~R~~~~ YKEY
_ _ _+--{
CIRCUITS
}-+---- ~~ ~1~~Os~;;~~LT
±. +
BAT.,
R 105 V _
TO AUDIBLE
}-+---- ~:~E N~~~ALL Y
{
SIGNAL
POWER SUPPLY
I ST TRANSfERRED
LEAD
B}
GRD
>-+-__R,,-
TO AUDIBLE
SIGNAL
2ND LEAD
TO BE
TRANSfERRED
2ND TRANSfERRED
LEAD
>-+-,Se..T!...) TO TERM. 8
OF 18E KTU
CONNECTIONS fOR
SWITCHING RELAY
CIRCUIT
,-+--"G",RD,,-,-- TO LOCAL
r
'/
SIGNAL GRO
CONNECTIONS FOR
COMMON AUDIBLE
CONTROL CIRCUIT
SCHEMATI C
17B KTU
4
0
I
0
9
0
2
0
4
27B
VARISTOR
5
sw
20---£3
t
4T
70011
I
0
4B
0
6
0
3
0
, I
7
0
f3
0
B
17C (MO) KTU
18
SW
5
4 _ _ _":'::"''£"8--<0
0' 8
6
~L_ _ _O
~
500a
7
CONNECT THIS LEAD
UNDER SCREW TERM
SCHEMATIC
Fig. 9-16A Key Telephone Unit, Common Audible
Control and Lamp Relay Circuit
9
,...- - -....0
~~---~c~--r-rL_6____~g
o
.Fig. 10--178 and 17C (MD) Key Telephone Units,
Switching Relay and Lamp Control Circuit.
Page 7
SECTION 518-112-421
TO KEY TEL -( HA
SYS
GRD
TO 14-TO 26VOLT DC
POWER SUPPLY
{
IAI
TO RINGUP CKT
-(..::2.....l..-+_<
BAT.
TO 14-TO Z6-VOLT
DC POWER SUPPLY
{GRD
-=B:.::A",T.-+_-(
SR )- TO AUTO.
CUTOFF CKT
':1
IO~-f-":':}
TO TIME-OUT CKT
I~}-
f---=:}
)-__f-~:}
TO TERM. 5 OF
-(
ISO KTU OR
TERM. 7 OF 14A KTU
TO LAMP POWER
SUPPLY FOR
COMBINED LINE
AND BUSY LAMPS
-(
TO TERM. 9 -(
OF 150 KTU
}--+_-=: }
TO LOCAL GRD OR -(
TERM.4 OF 16A KTU
14~-f---=:
{
}
f---=:}
T2} TO TELEPHONE CKT,
R2
HOLD CKT, OR
AUTO. CUTOFF
CONTROL CKT
RI
TO CO, PBX, OR
PL CKT
__
I:}-__
1ST CKT
2ND CKT
3RD CKT
4TH CKT
5TH CKT
6TH CKT
T4
TI
CONNECTIONS
TO FLASHiNG CKT
L )- FOR COMBINED LINE
AND BUSY LAMPS
CONNECTIONS
B
SCHEMATIC
SCHEMATIC
Fig. 11-18D and 18E Key Telephone Units, Busy
and Supervisory Relay Circuits
Fig. 12-198 Key Telephone Unit, Lamp Flashing
Circuit
Page 8
ISS 2, SECTION 518-112-421
±.+
TO AUDIBLE
SIGNAL
POWER SUPPLY
BAT.•
OR 10:5 V_
{
GRO
B} TO AUOIBLE
R
SIGNAL
'I
I
TO BAT.
SUPPLY
LEADS
{::mRO
I
BAT.
3
TO SUPERVISORY
RELAY
GRO} TO
14- TO 26- VOLT
DC GRD THROUGH
CONNECTIONS
CUTOFF KEY
CONNECTIONS
3
AU
6
0
I
0
2
0
S
0
4
0
2MI'~.n
'1t"A
3
0
7
0
8
0
9
0
1
[
NS
KS-14136
SOO UF
9
0
8
0
7
02
04
05
06
0
SCHEMATIC
SCHEMATIC
Fig. 13-20A Key Telephone Unit, Common Audible
Control Circuit
• Fig. 14-23A Key Telephone Unit, Noi.e Suppre•• ion.
Circuit
Page 9
SECTION
518-112~1
T
5
TO LINE OR
LINE AND
SIGNALING
0
6
0
" } TO OTHE"
T
2&8 KTU
CKT
4 CT
(0
1t 3
4
6°
I .1
3
58
0
~
9
0
10
0
I
5
7
0
S
"'
:1
B
TO P'CKUP
KEYS
AT
2
KEY OR
KEYLESS
STATIONS
258 KTU-SCHEMATIC
H
T'
TO SUPERVISORY
=f~:JpC:;l~~ {~.~"--4-----4-------------------------------~
RELEASE CKT
S" }
A
{"'
'"0 {"'
•••
,ND
2 ••
KTU
KTU
•••
KTU
6
TI
"'
3
9: I
3
I
I
I
II
iii
II
4
"
2
LlJ
TI
3
I
5
I
7 I
9 I
2
268 KTU
CONNECTIONS
258 KTU
CONNECTIONS
13
14
4
15
6
16
8
17
10
I
I
12cJ,...!U
GRD
~
6
13~n 300n
TI
2
10
7 :
dPl3T
BATO
TO 14-TO 26- {
VOLT DC BAT.
1I~12
5:
5TH
KTU
r--------------------------,
~
TI
{
"'
••• {
4TH
TO OTHER
2$8 KTU
Ii
°b
268 KTU - SCHEMATIC
HOTES:
cur
I.
IP AND II WIRING fOR STATIONS WICH CAN
2.
IP AND ZJ WIRING FOR STATIONS WHICH CANNOT CUT OFf OTHER STATIONS,
BUT CAN BE CUT OFF EXCEPT WHEN ON THE LINE.
a.
OFF OTHER STATIONS.
ZJ WIRING fOR STATIONS WHICH CANNOT CUT Off OTHER STATIONS, BUT
CAN BE CUT OFF AT ANY TIME.
Fig. 15-251 (Automatic Cutoff Control Circuit) and 261 (Automatic Cutoff Circuit) Key Telephone Units
Arranged for Automatic CutoH of CO, PBX or Private Line Circuits
Page 10
ISS 2, SECTION 518-112-421
: : : : 17} TO SELECTOR,
PL, CO, OR PBX
SIGNALING CKT
LK OR 8
TO 14 TO 26 -(~B~A~T.'---I-='
VOLTS DC
5
31::2
n
~,--_ _ _...!ILJt
3BF
b
4TFiJSOO11.
5
6_---:..:.T::,.R
'VIA 4 BR
~
3
0
~
11211.
~
CONNECTIONS
SCHEMATIC
Fig. 16-30A Key Telephone Unit, Time-Out Circuit
TO BAT. OR
{
GRO
20-VOLT TALK
~~;E~6~il:NT
~B~Ac!;T.:......_-I-"(
R}
T
TO STATIONS
ARRANGED TO
PICK UP
INTERCOM LINE
BAT.OR!
TO LAMP
POWER
{
SUPPLY
.:G:::R:::O_ _4-...(
LG} TO BUSY
L
LAMP CKT
5
0
4
0
2
0
I
GR D {
BF
I",J2
4 I
6~3
°Tt5
7TF
.:;G:::R::;:O_ _-I--I
5-10011.
CO) TO TIME-OUT
CKT
CONNECTIONS
II
0
6
0
4
5BF
P-IOO11.
6BR
eTR
oJ! 3
~cJ9l
10
0
7
0
8
3
9
12
0
SCHEMATIC
Fig. 17-31A Key Telephone Unit, Battery Feed Relay Circuit
Page 11
SECTION 518-112-421
r------,
(SEE NOTE)
MULT TO OTHER
KEY ASSEMBLIES
IF PROVIDED
J~~~~~
±
6 l-+-"-='-"=OR LB
LB} 1ST
CKT
LW
r4~~~L~G~_-4-{
"~_~G~R~D_
FOR LAMPS
LB} Z NO
LW
CKT
GRD
LB} 3 RD
LW
CKT
~
®
TB
LB} 4TH
CKT
LOCAL GRD
-2-]
TI
CO OR PBX
COM EQUIP
CKT
RI
LW
TS
34A
CONNECTIONS
LB} 5 TH
LW
CKT
TO 19B KTU
:: ' i t
-=----1.....(
M4
~
07
:
:~
0 '
M8
14-TO 26BAT. \. VOLT DC
fPOWER
SUPPLY
CONNECTIONS
IL
P-IOO
IU
2L
2U
s-Ioon
SCHEMATIC
NOTE'
A KEY ASSEMBLY IS REQUIRED AT EACH STATION
ORIGINATING THIS CIRCUIT. KEY ASSEMBLIES
CONTROLLING THE SAME LINE OR GROUP OF LINES
MAY BE MULTI PLED. KEY ASSEMBLIES MUST BE
ASSEMBLED IN THE FIELD. ORDERING INFORMATION
IS AS FOLLOWS'
• CAP, LAMP, 2S (GREEN)
• KEY, 552M (NONLOCKING)
• MOUNTING, JACK, 255A
• SOCKET, LAMP, 478
Fig_ 19-34A Key Telephone Unit, Make Busy Lamp
and Key Circuit
SCHEMATIC
Flg_ 18-33A Key Telephone Unit, Lamp Wink Circuit
Page 12
12 Pages
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
Plant Series
SECTION 518-112-422
Issue I, July 1970
AT&TCa Standard
SERVICE
1A KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
INTERCOM SERVICES
1.
.518 Division, Section entitled "Service-1 A
50-Type Packaged Units"
GENERAL
This section provides connection information
for the signaling and cut-through key telephone
units used in intercom service arrangements for
the 1A Key Telephone System. A schematic and
connection figure is shown for each key telephone
unit.
1.01
.518 Division, Section entitled "Service-l A
Tie Line and Control Services"
2.
CONNECTION INDEX
Information in this section was formerly
contained in Sections 518-112-404, 518-112-409
and 518-112-416 which are hereby canceled.
Fig. 1-3A Key Telephone Unit, Intercommunicaticating Signaling Circuit
For additional connection information, refer
to the following:
Fig. 2-13C Key Telephone Unit, Automatic
Signaling Intercommunicating Circuit
.SD-69l99-0l-Key Telephone System No.
lA, Intercommunicating Line Circuit
Fig. 3-29A Key Telephone Unit (Cut-Through
Relay Circuit) with 6C, 25B, and 26B
KTUs Arranged for Automatic Cutoff
and/ or Flashing Line Lamps for Intercom
Line with Dial Selection of Stations.
1.02
1.03
.SD-6909l-Key Telephone System No. lA,
Line and Signaling Circuit
ORO
TO 14-TO 26-VOLT {
DC SUPPLY
S
9
0
8
0
BAT.
4
TO SIGNAL KEY
2
BI
-( S
7
BI
1000n.
7B
2
A
6
BI
BI
g7T
0
TO AUDIBLE
SIGNAL AS
REQUIRED
2
0
5
0
4
0
BI
SCHEMATIC
BI
CONNECTI ONS
Fig. 1-3A Key Telephane Unit, Intercommunicating ,Signaling Circuit
(c) American Telephone and Telegraph Company, 1970
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
SECTION 518-112-422
14-TO 26-VOLT
POWER SUPPLY
D~
GRD
BAt
.-"'=-+--{
~I
:
TO FLASHING
CKT OR
SIGNALING CKT
61
7
2
6 .,-0------0
L } TO BUSY OR
COMBINED
LINE AND
J-+-t_",LG=~¥:\LAMPS
1 5
4
3
I
68F
2
14
8TF
II
LAMP POWER
SUPPLY
{ :::
±
OR
BAt.t.
OR
105V
L } TO BUSY OR
COMBINED
LINE AND
BUSY LAMPS
STA B
±
P200Jl.
4
10
6
12
TO AUDIBLE
SIGNAL
POWER SUPPLY
LG
{
GR
B }
>--Hf----,R,,-
TO AUDIBLE
SIGNAL
STA A
B
07
9
}
TO AUDIBLE
SIGNAL
STA B
}
TO KEY OR
KEYLESS STA
STA A
J-+-__..!R!..
SCHEMATIC
R
>-t-_ _T:..
R } TO KEY OR
KEYLESS STA
STA B
>-t-_ _T:..
CONNECTIONS
Fig. 2-13C Key Telephone Unit, Automatic Signaling Intercommunicating Circuit
Page 2
ISS I, SECTION 518-112-422
TO
AUXILIARY
268 KTU
WHEN
REQUIRED
TO
SELECTOR
CKT
TO P,CKUP
AT KEy OR
} KEYLESS
STA
R}ro
PICKUP
AT KEY OR
T
KEYLESS
STA
29A KTU-SCHEMATIC
T'
~~~-----+----~-------+----~~®r---~
TO
RI
2ND {
258
KTU
TI
TO
SELECTOR
CKT
TO {RI
3RO
258
KTU
TO
TI
RI
8}
4TH {
2ee
TI
"TU
TO
5TH
258
KTU
A
OR 2
{R'
L
TI
TO
POWER
SUPPLY
FOR
LAMPS
TO 14-TO 26- {BAT.
VOLT DC
POWER
SUPPLY
TO
FLASHING
CKT
l} ~~NAL
{BAT,
"G",RD"-+_ _~r--=-L"G
LAMPS
GRD
2~B
KTU
26B KTU
6C KTU
29A KTU
CONNECTIONS
M WIRING
AUToMATIC CUTOFF WITHOUT FLASHING LINE LAMPS PROVIDES ONE 259 KTU PER
STATION AND 268 KTU PER fiVE STATIONS.
X WIRING
FLASHING LINE LAMPS WITHOUT AUTOMATIC CUTOFF PROVIDE ONE 6C AJND ONE
W WIRING
~~!~~~Tl~N~U~~~F:JT~TGL:i~~~N~I~~R L~~~SS~:~~~~SAZ~~N2E5~91T~+JR
29A1 KTU PER STATION.
PER STATION.
Fig. 3-29A Key Telephone Unit (Cut Through Relay Circuit) with 6C, 258 and 268 Key Telephone Units
Arranged for Automatic Cutoff and/or Flashing Line lamps for Intercom Line with Dial Selection ot
Stations
Page 3
3 Pages
SECTION 518-114-11 0
Issue 3, October 1972
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT&TCo Standard
REFERENCE
1A 1 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
KEY TELEPHONE UNITS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
PAGE
1.
GENERAL
2
2.
10ENTIFICATION
2
201C KTU (Fuse Unit)
2
202A (MO), 202B (MO), 202C (MO)
and 2020 KTUs (CO or PBX Line
Circuit)
PAGE
230A (MO) and 230B KTU (CO or
PBX Line Circuits)
4
232A (MO) and 232B KTU
(Electro-Mechanical Flash, Wink, Ring
and Time-Out Circuit)
•••••
4
233A (MO) KTU (CO or PBX Line
Circuits)
4
237B KTU (Bridging Circuit)
4
3
203A KTU (Automatic Tie Line Circuit)
3
238A KTU (CO or PBX Line Circuits)
4
204A KTU (Ringdown Tie Line Circuit)
3
239A KTU (CO or PBX Line Circuits)
5
205A KTU (Station Line Circuit)
3
26B KTU (Automatic Cutoff Circuit)
207B (MO) and 207C KTU (Selector
Circuit)
3
5
29A KTU (Cut Through Relay Circuit)
5
208A KTU (Signaling Unit for Flashing
Line Lamps)
••.•••..
3
209A (MO) KTU (Lamp Flashing and
Time-Out Circuit)
3
210A KTU (Wink Circuit)
4
30A KTU (Time-Out Circuit)
5
Functional Schematics
211A KTU (Intercom Line Circuit,
Ringing Lamp Circuit, Noise Suppression
Circuit and Audible Signal Control
Circuit) • • • • • • • • • . •
Fig. 1-201C KTU (Fuse Unit)
5
Fig. 2-202A (MO) and 202B (MO)
KTU (CO or PBX Line Circuit)
6
Fig. 3-202C (MO) and 230A (MO)
KTU (CO or PBX Line Circuits)
7
Fig. 4-2020, 230B, 238A (Line Circuit
Portion) and 239A KTUs (CO or PBX
Line Circuits)
8
Fig. 5-203A KTU (Automatic Tie Line
Circuit) • • • • • • • • • . ,
9
4
212A (MO) KTU (CO or PBX Line
Circuits with Lamp Flashing and Incoming
Signals Time-Out Circuits)
••••
4
227B KTU (Common Audible Control
Circuit).
4
228A KTU (Blank Unit)
4
© American Telephone and Telegraph Company, 1972
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
:...................•.•........•..............•..•....••..•.•..••..••.•.............•..................•.••.....:
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT&TCo Standard
:~
•:
REPLACING PAGE ADDENDUM
:.
Filing Instructions:
1;
I. REMOVE FROM THE SECTION THE PAlES NUMIUED THE SAME •
AS THOSE ATTACHED TO THIS PINK SHEET.
'~':.,
2. INSERT THE ATfACHED PA8ES INTO THE SECTION IN THEIR PLACE.
ADDENDUM 518-114-11 0
Issue 3, August 1974
~. . ~:. ~~.~~. ~~~. ~~~.~.~~~.~. ~~. ~~. ~~~~. ~. ~~. ~~.~~~.~~~~:. . . . J
REFERENCE
1A 1 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
KEY TELEPHONE UNITS
1.
2.
GENERAL
This addendum supplements Section
518-114-110, Issue 3. The attached pages
must be inserted in the section in accordance with
the filing instructions above.
IDENTIFICATION
The following changes apply to Part 2 of the
section:
1.001
1.002
This addendum is issued to:
(a) Fig. 3-revised
(b) Fig. 4-revised
(a) Correct Fig. 3
(c) Fig. 7-revised
(b) Correct Fig. 4
(d) Fig. 8-revised
(c) Correct Fig. 7
(e) Fig. 14-revised
(d) Modify Note 3 of Fig. 8
(e) Correct Fig. 14 to show 232C KTU.
Attached:
Page 7 dated August 1974, revised
Page 8 dated August 1974, revised
Page 11 dated August 1974, revised
Page 12 dated August 1974, revised
Page 19 dated August 1974, revised
Page 20 dated August 1974, reissued
Page 23 dated November 1973, revised
Page 24 dated November 1973, reissued
@ American Telephone and Telegraph Company, 1972, l!l7:l, 1!)74
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
1 Page and Attachments
SECTION 518-114-110
CONTENTS
PAGE
Fig. 6-204A KTU (Ringdown Tie Line
Circuit)
. . . . . . . . . . .
10
refer to Section 518-114-105 for identification and
arrangements and Section 518-114-425 for connections.
This section is reissued to:
1.02
• Revise KTU schematics
Fig. 7-205A KTU (Station Line Circuit)
11
• Rearrange text.
Fig. 8-2071 (MO) and 207C KTU
(Selector Circuit)
.......
12
Fig. 9-208A KTU (Signaling Unit for
Flashing Line Lamps)
... . . .
13
Fig. 10-209A (MO) KTU (Lamp Flashing
and Time-Out Circuit)
14
Fig. 11-210A KTU (Wink Circuit)
15
Fig. 12-211A KTU (Intercom Line
Circuit, Ringing Lamp Circuit, Noise
Suppression Circuit and Audible Signal
........
Control Circuit)
16
This issue of the section is based on the
following drawings:
1.03
SD-69203-01, Issue 7B
.SD-69288-01, Issue 18D.
If this section is to be used with equipment or
Fig. 13-212A (MO) KTU (CO or PIX
Line Circuits with Lamp Flashing and
Incoming Signal Time-Out Circuits)
17
Fig. 14-232A (MO) and 2321 KTU
(Electro-Mechanical Flash, Wink, Ring
and Time-Out Circuit)
.....
19
apparatus reflecting later issues of the drawings,
reference should be made to the SDs and CDs to
determine the extent of the changes and the
manner in which the section may be affected.
2.
IOENTIFICATION
KTUs are individual circuit packages which
provide switching and control functions and
are arranged for panel mounting in standard
equipment cabinets or apparatus mountings.
2.01
The lAI Key Telephone System KTUs provide
the following station service features:
2.02
Fig. 15-233A (MO) KTU (CO or P8X
Line Circuits)
. . . ..
20
• Holding on CO, Centrex, or PBX lines
Fig. 16-238A KTU (CO or PIX Line
Circuits)
• Visual and audible line signals
22
• Manual and dial intercom
Fig. 17-261 KTU (Automatic Cutoff
Circuit) and 29A KTU (Cut Through
Relay Circuit)
........
23
Fig. 18-30A KTU (Time-Out Circuit)
..•..........
24
• Cutoff, exclusion, and selective privacy
• Time-out
• Private lines.
1.
GENERAL
This section identifies the key telephone
units (KTUs) used in the lAl Key Telephone
System. Functional schematics (Fig. 1 through 18
cover the basic circuitry of the KTU s and their
relationship with associated apparatus. For additional
information on the lAl, Key Telephone System,
1.01
Page 2
201C KTU (Fuse Unit)
2.03
fuses.
The 201C KTU ~Fig. 1) is a fuse mounting
unit arranged to mount seven No. 24-type
ISS 3, SECTION 518-114-110
202A (MO), 2021 (MO), 202C (MO), and 2020 KTUs
(CO or PIX Line Circuit)
205A KTU (Station Line Circuit)
2.10
2.04
These KTUs provide:
The 205A KTU (Fig. 7) is used on private
(tie) lines to provide:
• Line pickup
• Manual signaling toward the distant station
• Hold feature
• The control of other KTUs for visual signals
• The control of other KTUs for visual signaling
• Ringing options as shown in 2.07.
• Ringing options which include steady ringing,
interrupted ringing, and relay control of a
common audible signal.
One 205A KTU is required to serve both the
originating and terminating stations.
2078 (MO) and 207C KTU (Selector Circuit)
2.05
2.06
The 202A and 202B KTUs (Fig. 2) are
arranged for grounded ringing only.
The 202C (Fig. 3) and 202D KTUs (Fig. 4)
are arranged for metallic or grounded ringing.
The 207B and 207C KTUs (Fig. 8) are the
basic selector only intercom unit. The KTU s
provide:
2.11
• Station Selection
Ringing options are steady ringing, interrupted
ringing, and relay control of a common
audible signal.
2.07
• Busy Lamp
• Audible Signaling.
203A KTU (Auiomatic Tie Line Circuit)
2.08
The 203A KTU (Fig. 5) is used on private
(tie) lines to provide:
Each 207B or 207C KTU can serve nine stations.
208A KTU (Signaling Unit for Flashing Line Lamps)
2.12
• Automatic signaling to the called station
The 208A KTU (Fig. 9) is used on intercom
lines to control:
• Flashing and busy lamp signals at the called
station
• The control of the KTU s for visual signaling
• Ringing options as shown in 2.07.
• Time-out at the called station.
One 203A KTU is required at each end of the
private line.
204A KTU (Ringdown Tie Line Circuit)
2.09
The 204A KTU (Fig. 6) is used on private
(tie) lines to provide:
The 208A KTU serves three stations and is used
in conjunction with the 207B or 207C KTU.
209A (MO) KTU (Lamp Flashing and Time-Out Circuit)
2.13
The 209A KTU (Fig. 10) is used on CO or
PBX lines to provide:
• Manual signaling to the called station
• Interruption interval for flashing lamps
• The control of the KTUs for visual signaling
• Time-out of locked-in signals approximately
30 seconds after a call is abandoned.
• Ringing options as shown in 2.07.
One 204A KTU is required at each end of the
private line.
The 209A KTU can serve five lines when wink
option is provided and six lines when wink option
is not provided.
Page 3
SECTION 518-114-110
210A KTU (Wink Circuit)
230A (MO) and 230B KTU (CO or PBX Line Circuits)
2.14
The 210A KTU (Fig. 11) is used on CO or
PBX lines to provide the interruption interval
for the wink option.
2.20
211A KTU (Intercom Line Circuit, Ringing Lamp
Circuit, Noise Suppression Circuit and Audible Signal
Control Circuit)
232A (MO) or 232B KTU (Electro-Mechanical Flash,
Wink, Ring and Time-Out Circuit)
The 230A KTU (Fig. 3) is the equivalent of
five 202C line circuits, and the 230B KTU
(Fig. 4) is the equivalent of four 202D line circuits.
The 232A or 232B KTU (Fig. 14) plus the
associated interrupter provides the following
timing features:
2.21
2.15
The 211A KTU (Fig. 12) is used on intercom
lines to provide:
• Busy lamp (other signals must be provided
separately)
• Audible signals
• Lamp flash
• Protection against an overload of the ringing
supply
• Lamp wink
• Noise suppression circuit
• Busy tone
• Independent common audible control of two
lines to the same station.
• Audible ringback
• Time-out on abandoned call
• Busy lamp control for manual intercom line.
212A (MO) KTU (CO or PBX Line Circuits with Lamp
Flashing and Incoming Signal Time-Out Circuits)
233A (MO) KTU (CO or PBX Line Circuits)
The 212A KTU (Fig. 13) provides line pickup
on three CO or PBX lines and common
equipment for up to six lines.
2.16
227B KTU (Common Audible Control Circuit)
2.17
The 233A KTU (Fig. 15) is the equivalent
of ten 202C KTUs. Circuits terminate on
back of units in five KS-16671, List 1 plugs. A25B
connector cables must be used for cabling to
distributing frame or equivalent. Lamp fusing is
provided on the unit.
2.22
The 227B KTU contains three relays which
provide control for:
237B KTU (Bridging Circuit)
• Auxiliary lamp relay circuits
The 237B KTU provides an arrangement
for bridging two PBX lines for conferencing
purposes under control of an exclusion or nonlocking
key at a key telephone station.
2.23
• Multisignals, ie, buzzers, bells, or ringers
• Common audible signals (CO, Centrex, or
PBX line circuits).
2.24
2.18
Refer to Section 518-310-401 for additional
information on the 227B KTU.
Refer to Section 518-310-407 for additional
information on the 237B KTU.
238A KTU (CO or PBX Line Circuits)
228A KTU (Blank Unit)
The 238A KTU (Fig. 16) is the equivalent
of nine 202D (Fig. 4) KTUs. It also contains
circuitry to provide all the functions of the 232A
or 232B KTUs (See 2.21).
2.25
The 228A KTU is a blank unit with 40 screw
type terminals. It is used for miscellaneous
purposes.
2.19
Page 4
ISS 3, SECTION 518-114-110
239A KTU (CO or PBX Line Circuits)
The 239A KTU is the equivalent of eleven
202D (Fig. 4) KTUs. The 239A KTU is
arranged in line groups of 4-4-3 and each line
group can be associated with its own time-out and
auxiliary interrupter equipment.
2.26
268 KTU (Automotic Cutoff Circuit)
The 26B KTU (Fig. 17) disconnects cutoff
stations from CO or PBX lines under control
of the 25B KTU. One 26B KTU will serve five
cutoff stations.
2.27
TO LI NE
AND SIG
CKTS
GRD
The 29A KTU (Fig. 17) is used to provide
manual cutoff on CO or PBX lines.
30A KTU (Time-Out Circuit)
The 30A KTU (Fig. 18) provides system
time-out on abandoned calls. The KTU will
time-out approximately 20 seconds after the call is
abandoned.
GRD
GRD
29A KTU (Cut Through Reloy Circuit)
2.28
~*~
~*~
~*~
~*~
~*~
~*~
~ *~
TO
POWER
SUPPL Y
GRD
%:,
GRD
18
GRD
19
GRD
20
GRD
GRD
*
24-TYPE FUSES ARE NOT FURNISHED WITH THE KTU.
THEY MUST BE PRO V I OED LOCALLY.
2.29
Fig. 14Functionol Schematic of 20lC KTU (Fuse
Unit).
Page 5
SECTION 518-114-110
I (31)
CO OR [
PBX
LINE
·41
H
T
2B
3
r--
A
KS- 13490. L3
I
ill1
21321
R
~
H
2T
II 121
4B
...
B'f--i'l
R
;f'
15161
.
'~I
19 [51
C"~OI
I'
B
GD
TO RINGER OR
BUZZER OR
[RI. BZ OR CA
COMMON AUDIBLE
SIGNAL CONTROL
BI
CIRCUIT
SAT. OR GRD
i~;~~~
=--
.
l
B
~
13~1
RI
31,!,;;1
6B
rn~
4B
3
3
LAMP
SUPPLY
• OR BAT.
LB
Lr
J
J
R
Z
2T
l-j
LW
LB
Rf:T
REMOVE Z STRAP AND RUN
LEADS TO 210A KTU roR
WINK CIRCUIT WHEN US ED
4 [34]
~
~
[20]
3 [33]
TI
20z]
"1
~
~]
~
7,.]51
A
I
8
2B
LK
21 1271
L,~~2Bo--eQr------~T~0
Fig. 2-+Functional Schematic of 202A (MO) and 202B (MO) KTU (CO or PBX Line Circuit).
Page 6
TO 209A
OR 212A
KTU
T
H
.,H. . ., 5-H~. , 6T=- : ex;:7}: -:- - -":0-'-A.~
24 (381
I
2T
R
.-,.....,~:::---{CJ.t.)-------
[ ]'2028
TO 209A
OR 212A
KTU
~
f2! 1101
-"';;7
00
LG
26e ~191
4T
27Q
I
3;Ys]
38[29]
TO
[ B SAT.
00
POWER
[ )
SUPPLY _B_G_R_D_ _ _ _ _ _40 30
LG
H
l_:G_'0_5V_OR_
RG
L
26('181
rV,.
25i'i'
.;-,;.,.7)
R
32 [7]
;[;9]
AI
"t--02>---------
B
A
ST
TO KEY
AND TEL
CIRCUIT
~
5
TO AUD
SIGNAL CONT
R
A
....
I
6811
TO
211A
KTU
II)
9
:;
I OIA OR 10lB
KEY EQUIP Ir
P
;;';
KTU
ISS 3, SECTION 518-114-110
T:
I
IAH
A
II
I
10
~
~ ~ X ~~--~---5--~~~~H~~~-----8~-H--------------------------~o_~--'-AH
[
8
_R____
~
12";'
R
A
'~
4
TO TEL SET
~
'1f-111~
I
B
B
14
4
15
5
'I~
AH
A
L
ti:
13
29
~
LB
TO LAMP SUPPLY
"]
TO 210A, 232 TYPE,
R
19
Lr
LIO~--------~}-~~
t
TO AUD
C":\
\J/
f ~I'I,R ~9AE-:- --~____________________~~__________~________~
KTU
238A KTU
(NOTE)
AH
24
CO
21
HA
23
TO
TO 209A, 212A, 232 TYPE,
OR 238A
I
a
H
'I H~*--"<:'"t--0
rA_____
4
R
NOTE:
rOR THE 230A KTU THE rOLLOWING APPLI ES
CKT
CKT
CKT
CKT
I
2
3
4
TERM I NALS
TERM I NALS
TERM I NALS
TERM I NALS
ON
ON
ON
ON
18
lOlA OR B KEY EQlJI P.
Ir PROVIDED
TSA
TSB
TSC
TSD
INTERNAL STRAPS ON 230A KTU TERMINATED
ON TERM. STR I P A ONLY,
9
R
• OR BAT. OR
G~~
RINGER
10 RI OR BZ OR CA OR BUZZER
OR COM
AUO SIG.
25
RG
28
al OR aZI
J
TO AUD
S I G SUP
CONT CKT
J
27 B GRD
'I~
B
26
-20V~
DC POWER SUP
Fig. 3-4Functional Schematic of 202C (MD) and 230A (MD) KTU (CO or PBX Line Circuits).
Page 7
Revised August 1974
SECTION 518-114-110
T
II
7
j!NOTE 3)
H
CO OR PBX
LI NE
317131
I
T
(NOTE 3)
~
8
¢H
TO KEY
R
8
12
12
A
AH
A
8
TEL SET
2
R
13:;
A
14
AI
"H'I~
4
A f-9
4
"~
AH
A
2
8
5
L
~I:
LG
15
~ 29
LGJ
fOR BAT
TO LAMP SUPPLY
(NOTE I)
1(NOTE 4)
;;:r:
R
f.::\
17
,~
"~
\:Of
R
R
4
I
10
AH
STRIP A
ONLY.
4. STRAP BETWEEN TERMINALS 20 AND 29 IS FOR
STEADY HOLD LAMP AS REQUIRED.
LK
~
CO
~
HA
1
H
4
TO 209A,212A,
232 TYPE OR
23BA
~
I
4--(NOTE 2)
R
23
TO
~
8
8
.~
TO 210A, 232
TYPE, 238A KTU
LF
5
8
'I
3. TERMINALS SHOWN ARE FOR THE 2020 KTU (TYPICAL).
REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE CONNECTION SECTION FOR
TERMINAL NUMBERS FOR OTHER KTUS INVOLVED.
"J
19
AH
NOTES:
I. FOR LA MP BATTERY ON 2020, OR 2308 CKT I AND 2 USE
TERM. 2 9.
ON 2308 CKT 3 AND 4 USE TERM 28.
2. INTERNAL STRAPS ON 2308 KTU TERMINATED ON TERM.
~
H
18
H
J
"HIif--"*---+--0-----
TO lOlA OR B
KEY EQUIP. IF
PROV IDEO
"
±
9
OR BAT. OR GRO
1
R ~~R-,-0-R-8-Z-----~
OR CA
25
TOAUD
51 G SUP
RG
TO RINGER OR BUZZER
OR COM AUO SIG
81 OR aZI
~~J
26
-20V~
CONT CKT
DC POWER SUP
Fig. 4-.Functional Schematic of 2020, 230B, 238A (Line Circuit Portion) and 239A KTUs (CO or PBX Line
Circuits).
Page 8
Revised August 1974
ISS 3, SECTION 518-114-110
TO 01 STANT
STATION DR
SIMILAR
TIE-LINE
CIRCUIT AT
DISTANT
KEY
TELEPHONE
SYSTEM
TB
I' A
6T
TB
I'HI,A
4B
TO TEL SET
II
17
CD
TB
TB
~~-----G-=R'::"O ]
LI
co ~+---f---l
3T
LG
19
------<
q>-------'~-...
B
4T
31
CO>---;~-----I,~---::..c:-,,-,=--
2T
26
LB ]
TB
22
CO
;:2B
~f---------=T"--O
3
2T
I
-= B
L~L~I_ _ _ _2V5~_ _ _ _ _...!L::.F_
TO 209A,
4
212A,232A OR
5T
I
B!
2B
r: .'
@t
OPTIONS:
STEADY COMMON AUDIBLE SIGNAL USING
COMMON AUDIBLE SIGNAL CONTROL CIRCUIT
(211A OR 16A KTU).
INTERRUPTED AUDIBLE SIGNAL OR COMMON
AUD IBLE SIGNAL US I NG ELECTROMECHAN I CAL
INTERRUPTER (232B OR 238A KTU).
STEADY AUDIBLE SIGNAL OR COMMON
AUDIBLE SIGNAL.
INTERRUPTED COMMON AUDIBLE SIGNAL
USING RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT (227A AND
232B OR 238A KTU).
33
®
LI
37
°
o
.c
0t
A
B OR BI
GRD OR RG
t, BAT.,
OR I 05V t
0 !®
0 y l ,B
6 _ ---------__
0If'1S"-_ _ _ _
RO
B
~
'1r=----! 11
B_G_R_O_
7
13
r---u------,-0--QlI--------=- ~~Y SIGNAL
-v3}-2_ _ _< ......:@=-__C_A_I_T0227B
@t
r -_ _
2T
RI
KTU
t=::: ::: J~J"
37
0
t
GRD OR RG
J
±,
0I
BAT.,
OR 105V ±
®____
RN
'----v'r----< ......::::
36
@t
Fig. ~Functional Schematic of 204A KTU (Ringdown Tie Line Circuit).
Page 10
KTU
·A· BAT,]
::1-;
INTERRUPTEO AUDIBLE SIGNAL OR COMMON
AUDIBLE SIGNAL USING ELECTROMECHANICAL
INTERRUPTER (2328 OR 238A KTU j.
5 I GNAL.
•
• /,;;\
_._I!!/
_ _ _R_
23
'I~II~
OPT IONS
® STEADY
®
R
TO LAMP
POWER
SUPPLY
TO AUO
~~~~:L
SUPPLY
232A OR
OR 238A
s,
ISS 3, SECTION 518-114-110
T
TO DISTANT
STATION
RO
5
[
T
6T
4
RO
2
TO AUD
S I G SUP
[
A
I' A
IIH'
~,A
Uf
I· A
IIHI'
4
3B
Uf
RING GRD
"
R
TO TEL SET
19
I05t
CO
':*
LI
3B
LI
B
IIHI'
5T
LG
17
L
},5
Lf
26
LB
4
/'"'
TB
B
,'H'I
I
1
22
CO
~
TO
209A. 210A.
232 TYPE, OR
238A KTU
4B
3
LI
~
I
2B
~
l" ""'-
tOR LB
~
29
,.,.
30
n.
GRD
R0I-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-e>--_-{;13~--S-J
~ ~
:®
SUP.
TO S I G KEY
]" "" ""
A
15
"A" BAT]
A
16
"A" GRD
B
38
"B" BAT
"H'I~
"HII~
TO 14-26V
DC PWR SUP.
"HIIf--------0-8
40
"I
.--_ _
{'3~2-__< • ® CA I
®
STEADY COMMON AUDIBLE SIGNAL USING COMMON AUDIBLE SIGNAL CONTROL
CKT(21IA OR 16A KTU).
INTERRUPTED AUDIBLE SIGNAL OR COMMON AUDIBLE SIGNAL USING
@ ~~~;~~O~~~~~~~ C~~ G~~~E~:U~6~:0~2~~~ I ~~E 2;~~N:~~)'
]
TO 227B KTU
@~]
OPTIONS:
®
"B" GRD
0'------
OR
®~XBX
y
33
[ :
2T
® INTERRUPTED
COMMON AUDIBLE SIGNAL USING RELAY CONTROL CKT
(227A AND 232B OR 238A KTU).
@
t
OR I05Vt
@
1;>
RNJ
®LB
'----0--__<
J
GRD OR R
t, BAT.,
36
TO AUD SIG OR
COM AUD SIG
~
37
LI
BI
~
TO AUD SIG
POWER SUPPLY
TO 232 TYPE,
OR 238A KTU
I'
Fig. 74Functionol Schematic of 205A KTU (Station Line Circuit).
Page 11
Revised August 1974
SECTION 518-114-110
TO 208A KTU
TO AUD IBlE S IG
TO 208A KTU
TO AUDIBLE SIG
178
ARC 2
ARC I
16B
ROT
A
T
(NOTE 21
C
8
39B
(
C
KTU
~~ [
2B
12B
228
IB
liB
21B
NET.
1
36B
1
~I~-~J
~B
8
A
lOB
T
-20
B OR al TO AUO SIG
~B
A GRD
A BAT.
10
RG TO AUD 51 GNAl
A
SUPPLY GRD
9B
~B
19B
9
158
c
20B
'11---0
4
338
25B
0
C
8)(
B
8
3B
TO LAMP
SUPPLY
TO STA
[
3.
29B
B
13B
B
c
8
PROPER POLARITY MUST BE
OBSERVED WHE N MAKiNG POWER
CONNECTIONS TO THE KTU,
REVERSED POLARITY MAY CAUSE
DAMAGE TO THE ELECTROLYTIC
CAPACITOR.
+
(NOTE 31
30B
LG
Fig. 8-tFunctional Schematic of 2078 (MD) and 207C KTU (Selector Circuit).
Page 12
Revised August 1974
7+
NOTES:
I. TH~ 207B KTU I S NOT EQU I PPED
-WITH GROUND OR A STRAP rROM
C RELAY TO TERM. 25B.
2. REMOVE STRAP I r MORE THAN 9
STATIONS ARE SERVED.
8B
D OR l
TO PWR
SUPPLY'
(NOTE 31
+
(NOTE 31
TO 208A
~B
B
I'HI'
TO 209A. CO
5B
8
B
OR
~I'
212A KTU
6
KTU OR
STA.
J
B GRD
35B
8
A
~8
Ii·
B BAT.
"H'11------0
188
(NOTE II
POWER SUPPLY
6B
1
8
r05±V
AUO SIGNAL
t
B
I'HI'
I
'"
1
H
TO 208A
Kru
± OR
ISS 3, SECTION 518-114-110
T
:
21
C
TO 207A
A
(2)
L
I
4B
T
B
II.
I [] }ff
14
H
TO 207,4"
C
0-----..:!.- B OR
3
KTU
L
F
B OR C
L
4 )(5T
12
0
D
A
KTU
A
17J
L
LS
R
L
13
~
D
15
["
26
B
R
_-w
C
L
~*
G
lG
4B
3
LS
TO 209A
OR 212A
KTU
TO LAMP
POWER
SUPPLY
TO
25
(2)
B
/of---/I'
I
2B
LS
2
B
011
36
B
II'
4 )( 5T
LB
I::
C
B
LG
29
TO
TEL
SET
B
J'f---II'
I
2B
'<.I
REfERENCE
DESIGNATION
A
TI P
PUNCH I NG
CKT I
CKT 2
I
6
B (RING)
C (l)
39
B BAT.
38
B GRD
~
]
TO
POWER
SUPPLY
CKT 3
10
34
35
18
19
20
F (8 BAT.I
22
23
24
G ( LG)
30
31
32
D (A)
(C)
AI
(2)
~
(2)
33
E
4
II
Fig. 9-Functional Schematic of 208A (MD) KTU (Signaling Unit for Flashing Line Lamps)
Page 13
SECTION 518-114-110
FB
FB
FB
t:
t:
22A
T
T
t~T
LS
~A
Lf
24A
LS
~A
Lf
26A
L8
~A
Lf
FB
t~B
t!B
LS
~A
Lf
30A
LS
Lf
iA
20A ISA
5
6B
FB
FB
LB
W
TO 2ND LINE
TO 202 A,S,C OR D
OR 230 A OR 8 KTU
] TO 3RD LI NE
TO 202 A,S,C OR D
OR 230 A OR S KTU
TO
] TO 5TH LINE TO
202 A, S, C OR D
OR 230A OR S KTU
J
TO 6TH LI NE CKT
WHEN USED TO 202 A. B. C
~~~ OR 230 AOR B
10J
TO
16A
~
f~T
3~
WINK
4A
f~B
3~
CO
CO
f:B
4~
TI
f!t
3~
RI
TI
} TO••202
mu.
A OR
98
t~OT
~8
,;
,;
,;
T
TI
108
PF
t~08
RI
RI
PF
f:~8
B
ISB
"Hq
12)
208
TO 202 A,S,C OR D
OR 230 A OR B KTU
1
ro "" u.
TO 202 A OR 8 KTU
RI
TI
] TO
ro ""
202 u"'
A OR
RI
B BAT] TO
POWER
SUPPLY
8 GRD
"~
FA
TO 207 B OR C KTU
]'' "' .
l"'~
8~
8
'I
11f----l1'
aT
PF
B~TO
8
'I
Ilr---=-Il'
4T
3
TO 202 A OR 8 KTU
TI
U",
Fig. I~Functional Schematic of 209A (MD) KTU (Lamp Flashing and Time-Out Circuit).
Page 14
8 KTU
RI
TO 202 A OR 8 KTU
37A
PF
PF
7
38A
PF
;
1:B
PF1"12T
TO
HA
TO 3RD LINE
TO 202 A OR 8 KTU
R
138
IS USED
34A
PF
TI
148
33A
PF
PF
REMOVE Z STRAP 1F
S
IA
LK
"l----ill~
B
,,1----1'1 '
PFt:T
]~~
"I----1II~
11211
1:B
,1
68
TO 4TH LINE
TO 202 A,S,C OR D
OR 230 A OR S KTU
~~WINK
"f---jll
_
2
~ ~ CKT
S
PF
J
S
1®
~
~
~
PF t : T
58
LF
FA
18
TO 1ST LINE
TO 202 A,S,C OR D
OR 230 A OR S KTU
28
]
28A
FB
J
8 KTU
ISS 3, SECTION 518-114-110
II
6
'It----fl'
W
66
W
WT
oI~"
TO 209A OR
212A KTU
WS
,II B
29)( I
WS
'I~'I
WS
12
0
16
13
HA
Wf~B
14
TO
I
LW
~
:
3
WifB
5
W-ffT
~
~
~
7
W~T
9
W~T
LB
] TO 209A. 212A. 202A.
B.C. OR D. OR 230A
OR B KTU
] LINE I TO 202A.B.
C. OR D. OR 230A
OR B KTU
LW
LB
] LINE 2 TO 202A.B.
C. OR 0 OR 230A
OR B KTU
LW
LB
] LI NE 3 TO 202A. B.
C. OR 0 OR 230A
OR B KTU
LW
LB
LW
LB
] LI NE 4 TO 202A.B.
C. OR 0 OR 230A
OR B KTU
1
1
LI NE 5 TO 202A.B.
C. OR 0 OR 230A
OR B KTU
'IH'I~TO
18
20
'II B
0
B GRD
POWER
SUPPLY
Fig. 11-.Functionol Schemotlc of 210A KTU (Wink Circuit).
Poge 15
SECTION 518-114-11 0
sr
23
24
R
28
L
TO TEL STA PICKUP KEY
AND S IG LAMPS
4T
.--",*-""-OJ__
CO_ _-I~_ _ ~~ ~~::
3
B
BF
L-_ _ _-4325~~LS--_4~-LAMP
SUPPL Y
?;
LG
40
"An BAT
38
"An GRD
37
"a"
GRD
~
r. ~
RI
RI
B
I
B ~
ST
TO 23BA, 230A OR 8.
-::..:...-- 202C OR D. OR 239A.
OR 233A KTU
B
RI ~12T7 - - ' - - - J
ce=
~
14
R
19
g
RR
I05Vt
]
I05Vt
J
TO 203A. 204A.
OR 205A KTU
TO 202A,202B
OR 212A KTU
POWER SUPPLY rOR
AUD SIGNAL
RG
Fig. 12.....Functianal Schematic of 211A KTU (Intercom
Line Circuit, Ringing Lamp Circuit, Noise
Suppression Circuit and Audible Signal
Control Circuit).
Page 16
A
TI
39C
F ~]T06TH
P ~c LINE
H
2T
TI
29C
TI
B~
A
B
PF
I 20
6A
5A
A
15A 25A
68
5
ST
1
+----
TO OTHER
~8
3
CO DR PBX
LINE CKTS
TO lOlA
OR 10lB
KEY
••
EQUIP If'
PROV IDEO
1---
A
2T
~: }
H
8
"
I
28
'T
R
I ~~~;C~~
"8"8AT.
29A
GRD
3~11 B
LAMP PWR SUP
[
'"'±:.:I.:.""'--_ _ _~30A
GRO
BAT•• :i:,I05:t,GRD
AUO SIG PWR [
SUP OR GRO
GRD OR R GRD
19A
200
0
A
TO COMMON AUD SIG [_B_OR_B_'_ _ _
~/6: ~~~ ~i~ES'G
R,RI,CAI
CONCR CKT
TO AUQ SIG
-....
•
_ - : -_ _ _
REFERENCE
DES I GNA 11 ON
7A
~
~~R
LB
2T
PF
CKT 2
CKT 3
I
I
I
1A,IIA.214
18,IIB.2IB
le,lle,2le
2A,12A,224
2B,12B,228
2C,I2C,22C
I
C
3A,134,23A
3B,138,236
3C,I3C,23C
I
0
4A.14A.24A
48,148,248
4C,I4C,24C
I
31A
31B
31C
f
32.
32B
32C
G
7.
7B
7C
H
IDA
lOB
lac
J
35'
35B
35C
K
36A
368
3&
FB~OJ
TO 5TH
~ LINE
TO 2ND CENT.
PBX
orr .OR
TO
202
A OR B
KTUS
~JT06TH
FB~
LINE
LINE CKT
t:a
L_=___
RI
R
IBC
R
2ec
TO 3RD CENT.
] OFF. OR PBX
LINE eKT
T0202AOR8
KTUS
38e
A
E
RI
LINE
LB 28B
LB 388
PF~eJT05TH
J08 RI
LINE
FB
PUNCHING
CKT I
~
PF~R
20eJ TO 4TH
~ LINE
: FB
t
TOO
]
PF+!O
B
40A
------<0
PBX
PF
R
L------------ i
B
[c....::.....:='--~0___<\IHI.
"-26V
RUN LEAOS
TO WINK
CKT WHEN
USED
[
L....:*:::-fI"-_
_-'-"I
20
LB IBB
FB~JT04TH
"I-<\'~"
3 •
REMDVE
Z
STRAP ANO
"~ '~[ ~ ~*"
R
DC PJR SUP
o
Lf
6T
:::
lW
+-C,*=~I----":':':,'-'-----: ~:~:::K~T' ~: .~
•
A
PWR SUP
Z
H
Off. OR PBX
LI NE CKT
] TO 2ND CENT.
orr. OR PBX
LINE CKT
PF+;T
27
AND RUN LEADS
TI
39A
LB
211A~
]
L_"::""-''-_
Z
TO WINK CKT
WHEN USED
TO 3RD CENT.
PF+ 6• T
L
R
FA 37A
~OVEZSTRAP
LINE
TI
LG
0
FB
"I-<\I~""">-0
19C
PF~
AI
"f-------0--0--0
PF
I·
/6A 26A
"f------0--0--08
o
o
B
~JT04TH
"I-<\'~
2T
A OR B
LINE
KTUS
A
KTU
TO
202
~JT05TH
PF~
TO
FB FA
"~\IH"
'78TI.J
PF~eJT06TH
128
LINE
L ___ _
208
LKI
B
'IH'I
TO
LK
19B
HAl
TO OTHER
CO OR PBX
LINE CKT
OR WINK
CKT AS
COl
REQ'O
•
"HI\
~'HII
Tal
TO
I 2T
I7A
Fig. I3--tFundional Schematic of 212A (MD) KTU (CO or PBX Line Circuits with Lamp Flashing and Incoming
Signal Time-Out Circuits).
co ~oK~'(t:sOR
REQ'O
ISS 3, SECTION 518-114-110
(INTERRUPTER IS NOT
FURNISHED AS PART OF
232-TYPE KTU)
2
I
I
TO AVD 5 I G SUPPl
Y
RING GRD
[
BAT'
29
:t, OR I05V
TO AUO TONE SUPPLY ,CONT CKT OR GRD
~33
AT
-"-'------+<(}"::.....,f----------<
TO CKT REG BUSY TONE
TO BUSY TONE SUPPLY OR CONT CKT
BTl OR 8Z1
~32
8T OR 8Z
~3I
LF' OR II
1
IF' OR II
I
2,)
l
nY
TO 202A.S,C.OR O,203A,204A,
If OR LI
205A,230A OR B,233A,OR
239A KTV (SEE NOTE)
I
s.)
l
~
IF' OR LI
LW OR LI
I
"-Iy
I
I~
LW OR LI
lW OR LI
I
lW OR LI
lW OR II
:
LW OR LI
T0211AKTU
['.'" ""
233A, 239A ,203A, 204A.
OR 205A KlU
.~
y
±LB OR GRD
.n.'9
ilS OR GRO
20
®
~~ I~
,~
@
A -24V
),.35
400A
LK
38
co
37
-24V BAT. (A),-
GRD (A)
I
®A.
8
CONTACTS SHOWN IN STARTING POSITION.
ON 232A KTU, ST AND TO BATTERY CONNECTIONS
TERMINATE ON TERMINAL 39. ON 2328 KTU, TERMINAL 39 MAY BE USED TO TERMINATE THE AUDIBLE
SIGNAL SUPPLY GROUND AND B OR BI LEADS.
FOR USE WHEN ONLY THE INTERRUPTER CKT IS TO
112"
3T
I~' rl TO
:25 ®----=--~36
5
NOTE:
MAX.36 LAMPS PER LEAD BUT NOT TO
EXCEED 50 LAMPS PER PA I R.
: ?";:::'"LJ'
Sri
[
12
14
I
I
~
10
~;
"
,-<
;::,7
HAl
TO 202e OR O.230A OR B
16
-<
I
~'5
tlB OR GRD
4
I
19
13
lW OR II
TO 3aA KTU
----<
II
LW OR L I
(SEE NOTE)
13
7
LF' OR LI
TO 202A.B,C.OR 0,2304 OR 8.
233A OR 239A KTU
3
3
3
:::3
I 17 I
",,5
LF' OR LI
¥
+6
I 10
3
LF' OR II
IF' OR II
TO LAMP SUPPLY OR GRD
:
:
34
AT! OR RD
TO CKT REG AVO TONE OR KTS NO. SA
)(4
I®
II'
KS-15900, L2 INTERRUPTER.
KS-19384, LI (MO) INTERRUPTER
KS-19384, L2 INTERRUPTER,
WITH MORE THAN ONE SYSTEM WITH
TIME-OUT.
Fig. 14-tFunctional Schematic of 232-Type KTU (Electro-Mechanical Flash, Wink, Ring ond Time-Out
Circuit).
Page 19
Revised August 1974
SECTION 518-114-110
KS- 16672, II PLUG
(NOTE
I)
H
-20 --"'-;E---1~---------"-r<
2 OR 13
----~E",' A
-20
AH
A
36 OR 47
>r~----------------~~--~~----~--------~------------------------------~~26
OR 37
H
I OR 12
I I OR 22
AH
4
H
"I B
H':(50R 16
)( 4
LBt:
A
AH
LI
12
3 OR 14
LW 1
1
1
10
R
9 OR 20
29 OR 40
LF I
R
,,,
A
R
4 OR 15
3 J OR 42
I
I
ST
A
--1
-20 _ _ _
MODIFJ ED
I
I
33 OR 44
1
0
. : ( 27 OR 3B
AH
CO : ( 30 OR 41
,'If-----7«-:-----'''_t<
)(,
1
R
TO I ( 6 OR 17
,'If----.--)(---...:..::+<
8 )(
RN
1
i ~ 32 OR
43
RI70RI8
I
B BAT
_20~B~_ _ _ _ _ _~~~
POS,J T IONS
(SIDE VlEwl
1(100R21
'II B
R RELAY CONTACTS (SEE NOTE 4)
NOTES:
I. TERMI NALS I TO II AND 26 TO 36 ARE FOR 000
NUMBERED CIRCUITS. TERMINALS 12 TO 22 AND 37 TO
41 ARE FOR EVEN NUMBERED C I Reu ITS.
2. THE POWER SUPPLY LEADS AND THE LEADS TO THE
or
WH r CH ARE ARRANGED ACCORD I NG TO THE fOLlOWI NG TABLE:
PLUG
A
I
B
I
C
000 C I Reu ITS
I
I
3
I
5
EVEN CIRCUITS
2
THE PLUG AS SHOWN BELOW:
CIRCUITS
LEAD
1-3-5-7-9
CO OR PBX
2-4-6-8- 10
T
36
47
R
II
22
GRO
LAMP SUPPLY
± OR BAT.
BAT. SUPPLY
9
20
GRD
3S
46
-20
10
21
'(350R46
3. EACH PLUG PROVIDES LEADS FOR TWO LINE CIRCUITS
CENTRAL Ofr J C( OR PBX LINE ARE CONNECTED TO THE
TERMI NAlS
B GRO I
I
4
I
6
I DIE
I
I
7
8
I
I
9
10
4. fOR NONLOCKING OPERATION Of R RELAY, MOVE THE UPPER
WIRE SPRING CONTACT fROM ITS GUIDE IN CONTACT
POSITION 4 TO THE LOWER GUIDE Of CONTACT POSITION 5.
MOVE THE LOWER WIRE SPRING CONTACT fROM ITS GUIDE
IN CONTACT POSITION 4 TO THE UPPER GUIDE OF' CONTACT
3. CONTACT POSITIONS 3 AND 5 ARE UNEQUIPPED AND THE
STAT IONARY CONTACTS UNWI RED.
Fig. 154Functional Schematic of 233A (MO) KTU (CO or PBX Line Circuits) (Sheet I).
Page 20
Reissued August 1974
ISS 3, SECTION 518-114-110
LEAD
I
DESIG
R
T
H
A
I
I
l
SPARE
IF
lW
HA
CO
TO
lK
RI
ODD
CI Rr:U I 15
RN
SPARE
ST
LB±,
SPARE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B BAT
8 GRD
I
I
l
SPARE
[VEN
CIRCUIT 5
IF
lW
HA
CO
TO
lK
RI
I
I
I
I
I
RN
SPARE
ST
lBt
SPARE
I
I
I
B BAT
B GRO
R
T
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
I
26
2
27
3
28
4
2.
5
30
6
31
7
32
8
33
•
34
10
35
A25B CONNECTOR CABLE
I~~CI~~~O,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
12
37
13
38
14
3.
15
40
16
41
17
42
18
43
I.
44
20
45
21
46
22
47
23
48
24
4' .
25
50
I
26
2
27
3
2B
4
2'
5
30
6
31
7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IGN-WI
IW-GNI
IBR-WI
IW-BRI
IS-WI
IW-SI
IBl-RI
IR-Bli
10R-RI
[GN]
[W]
[BR]
[W]
[5]
CWJ
tBLl
[R]
tOR]
(W-BL.)
I
I
I
I
B
"•
34
10
35
I
I
I
I
I
36
I
lOR-WI
IW-ORI
[Bl]
tW]
[OR]
[W]
IBl-WI
I
32
12
37
13
38
14
3'
15
40
16
41
17
42
18
43
I.
44
20
45
21
46
22
47
23
48
24
4.
25
50
TERMINAL BLOCKS
OR OTHER TYPES OF
25 PR I W CABLE
"
36
I
R
T
H
A
~~ PKL~~
"
R
T
:>
KS-16672,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IR-ORI
IGN-RI
(R-GN)
IBR-RI
(R-BRI
IS-RI
(R-SI
(Bl-BKI
(BK-8l)
[R]
[GN]
CR]
CBR]
tR]
CS]
[R]
[Bl]
[BK)
(OR-SKI tOR]
(BK-ORI tBK]
(GN-BKI tGN]
(BK-GNI CBK]
tBR]
(BK-BRI tBK]
(S-BKI
tS]
IBK-SI
CBK]
[Bl]
(Bl-YI
[Y]
(V-Bll
(OR-YI
tOR]
(Y-ORI
[V]
(GR-YI
tGR]
(BR-SKI
I
I
@
r- I-
(!)'
+ I BAT.I OR
I05V±
RN
CA OR CAl
ST
lB.
GRD
I
1:':::""
1
TO 232A OR B KIU
(NOTES I AND 2)
J
J
TO COM AUD SIGNAL
(NOTE 3)
TO AUD SIG
POWER SUPPLY
TO 232A OR B KTU
TO 2278 K1U
TO 211A KTU
J
TO LAMP SUPPLY
B BAT
B GRD ) TO BAT. SUPPLY
J
I
I
I
I
I
R
TO CO OR PBX
T
LINE CKT
H TO lOlA OR 1018
R -JKEY EQUIPMENT
T
TO TEL SET OR
A
PICKUP KEYS
AI
l
lG
IF
lW
HA
TO 232A OR 8 KTU
CO ] (NOTES I AND 2)
TO
lK
RI
TO COM AUo SIGNAL
BI
(NOTE 3)
GRD
I
I
I
I
I
tS]
tY]
tBl] I
[V]
[ORJ
[VJ
tGNJ
[V] I
(
(!)
@
r-
I®~®
I
I
®f
(Y)
(!)' •
(
: tl
:
I
J
8ATo , OR I05V±
RN
CA OR CAl
ST
lBt
GRD
10
B BAT
B GRO
R
T
J
TO AUO SIG
POWER SUPPLY
TO 232A OR 8 KTU
TO 2278 KTU
TO 211A KTU
J
TO LAMP SUPPLY
j
TO BAT. SUPPLY
TO CO OR PBX
LINE CKT
I
I
I
I
I
I
[BR~
CvJ
[5]
[V]
:
:
I
®+,Cvl
10
I
[y]
IS-VI
IV-51
(!)
I®J@
I (
(S-YI
(Y-SI
(Bl-VI
(V-Bli
(OR-VI
IV-ORI
IV-GNI
IBR-VI
(
I
I
I
(V-SRI
(V-SRI
A
AI
l
lG
IF
lW
HA
CO
TO
lK
RI
BI
GRD
I
I
(BR-YI
(GN-V)
H KEY EQUIPMENT
R
T
I
tv]
[BR]
(V-GRI
TO lOlA OR 10lB
I
DISTRIBUTING FACILITIES
ISEE NOTE 41
I
I
I
C t RCU I T NOTES
F"EATURE OR OPTION
NOTES:
I. LF" LEADS MAY BE STRAPPED NOT TO EXCEED 50 LAMPS PER GROUP.
2. LW LEADS MAY BE STRAPPED NOT TO EXCEED 50 LAMPS PER GROUP.
LINE
RINGING
3. F"OR COMMON AUDIBLE SIGNAL WITH Z OR Y OPTION, STRAP ALL RI LEADS.
4. THE TYPE OF" TERMINATING EQUIPMENT TO BE USED, SUCH AS 30- OR 66-
CIRCUIT
TYPE CONNECTING BLOCKS, BUNCH BLOCKS,DISTRIBUTION F"RAME, ETC,
WILL BE GOVERNED BY THE SIZE AND NEEDS OF" A PARTICULAR INSTALLATION. COMMON
AUDIBLE
) CURRENT COLOR CODE
[ ] MD COLOR CODE
APP OR WIR
X
METALLIC
V
GROUNDED
INTERRUPTED
RINGING
COM AUD CONTROL
RELAY PROVIDED
W
INTERRUPTER
Y
COM AUO CONTROL
RELAY PROVIDED
STEADY RINGING
T
Z
Fig. 154Functional Schematic of 233A (MD) KTU (CO or PBX Line Circuits) (Sheet 2).
Page 21
SECTION 518-114-110
TO POWER SUPPL
Y
rOR MOTOR
l
GRD
IOV
--
39F
±
I r>.40F
2T
COMt-()N
EQUI PMENT
PORTION
or 238A KTU
TO CKT REG AUO TONE OR KTS 6A
ATJORRO
1~2F
AT
, ,.,IF
TO AUD TONE SUPPLY ,CONT CKT OR GRD
I
ST
2B
I
I
KS- 15900, LI
INTERRUPTER
FURNISHED WITH
ST
23SA KTU
I
8TI OR BZI
4F
TO CKT REG BUSY TONE --"-'--'--'-'--'=---+<1r;;\F
(
TO BUSy TONE SUPPLY OR CDNT CKT _::.BT'-"0::.R..:B"'Z_ _-,---t<10.::.:..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _--<
LF 0 R II CKT I AND 2
LF OR II CKT 5 AND 6
T5y
:::J:6Y
IF OR LI CKT 7 AND 8 t
JIY
LW OR LI
lW OR LI CKT 3 AND 4 t
[.. ...
LW OR LI CKT 1 AND 8
LW OR LI CKT 9
± BAT. OR GRD
:::;:29G
8
8
121
I
I
39G
BAT. OR GRD
[
[
R,RI OR RN CKT 5 THRU
a'
22F
24)),
R,RI OR RN
~~
~~!l
B OR 81 CKT I THRU 4 t
rl'F
B OR 81 CKT 5 THRU 8 t
~"l
R RI OR RN CKT 9 t
6 OR 61 CKT 9 t
~~
6 OR 61
27'1,
BAT•• ± OR lOS!
120
19G
R RI OR'RN CKT r THRU 4
TO AUO S IG PWR SUP
[
OR VIS AND AUO SIG CKT
IS
r<
~
:::;:9G
14 1 87
15
~28G
t
t
:1:,
GRD OR R GRD
,.--<
.
8G
' BAT.
" OR GRD
±
I
J.!i~
lW OR II
(FIG. 4)
12
27G
·)z1ll
LW OR LI
~
--<
:b_
CKT I THRU 4
INTERNALLY
WIRED ON
238A KTU
§§t:llco
~30F
_
5
19
7G
lW OR II CKT 5 AND 6 t
PART OF 238A
,---< I"
36y
LW OR LI CKT I AND 2 t
TO LINE CKT
116
26G
Lf OR 1I CKT 9 t
+6
8·
8
13
1~6G
IF OR II CKT 3 OR 4 t
LF OR LI
(
17
35~
LF OR LI
I f-----'-
6I (
10
~25G
t
3
MAX 50 l AMPS
PER LEAD
5G
IF OR II
I
\
ILK ITO IHA
Iii
HAl
"
t
LEGEND
INTERRUPTER CONTACTS SHOWN IN STARTING POSITION.
238A KTU- fURNISHED WITH INDICATED CKTS
EXTERNALLY STRAPPED AT fACTORY
WITH AUX II ME-OUT CKT
WITHOUT AUX TIME-OUT CKT
INTERRUPTED COM AUD SIGNAL USING
ELECTRO MECH INTERRUPTER (COM EQU I P
PORTION Of 238A OR 232A1B KTU)
TO 30A KTU
TO
LK
CD
TO 14-26V [-'S'--'Ge!R"'Oc..-_ _ _ _ _-kO'""----lI'B
DC PWR SUP
B BAT.
IOAB~20V
TO
--'----~=::::.:.:~
Fig. 16...... Functianal Schematic of 238A KTU (CO or PBX Line Circuits).
Page 22
*
+
:
26B KTU
29A KTU
CO
3
13
~
CO
15
CT
~
(
""
/~
~
4T
3
B BAT
t
9/ . ,
POWER
SUPPLY
"
~
CO
4
I
Q)
0
8
(
8
~
~
T
T
T
0
~
;.
~
JTO co OR
PBX LINE CKT
0
~
I
28
~
TI
TI
'U
9
lOT
TO
TEL
SET
7
CO
~
8T
CO
~
6T
5
CO
CO
ZT
I
CO
ZB
I
4B
CO
6B
5
CO
f-a.
7
8B
CO
7
lOB
CO
U
9
~
4
~
•
0
/"-'
400A VAR
'V
• ;,.
TO CO
TI
] TO ZND
29A KTU
01
OR PBX
LINE CKT
"
CT
'U
ZT
I
~
~
TI
).:,
01
'<./
OPTIONS:
] TO 300
29A KTU
TI
~
] TO 4TH
~
01
17
T
29A KTU
'U
"-'
I
STATION CAN CUT-orr OTHER STATIONS
AND CAN NOT BE CUT-orr
STATION CAN CUT-orr OTHER STATIONS AND
o
CAN BE CUT
-orr
EXCEPT DUO I NG A CALL
STATION CAN NOT CUT-orr OTHER STATIONS
AND CAN BE CUT -orr EXCEPT OUR I NG A CAll
]
0
TO KEY TEL
STA PU KEY OR
TO 5TH 29A KTU
Q)'----~)(;..--___1Q)
128
II
"'''11
-.
5~
iii
CIt
'U
18
~
8
'<./
~
CO
3
'V
5
Ol~
01
'U
)..J..
4T
3
10
5
CT
68
SUPPLY
0
CT
6T
TO
POWER
~
~
~
co
~
CT
;;,
12T II
~
ie.g
o
""'--
TO
Z
B GRD
Fig. 17--*Functional Schematic of 268 KTU (Automatic Cutoff Circuit) and 29A KTU(Cut Through Relay Circuit).
.!-'
CIt
9'"o
z
~
-
!:
!
o
SECTION 518-114-110
5
i-=-----<2l::--"--""-'-
COl
I
POWER SUP
3
[
COORPBX~
LINE CKT
112a
LKI
8
I
2
9
Fig. 18......Functional Schematic of 30A KTU (Time-Out
Circuit).
Page 24
24 Pages
Reissued November 1973
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
Plant Series
SECTION 518-114-115
Issue 1, July 1970
AT&TCa Standard
REFERENCE
1A 1 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
PACKAGED KEY TELEPHONE UNITS
1.
GENERAL
This section combines identification information
for the 200F (MD), 200G (MD), 200H, and
200K (MD) packaged KTUs formerly contained in
Sections 518-210-100, 518-210-400, 518-210-401,
518-210-402, and 518-210-403, which are hereby
canceled.
1.01
2.
IDENTIFICATION
The 200F, G, and K packages provide the
basic requirements for IAI and 6A (selector
only) Key Telephone System installations. The
200H packaged units provide for the 2-talking link
6A Key Telephone System.
2.01
The basic differences in these packages are
the capacities of the apparatus mountings.
The 200F, G, and K packages are equipped with
a 232B KTU with a KS-15900 List I interrupter,
which provides for flashing and winking lamps,
interrupted audible signal, time-out, and manual
intercom.
systems, the J86731B, List 1 power plant may be
required for the lamp supply. This is provided
with the 200K-type KTU only, and must be ordered
separately for the 200F, G, and H type KTU's.
The 10-volt capacity of the power plant is four
hundred twenty-five 51A lamps.
The 29C1 or 30C1 power units may also be
used to furnish power for the 200H KTU.
For information c<1vering their use refer to 167
Division.
2.06
2.07
Fuse requirements for the 200H KTU are
as follows:
2.02
A 232A (MD) or 232B KTU is furnished with
each 200H-type KTU, but the KS-15900, List
1 or KS-19384, List 2 interrupter is not furnished,
and if required must be ordered separately. All
leads associated with the 232-type KTU are accessible
at the terminal panel when a 64B1-100 cable
terminal is provided.
2.03
The dc and ac power supply may be provided
by a J86471B, List 1 power unit. Direct
current, 20 to 26 volts, may be supplied from local
or building battery. Power supply for lamps may
be supplied by a 393A (MD) or 393B transformer;
ringing supply may be over a pair of leads from
CO, PBX, or J86731C, List 1 power plant [107C
(MD) or 107D frequency generator].
2.04
2.05
When the 200F, G, H, and K-type KTUs
are used in conjunction with other key
@)
POTENTIAL FUSED
DESIG
A Bat.
B Bat.
AMP
VOLTS
2
2
-20 to -26 tlk bat.
-20 to -26 sig bat.
QUANTITY
One per
system
When one or more telephone stations
associated with these packaged KTUs are
equipped with a TOUCH-TONE® dial, a 247A (MD)
or 247B KTU must be ordered separately and
mounted externally to the apparatus mounting if
space is not available.
2.08
Ordering Guide
A description of the KTU ordering codes,
service and features, apparatus mountings,
and cable terminals is shown in Table A.
2.09
When the 64Al-50 cable terminal is equipped
with a 15-foot tail, designation strips
preprinted with the feature layout for 200F- and
200K-type KTUs are furnished. Two additional
blank strips are furnished for field changes.
2.10
American Telephone and Telegraph Company, 1970
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
:~
...••.........•~~;~~~;;~...;~.;~...~~;;;;.~;................~~
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT&TCo Standard
Filing Instructio1l8:
1..' IEMOYE FROM THE SECTION THE PAGES NUMBEREO THE SAME
AS THOst ATTACHED TO THIS PINK SHEn.
2. INSERT THE ATTACHED PAGES INTO THE SECTION IN THEIR PLACE.
.:
.: .: ~:
:...~:. ~~~~. ~~~~. ~!.~~.~~~.~~. ~~. ~~. ~.~~. ~. ~~. ~~. ~~.~~~~~:. . . . .J
REFERENCE
1A 1 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
PACKAGED KEY TELEPHONE UNITS
1.
2.
GENERAL
This addendum supplements Section
518-114-115, Issue 1. The attached pages
must be inserted in the section in accordance with
filing instructions above.
1.001
IDENTIFICATION
The following change applies to Part 2 of the
section:
(a) Fig. 7-revised
This addendum is issued to correct connection
points of the 225A KTU in the block
diagram on Fig. 7.
1.002
Attached:
Page 7 dated May 1971, reissued
Page 8 dated May 1971, revised
American Telephone and Telegraph Company. 1971
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
Page and Attachments
TABLE A
1•
lit
In
9o
IAI PACKAGED KEY TELEPHONE UNITS
loot
z
KEY TELEPHONE UNITS AND SERVICE FEATURES
KEY
UNIT CODES
(SEE NOTE)
200F4
200F4D
200F5 (Fig. 1)
200F6
200G4
20OG4D
200G5
200G5D
200G6
200G6D
200G7
200G7D
200G8 (Fig. 2)
200G9
200K4 (Fig. 4)
200K4D
200K5
200K5D
200K6
200K6D
200K7
200K7D
232A OR a
WITH KS-IS900,
207C
230A OR B KTU. 202C OR D KTU
LIST I INTER9-STA DIAL
PICKUP AND
PICKUP AND
RUPTER, FLASH,
SELECTIVE
HOLD I CO
HOLD 4 CO
WINK, TIME-OUT,
INTERCOM
OR pax LINE
OR PBX LINE
AND MAN.
INTERCOM
1
1
1
1
I
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
I
2
1
1
1
1
1
.1
1
I
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
3
4
4
1
5
1
1
2
2
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
I
1
1
1
I
I
I
222A
KTU
223A
KTU
224A (MD)
OR a
KTU
216A
KTU
I
APPARATUS
MOUNTING
CABLE TERMINAL
(PROVIDED WHEN
LETTER C IS
ADDED TO CODE)
(SEE NOTE)
31A apparatus
mounting
116A cover
173B backboard
64Al-50 cable terminal
(1-GC52 ",rminal box
2-31D connecting blocks,
50-pr cable, with 8-ft
tail)
26A apparatUs
mounting
64Bl-75 cable terminal
(I-terminal plate
assembly per
ED-69366-50,
group 3,
75-pr cable
with 8-ft tail)
16A apparatus
mounting
117A cover
64Al-50 cable terminel
(1-GC52 terminal box,
2-31D connecting blocks,
50-pr cable with 80ft
tail)
26A apparatus
mounting
64BI-100 cable terminal
(I-terminal plate assembly
per ED-69366-50, group
3, 100-pr cable with
15-ft tail)
I
1
I
I
I
1
1
1
1
1
I
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
200H15D (Fig. 3)
1*
1
1
2
1
1
200H18D
1*
1
1
3
1
1
* The KS-15900, List 1 interrupter must be ordered separately.
200K-type KTUs are furnished with the J86731, List 1 power plant.
Note: The 200F, 200G, and 200K KTUs and the 64Al-50 terminal box are rated (MD).
ISS 1, SECTION 518-114-115
2.11
These pressure-sensitive tapes are designated
as:
2.14
.Forms E-4842 and E-4843 which consist of
two dual strips preprinted to conform to
the layout of the 200F- and 200K-type KTUs,
respectively
.Intercommunication facilities for a maximum
of 18 codes
.A primary and secondary talking link which
enables a system to carry two simultaneous
and independent conversations .
• Form E-4848 which consist of four blank
strips to be marked as necessary to fit the
need.
.Camp-on. The 224B KTU permits the
camp-on station to cut through when the
primary or secondary link becomes available .
• A busy tone to the station originating camp-on
and to any other stations which may try to
originate a call after the system has been
camped on .
DESIGN FEATUES
2.12
200F-Type KTU(Fig. 1) provides:
• Pickup and hold on four to six CO or PBX
lines, or
• Pickup and hold on four CO or PBX Lines
with a 9-station dial selective intercom
circuit.
Fig. 5 shows the arrangement, coding (without
cable terminal), and KTUs used in the 200F-type
KTU.
2.13
.Automatic cutoff.
Fig. 7 shows the arrangement, coding (without
cable terminals), and KTUs used in the 200H-type
KTU.
2.15
200K-TypeKTU(Fig. 4) provides:
.Pickup and hold on four to seven CO or
PBX Lines with or without a 9-station dial
selective intercom circuit
200G-Type KTU (Fig. 2) provides:
.Pickup and hold on four to nine CO or
PBX Lines, or
.Pickup and hold on four to eight CO or
PBX Lines with 9-station dial selective
intercom circuit.
200H-Type KTU(Fig. 3) provides:
.J86731D, List 1 Power Plant
Fig. 8 shows the arrangement, coding (without
cable terminal), and KTUs used in the 200K-type
KTU.
Refer to Division 518, sections entitled
"Service, lAl, 200F, G, and K Packaged
Units" and "Service, lAl, 200H Packaged Units"
for connections.
2.16
Fig. 6 shows the arrangement, coding (without
cable terminal), and KTUs used in the 200G-type
KTU.
Page 3
SECTION 518-114-115
230B KTU
64A I-50 CABLE TER M I NAL
(I NCLU DES CA BLE )
232B KTU
31 A
APPARATUS
MOUNTING
202D KTU
I73 B
BACKBOARD
Fig. 1-200F5C KTU (Without Cover)
Poge 4
ISS 1, SECTION 518-114-11 5
230B KTU
:::: ::::1:::: ::::
:::::::::
--.-.1_ •.•. ::11--'··::
--
::::1:::: 1::
.-
::
......
--.- --I'-.. ..
......... ..............
~
MOUNT I NG
Fig . 2-200G8C KTU
232A(MD l OR
2328
LI
6481-100 CABLE TERM I NAL
(INCL UDES CABLE)
207C KTU
26A APPARATUS MOUNTING
Fig. 3-200H 1SDC KTU
Page S
SECTION 518-114-115
J86731C, LI POWER PLANT
(FREO GENERATOR )
ADDED LOCALLY
J8673ID, LI POWER PLANT
(RECT-TR ANS )
Fig. 4-200K4 KTU (Without Cover)
Page 6
2328 KTU WITH
KS-15900, LI
INTE RRUPTER
ISS 1, SECTION 518-114-115
230A
OR a
KTU
230A OR B
KTU
230A OR B
KTU
230A
OR B
KTU
207e
KTU
1
I
OR
232aA
KTU
232A OR B
KTU
232A OR B
KTU
207C
KTU
'trop
HALF OF 26A APP MTG~
200G4
..
"
"
OR B
2m
KTU
<\..TOP HALF OF 26A APP MTGt
200640
"!<
I-
200F4
200F4D
It:
"
<.>
230A
OR B
KTU
207e
KTU
0
230A
0:
OR B
KTU
0
:;:
N
0
2
N
j OR
BZA
B
j232A
OR B
KTU
'lrop
HALF OF 26A APP MTGt
KTU
'lrop HALF OF 26A APP MTGj,
20065
230A OR B
KTU
.. .."
~
230A OR B
KTU
It:
"l;l
u
N
0
2
N
232A OR B
KTU
202e
OR 0
KTU
202e
OR 0
KTU
"!< "
.,"0 "'"
I-
" "
It:
0
202e
OR 0
KTU
200650
232AOR B
KTU
I-
230A
OR B
OTU
207e
0:
0
KTU
u
~ 2
I
232A
OR
B
KTU
t.rop HALF
OF 26A APP MTGf.
T"32A
OR a
KTU
-trop
HALF OF 2 6A APP M TGit
200G6D
200G6
200F5
l;l
200F6
." ." .."
l-
I-
0:
0
u
N
0:
"l;l
2 2
"
I-
" " "
Fig. 5-200F-Type KTU, Arrangements
0:
0
U
N
I-
230A
OR a
KTU
2070
KTU
'"
0
0:
0
l
:>
I< I<"
0
I-
0:
0:
0:
0
" "0
<.>
u
N
l;l
0
0
N
l;l
N
N
2
0
0:
0
230A
OR B
_TU
N
1,232A
OR a
OR a
232A
KTU
t.rop
HALF OF 26A APP MTG.t
1 KTU
'trop HALF OF 26A APP MTGf.
200GB
"I<
"0
0:
u
200G8
. . !<" "'"
"I< "
l-
230 A
ORa
KTU
230A
OR B
KTU
01
2
""
0:
0
l;l
It:
0
0
N
2 2
I
~
I-
I-
0:
0
" "
N
l;l
0
It:
0
0
.
2
u
0
N
It:
0
230A
OR a
KTU
0
N
232A
OR
B
j Z3ZA
OR B
_tu
KTU
-trop HALF OF 26A APP MTG.J200G9
t.rop
HALF OF 26A APP MTG;
20069
Fig. 6-200G-Type KTU, Arrangements
Page 7
Reissued May 1971
SECTION 518-114-115
I---l
I
I
1247AI:OR B
TOUCH TONE
ADAPTER CKT
II
II
227A(MDI 0 :
KTU II
RINGING AND
TONE CONTROL CKTI
I
___
~----_~I
H
207C KTU
SELECTOR CKT
~
1 247A (MDIOR B
I
KTUII
TOUCH TONE
ADAPTER CKT
I
II
L __
-
_-.J
1--
-I
L
I
r-.-J i
-
225A KTU II
LONG LINE
CIRCUIT
207C KTU
SELECTOR CKT
I
t--L - - - - J
I
I
H--- _J
KTU II
227A (MOl OR B
I
KTUII
RINGING AND
TONE cONTROL CKT
I
r- __ -
I
I
I
I
II
225A KTU
LONG LINE
CIRCUIT
216A KTU
TRANFER CKT
I
I
,---L..t
L ___ -.l
CONN
AS
~~
1
224AIMDI OR B KTU
BUSY TONE AND
CAMP-ON
CONTROL CKT
216A KTU
TRANSFER CKT
222A KTU
2 TALKING
LINK CKT
REQIO
I---
224A (MOl OR B KTU
BUSY TONE AND
CAMP-ON
CONTROL CKT
222A KTU
2 TALKI NG
LINK CKT
223A KTU
3 STATION
SIGNALING CKT
f-----
- - - - - I-i---
9-STA CKT
SIGNALING
CIRCUIT
223A KTU
3 STATION
SIGNALING CKT
L..-
i---
>-----~
9-STA CKT
SIGNALING
CIRCUIT
223A KTU
3 STATION
SIGNALING CKT
I
I
I
....L.
(
\
232A(MDI OR B KTU
FLASH, WINK,
RING AND TIMEOUT CKT
LOCAL " )
STATION
'-.~J
200HI5D
- II MUST BE ORDERED SEPARATELY
/.-1-"
(
LOCAL
STATION
"'------
Page 8
232 AIMDI OR B KTU
FLASH, WINK,
RING AND TIME·OUT CKT
\
)
/
Fig_ 7-200H-Type KTU, Arrangements
Revised May 1971
223A KTU
3 STATION
SIGNALING CKT
'--223A KTU
3 STATION
SIGNALING CKT
I
I
- - _-.J
I
CONN
AS
i
---,
200HI8D
ISS 1, SECTION 518-114-115
230A
OR B
KTU
230A
OR B
KTU
207C
KTU
232A
J867310.LI
OR B
POWER PLANT KTU
J867310.LI
POWER PLANT
200K4
200K40
~
x
~
x
0
0:
0
'"0
230A
OR B
KTU
0
0:
2070
KTU
0
'"0
N
N
232.A
OR B
KTU
J867310.LI
POWER PLANT
200K5
x
~
l-
0
0
0:
l5
0
:>
,.
2 N~
J867310. LI
POWER PLANT
lX
230A
OR B
KTU
0
232A
OR B
KTU
~
l-
X
,.
0
0
l5 l5 l5
'" '"0
~. !'j
N
N
N
N
J86731D. LI
POWER PLANT
200K7
:>
IX
0
0:
0
0
~
'"0
N
230A
OR B
KTU
N
N
""867310, LJ
POWER PLANT
232A
OR B
KTU
200K60
:>
0
0:
207C
KTU
200K6
i'!x
232A
OR B
KTU
200K50
:>
l;l
230A
OR B
KTU
N
N
J8673ID.LI
POWER PLANT
232A
OR B
KTU
:>
2070
KTU
:>
I-
0
0:
0
0
l5
0:
0
'"0
N
N
232A
OR B
KTU
:>
lX
230A
OR B
KTU
'"
t;<
0
2 N~
l;l
J86731D, LI
POWER PLANT
230A
OR B
KTU
232A
OR B
KTU
200K70
Fig. 8-200K-Type KTU, Arrangements
Page 9
9 Pages
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT&TCo Standard
SECTION 518-114-116
Issue 2, September 1971
REFERENCE
1A 1 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
"TOUCH-TONE@h ADAPTERS
1.
Replaceable Components for the 247A
GENERAL
This section is reissued to change relay
designation H3 to L3 for digit 8 in Table
1.01
• P48F439 Printed Wiring Board Assembly
(PC1)
A.
• P48F442 Printed Wiring Board Assembly
(PC2)
This issue of the section is based on the
following drawings:
1.02
• P48F445 Printed Wiring Board Assembly
(PC3)
• SD-69529-0l Issue 6 (247B KTU)
• SD-69447-0l Issue 4 (247A KTU (MD»
(d)
Design Features
If this section is to be used with equipment or
apparatus reflecting later issues of the drawings,
reference should be made to the SDs and CDs to
determine the extent of the changes and the
manner in which the section may be affected.
2.
247B
• No installation adjustments required
IDENTIFICATION
(a)
• Replaceable circuit packs
Purpose
• Responds only to valid TOUCH-TONE signals
To convert TOUCH-TONE@ signals to relay
closures compatible with dial pulse
communication systems.
(b) Application
(c)
247A
• 2A Communication System
• Initial installation adjustments required
• 6A Key Telephone System
• Replaceable printed wiring boards
Ordering Guide
• Time-out circuit (with warning tone) to
prevent false operation.
• Unit, Telephone, Key 247B (Fig. 1, 2, and
3)
• Unit, Telephone, Key 247A (MD) (Fig. 4
and 5)
3.
Replaceable Components for the 247B
• Pack, Circuit Yl thru Y5 (ordered individually)
INSTALLATION
Where possible, install adjacent to 207-type
KTU in standard apparatus cabinets, relay
racks, or panels used for 200-type KTUs.
3.01
® American Telephone and Telegraph Company, 1971
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
SECTION 518-114-116
fr
l
Note: On 2-talking link arrangements of the
6A Key Telephone System, the second link
must be made busy.
Before placing 247A KTU in service
adjust Hand L relays. (See 3.04).
D
(b) Block TOA relay operated to prevent time-out.
3.02
Power, 20-26 volts dc, must be provided
from the associated system.
(c) Adjust L relay as follows:
(1) Remove handset
3.03
Handling of 247A KTUs may result in
damage to wire spring relays. After
mounting, visually inspect all wire spring relays
for:
(2) Depress any two adjacent horizontal dial
buttons in the top row.
(3) Adjust L bias potentiometer counterclockwise
until LI relay fails to operate.
• Improper position of contact springs
• Broken cards
(4) Readjust potentiometer clockwise until
only LI relay operates properly.
• Improper position of cards.
3.04
(5) Now successively depress two adjacent
horizontal dial buttons in the other rows
to observe the operation of L2, L3, and L4
relays. Readjust L bias potentiometer if
necessary according to (3) and (4).
General information for adjusting Hand L
bias potentiometers is as· follows:
(a) Rotating H or L bias potentiometer in the
counterclockwise direction will decrease
sensitivity of the circuit to a point where the
relays will operate slowly or not at all. Rotating
the potentiometers in the clockwise direction will
increase sensitivity of the circuit to a point where
more than one relay in the H or L group will
operate from the same frequency.
Note: If readjustment is necessary, repeat
tests for all L relays.
(d) Adjust H relay as follows.
(1) Follow same procedure as for L relay
except that two adjacent vertical dial
buttons are depressed and H bias potentiometer
is adjusted.
(b) Depressing two adjacent horizontal dial buttons
at the same time will only produce the low
frequency tone for that horizontal row. Rows
from top to bottom operate LI, L2, La, and L4
relays, respectively.
(c) Depressing two adjacent vertical dial buttons
at the same time will only produce the high
frequency tone for that row. Rows from left
to right operate HI, H2, and H3 relays,
respectively.
3.05
Procedure for adjusting Hand L relay
operation is as follows:
(a) Connect a telephone set equipped with a
I2-button TOUCH-TONE dial to any convenient
T and R terminals associated with TOUCH-TONE
dial stations, so that the 247A KTU can be
observed while operating dial buttons.
Page 2
(e) Operate each dial key individually, observing
that the proper Hand L relay combination
is operating according to Table A. If necessary
readjust the bias potentiometers.
(f) Remove blocking tool from TOA relay.
(g) Initiate several test calls to make sure that
signaling occurs at the selected station.
(h) Remove telephone set used for tests from
the line.
3.06
To check the time-out feature, remove the
handset of a TOUCH-TONE dial station and
observe the time it takes to receive the interrupted
warning tone. This should occur in 5 to 10 seconds.
ISS 2, SECTION 518-114-116
247AKTU
• TABLE A.
DIGIT SEQUENCE
DIGIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
FREQUENCIES
TRANSMITTED
1209
1336
1477
1209
1336
1477
1209
1336
1477
1336
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
697
697
697
770
770
770
852
852
852
941
5.03
RELAY S
OPERATED
HI,
H2,
H3,
HI,
H2,
H3,
HI,
H2,
H3,
H2,
Mainte nance should be limited to the
following:
(a) Checking relay portion of unit
Ll
Ll
Ll
L2
L2
L2
L3
L3
L3
L4
Note: When checking relay portion of unit,
all three printed board assemblies must be
removed from unit to prevent possible damage
to transistors.
(b) Replacing of defective printed board assemblies.
(c) Adjusting Hand L bias potentiometers for
Proper operation of Hand L relays.
Note: All high frequencies ±2 cps; all low
frequencies ± 1 cps.
7-13/32 IN .
L - - - _ - - (17 MODULES )
CONNECTIONS
4.
For connections refer to Section 512-534-400
for 2A Communication System (Business
Interphone) and to Sections 518-410-400, 518-410-401,
or 518-4 10-402 for Selector-Only Arrangement,
Single-Talking Link Arrangement and Two-Talking
Link Arrangements, respectively.
4.01
6
MAINTENANCE
5.
247BKTU
5.01
Maintenance is limited to replacement of
circuit packs.
5.02
To replace circuit packs (Fig. 3):
LIMITER AND
BIAS CIRCUIT
Fig. 1-2478 KTU, Front View
(1) Loosen and swing open retaining strap.
(2) Grasp D-ring and pull straight out of unit.
(3) Align replacement with top and bottom slides
and push forward until seated in connector.
(4) Refasten retai ning strap making sure all
circuit packs are fully seated.
Page 3
SECTION 518-114-116
Fig. 2-2478 KTU, Rear View
RETAIN I NG
STRAP
Fig. 3--2478 KTU, Circuit Pack Removal
Page 4
ISS 2, SECTION 518-114-116
HIGH FR EOUENCY CA RD
Fig. 4-247A KTU TOUCH-TONE Adapter, Front View
Fig. 5-247A KTU TOUCH-TONE Adapter, Rear View
Page 5
5 Pages
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT&TCo Stondord
SECTION 518-114-425
Issue 3, July 1974
SERVICE
1A 1 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
KEY TELEPHONE UNITS
1.
GENERAL
1.01
This section provides connection information
for lAI Key Telephone System arrangements.
1.02
This section is reissued to revise Fig. 5, 6,
9, 12, 14, 16, and 17.
1.03
This issue of the section is based on the
following drawings:
Fig. 3-203A B, C or D and 212A KTUs with
210A and 227B KTUs for Line Pickup
and Hold, Line and Busy Lamps,
Common Audible Signal, Timeout, Lamp
Wink, and Power Failure
Fig. 4-238A KTU with 30A and 227B KTUs
for Line Pickup and Hold, Line and
Busy Lamps, Interrupted Audible
Signals, Common Audible Signals,
Auxiliary Timeout, and Lamp Wink
SD-69203-01, Issue 7
Fig. 5-202C or D, or 230A or B KTUs with
232-Type, 30A and 227B KTU s for
Line Pickup and Hold, Line and Busy
Lamps, Interrupted Audible Signals,
Common Audible Signals, Auxiliary
Timeout, Lamp Wink, and Manual
Intercom
SD-69270-01, Issue 4
SD-69286-01, Issue 8
SD-69288-01, Issue 17
SD-69294-01, Issue 6
If this section is to be used with equipment or
apparatus reflecting later issues of the drawings,
reference should be made to the SD's to determine
the extent of the changes and the manner in which
the section may be affected.
1.04
2.
Refer to Section 518-114-110 for functional
schematics of KTUs covered in this section.
CONNECTION INDEX
Connections for CO or PBX Line Circuit
Fig. 1-202A, B, C, D KTUs with 209A and
210A KTUs for Line Pickup and Hold,
Line and Busy Lamps, Metallic or
Grounded Ringing, Timeout, Lamp
Wink, and Power Failure
Fig. 2-230A or B KTUs with 209A and 210A
KTUs for Line Pickup and Hold, Line
and Busy Lamps, Metallic or Grounded
Ringing, Timeout, and Lamp Wink
@
Fig. 6-239A KTU with 232-Type, 30A, and
227B KTUs for Line Pickup and Hold,
Line and Busy Lamps, Interrupted
Audible Signals, Common Audible
Signals, Auxiliary Timeout, Lamp Wink,
and Manual Intercom
Fig. 7-202C or D, or 230A or B KTUs with
209A and 210A KTUs for Line Pickup
and Hold, Line and Busy Lamps,
Common Audible Signals, Lamp Wink,
and Timeout
Fig. 8-202C or D with 210A KTU and only
the Common Equipment Part of 212A
KTU for Line Pickup and Hold, Line
and Busy Lamps, Common Audible
Signals, Lamp Wink, and Timeout
Fig. 9-233A KTU with 227B and 232-Type
KTUs for Line Pickup and Hold, Line
and Busy Lamps, Interrupted Audible
Signals, Lamp Wink, Manual Intercom,
and Timeout
American Telephone and Telegraph Company, 1974
Printed in U.S.A.
Poge 1/2
ISS 3, SECTION 518-114-425
Milcelianeoul Connedlonl
Fig. 100Automatic Tie Line (203A KTU) or
Ringdown Tie Line Circuit (204A
KTU) or Station Line Circuit (205A
KTU) with 209A and 211A KTUs for
Steady Common Audible Signals, Line
and Busy Lamps, and Timeout
Fig. ll-Automatic Tie Line (203A KTU) or
Ringdown Tie Line Circuit (204A
KTU) or Station Line Circuit (205A
KTU) with 2UA KTU and only the
Common Equipment Part of 212A
KTU for Steady Audible or Common
Audible Signals, Line and Busy Lamps,
and Timeout
Fig. 12-Automatic Tie Line Circuit (203A
KTU) or Ringdown Tie Line Circuit
(204A KTU) or Station Line Circuit
(205A KTU) with 227B and 232-Type
KTUs for Interrupted Audible or
Common Audible Signals, Line and
Busy Lamps, Lamp Wink, and Timeout
Fig. 13-Automatic Tie Line Circuit (203A
KTU) or Ringdown Tie Line Circuit
(204A KTU) or Station Line Circuit
(205A KTU) with only the Common
Equipment Part of 238A KTU and
227B KTU for Interrupted Audible
or Common Audible Signals, Line and
Busy Lamps, Lamp Wink, and Timeout
Fig. 14-Dial Selective Intercom Circuit (207 A,
B, or C KTU) with 208A and 209A
KTUs and only the Common Equipment
Part of 212A KTU for Flashing Line
Lamps, Busy Lamps, Audible Signals,
and Timeout
Fig. 15-Manual Cutoff Circuit (29A KTU) with
202A, B, C, or D, 212A, 230A or B,
233A, 238A, 239A, 203A, 204A, and
205A KTUs
Fig. IS-Cut-Through and Control Circuit for
Automatic Cutoff (26B and 29A KTUs)
with 202A, B, C, or D, 212A, 230A
or B, 233A, 238A, 239A, 203A, 204A,
and 205A KTUs.
Fig. 17-Dial Selective Intercom Circuit (207A,
B, or C KTU) with Busy Lamps and
Audible Signals.
Page 3
§
'l
fD
•,.
oz
202A
KTU
(NOTE I)
1ST LINE CKT
TO CO
OR PBX
LINE
I~!~:E I~~~:E I~~g~E
I)
2ND LINE
CKT
I
?
(NOTE 6)
I
'3/)-11--;:;;
>-'RT'----;--(~)-II----H~tr9'
"
-"'R'--_-+_ _(,>--g-<
~
22
~23)
~
~E
12
2)
T
]
R
~~N~T~KT
TI
(NOTE3)
RI
'Ii~-+T--l
I >;i
t<
~
R
TI
TO 6TH LINE
CKT (NOTE 3)
If WINK CKT
RI
IS NOT PROVIDED
~)~)
LB
>:-<
>:<
IL
~
s4)
f(4)
~ r-----<
29)
I
2
>-<
8)
~
~
~
I
>-:-<
r'
I~}--- ~
~
5 l--l-'-'--]
R
TO 4TH
TI
LINE CKT
(7
(NOTE 3)
I __
>s";0<
~
>;'
~
TO 3RD
LINE CKT
(NOTE 3)
~
>;"<)
I
]
>.:-<
~
TO
~}- 18~)
J~
I
I )
~)
~
R
>:-<
(;OTE 2)
~
L8
I
T
>-<
';"<
rr-~
I CO
TO POWER
SUPPLY
TI
,-<"l--l-'R'"'"I-r 4 '}--+.::.:...._
T
'i 4'-------
HA
J
B GRD
'I'
2
'15~
'--"
[~19)
LB
>-<
t
~~~}--- ~
30.
>-<
B GRO
~
----+-Ir"""""~
~
~J1.-- ~
t;g<}29(
f"j8\
~
8
Lf
~
~}-
B~
25)
19r-9)--~)
B?-<.,-.
39r--
If
,2";
22
~
~ §.r~
r_~
t
'----t---(~l------H~v___
GRO OR RG I
SUPPLY
~
S
LINE CKT If
WINK CKT IS
NOT PROVIDED
>ti}---f®
~}-~
I L{27<
>'::<26 t
BI, 8Z1
W
Izj<
'2s<
[RI,8Z
~::t~
>;7
~r--~)- ~
2~.~
H
B GRO
~
~
~
~
TO 6TH
>::<
5
>::<
U'--
~~
L-=:::.---;---{191--,,11----H~r-
~
13-\ "
TSB
I
',8}-_ _ _+B=-.:;;8A.;..;T.:..._ _ _ _ _ _-:I-{~l--l-B'-"'BA...;.T"-.
'ii
I "-.I
t'
>'\.....,'-- '2
U"
5
TSA
I)
4TH LINE
CKT
A
>-<
~,--i I
I
TELEPHONE -'A'-I---t--{~}-"II----t-{J'r-~I"""T"\......
SET
L
r '--' '-r L_IL_ r 4'
"""L"----l--{>-<
"
.;..rrl:-<'r-
'15 .,
-!!.. ::
r _,
209' KTU
210A
KTU
K
28
?::::
~
Fig. l-Connections for CO or PBX Line Circuits (202A, B, C, DKTUs) with 209A ond 210A KTU. for Line
Pickup and Hold, Line and Busy Lamps, Metollic or Grounded Ringing, Timeout, Lamp Wink, ond
Power Foilure (Sheet 1)
202A
KTU
(NOTE II
1ST LINE CKT
ST LEAD
ST
(2<
(3<
51_ ...
202D
KTU
(NOTE II
4TH LINE
CKT
209A KTU
210A
KTU
T5 A
R
r.<
RI
TI
~
"--'
~
TSB
'33)
~
£<
~
>-<
I
+
202C
KTU
(NOTE II
!liD LINE
CKT
'31
(I'
NOTE
202B
KTU
(NOTE II
2ND LINE
CKT
I~ I
T
(NOTE 3>1
'--@
®
®
ro
_
LINE
[ "
CKT
TI
(NOTE 3)
RI
(NOTE 4)
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
'-"
NOTES:
OPTIONS
I. CONNECTIONS ARE SHOWN rOR EACH TYPE or 202 KTU. rOR MORE THAN ONt LINE
C I RCU IT, HULTI PLE CONNECTI ONS TO THE SUCCEED I NG LINE C I RCU I TS. THE 209A
KTU WILL SERVE riVE LINE CIRCUITS WITH WINK HOLD AND SIX LINE CIRCUITS
WITHOUT WINK HOLD.
2. ADD~WIRING WHEN WINK HOLD IS NOT PROVIDED.
3. PROVIDES POWER rAILURE rOR 202A AHO 202B KTUS.
4. THE 202C AND 2020 KTUS ARE rURNISHED WIRED rOR METALLIC LINE RINGING,
®OPTION. Ir GROUNDED LINE RINGING IS DESIRED, CONNECT®OPTION.
FEATURE
WIRING
STEADY HOLD SIGNAL
fII:..J.Z
GROUNDED LINE RINGING
V
METALLIC LINE
RINGING (NOTE 4)
X
*
Z IS rOR 202A AND B KTU
J IS rOR 202C AND 0 KTU.
5. REMOVE STRAP WHEN ST LEAD IS USED rOR INTERRUPTED AUDIBLE SIGNAL.
6. SYMBOL
t
HH
MEANS DO NOT STRAP ADJACENT TERMINALS INDICATED BY STRAPS.
TERMINAL APPEARS IN OTHER LOCATIONS ON THIS rlGURE.
Fig. l-Connectlons for CO or PBX Line Circuits (202A, B, C, D KTUs) with 209A and 210A KTUs for Line
Pickup and Hold, Line and Busy Lamps, Metallic or Grounded Ringing, Timeout, Lamp Wink, and
Power Failure (Sheet 2)
1•
&II
I
TSA
1ST L"E
CKT
230A
TSB
2ND LINE
CKT
KTU
Tes
3RD LINE
CKT
TSD
4TH LINE
CKT
TSA
1ST LINE
CKT
2306
TSB
2ftD LINE
CKT
KTU
TSC
3RD LINE
CKT
210A KTU
TSD
4TH LINE
CKT
TSA
209A KTU
TSB
(NOTE 3)
®
TO CO OR ( T
PBX LI NE ..;.R'--_ _+{
[:
LG
~~yl~~~I:E~~IB
-'H'-_ _-+-{
(If PROVIDED)
TO VIS AND AUD SIG CA OR CAl
CONT CKT OR STA
LI NE CONCR CKT
BAT. t
_TO AUDIBLE SIGNAL[ OR 105V t
POWER SUPPLY
_
GRD OR RG
TO COMMON
[
AUDIBLE SIGNALS
BI OR BII
RI OR BI
J~~/:;KNOT
LlNE CKT
fOR INT COM AUD SIG B GRD
US I NG RELAY CONT
-"-='-----1-....
CKT (227A OR STA
-LINE CONCR)
TO 14-26 VOC
POWER SUPPLY
J--t-_....::;LB'--+-
PROVIDED
[
B BAT.
B GRD
-"-='-----1--t
Fig. 2-Connectlons -for CO or PIX Line Circuits (230A or I KTUs) with 209A and 210A KTUs "rLine PIckup
and Hold, Line and lusy Lamps, Metallic or-Grounded Ringing, Tlm_ut, and Lamp Wink (Sheet 1)
230A KTU
TSA
lSS
1ST LINE
CKT
2ND LINE
CKT
TSC
3 LINE
CKT
2308 KTU
TSD
4TH LINE
CKT
@
(N OTE
~)
~
=
>zg<
y
f~
TSA
HA
TO
i
I
I
I
20
19
I
ILa
I
I
19
20
LW
~"
23
I
4
LWI:§f
19
LW!
20
i
TO 5TH
[
LINE CKT
(NOTE 2)
5
Lf
Lf
LW
Lf
(24
I
(26
(28
25
~~
19
I~
Lr
I
20
19
NOTES:
I. ADD STRAP WHEN WINK CIRCUIT IS NOT PROVIDED.
2. WHEN A 5TH OR 6 TH LINE CIRCUIT IS REQUIRED, REfER TO fiG. I fOR
. CONNECTI ONS fOR A 202- TYPE KTU.
3. THE 230A AND 230B KTUS ARE fURNISHED WIRED fOR METALLIC LINE RINGING,
OPTION. If GROUNDED LINE RINGING IS DESIRED, CONNECT
OPTION.
4. SYMBOL (-jf-) MEANS DO NOT STRAP ADJACENT TERMINALS. RUN LEADS TO
LOCATION INDICATED BY LEGEND.
®
Lf
I
:~
I I
I
14
I
20
~
r{i<
>-<
~
TO
!
TSS
'3'
>j<
LK
~
>-<
~
16)
209A KTU
TSD
4TH UNE
CKT
CO
!/ti
~
± OR BAT
210A KTU
TSC
3RD LINE
CKT
2ND LINE
CKT
~
8
I~
(21
~
~
LG
TSB
'24
(W
TO LAMP [
POWER
SUPPL Y
TSA
1ST LINE
CKT
cl
(30
27
29
®
OPTIONS
fEATURE
in
WIRING
STEADY HOLD SIGNAL
J
GROUNDED LINE RING I NG
V
METALLIC LINE RINGING (NOTE 3)
X
CIt
to'
CIt
§
Z
Fig. 2-Connedions for CO or PBX Line Circuits (230A or B KTUs) with 209A and 210A KTUI for Line Pickup
and Hold, Line and Busy LampI, Metallic or Grounded Ringing, Timeout, and Lamp Wink (Sheet 2)
I•
212A KTU
TSA
TSB
TSC
I ST LI HE CKT 2ND LI HE CKT 3RD LI NE CKT
TO CO OR
PBX LINE
TO KEY
~~~EPHONE
(....;RT~---+<'3i'
-"------1K~
[
--"H'--_ _
(Ir
PROVIDED)
TO AUDIBLE
>s'< "
-rl~
"
_+<~..
>;<
>;< "L
.f>;<"
I ~..
>;<
B BAT
B GRD
TO LAMP
[
POWER SUPPLY
~:
'--'
<
I
I
I
~..
>;-<
~ ::
>j
>;<
~..
~
>a<
~
~)
~
_
~
r3
(NOTE 7)
5::
~::
~
'6
-
i
'I
'2S
I ~TE 7)
I
I
~
I
'8
~
~:D T~U~:~~~L
'iQ<>--_-i-::-R--:,R:::-I-::O"..R_C_AIt-_ _]
B OR BI
SIGNAL CKT
'--'
*
"~
I
'z7
~
/'
I
'-'
'14
B BAT
B GRD
I
18
20
~
'301}--+'-IKI6
Ii
(r;<
)~ T"®
I 17
36
(NOTE 7) 5
26
(l
~l--_--+_ _ _ _t -_ _ _~_ _ _-+~_ _-+_N_OT_E_3_-iI-_ _r'--i-I~
~~
,:
~1)---I-----1I----Ir----If-----1"'----":'-IK~
I ~}---+----+-----H£}---H'Z1:}---+{'2!
'--'
1
CO
1191)---I----I-(~
18)----+----t-----H~
120
LK
~
~
~
~~
I
I
I
'23'
~)-----+-(~
~
~
:~D~~~N
SIGNAL
B>---+_-I
'30
~
~
>s<
'--'
"
>z)
>;<
'4<
is<
-'L
fa<
'it
r_~
~
1>-<38
'=I~ 1'--"
I'i\..--!..rrn
)y
HOTE 5 L-
(NOTE 7)
~
I
~
~..
~
~
~0' ~.
390
24
~
>=<"
~
'40'
1
(
I
~
(8<
"-'
>;;:
1>-<29
='30
BAT t,lOSVt
~~
1:8"
'20
[GRD OR RG
~
>s'<
t
"-'
I ~..
>j1
3::
>s'<"
"-'
TO 14-26 VDC [
POWER SUPPLY
~..
~..
..,:L:..;;G_ _ _..,.;I~~:
TO lOlA OR
~~/OWER
::
·...::A'--_ _-+f~
-=L'--_ _
~~~P~~~T
"
...::R'-----IK~HI--_+<~
...::A::.I- - - - - 1K
210A
KTU
2020
KTU
'31 "
'3i'HII--'-IK'I'HII-----t-{'3i'HII-----t-('7}od''II-----t-{'7)
~H"I---+_{~"
~ "
~"
~ --:;-.
>a<
>j<"
>j<"
I ~..
>j<"
I >j'''
>j)
(NOTE 8)
...JT~_ _-+<>j<
4TH LI HE CKT (NOTE I)
2028
202C
KTU
KTU
202A
KTU
~
~
TO
HA
~
I~
Fig, 3-Connectlonl for CO or PBX Line Clrcultl (202A, B, C or D and 212A KTUI) with 210A and 227B
KTUI for Line Pickup and Hold, Line and BuIY LampI, Common Audible Signal, Timeout, Lamp Wink,
and Power Failure (Sheet 1)
l;~~~ ~;U)
212A KTU
TSA
I ST LINE CKT
TSB
TSC
2ND LINE CKT 3RD
LI NE CKT
I
4TH LINE CKT (NOTE I)
202A
KTU
202B
KTU
202C
KTU
2020
KTU
210A
KTU
(NOTE 2)
26
T
I
36
LW
LB
J
)-----11---
TO 5TH
II NE CKT
(NOTE 4)
@
(NOTE ~ l
NOTES;
I. THE 212A KTU PROVIDES THREE CO OR
PBX LINE CIRCUITS 'WITH COMMON
EQUIPMENT FOR SIX LINE CIRCUITS.ONE OF
EACH TYPE OF 202 KTU' I S SHOWN AS A
FOUIITH LINE CI~CUIT.WHEN A FIFTH OR
SIXTH LINE CIRCUIT IS REQUIRED,MULTIPLE
LEADS TO THE SUCCEED I NG II NE C I RCU I TS.
2. PIIOVIDES POWER FAILURE CIRCUIT
FOR 202A AND 2028 KTU.
3. THE 202C AND 2020 KTUS ARE
FURNISHED WIRED FOR METALLIC
-:
fD
•
10
OPTIONS
LINE RINGING®OPTION IF
GROUNDED LINE RINGING IS
DESIRED, CONNECT®OPTION.
4. IF WINK CIRCUIT IS REQUIRED
FOR THE SiXTH LINE CIRCUIT,
A SECOND 210A KTU MUST BE
FURNISHED.
5. ADD STRAP WHEN WINK CIRCUIT
IS NOT PROVIDED.
6. fOR CONNECTIONS TO VISUAl ANO
AUDIBLE SIGNAL CIRCUIT (227B
KTU) REFER TO SECTION
7. REMOVE S WIRING FROM
TERMINAL STRIPS WHEN
USED FOR I NTERRUPTED
518-310-401.
ALL ASSOCIATED
START LEAD IS
SIGNAL.
B. SYMBOL HH MEANS DO NOT STRAP
ADJACENT TERMINALS. RUN LEADS TO
LOCATION INDICATED BY LEGEND.
FEATURES
WIRING
STEADY HOLD SIG.
J,Z*
GROUNDED II NE
RINGING
V
METALLIC LINE
RINGING (NOTE 3)
*Z
X
IS FOR 212A AND 202A
AND 2028 KTUS. J IS rOR
202C AND 2020 KTUS.
Fig. 3-Connections for CO or PBX Line Circuits (202A, B, C or D ond 212A KTUs) with 210A and 2278
KTUs for Line Pickup and Hold, Line and Busy Lamps, Common Audible Signal, Timeout, Lamp Wink,
and Power Failure (Sheet 2)
in
'"
~
'"
In
!l
oz
'1
III
•
o
238A KTU
LINE
CKT
TSA
LINE
CKT
2
[:
LINE
CKT
3
TSB
LINE
CKT
4
LINE
CKT
5
TSC
LINE
CKT
6
LINE
CKT
7 '
30A KTU
TSO
LINE
CKT
8
TSE
LINE
CKT
COMMON
EQUIP
TSf
COMMON
EQUIP
TSG
9
0-161488 CONN
OR EQUIV
HAl
TOCOORPBX[T
LI NE
-'-------::~
(NOTE 3)®
TO lAMP
POWER SUPPl Y
(
lG
-::.±,::OR,-"B.::.AT'---1f-t-_-<
TO 14-26 VOC ;.:B::....::B:::.AT'-_--1f-t-_-<
POWER SUPPLY [ B GRO
TO VISUAL
-=--='----t--'=..,
AND AUDI BlE
CA OR CAl
Fig. 4-Connections for CO or PBX Line Circuits (238A KTU) with 30A and 227B KTU. for Line Pickup and
Hold, Line and BUIY Lamps, Interrupted Audible signall, Common Audible Signals, Auxiliary Timeout,
and Lamp Wink (Sheet 1)
T"
1.I11E
CKT
9
EQUIP
TSF
-
_
KTU
EQUIP
TSG
"(1ST LIIIE CIT
"(2ND LINE CIT
TO lOlA
"(3RO II NE CKT
OR
H(4TH LINE CKT
~~ ~ ~~T
H (5TH II NE CKT
If PROVIDED
H(6TH LINE CKT
H(7TH LINE CKT
NOTES:
I. FOR CONNECTIONS TO VISUAL AND AUDI BLE
SIGNAL CIRCUIT (2278 KTU). REFER TO
SECTION 518- 310- 401.
2. PROCURE AND I NST ALL LOCALLY.
3. METALLIC LINE ~INGING, @OPTlON, IS fURNISHED ON ALL
• LINE CIRCUITS, If GROUNDED LINE RINGING
IS DESIRED, CONNECT00PTION.
4. SYMBOL (-if-) MEANS DO NOT STRAP
ADJACENT TERMINALS. RUN LEADS TO LOCATION
INDICATED BY LEGEND.
I CKTS
TO MOTOR
CKT(9)
OPTIONS
fEATURE
WINKING HOLD SIGNAL
'l
•......
H
STEADY HOLD SIGNAL
J
K
WITHOUT AUXILIARY TIMEOUT
M
INTERRUPTED COMMON AUDIBLE
SIGNAL USING RELAY
CONTROL C I RCU IT (227B KTU)
T
GROUNDED II NE RING I NG
V
METALLIC LINE RINGING
(fURNISHED ON ALL LINE
CIRCUITS)
X
INTERRUPTED COI4HON AUDI BLE
SIGNAL USING INTERRUPTER
Y
.SIGNAL
fa
WIRING
\11TH AUXILIARY TIMEOUT
STEADY COMMON AUD I BLE
1-4
CKTS(5-8)
POIIER SUPPLY
TO AUDIBLE
SIGNAL
PO\/ER SUPPLY
OR TO VISUAL
CKTS(I-4)
eRO DR RG
BAT.t,I05Vt
CKTS(5-8)
J
J
~
~
CKT(9)
AND AUDIBLE
SIGNAL CKT
(NOTE I)
iii
VI
Z
Fig. 4-Connections for CO or PBX Line Circuits (238A KTU) with 30A and 227B KTUI for Line Pickup and
Hold, Line and BUIY Lamps, Interrupted Audible Signall, Common Audible Signall, Auxillory Timeout,
and Lamp Wink (Sheet 2)
~
~
o
z
SECTION 5.18-114-425
202e KTU
1ST LINE CKT
2020 KTU
2ND LINE CKT
(NOTE 4)
17 ) .
®
,--,@J+::
TO CO OR [:...:.T_ _ _ _ _ _
PBX LINE
R
T
+-<" 7,
TO lOlA KEY
r"
I
';!<
TO 14-26V DC[B BAT.
POWER SUPPLY B GRD
~~------------~27
TO 227B KTU (NOTE 2) CA OR CAl
®
GRD. RG
TO COMMON [81 OR 8Z,
AUDI8LE
5 I GNAL
RI OR 8Z
Y •
TSO
4TH LINE CKT
~
orT
)!
~
26
>-<
~
0
H
r"I-1,I---{" ~I-t--
~
~
,~
~
~ -:~
>-<
3"
'-r-.-,
~~I
I~I··
~I
>-T"
3\........J1
,-::.;-0'
"'----'I
~">7"
~::
~
~
"I
~I
~I-t-~
r-'
~
~}---l-----+.-----+-----+-26
>-<
~.)""'-4--------~------~~------~--9 }--+-I---i
91--~11---{ 91--~11---{
9 }---i1r---
>-~H~-~-{25).....-~-(25)--~----4-----+----+--
@
1
Y Z, > -
®
Tor
9)......~-+-1--< 9 ).....~II---(
I
~. > -
TO AUDIBLE
[BAT ± OR 105V±
SIGNAL POWER
@
~'~
~
L.--
lr
or
~
r-.
,
~ H ~
)-!"
>-:<..
3"------'L - ' 3
'--'"
'
-- ~~ -I~
"'----'L ~
~
~
26
TSC
3RO LINE CKT
~I-~H-~
~r
I"
I
,
or
"~
R
LG
H
EQUIPMENT
,,8.;
(.rPROVIDEO)[LG
"
TO LANP POWER
± OR BAT.
~
SUPPLY
....:....~~.:.......-----I-...(29
ilUPPLY
~"
,.--..
)
X
,7/H"I-t---{~r-r------<2
~"
~"
or ~ or
+-<-).
"" -2..
R
Tse
2ND LINE CKT
17).....~~-{17).....~~-{17}-~---{17}----11--(17).....---1:.....-
(NOT
I "
-G."
~ "
r
[ ~A_ _ _ _ _ _
, 3,
KEY TELEPHONE
AI
"......
SET
..!.Li2-i.N-0-TE-51----~~
TO
230A KTU
TSA
1ST LINE CKT
~~----l---j 10l---1---{ I ol---I----{ I O}---II---{ 10,}--1--{ 101----11--1
I
19)-1-.......;..1-....( I 91----'-'--{ 19 }----7-_ - I 19 }---,-'--{ 19' !------;I--{ 19}-........:..1_ _
o
, ) - - I - - - { 2 0 ) - - I - - { 20,)--1---120.)---1--
Fig. ~onnections for CO or PBX Une Circuit. (202C or D, or 230A or B KTU.) with 232-Type, 30A, and
227B KTU. for Line Pickup and Hold, Line and Busy Lamps, Interrupted Audible Signal., Common
Audible Signals, Auxiliary Timeout, Lamp Wink, and Manual Intercom (Sheet 1).
Page 12
ISS 3, SECTION 518.114-425
TSA
1ST LINE CKT
230B KTU
TSB
TSC
2ND LINE CKT 3RD LINE CKT
TSD
4TH LINE CKT
23Z-TYPE
KTU(NOTE I)
NOTES:
I. ON 232A KTU. ST AND TO RELAY
BATTERY CONNECTIONS TERMINATE ON
TERMINAL 39. ON 2328 KTU TERMINAL
TO
39 MA Y 8E USED TO TERM I NATE THE
MANUAL
AUDIBLE SIGNAL SUPPLY GROUND AND 8
INTERCOM
OR
81 LEADS,ON 232C KTU. THE FACTORYSTAT ION
PROVIDED STRAP BETWEEN TERM. 39 AND
TERM. 37 MUST 8E REMOVED WHEN THE me
TO POWER
KTU IS USED WITH SSIA EOUIPPED FOR
PRIVACY.
SUPPLY
2.
FOR CONNECTIONS TO AUDIBLE AND
FOR MOTOR
VISUAL SIGNAL CIRCUIT (2278 KTU)
REFER TO SECTION SI8-31D-401.
3. PROCURE AND INSTALL LOCALLY.
4. METALLIC LINE RIIIGING. X OPT I 011 IS
TO POWER
FURNISHED. IF GROUNDED LINE RINal1lG
SUPPLY
I S DES! RED. COIINECT V OPTI 011.
FOR MOTOR 5. MAXIMUM 20 LAMPS PER LINE CIRCUIT.
6. MAX 1_ 36 LAMPS PER LEAD BUT NDT
TO EXCEED 50 LAMPS PE. 'A I••
7. SYMBOL HH MEAU DO NOT STRA'
ADJACENT IERMIHALS. RUN WDS TO
LOCATlOli INDICATED 8Y L£8lIID.
OPT I OIlS
J
26 10V'
WIRING
FEATURE
H
WINKING HOLD SIGNAL
STEADY HOLD SIGNAL
WITH AUXILIARY TIMEOUT
WITHOUT AUXILIARY TIMEOUT
1:1 11
H
INTERRUPTED C _ AUDIBLE
SIGNAL USING RELAY
COIITROL CIRCUIT (2278 KTU)
I
TO AUDIBLE
SIGNAL POWER
SUPPLY
GROUNDED LINE RIIIGING
V
METALLIC LINE RIIIGIIIG
(FURN I SHED 011 ALL LINE
CIRCUITS)
X
INTERRUPTED COMMOII AUDIIII.£
SIGNAL USING INTERRUPTER
Y
STEADY COMMOII AUD I8I.E
SIGNAL
300\KTU
®
--+--{2I r - l I - - - - + - <
HAl
400A
DIODE
(MOTE 3)
---t---{ 24r - l I - - - - - t - - <
--+--{22r----1----+--<
-+--(23)---1----+--<
~'-+-....!:!:'---+--{
TO
QDL-_4-_~TO~I_
_+----~----~-J
Fig. S---tConnectlonl for CO or PIX Line Circuits (202C or D, or 230A or I KTUI) with 232.Type, lOA, and
2271 KTUI for Line Pickup and Hold, Line and IUIY LampI, Interrupted Audible Signall, Common
Audible Signall, Auxiliary nmeout, Lamp Wink, and Manual Intercom (Sheet 2).
Page 13
SECTION 518·114-425
239A KTU
TSA
LINE
CKT
TO KEY
TELEPHONE
SET
TSB
liNE
CKT
LINE
CKT
LINE
CKT
2
3
4
liNE
CKT
TSE
TSD
TSC
liNE
CKT
LINE
CKT
LINE
CKT
6
7
8
liNE
CKT
9
TSF
liNE
CKT
LINE
CKT
10
II
I..::~______
---!:..{
AI
-L--(N-O-TE--S-)--..!-{
lG
R
TOCOOR(
PBX LINE ..;T~______--.l~
(~TE
4)®
®
LG
TO LAMP
[
I'OIIER SUPPLY ..;t:..;::OR:..;::BA:..:.T__-I-4-__-l
B BAT
TO 14-26 VDC
POWER SUPPLY
(~:;;;':'-----I--I----(
-+==-.f
..;B:...,::GR;:D_____
r--
H(I}
~
22)
H(2)
;g)
H(3}
~
~
H(4}
H(S}
TO lOlA OR
10lB KEY
EQUIPMENT
(IF PROVIDED)
~
H(6)
I
H(7}
I
~
32)
~
>-'
I
H(8}
H(9}
34)
~
H(IO}
>-'
H(II}
~)
'I~Q)I
@
RIOR BZ
TO COMMON [
•
AUDIBLE
BI OR BZI
SIGNAL
@
B RG OR GRD
['
•
TO AUDIBLE
=:lSUPPlY
CAOR CAl
TO V I SUAl AND
AUDIBLE SIGNAL
CKT (227BKTU)
CD •
18
t
20
38
18
~nnedlons
38
I
18
38
20
40
I
I
18
38
18
38
20
40
20
40
I
18
.
40
20
40
-+__________ ________ ________
L_=+~R~N______
®
(NOTE 3)
Fig.
1•I
BAT,'OR I;V
~
~
~~
20.
________-r________-+_____
for CO or PBX Line Circuits (239A KTU) with 232.Type, 3OA, and 227B KTUs for Line
Pickup and Hold, Line and Busy Lamps, Interrupted Audible Signals, Common Audible Signals, Auxiliary
Timeout, Lamp Wink, and Manual Intercom (Sheet 1~
Page 14
ISS 3, SECTION 518-114-425
232-TYPE
KTU
(NOTE I)
TSG
HA
35
®tD
10
TO
I
NOTES:
0-161488 CONN
OR EQU IVALENT
HA I (NOTE 1)
®,
®
(0
30A
KTU
400A DIODE
400A
DIODE
(NOTE 2)
(NOTE 2)
(NOTE 1)
TOI
CO
CD
LK
2. PROCURE AND INSTALL LOCALLY.
3. FOR CONNECTIONS TO VISUAL
AND AUDIBLE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
(227B KTU) REFER TO
SECTION ~IB-310-401.
COl (NOTE 7)
LKI
(NOTE 7)
4. ALL LINE CIRCUI TS ARE
FURNISHED WITH
METALLIC LINE RINGING.
®OPTION. IF GROUNDED
LINE RIIIGING IS DESIRED.
CONNECT®OPTION.
• OR BAT
B BAT
(,. ,®-r
®
LW (1&.2)
(5&.6)
(7&.8)
(9&.10)
(II)
5. MAX 20 LAMPS PER LI NE CK T.
I
6, MAX 36 LAMPS PER LEAD BUT
NOT TO EXCEED 50 LAMPS
PER PAIR.
J!~NUAL
r--+'---
®- :
®= ~
®
®-
} - _ + " -_ _
A BAT
J
}-_+A::...:G::oR~D_
-
INTERCOM
STATION
TO 14-26VDC
POWER SUPPLY
(!)
'---+-<
Y
BAT .'.OR I05V,
TO
AUDIBLE
SIGNAL
POWER
SUPPLY
LF (I
LF (3
LF (5
LF (7
I
+[
TERMINATE ON TERMINAL 39.
ON 232B KTU, TERMINAL 39
MAY BE USED TO TERMINATE
THE AUDIBLE SIGNAL SUPPLY
GROUND. ON Z32C KTU, THE
FACTORY-PROVIDED STRAP
BETWEEN TERM. 39 AND TERM.
37 MUST BE REMOVED WHEN
THE Z32C KTU IS USED WITH
SSIA EQUIPPED FOR
PRIVACY.
TO
G)
15
ON 232 A I{
TO 14-26V [
DC POWER
SUPPLY
B BAT
B GRD
------I---{
r-1----+---t---K26,r-1---+---+-~B~BA~~
1 - ; -_ _+_--~--HI41-;---;_--+_~B~G~RD
Fig. 7-Connections for CO or PBX Line Circuits (202C or D, or 230A or B KTUs) with 209A and 210A KTU.
for Line Pickup and Hold, Line and Busy Lamps, Common Audible Signals, Lamp Wink, and TImeout
(Sheet 1)
Page 16
1553, SECTION 518-114-425
209A KTU
TSD
LINE
CKT
TSA
210A
KTU
TSB
4
NOTES:
W
I.
ADO STRAP WHEN WINK
HOL~
IS NOT PROVIDED.
2. FOR CONNECTIONS TO VISUAL
AND AUOIBLE SIGNAL CIRCUIT,
REFER TO SECTION 518-310-401.
3. ALL LI NE C I RCU I TS SHOWN ARE
FURN I SHED WI TH MEULLI CLINE
RINGING.®OPTION. IF
GROUNDED LINE RINGING IS DESIRED,
CONNECT
OPT I ON.
®
(NOTE I
4. MAX 20 LAMPS PER LI NE CKT.
5. SYMBOL (-1 ~) MEANS DO NOT
r-.-____-r~T~0__________~14
HA
HA
STRAP ADJACENT TERMINALS.
RUN LEADS TO LOCATION
INDICATED BY LEGEND.
TO
OPTIONS
FEATURE
CO
LK
1
F
~::~::
::
LF (CKT 4)
LF (CKT 5)
WIRING
STEADY HOLD SIGNAL
J
I NTERRUPTED COMMON AUD I BlE
SIGNAL USING RELAY
CONTROL CIRCUIT (227B KTU)
T
GROUNDED LINE RINGING
V
METALLIC LINE RINGING
(FURNISHED ON ALL LINE
CIRCUITS)
X
STEADY COMMON AUDIBLE
SIGNAL
Z
• OR LB
• OR LB
LW
± OR
B BAT.
B GRD
LB
r-~~~~------~18
r-;-~~------~20
Fig. 7-Connectionl for CO or PBX Line Circuits (202C or D, or 230A or B KTUI) with 209A and 210A KTUI
for Line Pickup ond Hold, Line ond Busy LampI, Common Audible Signoll, Lomp Wink, ond Timeout
(Sheet 2)
Page 17/18
ISS 3, SECTION 518-114-425
202C KTU
1ST LINE
CKT
(NOTE 4 I
2020 KTU
2ND LINE
212A KTU
(COMMON EQU I P
PART)
TSA
2104 KTU
TSB
+-<
TO KEY
!_R=.:_ _ _ _ _
TELEPHONE
AI
SET
....;.;.'-----+-<
L
@
I
LG
TOCOOR[R
PBX LINE ....:..T_ _ _ _ _
+-:l
.
(NOTE 3)
(NOTE I)
37}-----~------------~__{
®
®
TO 14-26V ( B GRD
DC POWER
B BAT
SUPPLY
~~'----~~
TO lOlA OR 10lB
KEY EQUIPMENT
(If PROVIDED)
...!!.-----+-<
TO LAMP
[ LG
POWER SUPPLY _t....;;OR;.;....;;B;;;;Ac..T_ _-li",(
TO COMMON
AUDIBLE
SIGNAL
r-
'I~
RI OR Bl
LBI
TO AUDIBLE
[
SIGNAL POWER
SUPPLY
OR Bli
ORO OR RG
T,
®
BAT. t
'i'
OR 105 Vt ~
®
TO. VISUAL AND
AUDIBLE SIGNAL
CA OR CAl
""::;0....;;;';"";=_-'
I
r--+_~_~L~f_[~
CKT (227B KTU)
(NOTE 2)
OPTIONS
NOTES:
I. ADD STRAP WHEN WINK CIRCUIT IS NOT PROVIDED.
2. fOR CONNECTIONS TO VISUAL AND AUDIBLE SIGNAL
CIRCUIT (227B.KTU), REfER TO SECTION 518-310-401.
3. 202C OR 2020 LINE CIRCUITS ARE fURNISHED WITH
METALLIC LINE RINGING®OPTION. If GROUNDED LINE
RINGING is DESIRED, CONNECT®OPTION.
4. SYMBOL (-if-) MEANS DO NOT STRAP ADJACENT TERMINALS.
RUN LEADS TO LOCATION INDICATED BY LEGEND.
fEATURES
WIRING
STEADY HOLD SIGNAL
J
I NTERRUPTED COMMON AUD I BLE SIGNAL
US I NG RELAY CONTROL CKT (227B KTU)
T
GROUNDED LINE RINGING
V
METALLIC LINE RINGING (fURNISHED
ON ALL LI NE CKTS)
X
STEADY COMMON AUDIBLE SIGNAL
Z
Fig. &-Connections for CO or PBX Line Circuits (202C or D) with 210A KTU and only the Common Equipment
Part of 212A KTU for Line Pickup and Hold, Line and Busy Lamps, Common Audible Signals, Lamp
Wink, and Timeout
Page 19
"'a"
CD
CD
I,)
o
66B4-25 CONN BlK
ROW ASSIGNMENT
COL A OR F (NOTE 2)
232-TYPE KTU
(NOTE 4)
233A KTU
g~~~ ~ AND
2
A 258
CONN
CABLE
INOTE I) ~
~26 ~___~L-__~I_W_-B_l_)___C_W
__
] ____~,,~____________ T
CBl]
~
27
:'2
CW]
CO]
~
3
CW]
CG]
----4
29
C W]
4
CBR]
>;;;<
CO
_~ 31
CS]
C R]
~
HA
>-<"
~
----.,.
~28
-B
----4 5
WIRED
TO LINE
CIRCUIT
>-<2 ~------------ R TELEPHONE
TO KEY
SET
I
A
'-'3~=:j:=====:J~_~
1-<4
AI
H
Tg,~O~~YO~QPT
I
~ I
-------or
I
CBU
C R]
~ 6
----4 32
I
~
CO]
7
~33
1
~ 8
CR]
I
ISPARE)
IG-R)
~34
I
(SPARE)
(R-BR)
CR]
I
I
(BR-R)
CBR]
1
I R-S)
CR]
I
(S-R)
CS]
~
9
CGJ
*
>;-)..:~---------lG
>;:
(IF PROV)
l
lG
~
I
IOV:!:.
J
TO POWER SUPPLY
FOR MOTOR
MG
12
2
37
)-+-------'l.:.:K'-------------+--{~t ~®400A
0~ ®
>-<12}-1-------------G);=Y::--+--{~
TO
r::;:.
DIODE
INOTE 6)
>;;<
RN
RN \.21)--(22\.---123'1
>-:<
L..!!!....--@RIJTO)f"I-''C:I'C:ICAORCAIT0227BKTU
14)--1
_.
COMMON
® G'l~-+.---------------------'-----'-:.:.-=-'-'--INOTE 3)
~rL
>=<
~
CD
--< ....
~. AUDIBLE
',BAT. OR 105V±
SIGNAL
GRD OR RG
29
L......---------{c-=::.:..::...==-----(39
I
l----]
INOTE 4)
17
,+ ®
>::<
01
+OR BAT
~.
11:}-:I-----::!---=.+-+---B--=G...:R::D:...J=T-0-,-4--2-6-V------I--{~20: ~l ~ ~-
IBK-Bl) CBK]
I
>-<)-=========
T
36 >t-------------------------<>-<222
'
(Bl-BK) CBl]
I
---B I I
A BAT
88
@
?:r<}-+-________--=-lW"-____-'-'::.NO:..T:.:E=-5,,-,-)----------I--{ II
=t~; >+________-'-______________-(~}-------------+--'B::....:B::A"-T ~~p~~:ER
1
~
'>-<
TO 14-26 VDC
(24)-'-------'--J
125'
AGRD
POWERSUPPlY
r_~
>+----=:....:.---'---=-==---{'-')--------
R
J
TO CO OR
PBX LINE
I
I
OR BAT
TO POWER SUPPLY
FOR lAMPS
::~] T~T~~~~~l
R
TO POWER
SUPPLY FOR
AUDIBLE SIGNAL
STATION
40r--.
Fig. 9.......,.c:onnections for CO or PBX Line Circuits (233A KTU) with 227B and 232-Type KTU. for Line Pickup
and Hold, Line and Busy Lamps, Interrupted Audible Signals, Lamp Wink, Manual Intercom, and
Timeout (Sheet 1).
A215B
I
CONN
CABLE
~
,
---t7 37
IBK-O)
[BKJ
(BK-G)
CBK::I
23
T
~
A
------4 12 >t-I_ _ _-'(c.:0_-.:.B;...K:...)---'C:..;0;...::I_ _--{24}--_ _ _ _ _ _ R
TO KEY
~38
I
TElEPHONESET
~'3
:
---i7
1 39
(SPARE)
«:~~:;) ~::J
8
--4'5
I
(S-BK)
[SJ
~
(NOTES) IF
--441
I
(Y-Bl)
CYJ
>;;<
CO
---.l..,.
16
I
(Bl-Y)
[BlJ
~32
~I 42
I
I
(Y-O)
CYJ
;>--<
(O-Y)
[OJ"""
'34
[YJ
~
~ 17
~43
WIRED
TO liNE
CIRCUIT
2
} - - - - +_ _ _ HA
33}----+---- lK
I
(Y-G)
(G-Y)
[G::I
ISPARE)
(Y-BR)
(BR-Y)
[YJ
[BRJ
>-<
(SPARE)
(Y-S)
[YJ
r.'~
I
----H
I •
19
---1-7, 45
~ 20
I
I
I
I
~
~
>i-____(:..:S:..-.:.;Y:...)_...:C:.:S:..:J=--_-{
'VI' ~
40
t OR BAT
I
(Bl-V)
CBl::l
I
(V-D)
[VJ
~
(V-Bl)
I
22
(SPARE)
[VJ
(O-V)
[OJ
(V-G)
CV::I
~
>-<
~
23
I
(SPARE)
(G-V)
[6::1
~
~ 49
I
(SPARE)
(V-BR)
[VJ
~
I
(SPARE)
[BRJ
~
(BR-V)
>-<
---1-7 50
~
--4 25 >:Li.:..:(S.:..:P.::A.:..:R~E:..).....:..:(S:...--'V.!..)_...:[:.;S:.:J=-_ _-<:§
I •
Fig.
I
(SPARE)
(V-S)
~nnection.
[VJ
_
T
R
WIRING
TO POWER SUPPLY
~47
~ 24
..a
OPTIONS
FEATURES
>-<41
.....!!!!:==t==:::.--.!!B...!G!!:R~0 FOR lAMPS
IJ
] TO 14-26 VDC
~}--_+_ _ _-=B;....;:.BA;.;.T:... POWER SUPPLY
+
-"
\!.IT
®
I
I
'l
'X'
THE CONNECTIONS SHOWN ARE FOR CONN A liNE CKTS
I AND 2. THE lEADS FROM CONNECTORS B THROUGH E
ARE TERMINATED IN THE SAME MANNER.
2. TERMINATE CONN CABLE TO COL F IF LEFT HAND
BLOCK OR TO COL A I F RIGHT HAND BLOCK.
3. FOR CONNECTIONS TO VISUAL AND AUDIBLE SIGNAL
CIRCUIT (2276 KTU) REFER TO
SECTION 518-3111-401.
4. ON 232A KTU. ST AND TO RELAY BATTERY
CONNECTIONS TERMINATE ON TERMINAL 39_ ON 232B
KTU. TERM I NAL 39 MA Y BE USED TO TERM I NA TE THE
AUDIBLE SIGNAL SUPPLY GROUND AND B OR BI LEADS.
ON 232C KTU. THE FACTORY-PROVIDED STRAP BETWEEN
TERM. 39 AND TERM. 37 MUST BE REMOVED WHEN THE
232C KTU IS USED WITH SSIA EOUIPPED FOR PRIVACY.
5. LF AND lV LEADS SHOULD NOT EXCEED 50 LAMPS
PER GROUP.
6. PROCURE AND INSTALL LOCALLY.
@
---.l..,. 46
~
~ 21
7
:i
----H48
CD
-RI
~~l
9)
>-<3
MULTIPLE THESE
lEADS TO 232A1B
KTU AS SHOWN
FOR FIRST HALF
TO OF KTU
RN
~,B:i
~44
E
~}---+---..---.:.;Alc..GI+.:..:H-~~YI~~~I~~,~O~:oV)1
U
I
lG
I
(BR-BK) [BR::I
'----I-'=- TO POWER SUPPLY
----414 ) f - - - - - - - - - - - - - ( 2 B } - - - - + - - - l
FOR lAMPS
~40 I
(BK-S)
[BKJ
~
(NOTE S) lW
----,-,-
NOTES:
I. NO liNE CIRCUITS TERNINATE IN EACH CONNECTOR
ON THE 233A KTU. THE CONNECTORS AND liNE
CIRCUIlS ARE ARRANGED AS FOLLOWS:
J;~XC~,~;
WITH AUX TIME-OUT CKT
K
WITHOUT AUX TIME-OUT CKT
M
liNE
RINGING
CKT
METALLIC
X
GROUNDED WITH COM AUD
CONT RELAY NOT PROV
V
COMMON
AUDIBLE
I NTERRUPTED RINGING
WITH VISUAL AND AUDIBLE
SIGNAL CKT PROVIDED
STEADY RI NGI NG
*
I NSUlATE AND STORE
( ) CURRENT COLOR CODE
[ 1 MD COLOR CODE
for CO or PBX Line Circuits (233A KTU) with 227B and m-Type KTU. for Line Pickup
and Hold, Line and Busy Lamps, Interrupted Audible Signal., Lamp Wink, Manual Intercom, and
Timeout (She" 2)•
TOR Y
SECTION 518-114-425
203 A
204A OR
205A KTU
209A KTU
211AKTU
TSA
TSB
(NOTE 3)
[
(NOH 2)
(NOTE 4)
(NOTE 3)
[
~~LEPHONE[_:~
SET
_____
(NOTE 2)
(NOTE 4)
+~
I
~JTO
LG
~
TO SIGNAL KEY _S"---_ _ _ _ __+_~
(NOTE I)
,~,
(NOTE 2)
I _.
14-26VDC
W.~,
(NOTE 3)
[
(NOTE 2)
I
(NOTE 4)
(NOTE 3)
[
(NOTE 2)
(NOTE 4)
l
LB
(LINE I)
Lr
RG
...:.:..:~---.;..,.-+-{
LG
(NOTE I)
(LINE 2)
Lr
TO LAMP
[ t OR BAT
POWER SUPPLY -=-..::.:.:--=:..:....--~.....{
(LINE 3)
Lr
(LINE 4)
Lr
(LINE 5)
Lr
(LINE 6)
Lr
TO AUDIBLE
SIGNAL POWER
SUPPLY
TO 14-26 VDC [
POWER SUPPLY
BAT, tOR 105V t
: :::
_B~B::A.:..T_ _ _ _+~
_B~G::R~D_ _ _ _+~
TO DISTANT
STAT ION OR
SIMILAR TIE
LI NE CKT AT
DISTANT KEY
TELEPHONE
SYSTEM
TO AUDIBLE
[R
T
...!:.------l--{
B OR BI
J
'>-+-___..!R:...:;:O::.R..:;R:..:....I
[ B OR BI
\-.l--_ _~GR~D~O!:.R...!:R~G
BAT, tOR 105V t
SIGNALS
TO COMMAND
AUDIBLE SIGNAL
J
TO AUDIBLE SIGNAL
POWER SUPPLY
_~RO::R~R~I~_ _-l--{
NOTES:
I.
2.
3.
4.
5.
rOR 204A AND 205A KTU ONLY.
rOR 204A KTU ONLY.
rOR 203A KTU ONLY.
FOR 205A KTU ONLY.
CONNECT AS SHOWN WHEN BAT OR IBV t IS USED.
WHEN I05V tiS U SED CONNECT TO LOCAL GROUND
Ir CENTRAL OFriCE GENERATOR IS USED, OTHERWISE
IT MAY BE STRAPPED TO THE PO\O£R SUPPLY GROUND.
Fig. 100Connections for Automatic Tie Line Circuit (203A KTU) or Ringdawn Tie Line Circuit (204A KTU) or
Station Line Circuit (205A KTU) with 209A and 211A KTU. for Steady Common Audible Signals,
Line and Busy Lamps, and Timeout
Page 22
ISS 3, SECTION 518-114-425
203A, OR
204A
205A
KTU
I
212A KTU
211AKTU
TSA
TSB
[--'------IH
-t--{
TO DISTANT STATIONT
OR SIMILAR TIE LINE
CIRCUIT AT DISTANT
...:R'-_ _ _
KEY TELEPHONE SYS
TO TELEPHONE SET
[...::=-------t--{
LG
TO SIGNAL KEY
S (NOTE I)
Lr
TO LAMP (
LG
!'OVER
± OR LB
SUPPLY
[:::
r-~----~~--~~------~~
~-+--~~~--~----430
TO GEN SUP DIRECT [
OR THRU RES LAMP
CKT (NOTE I)
105 V±
RG
----~H
BAT, ± OR 105 V±] TO AUDIBLE
[
B OR BI
GRD OR RG
R OR R I
SIGNAL POWER
SUPPL Y
J
~~_ _ _...:B:....:.O:.:.R-,B,",-I
TO COMMON
AUDIBLE SIGNALS
NOTES:
I. rOR 204A AND 205A KTU ONLY.
2. rOR 204A KTU ONLY.
3. rOR 203A KTU ONLY.
4. rOR 205A KTU ONLY.
5. CONNECT AS SHOWN WHEN BAT OR lav± IS USED.
WHEN 105 V± IS USED, CONNECT TO LOCAL
GROUND Ir CENTRAL OrnCE GENERATOR IS USED,
OTHERWISE IT MAY BE STRAPPED TO THE POWER
SUPPLY GROUND.
Fig. 11-Connectlonl for Automatic Tie Line Circuit (203A KTU) or Ringdown Tie Line Circuit (204A KTU) or
Station Line Circuit (205A KTU) with 211A KTU and only the Common Equipment Part of 212A
KTU for Steady Audible or Common Audible Signal I, Line and Busy LampI, and Timeout
Page 23
SECTION 518-114-425
203A. 204A OR
205A KTU
232-TYPE
(NOTE 6)
2278 KTU
+-_--<
TO DISTANT STATION
[ ....!T_ _
OR SIMILAR TIE LINE
CIRCUIT AT DISTANT
KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM [
TO TELEPHONE SET
T
.....!.._ _I - _ - - {
.JJi.._I-----{
TO SIGNAL KEY ,...2.S_-,.I-_--{
(NOTE I)
R OR RI ]
TO I 4-26V
[..:.:::...:::::::::.,'+__..(
~_ _..:.B~O~R..:.B~I_
,A~B.::.AT!..:.+_ _..(
DC POWER
SUPPLY
TO AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
~_ _ _.::B~B:::A:.:T_~: _~P~~
-
®
B GRD
~+[::
TO AUDIBLE [
SIGNALS
B OR BI
R OR RI
®
]
\ -_ _ _+..:B..:A..:T:.
• .:,
• ..:O:;,:R...:..;=-=-
TO AUDIBLE
SIGNAL POWER SUPPLY
°1
TO POWER
~~:~ Y
rOR
[LG
30
..:'~O::.R..!L:::B:""'+_ _-i 3 1)-.:.·.:OR!!...!L::B:.....l-_ _--(
9
10
OPTIONS
rEATURE
Fig.
1~onn.dionl
Pog8 24
WIRING
INTERRUPTED AUDIBLE
OR CONHON AUD I BLE
SIGNAL us ING INTERRUPTER
X
I NTERRUPTED COMMON
AUDIBLE SIGNAL USI NG
RELAY COiHROL CIRCUIT
(227B AND 232-TYPE (KTU)
Z
NOTES:
I. rOR 204A AND 205A KTU ONLY,
2. rOR 204A KTU ONLY.
3. rOR 203A AND 205A KTU ONLY.
4. PROVIDE 400A DIODE INSTEAD or STRAP WHEN
204A KTU CONNECTS TO THE SAME COMMON
EQU I PME NT AS 203A AND 205A KTUS.
5. CONNECT Lr LEAD TO ANY TERMINAL AS LONG
AS A MAXIMUM or 36 LAMPS PER LEAD OR 50
LAMPS PER PAIR IS NOT EXCEEDED.
6. ON 232A KTU. ST AND TO IATTERY
CONNECTIONS TERMINATE ON TERMINAL
39. ON 232B KTU, TERMINAL 39 MAY BE
USED TO TERMINATE THE AUDIBLE SIGNAL
SUPPLY GROUND AND B OR BI LEADS. ON 232C
KTU, THE FACTORY-PROVIDED STRAP BETWEEN
TERMINAL 39 AND TEMINAL 37 MUST BE REMOVED
WHEN THE 232C KTU IS USED WITH SSIA
EQUIPPED FOR PRIVACY.
for Automatic TI. LIn. Circuit (203A KTU) or Rlngdown TI. LIn. Circuit (204A KTU)
or Station LIn. Clrcul.t (205A KTU) with 227B and 232.,Type KTUI for Int.rrupt.d Audlbl. or Common
Audlbl. Signall, LIn. and BUIY lamPI, Lamp Wink, and Tlm.o....
ISS 3, SECTION 518-114-425
238A KTU
203A.
204A OR
205A
TSF
227B KTU
TSG
KTU
39
10
STATION
OR DISTANT
SIMILAR TIE
LINE
CIRCUIT AT DISTANT
TO KEY TEL SET
TO SIGNAL KEY
T
9
R
~
L
~
LG
t')
TO POIoER
SUPPLY
40~~--~10~V~·----------~I---------------- ~~OR
(...;T::..-._ _ _~II
R
KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM [
J
MG
I
~T~0...;(_NO_T_E_2_)~+-_~31
l=:b-l:::,':l"
~
SCNOTE 11
r<
~
TO
10 (NOTE 3)
~2
LK (NOTE 3)
~~CO~____~__________4-__~3
I
~
LF (NOTE 51
1=
I
I
LF
5
LF
~
-+..!LF:!...-__{'2S
•.
--l--=LF_--(~
-+~L~F__~~
8 GAD
~~----~~rA GRD
....::...=----H~
-+~LF:!...-~~
-+..!L::...F__...(>U
~.- ~[
B BAT ____~~
~~
POWER SUPPLY
TO POIIER
FOR LAllI'S
I
>-<
A BAT
....::....:::..:.----H-!:..
tOR LB
.'I'I.Y[:....!..!!!!....!:2.---~~~h
_
LG
~
____Hr.~
~
B B'T
~
®
I @ - < R N I RN
RN
8
O~I ••
>-®
\!Y
~>-I@
>-<
-4....:::.---I~E!
B OR 81
@
24
R OR RI
TO
14-26V DC
POIoER
SUPPLY
B BAT
B OR BI
~
GRD OR RG
B OR BI
>-<
~~
GRD OR RG
~
r
~\+_'--~Rc.:0~Rc.:R~I~----+_1
~r
R OR RI
•
®
R OR RI@
RD OR RG
]
~B~OR~B~I---I~,~-~G~R~D~O~R~R~G~-~-
1...j..!!B....!O~RL..B~I!....___{~~I-~G!J:R~D~O!!lR'-.JR~G~-....:.I-
I'---< ( Y > . . :Jj4\
Y
1L--+------~-~~1----+_-------t__14
~~p~E~OR
B OR 81
®1@
30
NOTES:
I. FOR 204A AND 205A KTU ONLY.
2. FOR 203A AND 205A KTU ONLY.
3. FOR 204A KTU ONLY.
4. PROYIDE 400A DIODE INSTEAD OF
STRAP WHEN 204A KTU CONNECTS
TO THE SAME COMMON EQU I PMENT
AS 203A AND 205A KTUS.
5. CONNECT LF LEAD TO ANY TERMINAL
AS LONG AS A MAX I MUM OF 36 LAMPS
PER LEAD OR 50 LAMPS PER PA IR
I S NOT EXCEEDED.
TO
AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
OR BI
9
19
RN
J
R OR RI
:: Ii
L--I-..::....::::.":....------+-----f'lO
L _ _~~t~O~R~L~B~--+_-__{
(Y
TO AUDIBLE SIGNALS [
LF
@
BAT.
± OR
105V±
AUD I BLE
SIGNALS
OPTIONS
FEATURE
WIRING
INTERRUPTED AUD I BLE OR COMMON
AUDIBLE SIGNAL, USING
INTERRUPTER
X
INTERRUPTED COMMON AUDIBLE
SIGNAL USI NG RELAY CONTROL
CIRCUIT (227B KTU)
Z
Fig. 13-Connectlons for Automatic Tie Line Circuit (203A KTU) or Rlngdown Tie Line Circuit (204A KTU) or
Station Line Circuit (205A KTU) with only the Common Equipment Part of 238A KTU and 227B
KTU for Interrupted Audible or Common Audible Signall, Line and BUlY LampI, Lamp Wink, and
Timeout
Page 25
TO KEY
TELEPHONE
SET (rOR
STATIONS
2.5 AND 8)
I
208A KTU
(rOR
STATIONS
2,3 AND 4)
_'NOT"E /)
...!T:-------tK~"
--':........------lK'2'
2~---H>;< "
.....:A:;..I_ _ _ _
I
I
. LG
+<~ "
r'
~
L
/"""'
-.!~------lK33
T
TO KE
R
TELEP~ONE
A
~~
STATIONS
AI
3.6 AND 9)
LG
L
~~L~~~ONE
SET (rOR
~T:~~O~~
~
~
~
~
"
"
-11::
H
5
~ ~~
'34
:;<
T
R
'"""""
~-----+z<
>z)
>;<) - i I - I >;<)
>:
~ -I>~)
=
" ~
/"""'
r-~"1r
33)
6)----i1- >s-<)
~ -!~
4 BAT
'NOTE 2)
4 GRD
TSA
207 BIC KTU
T58
TSA
~r-----
>ji)-"R=-3- t - - - - - - t t -
I (.7rB'}-.!!.!R8!..........+--_ __+_
5 )-il-
5)
)g}---
~
'--'~
~ -!~~)
-=--+Ift-~
B3
l34)-i1- ~
B4
I
I
B5
'-'
/jO)
B6
~r- >jj')
14
>:-:24
B5
~6,-
I ~ I-
eo
GRD OR RG
I de'
>'-<0
1)--,=~-"".-----1-{.
>;
~:~===~~~
I;s
!
~~
B7
r--"B",8_+-
B9
I
@'J-!31
B8
~,r-;I-~)
TO
AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
I
B1
:ra:,r-;I-~)
-
I
t<
>26)__RO:........-+----+_
'--'
~
.......
'---'
'1O}--i1-
COMMON EQUI P
PART or 212A
KTU
TSS
........
'--'
r2O
-"'---- =11l-"-R1'---+----+_
>s"<)
~r- ~
OR
'r IZ:)-"R"-2_t-_ _----I1-
~L........
~u
209A KTU
T58
TSA
,,-..
( 15 r - -
I ~)--R9'---+--------'-
~r-H~)-f~)
\C:
~..
~ \;;.;.
-
OR
""t ~
:~P~:~6Y ~...!::"':~:::"~----H~ ~
!
I
~~p~ER
>:
)-it-
2074 KTU
208A KTU
(rOR
STATIONS
8,9 AND 0)
_
r l ')
BAT ,< OR I05Y<
:::~
eo
I
~
~}---+-:-::-~---1-{r ~
-@)---[@
I tro<
I
!
~
A BAT:r<
!
A GRD
Fig. l~onnectlon. for Dial Selective Intercom Circuit (207A,B, or C KTU) with 208A and 209A KTU.
and only the Common Equipment Part of 212A KTU for Flashing Line Lamps, Busy Lamps, Audible
Signals, and Timeout (Sheet 1).
208A
(FOR
STATIONS
2,3 AND 4)
TO LAMP
POWER
SUPPL Y
~ BAT
OR
t
208A KTU
(FOR
STATIONS
20BA KTU
(FOR
STATIONS
8,9, AND 0)
207A
OR
TSA
207B/C KTU
TSB
TSA
209A KTU
TSB
COMMON EQUIP
PART OF 212A
KTU
OR
TSA
LB
BAT OR±
28
LG
LG
If
Lf
T
}---if-.:.:0'--'----+l17
}-_-if-C
::.:0'--_ _-+l18
I~
~
NOTES:
I. SYMBOL
MEANS DO NOT
STRAP ADJACENT TERMINALS,
RUN LEADS TO LOCATION
INDICATED BY LEGEND.
HH
2. PROPER POLARITY MUST BE OBSERVED WHEN
MAKING POWER CONNECTIONS (B BATTERY AND
GROUNO) TO THE 207-TYPE KTU. REVERSED
POLARITY MAY CAUSE THE ELECTROLYTIC
CAPACITOR TO EXPLODE.
Fig. 14-.Connections for Dial Selective Intercom Circuit (207A, B, or C KTU) with 208A and 209A KTUs
and only the Common Equipment Part of 212A KTU for Flashing Line Lamps, Busy Lamp., Audible
Signals, and Timeout (Sheet 2).
TSB
ISS 3, SECTION 518-114-425
lO2A KTU
212A KTU
2028.
202C.
OR 2020
KTU
I
TSA
LINE
CKT I
TSB
LINE
CKT 2
I
230A OR 230B KTU
~!~E
TSC
LINE
CKT 3
I
I ~!~E
21
mE 3
I ~!~E
4
~~~~~~~F~
233A KTU
I
LINE
CKT I
II
I
CONN B*
CONN A*
LINE
CKT 2
LINE
CKT 3
LINE
CKT 4
CONN C*
I
LINE 5
CKT
LINE
CKT 6
LINE
CKT 7
I
LINE
CKT 8
LINE
CKT 9
I
LINE
CKT 10
~~~~~~~~~~~t=±
--,
~~r~r~r~r~l~
239A KTU
238A KTU
TSA
~~~E I
II
I ~~~E
TSB
2
LINE
CKT 3
I
TSC
LINE
CKT 4
LINE
CKT 5
I
TSD
LINE
CKT 6
LINE
CKT 7
I
TSE
LINE
CKT 8
LINE
CKT 9
1
TSF
LINE
CKT II
LINE
CKT 10
~~~~~~~~~~~j±
~~r~r~r~r~~~
r-----------------I
I
NOTE:
SYMBOL (-11-) MEANS DO NOT STRAP ADJACENT
TERMINALS. RUN LEADS TO LOCATION INDICATED
BY LEGEND.
* CONNECTI ONS ARE MADE ON
56-TYPE CONNECTING BLOCK(SEE
IL
lO3A KTU
I
lO4A KTUl105A KTU 129A KTU
{T
R
~A~r_----+_----_r----_i_{
:I
TO CONTROL
CT
CR
~~~+-__~.r~A~1
riG. 9).
PROCURE AND INSTALL LOCALLY
L...._t--t--\::.,I]
T
R
Fig. 15--Connectionl for Manual CutoH Circuit (29A KTU) with 202A,
23BA, 239A, 203A, 204A, and 205A KTU,
~~~EPNONE
STATION
a,
C, or D, 212A, 230A or
~~NTROLLED
KEY
TELEPIIlNE
STATION
a,
233A,
POg8 29
SECTION 518-114-425
202A KTU
2028
202C
2020
KTU
212A KTU
230A OR 2308 KTU
I
TSA
LINE
CKT I
TSD
LINE
CKT 4
233A KTU
I
CONN A*
LINE
CKT I
LINE
CKT 2
LINE
CKT 3
I
I
I
CONN C*
LINE
CKT 4.
LINE
CKT 5
LINE
CKT 6
LINE
CKT 7
I
CONN Eit
LINE
CKT 8
LINE
CKT 9
LINE
CKT 10
~~~~9!~~p
239A KTU
238A KTU
r-------------------------------------------~~---------------------------------------------~\
TSA
LINE I
CKT
Fig.
I
LINE3
CKT
l~onnection.
Page 30
TSC
T58
LINE
CKT 2
I
LINE
CKT 4
LINE5
CKT
I
I
TSE
TSD
LINE
CKT 6
LINE 7
CKT
TSf
LINE
LINE
CKT 8
CKT II
for Cut~Through and Control Circuit for Automatic Cutoff (261 and 29A KTUI) with
202A, I, C, or D, 212A, 230A or I, 233A, 238A, 239A, 203A, 204A, and 205A KTUi (Sheet
1).
ISS 3, SECTION 518-114-425
NOTES:
I. SYMBOL (·it-) MEANS 00 NOT STRAP
2. ONE 26B KTU WILL SERVE UP TO FIVE 29A KTUS.
ADJACENT TERM I NALS. RUN LEADS TO
CONNECTIONS ARE SHOWN rOR TWO 29A KTUS. SEE
LOCATION INDICATED BY LEGEND.
INSET rOR CONNECTIONS TO 3RD.4TH AND 5TH
KTU.
CONNECTIONS ARE MADE ON 66-TYPE
CONNECTING BLOCK (SEE rIG.9).
t APPEARS MORE THAN ONE TIME ON THIS rIGURE.
INSET
400A DIODE. PROCURE AND INSTALL LOCALLY.
OPTIONS
3RD. 4TH AND OTH 29A KTU
26B KTU
WIRING
FEATURE
T
T
TO TEL SET PU
STATION CAN CUT orr OTHER STATIONS BUT
R
KEYS ASSOC WITH
H.J
CANNOT BE CUT orr
AUTOMATIC CUT OFF
CUT THROUGH AND
A
ANO CONTROL
CONTROL CIRCUIT
STATION CAN CUT orr OTHER STATIONS AND
H.K
AI
FEATURES (FOR 3R
CAN BE CUT orr. EXCEPT OURI NG A CALL.
rOR AUTOIIA TI C
4 TH AND OTH 29A
CUTorr C I RCU I T
KTU)
STATION CANNOT CUT orr OTHER STATIONS
K
AND CAN BE CUT orr. EXCEPT DURING A CAL
29.
*
r
J
268 KTU
(NOTE 2)
1ST 29A KTU
2ND 29A KTU
:j
} -_ _ _+_~A
MULTI PLE TO
OTHER 29A KTUS
}------ll-..::CB~O
(Ir REQUIRED)
}---.j-..::.
TI
J
MULTI PLE TO
3RD 29A KTU
(Ir REQUIRED)
_ _ _ _ _ _ _~------_+-R~I~
} -_ _ _+
TI ]
}-___+-____+--~---~--_+~R~I
B BAT.
TO 14-26V [
DC POWER
SUPPLY
~
STRAP:
B GRD
I
is!<
+14
Q)
r§f®
f®
J
+
14
7
I
15
K
j
J
7
I
I
I~
'>-<
~
I
TI
I
3
I
rf
18
RI
>-<
~
t
I
]
TO TEL SET PU KEY
ASSOC VITH AUTOMATIC
CUT OFF AND CONTROl
FEATURES (FOIl 2ND
29A KTU)
]
TO KEY TELEPHON£
STATION (PI CKUP
KEYS) CAN BE
CUT orr. CANNOT
CUT orF OTHER
TI
>s'
"
TO TEL SET PU KEY
ASSOC VITH AUTOMATIC
CUT OFF AND CONTROl
FEATURES (FOIl 1ST
29A KTU)
AI
'4
10
I
(IF REQUIRED)
A
RI ]
~5
8
I
I:J ~~~~ ~~AT~TUS
AI
/""'
9
AI
MULTIPLE TO
4TH 29A KTU
(IF REQUIRED)
A
3
+
A
TORTII
R OR RI
AI
RI
TI
J~A;~~12R~D~TU
Fig. 164Connectlons for Cut-Through and Control Circuit for Automatic Cutoff (26B and 29A KTUs) with
202A, B, C, or D, 212A, 230A or B, 233A, 238A, 239A, 203A, 204A, and 205A KTUs (Sheet 2).
Page 31
SECTION 518-114-425
207B/C KTU
207A kTU
(NOTE I)
TSA
TSB
------------------~-------~~:~--~~------------~--4
TO
INTERCOM
STATION
________________~----~-~rL~--~------------~---{
LG
R2
R3
R4
RS
~--------------~-------418
R5
~I----~--~
R6
R7
R8
TO
AUD I BLE
SIGNALS
(NOTE
2»)0
"@
R9
RO
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
BO
TO AUDI BLE
SIGNAL
POIIER SUPPLY
TO LAMP
POIIER SUPPL Y
TO 14-26V
DC POIIER
SUPPLY
(NOTE 3)
[
[
GRD OR RG
BAT,
±
OR 10SV±
BAT OR ±
LG
A BAT
~~~~----------+---~9
A GRD
H~----4-------------4---~GV
B BAT
B GRD
NOTES:
I. SYMBOL"1r MEANS DO NOT STRAP ADJACENT TERMINALS.
RUN LEADS TO LOCATION INDICATED BY LEGEND.
2. REMOVE STRAP Ir MORE THAN 9 STATIONS ARE SERVED.
3. PROPER POLARITY MUST BE OBSERVED WHEN MAKING
POWER CONNECTIONS TO THE 207-TYPE KTU. REVERSED
POLARITY MAY CAUSE TI£ ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR TO
EXPLODE.
I
~
Fig. 17......Cannectians for Dial Selective Intercom Circuit (207A, B or C KTU) with Busy Lamps and Audible
Signals.
Page 32
32 Pages
SECTION 518-114-430
Issue 1, August 1970
AT&TCo Standard
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
Plant Series
SERVICE
1A 1 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
200F, G, AND K PACKAGED KEY TELEPHONE UNITS
1.
motor load is approximately 300 milliamperes. This
is equivalent to about eight 51A lamps.
GENERAL
This section provides connections for the
200F (MD), 200G (MD) and 200K (MD) type
Key Telephone Units.
1.01
Information in this section was formerly
contained in Sections 518-210-400, 518-210-401,
and 518-210-403, respectively, which are hereby
canceled.
A J86731D, List 1 power plant is provided
in the 200K-type key telephone unit to furnish
10-volt ac power.
2.02
1.02
2.03
An externally mounted power unit must be
provided for the 200F- and G-type KTUs.
Tables A, B, and C show the running cable
connections for the 200F-, G-, and K-type
KTUs, respectively.
2.04
Refer to Division 518, sections entitled:
Reference, lA1, Packaged Key Telephone
Units, Identification, and Reference, 1A1, Key
Telephone Units, for identification information and
functional schematics of the various KTUs.
1.03
Fig. 1 and 2, 3 and 4, and 5 and 6 provide
strapping between KTUs and power connections
for the 200F-, G-, and K-type KTUs, respectively.
2.05
2.06
2.
Table D provides audible and visual signaling
options for the 200-type KTU s.
CONNECTIONS
For further information, refer to CD- and
SD-69352-01 for the 200F-, CD- and SD-69353-01
for the 200G- and CD- and SD-69361-01 for the
200K-type KTUs.
2.07
When 10 volts ac is used for station lamps,
the KS-15900, List 1 interrupter may also
be operated from the same source. The interrupter
2_01
© American Telephone and Telegraph Company
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
SECTION 518-114-430
2'30A KTU*
(SEE NOTE I)
TSA
TSB
TSC
T50
1ST CKT
2ND CKT
3RD CKT
4TH CKT
202CKTU*
(5TH OR 6TH CKT)
CO Oft PBX [.:.RT'-----+-~:;;_12'J'_B--+H---(ZJB'--__i--lI---QjB::....---Hf---efB'----t-1f----0B
LINES .....c._____+-{~77...:®~Z:...~>---1~17+_j"f__-0'_7~_(ZJIc.7-+11
7~ 17
,,~7 ~17
f----0.--07
G)f
12,.",2
~II I
"S-GROII R
T
KEY OR
s~~~~5~~
~14 ~4
AI
[
I
12
2
12
2
12
2
-'I
I
II
t
II
I
14 ~4
14
4
13
'3
~15
~5
A
13
'3
13
'3
L
15
5
15
5
~
LG
I
166
I~~~ -'H"'------+I--(_~--+-H-::~-~
lOlA OR
~2
~I
~14 ~4
" " < . o f 13
~3
'"""5
'C.'S
I:'
~4
~3
15
5
~~~6
~_
~~
±
BAT. OR ±
EQUIPMENT [BAT' OR
MULTIPLE TO
LINE CKT$ \
suec
19
~19
19
19
",,20
",,20
20
20
#--
MULTIPLE TO
suec
AUD SIG SUP
WIRING
BAT.,
®
±, OR
L tNE
eKTS
I
I-QSV±
1
MULTIPLE TO
SUCCEEDING - - - - - - - '
LINE UNITS
I
21
21
23
23
24
22
20V DC
*[
1~~~~~
BAT.
~G~R~D_ _ _ _ _+ _ _ _ _ _ _+------+------+------~+--~--___
26
BAT.
",,26
20VDC*[
"i',~J~
. .:G::;R::.D_ _ _ _ _~I,_--_(--!~'27'--+------+_------+------f_+_-__7----t-I~2
"
1
-!-T_-+--<&:-~"--0'-~1-+-lf--0-'--0"--t-l1f----0"--<~1f---0"--0'--H~
"
12
[
STATtON
AI
14
A
13
3
L
15
5
l
4
II
2
1
14
4
"""13
'(,./3
15
5
12
no'2 ",2
II
1
II
2
1
II
14
4
14
4
14
'(,./,3
""3
II
'<...1 ,3
'<-'3
' ....... ,3
3
15
~5
1/
~15
~5
"::'15
":"5
4
.--"L"-G________-tttt=l~<>_"6'_'~o.:.6---+_!'~~~H-I-;j2>"'6'---<2J6
IOI~E~RE~~=. --"-H--------'+f111ft--(~{FIB----+1~~~~
ff-0'8
GRO
LAMP
;~P~~~ ;;~ ;~ ~
;
®
•t I
2.
29
BAT. OR ± ~ ®'+l~--<~7J2/"9-----I------------+------------+-------------t------(7)"''---I~
~'9
",19
19
MULTIPLE TO
SUCCEEDING LINE CKTS
19
19
I
20
~
20
I
20
20
20
~
@
9
~9
®-t
9
""- f--
I
21
"'---'
I
~
23
"'L ' - 2'
L
22
f--
22
20V Dei
TALK OR
"A" BAT.
l
"'\......: f--
BAT.
GRO
BAT.
20V OCt SIG
OR B BAT.
[ GRO
BAt,±. OR IOSV±
AUO SIG
PWR SUP
[
./26
I
2.
~
®
~5
2J1BI
OR
BZI]
Fig. 2--200F-Type KTU (2020,2308, 2328, and 207C) Connections and Strappings (Sheet 1)
Page 4
ISS 1, SECTION 518-114-430
2328 KTU
201e KTU
22:~
12B
~J
2B
KEY OR
KEYLESS
STATION
IB
":~
NOTES:
r. SYMBOL ( II ) MEANS DO NOT STRAP ADJACENT TERMI NALS. RUN
LEADS TO LOCATION INDICATED BY LEGEND.
2. fOR THE 230BKTU BATTERY AND GROUND TERMINATED ON
TERMINAL STRIP A AND STRAPPED INTERNALLY.
3. MAXIMUM 20 LAMPS PER L LEAD.
4. WHEN STEADY HOLD LAMP IS REQU I RED I NSTEAD Of LAMP
21B
26
10V+
'0 27
POWER SUPPLY
GRD ] FOR MOTOR
O40
30
I
I
'0"2.
~
T
R ]
MANUAL
L
INTERCOM
LG
~
~
TO LAMP
POWER SUPPLY
or
'*
10
"'0
32B
LF
-t{
LF 5TH
I
12,40
-V 2
36B'O
I3A ::--..
4
I
I
LW
14A(2)
-
16A
R(6)J
8(6)
3881£.1
O'4
17A
LW 5TH CKT O'5
LW 6TH CKT
e/6
"-,
'0
RN
21
RN
22
40B
HA'\,....35
20A
R(7)
B(7)
1
leA,..,.
19A
I
J
AUD SIG
R(8)]
B(8)
"
R(9)J
B(9)
HA
I
SUPPL Y.
R(5) J
B(5)
""l
"',2
t
:I:
R(4)J
8(4)
15A~
II
VISUAL
SIGNAL
FURNISHED WIRED FOR METALLIC AND INTERRUPTEO
AUDIBLE. CAN BE WIRED FOR GROUNDED RINGING AND STEADY
AUDI BLE. SEE SECT I ON ENT I TLED "REFERENCE- I A I KEY
TELEPHONE UN I TS"
rOR COMMON AUDIBLE, STRAP ALL NO. 10 TERMINALS
A AND B GROUNDS MUST BE CONNECTED TOGETHER AT POWER
R(3)]
8(3)
37B
LF 6TH CKT (2)6
Lw013
k:
R(2)
B(2)
L[0 3
CKT~5
J
J
L~
3B
29B
WINK, PROV IDE STRAPS AS fOLLOWS:
2020 KTU ~ TERM. 20 AND 29
230B KTU - TERM. 20 A,B, AND 29A
TERM. 20 C.D AND 28A
CAUTION: If PACKAGE INTERRUPTER IS USED TO FURNISH
LAMP WINK FOR OTHER SYSTEMS, DISCONNECT
AND TAPE LW LEADS AT TERMINAL 20
EACH
LINE CIRCUIT NOT USING THE WINK FEATURE.
R(O)J
8ta)
~3IB
3:1
TO
TO/
CO
238 ........
CO'" 31 CO
LK
LK "- 3.
_2'
9B
25
IOBr-,..
19B
i
_29
208 ........
39~
I
268
26B
17B~
IBB
Fig. 2-200F-Type KTU (2020,2308,2328, and 207C) Cannections and Strappings (Sheet 2)
Page 5
SECTION 518-114-430
230A KTU
* (SEE
NOTE I)
TS A 1ST CKT
CO
OR
R
PBX [
8
_T-'-_ _ _ _t--vr7_-"0,..
LINES
kO~~ ~~J,o,;B
A
13
15
LG
16
2ND 230A KTU. TS A, 8, C,
AND D. ANO/OR 202C KTU
(CKTS 5 THRU 9)
*
1-----08
8
>--~~'7'_i-H--v}_-0"-+,f_~i--0'-1H f--0--C»".:..7'_i-lf----8
~37
~mFo"J
3B~~2-9-B---4-----~ VISUAL
5TH CKT LF 05
6TH CKT LF 06
- { 7TH CKT LF 0
7
co
] KEVQR
T
21~~
_ _~L:cF~_ _ 04
::
~R~
,::0<
_ _-=Lo!:.F_ _ 02
_ _-=Lo!:.F_ _ 03
±
±
OR BAT.
OR BAT.
FOR
2ND 4
LINES.
TO LAMP
SUPPLY
TO
~e~:LY
Fig. 3-200G-Type KTU (202C, 230A, 232A, and 207C) Connections and Strappings (Sheet 2)
Page 7
SECTION 518-114-430
2ND 230B KTU, TS A,
230B KTU*
(SEE NOTE I)
TS A
TS B
(2ND CKTl
(I ST CKT)
R
8
7
CO OR PBX LINES ( ,T
2020 KTU*
TS C
TS D
(3RD CKT)
(4TH CKT)
,..,8
f>c8
8
@~
7~
17
40
~
B,C AND 0 ANO/OR
,..,17
~
~
,..,17
,..,7
,..,7
~
STATION
lOlA OR 1018
KEY EQUIPMENT
I
7
f><17
~
12
12
2
12
2
12
2
12
2
~2
"
~~~~~~
I
"B"GRD[ "R
KEY OR KEYLESS
(CKT 5 THRU 9)
-;;:13
A
L
LG
~~~
~3
15
S
;;16
;;6
J>.18
H
~
15
16
IS
16
5
;;6
~
18
~
15
XI6
5
X6
18~
~
5
X6
-
3
5
X6
13
15
16
r-
18
18
~
19""
19~
192
I
I
19n.
I
I
I
19
0--20~
20"'"
20
20n.
I
I
I
9
9
20
I
I
9
9
~
~
0---
®
9
@)
21n.
~
21
23;'
I
I
723
I
I
24;'
'"'24
22;
['""
n. 22
A GRD
TO BAT. SUP §
I
2;"-
B BAT
B GRD
r26
~
±t
BAT.,
OR 105, ±
30
I
AUD SIG
PWR SUP
25
GRD
TO L AMP SUPPLY
FOR FI RST
4 LINES
10
[~ ORBAT.~
.. f><
T
BI OR BZI J AUD
81 OR 8Z1
81 OR Bzl
81 OR BZI
RI OR BZ
AUD
J
SIGt
AUD
~JSlGt
10
JAUD
~SIGt
~SIGt
10
1 _ l-/25
'"'
BZ OR eZI
RI OR BZ
10
10
29
""29
MULTIPLE TO
GRD
t®
--w
SUCCEEDING
228
LINE CKTS
Fig. 4-200G-Type KTU (202D, 230B, 232B, and 207C) Cannectians and Strappings (Sheet 1)
Page 8
AUD
] 51G+
ISS I, SECTION 518-114-430
207C KTU
2328 KT U
IOV AC
26 n.
27
;;:
40
30
28
'I
TO POWER
GRD ) SUPPLY
R
T
KEY OR KEYLESS
STATION MANUAL
l
INTERCOM
lG
;;:
J
L-__
STRAP TO GRD
AT OIST TERM.
228
128
-:lo;F'-_ _""0 I
-'l"'F,-_ _ _02
IF
3
IF
0IF 5TH CKT 0 5
l l F 6TH CKT
IF 7TH CKT
~~2~8~~---------~R-
0
J
-
380
298
328
~~ :~~ ~:~ ~ 8
0
0
0
0
LW 5TH CKT
0
LW 6TH CKT
LW 7TH CKT
0
0
37
16
8 121
R (3)
B (3)
R (4)
B (4)
~~:~
17
I
R 151
8 151
R 161
8 161
16A;;
~~!~
R (7)
B P)
R (8)
~~:;;:
8 181
190"'- --,
R (9)
.............n. 20A
R (0)
8 101
8 191
318
0 38
lG
R (2)
14A~
CO
lK
TO LAMP SUPPLY
FOR DIAL SEL
INTERCOM CKT
13A~
5"
CO
J
368
'2
'3
'4
15
~
36
+ OR BAT.
GRD
12A
11
~: ~~~ ~:~ -? 18
TO
liB
218
~~
lW
lW
lW
lW
KEY OR
..J0-',,,-8_~----------,-T-.J KEYLESS
STATIONS
J
VI SUAL
SIGNAL
J
J
J
J
J
NOTES:
I. SYMBOL
INDICATED BY LEGEND.
2. ON 2308 BATTERY AND GROUND ARE TERM I NATEO
ON TERM I NAL STR I P A AND STRAPPED INTERNALLY.
AUO
3. MAX I MUM 20 LAMPS PER L LEAD.
4. WHEN STEADY HOLD LAMP IS REQU I REO INSTEAD
SIG
Of LAMP WI NK, PROV I DE STRAPS AS FOLLOWS:
J
J
J
J
n. 24
f>.
n
TERM.
20 ANO 29
230B KTU -
TERM.
20A, BAND 29A
TERM.
20C,O AND 28A
I F PACKAGE 1NTERRUPTER I S USED
TO FURN I SH LAMP WINK FOR OTHER
SYSTEMS, 0 I SCONNECT AND TAPE
LW LEADS AT TERMINAL 20 OF EACH
LI NE C I RCU I T NOT US I NG THE
WINK fEATURE.
*
I
fA
.he 25
2020 KTU -
CAUT ION:
~23B
I
(II) MEANS DO NOT STRAP ADJACENT
TERM I NALS. RUN LE ADS TO LOCAl ION
FURN I SHED WIRED FOR METALL I C RING I NG AND
INTERRUPTED AUO I BLE. CAN BE WIRED FOR
GROUNDED RINGING, AND STEADY AUDIBLE SEE
SECTION ENTITLED "REFERENCE-IAI KEY
9B
TELEPHONE UNITS".
lOB
t
19B
FOR COMMON AUDIBLE, STRAP ALL NO. 10
TERMINALS.
29
I
I
STRAP LAMP SUPPLY FOR 9TH CKT FROM 207C KTU,
WHEN PROVIDED, OR FURNISH OYER SEPARATE
CABLE CONDUCTORS.
rx~~:
~28B
26B I
A AND B GROUNDS MUST BE CONNECTED TOGETHER.
~:~:
9
10'"
19 '"
20
n.
GRO
+ OR BAT.
+ OR BAT.
+
OR BAT.
± OR BAT.
+ OR BAT.
J
TO LAMP
SUPPLY FOR
2ND 4 LINES.
J
TO LAMP
SUPPLY
Fig. 4-200G-Type KTU (202D, 2308, 2328, and 207C) Connections and Strappings (Sheet 2)
Page 9
SECTION 518-114-430
R
[
CO OR PBX
LINE
!.,.0
T
~
+0
"8" GRD.[
R
T
AI
KEY OR [
KEYLESS
A
STATION
L
-~2
;0:"
;0:,4
::::,3
I
0::4
"
,r
*
ISEE NOTE I)
TS C
12
~~"
~'4
~'3
8
8
17
7
'0
V
"
~2
'U
"
"
17
0::"
~'4
!--------0 8
7
'U
~12
0::,
;:;4
202C KTU*
5 TH, 6TH, OR 7TH CKT
TS 0
4TH CKT
3RO CKT
"
~2
~12
~,
17
~'7
V
'U
" ~"
~2
r---e#.--0 2
~~
~,
"::
~3
15
5
~5
I i~~~~6
18
I
18
::
~3
'0 5
~6
18
I
H
7
'0
~12
15
LG
lOlA OR
101 B KEY
EQUIPMEN T
230A KTU
TS 8
2ND CKT
8
TS A
1ST CKT
8
'0 15
~3
'0 5
::
~'3
'0 15
~4
~3
~'4
~'3
'<,' 5
'<,'
~4
~3
'U
e
!--------018
29"'{
~29
30"'{
i----!"'30
19 v
19'0
19~
I
I
I
I
19'0
19 0
20~
20
20
20'0
200
9
9'0
I
®
9
9
~
I
I
I
I ~
®
21v
~
23
23 ,.,.
~
24~
~
22
I
I
I
I
I
26f
l-----J
27f
+,
BAT.• OR
I05V
~
26
~27
I
I
+
AU. 0 SIG [
PWR SUP
ORO
25~ 81 OR 8Z1
28
~
25
"'{
10
0
81 OR 8Z1
810R8Z1J
BI OR BZ
AUO
SIG t
'0
RI OR 8Z
J
AUD
SIG T
810R8ZI~
81 OR 8ZIJ
10
0
RI OR BZ
AUD
SIGt
AUD
'~SIGt
~0 RI OR 8Z
L-
AUO
SIG t
MULTIPLE TO
SUCCEEDING
LI NE CKTS
Fig- 5-200K-Type KTU (202C, 230A, 232A, and 207C) Connections and Strappings (Sheet 1)
Page 10
J
ISS I, SECTION 518-114-430
J86731D
LI POWER
232A KTU
207C KTU
R
T
L
4030 :0::
2B
~~
10
19
I
I
IOV AC
"<
+
~-
27",
LK
LK
9'J38
24
~20V DC
ZG
39_ 20V DC
I
I
LG
12A
R(2)
8(2)
0 '4A
378
r0
R(3)
8(3)
1
I
J
R (5)
8 (5)
R(6) )
8(6)
'7A
R(7l
8(7)
IBA
R(B)
8(B)
rt
I
R (4) ]
8(4)
16A
~408
I
J
J
15A
~3BA
r0
'9A
20A
AUD
J SIG
J
R(9) ]
8 9
I
RIO)
8(0)
"-.... "-'318
J
-x.;
GRD '"(
IBV AC
GRD
+-
-;;,
G~
FRAME GRD
LOCAL GRD
NOTES:
I. SYM80L ( II ) MEANS DO NOT STRAP ADJACENT
TERMINALS. RUN LEADS TO LOCATION INDICATED
BY LEGEND
2. F'OR 230A BATTERY AND GROUND ARE TERMI NATED
ON TERMINAL STRIP A AND STRAPPED INTERNALLY.
3. MAX I MUM 20 LAMPS PER L LEAD
4. WHEN STEADY HOLD LAMP IS REQUIRED INSTEAD
OF LAMP WINK. PROVIDE STRAPS AS FOLLOWS:
202C KTU TERM. 20 AND 29.
230A KTU TERM. 20A, S, C, D AND 29A
CAUT I ON: I F PACKAGE I NTERRUPTER I S USE TO
FURNISH LAMP WINK FOR OTHER SYSTEMS,
DI SCONNECT AND TAPE LW LEADS AT
TERMINAL 20 or EACH LINE CIRCUIT
NOT USING THE WINK FEATURE
FURNISHED WIRED FOR METALLIC RINGING AND
INTERRUPTED AUDIBLE. CAN 8E III RED FOR
GROUNDED RINGING AND STEADY AUDIBLE. SEE
SECTION ENTiTlED "RErERENCE~IAI KEY
TELEPHONE UNITS".
T FOR COMMON AUDIBLE,STRAP ALL NO. 10 TERMINALS.
*
~238
I
TALK
~8
I
I
n. 98
G
~108
SIG
~B
GRD
,."
~
2198
i
~9
-x.-
328
~'3A
GRD
25
L
"='368
37
CO
CO
I
38;;:: 298
LF
,::
KEY OR
KEYLESS
STATIONS
T
VISUAL
SIGNAL
GRD
~
01
LF
0 2
LF
03
LF
0 4
~5TH CKT LF 0 5
6TH CKT LF
6
7TH CKT LF 0
0 7
LW
11
0
LW
0 12
LW
0 13
LW
0 14
~5TH CKTLW 0 15
6TH CKT LW
016
7TH CKT LW
0 17
RN
021
RN
0 23
'~85
118
218
J
R
2~:o::
9
TO
TO
MANUAL
INTERCOM
~
22~~
128
HA
HA
]
2~8
~
I
26B
288
178
~
Fig. 5-200K-Type KTU (202C, 230A, 232A, and 207C) Connections and Strappings (Sheet 2)
Page II
SECTION 518-114-430
*
2309 KTU
T5 B
(SEE NOTE I) T5 C
2ND CKT
3RD CKT
TS A
1ST CKT
PB;~I~~ (
.~RT________-4______~8~__-+1e-__-<~8____-+,~
"e"
0+
~
"-'
--l-lI-__e;'2'-'~2=--~~~2
GRO I '::}RC====I==d'2~cf--2---LH_--«d-'~2-Qt2__-+1~-.,~'~2---<2~2__
Al
KEYLI:.SS
[
""<--'jl
'<./1
144
II
I
II
-+
IH'?";:..-!7>'I3'--<7j''----H~
L
15
LG
16
5
.....,,15
6
16
18
KEY EQUP
I
II
I
I
13
3
.......5
,...,,15
r..,5
6
16
18
~
15
13
3
6
6
5
--x.J 15
16 ;:;'6
";'16
16
5
;"'6
Ie
I
29
29
IrII :®1
®
~'~
GRD
TO LAMP
II
~~~~4
2.A_________
H
lOlA OR 1018
2020 KTU
(STH,6TH,OR7TH CKTI
® 'U>--Q;.:17-1-','~-.,z>7~:'U---<2}:17~-+-I1-__0--7"-'~?j1-,-7----H~__9'i_7"-'~?;1-,-7__--H~17
r.,7
T
*
TS 0
4TH CKT
__~~8~--~~--~8~--~H~8
[
POWERSUPP~ ~IO~V~A~C______~t=========:rt------------t------------~------------r---------~1-
I
I
19
I
19
19
19
~19
20
20
20
20
20
I ®
~9____+-I____~9____~I__~~7j9____~____~9____~~~~~~~:-J·4~
"'--I--
21
21
~24
I
'--I24
~22
22
MULTIPLE TO
SUCCEEDING
LINE CKTS
26
T
26
+,BAT.,OR 105V±
AUD SIG [
PWR SUP.
GRD
D
~r---T------------7I------------~---81-0-R-8-ZI-----+~.~?;2~:-I-OR--8Z-'L-__
I
II
I100::~::~'J~~~t
2sJl/
81 OR eZI
~ AUD
10R1 OR BZ
910RBZI]AUD
IO~
SIG
t
J~~J't IO~£.~_~_:-]:~Dt
10~)SlGt
Fig. 6-200K-Type KTU (202D, 2308, 2328, and 207C) Connections and Strappings (Sheet 1)
Page 12
ISS 1, SECTION 518-114-430
2326 KTU
J667310
LI POWER
PLANT
207C KTU
40
,~ ]
_30
MANUAL
INTERCOM
28
'0
I
I
I
27
GRO
Er~~
10
G
22;;S
19
9
I
I2B
±
10VAC
~J
2B
KEY OR
KEYLESS
STATION
IB
I
LF
LF02
I
LF 03
LF
4
LF 5TH CKT
I
LW
12
"
LW
15A
HA
R(3)]
6(3)
R(4)J
B(4)
:'-.
R(5)]
I
21
I
I
B(5)
16A
R(6)]
3BB
8(6)
17A :'-.
R(71
I
B(7)
ISA
HA~35
408
19A~
CO~7CO
2361'">,
q
GR
LK
_24
20V DC
FRAME GRD
LOCAL GRD
•
LK' 3S
I
R(OIJ
S(O)
" ' "'U>lB
CO
AUDIO
SIGNAL
R(9)]
B(9)
20A
TO/
J
R(SI]
B(S)
361
TO
*
R(2I),
B(2)
37B~
14
6TH CKT 0'6
LW 7TH CKT 017
I
VISUAL
SIGNAL
I3A':'.
_~~LW
RN
L~ J
14A
It'" LW 5TH CKT 015
RN023
I
3B
36B
LW.-.II
LW
2IB
~
I2A
06
07
LF 7TH CKT
";B
32B
05
~LF 6"," CKT
-
I
NOTES:
I. SYMBOL ( II ) MEANS 00 NOT STRAP ADJACENT
TERMINALS. RUN LEADS TO LOCATION INDICATED BY
LEGEND.
2. fOR 230B BATTERY AND GROUND ARE TERM I NATED ON
TERMINAL STRIP A AND STRAPPED INTERNALLY
3. MAX I MUM 20 LAMPS PER L LEAD
4. WHEN STEADY HOLD LAMP IS REQUIR£O INSTEAD Of
LAMP WINK, PROVIDE STRAPS AS fOLLOWS:
2020 KTU - TERM. 20 AND 29
2308 KTU - TERM. 20 A,B. AND 29A
TERM. 20 C,O, AND 28A
CAUT I ON: I f PACKAGE I NTERRUPTER IS U SED TO
fURNISH LAMP WINK fOR OTHER SYSTEMS.
DISCONNECT "NO TAPE LW LEADS AT
TERMI NAL 20 orEACH LINE CIRCUIT NOT
USING THE WINK fEATURE.
fURN I SH£O WI R£O fOR MET ALL I C RING I NG AND
INTERRUPTED AUDIBLE. CAN BE WIRED fOR GROUNDED
RINGING AND STEADY AUDIBLE. SEE SECTION
ENT I TlED "REfERENCE- I A I KEY TElfPHONE UN ITS"
t fOR COMMON AUDIBLE, STRAP ALL NO. 10 TERMINALS
I
lev AC
G
TALK
;;'B
GRO
I
I
9B
25
GRO
G
108
20V DC SIGNAL
B
19B
GRD ,.."G
20Br>.
- f-----....,.29
3~~
26B
28.
17B0-,
leB~
Fig. 6-200K-Type KTU (202D, 2308, 2328, and 207C) Connections and Strappings (Sheet 2)
Page 13
SECTION 5 lB- 114-430
TABLE A
200F-TYPE KTU - CONNECTIONS
64Al-50 CABLE TERMINAL
LEAD
DESIGNATION
FEATURE
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
GRD
10V +
Line 1
Line 2
~
~
0
+l
E
Line 3
00
!'"
~
~
...
0
Line 4
'"
~
Line 5
Line 6
Motor
Supply
Spare
Lamp
Supply
>---
± or BAT.
-+- or BAT.
GRD
-+- or BAT.
30-TYPE
CONN
BLOCK
TERMINAL
INSIDE WIRING
CABLE
BLUE BINDER
IT
1R
2T
2R
3T
3R
4T
4R
5T
5R
6T
6R
7T
7R
8T
8R
9T
9R
lOT
lOR
llT
llR
12T
12R
13T
13R
14T
14R
15T
15R
16T
16R
17T
17R
18T
18R
19T
19R
(W-BL)
(BL-W)
(W-O)
(O-W)
(W-G)
(G-W)
(W-BR)
(BR-W)
(W-S)
(S-W)
(R-BL)
(BL-R)
(R-O)
(O-R)
(R-G)
(G-R)
(R-BR)
(BR-R)
(R-S)
(S-R)
(BK-BL)
(BL-BK)
(BK-O)
(O-BK)
(BK-G)
(G-BK)
(BK-BR)
(BR-BK)
(BK-S)
(S-BK)
(Y-BL)
(BL-Y)
(Y-O)
(O-Y)
(Y-G)
(G-Y)
(Y-BR)
(BR-Y)
[Wj
[BLj
[Wj
[OJ
[Wj
[Gj
[Wj
[BRj
[Wj
[Sj
[R]
[BL)
[Rj
20T
20R
(Y-S)
(S-Y)
[Yj
[S)
21Tt
21Rt
22T
22Rt
(V-BL)
(BL-V)
(V-O)
(O-V)
[V)
[BL]
[V)
TERMINAL
ON 232A
OR B
KTU·
TERMINAL
ON KTU
~3~Al~Bt
[R)
[G)
[R)
[BR
[Rj
[S)
[BK)
[BL)
[BK)
[OJ
[BK}
[G]
[BK)
[BRj
[BKj
[S)
[Y)
[BL}
[Y)
1-11
2-12
3-13
4- 1
6-1S
5-15
1-11
i_
.~
3-13
4-14
6-1S
5-15
[0)
~
1----
""
'"
~
27
26
9
10
[0)
30A
29A
6A
29A
25A
30A
Audible
Signal
Supply
GRD
23T
(V-G)
[V)
BAT.,-+-, or lO5V-+-
23R
(G-V)
[G)
29
20V DC
Talk or
A Battery
GRD
24T
(V-BR)
[V)
25
BAT.
24R
(BR-V)
[BR)
24
GRD
25T
(V-S)
[Vj
27A
4A
BAT.
25R
(S-V)
[S)
26A
2SA
20V DC
Signal or
B Battery
TERMINAL
ON 207C
KTU
1A_llA
2A-12A
3A-13A
4A-14A
6A-16A
5A-15A
1B-llB
zB-12B
3B-13B
4B-14B
SB-1SB
5B-15B
1C-llC
2C-12C
3C-13C
4C-14C
6C-16C
5C-15C
lD-llD
2D-12D
3D-13D
4D-14D
6D-16D
5D-15D
[0)
[Y)
[G)
[Y)
[BR)
TERMINAL
ON 202C
OR D
KTU
* The 232B KTU is arranged internally to disable time-out feature when BF relay is operated.
t With 1 to 72 lamps, strap 21R, 21T, and 22R; with 73 to 144 lamps, strap 21R and 22R and run
t The 230B KTU is arranged for individual fusing of circuits 1 and 2 and circuits 3 and 4 lamp input power.
21T.
( ) Current Color Code.
[ 1 MD Color Code.
Page 14
separate power lead to
ISS 1, SECTION 518-114-430
TABLE A (Cont)
200F-TYPE KTU - CONNECTIONS
64AI-50 CABLE TERMINAL
FEATURE
Manual
Intercom
Line
Line 1
..
Line 2
.:
.~
00
"
~
«:"
Line 4
Line 5
Line 6
Dial
Selective
Intercom
Line
Line 1
Line 2
~
I'Q
Po<
...0
0
Line 3
Line 4
Q
Line 5
Line 6
LEAD
DESIGNATION
T
R
LG
L
Bl or BZl
Rl or BZ
Bl or BZl
Rl or BZ
Bl or BZl
Rl or BZ
Bl or BZl
Rl or BZ
Bl or BZl
Rl or BZ
Bl or BZl
Rl or BZ
T
R
LG
L
B(2)
R(2)
B(3)
R(3)
B(4)
R(4)
B(5)
R(5)
B(6)
R(6)
B(7)
R(7)
B(8)
R(8)
B(9)
R(9)
B(O)
R(O)
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
30-TYPE
CONN
BLOCK
TERMINAL
26T
26R
27T*
27R
28T
28R
29T
29R
30T
30R
31T
3lR
32T
32R
33T
33R
34T
34R
35T
35R
36T
36R
37T
37R
38T
38R
39T
39R
40T
40R
41T
41R
42T
42R
43T
43R
44T
44R
45T
45R
46T
46R
47T
47R
48T
48R
49T
49R
50T
50R
INSIDE WIRING
CABLE
ORANGE BINDER
(W-BL)
(BL-W)
(W-O)
(O-W)
(W-G)
(G-W)
(W-BR)
(BR-W)
(W-S)
(S-W)
(R-BL)
(BL-R)
(R-O)
(O-R)
(R-G)
(G-R)
(R-BR)
(BR-R)
(R-S)
(S-R)
(BK-BL)
(BL-BK)
(BK-O)
(O-BK)
(BK-G)
(G-BK)
(BK-BR)
(BR-BK)
(BK-BL)
(BL-BK)
(Y-BL)
(BL-Y)
(Y-O)
(O-Y)
(Y-G)
(G-Y)
(Y-BR)
(BR-Y)
(Y-S)
(S-Y)
(V-BL)
(BL-V)
(V-O)
(O-V)
(V-G)
(G-V)
(V-BR)
(BR-V)
(V-S)
(S-V)
TERMINAL
ON 232A
OR B
KTU*
[W]
[BL]
[W]
30
40
[0]
28
[W]
[G]
[W]
[BR]
[W]
[S]
[R]
[BL]
[R]
TERMINAL
ON KTU
230A
230Bt
TERMINAL
ON 202C
OR D
KTU
TERMINAL
ON 207C
KTU
t
25A
30A
lOA
lOA
25A
lOB
28A
30A
lCC
lOC
28A
25A
lOD
10D
25
10
25
10
[0]
[R]
[G]
[R]
[BR]
[R]
[S]
[BK]
[BL]
[BK]
.,tl
'0
....:
lB-llB-21B
2B-l2B-22B
32B
3B
36B
l2A
36B
l3A
37B
l4A
37B
l5A
38B
l6A
38B
l7A
40B
l8A
40B
19A
31B
20A
[0]
[BK]
[G]
[BK]
[BR]
[BK]
[BL]
[Y]
[BL]
[Y]
[0]
[Y]
[G]
[Y]
[BR]
[Y]
[S]
[V]
fBL]
[V]
[0]
[V]
[G]
[V]
[BR]
[V]
[S]
7A
8A
7B
8B
7C
8C
7D
8D
7
8
7
8
..,
.,.,
'0
...
~
* Strap to 22T or terminate LG lead to lamp ground if cable terminal is not provided.
t Not terminated.
( ) Current Color Code.
[ ] MD Color Code.
Page 15
SECTION 518-114-430
TABLE B
200G-TYPE KTU -
64BI-75 CABLE TERMINAL
FEATURE
Line 1
Line 2
LEAD
DESIGNATION
TERMINAL
STRIP
A
INSIDE WIRING
CABLE
BLUE BINDER
CONNECTIONS
TERMINAL'
ON
KTU
232A /232B
TERMINAL;t:
ON
KTU
TERMINALt
ON
KTU
230A
I
230B
T
R
1
2
(W-BL) [W]
(BL-W) [BL]
1A-llA
2A-12A
A
Al
3
4
(W-O)
(O-W)
[W]
[0]
3A-13A
4A-14A
LG
L
5
6
(W-G)
(G-W)
[W]
[G]
6A-16A
5A-15A
T
R
7
8
(W-BR) [W]
(BR-W) [BR]
lE-llB
2B-12B
A
A1
9
10
(W-S)
(S-W)
[W]
[S]
3B-13B
4B-14B
LG
L
11
12
(R-BL)
(BL-R)
[R]
[BL]
6B-16B
5B-15B
T
R
13
14
(R-O)
(O-R)
[R]
[0]
1C-llC
2C-12C
A
A1
15
16
(R-G)
(G-R)
[R]
[G]
3C-13C
4C-14C
LG
L
17
18
(R-BR)
(BR-R)
[R]
[BR]
6C-16C
5C-15C
T
R
19
20
(R-S)
(S-R)
[R]
[S]
lD-llD
2D-12D
A
A1
21
22
LG
L
23
24
(BK-O)
(O-BK)
[BK]
[0]
6D-16D
5D-15D
T
R
25
26
(BK-G)
(G-BK)
[BK]
[G]
1A-llA
2A-12A
TERMINAL
ON 207C
KTU
202C 1202D
....
.-<
"""
""
-g
or.>
30
40
27
28
KTU is arranged internally to disable time-out feature when BF relay is operated.
230B KTU is arranged for individual fusing of Circuits 1 and 2 and Circuits 3 and 4 lamp input power.
( ) Current Color Code.
[ ] MD Color Code.
t
Page 20
1B-11B-2lB
2B-12B-22B
32B
3B
ISS 1, SECTION 518-114-430
TABLE C (Cont)
200K-TYPE KTU -
CONNECTIONS
64A 1-50 CABLE TERMINAL
TERMINAL
ON 232A
OR B
KTU*
TERMINAL
ON 230A
OR B
KTUt
TERMINAL
ON 202C
OR D
KTU
TERMINAL
ON 207C
KTU
LEAD
DESIGNATION
30-TYPE
CONN
BLOCK
TERMINAL
B(2)
R(2)
26T
26R
B(3)
R(3)
27T
27R
(W-O)
(O-W)
[W]
[0]
36B
13A
B(4)
R(4)
28T
28R
(W-G)
(G-W)
[W]
[G]
37B
14A
B(5)
R(5)
29T
29R
(W-BR) [W]
(BR-W) [BR]
37B
l5A
B(6)
R(6)
30T
30R
(W-S)
(S-W)
[W]
[S]
38B
l6A
B(7)
R(7)
3lT
3lR
(R-BL)
(BL-R)
[R]
[BL]
38B
l7A
B(8)
R(8)
32T
32R
(R-O)
(O-R)
[R]
[0]
40B
18A
B(9)
R(9)
33T
33R
(R-G)
(G-R)
[R]
[G]
40B
19A
B(O)
R(O)
34T
34R
(R-BR)
(BR-R)
[R]
[BR]
3lB
20A
Line 1
Bl Or BZ1
R1 or BZ
Line 2
B1 or \Zl
R10r Z
B1 or BZl
R1 or aZ
B10r
Rlor ~~1
B10r Zl
Blor Zl
Rl or ~Z
R1 or BZ
B1 or BZ1
Rl or BZ
T
R
35T
35R
36T
36R
37T
37R
38T
38R
39T
39R
40T
40R
41T
41R
42T
42R
(R-S)
(S-R)
(BK-BL)
(BL-BK)
(BK-O)
(O-BK)
(BK-G)
(G-BK)
(BK-BR)
(BR-BK)
(BK-S)
(S-BK)
(Y-BL)
(BL-Y)
(Y-O)
(O-Y)
[R]
[S]
[BK]
[BL]
[BK]
[0]
7A
8A
Line 2
T
R
43T
43R
(Y-G)
(G-Y)
[Y]
[G]
7B
8B
?< Line 3
T
R
44T
44R
(Y-BR)
(BR-Y)
[Y]
[BR]
7C
8C
il<
Line 4
T
R
45T
45R
(Y-S)
(S-Y)
[Y]
[S]
7D
8D
Line 5
T
R
46T
46R
(V-BL)
(BL-V)
[V]
[BL]
7
8
Line 6
T
R
47T
47R
(V-O)
(O-V)
[V]
[0]
7
8
Line 7
T
R
GRD
105V-+GRD
GRD
48T
48R
49T
49R*
50T
50R
(V-G)
(G-V)
(V-BR)
(BR-V)
(V-S)
(S-V)
[V]
[G]
[V]
[BR]
[V]
[S]
FEATURE
Dial
Selective
Intercom
Line
Line 3
Line 4
Line 5
Line 6
Line 7
Line 1
P'I
'"
0
0
Q
Ringing
Supply
Local
Ground
INSIDE WIRING
CABLE
ORANGE BINDER
(W-BL) [W]
(BL-W) [BL]
36B
12A
25A
lOA
I 30A
lOA
25A
lOB
25A
lOC
[0]
[BK]
[G]
[BK]
[BR]
[BK]
[S]
[Y]
[BL]
[Y]
28A
10D
I 30A
10D
25
10
25
10
25
10
7
8
29
28A
I 30A
...,
.-<
'"
"tl
'""tl"
'"'"
...,
'"
.-<
"tl
'""
...
"tl
'"
* If
J8673lC, List 1 (frequency-generator) power plant is installed locally, disconnect and tape (V-BR) [V] and (BR-V)
[BR] cable pair.
( ) Current Color Code.
[ ] MD Color Code.
Page 21
SECTION 518- 114-430
TABLE D
200-TYPE KTU OPTIONS
WIRING FOR CO OR PBX LINES
Metalic Ringing (Furnished)
Z
Grounded Ringing
Y
Interrupted Audible Sig
(Furnished)
X
Steady Audible Signal
W
Lamp
Max
Page 22
22 Pages
OPTION
Max 40 Lamps
(Furnished)
S
Max 80 Lamps
R
SECTION 518-114-431
Issue 3, September 1972
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT&TCo Standard
SERVICE
lAl KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
200H PACKAGED UNITS
1.
1.01
terminal strips E, F, G, H, and J on the 64El-IOO
Cable Terminal..
GENERAL
This section is reissued to:
This package is factory-wired for the digit
2 to be used as the initial digit of 2-digit
codes. When required, any other digit except 1
may be used as the initial digit. The digit so
assigned cannot be used as a single-digit station
code. Connecting the SW2 lead to selected terminal
2A through 9A on 207C KTU determines the first
digit. Example: SW lead connected to 2A terminal
the first digit is 2, and if connected to 3A the
first digit is 3, etc.
2.04
• Revise tables and figures
• Provide additional option information.
1.02
This issue of the section is based on the
following drawings:
• SD-69286-0l Issue 8D
• SD-69354-0l Issue 6D
Station selection may be accomplished through
the operation of a locally furnished signal
key. Signaling keys 55lA or 549-type may be
provided by lA, lAl, or lA2 Key Telephone
Systems, or equivalent keys may be used. See
Table A for signal key lead connections.
2.05
• .SD-69447-0l Issue 6D
• SD-69529-0l Issue 6E.
If this section is to be used with equipment or
apparatus reflecting later issue(s) of the drawing(s),
reference should be made to the SDs and CDs to
determine the extent of the changes and the
manner in which the section may be affected.
Additional information regarding the 200H
packaged KTU may be found in a reference
section of the 518 Division ESPs.
1.03
For all system arrangements where direct
current is used to operate bells, buzzers, or
lamps, assume a current drain of 0.056 amp for
each 7A-type bell or buzzer and a current drain
of 0.035 amp for each A3 lamp. The current drain
for the 2-talking link is shown in Table E.
2.06
2.07
2.
Connection Index:
Table A-SD-69354-0l Options in 200H-Type
KTU
CONNECTIONS
See Fig. 1 for strapping arrangements
between KTUs, power connections, and key
cable connections.
2.01
2.02
Fig. 2 and 3 provide connections for the
247 A(MD) and 247E KTUs, respectively,
when TOUCH-TONE® calling is required. .Fig. 4
provides Y2 card options in 247E KTU .•
.Tables A, E, C, and D provide option
information. Table E provides current drain
information and Table F shows features, and
connections for key cabl~s at both the KTUs and
Table E-SD-69286-0l (6A Key Telephone System)
Options Used With 200H-Type KTU
Table C-SD-69447-0l (247 A KTU) Options
Used With 200H-Type KTU
Table D-SD-69529-0l (247E KTU) Options
Used With 200H-Type KTU
2.03
Table E-Current Drain Requirements for
2-Talking Link Arrangements
© American Telephone and Telegraph Company, 1972
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
:...........•.....•.•.•••••••.•.......•.•••••••••••••••••••••.•.•••.•••••.......•.....•...•.•••••....•..•.•.-.-::
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT&TCo Standard
.::
REPLACING PAGE ADDENDUM
Filing IJUltructWns:
'.
::
::
::
1. IEIIM FROII THE SECTION THE PAlES NUIIIERED THE SAllE
AS THOSE A1TACHED 10 THIS PINK SHEET.
;.
2. INSERT THE ATTACHED PAlES INTO THE SECTION IN THEil PLACE. ::
3. PlACE THIS PINK SHEET AHEAD OF PAlE 1 OF THE SECTION.
:.
ADDENDUM 518-114-431
Issue 1, August 1974
.:...........................................•...•........•.•.•...........•...•.•.........•.........:
~
SERVICE
1A 1 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
200H PACKAGED UNITS
1.
GENERAL
2.
CONNECTIONS
The following changes apply to Part 2 of the
section:
This addendum supplements Section
518-114-431, Issue 3. The attached pages
must be inserted in the section in accordance with
the filing instructions above.
(a) Table B-revised
1.002
(b) Fig. I-revised
1.001
This addendum is issued to:
(c) Table F-revised.
(a) Add the 232C KTU
(b) Add caution concerning 207C KTU.
Attached:
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
3 dated August 1974, revised
4 dated August 1974, revised
5 dated August 1974, revised
6 dated August 1974, revised
15 dated August 1974, revised
16 dated August 1974, revised
© American Telephone and Telegraph Company 1972, 1974
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
1 Page and Attachments,
SECTION 518-114-431
Table F-Features and Connections at KTUs
and Terminal Strips E, F, G, H,
and J on the 64BI-IOO Cable Terminal
Fig. 3-Addition of TOUCH-TONE® Adapter
Circuit, 247B KTU with 222A and 223A
KTUs
Fig. I-Strapping and Connection of the
200H-Type KTU
Fig. 4-Y2 Card Options in 247B KTU
Fig. 2-Addition of TOUCH-TONE® Adapter
Circuit, 247A KTU(MD) with 222A and
223A KTUs
....TABLE A+SO-69354-01 OPTIONS IN 200H-TVPE KTU
FEATURES
SEE TABLE F ANO FIG. 1
Page 2
OPTIONS
Station
audible
signal
Over T and R leads
Y
Over separate
signaling pair
Z
Flash, wink,
ring, and
time-out
circuit
Provided in package
X
Provided externally
W
Electromechanical
flash, wink,
ring and
time-out
circuit
KS-15900, List 1
interrupter, lOv ac
T
KS-19384, List 2
interrupter, 24v dc
V
ISS 3, SECTION 518-114-431
-->TABLE B+S[)'69286-1I1 (6A KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM) OPTIONS USED WITH 200H-TYPE KTU
TYPE
OPTION
SYSTEM
STATION
FEATURES
OPTIONS
Used with single- or 2-link arrangement
A
Used with selector only arrangement
B
With camp-on
G
Without auxiliary relay busy lamp circuit
H
Without preset conference
J
Without auxiliary relay lamp flash circuit
S
Two-talking link arrangement with camp-on
T
Over nine codes
W
Without add-on transfer circuit or auxiliary relay station circuit
AG
Dial, busy, and audible tone*
AJ
Interrupted ringing
AK
Single spurt ringing
AL
Busy signal and camp-on control circuit when used with 207B KTU
AQ
Is automatically cut off
E
Is not automatically cut off
F
Audible signal over T and R leads
Y
Audible signal over separate signal pair
Z
Signal key selection of local or off-premise station when interrupted
ringing is provided
AE
*Only busy tone is furnished_
Page 3
Revised August 1974
:111"'11
• D
C
CD
c
-~
=-
"I
I
207C KTU
TSA
•
TSB
222A KTU
TSA
TSB
232-TVPE KTU
TSC
B
TSD
TSA
®+
'"nm
223A KTU
::!
TSB
0
Z
®t
~
CD
!.
@t
MULT
TO
SUCC
KTU
T2
R2
STATION 20
1ST 223A
]
L
LG
..~
I
T
II
L
LG
STATION 5
2ND 223A
STATION 8
3RD 223A
1
STATION
1ST
223A3
STATION 6
2ND 223A
STATION 9
3RD 223A
T
L
LG
SEE
2.04
4
1
STATION 4
1ST 223A
STATION 7
2ND 223A
STATION 0
3RD 223A
TH
LTR
A2
~
~
OTJ
B
:
Fig. l ......Strapping and Cannectians af KTU (Sheet
1).
R
L
MANUAL
INTERCOM'
MULT
TO
SUCC
KTU
b
-
ISS 3, SECTION 518-114-431
224A
216A
(MOl OR
KTU
207C KTU
I
222A KTU
8 KTU
TSA
TSB
~k~
••
,
•
(-21 C
6
~<
~
i!~1
",W
AI
:.t~·
~;~
:.k.·.M
• .·.:f.'•...'••;.;...l••,
TSD
..•
:.....:!:.
Wi
KTU
:itY
>-. ;
2ND 223A
:lRD 223A
'-"9
r--
.
~
C
~
'.t.r.•.
>;;:
~t~~
f@:
~:5:
®m
i,.~. :G ~:;A
.
[.'~.·.:.~.i.;.~.·.::
OJ
1ST 223A
mft
~~;
2ND 223A
({Iii
:8
3RD 223A
~
~
I!.·~.k.!.::
-'
..
W:~
37
MM
cl
fi'
'.'.\.'.*.
~N~~
tWI
C
r.f·!~f.t:; .
"';i
.:;:/
:IM
it~
26
C
Wti
:.~ :.',~
(.. .
I,·.:..
J~~!
S
STA
24
27
l--"R"'G-jjl\-_}~
~AT.
'-----l~:ii_~~:~_+__<:
~:t1-;;]
I
#ti
STA
25
Ir.~.I.1 ~~']
STA
t.
5
kt~
[6
ew
RG
26
~]STA
~~-----------41Wn------~-+lJJ4~~~. :.
(2a).C
'-J
PWR
SUP
>-<
~.
~
(:
~
( 5
(:
rrra
~
~
~
LF
Ii
LF
::@j
LF
H1!
LF
I
ii
1\
m;\
If:
LF
LF
LW
KEY
TEL SYS
LW
IA OR lA'
LW
,
LW
>;;:
ill
LW
>;a<
'C/
LF
~;~~
>-<
14
>-<
'5
~
$::'
STATION 6
2ND 223A
STATION 9
3RD 223A
A
RS
...•. :....:.:
~**-------------~ill'~*f------~+-r4I~;~~:
I
] 1ST
STATION
3
223A
RS
f.~•:.t;~,:~.
nm
RG
STATION 20
1ST 223A
STATION 5
2ND 223A
STAT[ON B
3RD 223A
RS
RG ]
l----..;·W++-r{'15
25F':t!!j\I-.!- - - - - - - - i l
m
RS
J
11
;J
II
IIi;
j.·.,.t.
.i..I:I.
,.
I
RS ]
@11
1M
111
29~+wH.. -------------+0*f-+----~el-1------+ffi-{
'-'
,.
rl:;Ii:WI-~+ ___ili~t!t: ~----Iilf-----i!r----ilii--,
11
1
>-<
0
>-<224 C tlf,;li.
.
RG
I
RSG ]
:It..
<
RS
r-lii•.!-,+~---:ii1%+j-R-S---iii&-----+I'1------+!f'--,
2N 0 223A
3RD 223A
~ ;!~~
-€r-'J ~~LT
*'W
~(.i~C~Wii1~r_------------~·ii1
!k~
:I::
jill ~~A
. _+~,1r_~jfii11i'~-
(7t
TSA
:~~~~ ([ ~~::; II ~5: rJ~JE rl-'-'---'&-----ilr----lFl---<-€r- ~~~c
~,.: i.l;~J:.I,~: p~~OS J~ .- -~R-'G-R-D-i!:I!lr'?:
32
~~
;;'
~
(,.~al--fi-(~!-@..
y ~~ -G
(OO}--'-'-"
J
_ ...
. Dli
TI
l~L K;{Hlf-----
~
;
~
~
REMOVE
~
~
~:UICVOA~::~~~~ ;~M
~8
~,
.~
~Q
230
;;::;~
,,')-------1\1--------1M-{'
..•
~
MULT
~
0
:~:A~~R IF
~
tit
~+
'-../
@
-®
>-
I~
"
~
_F
RO
17
13
10
ay
ay
alA
lj
wt
!!TI
full
SUCC
.TU
30
29
~+
2aHIE----
ct. ..
,
I3j'
~232C ONLY
fu<
0*f
:11'
fum
>;t)
0*&l
0*%'
0*.\
~
35
>;<
~
i+@)+
(~)*
}~+
r:-.
~+
-0
40
Fig. 14Strapping and Connections of KTU (Sheet 3).
Page 6
Revised August 1974
TO
OPTION
232-TYPE
/ANOTHER SYSTEM
$~+RSI
C\
33IM~*'1----
fi,s:
~":' ~
~
3.
TO
FIG. 2
34~RI----'~:---i+--------~.~.i-:~~~§---
( BBAT.
19
'40H._~W_u~__
a_G_R_D_:~;'~i_'~~}--.---!!I!!·K~
15
]
2328 AND C
.... 39
39riEr--~~~~
9
STRAPS IF
~ PRO~\EO.
II
A GRO ,.
SUP
14
31
:
.• \;7 ®+
t,
9 } - - . - - - f!~!!I:,K29H.-----':=:"'~r----.-----{24
10}--.--+MK30
25
A BAT.
PWR
**
TSB
l3~l-<.8D~;1~!+_ _+M-+;;'
~
':fe
TSB
.t
no
no
~
(NOTE 10)
~
~
~
~
~
SY7
SYO
•
COP
COM
3
,-.
;;.
'52
)!2
~
~
>!
;;;
~
~
~
"
CRO
cog
CRa
CR7
CR6
CRS
CR'
CR3
CR2
ONE
7l
34
2
13
SOL
9
NOTES:
I.
"roUCH-TONE" AND ROTARY DIAL STATIONS CANNOT BE INTERM IXED
ON THE 222A KTU OR ON THE SAME 223A KTU.
PREMI SE
STATIONS USING THE 225A KTU MAY BE ROTARY DIAL OR "TOU CHTONE" DIAL STATIONS.
SEE FIG. 3 fOR 225A KTU CONNECT I ONS.
2. ALL 0 I OO[S SHOWN ARE 400J OR EQU I VALENT AND MUST BE
PROVIDED AND INSTALLED LOCALLY.
3. BErORE PLACING 247A (MO) KTU IN SERVICE ADJUST "H" AND
RELAY OPERATION.
SEE SECTION 518-114-116 rOR AOJUSTME NT.
4. REMOVE EXISTING STRAP BETWEEN llA or 2078 (MO) OR C KT U
AND TERMINAL' Of THE rlRST 216A KTU Ir PROVIDED.
orr
I
;8
'L'
~2
7
~
5. REMOVE
23
6.
"
"
20
7.
24
6.
"
®*
-CD
j tiDt
®.
I~OTE
SY2
(NOTE
* 33
a
(K)*~
33
35
\NOT[ 6)
:~
no
><
®*
12
~
227A(MD) 0 R
B KTU(lFPRO VIDEO}
(NOTE 2)
a
TNE
SYS
SY3
(NOTE 5)
10
±
I~OTE
CODES)
TONE CONTR OL
CIRCUIT
I
KLK
12
:2<
g/r
(MAX. 36
CODES)
32
*0
@DTR
sya
SY •
(MAX. 27
(NOTE 8)
~ :::< I~OTE II j t@~
5
(MAX 16
CODES)
(NOTE 4)
DNA
STR
SY.
®~r
3RD 216A KTU
~
PWR SUP
TRO
C®~®'
..:.s::31
i~'
IN OTE 9)t
TO riG
SHEET 3
LCK
20-26V DC
2ND 216A KIU
T50
~~
17
(NOTE 2)
TSA
B BAT.
RINGING AN
TRANSfER C I Reu I T5
1ST 216A KTU
-@
13it®*
'iI
t
~
><
~
~
16
'2a~
r,s~
~~
~
~
~
20
><
39
9.
2
OPTION WHEN 216A KTU
10. REMOVE rACTORY PROVIDED
2a
IS PROVIDED.
ALSO REM OVE
(SHOWN ON riG.
G)
OPTION AND PLACE
®
OPTI ON
I SHEET 3) wHEN "TOUCH-TONE" (247A (MOl
KTU) IS PROVIDED rOR "TOUCH-TONE" STATIONS.
"
~~
>"
~
"
"
25
CD
EXISTING STRAP BETWEEN TERMINALS 17B AND 18B Of 207B ( MD)
OR C KTU.
WHEN A 216A KTU IS PROVlOED, JltEMOVE EXISTING STRAP BET WEEN
TERMINALS 35 OF' F'lRST 216A KTU AHD 18B or 2076 (MO) OR C
KTU.
PLACE STRAP TO TERMINAL 34 or LAST 216A KTU PROVIDED,
REMOYE EXISTING STRAP 6ETWEEN TERMINALS 34 or LAST 21 6A KTU
AND 176 Of 207B (MD) OR C KTU.
WHEN DIAL TONE IS PROVIDED ON THE 6A SYSTEM, REMOYE
EXISTING STRAP BETWEEN TERMINALS 2 or 227A (MD) OR B KTU
AND 25B or 207C nu.
PLACE 0 lODE BETWEEN TERM I NAlS 2 AND
33 or 227A (MD) OR B KTU AND STRAP AS SHOWN.
PROYIDE DIODE ON 2078 (MD) KTU ONLY.
I--
II. PROVIDE
30
i!h
3
STA 7
5
STA 8
STA 9
'*®
®
OPTION DIODE ONLY WH.EN STATION 66 IS EQUIP PED
WITH THE 6A KTS STATION BUSY CIRCUIT.
7
12. PROVIDE
(NOTE 14)
(NOTE 14)
®
OPTION DIODE ONLY wHEN STATION 44 IS EQUIP PED
OPTION OIODE ONLY WHEN STATION 33 IS EQUIP PED
WITH THE 6A KTS STATION BUSY CIRCUIT.
®~ •.
2.
Q)
WITH THE 6A KTS STATION BUSY CIRCUIT,
13. PROVIDE
PROVIDE
@
OPTION STRAP fOR EACH SINGLE DIGIT NUMBER
APPEAR I NG ON THE 6A KTS.
*t
SPARE TERMINAL fOR DIODE TERMINAT ION
50-69286-01 OPTIONS
*
SO-69447-01 OPTIONS
I
Fig. 24Addition of TOUCH-TONE® Adapter Circuit, 247A KTU (MO) With 222A and 223A KTUs.
Page 7
SECTION 518-114-431
STATION SIGNALING CIRCUIT
222A KTU
(MAXIMUM 9 STATIONS) (NOTE I)
TSA
TSB
3 STATION
SELECTOR CIRCUIT
2078 (MOl OR C KTU
SIGNALING
CIRCUIT
TSC
223A KTU
(MAX 3
STATIONS)
(NOTE Il
TSA
TSB
STA 21
STA 22
STA 23
(NOTE 7)
400J
STA 24
TO
MAX 9"TOUCHTONE" DIAL
STATIONS OR
TO
MAX 9 ROTARY
DIAL STATIONS
(NOTE Il
STA 25
SW3
STA 26
STA 27
STA 28
TO
MAXT03~'~9gf~L
STATIONS OR
TO
MAX 3 ROTARY
DIAL STATIONS
PER 223 A KTU
(NOTE I)
Fig.
Page 8
~Addition
of TOUCH-TONE® Adapter Circuit, 247B KTU With 222A and 223A KTUs. (Sheet 1)
ISS 3, SECTION 518-114-431
TOUCH-TONE ADAPTER 2478 KTU
(NOTE 10)
RINGING AND
TONE CONTROL
TRANSfER CIRCUIT
216A KTU
FIRST
LAST
CIRCUIT
127A (MOl OR B KTU
(IF PROVIDED)
LONG LINE CIRCUIT
225A KTU
(IF PROVIDED)
(NOTE II)
CiY-]
~
TO
OFFPREMISE
TELSET
1. "rOUCH-TONE" AND ROTARY DIAL ')TATIONS CANNOT 8E INTER-
MIXED ON THE 222AKTUORCNTHESAME 223AKTU. OFF PREMI~,E STATIONS USING THE 225A KTU MAY BE ROTARY DIAL
OR "TOUCH-TONE" DIAL STATIONS.
~~~~V~TGgllNTDI f~ 5FT~j~ (~6r~~E~ N~ ~tA~rtE~U~T~:p~FfSLL
FROM
SH I
ONE
SHOWN, USING lTD LEAD WHEN KTU IS ASSIGNED TO TDUCHTONE" DIAL STATIONS OR USING T LEAD WHEN KTU
SW2
IS ASSIGNED
TO ROTARY DIAL STATIONS.
SW3
PLACE STRAP .~HEN 216A KTU NOT PROVIDED.
SW4
REYOVE [XISTING STRAP BETWEEN TERMINAL 178 OF 2076 (MO)
OR G KTU AND TERMINAL 34 OF LAST 216A KTU OR FROM BETWEEN
TERMINAL 17B AND 188 OF 2078 (MOl OR C KTU, COONECT AS SHOWN.
SW5
PLACE "WT" LEAD ON LAST 216A KTU PROVIDED.
SWG
REMOVE EXISTING STRAP BETWEEN TERMINAL l OF 227A (MOl OR
B KTU AND TERMINAL 25B OF 207C KTU.
PLACE DIODE
(FURNISHED LOCALLY) AS SHOWN.
SW7
swa
PLACE DIODE (FURNISHED LOCALLY) AS SHONH ON 207B (MO)
KTU ONLY.
SW.
PROVIDE STRAP FOR EACH SINGLE DIGIT NUMBER APPEARING
ON THE SYSTEM.
SWO
REMOVE EXISTING STRAP BETNEEN TERMINAL IIAOF207B (MD) OR
C KTU AND TERMINAL 1 OF FIRST 216A KTU.
CR2
WHEN ADDING THE 2478 KTU TO AN EXISTtNG SYSTEM EQUIPPED WITH
DIAL TONE. A RESISTOR MUST BE ADDED ON THE DT LEAO OF THE
DIAL TONE CIRCUIT,
CR3
THE LONGLINE CIRCUIT (225A KTU) MAY BE ASSOCIATED WITH AN
OFF-PREMISE "TOUCH-TONE" TEL SfTONLY IF THE 2478 KTU
HAS A Y2 CARO EQUIPPED WITH OPTIONS K AND M. SEE FIG, 4
THE 2254 KTU SHOULD BE CONNECTED BETWEEN THE
2224 KTU OR 2234 KTU AND THE OFT PREM I SE
CR4
CR5
CRG
CR7
*
TEL SET.
SO 69529-01 OPTION
CRa
CR.
CRO
----
Fig.
~Addition
of TOUCH-TONE® Adapter Circuit, 247B KTU With 222A ond 223A KTUs. (Sheet 2)
Page 9
SECTION 518-114-431
---
-
PIO 2478 KTU (p/O CARD Y2)
3iAS CKT
\
10
R 13
154
442
I
R 12
(SEE NOTE)
®
©
I
-24
R 15
110
442
®
RI7
493
CD®
RT I
®
®
3
A
©
®..---.----..
CR2
R 14
(SEE NOTE)
®
©
®
®
:R3
®
~®
:I: CRI
,\I
, -__________________H~IG~H~GR~O~U~P~L~I_M_IT~E~R______________________
r---------------------------~--------~>ONG
R5
383®
562@
~--~----<
R4
~
®
1
>-1-~~
135 ®
R3
511®
562@
-24
ONG
':~
@
1
~T5
_24 _____--____....______
--lC6~ ONG
ONG
NOTE:
THE VALUES OF RES I STORS R 12 AND R 14 SHOULD 8E SELECTED
FROM THE FOLLOWING LIST TO PROVIDE REQUIRED BIAS.
VOLTAGE ACROSS
RESISTANCE VALUE
CR I
RI2
RI4
S.8V TO 6.0V
o.IV TO 6.3V
6.4V TO 6.6v
®
©
®
©
3120
3650
4480
3320
3920
4750
4020
4810
6420
5230
4270
6810
OPTIONS:
AND @ ARE FACTORY FURN I SHED.
®
Fig. ~Y2 Card Options in 247B KTU.
Page 10
I
I
I
10~
13
-24A
I
ISS 3, SECTION 518-114-431
~TABLE
C<--
SO-69447-01 (247A KTU) OPTIONS USED WITH 200H-TVPE KTU
OPTIONS
FEATURES
KTS No_ 6A
one-link
and
2-link
arrangements
When station busy circuits are not provided
When station busy
circuit is provided
with
G
STA33
K
STA44
J
STA66
H
When one or more 216A KTU are provided
N
When 216A KTU is not provided
T
Single-digit station code
V
2-link arrangements
222A KTU with
I Rotary dial station
I "TOUCH-TONE"® dial station
~TABLE
y
E
0<--
SO-69529-01 (2476 KTU) OPTIONS USED WITH 200H-TVPE KTU
FEATURES
OPTIONS
When 216A KTU (with KTS No. 6A) is not provided
T
Strapping for single-digit code, single- or 2-link
V
~TABLE
E<--
CURRENT DRAIN REQUIREMENTS FOR 2-TALKING LINK ARRANGEMENTS
BATTERY SUPPLY AMPERES
2-TALKING
LINK
ARRANGEMENT
MAX CURRENT
DRAIN AT
MIN VOLTAGE
(20 VOLTS)
CURRENT DRAIN
DURING NORMAL
TALKING
CONDITION
(24VOLTS)
A BAT.
BBAT.
A BAT.
BBAT.
Installation over
9 codes and using
transfer circuit
0.374
0.827
0.205
0.200
Installation with
camp-on circuit
0.454
1.007
0.215
0.210
Page 11
SECTION 518·114·431
TABLE F
200H~TYPE KTU CONNECTIONS TERMINAL STRIP E
FEATURE
STA
64BI.loo CABLE
TERMINAL
LEAD
DESIG
TS E
25
4A
3A
5
6
7
8
(W-G)
(G-W)
[W]
[G]
12A
(W-BR)
(BR-W)
[W]
[BR]
14A
13A
9
10
(W-8)
(8-W)
[W]
[8]
2lA
22A
L
11
12
(R-BL)
(BL-R)
[R]
[BL]
24A
23A
T
R
13
14
(R-O)
(O-R)
[R]
[0]
3lA
32A
LG
L
15
16
(R-G)
(G-R)
[R]
[G]
34A
33A
T
17
18
(R-BR)
(BR-R)
[R]
[BR]
lB
2B
19
20
(R-8)
(8-R)
[R]
[8]
4B
3B
LG
L
LG
R
LG
T
26
27
R
LG
lIB
12B
[BK]
[0]
14B
13B
T
R
25
26
(BK-G)
(G-BK)
[BK]
[G]
2lB
22B
I LG
27
28
29
30
(BK-BR) [BK]
(BR-BK) [BR]
(BK-8) [BK]
(8-BK)
[8]
i 8LG
L
I
(Y-BL)
[Y]
(BL-Y) [BL]
(Y-O)
[Y]
(O-Y)
[0]
~L~G~+--35~~(~Y--G-)~~[Y~]~
Ii
29
~--~-~--~---+----
(BK-BL) [BK]
(BL-BK) [BL]
(BK-O)
(O-BK)
i R
L
31
3:2
i
36
(G-Y)
[G]
I------+----:c---+--+--~---.:...~--
T
37
(Y-BR)
f---.-Rr._-+-~3=8-+---.:..(B=R-Y)
20
( ) Current color code.
r ] MD color code.
Page 12
LG
L
39
40
(Y-8)
(8-Y)
[Y]
[BR]
[Y]
[8]
ON
224A (MD)
OR B
KTU
lIA
23
24
L
TERM.
ON
2A
L
I T
r
21
22
TERM.
232A(MD)
OR B
KTU
IA
[0]
L
I
223A
KTU
[W]
T
I D'w
IIntercom
222A
KTU
(W-O)
(O-W)
R
I
207C
KTU
3
4
LG
T
R
24
ON
[W]
[BL]
L
23
TERM.
ON
(W-BL)
(BL-W)
R
22
TERM.
ON
1
2
T
21
INSIDE WIRE
CABLE
TERM.
24B
23B
3lB
32B
34B
33B
IC
2C
4C
3C
IA
2A
~--+-----+----+lst~--4----1
4A
3A
ISS 3, SECTION 518-114-431
TABLE F (Cont)
200H.TYPE KTU CONNECTIONS TERMINAL STRIP F
FEATURE
STA
64BI-IOO CABLE
TERMINAL
LEAD
DESIG
TS F
3
4
INSIDE WIRE
CABLE
TERM.
ON
207C
KTU
TERM.
ON
222A
KTU
TERM.
ON
223A
KTU
T
R
1
2
(V-BL)
(BL-V)
[V]
[BL]
11A
12A
LG
L
3
4
(V-O)
(O-V)
[V]
[0]
14A
13A
T
R
5
6
(V-G)
(G-V)
[V]
[G]
21A
22A
LG
L
7
8
(V-BR)
(BR-V)
[V]
[BR]
24A
23A
T
R
9
10
(V-S)
(S-V)
[V]
[S]
lA
2A
LG
L
T
R
11
12
(W-BL)
(BL-W)
[W]
[BL]
4A
3A
13
14
(W-O)
(O-W)
[W]
llA
12A
(W-G)
(G-W)
[W]
[G]
TERM.
ON
232A (MD)
OR B
KTU
TERM.
ON
224A (MD)
OR B
KTU
1st
.~-
5
6
LG
[0]
I---
Dial
L
15
16
Intercom
T
R
17
18
(W-BR)
(BR-W)
[W]
[BR]
21A
22A
LG
L
19
20
(W-S)
(S-W)
[W]
[S]
24A
23A
T
R
21
22
(R-BL)
(BL-R)
[R]
[BL]
1A
2A
LG
L
23
24
(R-O)
(O-R)
[R]
[0]
4A
3A
T
R
25
26
(R-G)
(G-R)
[R]
[G]
llA
12A
LG
L
27
28
(R-BR)
(BR-R)
[R]
[BR]
14A
13A
T
R
29
30
(R-S)
(S-R)
[R]
[S]
21A
22A
LG
L
31
32
21
22
S
S
33
34
(BK-O)
(O-BK)
[BK]
[0]
7A
17A
23
24
S
S
35
36
(BK-G)
(G-BK)
[BK]
[G]
27A
37A
25
26
S
S
37
38
(BK-BR) [BK]
(BR-BK) [BR]
7B
17B
27
28
S
S
39
40
[BK]
[S]
27B
37B
7
8
9
0
Signal
Key
Leads
14A
13A
(BK-BL) [BK]
(BL-BK) [BL]
(BK-S)
(S-BK)
2nd
3rd
24A
23A
( ) Current color code.
[ 1 MD color code.
Page 13
SECTION 518-114-431
TABLE F (Cont)
200H-TYPE KTU CONNECTIONS TERMINAL STRIP G
FEATURE
64BI-loo CABLE
TERMINAL
LEAD
DESIG
STA
TS G
Signal
Key
Leads
Station
Audible
SignalZ Option
TERM.
ON
222A
KTU
TERM.
ON
223A
KTU
29
20
S
S
1
2
(Y-BL)
(BL-Y)
[Y]
[BL]
3
4
S
S
3
4
(Y-O)
(O-Y)
[Y]
[0]
17A 1st
27A
5
6
S
S
5
6
(Y-G)
(G-Y)
[Y]
[G]
7A
17A 2nd
7
8
S
S
7
8
(Y-BR)
(BR-Y)
[Y]
[BR]
27A
7A
9
0
S
S
9
10
(Y-S)
(S-Y)
[Y]
21
RS
RG
(V-BL)
(BL-V)
[V]
[BL]
5A
6A
22
RS
RG
(V-O)
(O-V)
[V]
[0]
15A
16A
23
RS
RG
(V-G)
(G-V)
[V]
[G]
25A
26A
24
RS
RG
(V-BR)
(BR-V)
[V]
[BR]
35A
36A
25
RS
RG
(V-S)
(S-V)
[V]
[S]
5B
6B
26
RS
RG
(W-BL)
(BL-W)
[W]
[BL]
15B
16B
27
RS
RG
(W-O)
(O-W)
[W]
[0]
25B
26B
28
RS
RG
(W-G)
(G-W)
[W]
[G]
35B
36B
29
RS
RG
(W-BR)
(BR-W)
[W]
[BR]
5C
6C
20
RS
RG
(W-S)
(S-W)
[WT
3
RS
RG
(R-BL)
(BL-R)
[R]
[BL]
(R-O)
(O-R)
[R]
4
RS
RG
[0]
25A
26A
5
RS
RG
(R-G)
(G-R)
[R]
[G]
5A
6A
6
RS
RG
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
(R-BR)
(BR-R)
[R]
[BR]
(R-S)
(S-R)
[R]
[S]
-
7
( ) CUrrent color code.
[ ] MD color code.
Page 14
INSIDE WIRE
CABLE
TERM.
ON
207C
KTU
RS
RG
7C
7A
1-
17A 3rd
27A
[S]
5A
6A
[S]
1---
15A
1st
16A
15A
2nd
16A
25A
26A
TERM.
ON
232A(MD)
OR B
KTU
TERM.
ON
224A(MD)
OR B
KTU
ISS 3, SECTIQN 518-114-431
TABLE F (Cont)
200H·TYPE KTU CONNECTIONS TERMINAL STRIP H
6481-100 CABLE
FEATURE
STA
TERMINAL
LEAD
DESIG
lSH
8
Sta Aud Sig
- Z Option 9
0
To Power
Supply
To Lamp
Supply
To Power
Supply
Aud Sig
Pwr Sup
Options
X Optiont
to Interrupter in
Package
H,-Volt ac
Suppl~'
Lamp
Supply
y
Z
y
Z
RS
RG
RS
RG
RS
RG
"B" GRD
"B" BAT. (SIG)
GRD
:±: or LB
"A"GRD
"A" BAT. (TALK)
G GRD
GRD orR GRD
105V±
BAT.,::'" or 105V±
CO§
TO
BTl or BZ1
BT or BZ
RO
LF
GRD
10V AC
± or LB
::' or LB
CO~
W Option:l:
to Extt'rnal
Inh'lTupter
Manual
Intercom
Lamp
Suppl.,·
Span'
TO
BTl or BZ1
BT or BZ
RO
LF
T
R
L
± or LH
± or LB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
•
INSIDE WIRE
CABLE
(BK·BL)
(BL·BK)
(BK·O)
(O·BK)
(BK.G)
(G·BK)
(BK·BR)
(BR·BK)
(BK-S)
(S-BK)
(Y-BL)
(BL-Y)
(Y-O)
•
. .
..
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
(Y-G)
(G-Y)
(Y-BR)
(BR-Y)
(Y-S)
(S-Y)
(V-BL)
(BL-V)
(V-O)
(O-V)
(V-G)
(G-Y)
(V-BR)
(BR-V)
(V-S)
(S-V)
(W-BL)
(BL-W)
(W-O)
(O-W)
(W-G)
(G-W)
(W-BR)
(BR-W)
(W-S)
(S-W)
[Y]
[G]
n
37
36
32
31
34
1
27
26
9
10
[Y]
[0]
[l~~
KTU
TERM.
TERM.
ON
ON
232A (MD) 224A (MD)
B or C
OR B
KTU
KTU
20A
6A
19A
29A
[BR]
[Y]
[S]
[V]
[BL]
[V]
[V]
[G]
[V]
[BR]
[V]
rS]
[W]
[BL]
rW]
223A
20B
19B
32B
29B
lOB
9B
•
•
[0]
TERM.
ON
5A
6A
15A 3rd
16A
25A
26A
[0]
[BK]
[G]
[BK]
[BR]
[~K]
S]
[Y]
[BL]
[Y]
(O-Y)
40
TERM.
ON
222A
KTU
[BK]
[BL]
[BK]
14
39
TERM.
ON
207C
KTU
18A
22
35
24
40A
9B
I
30
40
28
IlJ
20
[G]
[W]
[BR]
[W]
[S]
'Select spare pair locally.
tWhen KTU is equipped with a 64B1·100 cable terminal, strap (X option) as follows: on terminal strip H strap terminal 15 to 25,
16 to 26, 17 to 27, 18 to 28, 20 to 30. Also make sure the following straps are not provided:
from terminal
to terminal
37 (232A [MD] or B) 31 (232A [MD] or B)
18 (222A)
24 (224A [MD] or B)
36 (232A [MD] or B) 1 (232A [MD] or B)
22 (224A [MD] or B) 9B (222A)
32 (232A [MD] or B)
35 (224A [MD] or B
t For W option remove all straps mentioned above and connect terminals 25 through 30 on TSH to appropriate terminals on an
external interrupter.
The CO lead connection is required when an associated No. lA, 1A1, or lA2 system flashing circuit is
used as part of the No. 6A installation.
( ) Current color code.
[ ] MD color code.
n 232C KTU has factory-placed strap from 37 to 39.
" Improper connection of battery and ground may result in damage to electrolytic capacitor.
Page 15
Revised August 1974
§
SECTION 518-114-432
Issue 1, August. 1970
AT&TCo Standard
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
Plant Series
SERVICE
1A 1 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
KEY SERVICE UNITS
1.01
When power is not provided, connect an
external power source to Column A of
connecting block A as shown in Table B.
1.02
302·Type Key Service Unit
1.
2.04
GENERAL
This section contains connection information
for the 300-, 301-(MD), 302-(MD), 310-, 311-,
2301-, and 2311-type KSUs.
Information in this section was formerly
contained in Sections 518-240-400, 518-240-401,
518-245-101, and 518-245-102, which are hereby
canceled.
2.05
An A75A connector cable is connected to
66-Type Connecting block as follows:
.Blue binder (connector 1) to Column A.
1.03
For additional information, refer to CDand SD-69433-01 (300-, 301-, and 302-type);
CD- and SD-69434-01 (310-type); and CD and
SD-68480-01 (311-type).
.Orange binder (connector 2) to Column B
.Green binder (connector 3) to Column C.
2.
2.06
CONNECTIONS
2.01
Key and power cable connections and
strapping between 202D, 230B, 232B, and
207C KTUs for the 300-, 301-, 302-type KSUs,
and for the 310-, 311-type KSUs are shown in Fig.
4 and 5, respectively. Key and power cable
connections and strappings between the 230B,
238A, 207C, and 216A for the 310- and 311-type
KSUs are shown in Fig. 6.
30U-Type Key Service Unit
Each connector provides for:
.All Line features
.Dial intercommunicating line
.Common audible signal for all line circuits.
2.07
See Table C for features, lead designations,
and connections to blocks A .and B.
2.08
2.02
KTUs are interwired. Connect key or running
cables directly to the screw terminals on
back of the KTUs. See Table A for features, lead
designations, and connections. When power is not
provided, connect an external power source as
shown in Table B.
Some pairs in each binder group of the A75A
connector cable are not terminated. These
pairs may be used for dial intercom codes and
miscellaneous circuits by terminating on the proper
or vacant terminals on the 66-type connecting block.
These vacant terminals may have wires
terminated on Column F that are
lying dead at the apparatus end. Make
sure that these terminals are cleared
before using for miscellaneous circuits.
301.Type Key Service Unit
2.03
Connect key or running cables in Columns
A through E of 66-type connecting block
(Fig. 2). See Table A for features, lead designations,
and terminal numbers on connecting blocks A and
B.
2.09
A telephone set may be connected to each
connector of the A7 5A connector cable or
extended with a B25A connector cable to a bridging
adapter or equivalent.
© American Telephone and Telegraph Company, 1970
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
SECTION 518-114-432
Fig. 3 shows possible arrangements for
intercom signal leads and for extending
stations using a 3-way bridging adapter.
2.10
Connect additional key or running cables to
Columns D and E of 66-type connecting
blocks (see Fig. 2). See Table A for features, lead
designations, and connections to terminal numbers
on connecting blocks A and B.
When power is not provided, connect an
external power source to Column A of
connecting block D. See the following tables:
2.17
.Table E, 4 to 7 lines
2.11
When power is not provided, connect an
external power source to Column A of
connecting block A (see Table B).
.Table G, 9 to 13 lines
2301- and 23ll.Type Key Service Units
Connections for terminating running and/or
key cables and external power wiring to
the 66-type connecting blocks are shown in Tables
J and K for the 2301- and 231l-type KSUs,
respectively. Interwiring of connections between
individual KTUs and the connecting blocks is also
shown.
2.1,2
2.18
When key telephone sets are multipled
through bridging adapters with sets furnishing
features on a per station basis such as speakerphone, line exclusion control, cutoff key, push
button and buzzers, station busy lamps, etc, certain
control leads must be disconnected, insulated, and
stored at the bridged station. This is necessary
to avoid interference with working circuits. Refer
to appropriate section for the telephone set used.
2.19
2.13
3l0-Type Key Service Unit
KTUs are interwired. Connect key or running
cables directly to the screw terminals on
the back of the KTU s. See the following tables
for features, lead designations, and connections.
2.14
For further information see CDs and SDs
69352-01 and 69361-01 for the 2301- and
2311-type KSUs, respectively.
Signaling Circuit For Manual Intercom
Fig. 7 shows an arrangement for manual
signaling when dial intercom is not provided.
This arrangement uses terminals normally used
for dial intercom. (See Read after 2.08).
2.20
Wink-Hold Circuit
.Table D, 4 to 7 lines
All packages are wired for the wink-hold
feature .
2.21
• Table F, 9 to 13 lines
When power is not provided, connect an
external power source. See the following
2.15
Steady Hold
tables:
For steady hold feature see the connection
and strapping diagram for the particular
2.22
.Table E, 4 to 7 lines
KSU .
• Table G, 9 to 13 lines
2.23
Connection Index
3ll-Type Key Service Unit
Connect key or running cables, starting on
Column A of the 66-type connecting blocks
(Fig. 2). See the following tables for features,
lead designations, and terminal numbers on connecting
blocks.
2.16
.Table D, 4 to 7 lines
.Table F, 9 to 13 lines
Page 2
Fig. I-Method of Counting 66BI-25 Connecting
Blocks
Fig. 2-Key or Running Cable Terminations
on 66-Type Connecting Block For 301-,
302-, and 311-Type KSUs
Fig.3-Suggested Intercom Signal Connections
Using 564HDR or 565HDR Telephone
Sets and 302-Type KSU
ISS 1, SECTION 518- 114-432
Fig. 4--,'300:, 301- and 302-Type KSUs, Connections
and Strapping (202D, 230B, 232B, and
207C KTUs)
Fig. 5-310-or 311-Type KSU (4 to 7 Lines)
Connections and Strapping (202D, 230B,
232B, and 207C KTUs)
Fig. 6-310- or 311-Type KSU (9 to 13 Lines)
Connections and Strapping (230B, 238A,
207C, and 216A KTUs)
Fig. 7-Typical Connections for Manual Signaling
When Dial Intercom Circuit is Not
Used
Table A-301- and 302-Type KSUs, Connections
Between Apparatus and 66-Type
Connecting Blocks
Table B-301- and 302-Type KSUs, Connections
between Block A of 66-Type Connecting
Block, Apparatus, and Power Plant
Table C-302-Type KSU, Connections Between
A75A Connector Cable and 66-Type
Connecting Blocks
PAIR
[0o
Table D--,'311-Type KSU (4 - 7 Lines) Connections
Between Apparatus and 66-Type
Connecting Blocks
Table E-311-Type KSU (4-7 Lines) Connections
Between Apparatus, 66-Type Connecting
Block, and Power Plant
Table F--,'311-Type KSU (9-13 Lines) Connections
Between Apparatus and 66-Type
Connecting Blocks
Table G-311-Type KSU (9-13 Lines) Connections
Between Apparatus, 66-Type Connecting
Block, and Power Plant
Table H-310-or 311-Type KSU (9 to 13 Lines)
Line Circuit Portion of 238A KTU
Table 1-310- or 311-Type KSU (9 to 13 Lines)
230B KTU
Table J-2301-Type KSU Connections Between
Apparatus and 66-Type Connecting
Block
Table
K-2311~Type
BLOCK B
COLUMN
BLOCK A
COLUMN
'A
KSU Connections
B
r'
~ROW
0----0----0----
I
0------0----0--
Ir
ROW'-.....
B
A'
I
0-----<>--<>---
2
2
0-----<>--<>---
3
3 e>----o----o---
PAI{§
0----0----0----
~
0----0--------0
4
4
0-----<>--<>---
0------0----0--
5
5
0-----0---0----
GJ
' " DISTRIBUTING rANNING
STR I P EQU I PPED WITH
PRESSURE-SENSITIVE TAPE
~J
0
0J
~
~
PAIR
PAIR
~
DISTRIBUTING rANNING
/
STRIP EQUIPPED WITH
PRESSURE-SENSITIVE TAPE
Fig. 1-Method of Counting 66B1-25 Connecting Blocks
Page 3
SECTION 518-114-432
BLOCK B
BLOCK 8
TO
TO
EQUI P ---o-~-~--9---9--"9
I
EOOIP--~--~-?--~-4r---QT
I
:::] KEY OR
' - - - - - - - - - RUNNING
' -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
4_TH CABLE
.
5TH
~-------------------301 AND 31 I-TYPE KSU
I'--______"l ~~~~ECTOR
J
CABLE
IS~
KEY OR
2ND
RUNN I NG
'----------~
CABLE
302-TYPE KSU
Fig. 2-Key or Running Cable Terminations on 66-Type Connecting Block For 301-. 302-. and 311-Type KSUs
Page 4
ISS 1, SECTION 518-114-432
66-TYPE
CONN BLK
BLOCK B
COLUMN A
21~J
~ CODE2
22-Q-!!-:
23~J
~
24ij
A75A
CONN
CONN
CONN
CONN CABLE
I (BL-W BINDER)
2 (O-W BINDER)
3 (G-W BI NDER)
CODE3
26ij
28~
30~
CONN
CONN
PWG
CONN
TO CONN
75A
CABLE OR
ADAPTER
or
CODE 4
27~JCODE
29~J
~
AUX
TERM.
STRIP
(NOTE I)
PLUG
25~J
TEL SETS
(NOTE 2)
ADAPTER
(NOTE 3)
or
LENGTH
B25A CONN CABLE
565HDR OR 565HK
TEL SET
5
CODE6
CORD
AUX
TERM.
STR I P
TO CONN
A75A
CABLE OR
ADAPTER
or
31..J"\....!.]
~ CODE 7
32~
33~J
V
CODE 8
34-0!:
35~J
~ CODE9
36~
TO CONN
A75A
CABLE OR
ADAPTER
or
37~B-J
~ CODEO
INTERCOM
SIGNAL
38~
TERM. ON
STRIP
A75A
CABLE
CONN
564HDR,565HDR
565HK, .oR 565LDR
TEL SET
3-WAY
564HDR,565HDR,
565HK OR 565LDR
TEL SETS,ANY
I NTERCOM CODES
NOTES:
I. THESE PAIRS ARE DEAD-ENDED AT CONNECTING
BLOCK. CONNECT AS REQUIRED.
2. SEE 2.18.
3. ADAPTERS MAY BE MULTI PLED, AS SHOWN, TO
PROVIDE MORE THAN TWO INTERCOMMUNICATING CODES
PER CONNECTOR or THE A75A CONNECTOR CABLE.
Fig. 3-Suggested Intercom Signal Connections Using 564HDR or 565HDR Telephone Sets, and 302-Type KSU
Page 5
SECTION 518-114-432
2020 KTU if
CKT 2 TSS
I TSA
CKT
(NOTE 2)
CKT 4 TSD
CKT 3 TSC
5TH OR 6TH CKT
8
R
CO OR
[
PBX II NE
~0'-
'I
R
AI
KEYLESS [
STATION 5
lOlA OR 1018
KEY EQU I P.
LAMP
POWER
SUPPL
'2
14
A
"'5
16
L
LG
8
'L
17
~
7
t----0 8
~'7
'7
~
,
4
t4
Ij
Ij
~
"
:;:5
6
12
2
4
"
>::'
:;:1
16
ii
2
14
4
'j
,j
14
6
'6
6
I
I
;;;6
~
I
MULT I PLE
TO 5UCC (
II NE CKT
29
~
BAT. OR ±
4
,
"
>::5
>::'5
ii
ii
18
'8
I
"
>::">::'
6
n.
18
~
y
:;:'5
;;;16
,.,.
;;
18
28
®':®I
12
2
4~
6
BAT. OR ±
±
~
12
:;:5
GRD
BAT. OR
7
17
7
~
2
n.~
H
,[
"
~
,.,.8
~I, I:~~~~~
, , ii ri
ii he
he
I
T
KEY OR
"
17
70
T
,.,.8
BAT. OR ±
I
0
®
W'R'NG
TO
suee
I
:~
I
I
I
MULTIPLE
20
I
BAT.. ±
OR I05V±
AUO StG SUP
I
0'9
E::t
I
I
Lr
Lr
Lr
Lr
0'9
0'9
II
II
0 20
®J
9
~
II
0 20
LW
LW
~
RN
®
RN
RN
,.,.9
9
RN
LINE UNIT 5
I
I
21
9
I
I
I
RN
~
~ITO
23
~
~ rca
~
2'
I
I
I
I
~~
I
22
20
vae
TALK OR
"A"8A1.
20
*'
vae
SIG OR
"B" BAT.
[
~
BAT.
GRD
[ ~:~.
'"
~
C-
26
26
~,MULTIPLE
TO suee
LI NE CKT
BAT.,±,DR
AUO SIG
PWR SUP
RN
0'--
.[
I05V
±
GRD
I
27
25E./
81 OR 8ll
~JAUD
~~IG
10
J
AUO
~SIG
10
81 OR al') AUO
~srG
10
81 OR BZIJAUD
~StG
'0
I
25
~JAUD
~SIG
'0
I
I
I
I
Fig. 4-300-,301- and 302-Type KSUs, Connections and Strapping (2020, 2300, 2328, and 207C KTUs)
(Sheet 1)
Page 6
ISS 1, SECTION 518.114·432
232B KTU
207C KTU
228
12B~ I
2B0d
IB
KEY OR
KEYlESS
STAT IONS
R
T
J
10V±
GRD
R
T
l
lG
J
II~~
21B
26
;;'27
40
iZ)3°
0 28
19
!Jl
I
I
~
I
-i
I
0~
32~
12A
lW
13A~'
lW 5TH CKT
~13
0:~
I
-i lW RN6TH CKT ~1622
RN
21
RN
"(
RN
~RN 5TH CKT
RN 6TH CKT
HA
35
HA
'fi23
TO
TO
I
lK
lK
I
TO LAMP
PWR SUP
GRD
8AT.OR±
GRD
y
± OR BAT.]
l
VISUAL
)
lG
SIGNAL
R 2
B 2
B 3
R 3
R(4)
B(4)
B 5
R 5
R 6
AUD
)
B 6
SIG
B 7
R 7
R(8)
B(8)
t
•
WIRED FOR METALLIC RINGING AND INTERRUPTED AUDIBLE
fOR C()1MON AUDIBLE,STRAP ALL NO. 10 TERMINALS
A AND B GROUNDS MUST BE CONNECTED TOGETHER AT
POW£R SUPPL Y
WIRING
OPT ION
METALLIC RINGING FURNISHED
Z
GROUNDED RINGING
Y
INTERRUPTED AUDIBLE SIG (fURNISHED)
X
STEADY AUDIBLE SIGNAL
W
LAMP SUPPLY
I MAX
I MAX
40 LAMPS (FURNISHED)
S
80 LAMPS
R
J
18A
40B
19A~ I
~!~ !
R 0
B(O)
20A
31B~
/"'
"(
)
)
J
)
23B
37 CO
CO
15At?>"
17Aq:i"
"(361
co
14A
37.,0
16A
38B
I
MANUAL
INTERCOM
)
)
)
36~
12
*
]
~~~~~
I 2;~0
lr
lr
lr
~3
4
lr
lr 5TH CKT ;;:; 5
Lr ~~H CKT 0,~
c=
PWR SUP
F'OR MOT
NOTES:
I. WHEN STEADY HOLD LAMP IS REQUIRED INSTEAD OF' LAMP
WINK, PROVIDE STRAPS AS F'OLLOWS:
2020 KTU- TERMS. 20 AND 29
2308 KTU-CKTS I AND 2 TERMS. 20A,8 AND 29A
CKTS 3 AND 4 TERMS. 20C,D AND 28A
CAUTION: If PACKAGE INTERRUPTER IS USED TO fURNISH
LAMP WiNK F'OR OTHER SYSTEMS,DISCONNECT AND TAPE LW
LEADS AT TERMINAL 20 OF EACH LINE CIRCUIT NOT
USING THE WINK FEATURE.
2. SYMBOL (II) MEANS ADJACENT TERMINALS ARE NOT
STRAPPED. REFER TO LEGEND FOR TERM I NAT IONS.
I
I
j">38
9B
24
25
10B~
~
19B~
I
I
I
20B
29
39
"(
I
39~
28B
I
26B
I 1788J
18B
Fig. 4-300·, 301· and 302.Type KSUs, Connections and Strapping (2020, 230B, 232B, and 207C KTUs)
(Sheet 2)
Page 7
SECTION 518-114-432
230B KTU (CKT 1-4)
232B KTU
TERM.
TSA TSB TSC •
TSD •
P P
MANUAL
INTERCOM
DIRECT OR
T
[R
LG
I
•
~
~~N~~
30
~.
J5.
PBX
DIRECT OR
THRU TERM.
40
:::~L~:;::::=t:=+0
THRU TERM.
28
MOTOR SUP (,;;10",V,...::.±_-._-l_0r> 26
DIRECT OR
GRD
.~ 27
THRU n:RM".
± OR LB
9
± OR L a ; ; 10
± OR LB
I f
19
± OR LB
20
LAMP PWR
SUPPLY
DIRECT OR
THRU TERM,
P
GRD
± OR LB
GRO
± OR LB
:t OR LB
GRD
~
!
P
i
1-20
CKT I
CKT 2
CKT 3
CKT 4
2020 KTU
TERM. 2JA-30A
ARE COMMON
FOR ALL CKTS
1ST 2020 - CKT 5
2ND 2020 - CKT 6
3RO 2020 - CKT 1
~IN~~
(~~I'
..L.40 y
:~ ~ 101 A OR 1018
II
I .
I
~
I)
2)
3)
4
5
~)
@
o
9A
1-4)
~RN
(2)-=-='-'-'-'-'---+--=+ >-----""-0---
23
35
36
37
I
19
LW
20
I
I
7)
LF'
1
@
°1I
~
MULTI PLE TO
SUCCEEDING
LI NE CKTS
MULTI PLE TO
TERM. 9 Of
TSB,C AND 0
RN (CKT 5-7)
HA (CKT 1-7
TO CKT 1-7
CO CKT 1-7
RN
9~
21 A
23A
24A
21 ~
2
22A
22
24~
YCO
38 ncLK
24
~
CKT 1-7
~
25
~
26
4 ~
INOIV LEADS
PER CKT I
81 OR AZI
AUO SIG
ASSOC WITH [
LINE CKTS
DIRECT OR
THRU TERM.
(CKT 1-4)
i~K~R 4i Z I
81
P p
I
::)R
All
(eKT 3)
81 OR eZI
(CKT 2)
\
30A
\
274
25'
91 OR BZ
(CKT I)
PI OR BZ (CKT 1-4)
81 OR 8Z1 (CKT 5-7)
RI OR AZ CKT 5-7
10
TO CKT 5
I
1
\
25
10'
~
Fig. 5-310- or 311-Type KSU (4 to 7 Lines) Connections and Strapping (2020, 2308, 2328, and 207C 'KTUs)
(Sheet 1)
Page 8
ISS I, SECTION 518-114-432
207C KTU
NOTES:
t. FOR COMMON AUDIBLE SIGNAL STRAP ALL NO. 10 TERMS.
2. WHEN STEADY HOLD SIGNAL IS REQUIRED (V OPTION)
PROV IDE STRAPS AS FOllOWS:
2020 KTU-TERM. 20-29
230B KTU-TERM. 20A,B-29A (CKT 1-2)
TERM. 20C,D-28A (CKT 3-4)
3. A AND B GROUNDS MUST BE CONNECTED TOGETHER.
OPTIONS:
21BL
liB
IB
T
@
WINKING HOLD SIGNAL (fURNISHED).
®
®
®
GROUNDED LI NE RING I NG.
G)
22BL
t28
26
R
KEYOR
KEYLESS
STA, DIRECT
29B
OR THRU
--'3fs'0
LG
~
o
STEADY HOLD SIGNAL.
METALLIC LINE RINGING (fURNISHED).
INTERRUPTED AUDIBLE SIGNAL USING ELECTROMECHANICAL INTERRUPTER (232B KTU) (fURNISHED).
STEADY AUDIBLE SIGNAL
TERM I N'L
p p
12AI7I-++-~:.1.
36B
13' 0 _.L...!:..!:!..!.
p p
14.
37B
R (4))
B 4
B 5 )
R 5
15A
p p
16A
38B
R (6))
B 6
B 7 )
R 7
17A
AUD SIG
ASSOC
WITH DIAL
1NTERCOM
DIRECT OR
THRU TERM.
P p
18'
40B
R(8))
B 8
B 9 )
R 9
19'
20.
31B
R 0 )
B 0
238
9B
lOB
28B
26B
19B
20B
39B
17B~
18B
0-l
I'ig. 5-310- or 311-Type KSU (4 to 7 Lines) Connections and Strapping
(202D, 2308, 2328, and 207C KTUs) (Sheet 2)
Page 9
SECTION 518-114-432
230B KTU
(SEE T ABLE I)
238A KTU (SEE TABLE H)
LINE CKT 1-9 REF DESIG
COMM EQPT
MOTOR SUP,
DIRECT OR
GRO
~ ®~ICOOR
39F
[",,'O;'-;;-VA"'C~---+f-;;;i-0
1if::,
:::~ ::M. [--7:-;~2:""~;;~;---T--:-~;iI~",~-e>
SU PPL Y
01 REeT OR
THRU TERM.
-,-'-'O"'R...;L.,B'-_ _-hrt---;2:;.;9;;:G-e>
-,-'-,O",R...;L.,B'-_ _.J-1-J---,3:..:9..:Go.
32G
n
Q~
~
R~
5G
LF" (CKT I ANO 2)
15G <21 LF (CKT 10 AND II
25G <21 LF CKT 5 AND 6)
26G <21
ICKT
·CKT
(CKT
LW (CKT
17G~ LW
27G
<21
I 3~~ <21 ~~
28G~
AUO SIG
[
PWR SUPPLY
DIRECT OR
THRU TERM.
38G
29F
GRD OR RG
BAT.,:t:,OR I05Vt
r•
GRD
LAMP PI/R
[
SUPPLY
DIRECT OR
THRU TERM.
r
11
:t: OR LB
GRD
r
:t: OR LB
~
I
AUO SIG
[
ASSOC WITH
LINE CKTS
DIRECT OR
THRU TERM.
(CKT 1-9 )
RI
BI
(CKT 1-9
CKT 10-13
•
RI
(CKT 10-13)
I
B GRD
14-26 VDC [
PWR SUPPLY
DIRECT OR
THRU TERM.
B BAT.
B GRD
~~
G 0-f'"
er:-
'
1
TO KEY OR
KEYlESS
STATION
1
N
91
I AND 2)
10 AND r I )
5 AND 6)
3 AND 4)
12 AND 13)
7 AND 8)
9)
I LW
(CKT 10-
M
I
1
M
I)
@
;;v
®
3G~ CO
~W
4G",LK
X
1
U
24A
22A
6A
;;'T
S
0
RN
CKT 1-41
~:~ <21 :~
5-81
9)
10-1
1-4
5-8)
9)
ICKT
CKT
28F~ RN CKT
21F
CKT
BI
23F ~ BI
CKT
CKT
25'
BI
0
,I
!
T
~~KT
1
~
I
I
22F
I
21A
~23A
~
9)0
®
-)
FROM CKT 9
J
>-<2I
RN (CKT 10-13)
~
38B
380;:;:
18E <21
SEE ®
TABLE H
1
f
CD
K
L
j
l
BI
BI
BI
BI
I rI
1
1
1
1
INDIVIDUAL LEADS TO KT
1-2,CKT 5-6.AND CKT 9
fROM CKT 9
I
1
(CKT 13)
30A
(CKT 12)
27A
CKT
" 7r 25A
CKT 10
L
~
I
I
9A
SEE
TABLE I
I
~
I
B BAT,
,.1
(CKT 10-13 )
IG
2G;; TO
tl
I NDIV
PAIRS
PER CKT
E~]
H~
30F
L
BI
CO OR
PBX
LINES
1
I LF
LW (CKT 1-9 )
(cKT
(CKT
LW (CKT
LW (CKT
18G~ LW
J
LF (CKT 1-9) ,.,.N
iCKT 3 AND 41
LF ICKT 12 ANO 131
LF ICKT 7 AND 81
3~~ <21 ~~
KEYLESS
STATION
T
R
F '< R(
16A~ R 6
19A'5e' R 9
20A~ R 0
riI
OPTIONS:
®
®
0 7
6
9
10
13
36B
1
R (31
B 3
R (4)
B(4)
R 5
B 5
R 6
B 6
R
9 7
R 6
B(6)
R 9
B 9
R 0)
B 0
R(21)
B 21)
R 20
B 201
RT22
B(22)
R 23
B 23
R 24
B 24
R 25
B 25
R 26
'4
0
~15
~16
'KI
37B
-
-
~I
36B
'6
0
_19
I
'<-'
20
h¥40B
-
20A,B-29A (CKT 10-11)
20C,D-28A (CKT 12-13)
6F-16F (CKT 1-2)
7F-17F (CKT 3-4)
6F-18F (eKT 5-6)
9F-19F (CKT 7-6)
IOF-20F (CKT 9)
'U
21
31B
~30
-
I
0 22
~4B
_23
'<-'
24
1
25
14B
r
I
424B
0 26
R 27
B(27
R 26
8 26
RI'
8 29
'<-'
30B
29
C~~;~
GRD
10 VAC
METALLIC LINE RINGING (FURNISHED).
C!)
INTERRUPTED AUO I BlE SIGNAL US I NG ELECTRO-
o
MEeHAN ICAl INTERRUPTER (COMMON EQU I PMENT
PORTION OF 238A KTUj (FURNISHED).
STEADY AUDIBLE SIGNAL.
*
I NOIVIDUAL LEADS TO CKT 1-2, CKT 5-6,
AND CKT 9.
AUDIBLE SIG CKT
Assac WITH DIAL
INTERCOM 0 I REeT
OR THRU TERMINAL
(ALL RAND B
LEADS PA I RED )
NUM8ERS IN ( )
DENOTE CODES
II
~G J
If
I.
1t
37
20B~
GROUNDED LINE RINGING.
®
1
IB
2B
3B
32B
29B
198
STEADY HOLD SIGNAL.
@)
B{~6J
_27
'<-'
26
1
IIINKING HOLD SIGNAL (FURNISHED).
~I
40
KEY OR KEYLESS
STATION DIRECT
OR THRU TERM I NAL
P
39
26B
26B
----,..;~~~0
---~0
Fig, 6-310- or 311-Type KSU (9 to 13 Lines) Connections and Strapping (2308, 238A, 207C, and 216A
KTUsp (Sheet 2)
Page II
SECTION 518-114-432
66BI-25
CONN BLOCK
BLOCK B
L~
19
*
20
T
52
22
23
"'J
53
24
54
26
'1
~
l/ \..--'
'J
S5
28
PLACE STRAP S
rOR SIGNAL!
ARRANGEMENT
29
30
J
31
TO POWER
SUPPLY rOR
USIGNALS
GRIl*
> UR HA .~
Z']
> OR BAT.
:J
• 00 ..
32
"]
33
> OR BAT.
34
35
.oo ..
36
37
38
TO SIGNAL
KEYS AS
REQUIRE o
'~]
25
l/ l--"
SI
'1
21,
27
"]
*
~
~J
TO BUZZ ER
AS REQU IRED
NOTE:
TERM. r IS USED rOR INTERNAL WIRING
WHICH WILL BE SPARE ON EQUIPMENT END
WHEN DIAL INTER COMMUNICATING IS NOT
PROV IDEO.
LOOPED THROUGH CONNECTIONS ON
TERMINALS
*
>ORBAT.
Fig. 7-Typical Connections for Manual Signaling When Dial Intercom Circuit is Not Used
Page 12
ISS 1, SECTION 518-114-432
TABLE A
301- AND 302-TYPE K5U'S, CONNECTIONS BETWEEN
APPARATUS AND 66-TYPE CONNECTING BLOCKS
FEATURE
BLOCK A
66BI-25 CONN
BLK
LEAD
DESIG
ROW
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
Line 5
Line 6
Motor
Supply
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
GRD
10V-I-
Spare
Lamp
Supply
Audible
Signal
Supply
20v de
Talk or
A Bat.
20v de
Sig or
B Bat.
± or BAT.
-I- or BAT.
GRD
-I- or BAT.
GRD
BAT., ±,
or 105V-I-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
GRD
BAT.
47
48
GRD
BAT.
49
50
COL
F
CABLE COLOR
O-W BINDER
W-BL
BL-W
WoO
O-W
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W
W-S
SoW
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R
R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-O
O-BK
BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y
Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
TERMINAL
ON
232B KTU
TERMINAL
ON
230B KTU
TERMINAL
ON
202D KTU
TERMINAL
ON
207C KTU
1A
2A
3A
4A
6A
5A
1B
2B
3B
4B
6B
5B
1C
2C
3C
4C
6C
5C
1D
2D
3D
4D
6D
5D
1
2
3
4
6
5
1
2
3
4
6
5
1st
2nd
See Table B
for Power Connections
Page 13
SECTION 518-114-432
TABLE A (Cont)
301- AND 302-TYPE KSU'S CONNECTIONS BETWEEN
APPARATUS AND 66-TYPE CONNECTING BLOCKS
FEATURE
BLOCK B
66BI-25 CONN
BLK
LEAD
DESIG
ROW
Manual
Intercom
Line
..
.§
Line 2
I1l
Line 3
:0"
Line 4
-<"
Line 5
:e
Line 1
Line 6
T
R
LG
L
B1 or BZ1
R1 or BZ
B1 or BZ1
R1 or BZ
B1 or BZ1
R1 or BZ
B1 or BZ1
R1 or BZ
B1 or BZ1
R1 or BZ
B1 or BZ1
R1 or BZ
T
Dial
Selective
Intercom
Line
Line 1
Line 2
~
R
LG
L
B(2)
R(2)
B(3)
R(3)
B(4)
R(4)
B(5)
R(5)
B(6)
R(6)
B(7)
R(7)
B(8)
R(8)
B(9)
R(9)
B(O)
R(O)
T
R
T
R
Po<
Line 3
T
~
0
Line 4
T
~
Q
R
R
Line 5
T
Line 6
T
R
R
COL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
F
CABLE COLOR
B....W BINDER
W-BL
BL-W
WoO
O-W
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W
W-S
S-W
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R
R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-O
O-BK
BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y
Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y
V-BL
BL-V
V-O
O-V
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V
V-S
S-V
TERMINAL
ON
232B KTU
TERMINAL
ON
202D KTU
TERMINAL
ON
207C KTU
30
40
27
28
• On the 302 KSU the R1 leads and the B1 leads are factory-strapped.
Page 14
TERMINAL
ON
230B KTU
25A
lOA
25A
lOB
27A
100
27A
10D
25
10
25
10
1st
2nd
1B
2B
32B
3B
36B
12A
36B
13A
37B
14A
37B
15A
38B
16A
38B
17A
40B
18A
40B
19A
31B
20A
7A
8A
7B
8B
70
80
7D
8D
7
8
7
8
1st
2nd
TABLE B
301· AND 302·TYPE KSU'S, CONNECTIONS BETWEEN BLOCK A
OF 66·TYPE CONNECTING BLOCK, APPARATUS, AND POWER PLANT
CONNECTING BLOCK A
FEATURE
LEAD
DESIG
COLF
ROW
ON
COLE
TO
CABLE
COLOR
CODE
COL D
TO
COL C
TO
CABLE
COLOR
CODE
COLA
TO
6681-25
CONN
BLOCK
CABLE
COLOR
CODE
KTU
TERM.
~~
!".-BR
BR-Y
232B
27
26
± or BAT.
Lamp ± or BAT.
Supply
GRD
± or BAT.
41
42
BR·
S·
232B
232B
BR-W·
SoW·
1st
202D
10
43
44
BL-Wt
BLt
230B
230B
6A
28A
O-Wt
Ot
230B
230B
Audible
GRD
Signal ±,BAT.,
Supply or 105V ±
45
46
V-G
G-V
20v de
Talk or
A Bat.
GRD
47
V-BR
BAT.
48
BR-V
24
G1Y
GRD
49
V-S
4A
S2BK
BAT.
50
S-V
26A
SIBK
2"lotor
Supply
1~~±
KTU
TERM.
CABLE
COLOR
CODE
KTU
TERM.
KTU
TERM.
CABLE
COLOR
CODE
BL2Y
BL1Y
TO
J8673ID
POWER PLANT
lOY
AC
~
Spare
20v de
Sig or
B Bat.
9
29
16A
29A
W
R-W
G-Wt
Gt
207C
207C
32B
29B
Y-Wt
Yt
1st
202D
16
R-Y
R
10V
AC
B:\:
B:\:
~
B:\:
39
232B
232B
230B
29
25
G2Y
20V
DC
Talk
20V
DC
Sig
G
B
G
B
• 18 Gauge - G- W Binder.
t20 Gauge-G-W Binder.
:\: Use loop through method of termination for terminals 41, 42, and 43.
.1..
I II
SECTION 518-114-432
TABLE C
302-TYPE KSU, CONNECTIONS BETWEEN
A75A CONNECTOR CABLE AND 66-TYPE CONNECTING BLOCKS
FEATURE
LEAD
DESIG
T
Line 1
R
A
Al
LG
L
T
Line 2
R
A
Al
LG
L
T
Line 3
R
A
A1
LG
L
T
Line 4
Dial
Intercom
R
A
Al
LG
L
T
R
Spare"
Dial
Intercom
LG
L
Spare"
Com
Aud
Spare-
B1 or BZl
R1 or BZ
CONN I
BL.W BINDER
TERMINATION
ON 66-TYPE
CONN BLOCK
PIN
NO.
CABLE
COLOR
26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8
34
9
35
37
12
W-BL
BL-W
WoO
O-W
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W
W-S
SoW
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R
R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-O
O-BK
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
38
13
BK-G
G-BK
17
18
39
14
BK-BR
BR-BK
40
15
BK-S
S-BK
41
16
42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24
50
25
Y-BL
BL-Y
Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
Soy
V-BL
BL-V
V-O
O-V
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V
V-S
S-V
10
36
11
ROW
BLK
COL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
19
20
5
6
A
A
CONN 2
O·W BINDER
CABLE
COLOR
26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8
34
9
35
10
36
37
12
W-BL
BL·W
W·O
O-W
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W
W-S
SoW
R-BL
BL·R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R
R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-O
O-BK
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
38
13
BK-G
G-BK
17
18
39
14
BK-BR
BR-BK
40
15
BK-S
S-BK
41
16
42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24
50
25
Y-BL
BL-Y
Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
Soy
V-BL
BL-V
V-O
11
B
B
B
A
A
TERMINATION
ON 66·TYPE
CONN BLOCK
PIN
NO.
o-v
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V
V-S
S-V
* Dead-ended and stored at connecting blocks. Connect as required.
Page 16
CONN 3
CONN 2
CONN I
ROW
BLK
COL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
19
20
7
8
A
B
CONN 3
G-W BINDER
PIN
NO.
CABLE
COLOR
26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8
34
9
35
10
36
W-BL
BL·W
WoO
O-W
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W
W-S
SoW
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R
R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
11
B
B
B
B
A
BL-B~
37
12
BK-O
O-BK
38
13
BK-G
G-BK
39
14
BK-BR
BR-BK
40
15
BK-S
S-BK
41
16
42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24
50
25
Y-BL
BL-Y
Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
Soy
V-BL
BL-V
V-O
O-V
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V
V-S
S-V
TERMINATION
ON 66·TYPE
CONN BLOCK
ROW
BLK
COL
A
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
~
23
24
17
18
B
19
20
B
C
9
10
B
A
ISS 1, SECTION S18-114-432
TABLE D
311-TYPE KSU (4-7 LINES) CONNECTIONS BETWEEN
APPARATUS AND 66-TYPE CONNECTING BLOCKS
FEATURE
LEAD
DESIGNATION
BLOCK A
66-TYPE CONNECTING BLOCK
ROW
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
Line 5
Line 6
Line 7
Manual
Intercom
Dial
Intercom
T
R
A
A1
LG
L
T
R
A
A1
LG
L
T
R
A
A1
LG
L
T
R
A
A1
LG
L
T
R
A
A1
LG
L
T
R
A
A1
LG
L
T
R
A
A1
LG
L
T
R
LG
L
T
R
LG
L
COL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
F
CABLE COLOR
BLUE BINDER
W-BL
BL-W
WoO
O-W
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W
W-S
SoW
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R
R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-O
O-BK
BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y
Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
Soy
V-BL
BL-V
V-O
O-V
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V
V-S
S-V
TERMINAL
ON
232B KTU
TERMINAL
ON
230B KTU
TERMINAL
ON
202D KTU
TERMINAL
ON
207C KTU
1A
2A
3A
4A
6A
5A
1B
2B
3B
4B
6B
5B
1C
2C
3C
4C
6C
5C
1D
2D
3D
4D
6D
5D
1
2
3
4
6
5
1
2
3
4
6
5
1
2
3
4
6
5
1st
2nd
3rd
30
40
27
28
1B
2B
32B
3B
Page 17
SECTION 518-114-432
TABLE D (Cont)
3ll-TYPE KSU (4-7 LINES) CONNECTIONS BETWE.EN
APPARATUS AND 66-TYPE CONNECTING BLOCKS
FEATURE
LEAD
DESIGNATION
BLOCK 8
66-TYPE CONNECTING BLOCK
ROW
E
0
..
Code
2
"
,:g'"
3
.
4
A
5
:E
i>:
"£
<'"
6
7
.~
8
'""
<
9
rn
~
0
Line 1
Q
'"
~
Line 2
..d
Line 3
i>:
Line 4
"0
<'"'"
Line 5
:t::
.~
rn
Line 6
'""
<
Line 7
Vacant
Page 18
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
B1 or BZ1
R1 or BZ
B1 or BZ1
R1 or BZ
B1 or BZ1
R1 or BZ
B1 or BZ1
R1 or BZ
B1 or BZ1
R1 or BZ
B1 or BZ1
R1 or BZ
B1 or BZ1
R1 or BZ
COL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
F
-
CABLE COLOR
ORANGE BINDER
W-BL
BL-W
WoO
O-W
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W
W-S
SoW
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R
R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-O
O-BK
BK-G
G-BK
~BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y
TERMINAL
ON
232B KTU
TERMINAL
ON
2308 KTU
TERMINAL
ON
202D KTU
TERMINAL
ON
207C KTU
36B
12A
36B
13A
37B
14A
37B
15A
38B
16A
38B
17A
40B
18A
40B
19A
3lB
20A
25A
lOA
25A
lOB
27A
10C
30A
10D
25
10
1st
25
10
2nd
25
10
3rd
ISS 1, SECTION 518-114-432
TABLE D (Cont)
311-TYPE KSU (4-7 LINES) CONNECTIONS BETWEEN
APPARATUS AND 66-TYPE CONNECTING BLOCKS
FEATURE
LEAD
DESIGNATION
BLOCK D
66-TYPE CONNECTING BLOCK
ROW
Line 1
UJ
~
~
Line 2
Line 3
P!l
p.
Line 4
0
0
Line 5
.
0
Line 6
Line 7
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
Spare
Vacant
See Table E For Power
Connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
COL
CABLE COLOR
ORANGE BINDER
F
y-o
o-y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
Soy
V-BL
BL-V
V-O
O-V
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V
V-S
S-V
TERMINAL
ON
230B KTU
TERMINAL
ON
202D KTU
7A
8A
7B
8B
7C
8C
7D
8D
7
8
7
8
7
8
1st
2nd
3rd
See Table E For Power
Connections
Page 19
TABLE E
311-TYPE KSU (4-7 LINES) CONNECTIONS BETWEEN APPARATUS,
66-TYPE CONNECTING BLOCK, AND POWER PLANT
CONNECTING BLOCK D
COLF
FEATURE
LEAD
DESIG
ROW ON
66-TYPE
CONN
BLOCK
CABLE
COLOR
BR-W BNDR
W-BL
BL-W
COLE
TO
KTU
TERMINAL
232B
39
29
CABLE
COLOR
BR-W BNDR
COL D
TO
KTU
TERMINAL
CABLE
COLOR
BR-W BNDR
COLA
TO
KTU
TO
TERMINAL
CABLE
COLOR
Audible
Signal
Power
Supply
GRD
±:BAT.,
or
105V ±
37
38
20v dc
Talk or
A Bat.
GRD
39
WoO
BAT.
40
O-W
GRD
41
R-BR
1st
202D
4
GRD
42
W-Y*
230B
1st
4A
S-2BK
BAT.
43
26
BL-1Y
44
BR-R
y*
202D
BAT.
230B
26A
S-lBK
GRD
45
W-BL*
1st
202D
6
GRD:J:
46
WoO·
230B
6A
R-G
232B
27
47
G-R
232B
26
20v dc
Signal
or
B Bat.
232B
25
G-2Y
24
G-1Y
J86731-D
POWER PLANT
20V
DC
Talk
G
B
BL-2Y
20V
DC
Signal
JB
R-Yt
Lamp
and
10V AC:J:
Motor
Supply ± or BAT.
± or BAT.
W-BRt
232B
9
48
BRt
232B
10
49
W-St
232B
19
BL*
202D
29
± or BAT.
50
St
232B
20
O·
230B
29A
W-G*
207C
32R
Wt
Rt
G*
207C
29B
• 20 Gauge Wire.
t 18 Gauge Wire.
:J: Motor supply must be 10 volt ac. When direct current is used for lamps move WoO from terminal 46, clip 6 to
terminal 45, clip 5 and W-BR from terminal 47, clip 6 to terminal 48, clip 5.
JG
R-Wt
Wt
1st
Rt
JG
10V
AC
],
ISS 1, SECTION 5 HI-114-432
TABLE F
3ll-TYPE KSU (9-13 LINES) CONNECTIONS BETWEEN
APPARATUS AND 66-TYPE CONNECTING BLOCKS
FEATURE
BLOCK D
66-TYPE CONNECTING
BLOCK
LEAD
DESIGNATION
ROW
T
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
R
A
Al
LG
L
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
T
Line 5
Line 6
Line 7
R
A
Al
LG
L
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
T
Line 8
Spare
R
A
Al
LG
L
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
COL
CABLE COLOR
BLUE BINDER
F
W-BL
BL-W
WoO
O-W
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W
W-S
S-W
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R
R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-O
O-BK
BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-'
Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y
V-BL
BL-V
V-O
O-V
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V
V-S
S-V
TERMINAL
ON
238A KTU
lA
2A
3A
4A
6A
5A
31A
32A
33A
34A
36A
35A
1B
2B
3B
4B
6B
5B
3lB
32B
33B
34B
36B
35B
IC
2C
3C
4C
6C
5C
31C
32C
33C
34C
36C
35C
ID
2D
3D
4D
6D
5D
31D
32D
33D
34D
36D
35D
Page 21
SECTION 518-114-432
TABLE F (Cont)
311-TYPE KSU(9-13 LINES) CONNECTIONS BETWEEN
APPARATUS AND 66-TYPE CONNECTING BLOCKS
FEATURE
BLOCK B
66-TYPE CONNECTING
BLOCK
LEAD
DESIGNATION
ROW
T
Line 9
R
A
Al
LG
L
T
Line 10
R
A
Al
LG
L
T
Line 11
R
A
Al
LG
L
T
Line 12
R
A
Al
LG
L
T
Line 13
Dial
Intercom
S
0
""
Code
3
;5'"
4
:$
5
;§
6
~
~
"0
-<'"'"
.~
'"
-<"
7
8
9
'tl
0
Page 22
R
A
Al
LG
L
T
R
LG
L
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
COL
CABLE COLOR
ORANGE BINDER
F
W-BL
BL-W
W-O
O-W
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W
W-S
S-W
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R
R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-O
O-BK
BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y
Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y
V-BL
BL-V
V-O
O-V
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V
V-S
S-V
TERMINAL
ON
238A KTU
TERMINAL
ON
230B KTU
TERMINAL
ON
207C KTU
TERMINAL
ON
216A KTU
IE
2E
3E
4E
6E
5E
lA
2A
3A
4A
6A
5A
1B
2B
3B
4B
6B
5B
lC
2C
3C
4C
6C
5C
10
2D
3D
4D
6D
5D
1B
2B
32B
3B
36B
13
36B
14
37B
15
37B
16
38B
17
38B
18
40B
19
40B
20
ISS 1, SECTION 518-114-432
TABLE F (Cont)
311-TYPE KSU (9-13 LINES) CONNECTIONS BETWEEN
APPARATUS AND 66-TYPE CONNECTING BLOCKS
FEATURE
BLOCK C
66-TYPE CONNECTING
BLOCK
LEAD
DESIGNATION
ROW
Code
21
S
0
22
]
~
23
I:!
~
.,.,"0
-<
.~
00
24
25
26
27
28
't:!
~
29
20
Line 1
Line 2
..
;l;l
Line 3
Line 4
0
.13'"
Line 5
;§
Line 6
...:l
~
.-----O
0---0
2A
12A
22A
32A
15A
25A
0---0
35A
13A
23A
22B
5B
33A
25B
3B
35B
C>----O
13B
23B
0---0
0----0
32B
0----0
15B
0---0
0----0
0---0
C>----O
12B
0---0
C>----O
0---0
2B
33B
0----0
0---0
2C
22C
15C
25C
0---0
3C
32C
2D
C>----O
0---0
5C
0---0
C>----O
12C
13C
23C
22D
0---0
5D
35C
33C
3D
25D
35D
C>----O
13D
23D
33D
0----0
0---0
0----0
32D
C>----O
15D
0---0
0----0
0---0
C>----O
12D
7E
8E
17E
34E
1E
HE
0---0
2E
12E
0---0
5E
15E
0---0
3E
LEAD
DESIG
9"
CKT
13E
0---0
T
CO or
RI PBX Line
Line Ringing
H
T
R
Station
L
A
J
20A
40A
20B
40B
20C
40C
20D
40D
20E
K
18A
38A
18B
3SB
18C
38C
18D
38D
18E
Audible
Signal
L
19A
39A
19B
39B
19C
39C
19D
39D
19E
10F
40E
Lamp Wink
Lamp Flash
P
6F
36E
9A
7F
37E
9B
8F
38E
9C
9F
39E
9D
y
lOA
10B
10C
10D
M
N
Q
4A
R
6A
14A
24A
34A
4B
14B
24B
34B
4C
14C
24C
34C
4D
14D
24D
34D
4E
9E
Grd
10E
Bat.
14E
0---0
16A
26A
36A
6B
16B
26B
36B
6C
16C
26C
36C
6D
16D
26D
36D
6E
16E
0---0
S
29A
29B
29C
29D
T
30A, 16F
30B,17F
30C,18F
30D,19F
A1
Station
LG
29E
Grd
30E,20F
±Ol
LB
U
1G
llG
21G
HA
V
2G
12G
22G
TO
W
3G
13G
23G
X
4G
14G
24G
0--0
Indicates Factory Strapping.
Relay
Power
Supply
Lamp
Power
Supply
Time-out
CO
LK
ISS 1, SECTION S18-114-432
TABLE I
310- OR 311-TYPE KSU (9 TO 13 LINES)
230B KTU
REF
DESIG
A
B
C
D
CKT 1 (10)"
TERMINAL ON 230B KTU
CKT 2 (II)"
CKT 3 (12)"
CKT 4 (13)"
7B
8B
17B
18B
1B
11B
7D
8D
17D
18D
1D
11D
E
7A
8A
17A
18A
1A
11A
0---0
0---0
0---0
0---0
F
2A
2B
2C
2D
0---0
0---0
0---0
0---0
G
5A
5B
5C
5D
0---0
0---0
0---0
0---0
H
3A
3B
3C
3D
12A
15A
13A
0---0
12B
15B
13B
0----0
7C
8C
17C
18C
1C 11C
12C
15C
13C
0---0
12D
15D
13D
0---0
J
9A
9B
9C
9D
L
M
lOA
20A
lOB
20B
10C
20C
lOD
20D
N
19A
19B
19C
19D
Q
4A
6A
4B
6B
4C
6C
4D
6D
R
29A
T
* Number
o
0
28A
LEAD
DESIG
T
CO or
R
PBX Line
Line Ringing
H
T
R
Station
L
A
Audible
Signal
Lamp Wink
Lamp Flash
A1
LG
± or
Bat.
Station
Lamp Pwr
Supply
in parenthesis denotes circuit in package.
Indicates Factory Strapping.
Page 27
SECTION 518-114-432
TABLE J
2301-TYPE KSU CONNECTIONS BETWEEN APPARATUS
AND 66-TYPE CONNECTING BLOCKS
FEATURE
BLOCK A
66Bl.25
CONNECTING BLOCK
LEAD
DESIG
ROW
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
Line 5
Line 6
Motor
Supply
T
R
A
A1
LG
L
T
R
A
A1
LG
L
T
R
A
A1
LG
L
T
R
A
A1
LG
L
T
R
A
A1
LG
L
T
R
A
A1
LG
L
GRD
10v -+-
Spare
Lamp
Supply
± or BAT.
± or BAT.
GRD
-+- or BAT.
GRD
BAT., ±, or
105V -+-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41:j:
42:j:
43
44:j:
COL
F
CABLE COLOR
BLUE BINDER
W-BL
BL-W
WoO
O-W
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W
W-S
SoW
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R
R-BR
BR"R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-O
O-BK
BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y
Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y'BR
BR~Y
Y-S
Soy
V-BL
BL-V
V-O
O·V
TERMINAL
ON
232A OR B
KTU'
TERMINAL
ON KTU
230A
230Bt
TERMINAL
ON
202C OR D
KTU
TERMINAL
ON
207C KTU
1A
2A
3A
4A
6A
5A
1B
2B
3B
4B
6B
5B
1C
2C
3C
4C
6C
5C
1D
2D
3D
4D
6D
5D
1
~
3
4
6
5
1
1st
--;;--
~
3
4
2nd
----s5
27
26
9
10
30A
29A
6A
29A
Audible
45
25A
30A
V-G
Signal
46
29
q-v
Supply
20v dc
GRD
47
25
V-BR
Talk or
BAT.
48
24
BR-V
A Bat.
20v dc
26A
26A
49
GRD
V-S
Sig or
4A
27A
BAT.
50
S-V
B Bat.
• 232B KTU IS arranged mternally to dIsable time-out feature when BF relay IS operated.
t 230B KTU is arranged for individual fusing of circuits 1-2 and 3-4 lamp input power.
:j: With 1 to 72 lamps, strap terminals 41, 42, and 44; with 73 to 144 lamps, strap terminals 42 and 44 and run
separate power lead to 41.
Page 28
ISS I, SECTION 5111.. 114-432
(TABLE J (Cont)
2301-TYPE KSU CONNECTIONS BETWEEN APPARATUS
AND 66-TYPE CONNECTING BLOCKS
FEATURE
BLOCK A
66BI-25
CONNECTING BLOCK
LEAD
DESIG
ROW
Manual
Intercom
Line
Line 1
'"
Line 2
0::
.!:!J
'"
.$
Line 3
:9
Line 4
<"
Line 5
."
Line 6
Dial
Selective
Intercom
Line
Line 1
t-<
~
Line 2
Po.
Line 3
0
0
Line 4
...0
Line 5
Line 6
T
R
LG
L
B1 or BZ1
R1 or BZ
B1 or BZ1
R1 or BZ
B1 or BZ1
R1 or BZ
B1 or BZ1
R1 or BZ
B1 or BZ1
R1 or B7
B1 or BZ1
R1 or BZ
T
R
LG
L
B(2)
R(2)
B(3)
R(3)
B(4)
R(4)
B(5)
R(5)
B(6)
R(6)
B(7)
R(7)
B(8)
R(8)
B(9)
R(9)
B(O)
R(O)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
COL
F
CABLE COLOR
ORANGE BINDER
W-BL
BL-W
WoO
O-W
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W
W-S
SoW
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R
R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-O
O-BK
BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y
Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
Soy
V-BL
BL-V
V-O
O-V
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V
V-S
S-V
TERMINAL
ON
232A OR B
KTU'
TERMINAL
ON KTU
230A
i230Bt
TERMINAL
ON
202C OR D
KTU
TERMINAL
ON
207C KTU
30
40
*
28
I
30A
25A
lOA
10A
25A
lOB
28A 130A
10C
10C
28A
25A
10D
10D
I
25
10
25
10
1st
2nd
1B
2B
32B
3B
36B
12A
36B
13A
37B
14A
37B
15A
38B
16A
38B
17A
40B
18A
40B
19A
31:S-20A
7A
8A
7B
8B
7C
8C
7D
8D
7
8
7
8
1st
2nd
* Connect to convenient lamp ground.
Page 29
SECTION 518-114-432
TABLE K
2311-TYPE KSU-CONNECTIONS
FEATURE
BLOCK A
66BI-25
CONNECTING BLOCK
LEAD
DESIG
ROW
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
Line 5
Line 6
Line 7
Manual
Intercom
Line
Dial
Selective
Intercom
Line
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
T
R
A
A1
LG
L
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
T
R
A
A1
LG
L
T
R
A
A1
LG
L
T
R
A
A1
LG
L
T
R
A
A1
LG
L
T
R
LG
L
T
R
LG
L
COL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
F
CABLE COLOR
BLUE BINDER
W-BL
BL-W
WoO
O-W
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W
W-S
SoW
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R
R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-O
O-BK
BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y
Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
Soy
V-BL
BL-V
V-O
O-V
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V
V-S
S-V
TERMINAL
ON
232AOR B
KTU'
TERMINAL
ON
230A OR B
KTUt
TERMINAL
ON
207C KTU
lA
2A
3A
4A
6A
5A
lB
2B
3B
4B
6B
5B
1C
2C
3C
4C
6C
5C
1D
2D
3D
4D
6D
5D
1
2
3
4
6
5
1
2
3
4
6
5
1
2
3
4
6
5
1st
2nd
3rd
30
40
27
28
* 232B KTU is arranged internally to disable time-out feature when BF relay is operated.
t 230B KTU is arranged for individual fusing of circuits 1-2 and 3-4 lamp input power.
Page 30
TERMINAL
ON
202C OR D
KTU
1B
2B
32B
3B
ISS 1, SECTION 518-114-432
TABLE K (Cont)
2311·TYPE KSU BLOCK B
66BI.25
CONNECTING BLOCK
LEAD
DESIG
FEATURE
ROW
Audible
Signal
Associated
With
Dial
Selective
Intercom
Line
Line
1
Line
2
Line
3
Line
<>
4
0
Line
«:"'"'
5
.~
Line
rIl
6
Line
«:
7
Line
1
Line
2
Line
~
3
III
Po.
Line
....
4
0
0
Line
Q
5
Line
6
Line
7
Ringing
Supply'
Local
Ground
!l
"'"
Q
~
~
""'"
B(2)
R(2)
B(3)
R(3)
B(4)
R(4)
B(5)
R(5)
B(6)
R(6)
B(7)
R(7)
B(8)
R(8)
B(9)
R(9)
B(O)
R(O)
B1 or BZ1
R1 or BZ
B1 or BZ1
R1 or BZ
B1 or BZ1
R1 or BZ
B1 or BZ1
R1 or BZ
B1 or BZ1
R1 or BZ
B1 or BZ1
R1 or BZ
B1 or BZ1
R1 or BZ
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
GRD
105V -+GRD
GRD
CONNECTIONS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
COL
F
CABLE COLOR
ORANGE BINDER
W-BL
BL-W
WoO
O-W
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W
W-S
SoW
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R
R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-O
O-BK
BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y
Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
Soy
V-BL
BL-V
V-O
O-V
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V
YoSt
S-Vt
TERMINAL
ON
232A OR B
KTU
TERMINAL
ON KTU
230A
I 230B
TERMINAL
ON
202C OR D
KTU
TERMINAL
ON
207 KTU
36B
12A
36B
13A
37B
14A
37B
15A
38B
16A
38B
17A
40B
18A
40B
19A
31B
20A
25A 130A
lOA
10A
25A
lOB
25A
10C
28A 130A
10D
10D
25
10
25
10
25
10
1st
2nd
3rd
7A
8A
7B
8B
7C
8C
7D
8D
7
8
7
8
7
8
29
1st
2nd
3rd
28A 130A
• Do not mount ringing supply (frequency-generator) in cabinet with equipment, due to noise difficulties.
t Connect
to ground terminal on J86731D, List 1 power plant.
Page 31
31 Page~
SECTION 518-215-100
Issue 6, March 1977
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT & TCo Standard
REFERENCE
1A2 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
IDENTIFICATION AND ARRANGEMENTS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
PAGE
PAGE
POWER SUPPLY
10
LIMITATIONS
14
ARRANGEMENTS
15
1.
GENERAL
2.
IDENTIFICATION
3
FEATURES
3
A.
Pickup and Hold
3
B.
Visual Signals
3
C.
Audible Signals
4
D.
Intercom
4
E.
Private Lines
5
F.
Add-On Conferencing
5
G.
Exclusion
6
H.
Station Restriction
6
• Add information on KTUs introduced since
the last issue: 400G, 471A, 478B, and 479A
I.
Music-on-Hold
6
• Add above-listed KTUs to Table A
J.
Speakerphone
6
• Add 626A panel to Table C
K.
Toll Restriction
6
• Add 215B1 power unit to Table E
STATION APPARATUS
6
MESSAGE WAITING (MW) CONSOLES
6
• Expand Part 2 to incude information on
features of 1A2 KTS (audible signals,
intercom, toll restriction, 6B1 and 7B1
Message Waiting consoles)
A.
6B 1 Selector Console
6
B.
7B 1 Selector Console
6
3.
1.
GENERAL
The 1A2 KTS enables key stations to connect
to anyone of a number of central office
(CO), PBX, private, or intercom lines by the
operation of an associated pickup key. The capacity
of any station is determined by the number of
buttons available for pickup, switching, or signaling
purposes.
1.01
1.02
KEY TELEPHONE UNITS
6
MOUNTING FACILITIES
7
This section is reissued to:
• Show 400D KTU rated MD and replaced by
the 400G
• Show 414A KTU rerated from AT&TCo
Standard to Additions and Maintenance Only
(A&M Only)
NOTICE
Not for use or disclosure outside the
Ben System except under written agreement
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
SECTION 518-215-100
SD-69552, Issue 4-412A KTU
• Show 440A KTU rated MD and replaced by
the 478B
SD-69559, Issue 9-414A (A&M) Only, 415A,
416A, 418A, 419A, 461A, and 469A KTUs
• Revise Fig. 5 and 6.
The lA2 System features miniature 400-series
KTUs which consist of miniature relays and
solid state circuitry assembled on plug-in type
printed wiring boards. Service features are similar
to those of the lAI System. However, the line
circuits of the lA2 System are arranged for time-out
of locked-in visual and audible signals on a per
line basis rather than on a system basis.
SD-69561, Issue 2-417A KTU
1.03
SD-69567, Issue 14-407B (MD), 407C, 420A,
422B, 423A, 423B (MD), 424A (MD), 424C,
and 476A KTUs
SD-69590, Issue 2-413A, 421A, 448A, and
449A KTUs
The 400-series KTUs are designed and
manufactured to insure reliable operation
and good service with extended useful life. Improper
or careless handling can result in damaged units.
Exercise care when handling, storing, and shipping
KTUs to avoid accidental damage to delicate
components. These units are shipped in a reusable
blister pack.
SD-69595, Issue 8-426A, 427B (MD), and
427C KTUs
1.04
.SD-69651, Issue 1-400G KTU.
SD-69906, Issue 2-44OA (MD) KTU
SD-69917, Issue 1-467A KTU
Always use the blister pack or other
suitable container when transporting
or storing the KTUs. Overpack when
necessary.
.SD-69921, Issue 1-471A, 479A KTUs.
SD-69922, Issue 1-451B KTU
.SD-69931, Issue 2-478B KTU.
A large or centralized installation of a lA2
KTS should, where practical, make use of
the connecting block arrangement described in
Section 518-010-101.
1.05
1.06
Packaged lA2 KTS: The COM KEY*
718, 1434, and 2152 Systems, which combine
lA2 equipment with specially designed KTU s, key
telephones and consoles, are not covered in this
practice. Refer to Sections 518-450-100, -102, and
-110 for information on these systems.
If this section is to be used with equipment or
apparatus reflecting later issues of the drawings,
reference should be made to the CDs and SDs to
determine the extent of the changes and the
manner in which the section may be affected.
For detailed information on specified KTS
equipment and apparatus, refer to the
following sections:
1.08
518-215-400-Line Service KTUs
'Trademark
518-215-401-Auxiliary Service KTUs
1.07
This issue of the section is based on the
following drawings:
518-215-402-Intercom Service KTUs
SD-69475, Issue 6-40lA KTU
518-215-403-Control Service KTUs
SD-69489, Issue 5-428A KTU
.518-215-404-501-, 502-Type KSUs.
SD-69513, Issue 15-400B (MD), 400C (MD),
and 400D (MD) KTU
518-215-405-513-, 514-, 515-Type KSUs
.518-215-407-550-, 551-Type KSUs.
SD-69530, Issue 6-429A (MD), 429B and
430A KTUs
Page 2
518-215-410-583-, 584-Type Panels
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-100
2.
518-215-417 -597-, 598-Type Panels
• Station restriction
518-215-418-601-, 602-, 603-Type Panels
• Music-on-hold
518-215-419-620A, 641A, and 642A Modular
Panels
• Speakerphone
518-215-420-69-Type Apparatus Mountings
• .Toll Restriction (battery reversal or rotary
dial)
• 518-215-421-626A Modular Panel.
• 6B1 and 7B1 Message Waiting (MW) consoles .•
IDENTIFICATION
2.01
A 1A2 KTS consists of the following:
(a) Key telephone sets and/or non key telephone
sets (with or without separately mounted
keys) capable of A lead control.
A.
Pickup and Hold
Pickup of more than one line at a station
is the basic feature of a key system. Any
line appearing at a station can be selected by
operating the button assigned to that line.
2.03
The hold feature permits a station to hold
a line while using another line. Depressing
the hold key connects a resistive holding bridge
across the line and releases the station user from
that line.
2.04
(b) 400-series KTUs providing switching and
control features.
(c) KSUs, panels, and apparatus mountings,
featuring prewired connectors that provide
the mounting and connecting facilities for the
400-series KTUs.
Supplementary Hold
In addition to normal hold, as explained in
2.04, the system may be equipped for
supplementary hold which provides a special lamp
flutter indication. Supplementary hold is provided
by two methods:
2.05
(d) Local power supply for talking, audible signal,
lamp and relay operation.
(e) Miscellaneous components as required: cabling,
distribution terminals, adapters, fasteners,
and supplemental apparatus cabinets or relay
racks.
• Priority hold in which all appearances of
a line receive the flutter indication.
• I hold in which the flutter indication is
received only at the station initiating the
hold.
FEATURES
2.02
The 1A2 KTS provides the following features:
• Pickup and hold on CO or PBX lines
• Visual signals
• Audible signals
• .Intercom (Rotary or TOUCH-TONE@ dialing,
voice signaling on manual intercom, and
HFAI on dial intercom).
Priority hold serves to alert personnel
that an incoming call has been answered
(acknowledged only), placed on hold, and should
be completed as soon as the first available attendant
is able to do so. I hold enables an attendant
having access to a number of lines to readily
determine which lines have been placed on hold
by the attendant.
2.06
B.
Visual Signals
• Private lines
Visual signals may be provided by lamps
associated with pickup keys of key telephone
sets or separately mounted keys, or by separately
mounted lamp indicators.
2.07
• Add-on conferencing
• Exclusion
Page 3
SECTION 518-215-100
2.08
The 1A2 KTS provides the following visual
line signals at stations:
• Steady lamp for line busy
suppress audible alerting signals on a line or lines
associated with a multibutton telephone set when
that station is in an off-hook condition. Section
518-215-403 provides a detailed description of audible
signal suppression .•
• Flashing lamp for an incoming call
Multistation CO Line Ringing:
CO
ringing on a given line may be provided at
more than one station in a 1A2 KTS. So, in addition
to the common audible ringing at the attendant
station, other stations can be wired to ring on
incoming CO calls. This feature is extremely
flexible and can be arranged to fit the customer's
specific needs.
2.14
• Steady or winking lamp for normal hold
• Flutter lamp for "priority hold" or "I hold."
Station Busy Lamp: This feature is a
function of the switchhook in the telephone
set. When the handset is off-hook at a station so
equipped, a visual signal is received at a subordinate
station or stations. This signal alerts the subordinate
station(s) that the master station is off-hook and
all incoming calls for the master station should be
intercepted.
2.09
2.10
Fuse and Line Status Indicators:
Indicator type fuses give a visual indication
of fuse status in the KSU. A line status lamp
located in the KSU is dedicated to each CO/PBX
and intercom line and shows the status of the
associated line. This latter feature is available
only with 600-series modular panels.
C.
Audible Signals
Three types of audible signals are available
with the basic 1A2 KTS: ringers, bells,
and/or buzzers. They may be arranged for steady
or interrupted operation. Ringers and buzzers can
be located in the telephone set or external to it;
bells are mounted externally. A station may be
equipped with more than one audible signal, depending
on services and features required.
2.11
Common Audible Signaling: This feature
provides for the use of one signaling device
for indicating incoming calls on any of several lines.
In a typical installation, one station may be designated
as the attendant position, which will be equipped
with common audible signaling; all incoming calls
will ring the attendant position and be answered
there. Common audible signaling is flexible and
can be arranged in various combinations of lines
to ringers by the use of diode matrices. Section
518-010-108 contains a detailed description of common
audible signaling.
2.12
2.13
tAudible Signal Suppression: This
feature provides a circuit arrangement to
Page 4
Ringing Control: Audible signals may
also be controlled by delayed or immediate
transfer control circuits. The delayed transfer
control circuit allows an audible signal to sound
for a predetermined interval, then transfers it to
an attendant station when the control circuit times
out. The immediate transfer circuit is controlled
by a key. When the key is operated, ringing is
automatically transferred to an attendant station.
2.15
Power Failure Transfer: When local
commercial power supplying the KTS fails,
local ringing on CO lines cannot continue. The
power failure transfer feature automatically substitutes
an external signaling device, operated by CO line
ringing current, for the station ringer on a selected
line. This allows incoming calls to be recognized
and answered while commercial power is down.
External ringers are installed on a per-line basis.
2.16
D.
Intercom
An intercom line circuit allows two or more
stations, usually located on the same premises,
to converse with each other over a common talking
path, without the use of a CO or PBX line. tHF AI
can be furnished on manual or dial intercoms using
adjuncts. This feature allows the called party to
answer an intercom call without going off-hook.
See Section 518-010-115 for detailed information .•
2.17
2.18
Two types of intercom lines are available:
(a) Manual: Where all stations (on pickup)
are connected to a common talking path.
Station selection is done manually by the use of
push buttons and buzzers. A visual signal can
be provided at each station to indicate a busy
condition. tVoice Signaling on manual intercom
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-100
can be provided by using a 107B loudspeaker
set.
See Section 518-010-109 for detailed
information .•
of signaling from one end to the other.
lines available are:
(a) Arranged for 2-way manual signaling by use
of ringdown private line circuits at each
end.
(b) Dial:
Where a station (on pickup) is
connected to a common talking path which
is part of a 10- or 19-code selector circuit.
Station selection is accomplished by dialing one
or two digits. The selector provides rotary dial
station selection, a steady visual signal at all
stations to indicate the selector is busy, single
spurt ringing, and control circuits for additional
features as detailed in 2.19.
2.19
Private
(b) Arranged for signaling automatically from
either end when the handset is lifted by
the use of automatic dc signaling private line
circuits at each end.
(c) Arranged to provide manual signaling in
one direction and automatic signaling in the
other by use of a manual signaling, ringdown
line circuit at one location and an automatic
signaling, ringdown private circuit at the other.
The following optional features can be added
to the basic dial selector circuit:
• TOUCH-TONE calling
(d) A line, usually between two telephone sets
located on the same premises, provided by
the use of a station line circuit or a short range,
private line circuit. The station line circuit is
arranged for manual signaling in one direction
and automatic signaling in the other. Simple
strapping changes to the short range private line
circuit can provide automatic signaling in both
directions, one-way automatic signaling, one-way
manual signaling, or manual signaling in both
directions. These lines differ from those described
in (a), (b) and (c) in that both ends of the
private line terminate at the same KTU.
• Flashing lamps at called station
• Interrupted ringing instead of adjustable
single spurt
• Direct station selection or signaling by means
of a pushbutton instead of dialing
• Long line circuit
• Add-on conferencing
• Preset conferencing by means of a dial code
or pushbutton signaling
Note: Manual signaling is done by the use
of pushbuttons. Pickup keys of some key
telephone sets can be modified for use as
pushbuttons, or externally mounted keys can
be used. An example of the latter is a 551A
key mounted on a 77A bracket.
• Dial tone
• Audible ringback tone
• Station busy tone
• tHands-Free Answering on Intercom (HFAI) .•
F.
Add-On Conferencing
Add-on conferencing enables a station to
.
bridge two lines for a 3-way conference
without the assistance of an operator. An exclusion
or nonlocking key is required to control the
conference circuit. A visual signal may also be
provided to indicate the conference circuit is in
operation.
2.22
E.
Private Lines
Private lines provide direct communication
between two points without the need of a
CO or PBX line. With one or two exceptions, KTS
private lines require similar or equivalent private
line apparatus at both ends.
2.20
2.23
A number of private lines are available for
the 1A2 KTS. The lines differ only in the
type of terminating apparatus used and the means
2.21
Three different conference arrangements
can be provided:
(1) A CO line and a PBX line
Page 5
SECTION 518-215-100
(2) Two PBX lines or two CO lines
suitable telephone set. (BSP Division 512 contains
detailed information on speakerphone connections.)
(3) A CO or PBX line and an intercom line.
K.
G.
.Toll Restriction
Exclusion
2.30
A control station can exclude any subordinate
station from the line when privacy is desired.
Two types of exclusion are available with the 1A2
KTS: that which is a function of some telephone
sets, and that which requires a key telephone unit.
2.24
Single-line exclusion is provided by the
exclusion key which is part of the switchhook
assembly of some telephone sets. By manually
pulling up the plunger, subordinate stations are
excluded from the line and are automatically
reconnected to the line by restoring the plunger
or placing the handset on-hook.
2.25
Multiline exclusion permits control station
to exclude subordinate stations from more
than one line appearing at that station. One control
key can provide control for as many exclusion
circuits as are required at a control station. By
manually operating the control key, subordinate
stations are automatically excluded from an equipped
line to which the control station is connected. As
an optional feature, a visual signal, usually associated
with the control key, can be provided to indicate
exclusion is in use. Excluded stations are automatically
reconnected to the line when the control station
disconnects, either by hanging up or putting the
line on hold.
2.26
Battery Reversal Toll Restriction:
This feature disallows toll calls from restricted
stations but allows calls from unrestricted stations.
This feature can only be used with CO circuits
that provide a polarity reversal on the tip and ring
of the line on toll calls.
2.31
Rotary Dial Toll Restriction: This
feature provides toll restriction on rotary
dial lines where CO toll diversion is not available.
This rotary dial toll restriction circuit may be
optionally provided with "piggy-back" circuit modules
to provide digit absorption or to allow restricted
stations to call foreign number plan areas. May
be used for either loop-start or ground-start
operation, with ground start providing the most
security against nonallowed calls being placed.•
STATION APPARATUS
2.32
Generally, common battery telephone sets,
with or without keys, capable of providing
A lead control, may be used with 1A2 KTS.
Station apparatus may also include separately
mounted keys and the station portion of 4A, 5-type,
and 101-type key equipment.
.MESSAGE WAITING (MW) CONSOLES
A.
H.
6B 1 Selector Console
Station Restriction
2.33
Individual key stations can be restricted from
making outgoing CO or PBX calls. The
restricted stations may have intercom line access
and can receive calls but cannot break dial tone
or tone address if outgoing nonintercom calls are
attempted.
2.27
I.
An 18-station selection MW console with
station busy (SB) lamps incorporated in the
MW buttons.
B.
2.34
7B 1 Selector Console
A 34-station selection MW console with SB
lamps incorporated in the MW buttons.•
Music-on-Hold
KEY TELEPHONE UNITS
This feature transmits music from a
customer-provided music source to calling
parties on CO/PBX lines that are placed on hold.
2.28
J.
Speakerphone
2.29
Page 6
Normal speakerphone service may be provided
at any 1A2 KTS station equipped with a
2.35
The 400-series KTUs feature miniature
relays, transistors, diodes, etc, mounted,
except as noted, on 4- or 8-inch plug-in printed
wiring boards. All circuitry to the KTUs is carried
through contacts on the plug end of the unit.
Depending on the type KTU, there are 18, 20, or
40 .contacts on the 4-inch board and 80 contacts on
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215- 100
the S-inch board. The 1S- and 20-co ntact boards
have contacts on one side of t he moun t ing surface
only; the 40- and SO-contact boards have co ntacts
on both sides of the mounting surface.
Note: Contacts are numbered star t ing with
0, ie, 0-17, 0-19 or 0-39. On S- in ch boa rd s
the upper a nd lower (A and B) co ntacts are
eac h numbered 0-39.
Fig. 1 and 2 ar e representative of 4- and S-inch
printed wiring boards.
Fig . 2 - Typical 8-lnch 80-Contact 400-Series KTU
(b) Th e 41 2A KTU (auxiliary lamp relay circui t)
plugs into the sam e receptacle (KS-S5S6, Li st
32 co nnector) as the KS-1 5900, List 1 interrupter.
This unit is designed for use in panels at large
installations of 1A2 KTS apparatus whe re it is
desired to have a ll lamp function s of the system
synch ro ni zed.
Table A li sts t he 400-se ri es KT Us, their
functions, size, and number of co ntacts.
Identification information on each KTU is covered
in Section s 51S-215-400, -401, -402, and -403.
2 .38
Fig . I - Typical 4-lnch 20- or 40-Contact 400-Series
KTU
MOUNTING FACILITIES
Where practical, t he 11 co mmon leads, such
as battery a nd ground, inte rrupte r sta r t (ST),
lamp flash (LF ), lamp wi nk (LW ), etc, a re wired
to the same numbered contact on each KT U. This
minimizes the amoun t of strapping req uired when
add ing a KTU to a sys tem or changing from one
KTU to another.
2.36
Prewired 900-se ri es co nn ectors a re used to
provide t he mounting facilities for 400-seri es
KTUs. Connecto rs current ly in use a re:
2 .39
• 906C (IS-pin)
• 913A (20-pin )
2.37
Two KTU s in th e 400 se ries have nonsta nd a rd
con nectors:
(a) The 402A KTU (d iod e matri x) is not a plug-in
type unit. It is designed for screw moun ting
on the lower part of the 31A apparatus mounting
of a 501- or 502-ty pe KSU.
• 914A (40-pi n).
Th e 913A a nd 914 A con nectors are identical
in size, but differ in t hat the 913A con necto r
has onl y one row of 20 contacts (pins) whil e t he
914A co nn ector has two rows of 20 contacts (pi ns).
2 .40
Page 7
SECTION 518-215-100
HABLE A4I
400 SERIES KTU'S
KTU
CIRCUIT FUNCTION
SIZE
(IN.)
CONTACTS
QUANTITY
400B(MD)
400C (MD)
400D(MD)
400G
CO or PBX Line
4
18
1 per line
401A
Manual Intercom Line
4
18
As required
402A
Diode Matrix for Common
Audible Signal Control
404A
Diode Matrix for Common
Audible Signal Control
4
18
1 per 6 lines and 12 signals or
vice versa
405A(MD)
Multiline Exclusion
4·
20
1 per 2 lines
406A(MD)
Supplementary Hold Detector
4
18
1 per 2 lines or stations
407B(MD)
407C
Dial Intercom 10·Code Selector
8
80
1 per intercom system
408A(MD)
Flutter Generator
4
18
1 per 100 lamps and 20
supplementary and/or
regular hold keys
412A
Auxiliary Lamp Relay
413A
Auxiliary Ringup
4
18
414A
(A&M Only)
Man Sig, Ringdown Priv Line
4
20
415A
Automatic, DC Sig, Priv Line
4
18
416A
Station Line
4
20
1 per line
417A
Add-On Conference
4
40
1 per conference circuit
418A
Short Range, DC Sig, Priv Line
4
20
1 per line
419A
Automatic Signaling
Ringdown Private Line
8
80
2 per line (1 at originating end;
1 at terminating end *)
420A
Dial Intercom Long Line
4
18
1 per off-premise line
421A
Power Failure Transfer
Gen Purpose Relay, DSS, or
Audible Sig Suppression
4
40
422B
Station Busy Selector
4
40
Page 8
Not plug-in type
KTU; mounts on
501 or 502 KSU
Special - Requires
a KS-8586, L32
Connector
1 per 4 lines and 6 signals or
vice versa
Used in place of interrupter
for LW and LF functions
As required
2 per line (1 at originating end;
1 at terminating end *)
1 per com aud transfers
1 per DSS code
1 per ringer or buzzer or as
required
1 per 10-code intercom
2 per 19·code intercom
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-100
.TABLE A (Conti.
400 SERIES KTU'S
KTU
CIRCUIT FUNCTION
SIZE
UN.l
CONTACTS
QUANTITY
423A
Dial Tone, Busy Tone, and
Audible Ringback Tone
4
20
1 per intercom system (not
for use in modular panels)
424A(MD)
424C
Dial In tercom 19·Code
Selector
8
80
1 per intercom system
425B
Fiashing Lamp
8
80
1 per intercom system
426A
and
427B(MD)
(Series 4)
orC
8
80
TOUCH·TONE Adapter
428A
1 of each required per
intercom system
8
80
Multiline Exclusion
4
40
1 per 2 lines
429A(MD)
429B
Supplementary Hold Detector
4
40
1 per 2 lines or stations
430A
Flutter Generator
4
20
1 per 100 lamps and 20 supple·
mentary and/or reg hold keys
440A(MD)
TOUCH·TONE Adapter
8
80
1 per intercom system
448A
Delayed Transfer Control
4
40
1 per 2 lines
449A
Immediate Transfer Control
4
40
1 per 2 lines
451B
Music·on·Hold
4
40
1 per 1A2 System
461A
Manual Signaling, Ringdown
Private Line
4
18
2 per line (1 at originating
end; 1 at terminating end*)
467A
Low·Voltage Monitor
4
18
1 per system
469A
Lamp Driver
4
18
1 per line per each 20 excess
lamps
470A
External Signal
4
20
1 per 2 lines requiring external
signaling
471A
Battery Reversal
Toll Restriction
4
18
1 per CO line
4
20
476A
Dial Tone, Busy Tone, and
Audible Ringback Tone
1 per intercom system (for use
in 642A modular panel)
478B
TOUCH·TONE Adapter
8
80
1 per intercom system
479A
Rot. Dial Toll Restriction
8
20
1 per CO line
* Terminating end must be a similar or equivalent tie line unit.
Page 9
SECTION 518-215-100
Due to the common. lead configuration, as
explained in 2.36, a 4-inch KTU can be
plugged into a connector having the same or larger
number of pins than the KTU has contacts. For
example, a 4-inch, 18-contact KTU can be plugged
into an 18-, 20-, or 40-pin connector, etc.' However,
in some cases a 4-inch, 40-contact KTU can be
plugged into a 20-pin connector for limited use.
FQr example, the 421A KTU is a 4-inch, 40-contact
KTU featuring a relay having six sets of transfer
contacts. When mated with a 20-pin connector,
only two sets of transfer contacts can be used.
An 8-inch, 80-contact KTU requires two 40-pin
connectors mounted in a vertical plane; the only
exception is the 419A KTU which can be plugged
into a 69B apparatus mounting which has two 20-pin
connectors mounted in a vertical plane.
2.41
400-series KTUs require an "A" battery (talk)
voltage range of 18 to 26 volts dc and a "B" battery
(signal) range of 20 to 26 volts dc for satisfactory
circuit and transistor operation.
The 467A KTU is available to monitor the
-24 volt dc supply. When the -24 volt dc
supply drops below a predetermined level (-19
volts), a latching circuit operates to turn on a light
emitting diode (LED) located on the handle of the
KTU. The level is factory set at 19 volts but is
adjustable between 17 and 21 volts. This serves
as a maintenance aid in areas where low line
voltage may be experienced. The 467A KTU can
be plugged into any 4-inch connector in place of a
400-type KTU.
2.46
Circuits may not operate satisfactorily
if the voltage drops below 18 volts or
20 volts dc for circuit supplied by
"A" and "B" batteries, respectively.
Conversely, transistors may be
damaged if any voltage exceeds
26 volts dc.
When supplying
"A" and "B" batteries from the
same source, such as building
battery, use 20 volts dc as the
minimum voltage.
The connectors are equipped with index clips
that mate with slots on the plug-end of the
unit to preclude any possibility of the KTUs being
inserted in a wrong manner.
2.42
Various combinations of prewired connectors
are available in KSUs, panels, and apparatus
mountings. These packages permit a wide latitude
in installation flexibility. Some packages are available
with interrupters, power units, connecting blocks,
and floor stands. KSUs are designed primarily
for small to medium size 1A2 KTS installation;
panels are designed for large or centralized
installations; and apparatus mountings are designed
to supplement KSUs, or panels, where additional
mounting facilities are required. (See Tables B,
C, and D.)
2.43
Two prewired connectors (each wired to a
screw terminal field) are also available on a
259-type KTU. This KTU provides a standard
7-inch mounting facility for one or two 4-inch 400
series KTUs, having no more than 20 contacts,
and is designed primarily to be mounted in the
unused lower half of 501- and 502-series KSUs.
Another prewired connector is the 272A KTU. This
KTU provides a mounting facility for a single
4-inch, 40-contact 400-series KTU. It is designed
to mount in standard equipment cabinets and
apparatus mountings.
2.47
Power may be supplied from the following
sources:
• Local power units
• CO or PBX battery supply
• Local or building battery supply.
2.44
Local power units recommended for use with
the 1A2 KTS are shown in Table E. Refer
to Section 518-010-106 for method of selecting
proper size power unit.
2.48
Caution: Do not supply 400-series
KTUs requiring "B" battery (signal)
from the "A" battery (talk) source.
THIS MA Y CA USE CIRCUIT
MALFUNCTIONS.
When using CO, PBX local, or building
battery supply, fuse in accordance with
standard practices, as follows:
2.49
POWER SUPPLY
Generally, local power (ac and dc) is provided
to a KTS for relay operations, talking, and
control of lamp and audible signal functions. The
2.45
Page 10
• One 2-ampere fuse for talking battery
designated A
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-100
tTABLE
U
lA2 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM KEY SERVICE UNITS
NUMBER
OF
CONNECTORS
MAX. NO.
OF COOR
PBX LINES
KSU
501 (MD) and 502 (MD)
Type KSU*
513-Type KSU
514-Type KSU
18·
20-
PIN
PIN
6
515Type
KSU
550- and 661-Type KSU*
4IJ.
PIN
6t
4
4
8t
4
4
8t
4
4t
KTUs
PRIMARILY
WIREO
FOR
TYPE
MOUNTING
400-Type,
401A,415A
and 467A
Wall or
Floor
Stand
All
400 Series
Wall or
Floor
Stand§
400-Type,
401A,416A
and 467A
Wall
* Equipped with KS-19175, List 1 interrupter.
t
t
Reduce line circuits by orie for each 401A, 416A, or 467 A KTU used.
Reduce line circuits by one for each 4-inch KTU used (other than a 400-type KTU) or by two
when an 8-inch KTU is used.
§ 77B (MD) or 77C apparatus mounting.
Note: When using a local power unit and
the minimum voltage cannot be assured when
adding KTUs to an existing system, the
power unit should be replaced by a larger
capacity unit.
• One 2-ampere fuse for signaling battery
designated B
• One 2-ampere fuse per maximum 50-signal
lamps (5IA)
• One 2-ampere fuse for dc audible signal
supply.
Note: When the same dc source is used
for talking and audible signal operation, a
noise suppression capacitor, such as the 23A
KTU, should be installed across the battery
supply.
Power (ac) for lamps and audible signals
may be supplied from a number of different
sources, provided each source used serves a separate
circuit or a separate group of circuits; BC sources
2.51
should never be connected together except
for common grounds.
A reserve power supply, coded the 47C
power unit (battery reserve), is available
for the IA2 KTS. Also available is an optional
U6A frequency generator for plugging into the
47C power unit. The 47C power unit is arranged
for the addition of a plug-in KS-20390,LI (nickel
cadmium) battery which must be ordered separately.
2.52
Some 400-series KTUs are interrelated
electrically, and it is recommended that the
dc power for any given IA2 KTS arrangement be
provided from a common source.
2.50
Page 11
SECTION 518-215-100
1A2 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM PANELS
PANEL
NO. OF
CONN
583A(MO)
15
(18-Pin)
584-Type
13
(18-Pin)
597A(MO)
597B
598A(MO)
598B
601A
602A
Page 12
14
(20-Pin)
14
(40-Pin)
KTUs
PRIMARILY
WIRED
FOR
400-Type
401A, 415A, 461A,
467 A, 469A, 471A,
and 479A
400-Type
401A
413A
414A (A&M Only)
415A
416A
418A
420A
421A
423A
430A
461A
467A
469A
471A
479A
400-Type
401A
413A
414A (A&M Only)
415A
416A
417A
418A
420A
421A
422B
423A
428A
429A (MO) or 429B
430A
451B
461A
467A
469A
471A
479A
SIZE
(IN.)
TYPE
MOUNTING
4 x 23
4 x 23
Relay Rack
or
Apparatus
Cabinet
4 x 23
6
(40-Pin)
407B (MO) or 407C
424A (MO) or 424C
8x6
6
(40-Pin)
407B (MO) or 407C
422B
423A
424A (MD) or 424C
425B
8x6
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-100
PANEL
603A
620A*
626A*
641A*
642A*
NO. OF
CONN
KTU.
PRIMARILY
WIREO
FOR
4
( 40·Pin)
426A
427B (MD) Series 4
or 427C
8
(40·Pin)
8
(40·Pin)
4
(40·Pin)
4
(40·Pin)
400·Type
401A
413A
414A (A&M Only)
415A
416A
419A
461A
467A
469A
471A
479A
SIZE
(IN.)
TYPE
MOUNTING
8 x 4·1/2
Relay Rack
or
Apparatus
Cabinet
8·1/2 x 18·3/8
424B or C
440A (MD) or 478B
444A
454B
460B
8·1/2 x 18·1/2
407B (MD) or 407C
424A (MD) or 424C
425B
440A (MD) or 478B
4·1/4 x 18·3/8
Mounts
on
Wall
417A
418A
420A
421A
422B
4·1/4 x 18·3/8
428A
429A (MD) or 429B
430A
440A (MD) or 478B
448A
449A
451B
476A
479A
* Modular panel.
Page 13
SECTION 518-215-100
TABLE 0
1A2 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM, 69·TYPE APPARATUS MOUNTINGS
APPARATUS
MOUNTING
69B*
NO. OF
CONN
20PIN
40PIN
2
MAX NO.
OF CO OR
PBX LINES
PRIMARILY
WIRED
FOR
2+
4-inch lS- or
20-contact
KTUs§
69D*
2
2+
All KTUs except
407B, 424-type,
and 425B
69G*
2
-
407B, 424-type,
and 425B
69Et
2
2+
69Ft
2
TYPE
MOUNTING
SIZE
(IN.1
Relay rack
or standard
apparatus
cabinet
2xS
All KTUs except
407B or
424-type
2+
One may be
added to
514 KSU
3 may be
added to
513A1 KSU
* Requires an A25B connector cable to extend wiring to distributing point.
t Equipped with 6-foot cable tail for connection to external connecting block outside KSU.
+ Reduce line circuits by one for each 4-inch KTU used other than a 400-type KTU or by two when
an S-inch KTU is used.
§ Will also accept the S-inch 419A KTU.
LIMIT A TIONS
Normal loop ranges, such as ringing, talking,
lamp, etc, of the plug-in KTUs are covered
in the CDs and SDs and in Sections 518-215-400,
-401, -402, or -403. These limits should not be
exceeded or failure of the apparatus could occur.
failure can be maintained by providing any of the
following features:
2.53
• Reserve power source such as the 47C
power unit and the 116A frequency generator.
See Section 167-449-101.
• Power failure transfer circuits.
In a 1A2 KTS where common audible and
visual signals are provided by means of
locally furnished power, interruption of this power
supply will render all common audible and visual
signals inoperative during the period of power
failure. Incoming service during periods of power
2.54
Page 14
• Connection of line ringers.
The installation of any of the above
features should be made only in
accordance with the service order or
local practices.
ISS 6, SECTION 518-'
Outgoing calls will not be affected by a
power failure. Whenever the CO or PBX
line circuit is in an idle condition, a path is established
that connects the telephone sets directly to the CO
or PBX.
• Number and type of telephone sets require,
2.55
3.
3.01
• Type and size of the power plant
• Available space for safely mounting apparatus
cabinets, relay racks, power plants, connecting
blocks, etc.
ARRANGEMENTS
System arrangements are shown divided into
four basic services:
• Availability of nO-volt ac power outlet.
Note: All of these factors must be taken
into consideration in order to provide for the
orderly growth of any arrangement.
• Line (Fig. 3)
• Auxiliary (Fig. 4)
• Intercom (Fig. 5)
• Auxiliary control (Fig. 6).
The type, size, and method of installation
of any lA2 KTS arrangement is dependent
upon the following:
3.02
Where feasible, consideration should be
given to centralizing the installation. Large
centralized installations should make use of the
connecting block arrangement covered in Section
518-010-101.
3.03
A lA2 KTS should be arranged to permit
maximum flexibility. Accordingly, all leads
from the connectors of mounting facilities, such as
panels, apparatus mountings, etc, should be terminated
at a connecting block termination field as covered
in Section 518-010-101. This should result in a
.standard termination at every installation and
permit ease of wiring and strapping, not only
during the initial installation but for any subsequent
rearrangements and changes.
3.04
• Immediate needs of the customer
• Future requirements of the customer
• Number and type of 400-series KTUs to
provide the required services and features
• Adequate size mounting facility (KSU, panel,
etc) designed to accept the required KTUs
Page 15
SECTION 518-215-100
TABLE E
CURRENT AND VOLTAGE RATINGS OF
POWER UNITS RECOMMENDED FOR 1A2 SYSTEM ARRANGEMENTS
TYPE
POWER
UNIT
TYPE
OUTPUT
DC
101Jt
(MD)
AC
(60 Hz)
101G
(J86731B)
/-
,/
VOLTAGE
RANGE
4.0
6
Use 24 V tap for circuits requiring
talk bat and/or relay operation
10'11
5.0
7
Lamp operation max 125 lamps
(51A) ~
17-19
1.6
1
Buzzer and/or bell operation
10·11
17
16
Lamp operation max 425 lamps
(51A) ~
DC TALK
18·26
1
Circuits requiring talk bat (A
BAT.)
1
Relay operation (B BAT.). Total de
load cannot exceed 1.5 amps
2
24B(3AMP)
Lamp operation max 112 lamps
(51A) if 18V ae tap is not used ~
"-
30·
type
;;
AC
(60 Hz)
8.75·11
AC (30 Hz)
113A
FREQGEN
110·125
DC TALK
18·26
DC SIGNAL
20·26
29·
type
AC
(60 Hz)
4.5
J
1.5
total
J
:j:
16·20
1.4
1
Buzzer and/or bell operation
-
-
Operates 1 to 16 ringers with series
diodes (diode matrix) or 1 to 6
ringers with series capacitors
8.75·11
or
9.75'12
:]
1
4
total
6
Relay operation (B BAT.). Total
de load cannot exceed 4 amps
12
6
24B (3AMP)
Lamp operation max 300 lamps
(51 A) ~
Buzzer and/or bell operation
16·20
1.6
1
-
1
Interrupter operation
AC (30 Hz)
113A
FREQGEN
110·125
-
-
Operates 1 to 16 ringers with series
DC TALK
18·26
DC SIGNAL
diodes (diode matrix) or 1 to 6 ringers
with series capacitors
20·26
"J
1.5
total
1
Circui ts requiring talk bat
(A BAT.)
1
Relay operation (B BAT.). Total de
load cannot exceed 1.5 amps
1.5
101G
(J86731)
Modified
for
1A2
Operation
34·type
Page 16
Circuit requiring talk bat
(A BAT.)
8.75·11
"-
"-
20·26
1.5
"-
USE
AC
(60 Hz)
DC SIGNAL
19·
type
FUSES'
20·26
0.6
20·
type
NO. OF
AMPERES AT
MIN. VOLTAGE
9·11
1.4 or 2.8
1 §
Lamp operation max 36 lamps
(51A) at 1.4 amps or 72 lamps
at 2.8 amps ~
16·20
1.4
1
Buzzer and/or bell operation. Do
not use when 10V tap is double
fused
AC
(20 Hz)
75·110
-
-
Ringer operation max 8 ringers
without capacitor when using diode
matrix or max 2 ringers with
capacitors
AC
(60 Hz)
8.75·11 or
9.75·12
25 continuous
35 intermittent
15
24B(3AMP)
Lamp operation max 625 lamps
(51 A) ~
8.75·11
-
1
Interrupter Operation
AC
(60 Hz)
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-100
TVPI!
POWER
UNIT
34·type
TVPI!
VOLTAGE
AMNII" AT
OUlPUT
RANGE
MIN. VOL TAOE
AC
(60 Hz)
NO. Of
FUSE.·
USE
8.75-11 or
9.75-12
25 continuoul
~6 intermittent
16
248 (3 AMP)
Lamp operation max 625 lamps
(51A) ~
8.75-11
-
1
Interrupter operation
1()'11
10
Lamp operation
250 (SlA) lamps
~
6781
10
0.3
10·11
10
AC
(60 Hz)
5
248 (3 AMP)
67C1
DC SIGNAL
79B1
79B2
9OB1
21581
10
0.3
20·26
1.5
1
24C (2 AMP)
Wall
Mounted
Interrupter
operation
Lamp operation
250 (51A) lamps
Interrupter
~
Rack
MountRd
operation
24B (3 AMP)
Relay operation (B BAT.)
Circuits requiring talk hattery
DC TALK
20·26
0.6
1
30 Hz AC
110·125
-
-
30 Hz AC
INTERRUPTED
11 ()'125
-
-
AC 60 Hz
8.75·11
5.5
24F (5 AMP)
(A BAT.)
Operates 1 to 16 ringers with
series diodes (diode matrix) or
1 to 6 ringers with series
capacitors
Lamp operation max 162 lamps
(51A)
AC60 Hz
INTERRUPTED
8.75·11
5.5
24F (5 AMP)
DC SIGNAL
18-27
1.9
248 (3 AMP)
Relay operation ( B BAT.)
Circuits requiring talk bat
DC TALK
18·27
0.6
1
30 Hz AC
110·125
-
-
30 Hz AC
INTERRUPTED
110·125
-
-
AC 60 Hz
8.75·11
5.5
24F (5 AMP)
(ABAT.)
Operates 1 to 16 ringers with
series diodes (diode matrix) or
1 to 6 ringers with series
capacitors
Lamp operation max 162 lamps
(51A)
AC 60 Hz
INTERRUPTED
8.75·11
5.5
24F (5 AMP)
DC SIGNAL
20·26
4.0
1
Relay operation (B BAT.)
Circuits requiring talk bat
DC TALK
18·26
1.0
1
30 Hz AC
110
-
-
30 Hz AC
INTERRUPTED
110
-
-
AC 60 Hz
8.75·11
12.0
24F (5 AMP)
AC 60 Hz
INTERRUPTED
10
12.0
24F (5 AMP)
Lamp operation max 300 lamps
(51A)
AC
(60 Hz)
15-18
2.4
3
24C (2 AMP)
MW lamps on Message Waiting
consoles
(A BAT.)
Operates 1 to 16 ringers with
series diodes (diode matrix) or
1 to 6 ringers with series
capacitors
• 24C (2 AMP) fuse unless designated otherwise.
§ For 2.8 amp output double fuse 10V tap.
t
~ Maximum number of lamps that may be operated
Should be placed a minimum of 3 feet from apparatus.
:j: Combined total output not to exceed 39 volt·amp.
at same time.
Page 17
SECTION 518-215- 100
LINE
SERVICES
co
INTERCOM
LI NE SERVICES
I
I
OR
PBX LI NE
!400-TYPE
I
I
I
I
MANUAL
PRIVATE
LINES
DIAL
40lA
BASIC UNIT
I
I
MANUAL
RINGDOWN
R
OR
~
AUTOMATIC
(DC SIG)
a
STATION
LINE
B
SHORT
RANGE
8
AUTOMATIC
RINGDOWN
IO-STATION
SELECTOR
19-5TATION
Gi7BIMji]
OR
407C
li§A(Miij
1
8
I
AUXILIARY
SERVICES
SELECTOR
OR
14 I
24C
PRESET
CONFERENCE
LONG LINE
CIRCUIT
DIRECT STATION
SELECTION
413A
420A
421A
Fig. 3-Line Services
421A
AUXILIARY
SERVICES
STATION BUSY
TONE. AUDI BLE
RINGBACK TONE
422B
MULTI-
LINE
( PRIORITY
EXCLUSION
OR Il
~
E9A(~
OR
E5A(M~
OR
~29BJ
OR
E6A' 4
TOLL
RESTRICTION
MUSIC ON
ADD-ON
HOLD
CONFERENCE
~
~ ~
OR
~
L:jm=oJ
"mUCH-TONE"
ADAPTER
426A
425B
OR
G3B(Mji]
OR
AND
L476;=J
OR
L427C
OR
OR
L47BB~
FLUTTER
GENERATOR
~
OR
EBAIM4
Fig. 4-.Auxiliary Services.
Page 18
=oJ
~OAIM~
Fig. 5-.lntercom S~rvices.
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-100
CONTROL
SERV ICES
COMMON
AUOIBLE
CONTROL
POWER
FAILURE
TRANSfER
GENERAL
PURPOSE
CONTROL
421A
EXTERNAL
SI GNAL
CONTROL
AUXI LlARY
RINGUP
470A
41lA
LOW
VOLTAGE
MONITOR
LAMP
ORIVER
467A
469A
421A
AUXILIARY
LAMP
CONTROL
412A
RI NGER
CONTROL
448A
449A
AUDIBLE
SIGNAL
SUPPRESSOR
421A
Fig. 6-tAuxiliary Control Services.
Page 19
19 Pages
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT & TCo Standard
ADDENDUM 518-215-400
Issue 2, December 1978
SERVICE
1A2 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
KEY TELEPHONE UNITS
LINE SERVICES
1.
ISSUE 2 CHANGES
GENERAL
This addendum supplements Section
518-215-400, Issue 6. Place this pink sheet
ahead of Page 1 of the section.
1.001
1.002
This addendum is issued to expand the
restrictions on the use of the 400H KTU.
1.003
Issue 1 of this addendum was issued to:
(5) If a test call is dialed, wait at least
2 seconds after the called end
answers before placing the line on hold.
On Page 8, at the end of paragraph 2.17,
add the following additional restrictions on
the use of the 400H KTU:
2.004
• Clarify the code of 400-type KTU to be
used in the 50A Customer Premise System
(CPS)
• Expand the restrictions involving the mounting
facilities and the line circuit when furnishing
music-on-hold.
2.
ISSUE 1 CHANGES
On Page 8, at the end of paragraph 2.17,
add the following bullet:
• Use a 400D or G KTU in a 50A CPS. Do
not use a 400H KTU because of a circuit
incompatibility.
2.002
• For proper lamp operation, the 400H KTU
requires ac power with the proper connections
of the ac voltage and ground leads. Care
should be taken to avoid shorting the L
and LG leads as this may result in damage
to the KTU. (With earlier 400-type KTUs,
shorting of the Land LG leads resulted in
a blown fuse.)
• Under some conditions, tests made at the
local test desk or by MLT may cause the
400H to ring up.
CHANGES TO SECTION
2.001
On Page 7, paragraph 2.17, add the following
step to the first bullet:
2.003
On Page 8, at the end of paragraph 2.17,
add Table F.1.
• For large centralized installations, 584C
panels fully loaded with 400H KTUs are
limited to two panels per 19- or 20-type
power units and five panels per 29- or
30-type power units. Fully loaded 620A
panels are limited to eight panels per 90-type
power units.
• When a 109A interconnect unit is used to
provide music-on-hold with a 400H KTU, a
106D varistor must be placed between option
block terminals 5 and 6 of the 109A interconnect
unit.
NOTICE
Not for use or disclosure outside the
Bell System except under written agreement
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
ADDENDUM 518-215-400
access to customer-provided equipment),
models earlier than Issue 2B, may result in
reports of extra dial pulses. If the interconnect
unit is equipped with a 14A resistance lamp,
try replacing with a 14B.
• The short ringing time-out interval provided
in the 400H KTU may be unsuitable for use
with manual PBXs.
• If the A and Al leads are shorted for more
than 15 seconds, the 400H KTU will go into
a hold condition. It may be released from
hold by momentarily unplugging the KTU
or momentarily shorting the tip-ring leads.
Note: Care should be taken to observe all
the conditions noted in the use of the 400H
KTU to reduce possible customer reports or
service outages.
• Use of a 400H KTU behind PBXs equipped
with J53053F interconnect units (trunk level
TABLE F.1
MOUNTING, LINE CIRCUIT, AND MUSIC·ON-HOLD COMPATIBILITY
KEY SYSTEM
MUSIC-ON·HOLO"
All
Without
lA2 Key Telephone
System
451B
570A Without
580A
702A
With
703A
570B
580B
702B
703B
400G, D, or earlier
With
498A and U6Al CM
COM KEY
718
1434
2152
LINE CIRCUIT
All
451B
Without
With
All
400G, D, or earlier
All
498A and U6Al CM
All
*Information on the 498A KTU and U6Al CM can be found in Section 518-215-401. The
451B KTU is covered in Sections 518-215-401 and 463-341-103.
Page 2
2 Pages
BEU SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT& TCo Standard
SECTION 518-21 5-400
Issue 6, May 1978
SERVICE
1A2 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
KEY TELEPHONE UNITS
LINE SERVICES
1.
• 461A-Manual Signaling, Ringdown, Private
Line Circuit.
GENERAL
This issue provides schematic information
for the 400-series KTUs which provide li ne
services. Line service KTUs provide switching,
control, and signaling functions which permit key
telephones in a 1A2 KTS to be connected to CO
or PBX lines, key telephone sets of other systems,
or private lines. These units include circuits for
audible or visual signals and a time-out feature
for incoming calls which are not answered.
1.01
1.02
This section is reissued to:
• Add information on the 419B KTU
• Add two addit ional restrictions on t he use
of the 400H KTU and revise two existing
restrictions.
1.03
Mechan ical
All circuit components on these KTUs are
mounted in a plug-in printed wiring board,
one end of which is equipped with contacts. A
4-inch board may have 18, 20, or 40 contacts; an
8-inch board will have 80 contact s (requiring two
vertical 40-pin connectors). The circuit boards plug
into mating connectors in key service units, panels,
or apparatus mountings. Wiring from the connectors
will be dedicated or nondedicated leads. Dedicated
leads are those that normally appear on the same
contacts of all KTUs, such as supply voltages and
grounds, and are normally factory-wired. Nondedicated
leads are those whose designation and fu nction
vary and are made available fo r installer connections.
Fig. 1 and 2 show typical 4- and 8-inch KTUs.
1.04
The fo llowing KTUs and their functions are
covered in this section:
• 400B, C and D (all MD) and 400G and
H-CO or PBX Line Circuit
• 414A-Man ual Signaling, Ringdown, Private
Line Circuit
• 415A-Automatic, DC Signaling, Private Line
Circuit
. 416A-Station Line Circuit
• 418A-Short Range, DC Signaling, Private
Line Circuit
. 419A-A utomatic Signaling, Ringdown,
Private Line Circuit
Fig. 1 - Typical 4-lnch KTU
NOTICE
Not for use or disclosure outside the
Bell System except under written agreement
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
SECTION 518-215-400
• SD-69559-01, Issue .9. -414A, 415A, 416A,
41SA, 419-type, 461A KTUs.
If this section is to be used with equipment or
apparatus reflecting later issues of the drawings,
reference should be made to the CDs and SDs to
determine the extent of the changes and the
manner in which t he section may be affected.
2.
IDENTIFICATION
400B, C, D, G and H KTUs (CO or PBX Line Circuit)
Fig. 2-Typical 8-lnch KTU
Electrical
Functional schematics cover the basic circuitry
of each KTU, contacts used, and its relationship
to telephone sets, other KTUs, power supplies,
and apparatus. Dashed lines are used to simplify
the schematics and to indicate intermediate circuitry.
If full schematics are required, refer to the SDs
listed in LOS.
1.05
Voltages required for operation of the KTU,
or provided to associated apparatus by the
KTU, are shown with their connector pins. Other
voltages may appear on the contacts of the mating
connector, but not on the KTU, depending on the
mounting arrangement.
1.06
1.07
KTUs may require the following power
supply voltages and their associated grounds:
The latest version of the line circuit KTU
is the 4ooH. The 4ooB, C, and D KTUs are
rated MD, and the 400G is still AT&TCo Standard.
The earlier KTUs may be used for replacements
or new installations when the features provided
by later models are not required. There are a
large number of earlier KTUs in service in the
field (particularly 4ooDs), and they should not be
replaced if they are operating satisfactorily.
2.01
The 4oo-type KTUs (Fig. 3 through 9) are
4-inch IS-contact units used to provide a key
telephone set with CO or PBX line services. In
conjunction with the set, it provides the following
features:
2.02
• Pickup and hold of a CO or PBX line
• Flashing line lamp on incoming call
• Audible line signal and/or common audible
signal on incoming call
• -24V (B battery) for control
• Steady lamp indicating busy condition
• -24V (A battery) for talk
• Steady or winking lamp indicating hold
condition
• ±10V for visual signals
• ±105V for audible signals.
1.08
This issue of the section is based on the
following drawings:
• Talking circuit connection to CO or PBX line
maintained during periods of power failure
• Individual line time-out on unanswered
incoming calls with different timing interval
options
SD-69513-Ol, Issue 15-4ooD KTU
• Delayed hold release
SD-69651-01, Issue .3. -4ooG KTU
SD-69942-01, Issue 1-4ooH KTU
Page 2
• .Maximum loop resistance of 50 ohms or
approximately 1000 . feet of 24-gauge IW
cable between KTU and telephone set.•
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-400
2.03
If false release of the hold circuit is
only if false release from hold is actually
encountered.
encountered, verify type of serving facility
(CO, Centrex, or PBX) and apply appropriate option.
Variables may be encountered in any given application
which will result in unexpected false releases. In
these cases the option applied must be determined
locally. See Tables A, B, and C.
2.04
The number of bridged ringers that may be
used with each 400B, C, D, G or H KTU
is listed in Table D.
The 400B KTUs can be utilized in conjunction
with 701 PBXs and the central offices listed
in Table E, provided the operating characteristics
in 2.06 are acceptable.
2.05
In the 400D (MD) KTU, option ZD is
replaced by option ZJ. However, it
is not necessary to update circuits
previously modified with option ZD.
The 400B KTU has some restrictions which
result from the unit's sensitivity to certain
line conditions which are common to all types of
telephone lines. The 400B KTU is susceptible to
the following characteristics:
2.06
Note: Options ZC, ZD and ZJ are installer
provided options that delay the release of
the local hold circuit when the telephone line
is opened for short intervals. These line opens
usually occur when the switching machine
reswitches the line after the transmission path
has been established. The delay interval
prevents false release of hold during this
action. It is not recommended that these
options be applied on a widespread basis, but
(a) Longitudinal Voltages: KTU may ring
up falsely in response to longitudinally
induced 60-Hz voltage greater than 12 volts
RMS. KTU may also fail to hold when induced
voltages exceed 65 volts RMS in the answer
state.
TABLE A
APPLICATION OF OPTIONS ZC AND ZJ - 4000 KTU
TYPE OF CENTRAL OFFICE
NO_ 5 X-BAR
STEP-BY-STEP
WITHOUT
PERM_
SIGNAL
TRUNKS
WITH
PERM_
SIGNAL
TRUNKS
UNMOD
PERM.
SIGNAL
TRUNKS
PANEL
NO_1
X-BAR
MODIFIED
PERM.
SIGNAL
TRUNKS
ESS
756/757/758
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
ZJ
ZJ
ZC
ZJ
ZJ
ZC
ZJ
ZJ
ZC
ZJ
ZJ
ZC
770
ZC
ZC
ZC
ZC
ZC
ZC
ZC
800/801
ZJ
ZJ
ZJ
ZJ
ZJ
ZJ
ZC
805
ZJ
ZJ
ZJ
ZJ
ZJ
ZJ
ZC
812
ZC
ZC
ZC
ZC
ZC
ZC
ZC
CSS 201
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
PBX
None
701
Outgoing
Incoming
* None required.
Page 3
SECTION 518-215-400
TABLE B
HOLD RELEASE OPTIONS - 400G KTU
TYPE OF CENTRAL OFFICE
NO.5 X·BAR
STEP·BY·STEP
UNMOD
PERM.
SIGNAL
TRUNKS
MODIFIED
PERM.
SIGNAL
TRUNKS
R
R
R
*
R
R
R
R
*
R
R
R
R
WITHOUT
PERM.
SIGNAL
TRUNKS
WITH
PERM.
SIGNAL
TRUNKS
PANEL
None
R
R
R
701
R
R
R
R
PBX
756/757/758
NO.1
X·BAR
ESS
770
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
800/801
R
R
R
R
R
R
*
805
R
R
R
R
R
R
*
812
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
CSS 201
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* Factory-provided option, 600 ms (minimum) time-out.
Note: R option is short time·out, 25 ms minimum.
(b) Polarity of Central Office Battery:
Hold circuit will not respond when the line
is associated with negative grounded battery
plants such as No. 101 Electronic Switching
System.
line transmissions while the holding bridge is
connected to the line.
2.07
The 400C KTU has the same characteristics
as the 400B except those covered in 2.06(a).
Note: 400-type KTUs may serve a maximum
of 20 multi pled lamps.
(c) Hold Circuit:
Hold circuit cannot be
released from central offices during permanent
signal release routine. Release time of the hold
circuit exceeds the release signal intervaL
The 400D KTUs stenciled SD-69513-01, Issue
10, have been modified by removal of the
C4 capacitor. With this change, the circuit will
not release a held line on battery reversaL
2.08
(d) Flash and Recall: Circuit connects a
shunt across the line for 100 to 250 milliseconds
when the switchhook is depressed during the
station flash operation. This abbreviates or
completely suppresses the flash indication.
2.09
(e) Time-out: Short time-out interval cannot
be altered by installer.
(f) Transmission: A 15 dB transmission loss
can be expected in arrangements that require
Page 4
Improvements to overcome silicone contamination
of the relay contacts have been included on
Issue 12 and subsequent issues of the 400D KTU.
Repaired units containing these changes can be
identified by a star or C stamped on the label after
the issue number or by the new label.
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-400
TABLE C
HOLD RELEASE OPTIONS - 400H KTU
TYPE OF CENTRAL OFFICE
NO. 5 X·BAR
STEP-BY-STEP
PBX
WITHOUT
PERM.
SIGNAL
TRUNKS
WITH
PERM.
SIGNAL
TRUNKS
PANEL
NO.1
X-BAR
UNMOD
PERM.
SIGNAL
TRUNKS
MODIFIED
PERM.
SIGNAL
TRUNKS
ESS
None
R
R
R
R
R
R
S
701
R
R
R
R
R
R
S
756(757(758
R
R
R
R
R
R
S
770
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
800/801
R
R
R
R
R
R
S
805
R
R
R
R
R
R
S
812
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
CSS 201
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Note: S option is factory-provided for long time-out. R option is short time-out.
The 400D KTU s stenciled SD-69513-01, Issue
13, and KTUs repaired after July 1, 1971,
will have a new label which will include space for
the line number and the words "Outward" and
"Trouble". If the KTU is removed from service
because of trouble, it shall be marked "Trouble"
in the space provided before being turned in for
repair. If the KTU is removed from service for
reasons other than trouble, it shall be marked
"Outward". The new KTUs will have a separate
label with the date of manufacture placed on the
back of the handle (ie, 3-71 will identify a KTU
manufactured in March 1971). The repaired KTUs
will have the date of repair stamped on the printed
wiring board. An orange repair date stamp indicates
those units tested defective when returned from
the field, and a white stamp indicates those tested
O.K.
2.10
Wiring changes were made to the 400D
KTU manufactured after November 1974 to
cover specific trouble indications. The modified
2.11
KTUs are marked Issue 15 and are recommended
where the following conditions are encountered:
• Power supply voltage variations
• Non A-lead stations behind KTU
• High resistance ground.
In some instances, noise or crosstalk may
be encountered due to an unbalanced condition
of the transmission circuit of 400D and G KTUs
while on hold. The condition can be corrected by
placing a KS-19524, List 9 capacitor (60 I'F), or
equivalent, across leads R (CO) and R (Sta). The
capacitor should be connected to the leads where
they appear on the connecting blocks associated
with the mounting arrangement involved. A multiple
point may be required using either 183A2 adapters
on the terminals or using spare terminals or another
66-type connecting block. It is not recommended
that the capacitor be added to the pins of the
connector where the KTU is plugged in. (The use
2.12
Page 5
SECTION 518-215-400
TABLE D
RINGING BRIDGE LIMITATIONS - 400·TYPE KTU
KTU
MINIMUM
RMS
RINGING
VOLTAGE
(20 Hz)
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF
BRIDGED RINGERS
MINIMUM
LEAKAGE
RESISTANCE
(OHMS)
MAXIMUM RINGING RANGE (OHMS)
72V
400B
80V
3
2
1
0
15K
4446
1788
1119
814
6062
2438
1526
1110
6871
2763
1729
1258
5140
2434
1594
1185
4060
1722
1093
800
5537
2349
1490
84V
10K
72V
400C
80V
15K
6225
2662
1689
I
1237
4799
2354
1560
I
1166
I
!
705
84V
10K
72V
4000
1091
t
80V
15K
2408
1334
922
3284
1819
1258
961
3722
2062
1426
1090
3148
1873
1333
1034
3100
2000
84V
10K
72V
4000
400H
80V
10K
84V
84V
20K
1
4000
2550
4500
3000
5850
i
1475
1900
i
I
I
1150
1500
I
3500
I
2125
i
1625
2500
,
1800
I
of a capacitor is never required in a 400H KTU
because its transmission circuit is perfectly balanced.)
labeled Issue 2 are equipped with a 556A LED
which replaces the original 538A LED.•
Either the 400H KTU or the 400G can be
used for any lA2 KTS CO or PBX line circuit
application. In addition to circuit improvements,
the 400H and G KTUs differ from earlier 400-type
KTUs in that they have a line status indicator
and option plugs for connecting the various options.
2.15
2.13
Line status is indicated by a light emitting
diode (LED) located in the option block-handle
assembly of the 400G (Fig. 4) or 400H (Fig. 7).
The LED will light in all active states of the line
circuit as shown in Table F. tThose 400G KTUs
2.14
Page 6
Features or service options are connected in
the 400G (Fig. 5, 6, and Table B) and in
the 400H (Fig. 8, 9, and Table C) by means of
option plugs in the option block-handle assembly.
Spare option plugs are available for the 400G by
ordering a D-180768 kit of parts; each kit contains
five option plugs. For the 400H KTU, the D-180826
kit of parts contains six option plugs and three J3
jumper connectors.
2.16
The 400G can be arranged for short interval
ringup time-out (approximately 5 seconds)
155 6, SECTION 518-215-400
TABLE E
KTU COMPATIBILITY WITH CENTRAL OFFICES
ESS
TYPE
KEY
TEL.
SYS.
TYPE
KTU
400A,
Band
IA2
BRIOGE
RESW.
OPEN"
462ms
CKT.
MOD.
Yes
-
NO.1
X·
BAR
NO.5 X· BAR
CENTREX
RLS.
ON PS
OPEN"
1000 ms
BRIDGE
RESW.
OPEN"
20 ms
No
Yes
Yes
No
NO.5
X-IIAR
PANEL
SXS
WITH PS
TRUNKS
RLS.
ON PS
OPEN"
144 ms
400ms
144 ms
SlOms
1000 ms
-
No
No
No
No
No
OPT
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
CKT.
MOD.
RELEASE ON PS OPEN"
C
400D
No
OPT
ZC
ZJ
* Reswitch (Resw.) opens specified are maximums and permanent signal (PS) release opens are
specified at minimums.
TABLE F
INDICATIONS OF LINE STATUS LED
Observe the following restrictions on
the use of the 400G 8JJd 400H KTUs:
LED CONDITION
LINE STATUS
Idle
Ringing
Off-Hook
Hold
400G KTU
400H KTU
Off
Steady
Steady
Steady
Off
Flashing
Steady
Winking
by providing option Z or, for long interval time-out
(approximately 20 seconds), by removing option Z.
With the 400H, a short interval time-out is
factory-provided and cannot be altered.
The 400H KTU has a pair of test pins,
accessible through a window in the front of
the option block-handle (Fig. 7), which allow an
installer or repairperson to determine whether the
KTU is on an active CO/PBX line even when no
telephone set is connected. When the two pins
are shorted together with a screwdriver blade,
the line status LED will light and the associated
interrupter motor will start if the KTU is connected
to an active line. If it is not, the LED will remain
dark, but the interrupter motor will still start. In
COM KEY* 2152, the interrupter runs continuously
as long as power is connected.
2.17
• .The 400H must be in the oR-hook state,
with dial tone 'on the line for at least 2
seconds before it can be put into the
hold state. When testing a 400H:
(1) Go off-hook.
(2) Listen for dial tone.
(3) Wait at least 2 seconds after dial tone
is received.
(4) Depress hold button.•
• The 400H will not go into the hold state
if the peak metallic .noiset voltage on
the tip and ring leads at the time the
HOLD button on the telephone set is
depressed is greater than 2.6 volts.
• The 400H is compatible only with Issue
6 and later issues of the 412A KTU
(auxiliary relay circuit). Issues 1 through
4 of the 412A may be used if the 186-type
protection networks are clipped out of
the circuit.
• When music-on-hold is required in
conjunction with 400G or H line circuits,
• Trademark
Page 7
SECTION 518-215-400
the music-on-hold KTU installed must
be compatible with the mounting laciHties
available. A 4tH-type KTU cannot be
plugged into a connectol' intended 101'
a 498A, and vice versa (see Section
618-216-401).
• Ringing ranges are shown in Table G.
TABLEG
RINGING RANGES - 414A KTU
• U7Je 400H KTU contains a relay having
mercury-wetted contacts and must be
mounted in the proper position. Current
production 01 the 400H has an arrow
printed on the front label which indicates
the proper installation position.
• For proper lamp operation. when the line
circuit is a 4008, the lamp power must
be an ac voltage-a dc voltage cannot
be used.•
414A KTU (Manual Signaling, Ringdown, Private Line
Circuit)
The 414A KTU (Fig. 10) is a 4-inch, 2O-contact
unit for connecting a telephone set to a
private line terminated at a distant location.
Another tie line circuit KTU is required at the
distant location. A nonlocking key on the telephone
set, or an externally mounted key in addition to
the line pickup key, is required for signaling. The
414A KTU provides a talking and manual signaling
circuit with the following operating features:
MINIMUMRMS
RINGING VOLTAGE
STANDARD
LOOPS
15K-OHM
LEAKAGE
UNIGAUGE
LOOPS
20K-QHM
LEAKAGE'
OHMS
75
84
92
} volts (20 Hz)
110
120
} volts (30 Hz)
2600
ohms
4000
4600
5000
5000
5400
i
*These ringing ranges are also valid with ui'ligauge
plant which may use an E6 repeater in each
subscriber loop.
2.18
• Flashing line lamp on an incoming call.
• Steady lamp indicating line busy.
• Time-out on unanswered incoming calls;
optional time intervals.
415A KTU (Automatic, DC Signaling, Private Une
Orcuit)
The 415A KTU (Fig. 11) is a 4-inch, 18-contact
unit for connecting a telephone set to a
private line terminated at a distant location.
Another 415A KTU, or other tie line KTU which
will respond to a dc signal, is required at the
distant location. The distant telephone set is
automatically signaled when the line key on the
local telephone set is operated and the handset is
lifted. The 415A KTU provides a talking and
signaling circuit with the same operating features
as the 414A KTU and, in addition, provides;
2.19
• Optional lamp wink as an indication of hold
• Choice of audible signals, common audible,
steady, or interrupted.
• Audible ringback signal option so calling
party can hear a tone from the distant
telephone.
• Idle line termination when KTU is connected
to lines having repeaters.
• A spare relay contact is available for control
functions.
• Line hold feature is NOT available.
Page 8
• Ringing ranges with -20 volt battery supply
are shown in Table H.
416A KTU (Station Line Circuit)
The 416A KTU (Fig. 12) is a 4-inch, 2O-contact
unit for connecting a private line between a
local telephone set and a telephone set at a distant
location. A nonlocking key, in addition to the line
pickup key at the local telephone set, is required
to operate the audible signal at the distant station.
The local station is signaled by lifting the handset
2.20
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-400
• Line hold feature is NOT available.
TABLE H
RINGING RANGES - 415A KTU
MINIMUM BATTERY
VOLTAGE
STANDARD LOOPS
15K·OHM LEAKAGE
UNIGAUGE LOOPS
20K·OHM LEAKAGE'
-20 volts
2300 ohms
2200 ohms
*These ringing ranges are also valid with unigauge
plant which may use an E6 repeater in each subscriber
loop.
and operating the line key associated with the set
at the distant location. The 416A KTU provides
a talking and signaling circuit with the following
operating features:
• Visual lamp signal to indicate incoming call,
or line busy.
• Ringing range is 100 ohms with -20 volt
battery supply.
419-Type KTU (Automatic Signaling, Ringdown,
Private Line Circuit)
The 419-type KTU (Fig. 14) is an S-inch,
SO-contact unit for connecting a telephone
set over a private line to a distant location.
Another 419-type KTU, or tie line KTU which will
respond to and transmit ringing voltage, is required
at the distant location. The distant telephone set
is automatically signaled when the line key on the
local telephone set is operated and the handset is
lifted. The 419-type KTU provides a talking and
signaling circuit with the following operating features:
2.22
• Pickup of a private line.
• Choice of audible signals, common audible,
steady, or interrupted.
• Flashing line lamp on an incoming call.
• Audible ringback signal option.
• Steady lamp indicating line busy.
• A spare relay contact is available for control.
• Winking hold lamp.
• Line hold feature is NOT available.
• Ringing ranges with -20 volt battery supply
on standard loops is 750 ohms.
• Choice of audible signals: common audible,
steady, or interrupted.
418A KTU (Short Range, DC Signaling, Private Line
Circuit)
• Audible ringback signal optional.
The 41SA KTU (Fig. 13) is a 4-inch, 20-contact
unit for connecting a private line between
two telephone sets, usually on the same premises.
A single KTU will serve two stations. The unit
may be connected for one of three methods of
signaling: two-way automatic, two-way manual,
or automatic one-way and manual one-way. The
41SA KTU provides a talking and signaling circuit
and the following operating features:
• Idle line termination when KTU is connected
to lines using repeaters.
2.21
• Time-out on unanswered incoming calls;
optional time-intervals.
• Hold-interrupt control to change status of
419-type KTU at a distant location from
HOLD to Incoming Call (by switchhook flash).
• Flashing line lamp on an incoming call.
• Ringing ranges are shown in Table 1.
• Steady lamp indicating line busy.
tThe 419B KTU is directly interchangeable
with the 419A (MD). The 419B should be
used in those installations where problems are
encountered with false ringups due to line capacitance
on long loops.•
2.23
• Choice of audible signals, common audible,
steady or interrupted.
• Audible ringback signal option at both stations.
Page 9/10
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-400
• Time-out on unanswered incoming calls;
optional time intervals.
TABLE I
RINGING RANGES-419-TYPE KTU
MINIMUMRMS
RINGING VOLTAGE
STANDARD
LOOPS
15K-OHM
LEAKAGE
• Choice of audible signals: common audible,
steady, or interrupted.
UNIGAUGE
LOOPS
20K-OHM
LEAKAGE"
• Audible ringback signal option so calling
party can hear a tone from the distant
telephone.
OHMS
75
84 } volts (20 Hz)
92
2600
ohms
110
} volts (30 Hz)
120
4000
4600
5000
• Idle line termination when KTU is connected
to lines having repeaters.
• Line hold feature is NOT available.
5000
5400
• Ringing ranges are shown in Table J.
*These ringing ranges are also valid with unigauge
plant which may use an E6 repeater in each
subscriber loop_
TABLEJ
RINGING RANGES - 461A KTU
461A KTU (Manual Signaling, Ringdown Private Line
Circuit)
The 461A KTU (Fig. 15) is an IS-contact
version of the 414A KTU. The spare contact
available on the 414A has been eliminated and B
ground used for RG. Another tie line circuit KTU
is required at the distant location. A nonlocking
key on the telephone set, or an externally mounted
key in addition to the line pickup key, is required
for signaling. The 461A KTU provides a talking
and manual signaling circuit with the following
operating features:
MINIMUM RMS
RINGING VOLTAGE
2.24
STANDARD
LOOPS
15K-OHM
LEAKAGE
UNIGAUGE
LOOPS
20K-OHM
LEAKAGE"
OHMS
75
84
92
} volts (20 Hz)
110
} volts (30 Hz)
120
2600
ohms
4000
4600
5000
5000
5400
• Flashing line lamp on an incoming call.
• Steady lamp indicating line busy.
*These ringing ranges are also valid with unigauge
plant which may use an E6 repeater in each
subscriber loop .
Page 11
SECTION 518-215-400
NOTES,
I. REQUIRES A MOUNTING FACILITY EQUIPPED IIITH AN 18-, 20-, OR 4O-PIN CONNECTOR.
2. THE STATUS or THE RELAYS FOR ALL FUNCTIONS or, THE KTU ARE AS FOLLOWS,
FUNCTI ON
RELAY
INCOMING
RING CYCLE
ANSIiER I NG OR
INITIATlN; CALL
HOLD
A
R
0
R
B
0
R
0
C
R
0
0
L
0*
R
0
R. RELEASED
O. OPERATE
*. FOLLOWS RINGING
3. FOR 30 SECOND TIME-OUT CYCLE,
4. TO PROVIDE TIME-OUT CYCLES OF
KS-13490,LI OR EQUIVALENT (112
AND CONNECT THE OTHER LEAD TO
TIME-OUT INTERVAL.
TIME IN SEC
FROM 10 SEC
TO,
REMOVE Z OPTION STRAP BETWEEN TERMINALS I AND 2.
RING-UP CIRCUITS FROM 3.4 TO 7.5 SECONDS, REPLACE Z OPTION STRAP IIITH A
WATT) RESISTOR. USE ONE RESISTOR LEAD AS A STRAP 8ETWEEN TERMINALS I AND 2
TERMINAL 3. USE TA8LE 8ELOW FOR RESISTOR VALUE REQUIRED rDR DESIRED
RESISTOR
EFFECT ON DELAYED
HOLD RELEASE OPTI ONS
MEGOHM
7.5
6.7
.75
5.0
.39
3.4
.20
IF" TIME-OUT CYCLE IS
REDUCED, CONNECT
RESISTOR AS SHlII/N
BELlII/:
TERMIMALS ON KTU
OPTI ON BLOCK
ZJ
ZC
1.2
IF" THE TIME-OUT CYCLE IS REDUCED IN
CONJUNCTION IIITH ZC OR ZJ OPTION,
CONNECT THE RESISTOR AND CAPACITOR
AS SHOIIN BELlII/,
TERMIMALS ON KTU OPTION BLOCK
NONE
I
NOT
RECOMMENDED
(NOTE 5)
3
4
NONE
SOL?S
f:
I
2 'SOLDER
S. NO. I ESS SPECIAL LINE APPLIQUE CIRCUIT (SD-IA297) SHOULD a~ USED IN APPLICATIONS WHERE ZC
OPTION CANNOT BE APPLIED.
6. WHEN Z OPTION IS PROVIDED IIITH ZC OR ZJ OPTIONS, REMOVE THE Z STRAP AND USE THE CAPACITOR LEAD AS /{
STRAP BETWEEN TERMINALS I AND 2.
OPTIONS
OPTION BLOCK STRAPPING
FEATURES
OPTION
400A,B. C
TIME-OUT
(NOTES 3 AND 4)
~
RES I STaR LEAD
4000
LONG TIME DELAY (APPROXIMATELY 30 SECONDS)
SHORT TIME DELAY (APPROXIMATELY 10 SECONDS)
I TO 2
LAMP WINK
8 TO 9 c,
X
LAMP STEADY
7 TO 9
II
I NTERRUPT£1l RING
5 T06
5 TO 8
STEADY RING
4 T06
6 TO 8
,S
COMMON IIITH DIODE MATRIX CONTROL
5 TO 6
5 TO 8
V
COMMON WITH RELAY CONTROL
3 TO 6
4 TO 8
Z
Y
I TO 2
10 TO 7
VISUAL HOLD CKT
T
AUDIBLE SIGNAL
ZC
(NOTE 7)
DELAYED
HOLD RELEASE
ZJ
*
t
RELEASE OF
HOLDING BRIDGE
FRON CO OR PBX
BY LI NE CURRENT
OPENS GREATER
THAN
WHEN USED WI,TH Z OPTION
WHEN USED WITH LONG TIME DELAY
500 MI LLI SECONDS WHEN ASSOC I ATED III TH ESS
HAVING RESWITCH CAPABILITY * (USE 5 UF CAPACITOR,
SOIA OR EQUIVALENT) t(USE 1.62 UF CAPACITOR,
70lG OR EQUIVALENT)
50 MILLISECONDS WHEN ASSOCIATED IIITH NO.5 X-BAR
CENTREX HAVING AUTONATIC PERMANENT SIGNAL RELEASE
* (USE 0.5 \If' CAPACITOR, 5758 OR EQUIVALENT)
t (USE 0.162 UF CAPACITOR OR EQUIVALENT)
,
NOT
USED
9 TO 7
SEE 2,03
ONLY BARE WIRE STRAPS SHOULD BE
USED ON KTUS MANUFACTURED PRIOR TO 1966
7. WHEN THE ZC OPTION IS USED DUE TO THE DELAYED RELEASE OF THE HOLDING BRIDGE, SOME TRANSMISSION LOSS IS
ENCOUNTERED FOR APPROX IMATEL Y I SECOND WHEN A STATION REENTERS A HELD CALL.
a. V OPTION MAY BE USED IN LOCALLY ENGINEERED ARRANGEMENTS OR RELAY COMMON AUDIBLE ARRANGEMENTS.
9. ZD OPTION IS REPLACED BY ZJ OPTION, HOWEVER IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO UPDATE CIRCUITS PREVIOUSLY MODIFIED
WITH OPTION Z D.
Rg. 3-Condensed Functional Schematic of 400·Type (Except 400G and H), KTU ,(CO or PBX Une Circuit)
(Sheet 1 of 2)
Page 12
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-400
pia
CO OR PBX
LINE
T
CONN
4000 KTU (NOTES I AND 2)
T(CO)
I
B
KEY TEL SET
A
NET
L-----------~~c
PU
SW
HOOK
KEY
~
~
R (STA)
.r
I
T(STA)
I
~
A
I
Alii
RI
R(CO)
R
'--
HOLD
KEY
'--
-24
-.-_-r _____
L;LCAR2LG'I
RG
plo
MATRIX BLK
7
R OR
RI
B
R OR
RI
IOSV
I
I
)(
LAMP
rLASH
SEQUENCE
± /
RN
:
'RG
10V
±
/
I
'I
ST
~TERRUPTER
PWR SUP
MG
r-
MG'IT
20-
pia
pia
II'TERRUPTER
CONN
'----
c
~
RII
OPTiON
BLOCK
26V DC
PWR SUP 'I
C75~
+ @
-I
B BAT'J
+1
B GRD
(NOTE 9)
r
l%tTl
4?
5 6
BY' 9 ' 7
10~
L---+-----j\-+--fl-1
B---"'@'0'1
~------!--~
/
B
Lr
LAMP
,1+1
PWR SUP'I
LG
t0
(NoTE6Jl,-:;;;-'\
PART or
_
\l0
~N78)
Io
PART Of
OPTION BLOCK
LW
~
c£
/
SIG~II
'I
(NOTE 3)
~
A
C
@
~--~C~--~B~~~----~------.
L
r RING
SEQUENCE
I
2
~
B
RC
r--
AUD
PWR
SUP
1
B -24
~;OR®l@
LAMP
WINK
SEQUENCE
I-<>I-l-_ _-«NOTE 4)
i
AUD S I G
~o-I--------<3'-~
B
::J
1
Fig. 3-Condensed Functional Schematic of 400-Type (Except 400G and H) KTU (CO or PBX Line Circuit)
Sheet 2 of 2)
Page 13114
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-400
Fig. 4-Line Status Indicator in 4000 KTU
Fig. 5-4000 KTU
Page 15
SECTION 518-215-400
OPTIONS
OPT
TIMEOUT
CO OR PBX
LINE
FEATURES
LONG TIME DELAY
(APPROX I MATELY 20 SECONDS)
VISUAL
HOLD CKT
AUDiBLE
SIGNAL
Hca)
LAMP WINK
LAMP STEADY
INTERRUPTED RING
STEADY RING
COMMON WITH 0 lODE
MATR I X CONTROL
I
KEY TEL SET
SW
HOOK
COMMON WITH RELAY
CONTROL
ly_R.;.(C_O;",)-<
PU
KEY
r-
-
I
NET·'II
RELEASE OF
DELAYED
HOLD I NG BR I DGE
HOLD
FROM CO OR PBX
RELEASE
BY LINE CURRENT
OPENS
CONNECTS TO 50A CUSTOMER
PREM I SES SYSTEM
A1
MINIMUM
OF 25 MS
'--
RG
,;~
-
KEY
(.;"\
13
T(STA)
12
A
LW L-I--''-_-«
16
L '__
'
P/0
)
R OR R1
MATRIX
BLK
~E
III
HOLD·
~
~--t====LG='I=,~'~~r-'L
600 MS
I RING
14
'!"'r-,
SHORT T I ME DELAY
(APPROX I MATEL Y 5 SECONDS)
II~;
OR
R OR
R1
L
®t@) ~
':>==-.J 105V
~
t"
10
RN
11
SEQUENCE
NOTES:
1. REQU I RES A MOUNT I NG
FACILITY REQUIPPEO WITH
AN 1B-, 20-, OR 40-PIN
CONNECTOR.
2. THE STATUS OF THE
RELAYS FOR ALL
FUNCT IONS OF THE KTU
ARE AS FOLLOWS·
FUNCT I ON
ANS
INC
...J
OR
w RING
HOLD
0:
INIT
CYCLE
CALL
A
R
0
R
0
B
R
0
C
R
0
0
R
L
0
0*
R
RELEASED
o = OPERATE
= FOLLOWS RINGING
3. ~O NOT CONNECT RING I NG
VOLTAGE THROUGH
TERM I NAL 10 WHEN
N OPTION IS PROVIDED.
li
LAMP WINK
SEQUENCE
I
I
:
L;~
LAMP
FLASH
SEQUENCE
€
p/O
INTERRUPTER
LF
-;:::1===#=:;-1--'
>---11
~~PSUP
+
q
B GRD
I NTERRUPTER
>-P/O
~
PWR SUP
B BAT.
17
I'
I
15
PIO
CONN
MG ' 1 r - t -
- I
'I + I
'--_ _ _--'1
120_26 VDC
PWR SUP
*
Fig, 6-Condensed Functional Schematic of 400G KTU (CO or PBX Line Circuit) (Sheet 1 of 2)
Page 16
ISS 6, SECTION 518-'"
4DOG KTU
14
:~
R2
CR7
B
C
I
R1
I
A ~f---...NV-.........!B
CR2
A
CR1
10
11
f----
I--r---:t+--.J.- - :
R12 J" ~:~ .
1
",..-vvv--o
~~--------.-----*------*~
Wc:
C
7
R8
12
~iCR5
I'
"f--'vvI.---,
c
1j
16
lF
c
R1l
i
I E2
.
>--
®. ~_~
.
"I-'-o------,® "1-+--<- ~
'----"''---_-l--_~~-~Cj::...o- - _ <- '';:''®
•
EI
):9
C4
-<
C
B
®
1-_ _ _ _ _-l-_~c2:....,.-----lT D1
R5
..---
R3
CR4
CI -24
R9
R4
A
L
R6
'---+......-+---1 B
>--o---~--~~ C
CT
{NOTE 31~2
A
Al
® A
T
RT2
82
h t@®
81
->-0
RT1
B
~B
Lt
8
::
::==='--==I~=C=R=6~8:-Ii,-24
TOP VIEW OF OPTION BLOCK WITH HANDLE TOWARD
USER. OPTION SYMBOLS SHOWN CONNECTED TO
TERMINALS INDICATE FACTORY PROVIDED OPTIONS.
OPTION
l
Y
X
T
W
t AN OPTION PLUG IS NOT PROVIOED FOR
THIS POSITION; USE THE OPTION PLUG
NORMALLY USED TO PRCV I DE OPT( ON R.
V
R
NT
M
K
CONNECT
OPTION PLUG
TO TERMINALS
82- 83
A1- A2
A2- A3
C3- C4
C2- C3
C1- C3
E2- E3
D1- D2
81-82
E1-E2
FACTORY
PROVIDED
"'
,/
.(
"
Fig. 6-Condensed Functional Schematic of 4000 KTU (CO or PBX Line Circuit) (Sheet 2 of 2)
Page 17/18
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-400
LED LINE STATUS
INDICATOR
TEST PINS
01 AND 02
Fig. 7-Line Status Indicator and Test Pins in 400H
KTU
OPTION
PLUGS
Fig . 8-400H KTU
Page 19
SECTION 518-215-400
CO OR PBX
LINE
T
OPTIONS
FEATURES
T*
CO OR PBX LINE CIRCUIT
l
AUDIBLE
SIGNAL
S*
HOLD
CIRCUIT
f-- RELEASE
R
COMMON AUDIBLE WITH
GROUND FOR RELAY
CONTROL
SW
PU
~K
-KEY
F1
LONG HOLD ABANDON
TIMEOUT (FOR ESS #1.
ESS #2. 812 PBX. 770
PBX. DIMENSION PBX)
AH
RG·I
SHORT HOLD ABANDON
(FOR ALL OTHERS)
~E
I
RING
SEQUENCE
LAMP WINK
SEQUENCE
I
ILAMP
I
~E
:
:
o::
ANSWERING
INCOMING
OR
HOLD
RINGINITIATING
CYCLE
CALL
R
0
RL
RL
-
H
RL
RL
0
RL - RELEASED
o - OPERATED
HOLD _
KEY
AUD SIG
LG'I~
L
PIO
INTERRUPTER
16
f
AUD SIG
PWR SUP
1
I
d--11'
I
RG
RN
11
10V t
'\.
"'
LW
LF
LAMP
PWR SUP
.1
I
PIO
CONN
1
ST
±HI'
LG
INTERRUPTER
PWR SUP
MG'I
20-26 VDC
PWR SUP
'---
I
.1
"'
4
2
7
/
5
I
MG
6
+
B GRD
15
-
B BAT.
17
PIO CONN
Fig. 9-Condensed Functional Schematic of 400H KTU (CO or PBX Une Circuit) (Sheet 1 of 2)
Page 20
8
RC
~
~
c£
12
A
FUNCTION
>-
13
T(STA)
FLASH
SEQUENCE
....
""UJ
9
R(STA)
R OR Rl
*FACTORY INSTALL LEO
NOTES:
1. REQUIRES A MOUNTING FACILITY
EQUIPPED WITH AN 18-. 20-.
OR 40-PIN CONNECTOR.
2. THE STATUS OF THE RELAYS FOR
ALL FUNCTIONS OF THE KTU
ARE AS FOLLOWS:
R(CO)
KEY TEL SET
INTERRUPTED RING
W*
V
14
R
OPT
-
T(CO)
ISS 6, SECTION S 18-:..
I
400H KTU
I
....--__--_....R1/IJ0....3 -f;:;------,
.v--i-----i---~ J~ (0
10
14~
/--'+-f+-~--I---l"~--+~--+--t---+'~l
. . . .-Y.+-J_1
. _--II R102 ~~ RV101
'--i:-t--------it- H
~ ~~-*t-----,
+-_-+........
U101
-I"-
1" R101
R104
9 ~---+__I__~---+--+-------~_+";~
C~~1
I
13
12
16
CR102
8
J
r
Q104
Q102W
R107
L
1
R106
CR104
DS101
A3
(9
IC102
RC
NETWORK
IC101
LOGIC
--------
11
11
-
A1t®
A2
CR103'
4
\1
2
7
5
C105
/1
"
\1 C104
J'I
B2
K:J
QlD1
~L--_--I
®B3
B1
~
®
R105
C102
6
5
CR101
1
*
7
~
TOP VIEW OF OPTION
BLOCK-HANDLE ASSEMBLY.
OPTION SYMBOLS SHOWN
CONNECTED ARE IN
FACTORY INSTALLED
POSITIONS.
Fig. 9-Condensed Functional Schematic of 400H KTU (CO or PBX Line Circuit) (Sheet 2 of 2)
Page 21
SECTION 518-215-400
PIO SIMILAR
T
TYPE PRIVATE
LINE CKT
AT DISTANT
Ir±,i
END
RG ~
(NOTE 2)
(N, R, S, T, W)
PIO
MATRIX BLK
KEY TEL SET
CA
[
@l
(R,T,
W)
AUD
SIG
-+__ __
~~__-4~R~O~R~R~I~>________
~
II RG
~
SW
NOTES:
I. REQUIRES A MOUNTING FACILITY EQUIPPED
WITH A 20- OR 40 - PIN CONNECTOR.
2. PRIVATE LINE CIRCUIT AT DISTANT END MAY
BE A 414A KTU. 419-lYPE KTlJ J OR ANY OTHER
TYPE PRIVATE LINE UNIT WHOSE RINGUP
CIRCUIT REQUIRES RINGING VOLTAGE AND
WHOSE SIGNAL ING CIRCUIT SENDS OUT
RINGING VOLTAGE.
3. FOR SATISFACTORY AUDIBLE RING BACK
TONE, THE RINGING SUPPLY MUST
CONTAIN AN AUDIBLE COMPONENT.
W~ T;RO~T
X
TIME-OUT
~
Al
'I
S
=
"-'
L
LAMP~LG
RC
PIO INTERRUPTER
LAMP
POWER
RINGING
SEQUENCE
RN
LP FLASH
SEQUENCE
TO
SH 2
LF
ST
INTERRUPTED
RING
M
~-----+~~----~
STEADY RING
M
T
10 SECONDS
UNDER
CONTROL
OF
T
STEADY RING TIME-OUT
~-----+-::C-=O"'M"M-:W::-I-=T"'H~ CIRCUIT
DIODE MATRIX
(B
AUDIBLE
~____-+-"C",O"NT",R",O"L,--__+-R___E___L=---cAY.:..)..j SIGNAL
W
~
23 SECONDS
16 SECONDS
R
n
m-
NETI
AUD SIG
POWER
OPTIONS:
...!...
PU
~
RH~K
UNDER
COMM WITH
CO~~ROL
gb~~R~tTRIX
R RELA_Y-L____--.j
AUDIBLE RINGBACK TONE (NOTE 3)
INTERRUPTER
MOTOR SUP
(-~~
20-26V DC (
TALK BAT.
POWER
SUPPLY
(
20-26V DC
B BAT•
LG
MG ,
~M::.G"--I____"':::=-
A BAT.
+
A GRD
B BAT.
B GRD
-
+
...!...-+:::....::=_
10Vl ____+I"O"'V..:t'--_
105Vt
AUD SIG (
PWR SUP
_--+-'R"G'--___
Fig. 10--Condensed Functional Schematic of 414A KTU (Manual Signaling, Ringdown, Private Line Circuit)
(Sheet 1 of 2)
Page 22
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-400
/
PIO CONN
T
RO
414A KTU I NOTE I)
A
i ~C3
n
@C I IRt,~
(
I4
I X
X)(
CI
)
C4
R3
10
CR4
liJ
R
R
T
cst lor
L
SH I
RN
8
B GRD
IOVt.
I05V±
RG
A
I
I05V+
R
If--
I
10Vr
A
B
~E
II
6
4
.'t-- ~
7
J
-24
-24
B
CR7~
A
.!!
~
LG.
MG
B BAT.
0
E
I6
ST
A GRD
C2
I
LF
A BAT.
~L
R2
-
RO
A
I·
RI
TI--
CRI
I
RC
FROM
CR3
9
RO
S
R
R4
8
'--
®
!:J
R
I
RI2
I
4
(
3
I7
A
B
J
* --rD,
B
B
I
- -+- -
RIO
RII
®
t@
R
CR6
B
CR9
~
I
R9
R8
E
E
E
E
I8
__
CRIO
-24
II' A
-24
II. B
f®
f®
2
3
L--
H'B
:'~C5
R7
A-
10Vi
Io
E
o E
105Vi
B
=
II' RG
A
I9
(
~(
II' B
Fig. 10-Condensed Functional Schematic of 414A KTU (Manual Signaling, Ringdown, Private Line Circuit)
(Sheet 2 of 2)
Page 23
NOTES:
PIO SIMILAR
'~1
I. REQUIRES A MOUNTING FACILITY TYPE
PRIVATE B
EQUIPPED WITH AN 18-,20-, OR
LINE CKT
40- PIN CONNECTOR.
AT
2. NOMINAL DC SIGNALING AANGE
DISTANT
AT MINIMUM BATTERY VOLTAGE
END
(-20V) IS 2200 OHMS.
*B
(NOTE 3)
3. PRIVATE LI NE CI RCUIT AT
-24
DISTANT END MAY BE A 415A KTU
OR ANY OTHER TYPE PRIVATE LINE UNIT WHOSE
RINGUP CIRCUIT REQUIRES A DC
VOLTAGE AND WHOSE SIGNALING
KEY TEL SET
CIRCUIT SENDS OUT A DC VOLTAGE.
4. FOR SATISFACTORY AUDIBLE
AUD
RG
RINGBACK TONE THE RINGING
SIG
I'
SUPPLY MUST CONTAIN AN
PU
SW
AUDIBLE COMPONENT.
~
5. FOR IDLE LINE TERMINATION
g,QQK
CONNECT A KS-13490, LI, 910
NETI
OHM RESISTOR IN SERIES WITH
A 542F, 21'F CAPACITOR
HOLD
ACROSS TERMINALS 9 AND 10.
KEY
ORDER AND PLACE COMPONENTS
'I
LOCALLY.
'--~
c...:.
AI
T
--
INTERRUPTED RING
T
STEADY RING
S
COM WITH DIODE
MATR IX CONTROL
M
AUDI BlE RI NGBACK
TONE (NOTE 4)
9
rA~f-<
R
T
A
L
12
AUD
SIG
PIO
f.~4
R2
R:~£ Jr~
....
_'C_I+-,\RI\I"""A•. 24
-24~ A
16~-24
B
B
C
C
6
1
~
10V:!:
CRI
:VI
B
-24
B
CR4
C~.~i_~~-4_B_--+
CR2
VISUAL HOLD SIG
11
7
~------------~,C
LW
ST
AUD
SIG
SUP
LP
SUP
PIO
INTERRUPTER
ST
MB
RINGING
SEQUENCE
INTERRUPTER
MOTOR
SUPPLY
LP FLASH
SEQUENCE
20-26V DC
TALK
SUPPLY
LP WINK
SEQUENCE
~
POWER
SUPPLY
20-26V DC
B BAT.
SUPPLY
LAMP SUP
AUD SIG SUP
c!!!!!..W
MG
LG,MG
C+-
A BAT.
C-+
B BAT.
IOV±
A GRD
B GRD
10V±
105V±
,J'
18
~(_ _--,A~ -24
3
17
~(----III' A
(
B _ 24
I
(
4
(
IOV:!:
10
(
105V+
CYf+-<>8+<~
~
C
R5
105V:!:
RN
""7
::
A
LF
A
TB
~---A-----:-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-"""""-IB
RC
r
±f<~
i-.-i
~I-~
t
1
~t--II----""'Wirll'
TB
~ ~
2!
~r
1
I
(S,T,W)
Y
A
B-
.~
MATRIX BLK
S
J Il
t,
9
I3
R8
~L---------------' '~-'~~~/I~-+~~
it~~)w
R
BC
TI
14
LAM~
OPTIONS:
W
415A KTU (NOTES 1 AND 2)
PIO CONN
Ii, B
'--
Fig. II-Condensed Functional Schematic of 41 SA KTU (Automatic, DC Signaling, Private Line Circuit)
CR3
S
PIO TEL SET AT DISTANT END
PIO CONN
--r:R.:......_ _ _ _ _ _- ,
T
416A KTU {NOTES I AND 2 I
RO
14
TI
RI~ ~____
RI2
SW
'I
B
PU
';!Q.QK
~
NET.IH_~41~:I_.-+-:T____----.
I
~~:o I
'-'-'-'
I
_~;J,
_24 A
CR4
~RV2
RI3
105Vt
II RG
=A
B
B
RIO
-24
A
RII
CR9
j
t@l
r
t
~
L
___~==~--...
>-~
A
B
RC
__~~
7
'--..
B
~~
ST
M >--1---------------------+---=<
l
MB
C-""'---f--------------------f--....
MG
LG MG
A"':'-BA"'T"'.
20-26V DC ( TALK SUPPLY .;+~__+_-------------------+-'A:--=G"'RD:-<
20-26V DC (
B BAT. SUPPLY
+
R8
CONTROL PURPOSES
AS DESIRED
19
E
15
10
-<1-----<
0
B
RO
~E
CR7
A
B
24
@
NOTES'
I. REQUIRES A MOUNTING FACILITY EQUIPPED
WITH A 20- OR 40- PIN CONNECTOR.
10V±
2. NOMINAL DC SIGNALI NG RANGE AT MINIMUM
BATTERY VOLTAGE {-20VI IS 700 OHMS.
3. FOR SATISFACTORY AUDIBLE RINGBACK
TONE, THE RINGING SUPPLY MUST CONTAIN
AN AUDIBLE COMPONENT.
OPTIONS'
W
II, A
-24
II' B
I05V±
A
~
A
~-24
4
17
I
@
I
J:
E
E
E
E
E
E
B BAT.
IOV+
SPARE CONTACT FOR
18
B GRD
I05V+
~~Dp~~~ (~G!!:R:!!D__+_-------------------+---::::::-RG::<;;
POWER SUPPLY
~l
-2
RO
8
II
LAMP __~~------_4--------------------+_--~L~F<
INTERRUPTER
,1
RI
1j~~~---l"
RI4
~f-- ~
5
SEQUENCE
POWER SUPPLY
t
A'~
CI
A
= A
p~~Di~~--R-IN~G~IN-G------~~------------------~--~R~N,
PIO INTERRUPTER
1~
-24
~
I05V±
SEQUENCE
R6
c2i
R2
T
KEY TEL SET
SUP LP FLASH
R5
1j 1
CR5
R OR
RI
...
Z--P:-/"-O-'MA=TR07IO":-X-=-BL:-:K:---tl-@-s..
:
CRII
R4
RI5
L
LAMP~LG
AUD
SIG
I
RO
t-----~
~~
t:1
S~Y
~
B
TB
'-'-'-J
AI"
~r-
R3
NET·If-_ _ _ _ _
INTERRUPTED RING
T
STEADY RING
S
COMMON WITH DIODE
MATRIX CONTROL
M
AUDIBLE RINGBACK
TONE (NOTE 31
II'RG
10V±
II'B
Fig. 12--Condensed Functional Schematic of 416A KTU (Station Line Circuit)
AUDIBLE
SIGNAL
KEV TEL SET STA A
(NOTE 4)
PU KEV
r--
418A KTU (NOTES I, 2, AND 3)
TI
12
~
A
I
'I~
-24 A
13
X
BB
AA
t
~:.;
I~C
10V±
A BB
4
.
-24
BB
*
~
. s
S AA
S
B
sw
I9
~
S
I6
RC2
@~@>-
~
S
5
~
\.
@
PIO INTERRUPTER
LAMP FLASH
SEQUENCE
LAIIP
POWER
RINGING
SEQUENCE
AUD SIG
PWR SUP
LF
RN
II
C
C
ST
A[£
C
I
.~'~~.~.
A'I~
LG,IIG
I'
TBI
AA
C
B
'I
B BB
-24~
A GRD
*
B BAT.
I
B GRD
B'I~ I
105V± ~
BB
A BAT.
8
B B
c.!.
-24 B
10V±~
ST
liB
6
C
I
(Z,V,W,T,R)!
P/O MATRIX BLK
7
3
2
C
®
:=J
B
8
I
-24
RG
PIO
CONN
A
1@
fJ
1°
~
R fLG
~;,
S /
4
@
::eJ LAIIP
!(Z,V,R,K)
r
~B
AI
I'
~I
f.1
f.1
(R,S,W,K>l >-
@
t.:.:J '--
L
TO STA
o
rg
(Z,V,W, T,S,R,K)
~l>- r!
10
7
'siG
I
I
H~K
S
~~
r-P/O IIATRIX BLK
KEV TEL SET STA B
r--rPU KEV
T
R
9
AA
T2
105V+
10
4
-
10Vi
e
J
J
-J
liB POWER SUPPLY
IIG
INTERRUPTER
MOTOR
SUPPLY
+
20 -26V DC
TALK BAT.
+
20 -26V DC
B BAT.
AUD SIG
SUPPLY
LAIIP SUP
Fig. l3-Condensed Functional Schematic of 4l8A KTU (Short Range; DC Signaling, Private Line Circuit) (Sheet 1 of 2)
-
VI
t
i
OPTIONS:
NOTES:
W
INTERRUPTED RING
T
STEADY RING
S
COM AUD WITH DIODE MATRIX CONTROL
R
INTERRU PTED RING
Z
STEADY RING
K
COM AUD WITH DIODE MATRIX CONTROL
Y
TWO-WAY MANUAL (NOTE 61
Q
TWO-WAY AUTOMATIC
H
ONE-WAY AUTOMATIC, ONE -WAY MANUAL
M
TWO-WAY MANUAL
REQUIRES A MOUNTING FACILITY EQUIPPED WITH A 20- OR 40-PIN CONNECTOR.
TWO-WAY
AUTOMATIC
ONE-WAY
AUTOMATIC
ONE-WAY
MANUAL
(NOTE 51
2. FOR SATISFACTORY OPERATION OF RELAYS A AND B THE MAXIMUM DC RANGE IS
100 OHMS WITH A MINIMUM BATTERY VOLTAGE OF -20V. WHERE LAMPS ARE
OPERATED FROM THE KTU WITHOUT AUXILIARY APPARATUS, THE NORMAL
50-OHM LOOP RANGE APPLIES.
SIGNALING
AUDIBLE
RINGBACK
TONE
(NOTE 7)
3. THE CONTINUOUS METHOD OF STRAPPING MUST BE USED ON TBI FOR OPTIONS
REQUIRING STRAPS BETWEEN 3 TERMINALS. FOR EXAMPLE S,W OPTION WOULD BE
WIRED FROM 2, THRU 3, TO 4 AS FOLLOWS:
4. STATION "A" IS ALWAYS ASSIGNED AS THE AUTOMATIC SIGNALING STATION
WHENEVER THE ONE-WAY AUTOMATIC, ONE-WAY MANUAL SIGNALING OPTION
IS USED.
5. THESE OPTIONS APPLY TO THE SIGNAL KEY AND AUDIBLE SIGNAL AT STA "B"
ONLY. THE AUDIBLE SIGNAL AT STA "A" IS UNDER CONTROL OF RELAY "S". THE
AUDIBLE SIGNAL AT STA "A" MAY BE PART OF A COMMON AUDIBLE ARRANGEMENT
PROVIDED THE DIODE MATRIX IS USED FOR CONTROL.
6. THE AUDIBLE SIGNALS AT STA "A'I AND "SII MAY 8E PART OF A COMM AUDIBLE
ARRANGEMENT PROVIDED THE DIODE MATRIX IS USED FOR CONTROL.
7. FOR SATISFACTORY AUDIBLE RINGBACK TONE THE RINGING SUPPLY MUST
CONTAIN AN AUDIBLE COMPONENT.
Fig. l3-Condensed Functional Schematic of 4l8A KTU (Short Range, DC Signaling, Private Line Circuit) (Sheet 2 of 2)
'1
III
•
~
CD
-'"
i
~
,.---
PIO SIMILAR TYPE PRIVATE liNE CKT
AT DISTANT END (NOTE 4)
- - --
T
IO~V:t
T
~
I
[! >-r&
PIO
KEY TEL SET
PU
~
R~K
NET.
CONN
R
T
A
"
L:..:J
AI
.. f--!l-<
L:..:J
HlD
KEY
L
':~ 1 ~
RG'
R
T
AUD SIG
:~TRIX
BlK
.I
@
1
(R;j,w)
A
~
I
AUD
SIG
PWR
RNG SEQ
RN
lP Fl
SEQUENCE
e
LP WK
SEQUENCE
PIO
INTERRUPTER
t
POWER SUPPL
IN~ERRUPTER
TALK BAT.
IF
IF
LW
LW
ST
ST
LG MG
A BAT.
+
A GRD
20 -26V DC [ B BAT.
+
LAMP SUP
C
05V
±
GRD
10V±
B GRD
I05V±
RG
10V±
)
""'-f~+-<
R
3
1~r-~
8
AI I
A7
I'
A
RZ
A
b~
rIJ9
R7
Ij
O1
I
C
I
I
I
I
RI3
6~
R5
H
C
RII
C
RI2
~B
B
AI8
~-24
A3
f----l1'A
AI7
~-24
AI5
f----ll' 8
AIO f---105V±
AO
f----i1'RG
A4
f---IOV±
CR8
H
B
I'
B CRIO
H
A 419-TYPE KTU, 414A KTU, OR ANY OTHER TYPE
PRIVATE LINE UNIT WHOSE RING UP CIRCUIT
REQUIRES RINGING VOLTAGE AND WHOSE SIGNALING
CIRCUIT SENDS OUT RINGING VOLTAGE.
5. FOR SATISFACTORY AUD IBLE RINGBACK TONE THE
RING I NG SUPPLY fUST CONTA I N AN AUD I BLE
COMPONENT
j
Bc{:jCR6
iC
A
CR5
RO
B
-24
NOTES:
L REQUIRES A MOUNTING FACILITY EQUiPPED
WITH TWO 914A (40 -PIN) CONNECTORS
MOUNTED IN A VERTICAL PLANE.
2. MAXIMUM RINGING RANGE AT 105V±,20 HZ
IS 3000 OHMS. AT 1I0V±.30HZ IS 4100 OHMS.
l. D RELAY AND ASSOCIATED WIRING ARE ON
419B KTU ONLY.
4. PRIVATE LINE CIRCUIT AT DISTANT END MAY BE
RI9
~
RO
H
RO
10V±
RI4 I
~
II
R6
t~
*A
RIO
~
'RV2
R
R9
L..-
I
I-G-
,--:-----'---.,-
7
~
@
B
I'
R8
10
01
@
CR2
--,
CR9
I
24 B
H'
A6
CR3
-24
JLl
A
e
].
R20
R21
B
A2
0
RI
TI
R
~-24
B
A5
CB~
1RO
A
,.IJl.
AI
~E
-24
R4
0
RO
A8
I
B BAT.
AUD SIG
PWR SUP
AI6
MB
MG
20 -26V DC [
RN
AI3
AI2
~~+.:'
I ,J
'--
MB
MOT SUP
RC
A9
,:~
419-TYPE KTU (NOTES 1, Z, AN~ l)
A f}
R0 1
(
R
!RG
lP
PWR
AI4
~
~B
OPTIONS'
WITHOUT Z 125
OR X
SECONDS
TIME-OUT
Z
17 SECONDS
X
6 SECONDS
W
N
UNDER CONT
OF TIME-OUT
CIRCUIT
AUDIBLE
COM WITH 010 MTX CONT (B RELAY)
SIGNAL
UNDER
STEADY RING
CONTROL OF
COM WITH 010 MTX CONT R RELAY
1.1
AUDIBLE RINGBACK TONE (NOTE 5)
T
S
R
INTER. RING
STEADY RING
'---
Fig, 14-t<:ondensecl Functional Schematic of 419-Type KTU (Automatic Signaling, Ringdown, Private Une Circuit).
SECTION S 18-215-400
PIO SIMILAR
TYPE PRIVATE
LINE CKT
AT DISTANT
ItV±
END
(NOTE 2)
I
KEY TEL SET
CA
@l
AUD
SIG
(R,T,W)
'IRG
R
~~____~R~O~R~R~I+>_________
SW
HOOK
NOTES'
I. REQUIRES A MOUNTING FACILITY EQUIPPED
WITH A 20- OR 40- PIN CONNECTOR.
NETI
BE A 414A KTU, 419-1YPE KlU, OR ArN OTHER
TYPE PRIVATE LINE UNIT WHOSE RINGUP
CIRCUIT REQUIRES RINGING VOLTAGE AND
WHOSE SIGNALING CIRCUIT SENDS OUT
RINGING VOLTAGE.
3. FOR SATISFACTORY AUDIBLE RINGBACK
TONE, THE RINGING SUPPLY MUST
CONTAIN AN AUDIBLE COMPONENT.
Z OR X
Z
X
W
T
TIME-OUT
R
1:;\
T
S
L
LAMP~LG
RC
PIC INTERRUPTER
LAMP
POWER
RINGING
SEQUENCE
TO
SH 2
RN
"LP FLASH
SEQUENCE
LF
10 SECONDS
ST
UNDER
INTERRUPTED
CONTROL
RING
OF
STEADY RING TIME-OUT
COM'" WITH
M
CIRCUIT
S
DIODE MATRIX
CONTROL
(B
RELAY)
R
STEADY RING
N
COMM WITH
DIODE MATR IX
CONTROL
UNDER
CONTROL
OF
M
~
=
23 SECONDS
16 SECONDS
""-
~
AUD SIG
POWER
OPTIONS'
PU
~
AI
'I
2. PRIVATE LINE CIRCUIT AT DISTANT END MAY
WITHOUT
i
(N, R, S, T, w)
PIO
MATRIX BlK
T
AUDIBLE
SIGNAL
INTERRUPTER
MOTOR SUP
MB
MG
J
LG,
MG
A BAT,
R RELAY
AUDIBLE RINGBACK TONE (NOTE 3)
(-==-
POWER
SUPPLY
20-26V DC [
TALK BAT.
+
-
A GRD
20-26V DC [
B BAT.
:
B GRD
B BAT.
IOV±
IOV±
I05V±
AUD SIG
PWR SUP
--
Fig. IS-Condensed Functional Schematic of 461A KTU (Manual Signaling, Ringdown, Private Une Circuit)
(Sheet 1 of 2)
Page 30
ISS 6, SECTION SI8-215-400
PIO CONN
/
T
RO
I4
E
461A KTU (NOTE 1)
I
f
®C n !t:rl:~R3
C4
C3
10 1
R
~
R
R
T
L
B GRD
IOVt:
I05V±
----'-
CRI
R2
A
-24
C2
A
RO
12
16
0
E
8
11
B
6
R
4
'11- ..,3
7
18
J
E
E
E
I
E
4 E
Io E
3
I7
A
,
B
-24
-24
B CR7
A
I05V±
f--
ro ---if
A
IOVi
A
~E
.!!
~
LG.
MG
B BAT.
A
I'
RI
TI--
9
ST
A GRD
CI
R4
CR3
LF
A BAT.
,
13
RC
RN
CR4
C6+11~
RO
S
A
l:H
8
tj
®
CRIO
R
I
RI2
-24
~I'B
A
11,
B
IOVi
I05V1
II'RG
." B
R
CR9
R8
24
rD-
-TBI
R9
II.
--
I
I
~R17
CR6
B
-
I
I
RII
t@
RVI
."A
IB
I r
T-.J.-
RIO
®
*
:::~C5
t®
t®
2
3
R7
A
B."
Fig. 15-Condensed Functional Schematic of 461A KTU (Manual Signaling, Ringdown, Private Une Circuit)
(Sheet 2 of 2)
Page 31
31 Pages
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT & TCo Standard
SECTION S 18-215-401
Issue 3, December 1977
SERVICE
1A2 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
KEY TELEPHONE UNITS
AUXILIARY LINE SERVICES
1.
GENERAL
This section provides schematic information
for the 400-series KTUs which provide
services auxiliary to Central Office (CO), Private
Branch Exchange (PBX), or private line services.
1.01
This section is reissued to add information
on the 471B, 479B, and 49SA KTUs and
the 1I6A1 circuit module (CM).
1.02
vertical 40-pin connectors). The circuit boards plug
into mating connectors in key service units, panels,
or apparatus mountings. Wiring from the con nectors
will be dedicated or nondedicated leads. Dedicated
leads are those that normally appear on the same
contacts of all KTUs, such as supply voltages and
grounds, and are normally factory-wired. Nondedicated
leads are those whose designation and function
vary and are made avai lable for installer connections.
Fig. 1 and 2 show typical 4- and S-inch KTU s.
The auxiliary service KTUs covered in this
section provide operating features in addition
to those provided by the line service units. These
features include:
1.03
• Conference arrangements-417 A KTU
• Multiline exclusion-405A (MD) or 42SA
KTU
• Supplemental hold arrangements-406A (MD),
or 429A (MD) and 429B KTU
• Music-on-hold-451B hn d 49SA. KTU
• Toll restriction-471A, . 471B,. or 479A,
. 479B. KTU
Fig. I-Typical 4-lnch Key Telephone Unit
Information on line services is covered in 51S-215-400;
intercom services and associated features, 51S-215-402;
control circuits including audible signals, 51S-215-403.
Electrical
Mechanical
Functional schematics (Fig. 3 through 14)
cover the basic circu itry of each KTU,
contacts used, and its relationship to telephone
sets, other KTUs, power supplies, and apparatus.
Dashed lines are used to si mplify the schematics
and to indicate intermediate circuitry. If full
1.05
All circuit components on these KTUs are
mounted on a plug-in printed wiring board,
one end of which is equipped with contacts. A
4-inch board may have lS-, 20-, or 40-contacts; an
8-inch board will have SO contacts (requiring two
1.04
NOTICE
Not for li se or disclosure outside the
Bell System except under written agreement
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
SECTION 518-21 5-401
SD-69921-01, Issue 1-471- and 479-type
KTUs
If this section is to be used with equipment or
apparatus reflecting later issues of the drawings,
reference should be made to the CDs and SDs to
determine the exte nt of the changes and the
manner in which the section may be affected.
2.
IDENTIFICATION
405A (MD) KTU (Multiline Excl usion Circuit)
The 405A (MD) KTU (F ig. 3) is a 4-inch,
20-contact unit which must be used with a
259B or 272A KTU. The 405A KTU has been
replaced by the 428A KTU (see 2.06 for features)
which confor ms to standard contact lead configuration.
2 .01
Fig . 2- Typical 8-lnch Key Telephone Unit
schematics are required, refer to the SDs listed in
1.08.
Voltages req uired for operation of t he KTU,
or provided to associated apparatus by the
KTU, are shown with their co nnector pins. Other
voltages may appear on the contacts of the mating
con nector, depending on the mounting arrangement,
but not on the KTU.
Note: A 405A (MD) KTU cannot be used in
the 513-, 514- or 515-type KSUs, 597- or
598-type panels, or 69-type apparatus mountings.
1.06
1.07
KTUs may require the fo llowing power
supply vo ltages and their associated grounds.
406A (MD) KTU (Supplementary Hold Detector Circuit)
The 406A (MD) KTU (Fig. 4) is a 4-inch,
18-contact unit which must be used with a
259B or 272A KTU. The 406A KTU has been
replaced by the 429A KTU (see 2.09 for features)
which conforms to standard contact lead configuration.
2.02
• -24V (B battery) for control
Note: A 406A (MD) KTU cannot be used in
the 513-, 514- or 515-type KSUs, 597- or
598-type panels, or 69-type apparatus mountings.
• -24V (A battery) for talk
• ±10V for visual signals
408A (MD) KTU (Flutter Generator Circuit)
• ±105V for audibl e signals
The 408A (MD) KTU (Fig. 5) is a 4-inch,
18-contact unit which must be used with a
259B or 272A KTU. The 408A KTU has been
replaced by t he 430A KTU (see 2.09 for features)
which conforms to standard contact lead configuration.
2 .03
1.08
This issue of t he section is based on the
following drawings:
SD-69489-01 , Issue 5-405A and 428A KTU
Note: A 408A (MD) KTU cannot be used in
the 513-, 514- or 515-type KSUs, 597- or
598-type panels, or 69-type apparatus mountings.
SD-69530-01, Issue 6-406A, 408A, 429A,
429B, and 430A KTU
SD-69561-01, Issue 2-417 A KTU
417 A KTU (Add-on Conference Circuit)
SD-69590-01,
Issue 2-421A KTU
t SD-69922-01, Issue 2-45IB, 498A KTU
and 116Al CM.
Page 2
The 417A KTU (Fig. 6) is a 4-inch, 40-contact
unit that provides for bridging of two lines
for a 3-way conference in th~ following arrangements:
2 .04
(a) A CO line and a PBX line
ISS 3, SECTION 518-215-401
EXCLUDED
PIO
STATION I
~
NET·IS~OK
Il..2..JI
"
AI
ETI
ETI
ERI
ERI
EAI
EAI
PU
~
(NOTE I)
CONT
1?TI
~
·1
AI
TI
CAl
-'-'-
EI
RI
TI
EI
R3
I
RI
S
(~2)
KEY
CRI
A
CAl
S
l~
~
fr.
TYPE
A
KTU
LINE I j
T
R
RI
HOOK
I
'--
HOLD
KEY
CONTROL STATION
TYPICAL KEY TEL
SET CKT
NET.
405A IMO) KTU
2598 KTU
PU
RVI
,--~_......:oB -24
I
I
CL.
PU
~
~
CA2
CA2
R2
R2
T2
T2
I
I
EL
E2
LG
:'h-
EXCLUDED
T
400-l
TYPE
A
KTU
LINE 2
STATION 2
PU
~
NET·IS~OK
"
AI
Il..2..JI
CR2
A
ET2
ER2
ER2
EA2
EA2
I
EL
,,[
POWER
SUPPLY
LG
10V±
I
gO
B BAT.
B GRO
B GRO
I
I
EEl
E2
IOV±
88AT.
--1-R4
-
HOLD
KEY
E2
R2
ET2
17
~-24
II
f-------il' B
RV2
'--_ _.....~B _ 24
NOTES:
I. CONTROL KEY MAY BE LOCKING
OR NONLOCKING.
2
"s"
LEAD CAN ONLY MULTIPLE TO
OTHER 405A KTUS CONTROLLED BY
THE SAME STATION.
Fig. 3-Condensed Functional Schematic of 405A (MO) KTU (Multiline Exclusion Circuit)
Page 3
SECTION 518-215-401
,--
KEY TEL SET
sw
HOLD
SUPL
HOLD
HOOK
KEY
KEY
'I
406A (140) KTU
P/O
Z596
PU
KEY
CR9
KTU
A(I)
A
T
3
(
B R6
FI
I
-Z4V
L( I)
tCI
18
L
~
RI 6
-24V
FI
-Z4V~--;
CR7
FI
--.---
8
~
8
CRZ
R5
P/O LINE CIRCUIT
A
-Z4V
B
A (I)
A
L( I)
L(I)
START SIG CKT
-24V
8
CRIO
FI
I'
P/0 FLUTTER GEN CKT
FL
FL
FL
FLST
FLST
10Vt
START S I G FOR
FLUTTER GEN
18
CRI
MESSAGE REGISTER
-Z4V
~
PC
PC (I)
~
FI
-24V
4
CR4
MR
pc(z)
PC
-24V
F2
POWER SUPPLY
SUP
HOLD
KEY
HOLD
KEY
PU
KEY
ZO-26
V DC
A(Z)
'I
rcJ -iv
C
f"
~B
B GRO
KEY TEL SET
SII
HOOK
8
~
MESSAGE REGI STOR
B BAT
A
15
~I'
17
~-24
16
F2
I
L
13
F2
--t-I
L(2)
CRII
R7
CR8
"t f 8
F2
C2
~
F2
CR5
p/O liNE CIRCUIT
LAMP SIG CKT
R II
L(2)
L
.(2)
A
IZ
A
-24V~
-24V
B
CRI2
14
'---
Fig. 4-Condensed Functional Schematic of 406A (MD) KTU (Supplementary Hold Detector Circuit)
Page 4
B
-24
ISS 3, SECTION 518-215-
MESSAGE REGISTER (IF PROVIDED)
408A (MO) KTU
P/O 259B KTU
-24
_24~FL H~
B
MR
R4
C3
RI
p/o
SUP HOLD DET CKT
CRI
rLST
~,
I
18
I
I
~_l_.l_J
FI
1-.
FL
FL
1
FI
FL
P/O LINE CIRCUIT
L
LAMP SIG CKT
KEY TEL SET
L
F
SW
HOOK
r--
B
PU
HOLD
KEY
II
I
SP
13
~
~ _____
SUP
HOLD
KEY
AI
R7
R8
CRI
--,
B
-24
POWER SUPPLY
LG
LAMP
[
'I
SUPPLY lOY'
L
B BAT.
20-26V [ DC
+
~i
B GRO
R6
~,
LG
(
17
15
(
lOY'
B
-24
B
II'
Fig. 5-Condensed Functional Schematic of 408A (MD) KTU (Flutter Generator Circuit)
(b) Two PBX lines or two CO lines
(c) A CO or PBX line and an intercom line.
• Control station can leave conference by
placing line on hold and remaining off-hook,
allowing other parties to continue conversation
without transmission loss.
The 417A KTU has the following features:
• Circuit may be controlled by two stations
when diode protection is locally furnished .
• Circuit can be operated by exclusion switch,
external nonlocking key, or converted line
pickup key.
• Circuit busy lamp when line pickup key is
used.
• Either control station can disconnect from
conference leaving two parties to continue
conference.
• Compatible with speakerphone.
Page 5
14
R
: SA
:
r--o
19
LITI
T
R
PIO
CONN
T
R
A
B BAT.
20-26V DC
c
24
25
C
26
B GRD
17
+
15
NOTES:
I. REQUIRES A MOUNTING FACILITY EQUIPPED
WITH A 40-PIN CONNECTOR.
2. DIODES SHOWN FOR "w" OPTION ARE t(S-15724.LI
AND MUST BE ORDERED AND INSTALLED LOCALLY.
CONTROL STATION IS EQUIPPED WITH
THE
THE
SPEAKERPHONE FEATURE.
4. REMOVE AND INSULATE
FROM TERMINALS
EXCLUSION KEY LEADS
1T AND 1R IN THE TELEPHONE
SET, IF SO CONNECTED.
5. KS-15724,LI DIODE MUST BE INSTALLED IN "A" LEAD OF
TEL SET WHEN CONFERENCE CIRCUIT IS CONTROLLED B Y
A NONLOCKING KEY. FOR METHOD OF CONNECTION, USE
STATION BUSY ·OPTION AS SHOWN IN CONNECTION
SECTION OF TYPE SET USED.
6. ASSOCIATED LAMP LEADS FROM 400-TYPE·LlNE.
CIRCUITS ARE CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO TEL SETS.
7. THE 417A KTU MAYBE USED TO PROVIDE THE
ADD-ON FEATURE WiTH DIAL INTERCOM:
Till
R (II
A (II
12
13
16
R2
T
R
A (21
A
~
B
-24
OPTIONS:
R3
SW
HOOK
1
~
(NOTE 51
STA IF
®
HOLD
KEY
CONTROLLED
I !~NLOCKING
I
X
ONE STATION
W
TWO STATIONS
Y
CONTROLLED BY EXCLUSION KEY
KEY
CONVERTED
36
32
33
t f------~-24
I
-11
R T
t 1
'1
KEY TEL SET
(NOTE 61
PU
--?
A
A
PU
'--
~I'
PIO
WHEN
30
B
CONN
3. liZ" OPTION MUST BE PROVIDED
29
A
is
~-24
28
I
C
POWER
SUPPLY
C
1R
IT
400-TYPE
LINE
CKT FOR
1ST
LINE
~ ~'W~~AJ~~G IS
LAMP
PWR SUP
-=
LG
Fig. 6-Condensed Functional Schematic of 417A KTU (Add.On Conference Circuit)
ACTIVATED
ISS 3, SECTION 518-215-401
• Circuit is arranged to cancel conference
when handset is placed on-hook or speakerphone
is returned to OFF.
• One of the conferenced lines may be
disconnected by returning exclusion key to
normal or by operating the non locking key.
428A KTU (Multiline Exclusion Circuit)
2.05
The 428A KTU (Fig. 7) is a 4-inch, 40-contact
unit which replaces the 405A (MD) KTU.
The KTU permits a key telephone set to
exclude a station or stations from either of
two CO or PBX lines using a common control key.
One key can provide control for as many exclusion
circuits as are required at a control station. An
exclusion key, cutoff or turnbutton key, convertible
pickup key, or an external locking or non locking
key, may be used as the control key. In all cases,
exclusion is canceled when the control station hangs
up. A visual signal can be provided at the control
station, indicating exclusion is in use.
2.06
429A (MD) and 429B KTUs (Supplementary Hold
Detector Circuit) and 430A KTU (Flutter Generator
Circuit)
The 429A (MD), 429B, and 430A KTUs (Fig.
8 and 9) are 4-inch, 40- and 20-contact units
which replace the 406A and 408A KTUs, respectively.
2.07
receive the normal hold signal. This enables an
attendant, having access to a number of lines,
to recognize calls he has placed on hold and calls
being held by associate attendants. I Hold
does not require the use of a supplementary
hold button; however, the regular hold button
must be equipped with a transfer contact
arrangement, as in the 565HK-type telephone
set.
A hold detector circuit is required on a per
line basis with priority hold and on a
per station per line basis with I hold. The
429-type KTU provides two detector circuits.
2.10
The 430A (flutter generator) can connect to
a maximum of 100 lamps and 20 supplementary
and/or regular hold buttons.
2.11
.451 B KTU (Music-On-Hold)
The 451B KTU (Fig. 10) is a 4-inch, 40-contact
unit that provides music-on-hold to CO/PBX
line circuits.
2.12
The 451B KTU transmits music to distant
stations that are placed on hold by users
of this system. The KTU contains seven identical
circuits, each of which may provide music-on-hold
to one CO/PBX line circuit. The music source
should have an adjustable volume control so that
the listening level of the music may be adjusted.
2.13
These KTUs together provide an adjustable
lamp flutter of approximately 12 interruptions
per second to indicate a supplementary hold condition
as distinguished from lamp wink or steady signal
associated with a normal hold condition.
2.08
2.09
.Note: The 451B KTU is not electrically
interchangeable with the 498A KTU, and it
cannot be used with the 400H KTU. The
451B KTU cannot be used in the apparatus
mounting listed in Table A.•
Supplementary hold provides two features:
(a) Priority Hold where the flutter indication
is desired at all stations having access to
lines so equipped. It serves to alert personnel
that an incoming call has been answered
(acknowledged only), placed on hold, and should
be completed as soon as the first available
attendant is able to do so. Priority Hold
requires a key which contains the supplementary
hold button as well as the regular hold button.
(b) I Hold where the flutter indication is
desired only on the line appearance at the
station initiating the hold. All other stations
471A .and 471B. KTUs (Battery Reversal Toll
Restriction)
The 471A KTU (Fig. 11) is a 4-inch, 18-contact
unit which provides for restricting toll calls
on a per-line basis to key telephone stations. This
circuit can only be used with central office circuits
that provide a polarity reversal on the tip and ring
of the line on toll calls.
2.14
2.15
The toll restriction circuit is provided to:
• Determine that a toll call has been dialed
Page 7
SECTION 518-215-401
• Drop toll calls from restricted stations by
opening the tip and ring
• Optionally restricts or passes toll calls in
home NP As where the prefix 1 is used
• Allow toll calls from unrestricted stations.
• Can be arranged for loop-start or ground-start
operation. Ground start operation provides
more security against "nonallowed" calls
being placed.
2.16
The status of each station during toll calls
is determined by the manner in which the
station A lead is wired. Restricted stations are
wired to the A lead from the associated CO/PBX
line circuit; unrestricted stations are wired to the
A(U) lead from the 471A KTU (standard wiring
arrangement, Fig. 11). This is the preferred
method of wiring. The 471A KTU can also be
used in installations where grouping of restricted
or unrestricted A leads is not desired or where
A lead control is not used. In these cases, the
471A KTU is installed in the tip and ring between
the line circuit, if used, and the restricted telephone
sets (alternate wiring arrangement, Fig. 11). With
this wiring, restricted stations on the line may be
cut off for approximately 2 seconds during polarity
reversal. No A lead connections are made to the
471A KTU.
2.21
tThe 479B is the same as the 479A KTU
except it can be used with the privacy feature
and/or supplementary hold. The 479B also offers
better protection against registration of false digits
in step-by-step (SXS) central offices .•
2.22
All programming and options (Fig. 12) are
applied to the 479-type KTU and the 107A
or 107B CM using KS-21290,Ll connectors as
follows:
• Ground start or loop start-479-type KTU
• Prefix 1 calls, restricted or permitted-479-type
KTU
2.17
The 471A KTU can be installed in any slot
of a mounting arrangement that will accept
a 400-type KTU line circuit.
• Digit absorption-107A CM
• Unrestricted dialing of one or two foreign
NPAs-I07B CM.
2.18
tThe 471B KTU is identical to the 471A
KTU except that it has been updated for
use with the privacy and supplementary hold
feature. In addition, the 471B has been improved
to reduce the minimum duration of polarity reversal
that is detected .•
479A tand 4798. KTUs {Rotary Dial Toll Restriction}
2.19
The 479A KTU (Fig. 12) is an 8-inch,
20-contact unit which provides toll restriction
on rotary lines where central office toll diversion
is not available. Optional circuit modules can be
mounted on the 479A KTU to provide digit absorption
(107A) or to allow restricted stations to call foreign
number plan areas (107B).
2.20
The 479A KTU:
• Monitors rotary dialing to detect restricted
digit combinations
Note: If 107A CM is not required, two 107B
CMs can be mounted on the 479-type KTU
for a maximum of four allowed NP A codes.
2.23
Because the 479-type KTU is an 8-inch
board, it requires a mounting arrangement
having two vertical connectors such as a 69D
apparatus mounting, 642A panel, or 513-, 514-, or
5I5-type KSU. The status of the stations during
toll calls is determined by how the station A lead
is wired. Restricted stations are wired to the A
lead of the associated line circuit; unrestricted
stations are wired to the A(U) lead from the
479-type KTU. Ground start lines require the A
lead be wired as shown in Fig. 12 for start-up
control. During power failure, the 479-type KTU
will be inoperative and a momentary close contact
key must be provided to furnish the ground-start
function.
t498A {Music-an-Hold}
• Restricts calls to operator and foreign
Numbering Plan Areas (NPA)
• Allows service calls or 800 area code numbers
Page 8
2.24
The 498A KTU (Fig. 13) is a 4-inch, 40-contact
unit which provides music-on-hold for four
CO/PBX line circuits. An optional circuit module,
ISS 3, SECTION 518-215-401
1I6A1 (Fig. 14), can be mounted on the 498A KTU
to provide music-on-hold for an additional three
lines.
The 498A and 1I6A1 CM provide a balanced
connection of music-on-hold to the tip and
ring. The music source should have an adjustable
volume control so that the music level may be
adjusted.
EQUIPMENT USED WITH 498A KTU AND 116A1 eM
2.25
Table A lists the key service units, panels,
and apparatus mounting compatible with
the 498A KTU and the 1I6A1 CM.
2.26
The 498A KTU is not compatible with the
570A and 580A KSUs, 702A and 703A panels.
New COM KEY* system installations, with the
570B, 580B KSUs or the 702B and 703B panels with
the music-on-hold feature, must include the 498A
KTU plus the 1I6A1 CM for each group of seven
lines.•
2.27
498A KTU (4 LINES)
KSU
PANEL
APP MTG
570B
580B
513A1, A2, A3
515AI, A2, A3
597B
598B
642A
69D
498A KTU PLUS 116A1 eM (7 LINES)
570B
580B
702B
703B
642A
69D*
* A 69D equipped with 7-line music-onhold (116AI CM) cannot be used with
a second 498A equipped with a 116Al
CM or another KTU which requires
the use of the RN lead.
* Trademark
Page 9
SECTION 518-215-401
PlO
CONN
EXCLUDED STATION LINE I
PU
~
NET·IS~OK
-I
AI
'I I
~
ETI
ETI
ERI
ERI
EAi
EAI
'--
HOLD
KEY
J
CONTROL STATION
TYPICAL KEY TEL
SET CKT
PU
~
TI
RI
(NOTE 2)
CONT
Bft
~
HOOK
NET.
~I
CAl
L.:....:-
I
EI
I
I
CRI
A
RI
TI
---,--
EI
I
R3
I
RI
CAl
S
RVI
L _ _~B_24
I
S
""
l~
(NOTE 3)
KEY
CL
L..!..!..J
n
TYPE
A
KTU
LINE
T
R
428A KEY TELEPHONE UNIT
(NOTE I)
PU
~
'--
ts=;-
CA2
CA2
R2
R2
T2
T2
EL
E2
LG
Ll
400TYPE
KTU
LINE 2
EXCLUOEO STATION LINE 2PU
~
~
INET·IS~OK
L-JI
~I
I
~
A
A
CR2
22
R2
ET2
ET2
ER2
ER2
EA2
EA2
---r-R4
RV2
'--
HOLD
KEY
EL
,,[
POWER
SUPPLY
L _ _.....~B_24
LG
IOV±
10V±
B BAT.
B BAT.
B GRD
B GRD
I
I
NOTES:
I. REQUIRES A MOUNTING FACILITY
EQUI PPED WITH A 40-PIN CONNECTOR.
2. CONTROL KEY MAY BE A LOCK I NG
OR NONLOCKING.
3.
"s"
LEAD CAN ONLY MULTIPLE TO
OTHER 428A KTUS CONTROLLED BY
THE SAME STATION.
Fig. 7 -Condensed Functional Schematic of 428A KTU (Multiline Exclusion Circuit)
Page 10
EI
SW
HOOK
HOLD
KEY
PU
FiOOONii
PIO 40Q-TYPE LINE CKT ~
KEY{I)
A --
AlII
'I
AI
-Z4~
C)
SP
L (I)
LAMP
LINE CKT I
LAMP
LINE CKT 2
LiZ)
NOHS:
I. THE 429A KTU WILL PROVIDE SUPPLEMENTARY
HOLD rOR TWO CO OR PBX LI NE CI RCU ITS.
EACH HOLD CIRCUIT MAY BE ASSIGNED AS
PRIORITY OR I HOLD.
2. REQUIRES A MOUNTING rACILITY EQUIPPED
WITH A 20- OR 40-PIN CONNECTOR.
3. LIMITATIONS or THE 430A KTU ARE AS
rOLLOWS:
A. rLi OR rL2 LEAD CAN SERVE A
MAX I MUM or 50 LAMPS.
8. SP LEAD CAN CONNECT TO A
MAXIMUM or 20 STATIONS.
4. TO PROVIDE PRIORITY HOLD. A 599H KEY
UN I T CONTA I N I NG A SUPPLEMENTAL HOLD
KEY AS WELL AS A REGULAR HOLD KEY.
MUST BE SUBSTITUTED FOR THE EXISTING
SW
supp
HOOK
HOLD KEY
,,'r:-;,
=.I
If-
lCRIO
TEL SET
=
-24
KEY{!)
A(I) INOTE6)
WIRED-~'
FOR PRIORITY
HOLD
I NOTE 4)
::E
SP
LOI
13
LOZ
3"
A--
If-
-24
~
C)
16
LIZ
A
AOZ
'--MESSAGE
REGISTER~ ~~)
,~
-Z4
8
W
PC2
B BAT
(+
B GRO
II
';'':>STCONN
SUPPLY
LAMP
SUPPLY
.'"
KEYS REQUIRE A KIT OF PARTS. REFER TO
APPROPRIATE TELEPHONE SET SECTION FOR
INFORMATION.
fLi
B BAT
B GRD
IOV±
CR7
CI
C2
F2
1
RI2
18cRIZ
F2
T
I
r--~
RIO
CR6
R8
'-
CR8
8
-24
8
I'
RII
CR"
R7 B
-Z4
FI
I
CRI
o
CR4
F2
I'
8
22
17
'"
I
o
~-24
~1'8
:
FL
"H-
RIO
fLZ
SP
FI
F2
If-
24
>-1,,8
F2
\
"
B
19
PCI
fL(lOR~
FLST
-24 B
20-26V
POWER
DC
20
-24
'-
1-
-24
L
CR3
FI
I~ FI
FiOOONii
8
R4
B
RI
CRII
~
LG LIZ)
CR2
CR9
~B
L(I)
PIO 400-TYPE LINE CKT ~
1
r
I
L_
-24 B
KEY UN I TIN THE 1ST MODULE or THE
"CALL DIRECTOR" TELEPHONE.
--
B R6
R2
I'
LAMP
LINE CKT 2
FI
I
A (2) INOTE 6) Alz
LAMP~
LlNECKT
All
r KEY~IZ)
lj~
R5
-I
I4
PU
fOI
HOLD
KEY
5. ANY TELEPHONE SET EQUI PPED WITH A HOLD
KEY HAVING A SET or TRANsrER CONTACTS
AND surflCIENT CORD LEADS CAN INITIATE
I HOLD. REWIRE HOLD KEY ACCORDING TO
CONNECTI ON SECTI ON or TYPE SET USED.
6. TELEPHONE SETS EQUIPPED WITH 635- TYPE
g
~
AI
I'
LG
AOI
A
16
Alz)
LII
42gA IMD) KTU INOTES I AND 2)
-24
PIO CONN
L
8
Ig
FL
16
I
~-24
'"
~I'
~8
4
(
8
IOV±
[=X~-24
-24
IOV:t
~3H"
B
iOANVO}-----T'?
r
R9
430A KTU
(NOTES 2 AND 3)
CRI
8
-24
Fig. a-Condensed Functional Schematic of 429A (MD) KTU (Supplementary Hold Detector Circuit) and 430A
KTU (Flutter Generator Circuit)
."
0
CD
CD
-
SW
...,.
HOOK
HOLD
KEY
PU
KEYO)
All)
·1
PIO 400-TYPE
LINE CKT I
AI
-Z4
--~
A
..!...(]
)
~=
AIZ)
SP
L(IJ
LAMP
LINE CKT I
LAMP
LINE CKT 2
I'
LG
LIZ)
AOI
9
I~
4Z98 KTU (NOTES I AND Z)
BtCRIO
R5
SUPP
HO~EY
H~K
'1
AI
=
~
HOLD
KEY
·PU
KgJll
I
All) (NOTE 6)
~1 K~Z)
TEL SET WIRED
FOR PRIORITY
All
IRZ
I
LAM~~
LOI
LlNECKTI~
I~
I
11
FI
LOZ
35
I~
~B
-Z4.!..{]
a
c)
16
-Z4
LIZ
L
A
AOZ
°l~
I,BCRIZ
I9
CR6
'--MESSAGE
REGISTERS IF PROY
PCI
~U
-Z4 B
FLIIORZ
FLST
_24~(2)
8 GRD
2O-26V
POWER
SUPPLY
DC
[ +-
LAMP
SUPPLY
I
7~STCON"
FLI
"-
FLZ
5P
88AT
B GRD
IOV!
CRI
2
I7
f---!.-24
I
~I'B
I2
o
:
B~
F2
L~cz
RIO
T
CRa
B -Z4
B
I'
Ra
IB
J
RII
CR5
"'""---r---
FD
F2
T
R7
~B
=8
[X -~-24
-tt:~M
RI
B
HI~
R4
IOV:!:
~
I&
(
I
B
~-24
I
~I'
4
f--
8
IOV!
B
-24
C4
:JR --FL
CIT
RI&
B= ~B
~:-
RIO
I9
T
RI7i
CR4
\
"-
r--
Ria
o
PC2
8 BAT
1
F2
RI2
I
I
F2
r-
B~
F2
fIO-
~
*
CR7
CRII
tB
c3
~
I'
L.G LIZ)
RI3
-Z4
FI
I
-Z4
A __
FI
RI4
8
PIO 400-TYPE
LINE CKT Z
B
~~-,-
SP
L(IJ
-Z4
CR9
L_
=.I
LAMP
LINE CKT 2
I ~B
RI5
CR3
A (2) (NOTE 6) AU
HOLD
R4
FI
B R6
-Z4
a
RI
CRzl
--,
I4
'--SW
(NOTE 4)
NOTES:
I. THE 4298 KTU WI LL PROV I DE SUPpLEMENTARY
HOLD FOR TIKl CO OR PBX LI NE C IRCU ITS.
EACH HOLD CIRCUIT MAY BE ASSIGNED AS
PRIORITY OR I HOLD.
2. REQU I RES A MOUNTI NG rAC I LI TY EQU I PPED
WITH A 20- OR 40-PIN CONNECTOR.
3. LIMITATIONS OF THE 430A KTU ARE AS
FOLLOWS:
A. FLI OR FL2 LEAD CAN SERVE A
MAX I MUM OF 50 LAMPS.
B. SP LEAD CAN CONNECT TO A
MAX·IMUM OF 2D STATIONS.
4. TO PROVIDE PRIORITY HOLD. A 599H KEY
UNIT CONTAINING A SUPPLEMENTAL HOLD
KEY AS WELL AS A REGULAR HOLD KEY.
MUST BE SUBSTITUTED FOR THE EXISTING
KEY UNIT IN THE 1ST MODULE or THE
"CALL 0 I RECTOR' TELEPHONE.
5. ANY TELEPHONE SET EQUI PPED WITH A HOLD
KEY HAV I NG A SET OF TRANSFER CONTACTS
AND SUf"rlCIENT CORD LEADS CAN INITIATE
I HOLD. REW I RE HOLD KEY ACCORD I NG TO
CONNECTION SECTION OF TYPE SET USED.
6. TELEPHONE SETS EQUIPPED WITH 63~-TYPE
KEYS REQUIRE A KIT OF PARTS. REFER TO
APPROPRIATE TELEPHONE SET SECTION FOR
INFORMATION.
LII
A
16
-24
PIO CONN
L
a
RaR7B
B
-----TI.
-24~--'
RB
430A KTU
(NOTES 2 AND 3)
r
CRI
B
~24
Fig. 9-Condensed Functional Schematic of 4298 KTU (Supplementary Hold Detector Circuit) and 430A KTU
(Flutter Generator Circuit)
34A COUPLER
~~STOMER
PROVIDED
~~
SOURCE
PIO CONN
MT
3.
~
~
36
~
~t-
>-
~-
NOTES:
I. REQUIRES A MOUNTING fACILITY WITH
A "O-PIN CONNECTOR
2. EACH .. S 18 I(TU PROV I DES MUS I C ON HOLD
rOR SEYEN CO OR PBX LINES
3. CONNECT THESE LEADS TOGETHER AS
CLOSE TO ..S18 ICTU AS POSSIBLE.
>~-
>~-
>-
-
-
...o
..
CD
PIO CONt(
PIO CONN
RI (CO)
[
--+-0---'"\.r-"'-;t--+-(~----j--='-<
-
451 B KTU (NOTES I AND 2 I
19
+
TO
STA
loG
~
fA~
20
TO
STA
30
2I
22
TO
STA
25
~
,,~
~
~
"
LJ
[~
l-, I-
LJ
(~
l-, I-
TO
CO
CO
(STJ
13
I.
12
.2 (STA)
T2 (CO)
13
T2
"
12
'3 (STA)
T3
T3
TO
STA
9
[~
l-,
LJ
I-
I.
LJ
T5
32
37
38
(ll
LJ
l:::l C-
TO
STA
29
LJ
[~
l-, I-
33
TO
CO
NOTE
~
Fig_ lO-Condensed Functional Schematic of 4518 KTU (Music-On-Hold)
CO
STA
R6 (STA)
13
14
12
13
14
12
CO
STA
13
14
12
R7 (CO)
TO
CO
R7 (STA)
(CO,
17
-
12
R6 (CO)
T6
T6
28
CO
STA
'5 (STA)
T5
TO
STA
13
I.
R5 (CO)
TO
CO
26
27
3'
STA
•• (STA)
14
T"
23
[~
l-, I-
co
•• (CO)
TO
CO
8
TO
STA
STA
R3 (CO)
TO
CO
12
13
~. 31
"r-a
(STA)
'2 (CO)
39
~ I.
fAra
.,
TI
o
~ 2.
[A~
(~
LI-JCOTO
l-l
STA
13
14
12
~
1ST
'000
P
~
2ND
.000
P
~
3RD
.000
P
~
4TH
'000
P
~
P
~
P
~
P
5TH
'DOD
6TH
4000
7TH
.000
SECTION 518-215-401
,-p/o
471A KTU
(NOTE)
CONN.
RESTR ICTEO
TELESET
PIO
CONN
0
14
(I
14
1
0
(I
~RI
~I
CRI
ill
~R7
B
~
-24
1
*R
l.
-24 B
)
I
T
400-TYPE
KTU
R
>---7
AD
TO
~4298
KTU
16
®
I
1
l.
I NET.
I
RIO
1
I
1
LS
@
CR3
I
::j::D
I
I'
~D
I
I
PU
A
CRS
T
I
RV2
RVI
'I
)
UNRESTR I CTEO
TELESET
RII
T
POWER
SUPPLY
-24~
17
e
BAT
15
e
GRO
8
'I f-------7
R
A(U)
PU
I
LS
INET.
J,
'---
A.
STANDARD WIRING ARRANGEMENT
~
~
R
-
400-TYPE
KTU
-
471A
KTU
(NOTE)
~
A
RESTR I CTED
STATION
J
NOTE:
STATION I HOLD OPTION S
@
RESTRICTED
®
UNRESTRICTED
T
R
]
UNRESTR I CTED
STATION
A
B.
ALTERNATE WI RING ARRANGEMENT
NOTE,
REQUIRES A MOUNTING FACILITY EQUIPPED
WITH AN 18-, 20-, OR 40-PIN CONNECTOR
Fig. ll-Condensed Functional Schematic of 471-Type KTU (Battery Reversal Toll Restriction Circuit)
Page 14
I'
PIO
CONN
'
"
' 'F--- ___--,-+--_-~-----l--:~
=IA23
GS
r-'-PIO
r--
CONN
1>-f-
NET
A13
IRESTRICTED
TELSET
\>- f'---
D
A1
PU
I
I
t-------G-------+~I A16
H~®
~
-I~
-24V
VCC
I-
®
AO
-T0429BKTU
B GIlD
~IA17
B BAT
_I~
LP. GRD
!IOV~
A6
I ~~
UNRESTR I CTED
TEL SET
A15
I
LS
I
A(U)
f--------------J«:==J~
479A
KTU
(NOTES 1 AND 2)
IWORK
I
A
I
D
{'.9
LOGIC AND
TIMING
CIRCUIT
LS
I
R
400TYPE
KTU
r-_-'lD~_ _~ I A13
PU
T
POWER
SUPPLY
LP. BAT
A4
L.....-
!IO
+5~
I
I
A37
>--NC
®
®
LOOP START LI NE
®
®
®
®
GROUND START LI NE
G)
o
1 + 7 DIGITS RESTRICTEO
1 + 7 DIGITS ALLOWED
2 SECOND TI MEDUT
0.2 SECOND TIMEOUT
±10V SUPPLY
+5V SUPPLY
NOTES:
1. USE KS-21290, L1 CONNECTOR TO PROVIDE OPTIONS.
2. REQUIRES A MOUNTING FACILITY WITH 00 4O-PIN
CONNECTORS IN A VERTI CAL PLANE (642A PANEL
OR 690 APP. MTG).
3. ALL LEADS APPEAR IN J1 AND J2.
4. USE OpTIONS
AND
FOR KTS INSTALLATIONS.
5. STATION I HOLD OPTIONS
RESTRICTED
®
®
® UNRESTRICTED
CD
Fig. 12-Condensed Functional Schematic of 479-Type KTU, 107A and 1078 Circuit Module (Rotary Dial Toll
Restriction Circuit) (Sheet 1 of 3)
-:
•
CD
NOTES:
1.
TO PROVIDE lJjO-OlGIT ADSORPTION:
A. ADD@OPTlON, USING KS-212'lD,Ll
CONNECTGl IN TERMINALS A,AND B.
B. ADD CONNECTGl' IN OPTION FIELD AR/l
FOR EACH NUMBER TO BE ABSORBED
AS 1ST DIGIT.
C. ADD CONNECTCR IN OPTION FIELD
A/2 FGl EACH NUI1BER TO BE
ABSGlBED AS 2ND 0 IGIT
2. TO ABSGlB REPEATEDLY ANDIOR
ABSGlB (J>lLY ONCE:
A. REMOVE CONNECTOR, IF PROVIDEO FROM TERMINALS A AND B.
Bo ADD CONNECTOR IN OPTION FIELD
AR/l FOR EACH NUPIlER TO' BE
ABSORBED REPEATEDLY
C. ADD CONNECTGl IN OPT ION FIELD
A/2 FOR EACH NtJIIIER TO BE
ABSORBED ONLY ONCE
, • PROGRAM CIlICU IT MODULE
BEFORE MOUNTI NG ON EITHER
Jl Gl J2 rE THE 479A KTU.
l07A CIRCUIT
MOOULE
TIT
;;:
+
@
D
1
I
I
~___
DIGIT ABSORPTION
_ L O G I C C I R _ C U I T-
__
d
I
I
Fig. 12-Condensed Fundional Schematic of 479-Type KTU, 107A and 1078 Circuit Module (Rotary Dial Toll
Restridion Circuit) (Sheet 2 of 3)
NOTES:
1. PROGRAM CIRCUIT
MODULE BY PROV 101 NG
KS-21290L 1 CONNECTOR
I N EACH NUMBER OF
NPA COOE NOT TO
BE RESTR I CTEO.
EACH 107B CIRCUIT
MODULE WILL
HANOLE TWO NPA
COOES.
2. IF 107A IS NOT
REQU I REO, TWO
1078 MOOULES
CAN BE MOUNTEO
ON THE 479A KTU
FOR A TOTAL OF
FOUR NPA CODES.
TO 479A KTU (J1 OR J2)
o
if
~
tTTTTr
~IIIIIIII
,-------
I
I
I
I
...
L
~~_~E_~_OG_IC
_ __
107B _CI_R_CU_IT_MO_DU_L_E _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
~
a
Ul
co
Fig. 12-Condensed Functional Schematic of 479-Type KTU, 107Aand 1078 Circuit Module (Rotary Dial Toll
Restriction Circuit) (Sheet 3 of 3)
-1ST
-
P/O
CONN
4OO-TY PE
P/O
CONN
IC4
KTU
co
8
7
-
P/O
49SA KTU
C1
m
4OO-TYPE
KTU
~"
VI
?STA
~
LG"
2NO
,.
A(1)
4OO-TYPE
KTU
2
?-
--
STA
L(2)
8
IC4
22
C2
~
8
- F-i"
'RO
4OO-lYPE
KTU
2NO
4OO-TY PE
KTU
--
..
8
,
-15
A(2)
•
10
n
12
?-
H
~
STA
•
K2
2'
LOl
8
IC4
4TH
4OO-TYPE
,RO
KTU
4OO-TY PE
8
T4
KTU
--
,.
12
?-
H
¢-
STA
-15
AO)
20
K4
7
L(4)
8
11
IC4
4TH
400-lY PE
KTU
-24
,.
-15
A(4)
r-~ .;. f-'!!-<
-r--J .t '~
--
1l
K4
-15
C9
C8
--
~
TO CUST
PROVIDED
K.lSIC
CQURCE
t 1--1,.
COUPlER
L~~~
...n0
Z
.,
)..- ~(~
II>
1ST
P/O
CONN CONN
12
CR2
'8 ~------------~~--------------------------------------~
-24~
-24
BGRO~
LGGR!l~
Fig. 13-.Condensed Functional Schematic of 498A KTU (Music-On-Hold Circuit).
6
1
L GfI)
CO
~
VI
,j",
~
5TH
P/O
CONN
4OO-TYPE
eM 116A1 CKT KlOULE
498A
KTU
P/O
CONN
49SA
KTU
Cl
1C7
KTU
P/O
COif<
E-!"
P/O
CONN
5TH
400-TYPE
KTU
CR3
l(5)
J1-7
>-7
28 f-<
J2-4
J2-6
~
>-7
J1-5
8
~
STA
4
3
lG'1
A(5)
11
K5
6TH
4OO-TYPE
KTU
f-<
6TH
4OO-TYPE
KTU
48
l(6)
7
27f-<
C6
IC7
9
22
J1-6
R16
T6
-8"
R26
>-7
13
~
>-7
31
~
STA
K6
4
3
K6
J2-B
7TH
~t6L
4
8
1>- f-'-ill-<
-15
9
6
29 f-<
4OO-TYPE
23
f-<
KTU
C7
IC7
10
21
E-!"
8
T7
4
J2-10
R17
R27
K7
19
Ir-
A~
1'1--{
-15
-<
17
f-<
6
f-<
>-7
J1-8
J1-10
'"
>--0
f-f--
.2
>--0
-24
18
J1-4
l GND
"f-(
J1-2
~I'BGND
J1-9
-24
0---<
4
20
J1-1
1 5 f-<
3
K7
J2-9
-15
26 f-<
a GND
-15
f----III lG
B GNO
-15
-248
~
>-7
15
7TH
4OO-TYPE
KTU
-15
Fig. 14-.Condensed Functional Schematic of 116A 1 CM (Music-On-Hold Circuit).
STA
R
32
~
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
SECTION 518-215-402
Issue 2, January 1977
AT & TCo Standard
SERVICE
1A2 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
KEY TELEPHONE UNITS
INTERCOM SERVICES
1.
• 427 Type-Frequency Recognition and
Translation Circuit
GENERAL
This section provides schematic information
for the 400-series KTUs which provide
talking circuits and control and signaling functions
between telephone sets in a 1A2 KTS (Fig. 1 and
1.01
• 440A (MD)-TOUCH-TONE'" Adapter Circuit
• 476A-Dial Tone, Busy Tone, and Audible
Ringback Tone Circuit for modular panel
installations
2).
1.02
This section is reissued to:
• .478B-TOUCH-TONE Adapter Circuit.
• Provide coverage of the 478B KTU
Information on line services is covered in
518-215-400; auxiliary circuits, 518-215-401;
and all control circuits including audible signals,
518-215-403.
1.04
• Show the 440A KTU rated MD.
1.03
The following KTUs and their functions are
covered in this section:
Mechanical
• 401A-Manual Intercom Line Circuit
All circuit components on these KTUs are
mounted in a plug-in printed wiring board,
one end of which is equipped with contacts. A
4-inch board may have 18, 20, or 40 contacts; an
8-inch board will have 80 contacts (requiring two
vertical 40-pin connectors). The circuit boards plug
into mating connectors in key service units, panels,
or apparatus mountings. Wiring from the connectors
will be dedicated or nondedicated leads. Dedicated
leads are those that normally appear on the same
contacts of all KTUs, such as supply voltages and
grounds, and are normally factory-wired. Nondedicated
leads are those whose designation and function
vary and are made available for installer connections.
Fig. 1 and 2 show typical 4- and 8-inch KTUs.
1.05
• 407 Type-Dial Intercom, 10-Code Selector
Circuit
• 420A-Long Line Circuit
• 421A-Direct Station Selection (DSS) Circuit
or Preset Conference
• 422B-Station Busy Selector Circuit
• 423A-Dial Tone, Busy Tone, and Audible
Ringback Tone Circuit for nonmodular panel
installations
• 424 Type-Dial Intercom, 19-Code Selector
Circuit
• 425 Type-Flashing Lamp Circuit
Electrical
Functional schematics (Fig. 3 through 16)
cover the basic circuitry of each KTU,
contacts used, and its relationship to telephone
sets, other KTUs, power supplies, and apparatus.
1.06
• 426A-Amplifier, Band Separation and Limiter
Circuit
NOTICE
Not for use or disclosure outside the
Bell System except under written agreement
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
SECTION 51 8-215-402
• ±10V for visual and audible signals
• ±105V for audibl e signals.
1.09
This issue of the sect ion is based on the
following drawings:
SO-69475-01, Issue 6- 401A KTU
SO-69567-01, Iss ue 14-407B and C, 420A,
422B, 423A and B, 424A, Band C, 425A
and B, and 476A KTUs
SO-69590-01, Issue 3-421A KTU
SO-69595-01, Iss ue 7 - 426A, 427B and C
KTUs
Fig. I-Typical 4-lnch Key Telephone Unit
SO-69906-01, Iss ue 1- 44OA (MO) KTU
. SO-69931-01, Issue 1- 478B KTU.
If this section is to be used with equipm ent or
apparatus reflecti ng later issues of the drawings,
reference should be made to the COs and SOs to
determine t he extent of the changes and the
manner in whi ch the section may be affected.
2.
IDENTIFICATION
401 A KTU (Manual Intercom Line Circuit)
Fig . 2 - Typical 8-lnch Key Telephone Unit
Oashed lines are used to simplify the schematics
If full
and to indicate in termed iate circuitry.
schemati cs are required, refer to the SOs listed in
1.09.
The 401A KTU (Fig. 3) is a 4-inch, 18-contact
unit that provides talk ing battery for manual
intercom and co ntro l for line busy lamp feature.
Audible signal ing between stations is accomp lished
by means of se parately furnished pushbuttons,
buzzers, or bells.
2 .01
The A lead of a station associated with t he
manua l in te rcom circuit provides ground
through the operated switch hook contacts to operate
a relay on the 401A KTU. Operation of t his re lay
completes a circuit for t he optional busy lamp
feature. In addition, the re lay provides a spare
set of transfer co ntacts for local engineering use,
such as audib le signal control.
2 .02
Voltages required for operation of t he KTU,
or provided to associated apparatus by t he
KTU, are shown with their co nnector pins. Other
voltages may appear on the contacts of the mating
co nnecto r, depending on the mounting arrangement,
but not on the KTU.
1.07
1.08
KTUs may require the following power
supply vol tages a nd their associated grounds:
4078 (MD) and 407C KTUs (Dial Intercom , 10-Code
Selector Circuit)
• -24V (B battery) for co ntrol
2 .03
• -24V (A battery) for talk
Page 2
The 407-type KTUs (Fig. 4 and 5) are 8-in ch,
80-contact un its for lise with the dial selective
ISS 2, SECTION 518-215-402
intercom circuits. They provide the following basic
operating features:
circuit or a preset conference circuit.
has the following operating features:
The KTU
• Maximum of 10 station codes (0-9)
• Used with common audible matrix.
• Busy lamp at all stations
• Option strapping when used for a preset
conference circuit.
• Adjustable single spurt signaling (0.5 to 2.5
seconds) by adjusting timing resistor
• Maximum external circuit loop resistance is
120 ohms.
• Rotary dial selection.
• Used to provide DSS in conjunction with
407- or 424-type KTUs.
The 407C KTU replaces the 407B on a plug-compatible
basis.
420A KTU (Long Line Circuit)
422B KTU (Station Busy Selector Circuit)
The 420A KTU (Fig. 6) is a 4-inch, 18-contact
unit that provides a circuit for use with
off-premise stations connected to the dial selective
intercom line circuit. This KTU extends the loop
resistance of the basic selector to 500 ohms. No
provision is made for busy lamps at stations
connected to this circuit. Mutilation of other station
dial pulses is prevented by relay operation. The
KTU provides the following operating features:
2.06
2.04
• Signaling and talking over single pair from
off-premise stations.
• Determines if called station is off-hook or
busy on other line.
• Any code may be assigned to off-premise
stations.
• Allows line lamps to flash but prevents
audible signal at called station when called
station is busy on other line.
• Ringing can be tripped only during silent
intervals.
• If the calling station maintains connection
Note: If handset pickup occurs during
ringing cycle, ring will be heard in handset
receiver.
and the called station goes from busy to
on-hook, the busy signal to the calling station
stops and the audible signal (with flashing
line lamp) begins at the called station.
• Used with rotary or TOUCH-TONE telephone
set.
• When associated with TOUCH-TONE adapter
circuit [426A with 427B or C KTUs, or 440A
(MD) or 478B KTUs), maximum nonrepeatered
station conductor loop is 500 ohms or 4 dB
insertion loss at 1000 Hz, whichever is
limiting.
421A KTU (DSS Circuit or Preset Conference)
2.0S
The 422B KTU (Fig. 9) is a 4-inch, 40-contact
unit that provides control of station busy
tone for the dial selective intercom line circuit. It
also provides control circuits for 10 station codes.
When a system consists of 19 station codes, two
KTUsare required-one for the units group
(single-digit codes, 0-9) and one for the tens group
(2-digit codes, XO-X9). This KTU provides the
following operating features:
The 421A KTU (Fig. 7 and 8) is a 4-inch,
40-contact unit that can be used as a DSS
423A KTU (Dial Tone, Busy Tone, and Audible
Ringback Tone Circuit)
The 423A KTU (Fig. 10) is a 4-inch, 20-contact
unit that provides a variable rate multi vibrator
to produce dial tone, station busy tone, or audible
ringback tone for the dial selective intercom line
circuit. To provide busy tone and audible ringback
tone, the multi vibrator of the 423A KTU is under
control of an associated interrupter (ground). For
all tone signals, the output of the multivibrator is
returned to the originating station over the tip side
of the intercom line.
2.07
Page 3
SECTION SI8-215-402
The 423A has been rerated from MD to
AT&T Standard for use in nonmodular panel
installations.
• Optional interrupted ringing
2.08
• Detects when called station answers; stops
interrupted ringing and flashing lamp signal
Note: The 423B has been recoded to 476A
for use in modular panel installations only.
• Provides a separate switching ground for
use with PICTUREPHONE® intercom (425B
only).
424A (MO), 4248 (MO), and 424C KTU (Oiallntercom,
19-Code Selector Circuit)
The 424-type KTUs (Fig. 11) are 8-inch,
80-contact units providing the same basic
features as the 407B KTU but have a capacity of
19 station codes.
These KTUs provide the
following:
2.09
• Rotary dial selection
• Nineteen dial codes (nine single digit and
ten 2-digit).
Note: The first digit of a 2-digit code is not
available as a station code.
A 424A, B, or C can be used in a lA2
Key Telephone System, but a 424A is
not to be used in place of a 424B or
C in the 7A or 14A Communication
System. tOnly the 424C can be
used with the 21A System.. The
424C KTU provides a number of
circuit improvements over the
424A and B, such as greater
tolerance to rapid TOUCH-TONE
dialing and elimination of speaker
clicks in COM-KEY* installations.
Replace earlier 424-type KTUs
with a 424C only when customer
complaints warrant.
'Trademark
425A (MO) and 425B KTUs (Flashing Lamp Circuit)
The 425-type KTUs (Fig. 12) are 8-inch,
80-contact units that provide the control
circuits for flashing lamps for up to 19 station
codes in the dial selective intercom circuit. These
KTUs provide the following operating features:
2.10
• Incoming call flashing lamp signal to called
station
426A KTU (Amplifier, Band Separation and Limiter
Circuit)
The 426A KTU (Fig. 13) is an 8-inch,
80-contact unit comprising half of the
TOUCH-TONE adapter circuit. It is used in
conjunction with a 427-type KTU for TOUCH-TONE
dial station selection in the lA2 KTS dial selective
intercommunicating circuit. The 426A amplifies
and separates TOUCH-TONE signals into high and
low frequencies for use as inputs for the 427-type
KTUs. It also provides protection against false
operation caused by speech or noise frequency
components.
2.11
427B (Series 4) and 427C KTUs (Frequency Recognition
and Translation Circuit)
The 427B (Series 4) and C KTUs (Fig. 13)
are 8-inch, 80-contact units comprising half
of the TOUCH-TONE adapter circuit. These KTUs
receive separated TOUCH-TONE frequencies from
the 426A KTU and translate them into relay
operations. The relay operations, in turn, energize
relays in the basic selector circuit to signal the
selected station.
2.12
440A KTU (MO) (TOUCH-TONE Adapter Circuit)
The 440A KTU (Fig. 14) is an 8-inch,
80-contact unit consisting of two printed
circuit boards permanently fastened together and
requiring a single upper and lower connector. The
circuitry and function are the same as that of the
426A and 427C KTUs, but are not electrically
interchangeable in some mounting arrangements
since the 426A and 427C KTUs each require an
upper and lower connector. tThe 440A KTU is
replaced by the 478B.•
2.13
476A KTU (Oial Tone, Busy Tone, and Audible
Ringback Tone Circuit)
2.14
• Busy lamp signals to all other stations
Page 4
The 476A KTU (Fig. 15) is a 4-inch, 20-contact
unit that provides a variable rate multivibrator
ISS 2, SECTION 518-215-402
to produce dial tone, station busy tone, or audible
ringback tone for the dial selective intercom line
circuit in modular panel installations. To provide
busy tone and audible ringback tone, the multi vibrator
is controlled by the RN and lamp flash leads. For
all tone signals, the output of the multivibrator is
returned to the originating station over the tip side
of the intercom line.
2.15
.4788 KTU (TOUCH-TONE Adapter Circuit)
The 478B KTU (Fig. 16) is an 8-inch,
SO-contact solid state unit which provides
the same functions as the 440A (MD) KTU. It
will work with all 407- and 424-type selector circuits.
The 47SB requires both A and B grounds; provisions
are made by means of either a wiring kit or an
option plug for installing the necessary grounds
when they are not present in the mounting
arrangement. The 47SB is directly interchangeable
with the 440A when the connectors have A and
B grounds .•
2.16
The 476A KTU provides the following features:
• Eliminates externally wired interrupter or
relay
• Uses existing RN and LF leads for control.
The 476A KTU should be used in
modular panel installation only.
NOTE'
REQUIRES A MOUNTING FACILITY
EQUIPPED WITH AN 18-, 20-. OR
40-PIN CONNECTOR.
r---Pia CONN
KEY TELEPHONE SET
NET.
sw
PU
H,Q2.K
~
I
T
R
40lA KTU (NOTE I)
12
RI
~I'A
13
~ -24
IS
~-24
A
AlII
A
~
~
A
L
(
~
SPI
SPARE CONTACTS
FOR CONTROL
PURPOSES AS
REQUIRED
SP2
14
9
SP3
POWER SUPPLY
LB
LAMP BAT.
B BAT.
20-2SV [B BAT
A BAT.
DC
A GRD
=
A BAT.
+
A GRD
IOV+
)(
SJ
4
(
17
(
18
(
(
lOV±
B
A
-24
-24
A II.
'-----
Fig. 3-Condensed Functional Schematic of 401A KTU (Manual Intercom Line Circuit)
Page 5
...,
a
(Q
CD
0-
NOTES,
I. REQUIRES A MOUNTING FACILITY EQUIPPED WITH TWO
914A (40~P1N) CONNECTORS MOUNTED IN A VERTICAL
PLANE.
2. RES I STaR R4 CAN BE ADJUSTED TO PROV I DE A
VARIA8LE TIMING CYCLE FOR THE RELEASE OF
RELAY 8 (SET AT 1.5 SECONDS AT FACTORY).
TURN KNURLED WHEEL FULL COUNTERCLOCKWISE
FOR 0.5 SECOND TIMEOUT. TURN CLOCK\lISE TO
MAKE INTERVAL LONGER. AT THE FULL CLOCKWISE
POSITION TIMING MAY BE SO LONG THAT 8 RELAY
MAY NOT RELEASE.
TOP
¥
TERMINAL
END OF
KTU
RESISTOR VIEWED
FROM FRONT
END OF KTU
CC\I
C\I
(8)
' \ BOTTOM
3. IF DSS IS REQUIRED, SEE FIG.7
TA8LE
DIGIT
01 ALED
5
6
7
8
9
0
Y2
• •
•
•
0
NET I
0
~
Y3
Y4
T
~~
(NOTE 4)
---~
BI3
812
----7
~
X
r!-
812
5
z
·T:~
B26
WCONN
RH
-b B
B21
'Ii
)E
)E
~
B25
'il
)E
)E
~
B2'
ill
)~
)~
~
B22
I~ t-1@
CG
B21
:l ~
YI
:'24
(N/:E 3)
®
Y2
Y2
r":-
~
M
*
SPURT
t
8
•
•
•
R
IOV AC BUZZER
AUDIBLE
IBV AC BUZZER
SIGNALS
DC BUZZER
I05V 30HZ RINGER
INTERRUPTED RING WITH
STATION BUSY TONE
04] TO
f-~======================~------~R""H ~H
B25
B24
Y3
Y3
B22
TO
SH 2
'II
B
)E
'il
)E
~
A36
~
A37
--7
B39
)E
)E
B
"TOUCH-TONE II
DIALING
W STEADY
H FLASHING
-24
-"--F-2.
RSI
RSI
B3a
CI
h~---011'
~_ _ _---,A,-
TO SH2
_ 24
BR
TO
SH 2
f(------ill' A
BI7
(
AI5
(
B
- 24
II, 8
'---
TO PROVIDE INTERRUPTED RINGING A 425B KTU MUST BE USED
T STATION BUSY TONE IS NOT RECOMMENDED FOR USE WITH
SINGLE SPURT RINGING
Fig. 5-Condensed Functional Schematic of 407C KTU (Dial Intercom, IO-Code Selector Circuit) (Sheet I of
2)
B
...o
P/O 425A (MOl OR 8 KTU WHEN PROVIOED
L BYI
B34
-24~n
L
BYI
L
,
- 24
837
L-{}-- - - - --.:it
~
L
8"1-
-
~
YI4
WM"~
)(
LTI OR LT2
CONTACTS
r-1
1L
LTJ
OR
LT2
__
~
)(
f,
!
"
(
)(
I
·RN
RINGING
SEQUENCE
AUO SIG PWR SUP
-24V
IOV!: OR IBV!
~I- !-il'
R
827
I05V~
IOV~
8
)
TC
A5
A6
BI
)
820
~
BO
B31
A--
I
'---
!®
AL2
AL2
BR
LR
ST
A3B
)
ALI
LR FROM !'NTERRUPTER !
SHI®
I\.M
I~ f-il'
MOTOR
SUP
FC3
SUP
FC3
Fe2
FCI
FCI
®
LA
L
'---
RG
'1
B30
®
L,LA
r..J
@
LAM~~
AUO
SIG
~LG
TYPICAL TEL SET
TO OTHER
STATION
AUO SIG
~~,LG II'I~~MPPWRSUP
II
IOV!
: 1
II'
~
B37
(
816
(
B2B
~
'r
'
827
B35
B7
A
BYI'
TC
01
R7
STA 0
RO
STA
I
RI
STA 4
R4
STA 3
R3
STA 6
R6
STA
5
R5
STA 8
R8
STA
R9
9
FROM
SH I
BR
R
10V
t
B20
\2
't!
YI
BO
B3 I
R
(
!
R2
ss
IOV:!:
FROM
SH I
IOV:!:
Q4
A32
Y4
RI2
Y5
B
A34
A28
A26
Y4
-t
A25
A2/
·~Y5
Y2
t--!--
R
A20
A30
YI
A29
f
TO
Y4
~l
Y5
STA 2
±
Y3
BI
tB ::
(STA 71
PIO 407C KTU
B
819
LAMP
FC2
@
®"l~
0
LF
I: J
B
B34
01
ALI
BR
B35
BL
Ml INTERRUPTER
AUO SIG
PWR SUP
828
piiiCONN
PIO 423A OR 476A
KTU WHEN PROVIDEO
( E,X,R)
TC
816
YI4
)(
BYI
01
YI4
BYI
'---
C
LK
TO 423A OR 476A
KTU WHEN PROVIOEO
BYI
819
BYI
-24 8
~
J
fiiiCONi
J
A23
Y3
814
B
B4
f---
10V!
'---
Fig, 5-Condensed Functional Schematic of 407C KTU (Dial Intercom, 100Code Selector Circuit) (Sheet 2 of
2)
iii
'"
.to.)
'"
~z
UI
-~
UI
J,.
oto.)
P/O CONN
II>
420A KTU (NOTE I)
Q
OFFPREMISE
TEL SE T
WITH
SRI DGED RINGER
o
R
R
TI
R
- r--
T
(NOTE 3)
A
NOTES:
I. REQUIRES A MOUNTING rACILITY EQUIPPED
WITH AN 18-,20-, OR 40-PIN CONNECTOR.
2. WHEN INTERCOMMUNICATING SYSTEM IS
EQUIPPED WITH THE "TOUCH-TONE" ADAPTER
I05V!
A R2
(440A[MD] OR 4788 OR 426A WITH 4278 [SERIES
4] OR C KTUS) PROVIDE A 4QOJ DIODE FOR EACH
420A KTU INSTALLED.
3. MAXIMUM STATION CONDUCTOR LOOP IS 500
OHMS. orr-PREMISE TELEPHONE SET MAY BE
EQUIPPED WITH A "TOUCH-TONE" DIAL
PROVIDED THE INTERCOMMUNICATING SYSTEM
IS SO EQUIPPED.
4. ANY DIGIT MAY BE ASSIGNED TO
orr-PREMISE STATION.
OPTIONS:
M
105Vf
J
lavi:
K
-24V DC
USED TO OPERATE AUD S I G or
I NTERCOM SYSTEM
PIO
CONN
812
~
p
T
12
TO
+-11'
44QA(MD)
TT
A
C
---*
---r
7
1
l~ i-<.:~~J •
R
813
839
.c---....--
RG-==-
RV'~_
T
14
i
TTG
~~--T:
---r
l~ c-
-24
Cf-,I~
---r--nR8
( , RV2
B
-24
~
78
R9
R7
P
78
8
-24
RO-X9
(NOTE
4)
l~ cl-<
'--
16
A GRD
20
8
CR2
RS
l~ r-
l~ c-
P
TTG
(NOTE 2)
B
78
8
R
Lj
---~
POWER
SUPPLY
:-wCRI
426A OR
OR 4788
KTU WHEN
PROVIDED
RI
z
RI
-24_"""""'....-'11
~
P/O 407-OR 424-TYPE
R2
G
(5
I
". [>+
DC
~I'
A BAT
18
~
15
~I'
B GRD
B BAT
I05V±
I05V±
RG
RG
A
-24
B
17
~
Io
f--105V±
8
-24
~_+
RG
Fig. 6-Condensed Functional Schematic of 420A KTU (Long Line Circuit)
L---'-'----f-O-+--<
~
r-p;o
NOTES:
I. REQUIRES A MOUNTING rACILITY EQUIPPED WITH A 40-PIN CONNECTOR.
2. PROVIDE A SEPARATE 421A KTU ANO SIGNAL KEY rOR EACH STATION CODE TO ~E SELECTED.
3. SELECT CODE AND CONNECT LEADS rOR SELECTED CODE AS SHOWN I N VERT J CAL COLUMN.
4. Ir MORE THAN ONE 421A KTU IS USED rOR DSS, CONNECT AS SHOWN BELOW:
r . - - CG (NOTE 4)
821
P/0440AiMciJ--7
OR 4788 OR 4278
(SERIES 4J OR
P/O
®
C KTU
® WITH
-
B
01
SIGNAL KEY
B BAT.
TO POWER SUPPLY
17
®
B GRD
a-r:
36
39
B GRD
P/0 CONN
A AND B
YE-----vv--7
826
:tJ
37
B GRO
P/O 407- OR 424-TVPE
I
C2
RIO
T
B GRD
B GRO
"TOUCH-TONE"
421A KTU (NOTES
I AND 2)
CONN
1
CONN
"TOUCH- TONE It
@ WI THOUT
(NOTE 2)
B GRD
RH
RH
12
~
35
ZJ
23
CONNECT LEADS WITH. rOR DESIRED STATION CODE (NOTE 3)
I
825
824
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
XI X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 XO
YI
Y2
V2
Y3
Y3
Y4
Y4
Y5
Y5
B22
B 8
-24
2
YI
t-
r--<
16
~
YI
Y4
A36
T
25
Y2
A37
A39
LT2
*
LT2
CG
T
22
*
27
CG
B21
-
T
26
v;
~
VI
*
USE WI TH 424-TYPE KTU ONLY
.1"
VI
m
P /0 440A(MOJ
OR 4788 OR 4278
(SERIES 4J OR
C KTU
------7
P/O
CONN
B21
':{]
O~
1ST
421 A KTU
CONN
T
37
f--+-7
EJ
2ND
421 A KTU
CONN
26
>--<
T
37
f--+-7
26
EJ
>--<
P/O
CONN
LAST
421 A KTU
CONN
T
37
f--+-7
Fig. 7-Condensed Functional Schematic of 421A KTU (Wired for DSS)
26
r££-<
P/O 407- OR
424- TYPE
B21
~---
!l
(5
z
'"
...
~
'"
,i..
o
....
....
o
CO
C1>
NOTES:
I.
2.
PIO
THE 421A KTU REQUIRES A MOUNTING FACILITY
EQUiPPED WITH A 40-PIN CONNECTOR.
421A KTU (NOTE I)
CONN
~ ®
THE 413A KTU REQUIRES A MOUNTING FACILITY
EQUiPPED WITH AN 18-,20-, OR 40-PIN CONNECTOR.
3. PROVIDE THE 413A KTU ONLY WHEN ACCESS TO THE
PRESET CONFERENCE IS BY DIAL CODE OR BY DIAL
T
WHEN ACCESS TO THE PRESET CONFERENCE IS
LIMITED TO
ess.
TO 425
TYPE KTU [
SELECTED
4.
REMOVE RINGER CAPACITORS FROM CIRCUIT.
5.
WHEN THIS CIRCUIT IS PROVIDED, RINGING VOLTAGE (105V±)
MUST BE USED TO OPERATE THE AUDIBLE SIGNALS
CONNECTED TO THE DIAL INTERCOM LI NE.
6.
PROVI DE
®
m
l
L
CODE AND 055. DO NOT PROVIDE THE 413A KTU
'"
!:l
oz
PIO
CONN
{NOTE 61
L]
L
T
L
STATIONS
L LEAD
T
L
L
TO LAMP
(ASSOCIATED
WITH DIAL
INTERCOM)
AT
SELECTED
STATION
OPTION AS SHOWN.
TO
4258 KTU
L LEAD OF CODE -=--t-~-<
23
ASSIGNED TO
PRESET CONFERENCE
TO
PIO 407- OR 424-TYPE
,d
KTU
ess SIGNAL KEY
(SHOt~SII~N~g
A
PRESET CONF
CODE
{J -
:~
L
{NOTE 61
(NOTE 3)
>-+--<
834
21
22
8 BAT
17
POWER SUPPLY
20-2~V 8~i
-=--+------------'
12
8 '1~~-------------_1~8~G~RD~
13
RG 11~~-------------_1~R:.:G~_<
14
:§h 't
f-+-r-------~)
T
~------1[}_7
:=t
PIO 413A KTU
R (NOTE
2 AND 5)
PIO
IAI MATRIX BLK
CRI
TO
407-00 424-TYPE KTU
SELECTED R LEAD
OF CODE ASSIGNED
TO PRESET CONF
R
36
(NOTE 3)
~::] ~~GER
~
RI
PIO
CONN
Fig. 8-Condensed Functional Schematic of 421A KTU (Wired for Preset Conference)
AT
SELECTED
STATION
(NOTE 4)
ISS 2, SECTION 518-215-402
NOTES:
I. REQUIRES A MOUNTING FACILITY
P/Q 423A OR 476A
EQU I PPED WITH A 40-PIN
KTU¥
CONNECTOR
-24
2. PROVIDE A SEPARATE 422B KTU
FOR UNITS GROUP (1-0, SINGLE
DIGIT NOS .) AND FOR THE TENS
GROUP (XI -XO, TWO-DIGIT NOS.)
KEY TEL SET
3. PROVIDE ANO I NSTALL A KS-I5724,LI
'I AI
olODE IN THE TELEPHONE SET.
SW
FOR CONNE CT ION, USE THE
HOOK
STATION BUSY OPT I ON AS SHOWN
(NOTE
3)
IN THE CONNECTI ON SECT I ON OF
TO
THE TEL SET USED.
4. CONNECT TO J GROUND IF 407-TYPE KTU PICKUP --f4KEYS
IS PROVIDE D. CONNECT TO LTI IF
ASSOCIATE o WITH UNITS GROUP OR
TO LT2 IF ASSOCIATED WITH TENS
GROUP.
5.
REMOVE ST RAP AND INSTALL 441J OIOOE,
81 P/O CONN
BL
P/0 CONN
29
BL(8 OR X8)
30
BL(O OR XO)
TO
OTHER
ASSOC
TEL
SET
BL
LEAD
34
BL(7 OR X7)
YI
Y2
BL (4 OR X4 )
BL(5 OR X5)
YI
Y5
'+
21
BL (3 OR X3)
Y2
'-J-
20
25
Y2
28
BL (2 OR X2)
23
J
YI
16
BYI
19
CR6 (NOTE 5)
n
PICTURE PHONE
I
y
1~8
--<
KTU
~
B35
H11:
~
B24
~t~
A36
I059 2 1TBI
~"
BR
CR5
YI
B25
4
6 93
Pia CONN
PIC 407-0R
424-TYPE
YI
G-{]-
CR2
22
~B
CR3
Y4
27
I
~T~
T~~
~
POWER SUPPLY
20-26 VDC B BAT.
B BAT.
B
A35
A39
B34
CR4
LT I
LT2
J
LTI OR
LT2
Y4
*{}:
Y5
G
~)
JI
B
B BAT.
*
Y5
G
35
LT
I:-J
Y2
!~
B
Y5
YI
*
CR I
YI
Y2
A37
Y5
f---*- Y4
Y5
26
BL(6 OR X6)
Y4
1:3
32
BL (lOR X I )
CONN [
AS
REQO
FOR
422B KTU (NOTES I AND 2)
14
BL(9 OR X9)
BL
PROCURE 0 lODE LOCALLY.
I
LT
LT
17
Fig. 9-Condensed Functional Schematic of 422B KTU (Station Busy Selector Circuit)
Page 13
....
P/O INTERRUPTER
..
Q
I. REQUIRES A MOUNTING FACILITY EQUIPPED WITH A
20- OR 40-PIN CONNECTOR.
2. WHEN ADDING DIAL TONE (T OPTION) TO A SYSTEM
EQUIPPED FOR "TOUCH-TONE" (440A [MD] OR 4788 OR
426A WITH 4276 [SERIES 4} OR C KTUS) A 4DOJ DIODE
MUST BE INSERTED BETWEEN THE !TRH" AND 'ILK" LEADS
ON THE 407- OR 424-TYPE KTU. REWIRE AS FOLLOWS:
4788 OR
440A(MO)
OR 4278
CONN
REMOVE
CONN
~
B
'I
I05V:!:
IBV+
IOV±
407OR
424-TYPE
KTU
(SERIES 4)
B26
BUSY TONE SEQUENCE
-
PIO 407-0R
I
424-TYPE
KTU
I
---
U
~
OPTIONS'
R
*
STATION BUSY TONE WITH
INTERRUPTED AUO I BlE SIGNAL
S
AUDIBLE RINGBACK
T
01 AL TONE
*-F ACTORY PROV 1OED
PIO
ro[
PWR
SUP
)
ss
BI4
B BAT
I05V+
ss
~I~
I
I
I0
f---
E
J
J
-24
lev:!:
~105V±
lO5V:t
I
BL
B34
IBV±
~-24
I
18V+
BYI
I
RI
(NOTE 2)
B30
LK
/
LK
t--
I
--1--
B A
LI
,TERMINAL END
OF KTU
RN
CONN
)( =t)(
f---
CW
n (@)
®
z
I
R B
3. TURN KNURLED WHEEL TO FUll ClOCKWI SE POS I T I ON
FOR MIN I MUM DIAL TONE VOLUME AND TO FUll
COUNTERCLOCKWISE POSITION FOR MAXIMUM DIAL
TONE VOLUME.
CCW
BTl
B GRD
B
B30
FRONT END
Q
is
®
RINGING SEQUENCE
OR CKTU
OF KTU
VI
423A KTU (NOTE
BYI
ATI
RINGING SEaUENCE
NOTES:
r
PIO CONN
®
B
'I
to
BI9
R
II~I~
)
BI2
T
L;K
CRI
CR2
r
--4:
Pia 4228 KTU
BYI
T
'---
Bl
BL
Y4
.
I
I
R4
R5
R6
R7
r--14
R3
-
I
~-24
,,I
BYI
R2
PIO
CONN
'---
Fig. lO-Condensed Functional Schematic of 423A KTU (Dial Tone, Busy Tone, and Audible Ringback)
BYI
NOTES:
r---
KEY TEL
I. REQUIRES A MOUNTING FACILITY EQUIPPED WITH TWO 91·4A (40-PIN)
CONNECTORS MOUNTED IN A VERTICAL PLANE.
2. ANY SELECTED R lEAD (RI-RO) MAY BE ASSIGNED AS THE INITIAL
DIGIT OF A 2-01GIT CODE. THE R LEAD SO ASSIGNED .AY NOT BE
USED FOR A STA TI ON COOE.
3. RES I STOR R4 CAN BE ADJUSTED TO VARY THE RELEASE TI NE Of'
RELAY B (FACTORY
AT 1.5 SECONOS ON ALL COOES) AS
FOLLOWS,
srr
424A AND 424B-TURN KNURLED WHEEL rULl COUNTERCLOCKWISE
1.5
R
11;1
T
~
P/o 426A KTU
(NOTE...!!_~
SECONDS.
----?
or
VIEV FROM fRONT
END Of KTU
BI3
BI2
P/O 427B (SERIES
4}OR C KTU
'1:
LI
L4
TERMINAL
END
KTU
CW
~
~
TOP
CCW
PU
R~
(CCW) fOR 0.5 SECOND TIMEOUT. TURN CLOCKWISE (CW) FOR
INTERVAL LONGER THAN 1.5 SECONDS. AT fUll tv POSITION CYCLE
MAT BE VERY lONG AND B RELAY MAY NOT RELEASE.
424C-AOJUSTMENT OF R4 I S REVERSED ON 424C fROM 424AI8. TURN
WHEEL fUll CW fOR 0.5 SECOND TIMEOUT. TURN CCW fOR TIMING
LONGER THAN
SW
HOOK
SET
LAND
~
R
PIO
CONN
PIO
A
AND
B
===
cW'.t'
B2.
B'.
T
~
co
B21
H
,...---,.
{@~
III
~~ ~E
~
92.
.I(
)~ ~(
)
B24
YI
P/o 424-TYPE KTU (SEIZURE AND DIAL CONTROL CKT)
(SEE NOTE I AND TABLE)
9t>
BI2
RH
®r
0t·
~
'>-
f---!!<
•1
. l~
(NOTE5}1
RSI
AI9
.
A'•
~
~ 21
Y2
Y2
B2.
924
TO
~----~~~~~-.~
BOTTOM
4. CONNECT LTI TO 422B KTU ASSOCIATED WITH UNITS GROUP AND
CONNECT lT2 TO 422B KTU ASSOCIATED WITH TENS GROUP.
5. If OSS IS REQUIRED. SEE fIG. 7.
'Ii
~~
)~
~
Y>
B22
Y'
B22
A
TO,{ 2
6. 440A(MDl OR 4788 KTU MAY BE USED TO PROVIDE TOUCH DIALING
IN PLACE OF 426A WITH 4278 (SERIES 41 OR C KTUS.
'Ii
~( ~E
)
AO.
III
~(
)E
~
A>7
Y4
LR
Y4
Y'
Y'
A'.
OPTIONS,
Z
WITHOUT
N
wiTH
E
"TOUCH- TONE"
DIALING
I NTERRUPTED
X- li
Ilov
I,osv
AC BUZZER
30 HZ RINGER
INTERRUPTED RING WITH
STATION BUSY TONE
R
.!:....
..L
K
SPURT
t
M
USING
423' KTU
WiRING DlfF" ERENCES
®
®
t BY AC BUZZER
OC BUZZER
IOSY 30 HZ RINGER
W
STEADY
V
flASHING
A'7
AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
IOV AC BUZZER
SINGLE
-
@
424A ONl Y
424B ONLY
TO
SH ,
TO
(NOTE 2)
TO
-
RIS
AI6
I
:iJ---~
(
·1
8
424C ONLY
LINE
LAMPS
'*
TO PROVIDE INTERRUPTED RINGING A 4258 KTU MUST BE USED.
t STATION BUSY TONE IS NOT RECOMMENDED fOR USE WITH SINGLE
SPURT RING ING.
UI
Fig. II-Condensed Functional Schematic of 424-Type KTU (Dial Intercom, 19-Code Selector Circuit) (Sheet
I of 3)
.."
:~.::::o~
Q
co
m
'"
TO CKTS REQUIRING rTG LEAD
14
Q
LK
(5
0-
DIGIT
DIALED
I
8
9
a
XI
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
X9
XO
·•
• ·
·• ••
•
·
·
· •• • • ·•••
• •
•
• ·
·
•
•
·
• ·
• ·•
•
•
•
•
• ·
• • • •
•
• • • •
• • •
•
• • • •
· •••
YI
Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 TR TRI
TYPICAL
TEL SET
:
LG
I~LAMP
'1
BYI
TTG
COUNTER RELAYS OPERATED
AT END OF DIAL PULSE
•
2
3
4
5
6
7
z
16
-248
TABLE
LK
PIC 425A(MD) OR B KTU
L BYI
B34
1-+-----,1
_ 24 B
L
BI9
L
BYI
BYI
R2
-+-L__~____V0r-__~
B37
-24~----~
BI6
_24CB~__
L
A39
q:
A35
B2B
LT2f-
~
~
I
~
E:
wml-- t
I
I
_
~~'11
i
I
B27
B35
A5
)
)
-YI~*
TC
TC
01
01
BI
816
LT2
LT2
~
T
LTI
TO 422B
KTU(NOTE 4)
ALI
LR
LR
LTI
(ill
LT2
ALI
819
R
A39
A35
828
FROM
SH I
AL2
AL2
BR
8R
ST
~ f-",
FC3
r<~
I
M~OR
L~MP
SUPPLY
SUPPLY
I
LF
I
827
835
~
FROM
SH I
~
~
~
BR
FROM
SH I
R
87
IOV±
10V+
FC3
{Y3
81
IOV+
820
FC2
FC2
+~2
82a
10V+""
*
L_
8YI
MG
A6
~
B30
834
BYI
fp/0 INTERRUPTER
YI4
LTI-LT4
CONTACTS
:
A38
837
B39
80
LTI- LT4
831
)
A--
FCI
FCI
0
LA
L
Pia
~
0
{YI
80
""
83 I
(
L,
LA
--1
®
Pia
CONN
A
AND
8
""
R©
r&
PIa 424-TYPE KTU
(LAMP CONTROL CKT)
(NOTE I AND TABLE)
L---
Fig, ll-Condensed Functional Schematic of 424-Type KTU (Dial Intercom, 19-Code Selector Circuit)
2 of 3)
(Sheet
10V±
r-P/O 424- TYPE KTU
PIO
{RINGING
CONN
A AND
TYPICAL TEL SET
CONTROL AND BATTERY FEED I
{NOTE I AND TABLE}
B
R7
STA 7
GR
( @SI
J
STA X7
RX7
STA XO
RXO
LG
STA 0
STA
XI
STA
t
STA X4
STA
4
STA X3
STA 3
TO
OTHER
STATION
AUD SIG
STA
X6
STA 6
STA X5
STA 5
STA X8
STA 8
PIO 423A OR 476A KTU
BYI
STA X9
STA 9
RX4
R4
RX3
R3
RX6
R6
RX5
R5
RX8
R8
RX9
R9
RN
STA X2
PIO
AUD SIG
PWR SUP
®
INTERRUPTER RN
RINGING
SEQUENCE
STA 2
g ,®,~ @
(I@
l
1
POWER SUPPLY
lev±
IOV±
J05Vt
RG"f-
~I'RG
"f- ~I'
LG
+24 II
+24 II
FROM
SH I
RX2
AI4
>I:
TRI
Y4
-24
A34
A8
R2
SS
B
A28
A27
TR
A26
1:
RI7
Y4
Y5
@
t-TRI
A24
TR
A25
AI
Y2
TR
A2 I
AO
A20
I---~FROM
I~Y3
SH I
R
Y5
Y4 -
A3I
TRI
A30
A9
A29
TRI
*
YI
A22
A23
814
Y5-
TR*
TO (NOTE 21
FROM
SH I
RH
Y3
B
IOV±
B
BBAT
8
8 GRD
A
A BAT.
A
TRI
A33
TRI
RI
PIO
CONN
SS
BL
RO
RXI
A3 2
AGRD
~
84
~IOV±
BI7
~-24
AI5
~I'B
818
~-24
B3
f----il' A
Fig. l1~Condensed Functional Schematic of 424-Type KTU (Dial Intercom, 19-Code Selector Circuit) (Sheet
3 of 3)
1@
iii
VI
,'"
VI
on
...no
z
NOTES:
I. REQUIRES A MOUNTING rACILITY EQUIPPED WITH TWO 9144 (40-PIN)
CONNECTORS MOUNTED I N A VERTI CAL PLANE.
2. THE 4254 (MD) 'AND·B KTUS ARE THE ONLY KTUS TO PROVIDE
INTEftRUPTERSTART CONTROL fOR ALL fUNCTIONS Of THE IA2 DIAL
INTERCOMMUNICATING SYSTEM.
rpfc) B'lh
PIO 424-TYPE KTU
B
'II
:
I
T
B
'11
A35
lTRI
~E
LTI
®
LT2
®
CONN
A39
®
II>
~
CONN
LTI
A35
9o
PIO 425A (MD) OR 8 KTU
(LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT)
(NOTE I AND 2)
z
-
LT2
VI
L--
~
-
OPTtONS'
X
~
H
R
INTERRUPTED I05V AC RI NGER
FLASHING
LAMPS
'USING 424-TYPE KTU
-<
T
-<
UI
USING 407-TYPE KTU
INTERRUPTED
RING WITH
USING 423A KTU
STATION
BUSY TONE
t
n
{t-
u
TABLE:
B
RELAYS OPERATED AT END
STA
. OF PULSE TRAIN
LAMP
407 OR 424
425A OR B
LEAD* VI Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 LTI LT2 LT3 LT4 YI4
f-.LI
L2
L3
L4
L5
407-TYPE
L6
L7
L8
L9
LO
LXI
LX2
LX3
LX4
•
• • • • ••
• • ••• •• • •
• • • • ••
• • •• ••
•
• ••
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
••
•
•••
•
••
• • • • •••
•
•
•
•
.. .
LX~
LX6
LX7
LX8
L:X9
LXO
'.
.----PIO
PIO 407-TYPE OR
424-TYPE KTU
IB
-24
••
:J
X IS FIRST DIGIT OF TWO- DIGIT CODE,
WHICH CAN BE ANY ,DIGIT 1-0. DIGIT SO
ASSIGNED, CANNOT BE A SINGLE· DIGIT
STATION CODE.
~
~
A36
Y5
B35
BI3
812 I
I'
A
~
816
B34
J,.
CONN
AL2
AL2
ALI
ALI
Y4,
LR
LR
BR
BR
R
>I-
S
~
SET
R3
n!
01
J
J
BI6
B34
FOR
PICTURE-
B
B
L
BYI
B
i:T~~M- ~ A19 f---*-il'
~-24
:J
* NUMBER DESIGNATES STATION ASSIGNMENT,
B28
YI
~
~IO
•
••
•
'I
B27
Y5
VI
(425B KTU
ONLY)
I
I
r<
L
I
TYPE
I
I
I
R3
B'BR~
837
'11
BI9
~
lE lE
0TERRUPTER
!~ ~
@
BYI
BYI
(NOTE 2)
ST
MG
I I
INTER
MOTOR
SUPPLY
L
L-
'1
'MG#.
BYI
TC
AS ~L
A6~
POWER SUPPLY
B BAT.
20-26V [ DC +
B GRD
"---
B
-24
B
A15iL~::::~I~I'__________
A17
~---'-
Fig. 12-Condensed Functional Schematic of 425A (MO) and 4258 KTUs (Flashing Lamp Circuit) (Sheet 1 of
2)
J
--;;-
pia
425A (MO) OR 6 (LAMP CIRCUIT)
(NOTES I AND 2)
CONN
LAMP
C IRCUI T
@
KEY
SET
G
pia
PIO 4Q7-TYPE OR
I
CONN
L9
'- ~
424- TYPE KTU
YI
FC I
80
820
Y2
61
Y3
631
RJ-t-~>----
FC2
FC3
TO LAMP
CIRCUIT
AT TEL
SETS
LA
IOVt
64
67
LF
Pia
INTERRUPTER
LAMP FLASH
SEQ CaNT
LAMP
PWR SUP
10V>
-~
-~
-~
- .ll...(
-~
-~
-~
-~
-~
-~
-~
-~
-~
-~
-~
-~
A29
+.
A21
LTZLT2
A25
A34
A26
FC2
rC3
LA
lG
i
'~'[==
AS
REQO
LTI
LT2
A30
A23
A31
~
I~
LTJ
LC2
lCI
L
,- ~
LT2'
{-14
A22
"""""""
~4
[Lrf4-
A33
A27
L[f4.
AI
LT3
LT4
A24
AI4
+LT4
+
A9
A8
FCI
~
YI4
L5
,- ~
11
YI4
It-'r~r
A32
AO
i
YI4
L1::r
LT2
A28
A20
YI4
LT3
80
620
61
631
A37
A36
824
625
639
622
Fig. 12-Condensed Functional' Schematic of 425A (MD) and 4258 KTUs (Flashing Lamp Circuit) (Sheet 2 of
2)
""a
UI
- ~)-:
(NOTE 3)
Y2
822
Y3
(NOTE 4)
*
YI
A37
CG
PP
Y3
YI
Y2
Y2
Y5
Y5
B21
B20
B22
B25
B24
A37
*
XY
BI9
Y4
B
B
Y4
Y4
PIO
-24
CONN
'---
.!.!.2.
A36
H3
>-#
I HI
L3
L3
L2
L4
l-,
CIRCUIT
~.
B28
B39
~RVI
~
B27
~
A39
~-24
H8
H2
L4
HI
B39
R22
HB
R24
I~
A
LB
LB
Ll
Ll
R23
>--f--
,+H2
LI
H3
-24
R21
B27
r-A39
f-- ~
f-I
IA
-
24
A
~
H}-i= =-=
L4
BI8
~-24
'---
.~-24
*
CONNECT AS RE QUrREO WHEN THE
11TH KEY (XY) 0 A 12TH KEY (PP) IS USED.
L{}--t-----
POWER SUPPLY
-
eRr
B281'
L3
H3
1~L3T ~
I L2
~
H}--t-=
HI
-=f
L2 ,t
-+
f--
IA
1--24
Tk2:SL~~~~ ,
-24
- 24
H}--;===-<
~#
H2
H2
f
LI
L4
'H3
C2~ IAI
I
H}--t . ~
T~~~:A~~~ ,~
B
Y5
A36
t---
I
t--
A
H3
B38
I'
B
CG
A35
I
IIII
,-
24
CIRCUIT
A38
A35
HI
K}-2t_-=
I---RSI
RSI
.--~
CONN
A a. B
HI
I I
CI
~
I
~ L4
R9
J II.f::::
R2
BI2
r-pjQ
427B SERIES 4 OR 427C KTU (NOTE I AND TABLE)
(NOTE 2)
B38
CONN
A
AND
B
T
TO ALL
ASSOC
T
~ -<-.>- ~
B30
J
VI
426A KTU (NOTE I)
RI
BI3
PIa
CONN
~I'
__
R_2_A_
Ll
R
PIa
-24
)
,..-R
A
HI
-24
A
)
BI8
BAT.
A
18-2SV
DC
TALK
- '---
Fig, 13-Condensed Functional Schematic of 426A KTU (Amplifier, Band Separation and Limiter Circuit) and
427B (Series 4) or 427C KTU (Frequency Recognition and Translation Circuit) (Sheet 1 of 2)
Q
oz
DIGIT DIALED
t
I
2
3
4
5
6
HIGH AND LOW
FREQ GENERATED
BY TT DIAL
1209
697
1336
697
1477
697
1209
770
1336
770
1477
770
RELAYS OPERATED
IN 427B, SERIES4
OR 427C KTU
HI,lI
H2,lI
H3,LI
HI,L2
H2,L2
H3,L2
CTR RFLAYS OPRD IN
407-TYPEOR 424-TVPE
Y2
YI
Y3, Y4
Y2, Y4
YI,Y4,Y5
NOTES:
I. EACH 426A AND 427B, SER I ES 4 OR 427C KTU REQU I RES TWO
914A (40-PIN) CONNECTORS MOUNTED IN A VERTICAL PLANE.
2_ T WIRING MUST BE rURNISHED ON A SYSTEM EQUIPPED WITH
DIAL TONE US I NG A 423A KTU. D I ODE I S A 400J AND MUST
BE PROVIDED LOCALLY. DIODE IS NOT REQUIRED Ir DIAL
TONE IS PROVIDED BY A 423B KTU.
3. GROUND IS PROVIDED DIRECTLY TO THE RSI LEAD WHEN THE
407-TYPE KTU IS USED AND THROUGH A T RELAY CONTACT WHEN THE·
424-TYPE KTU IS USED.
Y3,Y4,YS
7
8
9
0
1209
852
1336
852
1447
852
1336
941
HI,L3
H2,L3
H3,L3
H2,L4
YI, Y5
Y3,Y5
Y2, Y5
Y2, Y4, Y5
4. WHEN THE 427B, SERIES 4 OR 427C IS ADDED TO AN EXISTING
SYSTEM REMOVE GROUND rROM B2 I or THE 407B KTU OR R[MOVE
STRAP rROM B2 I TO A 19 or THE 424A KTU_
5. WHEN ADDING THE 426A AND 427B, SERIES 4 OR 427C KTU'S
TO AN EXISTING SYSTEM EQUIPPED WITH A 420A KTU, A
DIODE MUST BE INSTALLED IN THE TTG LEAD CONNECTING TO
THE 420A KTU _ SEE rI GURE s.
6. Ir DSS IS REQUIRED, SEE FIG. 7.
SINGLE-DIGIT CODE OR 1ST OR 2ND DIGIT or TWO-DIGIT CODE.
t
Fig. 13-Condensed Functional Schematic of 426A KTU (Amplifier, Band Separation and Limiter Circuit) and
427B (Series 4) or 427C KTU (Frequency Recognition and Translation Circuit (Sheet 2 of 2)
iii
'"
-~
m
'"
n
....
(5
Z
Ut
g
'"
~
co
.;.
~
co
~
Ut
0
~
SECTION 518-215-402
P/O 440A KTU (NOTE I)
I
-24
~
I
--+--
CI9
I
-24~
~
I
I
TI
--+-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
HI
I
---r--
r---r
U
--
1
--+-~-24
--+-~-24
I
--+--
-----
R23
R24
CR9
... - 1
I
R42
1
R46
R44
RTI
A
-24
I
CR8
R45
t-:... --
24
RT2
-R47
R43
eRIO
RVI
DIGIT DIALED
*
HIGH ANO LOW FREQ
GENERATED 8Y TT 01 Al
RELAYS OPRD IN
440 A KTU
CTR RELAYS OPRD
IN 4078 OR 424A
I
2
3
4
5
7
6
R22
RV2
8
9
0
1209
697
1336
697
1477
697
1209
770
1336
770
1477
770
1209
852
1336
852
1477
852
1336
941
HI.LI
H2,LI
H3,LI
HI,L2
H2.l2
H3.l2
HI,L3
H2.l3
H3.l3
H2.l4
Y2
YI
Y3. Y4
Y2. Y4
YI.Y4.Y5
YI,YS
Y3. Y5
Y2, Y5
Y3, Y4, Y5
NOTES:
I. REQUIRES A MOUNTING FACILITY EQUIPPED
WITH A 80-P I N CONNECTOR.
2. WHEN THE 440A KTU IS ADDED TO AN EXISTING SYSTEM REMOVE
GROUNO fROM 621 Or THE 407-TYPE KTU OR REMOVE STRAP
rROM 821 TO A 19 or THE 424-TYPE KTU.
3. GROUND 15 PROV I OED 0 I RECTl Y TO THE RS I lEAD WHEN THE
4076 -TYPE KTU IS USED AND THROUGH A T RELAY CONTACT WHEN THE
424A - TYPE KTU IS USED.
Y2, Y4, Y5
4. T WIRING MUST BE fURNISHED ON A SYSTEM EQUIPPED WITH
DIAL TONE. DIODE 15 A 400J AND MUST BE PROVIDED lOCAllY.
5. WHEN ADD I NG THE 440A KTU TO AN EX I ST I NG SYSTEM EQUI PPED
WITH A 420A KTU. A DIODE MUST BE INSTAllED IN THE TTG lEA"
CONNECTING TO THE 420A KTU. SEE rlGURE 6.
* SINGLE-DIGIT CODE
OR 1ST OR 2ND DIGIT or TWO-DIGIT CODE.
Fig. 14-Condensed Functional Schematic of 440A (MO) KTU (TOUCH-TONE® Adopter Circuit) (Sheet 1 of 2)
Page 22
ISS 2, SECTION 518-215-402
~
""PIO"
CG
B2 I
(NOTE 2)
CG
6
-I
~ L3
RS I
B3 B
LI
621
'38
-I~
~ L2
P/O 407-TVPE OR 424- TYPE KTU
CONN
CONN
L4
r
',9
RSI
638
(NOTE 3)
H2
HI
H3 !------<
LI
--.
RH
LK
626
B30
-HI L3
't
H3
+
L4
L4
L3
HI
T
~C2
D:"
f------
Y4
~ 632
Y4
Y4
YS
Y5
'36
L3
L4
L2
I
I
H3
I~
Y5
B33
Y2
'37
624
-Y3
fH2
Y2
830
~
LI
(NOTE 4)
1®1
L2
H2
HI
RH
~ B26
3
H3
Y3
829
YI
BI'
TTG
B3 6
~
BI2
~
BI3
-24~
BIB
I
I
(NOTE 5)
R
~ r-
TTG
T
T
R
TO POWER SUPPLY
YI
~
Y2
~
B25
~
B39
(
YI
H2
~
622
~
B
6
-24
R
B
I
)(
6
II-
612
R2
•
~I-
613
~-24
RI
-
Fig. 14-Condensed Functional Schematic of 440A (MO) KTU (TOUCH-TONE® Adapter Circuit) (Sheet 2 of 2)
Page 23
_/0
rpjO
,HTERRU_TER
476A KTU (NOHS , AND 2)
~
CONN
RH
IOVt,18Y:t,
,OSt
4
,...---
II
BL
BY'
6
0
1
lr
IOVi.laYt
-l@*
9
0
.-J
8
C!D*
r--
_/0
P/O.407-TVPE OR
424-TYPE KTU
I
I
---
t(
)(
*
(zo.zr. ZE)
EI
BL
E3
-24
0
)
L..-
55
814
'3
B
B
B
t
3
I
R
't
2
),@)*
COHH
BY'
5
~
BY'
J
'6
834
'1
B
TO
-rOUCH-TONE- RH
ADAPTER ( " PROVIDED)
r---<
L
BY'
.. 11CR'~
~+'C4
CRZ
lK
830
A
CR4
I' .......
BL
R3
R5
,+
--+I
__ J
-2'
BY'
~-24
8YI
---
BI9
R
)
L:,.
A
Ln_/0
12
n
-24
[B GRO
TO
POWER
'5
H,.
11
~-2'
09
)1
0'
(NOTE 3)
Te
C6
l
NOTES:
I. REQUIRES A MOUNTING FACIL.ITY EQUIPPED WITH
20 OR 40 PINS.
2. THE 476A KTU CAN ONLY BE USED IN MODULAR
RIO
PANEL INSTALLATIONS.
3. TURN KNURLED WHEEL TO rUll CLOCKWISE POSI-TIOII
FOR MINIMUM DIAL TONE VOLUME AIIIO TO FULL
COUNTERCLOCKWISE POSITION FOR MAXI .... DIAL
TONE VOLUME.
I
I
---+,
CCW
rROHT EHO
I
or
'--
KlU
R2
04
OPTIONS
B
~~J
,
I TERMI.Al ENO
or
B BAT
'---
-24
"E· TrANI.AL
STAAPPING
At OR
NEGATIVE
VOLTAGE
CONTROL
---4
,.
£1 TO E2
*
-24
CRS
8
I
I
'---
~
Fig. IS-Condensed Functional Schematic of 476A KTU (Dial Tone, Busy Tone, and Audible Ringback Tone)
lD.
BUSY TONE
zr.
AUDIEtLE
RINGiBACK
ZEN
STATION
* FACTORY PROVIDED STRAPPING
C5
P/O
COHN
Bl
OPTION
DIAL TOME
r--
Y5
KTU
,
APPliCATION
I
;f---- ... --~
OW
n
(® J
U
-2'
SUPPLY
422B KTU
Y4
T
BI2
E2
ISS 2, SECTION 518-215-402
'PiO
PiC
478B KTU (NOTE 1)
CONN
Y1
HIGH BEF
(STAR)
AND
LOW
LIMITER
TRANSLATION
AND
ENABLE
LOW BEF
(STAR)
AND
HIGH
LIMITER
1
CONN
Y1
Y2
Y2
Y3
Y3
Y4
Y4
YS
YS
CG
RH
Ir-
n-Y-
~IB1
L-----------------------------------------~IB1
OPTIONS'
USAGE
OPTION
Y (NOTE 3)
570 KSU
Y (NOTE 3)
S80 KSU
626A PANEL
Y
641A PANEL
Z
642A PANEL
Y
Y OPTION FACTORY PROVIOED.
-10.4V
-S.2V
A
B1
~
A
~
LK
RS1
T
T
R
R
81~
I~
-24
L ---<
TTG
TTG
__________________________________
Y1
CG
(NOTE 2)
RS1
L-~
P/0 424-TYPE KTU
1" ""~
31~ -_
~I~
POWER
SUPPLY
Sl~ --,
'---
NOTES,
1. REQUIRES A MOUNTING FACILITY EQUIPPED WITH
AN BO-PIN CONNECTOR.
2. OIDOE (400J, LOCALLY PROVIDED) MUST BE
FURNISHED IN SYSTEM EQUIPPED WITH DIAL TONE.
3. CONNECTORS J13 AND J14 OF 570A KSU AND J21 AND
J22 OF SBOA KSU MUST EACH HAVE A GRD ON PIN 3
AND B GRD ON PIN 1S. IF NOT FACTORY WIRED IN
KSU, INSTALL LEAD ASSEMBLY SHIPPED WITH 47BB
KTU. IN S70A, RUN A GRO FROM J1D-3 AND B GRO
FROM J10-37. IN 5BOA, RUN A GRD FROM J18-3 AND
B GRO FROM J23-15.
Fig, 16-.Condensed Functional Schematic of 4788 KTU (TOUCH-TONE Adapter Circuit).
Page 25
25 Pages
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT & TCo Standard
SECTION 518-215-403
Issue 2, May 1978
SERVICE
1A2 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
KEY TELEPHONE UNITS
CONTROL SERVICES
1.
.421A-Power Failure Transfer Circuit,
Audible Signal Suppression Circuit, or General
Purpose Relay
GENERAL
This section provides schematic information
for the 400-series KTUs which provide control
and switching circuits. These units provide for
extending visual and audible signal arrangements.
1.01
• 448A-Delayed Transfer Control Circuit
• 449A-Immediate Transfer Control Circuit
1.02
This section is reissued to:
.467A-Low-Voltage Monitor Circuit
• Provide additional information on the 421A
KTU
.469A-Lamp Extender Circuit.
• Remove contact protection networks from
Fig. 5, 412A KTU
Information on line services is covered in
518,215-400; auxiliary line service, 518-215-401;
intercom services and associated features, 518-215-402.
Section 518-215-100 contains general information on
the lA2 Key Telephone System.
1.04
• Provide a schematic diagram (Fig. 8) for a
new circuit arrangement using the 421A
KTU
• Change Fig. 9 to show the 421A KTU as a
general purpose relay
Mechanical
• Remove all information on the 470A KTU
which was never manufactured
All circuit components on these KTUs are
mounted on a plug-in printed wiring board,
one end of which is equipped with contacts. A
4-inch board may have 18-, 20-, or 4O-contacts; an
8-inch board will have 80 contacts (requiring two
vertical 4O-pin connectors). The circuit boards plug
into mating connectors in key service units (KSUs),
panels, or apparatus mountings. Wiring from the
connectors will be dedicated or nondedicated leads.
Dedicated leads are those that normally appear on
the same contacts of all KTUs, such as supply
voltages and grounds, and are normally factory-wired.
Nondedicated leads are those whose designation
and function vary and are made available for
installer connections. Fig. 1 and 2 show typical
4- and 8-inch KTUs.
1.05
• Correct errors in lead designations and
terminal numbers in Fig. 10
• Change notes in Fig. 10 and 11.
1.03
The following KTUs and their functions are
covered in this section:
.402A-Diode Matrix
• 404A-Diode Matrix
.412A-Auxiliary Relay Circuit
• 413A-Auxiliary Ringup Circuit
NOTICE
Not for use or disclosure outside the
Bell System except under written agreement
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
SECTION 518-215-403
1.08
KTUs may require the following power
supply voltages and their associated grounds:
-24V (B battery) for control
-24V (A battery) for talk
±10V for visual and audible signals
±105V for audible signals
1.09
This issue of the section is based on the
following drawings:
SO-69552-01, Issue 4-412A KTU
SD-69590-01, Issue 3-413A, 421A, 448A,
and 449A KTUs
SO-69917-01, Issue 1-467A KTU
Fig. I-Typical 4-lnch Key Telephone Unit
SO-69559-01, Issue 9B-469A KTU
If this section is to be used with equipment or
apparatus reflecting later issues of the drawings,
reference should be made to the COs and SOs to
determine the extent of the changes and the
manner in which the section may be affected.
2.
IDENTIFICATION
402A KTU (Diode Matrix)
The 402A KTU (Fig. 3) is used with the
1A1 KTS in existing spare space of the 501and 502-type KSUs to control station common
audible signals. The unit provides control for four
lines and six audible signals, or vice versa, and
uses 533F diodes which must be locally provided.
2.01
Fig. 2- Typical 8-lnch Key Telephone Unit
Electrical
404A KTU (Diode Matrix)
Functional schematics (Fig. 3 through 13)
cover the basic circuitry of each KTU,
contacts used, and its relationship to telephone
sets, other KTUs, power supplies, and apparatus.
Oashed lines are used to simplify the schematic
and to indicate intermediate circuitry. If full
schematics are required, refer to the SOs listed in
1.09.
1.06
The 404A KTU (Fig. 4) is a 4-inch, 18-contact
unit capable of controlling 6 lines and 12
audible signals or vice versa. The unit is for use
with a 259-type KTU, or equivalent adapter, and
uses 533F diodes which must be locally provided.
2.02
412A KTU (Auxiliary Relay Circuit)
The 412A KTU (Fig. 5) is for use as a panel
slave relay to augment signal interrupter
lamp capacity for large installations. The KTU is
arranged to plug into 584-type panels. It contains
four dc operated mercury relays for lamp flash or
lamp wink control. Each relay can control a
maximum of one hundred 51 A- or 53A-type lamps.
2.03
Voltages required for operation of the KTU,
or provided to associated apparatus by the
KTU, are shown with their connector pins. Other
voltages may appear on the contacts of the mating
connector, depending on the mounting arrangement,
but not on the KTU.
1.07
Page 2
ISS 2, SECTION 518·215·403
Each relay is also arranged so that it may be
controlled individually. Coils are provided with
protection networks.
(Fig. 9).
features:
The KTU has the following operating
413A KTU (Auxiliary Ringup Circuit)
• Relay normally energized; for use during
local power failure.
2.04
• Used with common audible matrix.
The 413A KTU (Fig. 6) is a 4-inch, 18-contact
unit providing an auxiliary nonlocking ring
detector for use on CO or PBX lines supplying
either 20- or 30-Hz ringing voltage. Contacts of
the ringup relay can be used for controlling external
signaling functions or relays. The KTU has the
following operating features:
• Option strapping when used as a general
purpose relay.
• Maximum external circuit loop resistance is
120 ohms.
.It
is recommended that the use of
an audible signal suppression circuit
on CO and PBX lines be restricted to
installations having multiple ringers.
Otherwise, incoming calls may be
lost when a station is off·hook
and the 421A KTU cuts off the
audible signal.•
• Ringing voltage applied to RC lead by R
relay operation
• Audible signaling control options
• Two spare pairs of relay contacts for local
engineering (one make and one break)
• Ringing ranges are:
448A KTU (Delayed Transfer Control Circuit)
MINIMUM
RMS
RINGING
VOLTAGE
84 volts
(20 Hz)
NUMBER OF BRIDGED RINGERS'
STANDARD
LOOPS
15K·OHM
LEAKAGE
UNIGAUGE
LOOPS
20K·OHM
LEAKAGE
0-2
Ot
*Refer to SD-69590 for specific information on
worst possible cases.
tOne bridged ringer will operate on approximately
2000 ohms.
The 448A KTU (Fig. 10) consists of two
identical circuits mounted on a 4-inch printed
wiring board. Each circuit is a variable delay
timer which allows the ringer at the principal station
to ring for a predetermined interval of time. The
timer is factory-adjusted to time-out in 6-1/2 seconds,
but it may be adjusted for a time-out interval of
1 to 30 seconds. When the timer times out,
ringing is transferred to the attendant station.
Lamp signals are provided at the principal station
in the normal manner. Lamp flash starts at the
attendant station when ringing is transferred.
2.06
449A KTU (Immediate Transfer Control Circuit)
421A KTU (Power Failure Transfer Circuit, Audible
Signal Suppression Circuit, or General Purpose Relay)
The 421A KTU is a 4-inch, 40-contact unit
that can be used to automatically transfer a
maximum of three station ringers from a common
audible connection to a line ringing connection in
the event of a power failure (Fig. 7). .The 421A
KTU can be used to suppress (cut off) audible
signals on a line or lines associated with a key
telephone set when that set is off-hook (Fig. 8) .•
It can also be used as a general purpose relay
2.05
The 449A KTU (Fig. 11) consists of two
identical circuits mounted on a 4-inch printed
wiring board. Each circuit consists of an electrical
flip-flop which provides immediate transfer of
ringing. The flip-flop is activated by a nonlocking
key located at the principal station. When the key
is operated, the flip-flop locks up to transfer incoming
ringing from the principal station to the attendant
station. A steady lamp indication is provided at
the principal station when the nonlocking key is
operated and the flip-flop is locked up. The transfer
is canceled by operating the nonlocking control key
a second time.
2.07
Page 3
SECTION 518-215-403
467A KTU (Low-Voltage Monitor Circuit)
469A KTU (Lamp Extender Circuit)
The 467A KTU (Fig. 12) is a 4-inch, 18-pin
unit that monitors the -24 volt supply for a
low-voltage condition. If there is a low-voltage
condition, a light emitting diode (LED) will light
and will remain lighted until the reset button is
depressed. The circuit is factory-adjusted to indicate
a voltage below 19 volts but may be adjusted to
indicate a voltage below 17 to 21 volts by a
potentiometer provided by the circuit.
The 469A KTU (Fig. 13) is a 4-inch, 18-pin
unit that provides current to line lamp
multiples when they exceed current capacity of
the 400-type KTU. The 469A KTU can drive up
to twenty lamps, has a current drain itself equivalent
to one lamp, and will mount in connectors reserved
for 400-type line circuits. The 469A KTU can be
used in the 620A modular panel, 583-, 584-, 597-,
and 598-type panels, 513, 514, and 515 KSUs, and
69-type apparatus mountings.
2.09
2.08
KEY TELEPHONE
SYSTEM
RI OR BZ
TO
COMMON
AUDIBLE
SIGNAL
(NOTES I
AND 2)
NOTES:
I. AUDIBLE SIGNALS MUST BE ALL RINGERS
OR All AC BUZZERS. DO NOT USE RINGERS
AND BUZZERS I N THE SAME C I RCU IT.
DO NOT USE DC BUZZERS.
2. REMOVE CAPAC I TOR rROM RINGERS
CONNECTED TO DIODE CIRCUIT.
3. rACTDRY PROVIDED STRAPPING MUST BE
REMOVED rROM SOME SYSTEMS BErORE
CONNECT I NG KTU.
4. ALL DIODES MUST BE POLARIZED IN
SAME DIRECTION.
5. CONNECT 24-GAUGE BARE WIRE STRAP,
INSTEAD or DIODE, WHEN ONE COMMON
RINGER WILL BE SIGNALED rRON A
LINE CIRCUIT •
402A KTU
(NOTES 3 AND 4)
I.
A
,
'<./
RI OR BZ
B
RI OR BZ
;.
RI OR BZ
.!'..
'V
-"
)..
CA OR RC
'V
2
CA OR RC
'V
CA OR RC
~:' .~
~
CA OR RC
,
,
.~
CA OR RC
4
5
'V
~
;I
f
f
3
CA OR RC
TO
LINE
CIRCUIT
UNITS
./
/
/
--'"
/' /
(NOTE5)~
'V
Fig. 3-Condensed Functional Schematic of 402A KTU (Diode Matrix)
Page 4
ISS 2, SECTION 518-215-403
PIO
CA
OR
259B
KTU
404A KTU (NOTES 3 AND 4)
I
AI
2
A2
A3
TO
LINE
CIRCUITS
( 3
4
A4
CA
OR RC
CA
OR
5
AS
A6
A7
¢-
B
AB
TO
COMMON
AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
AS
REQUIRED
( NOTES
I AND 2)
RI
OR
(NOTE 5)
A
(NO~~
~
~
C
A9
~
~
" ""
~
~
,
~
.~
D
~ ~
E
I
,
~
~
F
~
CA
OR
,
CA
OR
"'
~
~
~
8
9
TO
LINE
CIRCUITS
10
"
12
NOTES:
I. AUDIBLE SIGNALS MUST BE ALL RINGERS OR ALL AC BUZZERS.DO NOT USE RINGERS AND BUZZERS IN
THE SAME DIODE CIRCUIT. DO NOT USE DC BUZZERS.
2. REMOVE CAPACITORS FROM THE RINGERS CONNECTED TO DIODE CIRCUIT.
3. FACTORY WIRING MUST BE REMOVED IN SOME SYSTEMS BEFORE CONNECTING THE 404A KTU.
4. ALL DIODES MUST BE POLARIZED IN THE SAME DIRECTION.
S. CONNECT A 24-GAUGE BARE WIRE STRAP, INSTEAD OF A DIODE, WHEN ONE COMMON RINGER WILL
BE SIGNALED FROM A LINE CIRCUIT.
Fig. 4-Condensed Functional Schematic of 404A KTU (Diode Matrix)
Page 5
SECTION 518-215-403
P/0 584- TYPE PANEL
:
B BAT.
Lr OR LW
(
B BAT.
Lr OR LW
B BAT.
5
Lr OR LW
B BAT.
Lr OR LW
Lri
IOV'
10
e
Lr2
17
13
LWI
15
IOV<
(
LW2
12
Lr3
IOV<
14
16
(
II
Lr4
:
:
:
412A KTU
~ TA
~~e
~TC
~~o
;fA
)A
;Ie
)e
Jc
)c
19
LW3
10V<
LW4
21
;fo
(
20
(
18
)0
Fig. 5-~ndensed Functional Schematic of 412A KTU (Auxiliary Relay Circuit).
Page 6
ISS 2, SECTION 518-215-403
NOTE'
PIO CONN
REQUIRES A MOUNTING
FACILITY EQUIPPED WITH
AN 18-, 20-, OR 40PIN CONNECTOR.
CO OR PBX
T
T
R
R
LINE
OR
AS REQUIRED
413A KTU (SEE NOTE)
CRI
I4
R
TBI
INTER
OR
AS REQUIRED
U
RN
CR2
TBI
POWER SUPPLY
OR
AS REQUIRED
I05V±
I0
9
® ®
10
OPTIONS
AUDI8LE
SIGNALS
WHEN CIRCUIT IS ENERGIZED BY
STEADY RING IN G AND IT IS DESIRED
TO CONTROL IN TERRUPTED RINGING
STEADY RINGIN G.
RINGER, ETC.,
OR
AS REQUIRED
SPARE I
AS REQUIRED
SPARE 2
SPARE 3
AS REQUIRED
R
RC
R
I
)(
I
R
I
SPARE 4
Fig, 6-Condensed Functional Schematic of 413A KTU (Auxiliary Ringup Circuit)
Page 7
NOTE'
OPTION
® REQUIRED
*
III
P/O IAI MATRIX BlK
REQUIRES A MOUNTING FACILITY
EQUIPPED WITH A 40-PIN
CONNECTOR.
WHEN 421A KTU IS
USED FOR GENERAL PURPOSES
RC (I)
RIOR BZ
I I I
if 1I if
II l! l!
RI OR BZ
RI OR BZ
CA
KTU WIRED FOR COMMON
AUDIBLE WITH DIODE MATRIX
CA
OPTION,
CA
P/O 400-TYPE KTU
(CKT Il
cU
B
C
)(
1
P/O 400 TYPE KTU
(CKT2)
c§
B
C
I
)(
P/O 400- TYPE HU
(CKT 3)
c§
B
C
)<
1
P/O KS TYPE
INTERRUPTER
RING SEQUENCE
CONTACT
C
*
:
P/O CONN
I
II
*
:
R
R (I)
TI
T (I)
RGII
B-BI (I)
STA~
II
RN
RC
SELECTED
CO OR
R
PBX
T 1
LINE
II
I6
R-RI (I)
RC (2)
I
RC
RN
PIO CONN
R (2)
T (2)
RG (2)
B-BI (2)
STA~
SELECTED
CO OR
R
PBX
TI
LINE
RG II
R-RI(2)
RC-(3)
R (3)
T(3)
RG (3)
I05V±
STA~
B-BI (3)
R-RI (3)
21
20
23
35
36
I05V±
RG<>--- ~I'RG
BG II
PWR SUP
B GRD
~
~
~I't
:f"
24
26
27
37
39
17
~
7
8
./~
'--
T
~3't
:f'
T
B BAT.
./.
T
25
POWER SUPPLY
BBAT.
~
13
PWR SUP
RN
Z
~
I
:]'"
22
PWR SUP
RN
P/O CONN
I
I4
;~t
RC
RGII
I
RG (I)
T
8
PWR SUP
P/O CONN
*
:
SELECTED
CO OR
PBX
LINE
~
421A KTU (NOTE Il
P/O CONN
~
Fig. 7-Condensed Functional Schematic of 421A KTU (Wired for Power Failure Transfer)
~
5
6
L--
~
ISS 2, SECTION 518-215-403
421A KTU
P/O
:;=
CDNN
TO OTIER
RIfIlER III
421A KTU
--<
R-R1
....,r-l,;B:=-B;::.....-q...__4
R-R1
--<
r-------------
R-R1
R-R1
-------- _____1
C!IIIJN
AIIlIBLE
RIfIlER '-1._J,::::.!..-_......J
4iJO
~~~S~
TYPE
TO OTIER
RIIIOER III
421A KTU
Ir
us:-rd
~
R-R1
21
--<
2D
23
35
38
25
24
28
2T
'.f7
38 ~----------~
BL
BL
(
~
12
13
--<
--<
--<
--<
--<
--<
--<
1)
18
22
--<
LS
14
--<
421A KTU IS DES::D Fill
IN A 4O-PIN CDNNECTIll. IF TIE
421A KTU IS USED IN A 2D-PIN
IlATRIX BLOCK
CDNNECTIll. USE RELAY CONTACTS
(~TE 4)
ASSOCIATED WITH CDNNECTIII PINS _____________________ _
9-13 _ 12-14.
2. DPTIDN CIIIREQUIRED lIEN 421A KTU IS
USED FlJlt""'AIIlIBLE SIDNAL SlJ'PRESSIDN.
BZ
3. REFER TO SECTIDN PERTAININil TD
TELEPHDNE SET USED.
4. 4DD TYPE KTU WIRED Fill C!IIIJN
INTERCII'I
AIIlIBLE WITH DIOOE IlATRIX
BZ
BUIZER
DPTIDN
(III RINilER
(~TE
T
E 3)
Fig. 8-~ondensed Functional Schematic of 421A KTU (Wired for Audible Signal Suppression).
Page 9
SECTION 518-215-403
421A KTU (NOTE 1)
(NOTE 2)
NOTE:
1, THE 421A KTU REQUIRES A MOUNTING FACILITY
EQUIPPED WITH A 4C-PIN CONNECTOR,
2, PROVIDE
OPTION AS REQUIRED,
®
i~
1
2
T
T61
14
1
T
1
T
20
16
2,
(NOTE 2)
21
22
17
~ 'f
~
)
T
~1
Fig. 9-tcondensed Functional Schematic of 421A KTU (General Purpose Relay).
Page 10
ISS 2, SECTION 518·215-403
"PiC
fOR LINE
RINGING
A
)(
12
T
13
I)
8
C
-)(--1-)
I
I'~
e
TO
I
:~ERS
IF
REQO
[ ::::::
20
.:.":.:(:..:'':":)_-1--<:
.,,8,,(:..:"'-')_-1--<
25
24
T(I)
\
R(I)
31
_
I
~
~IIII
"
'---Ai' I I
~
./0
LI.I)
OP
t
RC(I)
,---~/O
~
449" KTU
I I
~
CR5(1)
CI
R2(1)
(NOTE 2)
04~ )
R3(1)
L...-.-
I
I
RelAll)
SW
TO 1ST PRINCIPAL
TEL SET IF
C _ ,UDI8LE
RC(~")
PU
IS USED ANO
RINGER IS NOT
TO BE CUT orr
H~ ~
~I.II:I
" " I : I I: I
1.----.
L(ArI)
,UO SIG
L(AT2)
9('2)
2ND PRINCIPAL
TO LINE [ ..!R~(!;'2:.J)'--+--<
RINGERS .,,9,,(.o.'T,-,2")_4--<
TURN KEY
IF
(NOTE 3)
I
I
TF(I)+
28
I~
26
If-*
TF( I)
10SVi
RE~ ~R~('~T.!:2~)_+-<
I
)
)
RC( I)
- ....I
~9
(~4)
6
---h
'4____~RC~I~.~I)_+4_~------~~R~C~'~IUf-_4-~
~LG
s. TURN
"
CO.(I)
F-24
PU
H~ ~
"
~"l";
~1O!5V!
SW
\,gR'].G~lLG
C,~(I )
RI(I)
RC(I)
RC(I)
~IOY!
1ST PRINCIPAL
TEL SET
ATTEJIIDANT
TF( I)
19
17
'I RG
~"("
•
L(I)
B
(NOTE I)
;:
LINE
R
~'6
IQVi
(If RE\QO)
§ ,: E=~p ~~X
c 4
-24
21
'P7O
P/O 400-TYPE KTU
448A KTU
CONN
L..-
22
2ND CIRCUIT
27
I
I
32
23
(N~5)
•
C(2)
"
b-
NOTES:
1. PLACE STRAP BETWEEN TERMINALS
OF KTU OPTION BlOCK:
;...
400H - A1 TO A'
400G - C1 TO C3
400D-4T06
400A, S, OR C - 3 TO 6
2. R4 IS fACTORY SET TO TIME-OUT
~
L..-
IN 6-1 /2 SECONDS, HOWEVER I T MAY BE
[32
~
ADJUSTED fROM I TO 30 SECONDS.
3. IF' IMMEDIATE RINGER TRANSfER IS
REQUIRED, A 4494 KTU OR A TURN KEY
HAYBE USED. EACH METHOD IS SHOWN.
SEE FIG. 10 rOR SCHEMATIC or 449A KTU.
4. PART or KTU OPTION BLOCK. USED
FOR LINE
rOR 1ST CIRCUIT ONLY.
5. PART or KTU OPT I ON BLOCK. USED
rOR 2ND CIRCUIT ONLY.
RINGING
(IF REQO)
* rACTORY
PROVIDED
Fig. 10-~ndensed Functional Schematic of 448A KTU (Variable Delay Timer Circuit).
Page 11
I...
rg
P/0 4OO-TYPE Kn
~
1>-
'2
~
T
R
'3
[P7O
-=-RGt
T*
"*
Ret
A
-24~
J
19
l
B
I
LU)
)
25
8
(NOTE 3)
3'
~I
SW
2'
~~
..........
-
.------.
26
R
TO
POWER [
•
SUPPLY
*R OR tRCtP!)
OR tRG{PIl
L(P' )
PU
CO OR PBX
LINE CKT
-
.-
I
-
L(m)
~LG
,.>t>-
tRC(2?
l(2)
*8 OR tRG(AT2)
TEL SET
'--
L;J
5'.
*R(2)
L(AT2)
~
IOVi
~"
8
:JOP(I)
'----<
'----<
i:'2(1)
i-
38
34
I
_ R1(')
RVI (I)
C05('l,~
-8
TRill
-
8
OP(I)
06(' )
-
B
1:=
I. 1:=
13
L(P2)
5(P2)
23
32
(NOTE 2)
"1-----7
I~
2ND
CIRCUIT
OP(!)
'2
itR OR tRC(P2)
TO 2ND 448A KTU (I F' PRay IDEO
I~
I~
-24
CR6(' )
-24
* R OR tRC{AT2)
8
.,
-24
f---e
'6
H OR tRGIATII
PRINCIPAL
A
.------.
r"
TR(I)
_ RGt
*R OR tRCIAl!)
TO 2ND
~
.,
COMTROLL£D BY THE ."SA KTU.
I~
TRill
C(' )
r--'·'
T
R
AI
3. THE ATTENDANT LAMP WI LL BE
11 ~-24
33
HOOK KEY
NET
IOVi
I~
)
"1
sIp, )
ATTENDANT STAT I ON
SW
2. CONNECT B laRD ONLY I r ."8A
KTU IS PROVIDED. If ""8A
KTU IS PROVIDED. MOtI[ OF' THE
RINGER CONNECTIONS SHOWN
ARE REQUIRED.
CPO)
(NOTE 2)
8
TO 2ND
,.---,
15
BBAT
(If PROVIDED)
NLKEY
.,
B GRD
TO 1ST 448A KTU
1.9' """"1"L.
SG
400A, 8, OR C - 5 TO 6.
CP(I)
~
39
_
~
I~)
IOVi
T
'--
I::~ I
I~ OP(I)
20
PU
I
~
rOR LINE RINGING
PLACE STRAP BETWEEN TERMINALS OF
KTU OPTION BLOCK; 400H -A2 TO A3,
400G-C2TOC3,
4ODD-SToa,
30
~UI
"
*
NOTES:
24
1ST PRINCIPAL TEL SET
NET
I~
t FOR COMMON AUDIBLE RINGING
•
'6
C
II
,.---,
449A KYU
CONN
TO CO OR
PBX LINE
I. WHEN USING COMMON AUDIBLE RINGING,
L...---...--
IOYi
9
,
BC
I~"
,. 'Pia
I~ 2-J
31
21
C(2)
-
35
1:=
It
I~
Fig. ll-tcondensed Functional Schematic of 449A KTU (Immediate Transfer Control Circuit).
ISS 2, SECTION 518-215-403
467A KTU
GRD
-<'5
"r:
B GRD
B BAT
~
I TRANSISTOR I
I
POWER
SUPPLY
QI
I TRANSISTOR
I
I
Q2
I
1
RST
SWITCH
I[
L(17
-24
Fig. 12-Condensed Functional Schematic of 467A KTU (Low-Voltage Monitor Circuit)
'iO
TO 400-TYPE
LINE CIRCUIT
469A KTU
CONN
TELESET
~LG
UP TO 20 LAMPS
POWER UNIT
'--
--< 4 ~
4
Fig. 13-Condensed Functional Schematic of 469A
KTU (Lamp Extender Circuit)
Page 13
13 Pages
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT&TCo Standard
SECTION 518-215-404
Issue 1, April 1974
SERVICE
1A2 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
501- AND 502-TYPE KEY SERVICE UNITS
1.
GENERAL
DESIGN FEATURES
1.01
This section provides identification, installation,
connections and maintenance information for
501- and 502-type key service units (KSU). See
Fig. 1.
(a) The prewired package capacity, at the
connecting blocks, is one to six central office
(CO) or PBX lines, plus 9-station dial intercom
(optional).
1.02
Information in this section was formerly
contained in Sections 518-250-101 and
518-250-401, which are hereby canceled.
(b) When manual intercom service is to be
furnished, the total line capacity is reduced
by one for each 401A KTU installed.
This issue of the section is based on
SD-69476-01, Issue 5D. If the section is to
be used with equipment or apparatus reflecting
later issues of the drawing, reference should be
made to the SD to determine the extent of the
change and the manner in which the section may
be affected.
(c) Spare mounting space on the lower half of
the 3lB apparatus mounting can be used
for installing additional miscellaneous angle-bracket
or panel-type KTUs.
1.03
2.
(d) Preprinted aluminum foil pressure-sensitive
tapes are provided on each 66-type connecting
block to designate service feature leads and
wiring connections.
IDENTIFICATION
Provides mounting facilities for 400 series KTUs
with a capacity of six CO or PBX lines and optional
manual or dial intercom.
(e) The two 502 series KSUs include a 6-foot
length of A75A connector cable, partially
factory terminated on the 66-type connecting
blocks. Telephone sets may be plugged into
these packages directly or extended by use of
connector cables and/or adapters.
ORDERING GUIDE
(f)
PURPOSE
t
A 24-volt dc operated KS-19385, List I (MD)
or List 2 interrupter can be substituted for
the one furnished with the KSU at locations
where only 24-volt dc power is used.
• Unit, Service, Key-See Table A
i
The 400 series KTUs are not furnished
as part of the KSUs and must he
ordered separately as required
3.
INSTALLATION
PLANNING
(a) Associated Apparatus (order separately)
3.01
Select a wall location in accordance with
the following:
• Unit, Telephone, Key, 400A (MD), 400B
(MD), 400C (MD), 400D
• Customer's approval and best interest
• Unit, Telephone, Key, 40lA (for manual
intercom)
• Accessible with adequate illumination for
maintenance
© American Telephone and Telegraph Company, 1974
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
SECTION 518-215-404
KS-19 175, LI
INTERRUPTER
31B
APPARATUS
MOUNTING
177A
BACKBOARD
66B I- 25
r
CONNECC~T~IN~G~
__-"F=1iir--~~Jl
~ ~~~~
BLOCK ~
66B3-50
CONNECTI NG
BLOCK
Fig. 1-501-Type KSU Front View with Cover Removed
• Wall offering adequate support and stability
• As close as practicable to st ations being
served
Refer to the following sections for additional
information required to plan the installation
of the KSU.
3.02
• 463-140-100, Equipment Cabinets and Apparatus
Mountings, Identification
• Close to conduit or duct system for cabling
purposes
• 518-010-105, KTS, Grounding and Special
Protection Requirements
• Near commercial ac power receptacle(s)
• Clean, dry, well ventilated, and free from
flammable or corrosive fumes
• Where the surrounding room temperature
normally does not exceed llO'F. Avoid
locations near radiators, steam pipes, registers,
and similar heating devices which would
subject the equipment to excessive heat.
Poge 2
INSTALLING
3.03
Use care when unpacking KSU to prevent
damage.
3.04
Install KSU as follows:
(1) Remove cover from KSU.
ISS 1, SECTION 518-215-404
TABLE A
501- AND 502-TYPE KSUS
UNIT.
SERVICE.
KEY
9-STA
DIAL
INTERCOM
207C KTU"
POWER
PLANT
.18673103
LIST 1"
11SA
COVER
ED-69462-60
FLOOR
STAND
(WITH
COVER)
•
•
•
501A2t
501A2Dt
•
501A3t
501A3Dt
•
501A4
501A4D
•
502A3D
•
•
502A4D
*
t
A75A
CONN
CABLE
•
501Alt
501AIDt
1-66B1-26
1-6683-60
CONN
BLOCKS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
31B
APP
MTG
177A
BACKBOARD
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
KS-19175. L 1
INTERRUPTER"
NOTE 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Replaceable components.
MD
Note 1: KS-19385, List 1 (MD) or List 2 are optional for 24-volt dc operation.
(2) Locate the fastener holes at the selected
location.
(7) Terminate incoming CO/PBX lines. See
Table B.
(3) Install appropriate fasteners.
(8) Terminate station cables. See Table C.
(4) Hang KSU on fasteners.
(9) Place option straps (if required).
(5) Connect the circuit ground to an approved
ground. For circuit ground, a No. 14 gauge
wire should be attached from the LOC GRD
terminal of the power unit to an approved local
ground. If a 3-wire grounded receptacle is not
available, a frame ground (No. 14 gauge wire)
must be connected from the case or frame of
the power unit to an approved local ground.
Do not strap the circuit ground to the frame
or case of the power unit. The susceptibility
ofsurge damage tosemiconductorcomponents
usedin 4IJO..series KTUs require that grounding
procedures be followed. Properly grounded
installations will minimize service failures
that can result from surge voltages or
diJ1'erences between dissimilar grounds.
(10) Close and latch carrier assembly.
(6) Unlatch and open carrier.
(11) Install KTUs necessary to provide required
services.
3.05
Connect to an external power source if
power plant is not supplied as part of the
package. See Table B.
Note: The 101G-type power unit can furnish
dc power to only one 501- or 502-type KSU.
t
4O().type KTUsrequire 20 volts minimum
dc power for reliable relay operation.
Upowersourceis unmodified 101G-type
power unit, donotfeed other equipment
from it, if this minimum voltage
limit cannot be met. No more than
20 line lamps should be supplied
Page 3
SECTION 518-215-404
TABLE B
WIRING FEATURES AND LEAD DESIGNATIONS AT CONNECTING BLOCKS C AND D
6683-60 CONNECTING BLOCK
BLOCK
FEATURE
LEAD
DESIG
:2
'iI
~
:!l
]
...:
BLOCK"D"
TERM.
ROW
A
B
C
1
2
E
F
LEAD
ROW
DESIG
FEATURE
1
2
A-GRD.
A·BAT.
Linel
3
4
A·GRD.
A·BAT.
Line 2
A·GRD.
A·BAT.
Line 3
j!
3
4
R
B4
5
6
56
:5
7
8
7
8
A·GRD.
A·BAT.
Line 4
'iI-S
:6
9
10
9
10
A·GRD.
A·BAT.
Line 5
~~
:7
11
12
11
12
A-GRD.
A·BAT.
Line6
:8
13
14
13
14
±18 VOLTS
±GRD
Ext. Power
Supply Conn.
:9
15
16
15
16
CO
:0
17
18
17
18
BZ
BZ1
Line 1
B1, BZ1
R1, BZ
19
20
19
20
RN
ST
Line 2
B1, BZ1
R1,BZ
21
22
21
22
LF1
LW1
Line 3
B1, BZ1
R1, BZ
23
24
23
24
LF2
LW2
Control
Leads
To
Other
Connecting
Equipment
Line 4
B1, BZ1
R1, BZ
·25
26
25
26
T
R
Line 1
Line 5
B1, BZ1
R1, BZ
27
28
27
28
T
R
Line 2
Line 6
B1, BZ1
R1, BZ
29
30
29
30
T
R
Line 3
CA
CA
31
32
31
32
T
R
Line 4
CA
CA
33
34
33
34
T
R
Line 5
CA
CA
35
36
35
36
T
R
Line 6
37
38
37
38
G(LGl)
B(LB1)
39
40
39
40
G(LG2)
B(LB2)
41
42
41
42
GB(GRD·B)
BB(BAT·B)
43
44
43
44
GA(GRD-A)
BA(BAT-A)
45
46
45
46
GB(GRD-B)
47
48
47
48
49
50
49
50
* Common
Audible
Cnntrol
V,S
Spare
*To common audible auxiliary equipment, Fig. 3 as required.
Page 4
0
TERM.
:3
Dial
Selective
Intercom
Line
Signaling
Leads
.i
'"
"c"
GarRO
BAT ± or
105V ±
GarRO
BAT±or
105V ±
a
,sj!>
""til
Common
External
Power
Supply
Connections
ill
~
~
f.
0
0
0
ISS 1, SECTION 518-215-404
througb one 400-type KTU; no more
than 50llHlJps toW should be supplied
f'rom one interrupter contact.
TABLE C
WIRING FEATURES AND LEAD DESIGNATIDNS
AT CONNECTING BLOCK A
86B1-26 CONNECTING BLOCK "A"
4.
ARRANGEMENT OF FEATURES
CONNECTIONS
AND DESIGNATIONS SHOP-WI RED
,/
FEATURE
LEAD
TERM.
DESIO
ROW
T
R
Line 1
~
2
A1
R
A
A1
LG
connect the power supply to connecting
block D according to Table B.
~
10
Interrupter Options
~
12
4.03
15
'Is
18
A
~
L
R
.....
----;2.
23
-
25
26
A
~
A1
28
LG
29
L
30
T
~
R
32
A
~
A1
34
LG
L
T
R
T
R
LG
35
4.04
~
~g;
See Fig. 3 for common audible signaling
connections.
<
Manual Intercom Circuit (401A KTU)
i
4.05
.s
~
g-
'"'"
Connections for the manual intercom circuit
(40lA KTU) are shown in Fig. 4.
Dial Intercom Circuit (207C KTU)
4.06
Addition of a 207C KTU can be accomplished
by using previously placed factory wiring
and connecting as shown in Fig. 5.
50l·Type KSU
36
- 3738
- 3940
~
L
42
LG
43
L
Spare
Clips
19
20-
T
Common Audible Signaling
17
,...--
R
LG
A 24-volt dc interrupter may be used in
place of the factory-provided lOV ac interrupter.
See Table D for connections.
~
14
L
A1
If an external power supply is required,
rg
T
t
See Fig. 2 for layout of connecting block
terminals.
4.02
L
Dial
Selective
Intercom
Line
4.01
7
T
Line 6
F
r--!6
LG
Line 5
E
T
A
Line 4
D
L
R
Connect
key
cables
as required
C
External Power Supply
LG
Line 3
B
~
4
A
A1
Line 2
A
44
~
~
47
~
4.07
Terminate incoming CO/PBX lines on
connecting block D as shown in Table B.
Terminate key cables on connecting blocks A and
C as shown in Tables Band C. Key cables should
be terminated in sequence as shown in Fig. 6.
60!J.Type KSU
4.08
Terminate incoming CO/PBX lines on
connecting block D as shown in Table B.
4.09
A factory supplied length of A75A connector
cable is connected to block A. (See Fig. 6
I--
~
50
'" Terminate key cables from left to right on available clips as required.
t Dial intercom line furnished in "D" suffixed KSU only.
Page 5
SECTION 518-215-404
66BI-25
CONNECTING BLOCK
DESIG
STRIP
A
AI
LG
L
T
R
A
DESIG
STRIP
BLOCK A
ABC
T
R
A
AI
LG
L
T
R
66B3-50
CONNECTING BLOCK
(I)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
( 6)
(7 )
(S)
(9)
(10)
(II)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
0
F
0--0--0---0---0
~
~
~
NOTE:
NUMBERS I N PARENTHESIS
ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY
AND DO NOT APPEAR ON
CONNECT! NO BLOCKS.
<>--<>---<>---0---0---0---0--
<>---<>---0---~
~
~
<>---<>---0---<>---<>---0----
A
B
(I)
R
B
(2)
(3)
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
(4 )
(5)
(6 )
(7)
(S)
0---0---0--0---
B
R
B
R
B
R
B
R
BI
RI
BI
RI
BI
RI
BI
RI
BI
RI
BI
RI
CA
CA
CA
CA
CA
L(36)~
CA
AI
LG
L
T
(16)
(17)
(IS)
(UI)
~
~
~
~
~
~
<>---<>--<>--<>
R(20)~
A(21)~
AI(22)~
LG
(23) < > - - 0 - - - < > - - - - -
L(24)~
T(25)~
R
(26)
<>---<>---<>--<
A(27)~
AI(2S)~
LG
(29)
<>---<>--<>--<>
(30)~
T(31)~
R
A
AI
LG
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
0--0---<>----0<>--0---<>-----
0--0---<>----0-
T(37)~
R(3S)~
A(39)~
AI(40)~
LG(41)~
(42)~
LG
(43)
(44)
(45)
(46)
0---0---<>---0-
0--0---<>----00--0---<>----00--0---<>----0-
(47)~
(4B) 0 - - 0 - - - < > - - - - 0 (49)~
(50) 0 - - - - 0 - - 0 - - - 0 - -
BLOCK C
C
I
0--0--0
0--0--0
0--0--0
0
E
F
0--0--0
0--0---0
0--0--0
0--0--0
0--0--0
0--0--0
0--0--0
0--0--0
0--0--0
0--0--0
0--0--0
0--0--0
0--0--0
0--0--0
0--0--0
(9)
(10)
(II)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
0--0--0
0--0--0
0--0--0
(17)
0--0----0
0--0--0
0--0--0
(IS)
(19)
0--0--0
0--0--0
0--0--0
0--0--0
0--0----0
0--0--0
0--0---0
0--0---0
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(2S)
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(3S)
(39)
0--0--0
0---0---0
0---0---0
0--0--0
0--0--0
0--0--0
0--0--0
0--0---0
0--0--0
0--0---0
0--0---0
0--0--0
0--0---0
0---0--0
0--0--0
0--0---0
0--0--0
0--0---0
0--0---0
<>---<>--<>
0--0----0
<>---<>--<>
BA
RG
0--0---0
0--0---0
0--0--0
0--0---0
0---0--0
0---0--0
0--0---0
0---0--0
0--0--0
0--0--0
0--0---0
0--0--0
0--0--0
0--0---0
0--0--0
0---0--0
0--0----0
0---0---0
0--0----0
<>---<>--<>
<>---<>--<>
(46) 0--0---0
(47) 0 - - 0 - - 0
C~
0---0--0
0--0---0
0--0----0
i
0--0--0
0--0--0
RB
RG
0--0---0
RB
and D,
• Visual signals for six lines and one intercom
circuit
• 6-line pickup and hold features
• Common audible signal circuits
• Dial intercommunicating line
• Audible signaling for intercom lines .
Page 6
ST
LF
LW
LF
LW
0--0--0
0--0--0
0--0--0
0--0--0
0--0---0
0--0---0
CO
BZ
BZI
RN
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
G
B
G
B
GB
BB
GA
0--0----0
(4S) 0 - - 0 - - 0
(49) 0--0----0
(50) 0--0---0
±18Y
±GRD
~
(40) 0 - - 0 - - 0
(41) 0 - - 0 - - 0
(42) 0--0---0
(43) 0 - - 0 - - 0
(44) 0 - - 0 - - 0
(45) <>---<>--<>
Fig. 2-Termlnal Layout of Connecting Blocks A,
and Table E.) Each 50-contact KS-16690, List 1
connector will provide for:
B
DESIG
STRIP
BLOCK 0
ISS I, SECTION 518-215-404
TABLE D
CONNECTIONS FOR 24V DC INTERRUPTER
MOVE
FACTORY
STRAP'
KS-19385,L1
(MD)
Interrupter
KS-19385,L2
Interrupter
ADD
STRAP'
FROM
TO
FROM
TO
42D
46D
42D
46E
37E
46F
45D
t
42D
46D
42D
46E
37E
45D
46F
t
REMOVE
Strap
Between
Terminals
10 and 13 on
Interrupter
Connector
*Terminals on connecting block D.
tConnect to terminal 10 on interrupter connector.
When more than four line circuits are to
be served through the A75A connector cable,
rearrange the wiring as required on the connecting
blocks. (Refer to Table C and E.)
4.10
Some pairs in each binder group of the A75A
connector cable are not factory terminated.
These pairs may be used for dial intercommunicating
codes, audible signal leads, and common audible
control leads by connecting them to the proper
terminals on connecting block C.
5.03
When trouble is encountered, proceed as
follows:
(a) Determine if trouble is at individual station
or common to the system.
4.11
(b) If common to the system:
(1)
Check power supply arid fuses.
(2) From nature of trouble report, determine
which KTU is causing trouble.
Connect additional key cables as needed to
available terminals not occupied by connector
cable leads (Fig. 6).
4.12
5.
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance of the KSU is limited to normal
station repairs and wiring checks of the
mounting facility and terminal field. No field
maintenance is to be performed on the plug-in
KTUs.
5.01
5.02
Replace KTU with one known to be
working properly to determine whether
trouble is in KTU or external to it (be sure
to strap in the correct options on replacement
KTU, as applicable).
(3)
Care must be used when removing and
inserting plug-in KTUs into the connectors
to avoid damage to the printed wiring and other
components.
(c) If replacement of the KTU does not clear
trouble, the trouble is external to the KTU
and the complete wiring serving the KTU should
be checked. Place original KTU back in service.
When a KTU or a connector is taken out
of service or replaced by another, all
nondedicated wiring for the connector or KTU
should be removed to avoid damage to a different
type KTU should it be inadvertently plugged into
the connector.
5.04
Page 7
SECTION 518-215-404
PIO 66B3-50
CONNECTING BLOCK
(C)
(D)
OPTIONS'
@
>
§i y
BI OR BII
RI
OR BI
BI
OR BII
@
@)
OPTION, COMMON AUDIBLE AUXILIARY CONTROL
CIRCUIT, 227A (MD) OR 227B KTU, IF USED MUST
BE ADDEO LOCALLY.
STEADY RING.
INTERRUPTED RING (FURNISHED).
19
20
""
""
'\:
..
-.I ""'\:
I
"""'I
RI OR BI
BI OR BII
TO
STATION
AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
AS
REQUIRED
R) OR BI
BI OR BII
22
l~
BI OR BII
RI OR BI
81 OR 811
'*
I;'
@
RI
®
I
0;
LINE I
RI
29
'"
'"
"-
30
31r
@
@
,-
RI
@
I
@
RI
®
REMOVE STRAPS WHEN
@ OPT ION IS INSTALLED
I
@
LINE 2
@
RC
UNITS )
LINE 3
@
LINE4
@
@
LINE 6
>---
351
1
RC
1
CA
@
'------....J
LOOPED
THROUGH
~
I
361
>---
49
fig. 3-Common Audible Connediona for Auxiliary Relay Control Circuit
Page 8
TO
COMMON
AUDIBLE
AUXILIARY
RELAY
CA
,
LINE 5
~
34f
T
RC
~
1
33f
1
RC
~
321
T
FROM
400
TYPE
KTU'S
(LINE
FROM
COMMON
AUDI8LE
AUXILIARY
RELAY
CONTROL
CIRCUIT
28
i
I*
@
27~
T
RC
RI
24
I-
RC
@
@
26
¥~:;::
RI OR BI
I
23
25
RI OR BI
~
@
21
CONTROL
CIRCUIT
ISS 1, SECTION 518-215-404
Pia 66B3-50
CONNECT I NG BLOCK
Pia 66BI-25
CONNECTI NG BLOCK
(C)
(A)
[~
R
B
A
C
AI
0
LG
E
L
F
JI
J2
J5
J4
J3
REF
J6
CONNECT! NG BLOCK
OESIG
A
A
0
A
T
TO ALL
STATIONS
ON
MANUAL
INTERCOM
LINE
o E
000
o
(0)
I
C
0
A
C
0
A
C 0
A
C
0
A
C
0
A
7
13
19
25
31
32
B
2
8
14
20
26
C
3
9
15
21
27
33
0
4
10
16
22
28
34
E
5
II
17
23
29
35
F
6
12
18
24
30
36
C
0
Fig. 4-Connectionl for Manual Intercom Circuit, 401A KTU
Page 9
SECTION 518-215-404
207C KTU
(NOTE II
TSA
BL W
BINDER
BINDER
TSB
PIO 66BI-25
CONNECTI NG BLOCK
-
ow
-
BLOCK A
I
T
(Y-BR)
37 A
:2
R
(BR-Y)
38
B
C
0
E
F
J I
~I
39
40
41
,.,.3
(BL-V)
L
.I I
42
~
12
(BL-W)
R2
2
B
.)
13
R3
(O-W)
4
:'1
5
.)
",14
R4
(G-W)
6
.1
7
.)
~
",IS
R5
(BR-W)
8
1
9
.)
,..,16
R6
(S-W)
10
:t
~
17
R7
",18
~9
~
(BL-R)
(O-R)
RB
,.,.23
CO
(G-R)
~18
R9
(G-R)
17
20
II
)
12
:'1
13
.)
14
1
15
.)
16
17
C
:J
18
29
(W)
10V:!:
[Y-S]
E
F
0--0--0
0--0--0
0--0--0
0--0--0
0--0--0
0--0--0
0--0--0
0--0--0
NOTES:
I. SHOP-WIRED AS SHOWN WHEN 207C KTU IS
SUPPLIED AS PART OF ~ACKAGE. WHEN NOT
FACTORY -SUPPLIED THE SE LEADS WILL BE
FOUND INSULATED AND STORED. A 207C KTU
MAY BE ADDED TO AKSU T HAT I S NOT FACTORY
EQUIPPED BY USE OF EXI STING COLOR CODED
WIRING AS SHOWN.
( ) INDICATES CURRENT CO LOR CODE.
[ jlNDICATES MD COLOR CO DE .
0--0--0
0--0--0
0--0--0
0--0--0
t
18V]
AS NEEDED
±GRO
0--0--0
.......
(BR-R)
RO
!0
:'I.
3
44
BLOCK 0
BLOCK C
I A
::J
43
PIO 66B3-S0
CONNECTING BLOCK
CO
I
I
I
0--0--0
0--0--0
390--0--01
~
,.,.19
400--0--01
410--0--0
BAT.B
(G-V)
10
GRD A
(V-O)
420--0--01
9
BA1:A
(O-V)
43 0--0--0
GRD B
(V-G)
44 0--0--0
~
,..,.2C
~:
39
II
II
450--0--01
460--0--0
BAT.!
OR
±
I05V
(BR-Y)
I
0--0--0
470--0--0 1
480--0--0
j
G-WBINDER
SHOP WIRING
Fig. 5-Connectlons for Dial Intercom Circuit, 207C KTU
Poge 10
AS NEEDED
ISS 1, SECTION 518-215-404
501-TYPE KSU
~
[
C D
B
E
T
1ST
~I
L
2ND
TO
APPARATUS
3RD
CABLE
KEY[
4TH
5TH
502 - TYPE KSU
I
ONN
I (BL-W BINDERI
BCD
A
T
A75A [ 2 (O-W BINDERI
CONNECTOR
CABLE II
3 (G-W BINDERI
KEY
CABLE
[
'l
TO
APPARATUS
1ST
2ND
* AS FACTORY WIRED
Fig. 6-Key Cable Termination on Connecting Block
A
Page 11
SECTION 518-215-404
TABLE E
FACTORY CONNECTIONS OF A75A CONNECTOR CABLE
ON 66B1·25 CONNECTING BLOCK A IN THE 502A3D AND 502MD KSUS
A75A
CONNECTOR CABLE
FEATURE
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
LEAD
DESIG
PIN
ND.
CABLE
COLOR
T
R
26
1
W·BL
BL·W
1
2
A
A1
27
2
W·O
O·W
3
4
LG
L
28
3
W-G
G·W
5
6
T
R
29
4
W·BR
BR·W
7
8
A
A1
30
5
W·S
S·W
9
10
LG
L
31
6
R·BL
BL-R
11
12
1>:li!ir.1
OI'QI>:l
1>:l1'Q[':l
T
R
32
7
R·O
O·R
13
14
r.1~o:.
Z
0
Z'O
A
A1
33
8
R·G
G·R
15
16
LG
L
34
9
R·BR
BR·R
17
18
T
R
35
10
R·S
S·R
19
20
A
A1
36
11
BK·BL
BL-BK
21
22
LG
L
37
12
BK·O
O·BK
23
24
38
13
BK·G
G·BK
25
26
39
14
BK·BR
BR·BK
27
28
40
15
BK·S
S·BK
29
30
41
16
Y·BL
BL-Y
31
32
42
17
Y·O
o·y
33
34
43
18
Y-G
G-Y
35
36
44
19
37
38
45
20
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
Soy
39
40
46
21
V-BL
BL-V
41
42
47
22
V-O
O-V
43
44
48
23
V-G
G-V
45
46
49
24
V-BR
BR-V
47
48
50
25
V-S
S-V
49
50
These cable pairs
in each binder
oftheA75A
cable are not
terminated by
the factory.
Connect pairs
as needed
per Table D_
Page 12
12 Page.
66Bl·25 CONNECTING BLOCK
BLOCK"A"
TERM.
ROW
A
I>:l
r.1
•.d~Q
ti~1i
B
I>:l
I>:l
~~Q
"'Z
I>:lii!c::l
0r.1[':l
f!l
~~Ii
~~o:.
~'5i
o~
o~5i
Oz
I'Q
I>:l
0
..:I
C
..:
f!l
ti!::1i
~~o:.
Z'O
OZ:=
o~'"
I>:l
"
D
E
F
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT&TCo Standard
ADDENDUM 518-215-405
Issue 1, May 1978
SERVICE
1A2 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
KEY SERVICE UNITS
513-, 514-, AND 515-TYPE
1.
SD-69922-01, Issue 1 (498A KTU and U6A1
Circuit Module).
GENERAL
This addendum supplements Section
518-215-405, Issue 6. Place these pink
sheets ahead of Page 1 of this section.
1.001
1.002
This addendum is issued to add information
on the following KTUs:
• 400H KTU (CO/PBX Line Circuit)
• 498A KTU and U6A1 Circuit Module
(Music-On-Hold).
2.
On Page 14, Table D (Contd) is revised to
show the addition of the 498A KTU. The
revised table is shown in this addendum.
2.002
On Page 20, add the following sentence as
a part of paragraph 3.06: A 69E or F
equipped with both a 498A KTU and a U6A1 circuit
module (CM) cannot be used with a second 498A
KTU equipped with a U6A1 CM or another KTU
which requires the use of the RN lead.
2.003
2.004
On Page 28, add Fig. 9.1.
2.005
On Page 59, add Fig. 38.1.
2.006
On Page 64, add Fig. 43.1.
2.007
On Page 91, add Fig. 73.1.
CHANGES TO SECTION
2.001
On Page 6, paragraph 1.03, add the following
to the list of drawings:
SD-69942-01, Issue 1 (400H KTU)
NOTICE
Not for use or disclosure outside the
Bell System except under written agreement
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
TABLE D (Contd)
CONNECTOR SELECTION AND ARRANGEMENT OF
400 SERIES KTUs IN 513-, 514-, AND 515-TYPE KSUs
515 KSU
(SEE NOTE)
SIZE
SERVICE
FUNCTION
KTU
(IN.)
PINS
513 KSU~
514 KSU
CONNECTORS
CONNECTORS
J
1
J
3
J
4
J
7
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
5
J
6
J
2
8
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
40
40
20
20
20
20
40
40
40
40
40
40
20
20
20
20
J
J
467A
4
18
Low-Voltage
Monitor Ckt
15
16
1
2
3
4
9
10
11
12
13
14
5
6
7
8
469A
4
18
Lamp Extender Ckt
15
16
1
2
3
4
9
10
11
12
13
14
5
6
7
8
471A
4
18
Battery Reversal
Toll Restriction
15
16
1
2
3
4
9
10
11
12
13
14
5
6
7
8
498A
(Notes 1&2)
4
40
Music-On-Hold
5
*
*
*
*
*
1
2
3
*
4
*
*
*
*
*
Note: Location of connectors on 513 and 514 KSUs (see below).
*
Not usable.
t Restricted to transfer of one station ringer.
SIS KSU
r -________~S~13~KS~U~________~\,r--~S~14~KS~U~~
:j: One circuit only.
§ See Table H.
JII
J I
JI3
o0
0
o0
0
o0 o00000 o000
J2
J9
JIO
0
J4
J5
If only 513 KSU is used, connector selection begins with lowest number available.
Notes:
Ji2 JI4
SUP
J3
~
J6
J7
J8
JIS JI6
NOTE.
LOCATION OF CONNECTORS ON 513 AND 514 KSU
JI7
JI8
1. This KTU is equipped to serve 4 lines. With addition of a U6A1 CM, an additional 3 lines can be served when wired in a 69E or 69F apparatus mounting.
This KTU sbould be used for 4 circuits only when mounted in jacks 1, 7, 8, U,
or 13. The U6A1 CM should not be added because of wiring incompatibility.
2. The 400H KTU is not compatible with tbe 451B KTU for music-on-hold;
therefore, it must be used with the 498A KTU for music-on-hold.
NOTES:
1. DIODE MATRIX MUST BE
FURNISHED LDCALLY.
2. RING TIMEOUT IS NDT
ADJUSTABLE DCCURS IN
5 TO B-l/2 SECONDS.
ROW AND TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT FOR JACKS
r---------------------------~==~~~~--------------------------_;SHOWN
CDNNECTION BLOCK
FOR
r--------------l---------------r--2--.---------------4--------------------iREFERENCE
~--_r_--,_--~--_r--_r--~--_4--~--~~--r_--~--_r_--,_--,_--_r--~ONLY
Jl
~
o DR T(CO) lG
PBX
LINE R(CO) 2G
5G
rl~AU~O~IB~LiE~~~l::;-!!!RG~
SIGNAL
I
!!£.
6G
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
JB
Jll
J12
J13
J14
J15
J16
J17
JIB
7G
13G
19G
25G
31G
37G
lG
lG
7G
13G
19G
25G
31G
37G
43G
r<14
BG
14G
20G
26G
329
3BG
2G
2G
BG
14G
20G
26G
32G
3BG
44G
r
418A
-:
CD
CD
4
15
16
8
7
430A
4
20
Flutter Generator Ckt
15
16
8
7
451B
4
40
Music-on·Hold Ckt
5
*
*
461A
4
18
Manual Signaling,
Ringdown Private Line Ckt
15
16
8
6
5
10
9
14
13
12
11
4
3
2
1
6
5
10
9
14
13
12
11
4
3
2
1
*
*
*
1
2
3
4
*
*
*
*
*
*
7
6
5
10
9
14
13
12
11
4
3
2
1
!"
II>
Q
(5
z
0--0
12
13
14,
0----0--0----<>
0--0
0--0
15
~
I
I
1Lrnrnrnmmmmoo
i~___________________________
0----0
0----0
0----0
0--0
0--0
0---0
I
I
COL
J-,:i" ,. -.-
S J 4-04, OR 2-2-2-2
0----0
I
I
I
23
0--0---0----0--
2'
0--0
0----0
0--0
0---0
21l
0----0
0----0
0--0
0--0
29
30
31
32
0--0---0----0--
I
I
YETHOD OF BRINGING IN CONDUCTORS
FOR TERWINATION TO COLUWNS ON
66R I, 66R2 OR 66R3 CONNECT! NG BLOCK
I
I
66RI CONNECTI NG BLOCK
ROW
I
•
B
COLUWN
C
D
E
F
0---0--0---0--0
G
H
0--0
~
~
0----0
0--0
0---0
0--0'
0--0
0--0
0--0
0--0
I
I
I
I
42
43
I
I
0---0---0--0
0----0----0--0
-
m===J
LAYOUT OF 66R2 CONNECTING BLOCK
I
I
I
I
48
49
50
ROW
I
66R3 CONNECTI NG BLOCK
COLUMN
A
B
C
0
0--0
0--0
0--0
0----0
0--0
0--0
LAYOUT OF 66RI CONNECTING BLOCK
F
G
H
0---0----0--0
0----0--0---0
0----0---0--0
0--0
0--0
I
0---0--0---0--0
0--0
0--0
0----0
E
0---0---0--0
-
I
I
20
21
0---0
0--0
~
~
LAYOUT OF 66R3 CONNECTING BLOCK
Fig. 3-Layout of 66Rl, 66R2, and 66R3 Connecting Blocks
Page 16
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-405
CONN
BLOCK
NO.2
SEE NOTE)
CONN
BLOCK
NO.3
FACTORY
FURNISHED WIRING
,---- r-iJon~,., ____ . .,
Lm UI _
1!D IIEl
_
I r
II
I
I
I
19 39
I
I r----
~020
2
I
I II
I
t-
19
E..!.ALINTERCOMj,!:~
I
_
I I
II
II
- : .... -
I
I
I
"
I
JIO
~
-+- :
POWER
:
SUPPLY
:
-
I
I
: 1---1
I
I
J4
I
I
39
J3
I
I
I I
J2
~:
r--
JI20
Ja}- ---,
:
I
DEDICATED LEADS
I
I 1--T--r~T--I--1
II
I
I
I
I
t- --l
I I
lct,~ J}fllfllfllfl Lm lftr
I
J
,-LJ r{J r{J rW rW, lJJ
I
I
I
I
l
I
I
I
L ___ ~
II
l _______ ~
I
L __________ ~NON-DEDICATED
L ______________ ~LEA£:. _ _ J
========== ===== ===
________
L L___________________________
~
~rr:
J2
~
:~~~~~P~O~~~~~C~~N;EAR
APPARATUS CABINET.
or
Fig. 4-513-Type Key Service Unit, General Wiring Plan
assembly) or one 8-inch 400-series KTU. The
69F apparatus mounting must be ordered
separately and installed in the field.
C.
514-Type Key Service Unit
(0) For use with the 513-type KSU to provide
(n) Unit is 17-3/8 inches wide by 17 inches high
by 11 inches deep.
for growth and/or expansion of features by
furnishing additional mounting and connecting
facilities (Fig. 1 and 2).
Page 17
SECTION 518-215-405
TABLE E
FUSING FOR 513., 514., AND 515·TYPE KSU.
DESIGNATION
FUSE AMP
CIRCUIT
POTENTIAL
CODE
Fl
F2
F3
5
Lamp
10V AC
24F
0.5
MB,MG,ST
10V AC or 24V DC
24E
10V AC
24C
F4
Lamp
Wink
F5
F6
F7
Lamp
Flash
F8
F9
FlO
Fll
2
Lamp
Wink
F12
F13
F14
Lamp
Steady
F15
boards (400-series KTUs). The 69E apparatus
mounting must be ordered separately and installed
in the field.
(p) Furnished with hardware for joining the
514A1 KSU to the 513-type KSU.
(q) Dedicated leads for battery and ground,
interrupter, lamp flash, lamp steady, lamp
wink, and ringing are wired to the same numbered
contacts on each connector (Jll-J18). These
leads terminate on connecting block 3 (Fig. 6).
(r) Nondedicated leads are terminated on
connecting block 4 (Fig. 6) for connection
of station andlor distribution cable. Some
nondedicated leads, in addition to being terminated
on the connecting block, are brought out in cable
tails for termination on block 1 or 2 of the
513-type KSU, when required. Others are cable
leads only, for termination on block 1 or 2 as
required. (Do not cut leads. Insulate and store
as required.)
(s) Space is provided for a 69E (Fig. 7) apparatus
mounting to allow for adding one 8-inch or,
with the addition of an 834055907 (P-40V590)
guide assembly, two 4-inch KTU printed wiring
Page 18
(t) Unit is 8-3/16 inches wide by 16-11/16 inches
high by 10-11/16 inches deep.
D.
SIS-Type Key Service Unit
(u) A mechanically joined and partially interwired
combination of 5l3-type and 514A1 KSUs
(Fig. 1 and 2).
(v) Intended for use where the initial installation
requirement exceeds the service provided
by a 513-type KSU.
(w) Unit is 25-1/2 inches wide by 17 inches high
by 11 inches deep.
ISS 6, SECTION 518-2 15-405
As shown in Table D, several connectors
(jacks) offer limited service to 40and SO-pin KTUs. The following
procedure will simplify installation
w hile a llo wing for a dditional
features in the future.
Using Table 0, select KTU s to be installed
for the desired ser vice features and list in
the order they appear from .top to bottom of table.
3.04
3.05
Assign selected KTU s to connectors in the
numerical preference given in the table.
Examples:
(a) An install ation in a 513A KSU req uires five
CO line circuits and a 19-code rotary dial
interco m with one in te rco m station requiring a
long-lin e circuit. KTUs a re elected a nd li sted
in the following mann er:
(1) 424 B (MO ) or C KTU (19-code dial intercom )
(2) 420A KTU (dial intercom long line circuit)
(3) Five 400-type KTUs (CO/ PBX line units).
Fig . 5 - 69F Apparatus Mounting
3.
INSTALLATION
PLANNING
Select a wall location for mounting that will
allow at least 9-112 inches of wall s pace
beyond each side of the backboard to provide for
full openi ng of the carrier assemb lies. . Th e sa me
amount of space for the carrier assemblies is
required if the KSU is fl oor-mounted using a
77-type apparatus mounting .•
Th e 424B (MO ) or C is ass ig ned its first (o nly)
choice of conn ecto rs, J-1 a nd J -2. The 420A is
ass ign ed its first choice of co nn ector s, J-6. Th e
400-type KTUs a re assigned the remaining conn ectors
in numerical preference: fir st choice being J-3;
second, J-4; third, J-5; fourth , J -7; and fifth, J-8.
(If additional KTU se rvices were to be added, th ey
would req uire t he addition of a 514A1 KSU.)
3.01
Custom er mu st provide a 1l0V ac outlet not
under con trol of a wall switch a nd separatel y
fu sed [or 2 amperes, if possib le.
3.02
When a 513-type KSU is installed, all ow at
least 17-3/4 inches of space on the righ t sid e
to provide room to add a 514-type KSU, should it
eve r be needed.
3.03
(b) An initia l install at ion in a 515A KSU requires
four CO line circui ts and a TOU CH-TONE@,
10-code di a l interco m. KTUs a re selected and
li sted in the following manner:
(1) 407B (MO ) or C KTU (10-code di al intercom )
(2) 426A KTU a nd 427B (Se ri es 4) or 427C
KTU (TOUCH-TONE ada pter)
(3) Four 400-type KTUs (CO/PBX lin e units).
The 407B (MO) or C is assigned its first (only)
choi ce of connectors, J-1 a nd J-2. The 426A is
assigned co nnecto rs J-ll a nd , J-12, and t he 427B
is assign ed co nn ecto rs J-13 a nd J -14. Th e 400-type
KTUs a r e assigned in numerical preference from
Page 19
SECTION 518-215-405
CABLE TO CONN
BLOCK NO.2 IN
513-TVPE KSU
AS REQUIRED
[
L~~
o
CONN
BLOCK
NO.4
~I~
o
20
JII
- - - - - ---
JI2
JI2
JI4
NONDEDICATED
LEADS
----,
I
rJ 13
I
I J!..~
I
----+ f--r-- --- -T-J 14
I
----+ ,...-I--~-- -I- l
JI5
---...,
JI6
JI6
JI5
----,
JI7
--,
JI7
-..,
JI8
JI8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,...J~
I
o 20
I
I
I
L_--I._
f-I
t
CABLE TO
CONN BLOCK
NO.3 IN 513TYPE KSU
DEDICATED
I
-+8~L~EA~DS~~4-I-~____•
I
I
I
I
I
.!.!~
r-:!~
o 20
I
I '--L ___
I
I--
L----I
.!.!.~
r
I
.!.!.~
I
DEDICATED
LEADS
I
r--- "1--"'r---,
I
I
I
I
I
I
lDJ~5 lDJ~6 l~J~7 lDJ~8
i
---FACTORY
FURNISHED
WIRING
I
I
r-
~
: I
:
I
I-
r- --
JII
JI3
20
'--
f-
r
r
L___
I
19
L ~ _ ~-------
I
19
I
r
19
I
_...1-:.-:.-=-J___ J
19
Fig. 6-514-Type Key Service Unit, General Wiring Plan
the remaining jacks: first choice being J-3; second,
J-4; third, J-5; and fourth, J-6 (if a fifth line
[400-type KTUj were to be added, it would be
assigned the next available connector, J-15, etc).
If 69-type apparatus mountings are to be
used, externally mounted 66-type connecting
blocks must be provided to accommodate the
connections.
3.06
Page 20
3.07
Refer to the following sections for additional
information required to plan the installation
of a key service unit.
• 518-010-101-Centralized Key Telephone
Installations
• 5I8-01O-105-Grounding and Special Protection
Requirements, Key Telephone Systems
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-405
3.09
Remove t he cover.
Mou nt the KSU on t he wall at t he selected
location, using t he provided template a nd
a ppropriate faste ners . or mount on 77-type a pparatus
mounting followin g instructions furnished with the
apparatus mounting .•
3 .1 0
3 . 11
Unl a tch and ope n the ca rri er assemblies.
If a n external power supply is used, co nn ect
it using the power co rd furnished with t he
513A l KSU. See Table F for connections.
3 . 12
3 . 13
Co nnect t he circu it ground to an appro ved
ground.
If th e available llO- vo lt ac outlet is not a
3-wi re grounded type, an adapter mu s t be
provid ed and a fr ame g rou nd should be install ed
as foll ows:
3.14
(1) Prepa re a sepa rate ground wire by a ttaching
a lug (supplied) to a No. 14 gauge wire of
s uffi cient length to reach from the KSU to an
approved local ground (should be same as protecto r
and electric ground).
(2) Attach the gro und wire at t he KS U by placing
t he lug under one of t he power unit mounting
screws. Tigh ten t he screw securely.
Fig . 7 - 69E Apparatus Mounting
• 518-010-106-Power U ni t Selection , Key
Telep hone System s
• 518-215-400-Key Telephone Units, Lin e
Services
Install 69E or F ap paratus mounting, and
lAl matri x block, or 66R3 connecti ng block
(Fig. 2) if they are requ ired.
3.15
Termin ate the te lephone set cabling, CO,
Ce ntrex, or PBX pairs, option straps, a nd
inter block co nnections on t he co nn ecting blocks.
3 . 16
3 . 17
• 518-215-401-Key Telephone Un its, Auxiliary
Line Services
• 518-215-402-Key Telephone Units, Inte rco m
Services
• 518-215-403-Key Te lep hone Units, Control
Services.
INSTALLING
3.08
Use care when unpacking to prevent unit
from falling out of the cover.
If a 514Al KS U is being added to a 513-ty pe
KSU:
(1) Attach th e two 834056053 (P-40V605) straps
to the back of the 513-ty pe KSU, u ing four
of th e eight 802103713 (P-210371 ) screws pr ov id ed.
Do not tighten the sc rews.
(2) Slide the 514A l KSU over t he protruding
en ds of the st raps al\d butt the two un its
togethe r: 513-type KSU on t he left and the
514A l KSU on t he right.
Page 21
SECTION 518-215-405
(3) Secure the straps to the 514A1 KSU with
the other four 802103713 (P-210371) screws.
TABLE F
CONNECTIONS REQUIRED FOR cONNECTING
AN EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY TO A 513· OR
515-TYPE KSU USING FURNISHED POWER CORD
(4) Tighten the eight screws.
(5) Fasten the 514A1 KSU to the wall .or
apparatus mounting. Mounting must be
expanded to proper width .•
(6) Make required connections to connecting
blocks in 513 KSU.
connections.
3.18
See Table G for
Close and latch carrier assembly.
Install the KSUs by inserting the plug-end
of the boards into the selected connectors.
Make certain all option straps are in place on KTUs
as shown in associated connection figure.
3.19
Exercise care when handling and
inserting plug-in KTUs to avoid
damage to the printed wiring and
other components.
3.20
3.21
Plug power cord into 1I0-volt ac outlet
provided.
POWER
SUPPLY
CONNECTIONS
R-O
24
10C*
105V
GRD
orGRD
105V
GRD
or RG
BL-BK
22
llC*
GRD B(l)
W-G
GRD B(2)
R-G
TALK
GRD
GRD A(l)
W-BL
GRD A(2)
WoO
18V GRD
l8V GRD
S-BK
10V GRD
or GRD
LGl
W-BR
--
SrG GRD
Connections for 513-, 514-, and 515-type
KSUs are shown in Tables F through I and
Fig. 8 through 73. See Table of Contents for
connection tables and figures.
5.
120*
1--------
--
- - r---
--LG2
----
W-S
24
l3B*
l4B*
15B*
22
18
l6A*
l7C*
19C*
10V AC
or 10V AC
INTER.
MB
O-R
24
10Gt
105V
30 Hz
±105V
BL-R
22
llGt
BAT B(l)
G-W
B SrG
BAT B(2)
G-R
BAT A(1)
BL-W
BAT A(2)
O-W
±18V
S-R
10V AC
±10V(1)
BR
10V AC
or 10V AC
INTER.
±10V(2)
S
A TALK
r----
l8V AC
4.01
CONN ON
CONN BlK
3
MG
3.22
4.
lEAD
WIRE
COLOR GAUGE
10VGRD
orGRD
Test operation of KSU for services provided.
Replace and secure cover. If a 514A1 KSU
is being added, attach and secure the 129A
cover (furnished with the 514A1 KSU) and return
the 128A cover (furnished with the 513A1 KSU)
to stock.
lEAD
DESIG
f---
-
l2Gt
24
l3Gt
l4Gt
l5Gt
22
l6Ht
l7Gt
18
19Gt
MAINTENANCE
* Terminates on left side of connecting block.
Maintenance of a 1A2 KTS is limited to
normal station repairs and wiring checks of
the mounting facility and terminal field. No field
maintenance is to be performed on the plug-in
KTUs.
5.01
Care must be used when removing and
inserting plug-in KTUs into the connectors
to avoid damage to the printed wiring and other
components.
t Terminates on right side of connecting block.
5.03
When trouble is encountered, proceed as
follows:
5.02
Page 22
(a) Determine if trouble is at individual station
or common to the system.
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-405
(b) If common to the system:
TABLE G
CONNECTIONS REOUIRED FOR ADDING
514-TYPE KSU TO A 513-TYPE KSU
(1) Check power supply and fuses.
CONN ON
CONNBLK
LEAl)
I)ESIG
LEAD
COLOR
BINDER
COLOR
LF2
S-R
G*
3C
LS2
W-G
G*
4C
RN
BR-R
G*
9B
MG
G-R
G*
lOB
GRD BO)
R-O
G*
l2C
GRD AO)
R-BL
G*
l4C
LW2
R-S
Gt
3F
ST
R-G
Gt
9G
±105V
R-BR
Gt
llF
BAT B(l)
O-R
Gt
l2F
BAT AO)
BL-R
l4F
LF4
S-R
Gt
y*
LS4
W-G
y*
8C
GRD B(2)
R-O
y*
l3C
GRD
R-BL
y*
l5C
A(2)
(2) From nature of trouble report, determine
which KTU is causing trouble.
3
7C
(3) Replace KTU with one known to be
working properly to determine whether
trouble is in KTU or external to it (be sure
to strap in the correct options on replacement
KTU, as applicable).
(c) If replacement of the KTU does not clear
trouble, the trouble is external to the KTU
and the complete wiring serving the KTU should
be checked. Place original KTU back in service.
When a KTU or a connector is taken out
of service or replaced by another, all
nondedicated wiring for the connector or KTU
should be removed to avoid damage to a different
type KTU should it be inadvertently plugged into
the connector.
5.04
Factory Wiring
LW4
R-S
yt
7F
BAT B(2)
O-R
yt
l3F
BAT
BL-R
yt
l5F
LF3
S-R
R*
5C
Fig. 74-ATI and BTl Circuits
Fig. 75-Bat. A (1) and Bat. A (2) Circuits
A(2)
Factory-furnished wiring for lamp, battery
and signaling circuits are shown in the
following figures:
5.05
LS3
W-G
R*
6C
LW3
R-S
Rt
5F
LFI
S-R
0*
lC
LSI
W-G
0*
2C
LWI
R-S
Ot
IF
RG
G
t-
llB
Al
W
:~
l3D
Fig. 79-Lamp Flash Circuits
LG2
BL
:j:
2F
Fig. SO-Lamp Wink Circuits
LGI
0
:1:
2G
LG4
S
:1:
6F
LG3
BR
:[:
6G
* Terminates on left side of connecting block_
t Terminates on right side of connecting block.
t Stored together in one bundle.
Fig. 76-Bat. B (1) and Bat. B (2) Circuits
Fig. 77-MB, MG, and ST Circuits
Fig. 7S-Lamp Steady Circuits
Fig. SI-±IO Volt, ±IS Volt, ±I05 Volt, and
RN Audible Signaling Circuits
Factory wiring for connectors J-l through
J-S and J-ll through J-lS is shown in numerical
order in Fig. S2 through 97.
5.06
Page 23
SECTION 518.215-405
TABLE H
CONNECTIONS FOR AUDIBLE SIGNALING CIRCUITS
AUDIBLE
SIGNALING
CIRCUIT"
PLAcE STRAPS
±10V
Buzzer
17D to 11D
17E to 11E
±18V
Buzzer
16D to 11D
16E to 11E
±105V Ringer
CONNECTING BLOCK 3
REMOVE LEADS
From Terminals
11Cand11G
(Insulate and
Store)
Factory Provided
* If ±10V or ±18V is used for audible signaling: KTUs
requiring ±105V private line services cannot be used
in the 513 KSU. ±105V can be supplied to KTUs in
the 514 KSU by moving the (R-BR) lead on terminal
11F of connecting block 3 to a spare ±105V terminal.
Page 24
TABLE I
OPTION CONNECTIONS FOR LAMP CIRCUITS
LAMP FLASH
LAMPSTEADV
LAMP WINK
ON CONNECTING BLOCK 3
OPTION
INTERRUPTER
Z
KS-19175,Ll
±10V Motor
y
KS-19385,L2
24V DC Motor
X
KS-15900,Ll
±10VMotor
W
KS-19384,L2
24V DC Motor
LAMP
LOAD
1 to 100
Lamps
101 to
200
Lamps
PLACE
STRAPS
REMOVE
STRAPS
PLACE
STRAPS
REMOVE
STRAPS
*
IG to 5G
3G to 7G
18D to 19D
2B to 6B
4B to 8B
18D to 19D
IB to 5B
3B to 7B
18D to 19D
PLACE
STRAPS
*
*
IB to 5B
3B to 7B
18D to 19D
REMOVE
STRAPS
2B to 6B
4B to 8B
18D to 19D
IG to 5G
3Gto 7G
18D to 19D
* If Z, Y straps are in place.
iii
II>
_l>II>
m
n
-4
(5
Z
II>
...
0>
....
0
.....
(Q
--
OPTION STRAPPING ON 4oo-TYPE KTU. OPTION BLOCK (NOTE I)
STRAP TERMINALS
fEATURES
AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
VISUAL
NOLO
TINE-OUT
CONTROL
OPTION
4ooA, B
AND C
5 TO 6
INTERRUPTED RING
W
5 TO 8
STEADY RING
T
6 TO 8
4 TO 6
COMMON WITH DIODE MATRIX CONTROL
S
5 TO 8
5 TO 6
LAMP WINK
Y
7 TO 10
8 TO 9
LAMP STEADY
X
7 TO 9
7 TO 9
I TO 2
I TO 2
SHORT TIME DELAY (10 SECONDS)
Z (NOTES
HND 5)
LONG TIME DELAY
(NOTE 6)
(NOTE 6)
500 MILLISECONDS WHEN
ASSOCIATED WITH NO.1 ESS
HAVING RESWITCH CAPABILITY
(USE 5 Uf CAPACITOR, 60lA OR
EQUIVALENT}. t(USE 1.62 Uf
CAPACITOR, 7010 OR EQUIVALENT)
ZC
(NOTE 7)
2 TO ,
*
ZD
(NOTE 8)
2 TO ,
*
RELEASE Of
NOLO I NG BR lOGE
rRON CO OR PBX
BY LI NE CURRENT 50 MILLISECONDS WHEN
ASSOCIATED WITH NO.5 X-BAR
OPENS GREATER
CENTREX HAVING AUTOMATIC
THAN
PERMANENT SIGNAL RELEASE
(USE 0.5 Uf CAPACITOR, 5758
OR EQUI VALENT}
(USE 0.162 Uf CAPACITOR·
OR EQUIVALENT)
DELAYED
HOLD
RELEASE
4000
t
*t
WHEN US EO WITH Z OPTION
WHEN USED WITH LONG TIME OELAY
Fig. 8-tConnections for 400A, B, C, or D KTU (CO/PBX Line Circuit) (Sheet 1 of 2).
Page 26
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-405
ROW AND TERM I NAL ASSI GNMENT FOR JACKS
SHOWN
F OR
REFERENCE
0 NLY
CONNECT I NG BLOCK
JI
T(CO)
~
---'!!!
IG
2G
SG
~
~
I
J3
J4
13G
19G
14G
20G
17G
23G
18G
24G
13A-E 19A-E
144-E 20A-E
ISA-E 21 A-E
16A-E 22A-E
17A-E 23A-E
18A-E 24A-E
J2
7G
8G
IIG
12G
H-E
8A-E
94-E
6G
I A-E
2A-E
3A-E
4A-E 10A-E
S4-E II A-E
6A-E 12A-E
------'!.
---1i
----Eci
=:=j
J5
25G
26G
29G
30G
2S4-E
264-E
27A-E
28A-E
29A-E
30A-E
J6
31G
32G
3SG
36G
31 A-E
324-E
33A-E
34A-E
3SA-E
36A-E
J7
37G
38G
41G
42G
37A-E
38A-E
39A-[
40A-E
41 A-E
42A-[
2
J8
IG
2G
SG
6G
I A-E
2A-E
3A-E
4A-E
SA-E
6A-[
4
J II
IG
2G
SG
6G
I A-E
2A-E
3A-E
44-E
SA-E
6A-[
J 12
7G
8G
IIG
12G
74-E
8A-E·
9A-E
10A-E
II A-E
12A-[
JI3
13G
14G
17G
18G
13A-E
14A-E
15A-E
16A-E
17A-E
18A-[
J 14
19G
20G
23G
24G
IQ4-E
20A-E
21 A-E
22A-E
23A-E
24A-[
J 15
J 16
2SG
31G
26G
32G
29G
3SG
30G
36G
2SA-E 31 A-E
26A-E 32A-E
27A-E 33A-E
28A-E 34A-E
29A-E 3SA-E
30A-[ 36A-[
J 17
37G
38G
41G
42G
374-E
38A-E
394-E
40A-E
41 A-E
42A-E
J 18
43G
44G
47G
48G
43A-E
444-E
45A-E
46A-E
47A-E
~'
kl
~:6
4
9
~
TO
400TYPE
3 KTU
4I1A-..EJ.."
4. TO PROVIDE TINE-OUT CYCLES or RING-UP
CIRCUITS rRON 3 .. 4 TO 1 .. 5 SECONDS, REPLACE Z
OPTION STRAP WITH A KS-I3490,LI OR EQUIVALENT
() WATT) RESISTOR. USE ONE RESISTOR LEAD
AS A STRAP BETWEEN TERMINALS I AND 2 AND
CONNECT THE OTHER LEAD TO TERM I NAL 3 .. USE
TABLE BELOW FOR RESISTOR VALUE REQUIRED rOR
DESIRED TIME-OUT INTERVAL.
CONN BLOCK I
~
<>--<>--<>--<>- ,
T
I
R
2
---0
---0
A
TO
TEL
SET
S
---0
L
0
0
0
0
!
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
T
R
Jo
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
-----------1--0000000
RCO
SPARE I
~ooooobo
SPARE 2
SPARE 3 3
----<>
o
SPARE 3
SPARE 4
0
00000
o
0
o
o
0
0
~
0
0
0
0
0
o
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
br-o-~~*
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R
~
R
r<.12
.---< 13
.---< 16
6
r--< 8
6
6
~
RC
OPTION STRAPPING ON 413A KTU OPTION BLOCK
FEATURES
TYPICAL EXAMPLE: INSTALLER WIRIN6
AUD I BlE
*
PART OF 413A KTU
TO RINGER, RELAY, ETC, OR AS REQUIRED.
SIGNALS
I STEADY
RING
I INTERRUPTED RING
OPTION
STRAP
TERMINALS
X
9 TO 10
Z
8 TO 10
Fig. 12-Connections for 413A KTU (Auxiliary Ringup Circuit)
JI8
436
446
486
43A-E
ONLY
~
~
~
r:]~
44A-E~ 13
45A-E
48A-E
-< 16
--<
8
~
~
KEY TEL SET
SIMILAR TYPE
SWITCH
n
~
~
~DCJ
SIG KEYiI
I
I
LAMP
Td~TL!~E
PU
h
T
DISTANT END
R
RG
I tG
~
1~
~
CONN
BLOCK 2
R
S
SG
LG
L
(,g
AUD SIG
(SEE NOTE)
DIOV
MATRIX
ROR
RI
JI
IG
2G
3G
4G
J2
7G
8G
9G
lOG
5G
IIG
12G
6G
IA-E
7A-E
2A-E
8A-E
3A-E
9A-E
4A-E 10A-E
5A-E IIA-E
6A-E 12A-E
ROW AND TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT FOR JACKS
CONNECTING BLOCKS
I
2
4
J4
J5
J6
J7
JII
JI4
J8
JI2
JI3
JI5
JI6
19G
25G
31G
37G
IG
IG
7G
13G
19G
25G
31G
20G
26G
32G
38G
2G
2G
8G
14G
20G
26G
32G
21G
27G
33G
39G
3G
3G
9G
15G
21G
27G
33G
22G
28G
34G
40G
4G
4G
lOG
16G
22G
28G
34G
23G
29G
35G
41G
5G
5G
IIG
17G
23G
29G
35G
24G
36G
30G
42G
6G
6G
12G
18G
24G
30G
366
7A-E
IA-E
13A-E 19A-E 25A-E 314-E
19A-E 25A-E 3IA-E 37A-E IA-E
20A-E 26A-E 32A-E 38A-E 2A-E
2A-E
8A-E 14A-E 20A-E 26A-E 32A-E
2IA-E 27A-E 33A-E 39A-E 3A-E 3A-E
9A-E 15A-E 2IA-E 27A-E 33A-E
22A-E 28A-E 34A-E 40A-E 4A-E 4A-E
10A-E 16A-E 22A-E 28A-E 34A-E
23A-E 29A E 35A-E 4IA-E 5A-E 5A-E
IIA-E 17A-E 23A-E 29A-E 35A-E
24A-E 30A-E 36A-E 42A-E 6A E 6A-E
12A-E 18A-E 24A-E 30A-E 36A-E
J3
13G
14G
15G
16G
17G
18G
13A-E
14A-E
15A-E
16A-E
17A-E
18A-E
J
SHOWN
FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
JI7
37G
38G
39G
40G
41G
42G
37A-E
38A E
39A-E
40A-£
4IA-E
42A-E
JI8
43G
44G
45G
46G
47G
48G
43A-E
44A-E
45A-E
46A-£
47A-E
48A-E
~ 14
~I
9
o
~""'
f'--<
NOTE:
DIODE MATRIX MUST BE FURNISHED LOCALLY.
SIGNAL KEY MAY BE A CONVERTED PICKUP KEY OR
ANY EXTERNAL NONLOCKING KEY.
t SPARE A RELAY CONTACTtFOR CONTROL PURPOSES AS DESIRED).
*
@lCill)
CA
'>--
@
OPTION STRAPPING ON 414A KTU OPTION BLOCK
CONN BLOCK I
A
0
""-T
I
---0
TO
TEL
SET
B
0
C
o
D
0
E
0
FIG
010
0
0
0
0
2
R
---00
0
0
o
0
S
3
---0
0
o
0
0
0
0
~O
0
0
0
0
LG
5
---0
0
0
0
0
L
6
-"---0
.....
0
0
0
0
0
0
rEATURES
~J
! 0
! 0
60
J
!
!
DISTANT
TJO
R
TIE LINE
AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
UNDER
CONTROL or
R RELAY
RG TO CONN
BLOCK 2
t
0
0
RGJ AUD
RC
SIG
0
UNDER
CONTROL or
TIME-OUT
CIRCUIT
(B RELAY)
OPTION
STRAP
TERMINALS
INTERRUPTED RING
W
STEADY RI NG
T
6 TO 7
COMMON WITH DIODE
MA TR I X CONTROL
S
7 TO 8
STEADY RING
R
COMMON WITH DIODE
MA TR I X CONTROL
N
7 TO 8
4 TO 6
10 SECONDS
X
I TO 2
16 SECONDS
Z
2 TO 3
23 SECONDS
WITHOUT
x OR X
REMOVE
x OR Z
STRAPS
M
9 TO 10
TIME-OUT
TYPICAL EXAMPLE: INSTALLER WIRING
AUD I BLE R I NGBACK TONE
Fig. l3-Connections for4l4A KTU (Manual Signaling, Ringdown Private Line Circuit)
9
I
12
13
16
8
TO
:~tA
ROW AND TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT FOR JACKS
CONNECTING BLOCK
KEY TEL SET
SHOWN
~
SWITQi
~
Td~TL~N,!'...!...
PICKUP
~
DISTANT END
~
L
~Ir--~~1+-lI~+-1+-----,1 1. L ~
J
1
1",1
~
NET.
I ..
FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
4
SIMILAR TYPE
.. 1
t~
;~
2SGG
6G
I A-E
8G
IIG
12G
7A-E
3A-E
4A-E.
9A-E
IOA-E
J3
~~
J4
JS
J7
JI2
JI3
JI4
~~~
5~GGG
~:
~:
:!~
13A-E
41G
42G
37A-E
6G
I A-E
5G
6G
I A-E
IIG
12G
7A-E
ISA-E
16A-E
2IA-E 27A-E 33A-E 39A-E
22A-E 28A-E 34A-E 4OA-E
3A-E
4A-E
3A-E
4A-E
17G
:~:
J8
:::
23G
29G
24G
30G
19A-E 25A-E
laG
~~:
J6
35G
36G
31 A-E
!:
JIS
JIS
JI7
:~~
~;~
35G
41G
42G
48G
37A-E 43A-E
JI8
17G
18G
13A-E
31 A·E
9A-E
IOA-E
ISA-[
16A-E
21 A-E 27A-E
22A-E 28A-E
33A-E 39A-E 4SA-E
34A-E 40A-E 46A-E
36G
L.J
4:7!G:~ ~
:::
23G
29G
24G
30G
19A-E 2SA-E
f--<
~ 12
:: ~- -~'~ ~ ~:jI=: : ~ L- ~!l~! ~.21A-!lEliI8!A-!Et!1 4IA!-El j2iOIA-1EIl216!A-s.Et!1312A-IlEj 3181A-IEIt121A-~Et!;21A-!El j8~A-E!li!1 41A-E1 1 2°1A-!lEj 216!A-E!li3121A-E!I!l318IA-IE!l414IAI-E~
KEY
LAMP
A
AI
~
...----,.
LG
SA-E
IIA-E
17A-E
23A-E
L
6A-E
12A-E
18A-E
24A-E 30A-E
29A-E 35A-E 4IA-E
36A-E 42A-E
CONN BLOCK I
rF=~(~S~EE~NO~T~E~1~==jJ :I OR
j;
BCD E F tG
H
SA-E
SA-E
IIA-E
17A-E
23A-E 29A-E 35A-E 4IA-E 47A-E
6A-E
SA-E
12A-E 18A-E
24A-E 30A-E 36A-E 42A-E 48A-E
TO
41SA
16
13 KTU
f--< 8
I
~l~.
~
T
~I~?STANT
I
~ 0
0
0
0
0
0
OPTION STRAPPING ON 415A KTU OPTION BLK.::*,-_,
Rj~~JlINE
FEATURES
~OOOOO~
NOTE:
DIODE MATRIX MUST BE FURNISHED LOCALLY_
*-FOR IDLE LINE T£RNINAHON COHECT A
KS-13490,LI 910 OHM RESISTOR IN
SER ~ES VITH A 542F, 2 UF CAPACHOR
ACROSS TERN I NAtS 9 AND 10_ ORDER
COMPONENTS LOCALLY AND INSTALL.
I-FACTORY STRAPPED ON KTU_
TO
A
3
TEL - - - 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SET
~OOO
LG
5
---0000
~O
00
OOOORGJ
OO~~~D
o 06;--..
TYPICAL EXAMPLE: INSTALLER WIRING
OPTI ON
STRAP
TERN I NALS
I-"IN.;;T..:E:;.:RW=P..:T.;::E::.D..:R:.:I;.:NG=-l-_V,-I_+-..:...4 TO 6
AUDIBLE
STEADY RING
T
5 TO 6
SIGNALS
COMMON VITH DIODE
NATR I X CONTROL
sl
4 TO 6
AUDIBLE RINGBACK TONE
NI
I TO 2
~---------------;----~,-_V_I_SU_A..:L_H_0;..;L;;;D_S;;..I"G-,N"AL=-_ _L-_Y_I_-,-_7 TO 8
Fig_ 14-Connections· for 415A KTU (Automatic, DC Signaling, Private· Line Circuit)
in
'"
-~
'"
15
6
z
--
CA
®
I
-T0
0
0
0
0
0
~
0
0
0
0
0
rEATURES
T
~JTO
0
R DISTANT
b 0
TEL SET
RG
S
TO
TEL
SET
3
~
0
SG 4
~
LG 5
~
L
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
--0
[,
g
0
0
RG
AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
TO CONN
BLOCK 2
*
~JAUDSIG
RC
~
OPTION
STR AP
TER MINALS
INTERRUPTED RING
W
5 TO 8
STEADY RING
T
7 TO 8
COMMONW I TH D lODE
MATR I X CONTROL
S
5 TO 8
M
9 TO 10
AUD I BLE R I NGBACK TONE
NOTE:
DIODE MATRIX MUST BE rURNISHED LOCALL Y.
SPARE CONTACT rOR CONTROL PURPOSES AS DESIRED.
t SIGNAL KEY MA·Y B[A CONVERTED PICKUP KEY OR
ANY EXTERNAL NONLOCK I NG KEY.
*
TYPICAL EXAMPLE: INSTALLER WIRING
Fig. 15-Connections for 416A KTU (Station Line Circuit)
ROW AND TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT FOR JACKS
CONNECTING BLOCK
2
J5
JS
J7
J8
JII
JI2
2SG
31G
37G
IG
IG
7G
2SG
32G
38G
2G
2G
8G
I
rn~-lr
I~>LINE CKT FOR
JI
IG
2G
J2
7G
8G
J3
13G
14G
J4
19G
20G
IA-E
2A-E
3A-E
4A-E
5A-E
7A-E
8A-E
9A-E
10A-E
IIA-E
13A-E
14A-E
15A-E
ISA-E
17A-E
19A-E
20A-E
2IA-E
22A-E
23A-E
1>-
1ST LINE
13>IS>LG
T( I)
R( I)
A( I)
25A-E
2SA-E
27A-E
28A-E
29A-E
3IA-E
32A-E
33A-E
34A-E
35A-E
37A-E
38A-E
39A-E
40A-E
4IA-E
IA-E
2A-E
3A-E
4A-E
5A-E
IA-E
2A-E
3A-E
4A-E
5A-E
T(2)
R(2)
4
7A-E
8A-E
9A-E
10A-E
IIA-E
JI3
13G
14G
JI4
19G
20G
13A-E
I4A-E
15A-E
ISA-E
17A-E
19A-E
20A-E
2IA-E
22A-E
23A-E
JI5
25G
266
25A-E
2SA-E
27A-E
28A-E
29A-E
JIS
31G
32G
JI7
37G
38G
JI8
43G
44G
3IA-E
32A-E
33A-E
34A-E
35A-E
37A-E
38A-E
39A-E
40A-E
4IA-E
43A-E
44A-E
45A-E
4SA-E
47A-E
2ND CO
OR PBX
LINE
n I)
T
R( I)
R
T(Il OR (2)
R(J) OR R(2)
A(I) OR A(2)
}[
KEY TEL SET
1ST
PICKUP
KEY
2ND
PICKUP
KEY
-
T(I)
R(I)
A(I)
Cl
T(2)
R (2)
A (2)
~
OR PBX
LINE
L.J
CONF
CKT
LAMP
LG
T(I) OR T(2)
R(I) OR R(2)
A(I) OR A(2)
--
TWO-WAY
AUTOMAT! C
SG
LG
AUD I BLE
SIGNALS
L
RG
RC
C0
@Z)tcZ,Y,W,T,R)
AUDIBLE
RI NG-BACK
ONE-WAY
AUTOMATIC,
ONE-WAY
MANUAL
(NOTE 2 )
OPT ION
STRAP TERM I NAL
INTERRUPTED RING
W
2T03T04t
STEADY RING
T
I TO 2 TO 4 t
COMMON WITH DIODE
MATRIX CONTROL
S
2 TO 3 TO 4 t
3 TO 4
INTERRUPTED RING
R
STEADY RING
Z
I TO 4
COMMON WITH DIODE
MATR I X CONTROL
K
3 TO 4
TWO-WAY MANUAL (NOTE 3)
Y
TWO-WAY AUTOMAT I C
Q
9 TO 10, 5 TO 7 TO 8
ONE -WA Y AUTOMAT I C,
ONE-WAY MANUAL
H
5 TO 7, 9 TO 10
TWO-VA Y MANUAL
M
9 TO 10
Fig. 17-Connections for 418A KTU (Short Range, DC Signaling, Private Line Circuit)
*
SiGNAl KEY MAY BE A
CONVERTED PICKUP
KEY OR AN Y EXTERNAL
NONLOCKING KEY.
t
USE CONTI NUOUS
METHOD OF STRAPPING,
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-405
ROW AND
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
CDNN
KEV TEL SET
FOR JACKS
~
31G
SWITCH
NET
n
PICKUP
Q
CONNECTING BLOCK
SIMILAR TYPE
TIE LINE
CKT AT
DISTANT ENO
~
R
RG
RG
RC
T
R
A
I
D~ifD
LAMP
AI
LG
L
~
I
JI
IG
2G
3G
5G
6G
IA-E
2A-E
3A-E
4A-E
5A-E
6A-E
SHO WN FOR
REF ERENCE
ONL V
4
JII
IG
2G
W-O
5G
6G
IA-E
2A-E
3A-E
JI3
130
14G
W-O
17G
IBG
13A-E
14A-E
i5A-E
4A-E
5A-E
6A-E
16A-E
17A-E
18A-E
~
f-< o
14
b
~
12
13
TO
419A
KTU
NOTE:
DIODE MATR IX MUST BE
FURNISHED LOCALLV.
16
f-<
lAUD SIG
OPTION STRAPPI NG ON 419A KTU OPTION BLOCK
~
1
(SEE NOTE)
DIODE/
MATRIX
@
FEATURES
lCR,T,W)
AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
OPTION
INTERRUPTED
6 TO 8
W
RING
UNDER
CONTROL OF t-ST-E-A-D-Y-R-I-N-G-+---+-----i
5 T06
T
TIME-OUT
CIRCUIT
COMMON WITH
6 Toe
(B RELAV)
DIODE MATRIX
CONTROL
UNDER
CONTROL OF
R RELAV
STEADY RING
R
COMMON WITH
DIODE MATRIX
CONTROL
N
6 SECONDS
X
17 SECONDS
T I ME -OUT
STRAP
TERMINALS
3 TO 5
9 TO 10
7 TO 10
f----'---'--'--'--'----+-'-=--f--'-"--'-=--I
25 SECONDS
AUDIBLE
RINGBACK TONE
WITHOUT
X OR Z
M
REMOVE
X OR Z
STRAPS
I TO 2
Fig. 18-Connections for 419A KTU (Automatic Signaling, Ringdown Private Line Circuit)
Page 37
SECTION S 18-21 5-405
ROW TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
CONNECTI NG
TO
OFFPREMISE
TEL SET
I
2
J4
J5
J6
J7
J8
JII
JI2
JI3
JI4
JI5
JI6
JI7
JI8
19A-E
25A-E
3IA-E
37A-E
IA-E
IA-E
7A-E
13A-E
19A-E
25A-E
3IA-E
37A-E
43A E
14A-E
20A-E
26A-E
32A-E
38A-E
2A-E
2A-E
8A E
14A-E
20A-E
26A-E
32A-E
38A-E
44A-E
~I
I!5A-E
2IA-E
27A-E
33A-E
39A-E
3A-E
3A-E
9A-E
15A-E
2IA-E
27A-E
33A-E
39A-E
45A-E
~I 6
18A-E
24A-E
30A-E
36A-E
42A-E
6A-E
6A-E
12A-E
18A-E
24A-E 30A-E
36A-E
42A-E
48A-E
I--
~8
13G
19G
25G
31G
37G
IG
IG
7G
136
19G
25G
31G
37G
43G
L-
14G
20G
26G
32G
38G
2G
2G
8G
14G
20G
26G
32G
38G
44G
(SEE NOTE)
17G
23G
29G
35G
41G
5G
5G
IIG
17G
23G
29G
35G
41G
47G
...lI!4,>-
18G
24G
30G
36G
42G
6G
6G
12G
18G
24G
30G
36G
42G
48G
[~
RG
CONNECTING
BLOCK 2
472
"I t
t
CONNECTING
BLOCK 2
(TENS)
STA XI
[
T
STA X2 [
190
R (XI)
R
T
R (X3)
STA 3
35B
16G
STA 4
19G
T
350
17A
20A
STA X5 [
R (X5)
T
R
20B
R (X6)
T
*
STA 6
35G
17C
R
20C
R (X7)
T
STA 7
36B
170
R
R
STA 5
35E
17B
STA X6 [
STA X9
34G
19F
R (X4)
STA X8
STA 2
16F
STA X4 [
[
[
[
34E
19E
T
STA X7
STA I
16E
R (X2)
[
CONNECTING
BLOCK 2
(UNITS)
160
T
STA X3
SHOWN
F OR
REFERENCE
ONLY
4
J3
*
t
JACKS
13A-E
T (STA)
R (STA)
I
FOR
BLOCK
200
(X8)
T
R
R (Xg)
T
R
STAKO [
R (XO)
STA 8
360
17E
20E
STA 9
36E
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
36G
AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
18A
R (I)
T
32B
~9
r<
STRAPPI NG ON 420A KTU OPTI ON BLOCK
rEATURE
OPTION
J
AC BUZZER, !18V OR ±IOV
K
V DC
RING£R, :l:105V STEADY
M
15B
R (2)
T
320
15C
18C
R (3)
32E
150
180
R (4)
T
32G
15E
18E
R (5)
T
NOTE:
WHEN MORE THAN ONE 420A KTU IS USED, THE rTG
CONNECTIONS MUST BE MUL TIPLED USING A CONTINUOUS STRAP.
33B
15F
*
18F
R (6)
T
EXAMPLE:
330
407- OR
424-TYPE
KTU
15G
R
18G
R (7)
T
JI AND J2
33E
IIE
1ST
420A KTU
2ND
420A KTU
J3
J4
16A
19A
R {8
T
33G
16B
R
19B.
R (9)
34B
16C
II TO ASSIGNED STATION OF DIAL INTERCOM (ANY
DIGIT MAY BE ASSIGNED TO AN OFF-PREMISE STATION)
t
WHEN INTERCOMMUNICATING SYSTEM IS EQUIPPED
WITH THE 14TOUCH-TONE" ADAPTER (426A AND 427B.
SERIES 4, OR C KTUS) PROVIDE A 400J DIODE FOR EACH
420111 KTU INSTALLED.
19C
[
{OJ
340
Fig. 19-Connections for 420A KTU (Dial Intercom, Long Line Circuit)
Page 38
r<'
TO
420A
4 KTU
18B
R
STA 0
OPTION
15A
T
17F
20F
T
~ 12
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-405
ROil AND TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT FOR JACKS
r -__________~CO~N~NTE~C~T~IN~G~Bl~O~C~K----------------~SHOWN FOR
I
2
4
REFERENCE
r--J-I-;:;*"':J-2-;*"--J7--+-"':J=-8-1--J-I-I-;:*;r--J-I"-2~;;r-J-13--;lt"'-J-1-4"*' ONLY
CO /PBX
II NE CKT
TT(I)
R(I)
---".
~R=lt===~~====1-~IG~~~7G~+-3~7~G~~~I~G-+~I~G-1~7;G~t-~13~G~~1;9~G-j--<14
2G
8G
38G
2G
2G
8G
14G
20G
"r-~---L---L
__
~
__
L-~~~
_ _~
STRAP B GROUND FROM
STA RINGER
l
u
TO
FIRST
LINE
4E
:~:~~
[
IOE
40E
4E
4E
IOE
16E
22E
t--_-r_---._ _-.-__T,O_ _,..-_-._ _, - - _ - 1 - - <
6G
12G
42G
6G
6G
12G
18G
24G
TO
421 A
31 F
31 E
NOTE,
DIODE MATRIX MUST BE
FURN I SHED lOCAllY.
*
RESTRICTED
TO TRANSFER OF ONE STATION
RINGER WHEN USED IN THIS JACK.
Fig. 20-Connections for 421 A KTU (Power Foilure Transfer Circuit)
Page 39
(NOTE 6)
PIO 427B
SERIES 4 OR
427C KTU
- -------7
plO
J7
J8
CONN
CONN
BlK I
CONN
BlK 2
BINDER
®
B21
l
B GRD
®
(NOTE 5)
(
TABLE ,OR SELECTING WIRING ASSOCIATED WITH DIAL CODES
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
o
XI X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 XO
YI
VI
Y2
Y3
Y3
I--
Y4
Y4
Y5
Y5
~
t47A
--
lT2
*
(NOTE 4)
RH
Bl-W
Y-Bl
G-W
Y-Bl
7A-E
Bl-W
BK-S
G-W
BK-S
Bl-W
S-BK
G-W
S-BK
44A-E
8A-E
37A-E
IA-E
46A-E
10A-E
40A-E
4A-E
I-39,
r-;;;'---
RH
*
IA (CONN BlK 4)
7A (CONN BlK 4)
Bl-Y
Bl-W
G-W
Bl-Y
SHOWN fOR
RE, ERENCE
ON lY
-< 37
-< 35
-< 36
~.
12
39
4A-E (CONN BlK 4) 16A-E(CONN BlK 4)
408
4B
4B (CONN BlK 4)
16B (CONN BlK 4)
42G
6G
6G (CONN BlK 4)
IBG (CONN BlK 4)
39A
3A
3A (CONN BlK 4)
15A (CONN BlK 4)
39B
3B
3B (CONN BLK 4)
15B (CONN BlK 4)
3C
3C (CONN BlK 4)
39C
-* r43H
CG
lEAD
COLOR
9A-E
46A
lT2
CG
BINDER
45A-E
- 45H
Y2
JI3
lEAD
COLOR
43A-E
_TO
[~
CONN
SIGNAL
BlK 2
KEY
~
- ( N O T E I)
45A
CONNECT lEADS WITH. ,OR DESIRED STATION CODE (NOTE 3)
I
<
<
<
JII
15C (CONN BlK 4)
47G
IIG
Bl-W
BK-G
G-W
BK-G
45G
9G
Bl-W
BK-O
G-W
BK-O
48G
12G
Bl-W
G-BK
G-W
G-BK
48A
12A
Bl-W
O-Y
G-W
O-Y
46G
lOG
Bl-W
O-BK
G-W
O-BK
f-<
~ 16
f-< 25
f-< 22
f-<
f-<
f-<
'"
!;<
..
~
N
~
27
26
23
4248 (MOl OR C KTU ONLY
NOTES:
I. PROVIDE SEPARATE SIGNAL KEY ,OR EACH STATION CODE TO BE SELECTED.
2. PROVIDE A SEPARATE 421A KTU ,OR EACH STATION CODE TO BE SELECTED.
3. SELECT CODE AND CONNECT lEADS ,OR SELECTED CODE AS SHOWN IN VERTICAL COLUMN.
4. A 40DJ DIODE (PROCURED lOCALLY) MUST BE CONNECTED AS SHOWN BELOW BETWEEN
THE lK AND RH TERMINALS Of THE 407B IMOI OR C. OR 4248 (MOl OR C KTU WHEN
WHEN PROVIDING DIAL TONE.
l K - . j - - RH
5. USE CONTINUOUS METHOD 0, STRAPPING ON CONNECTING BLOCKS fOR B GROUND.
6. IF" MORE THAN ONE 421A KTU IS USED fOR DSS. CONNECT AS SHOWN:
PIO 427B
SERIES 4 OR
427C KTU
--~ 821
®WITH "TOUCH-TONE"
0WITHOUT "TOUCH-TONE"
E1.J:J
1°
CONN
1ST
421A KTU
CONN
@
T
37
~
EJ
2ND
421A KTU
CONN
26
>-----<
T
37
~
26
EJ
>-----<
CONN
T
37
-=B
Fig. 21-Connections for 421 A KTU (DSS Feature of Dial Intercom)
~
PART or
407- OR
424-TYPE KTU
plO
lAST
421A KTU
CONN
26
~
B21
~--
~
(5
Z
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-405
ROW AND TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT FOR JACKS
CONNECTING BLOCK
r---
EJ
LINE
CIRCUIT
[Ed
R(STA)
T(STA)
RC
LINE
CIRCUIT
RG
401-407-;11
R( )
~~p:2~~U 1/
RG
B-B1
R-R1
BRIDGEO
RINGER
B-B1
R-R1
COMMON
AUDIBLE
~
SIGNAL
LS
~
r
~
BZ1
BZ
1
J1
J2
2G
BG
2A E 8A-E
1G
7G
1A-E 7A-E
2
J7
JB
3BG
2G
38A-E 2A-E
37G
1G
37A-E 1A-E
4
J11
J12
2G
8G
2A-E 8A-E
1G
7G
1A-E 7A-E
J13
14G
14A-E
13G
13A-E
J14
20G
20A-E
19G
19A-E
SG
18G
24G
48A E 12A-E
45A-E 9A-E
SG
12G
42G
SG
12G
SHO WN FOR
REF ERENCE
ONL Y
P
P
P
H
13
914
12
2S
37
j
!g1A
KTU
(NOTE
2)
1
NOTES,
1. WIRE KEY TELSET FOR BUSY LAMP FEATURE
REFER TO 502 DIVISION FOR SET INVOLVED
2. STRAP OPTION BLOCK TERMINALS 1 ANO 2 ON KTU
3. IF THREE SIGNALS ARE TO BE CUTOFF, 421A
KTU MUST BE INSTALLED IN J7 OR J8. IF ONE
DR TWO ARE TO BE CUTOFF, USE ANY JACK SHOWN.
4. INSTALL KS-217S5, L1 DIODE DR EQUIVALENT
(OBTAIN LOCALLY).
BL
KEY TElSET
(NOTES 1
AND 4)
Fig. 22-.Connections for 421A KTU (Audible Signal Suppression).
Page 41
SECTION 518-215-405
NOTES:
I. LEADS ARE I NSULATED AND STORED.
CONNECT AS REQU I RED.
2. CONNECT TO SELECTED STATION BL
LEAD AT ANY SPARE TERMINAL.
* - FOR CONNECT ION OF 0 lODE I N THE
"A" LEAD, USE THE STATION BUSY
OPT I ON AS SHOWN I N THE
CONNECT ION SECT ION OF TYPE SET
USED.
t - PROV I DE A SEPARATE 422B KTU
FOR THE UN I TS GROUP (1-0). ANO
FOR THE TENS GROUP (XI-XO).
I-FOR (UNITS) 422B KTU.
§ - FOR (TENS) 422B KTU.
SEE I NSET BELOW ~
ROll AND TERM I NAL
ASS I GNMENT
FOR JACKS
KEY TEL SET *
CONN
BLOCK 2
J7
J8
CONN BLOCK 2
45B
45G
46G
47B-O
YI
(LTII
(LT2)
498-0
41G I
41E 6
STA I OR XI
STA 2 OR X2
lA
STA 3 OR X3
TO
PICKUP
KEYS
STA 4 OR X4
STA 5 OR X5
STA 6 OR XG
CONNECT IN
SIMILAR
MANNER AS
REQU IRED
STA 7 OR X7
STA 8 OR X8
STA 9 OR X9
STA 0 OR XO
BINDER
BI NDER
BINDER
BINDER
BL-W
G
G-W
BL
J II
J 13
SoW
SoW
42A-E
6A-E
45G
9G
BK-O
BK-O
48G
12G
G-BK
G-BK
39G
3G
WoO
WoO
42G
6G
G-W
G-W
50C
140
BR-Y
BR-Y
49G
13G
BK-BR
BK-BR
43A E
H-E
BK-S
BK-S
BR
BL
BL
38G
2G
BL-W
BL-W
37G
IG
W-BL
W-BL
BL
49A
13B
46G
lOG
47G
IIG
48A-E
12A-E
43G
7G
44G
8G
Y2
Y4
YS
JI
438
43G
SWITCH
HOOK
CONN
BLOCK I
LEAD COLORS AND BI NDER
FOR JACKS (NOTE I)
LTI.LT2
BL
BL
BL
BL
BL
BL
BL
BL
BL
AI
r
SH OWN FOR
RE FERENCE
ON LY
~
f-<
f--<
f--<
~
~
f--<
~
~
~I~
~~
:;..!':.. ~
'Bi::BK ~
r...!!b..
I~
I~
~
-
33
31
35
9
14
(.Al...
I~
O-BK
23
BK-G
I~
BK-G
25
O-Y
I~
Y-G
O-BK
f---
f--
f--BK-BL
Y-G
-
f--O-Y
f--BK-BL
51~
- - !: BL f - - ~..!':.. f G-Y
1 - G-Y
f--f--I~ Y-S
I~ Y-S
f--f---
SOA
14B
49E
13E
49C
130
SOE
14E
-(...!!!:.. fSoy
40A-E
4A-E
AI
I~
22
27
f-<
f--<
I~
f--<
f--l...!!!:..
f--<
Y-BR
4A-E
28
26
20
21
32
30
Y-BR
29
Soy
34
AI
TO
422B
KTU
16A-E
INSET
WHEN 424-TYPE
KTU IS
PROVIDED
LTI L
~:":'-~...:....j-----:;,
I
,
~
~
IiHEN 407-TYPE
[~~~}-...:!..
___J_ IS
PROV IDEO
CONNECT 422B KTU (UNITS) TO LTI LEAD AND
CONNECT 4228 KTU (TENS) TO LT2 LEAD
STRAPPING ON
422B KTU OPTION BLUCK
STRAP
TERMINALS
6 TO 8**
o
"I
o
**-44IJ OR EQUIVALENT DIODE AS
SHOWN. PROCURE LOCALLY.
Fig. 23-Connections for 422B KTU (Dial Intercom, Station Busy Selector Circuit)
Page 42
ISS 6, SECTION S 18-21 S-40S
ROW 4ND T(RMI N4L 4SS IGNM(NT
SHO \.IN
FOR
R(F [R(NC(
CONN(CTING BLOCKS
CONN
I
BLOCK
~r-2t-;o~
CONN
BLOCK
3
21A
21C
'5oB~
'--
41Ht N L
!
~
50G4
STRAP
21G
21E
B GRD
AT!
~
~~
'--
BTl
J3
J4
2
J8
JII
J 12
J 13
JI4
JI5
J 16
JI7
J 18
194-(
25A-(
314-(
374-(
14-(
IA-(
74-(
134-(
19A-(
254-(
314-(
374-(
434-(
144-(
204-(
26A-(
324-(
384-(
24-(
ZA-(
84-E
144-(
204-(
264-(
324-(
364-(
444-(
154-(
214-(
274-(
334-(
394-(
34-(
34-(
94-(
154-(
214-(
27A-(
334-(
394-(
454-(
16A-(
224-(
284-(
344-(
404-(
44-(
44-(
104-(
164-(
224-(
264-(
344-(
404-(
464-(
184-(
244-(
304-(
364-(
424-(
64-(
64-(
124-(
164-E
24A-(
304-(
364-(
424-(
464-(
13G
19G
25G
31G
37G
IG
IG
7G
13G
19G
25G
31G
37G
43G
14G
20G
26G
32G
38G
2G
2G
8G
14G
20G
26G
32G
38G
44G
15G
21G
27G
33G
39G
3G
3G
9G
15G
21G
27G
33G
39G
45G
16G
22G
28G
34G
40G
4G
4G
lOG
16G
22G
28G
34G
40G
46G
t
J6
J7
13A-(
*
J5
4
ONL
~
r--<
~
r--<
12
13
16
8
TO
423A
14 KTU
r-< o
r<
19
TO T(NS 4224 (MD) OR B KTU
TO UNITS 422A(MD) OR B KTU
WH(N ADDING TH( 423A KTU TO A SYSTEM (QUIPPED FOR "TOUCH-TON("
(426A AND 427B [SERIES 4] OR C KTUS). A 400J DIODE MUST BE INSTALLED BETWEEN
TH( "RH" AND "LK" LEADS OF TH( 407- OR 424-TYPE KTU.
R(WIR( AS FOLLOWS:
66R 2
TO 4278
CONN BLOCK 2
RH
~RE~I~~~) -----~-T
REMOVE
ADO
39B
40A
ADD
40B
50E
50F
IF TH( SYSTEM IS EQUIPPEOWITH DSS (421A KTU) REWIR( "RH"L(ADS
BY T(RMINATING ONE LEAD TO T(RMINAL 50F AND TH( OTHER L(AD TO A
163A2 ADAPT(R INSTALLED OYER TERMINAL 50G AND SOH.
OPTION STRAPPING ON 423A KTU OPTION BLOCK
OPTION
fEATUR(S
STRAP
TERMI NALS
T
DIAL TONE
I TO 2
R
ST4T ION BUSY TON(
4 TO 6
S
AUDIBLE RINGBACK
§
§ REQUIR(S NO STRAPPING ON KTU
Fig. 24-Connections for 423A KTU (Dial Intercom, Audible Ringback, Dial and Busy Tone Circuit)
Page 43
SECTION 518-215-405
ROW AND
TERM I NAL
ASS I GNMENT
(NOTE I)
CONN BLOCK 2
KEY TEL SET
SWITCH
HOOK
PICKUP
KEY
EJIl~
LJLJ
( 5T A I I
rc=t:l"
T (STA I)
R
STA I
LG STA I
STA I
L
STA 2
STA 3
[2,+~
[t=T-
[+=
k
STA 4:
tt
[t
L
STA 5 .~
STA 6
STA 7
i~
-F-
[t=
fG
if'[t=
f'[t=
STA 8 l i G
SS
TO 423A KTU
STA 9
t@
TO
INTERRUPTER
RN
@
~~
ItG
IL
[t::
~T
STA 0
~
-,:~"~l'®i)~
12E
J
16E
17E
K
r:
J2
ISA
18A
21 A
24A
ISB
18B
21B
24C
15C
18C
21C
24E
15D
18D
21 D
24G
15E
18E
21E
25A
15F
18F
21F
25C
15G
18G
21G
25E
16A
19A
22A
25G
16B
19B
22B
26A
ISC
19C
22C
26C
39D
39E
48B-D
48E-G
37G
CONN BLOCK I
40A-E
NOTES:
I. CONNECTI ONS SHOWN ARE ONLY FOR THE BAS I C
FEATURES OF THE 424B (MOl OR C KTU. 1. E.• ROTARY DIAL
STATIONS. SINGLE SPURT RINGING, AND STEADY
LI NE AND BUSY LAMPS. WHEN ADD I NG OPTI ONAL
FEATURES SUCH AS FLASHING LINE LAMPS,
"TOUCH-TONE" STATIONS, DIAL TONE, ETC,
PROVIDE THESE CONNECTIONS, AND THEN REFER TO
THE CONNECTION FIGURE OF THE KTU PROVIDING
THE OPTIONAL FEATURES BEING ADDED.
2. ANY SELECTED R LEAD (RI-RO) MAY BE ASSIGNED
AS THE INITIAL DIGIT OF A 2-DIGIT CODE. THE
R LEAD SO ASSIGNED MAY NOT BE USED FOR A
STATION CODE.
ROW AND
TERM I NAL
ASS IGNMENT
(NOTE I)
1--,
I-li
1 1 1
I-l-Ii
1-1" 1
STA X2
til
-i1
1115HOWN
OR
1 1 1F
EFERENCE
NLY
STA X3
I-t-11~
tt-t-=-<
1-1-+
L
11
STA X4
B31
1
I-T'"
1-14
R
+-f-!!.<
BI3
til
1
1-1-:1
1
rl
r1-11
r-11
T
TO
4248 STA X5
(MOl
OR C
KTU
STA X6
1
STA X7
til
r-j-I..,
I-i'"
11
CONN BLOCK 2
J2
160
190
220
26E
16E
E19E
~
22E
26G
16F
19F
22F
27A
16G
19G
~
22G
27C
T
ISTA XI)
STA XI
TO [ R
KEY
LG STA XI
TEL
L
STA XI
SET
STA X8
1
~
~
~
[I:T~
[t=
k
[tIG
t=-
[t=
iG
STA Xo
[1=R-:-
r1-j.J
J
~
J!"...
[t:
1 1 1
1-1
1
[t
STA X9
1
I-TI-1
1-, .... 1
[2[I:K
.L
b§....
~
!o.......
17A
20A
23A
27E
17B
20B
2'B
27G
17C
20C
23C
28A
170
200
230
28C
17E
20E
23E
28E
17F
20F
23F
28G
BI4
B21
B38
AI9
A38
1
1
t
1
~
1
I
I
1-1
TO
424B
(MOl
OR C
KTU
1
1
1
1-1
~
f-i.,
1-1
1-1
.,
I--i
1-1
1--1
W
OPTIONS'
+
~
~
INTERRUPTED
*
SINGLE
SPURT
~
t
10V AC BUZZER
105V 30 HZ RINGER
10V AC BUZZER
IBV AC BUZZER
AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
DC BUZZER
105V 30 HZ BUZZER
M
* TO
t
PROVIDE INTERRUPTED RINGING A 425B
K TU MUST BE USED.
STATION BUSY TONE IR) IS NOT RECOMMENDED
FOR USE WITH SINGLY SPURT RINGING.
Fig. 25-Connections for 4248 (MD) or 424C KTU (Dial Intercom, 19-Code Selector Circuit) (Sheet 1 of 2)
Page 44
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-405
B (STA I)
R
STA I
:
STA 2
(
STA 3
[~
STA 4
STA
[
:
(~
:
STA
(
STA
( B
STA
STA 9
STA 0
(~
(:
(:
B
STA XI ( R
STA X2
STA X3
STA X4
STA X5
STA X6
STA X7
STA X8
STA X9
TO SELECTED
R(I-D) LEAD
rOR TR ANsrER
STA XO
TO
(NOTE 2)
(:
(
(
(~
(
:
:
:
(:
(:
(~
(:
ROW AND
TERMINAL
ASS I GNMENT
(NOTE I)
CONN BLOCK
JI
29A
32B
29B
320
29C
32E
290
32G
29E
33B
29r
330
29G
33E
3DA
33G
30B
34B
OC
340
300
34E
30E
34G
3Dr
35B
3DG
350
31 A
35E
31B
35G
31C
36B
310
360
31E
36E
31r
36G
37E
CONN BLOCK 2
(X I)
A28
A23
(X I)
A25
A26
A2D
LG (XI)
A21
~M
150
0
0
0
0
0
0
160
0
0
(I,
0
0
0
170
0
0
0
0
0
0
18 0
0
0
o
0
0
0
190
0
0
!
0
0
0
200
0
0
0
0
0
0
a:d
21 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
")-
220
0
0
0
Cl
0
0
~
230
0
0
0
0
0
0
BI2
a:d
~B13
LG
d
A32
A30
CONN BLOCK 2 (CONT)
A29
A S:C DIE riG H
O--Olo--o:~I~
A34
A8
TO
424 B
(MOl
DR C
KTU
EXAMPLE or
INSTALLER
WIRING FOR
STA XI
(XI)
24 0
'L~..A..£..A.£.A
25 0
r"L £ ..A. ~ ..A.. ~ ..Y
260
A22
27 0
A24
28 0
38 0
A27
AO
AI
(XI)
A33
320
0
0
0
0
0
0
33 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
340
0
0
o
(\
0
0
0
A31
0
CONN BLOCK 2 (CONT)
A9
A 14
A 16
C«~...A.. ~..A.. £...fl,
~ £. ..A.. £ .A. £ .Y
'=-"--H-':~ TO UNITS
4228
TR I
[3]
425-TYPE
-----7
-----7
~ BR-BK
- BR
01
-
INTERCOM
37D
49E-G
..."
'"
'"...
STATION
BUSY
CIRCUIT
J
A39
LT2
A35
LTI
f-< BO
f-< 820
G-W
f-< BIB31
BK-BR
f-<
f-< A35
f-< A39
f-< 827
Y-G
f-< 828
f-< A38
BK-S
f-< B35
W-S
f-<
S-Y
f-< B3 4
Y-BL
f-< 831
o-w
f-< BI9
816
Y-BL
BYI
o-w
r--
~
"~
JACK
...
'"
"'"
I
~
24
(~EMOVE
LEAD
COLOR
BL-W
S-BK
Y-BL
O-W
BK-O
Y-O
BK-G
BL-Y
G-W
5 -BK
Y-BL
BR-W
BK-O
Y-O
BK-G
BL-Y
Jll-J12
25
[ 26
FACTORY
BINDER
FURNISHED
STRAPS)
-------
27
28
JI3-JI4
38
t WHEN USING 424-TYPE KTU
W
A
B
USING 407-TYPE
~;t~:E A::DI ~~~~~~~~EA~~ ~~~I~D~D
B34
J
J
.
;gR4~~~ ~:~ERCOM
-
STATION BUSY CIRCUIT
WHEN REQUIRED
(SEE FIG. 23)
[ 3 4(MD)
25
ORA
B
-----7
-----7
834 J
A35) B GROUND
iii
Fig. 26-Connections for 425A (MD) or 4258 KTU (Dial Intercom, Flashing Lamp Circuit)
Page 46
"~
~
>-
WHEN THE 425A (MD) OR B
KTU IS INSTALLED IN JIIJI2 OR J13-J14 1 THE FOLLOWING
LEADS (OF SELECTED JACKS)
MUST BE INSULATED AND STORED'
I
SEE F1G.23
B34
W-S
S- Y
~
~407-TYPE
'I
BR-BK
BK-S
r---TC
r----
OR
REFERENCE
ON LV
G-BK
J
50B-D
§
LT2 TOTENS ]FOR DIAL
BL-Y
ALI
T WHEN
B34
BK-S
LT2
424-TYPE
'IU
G-W
r--
43E-G
JI4
BR
JI4
BK-BL
BK-BR
T 43B-Dt ~
498-0
A22
G-W
BR-Y
~
r--
A32
W-O
G-W
38E
38G
BR-W
W-O
BK-BL
LA
~.A26
BK-O
'-IG
X51~ 21E*
A23
S-W
l-t;
21.* 278*
X3
22G
STA(-t=X4
21C * 270*
STA(-E'-- 23.
380
G-W
JI3
0
JI2
W-O
I--
ST{f4 ,-7'-::-- 24G* 24H*
STAl..):§-- 21E
5 ,-c'=:-- 25A* 25B*
21F
'I
LEAD
,.
SH OWN
BINDER
CONN
BLOCK
SH OWN
FO R
RE FERENCE
ON LY
ISS 6, SECTION 51S-215-405
81NOER
TO
4078
(MOl
OR C. [ 12
OR
424B 13
(MO)
OR C
KTU
CONNECTING
8LOCK 2
T
T
17G
R
R
20G
H8
42E
LB
42H
TTG*
47E-G
HI
42A
42C
*
LI
BL-W
O-W
0
JII
JI2
JI2
W-8R
8R-W
G-8K
827
BL-Y
A35
8L-Y
A39
WHEN ADDING THE 426A AND 427B (SERIES 4) OR C KTUS
TO AN EXISTING SYSTEM EQUIPPED WITH A 420A KTU,
A DIODE MUST BE INSTALLED IN THE TTG LEAD CONNECTING
TO THE 420A KTU, SEE FIG. 19
G-W
SR
JI3
JI4
-w
39S+
429
420
458-0
468-0
RH
HI
BR
o-w
Ll
0-'1'
A35
A'9
BK-G
825
8K-0
822 TO
SR-al(
A37 (SERIES
4}OR
838 C KTU
4279
Y-BL
R51
4BB-Ot
46E-G
47[-G
*
CG t
LB
HB
Y2
'1'4-
B26
BL-Y
YI
Y5
BI9
820
BK-$
Y3
478-0
(Part of
JI4
c~~~g~T~NG[~~*~PP~~3~i~~BK~_~BL~~~~
42G
TO
426A
KTU
839
8K-S
*XY
45£-G
813
828
BINDER
39.
812
Y-G
Fig. 27 -Connections for 426A KTU
TOUCH-TONE Adapter Circuit)
42F
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
BL-BK
B21
Y-G
828
G-BK
B27
Y-O
S-BK
;-TG §
CONNECT AS REQUIRED WHEN
THE 11TH KEY (XY) OR 12TH
KEY (PP) IS USED.
REMOVE STRAP BETWEEN 39E
AND 488 CONNECTING BLOCK
2, IF PROVIDED.
B24
A36
BL-Y
B39
WHEN ADDING THE 426A AND
427B (SERIES 4) OR C nus TO
AN EXISTING SYSTEM EQUIPPED
WITH A 420A KTU, A DIODE
MUST BE INSTALLED IN THE
TTG LEAD CONNECTING TO
THE 420A KTU. SEE FIG 19
WHEN A 423A KTU 1$ ADDED, THE
RH LEAD SHOULD BE REMOVED
FROM 39B AND CONNECTED TO
50F. A 4DOJ DIOOE MUST BE
INSTALLED BETWEEN 398 AND 50E .
REFER TO FIG. 24.
Fig. 2S-.Connections for 4278 (Series 4) or C KTU
(Part of TOUCH-TONE Adapter Circuit).
Page 47
...
Q
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
U2
(J)
""00
400 KTU LINE [12
CKT FOR 1ST
13
OR 2ND LINE
16
~
>-
I
2
I
37E
74-[
8A-[
94-E
JI
I A-[
24-[
3A-E
2
J2
37B
ROW AND T[RMINAL ASSIGNM[NT FOR JACKS
CONN[CT I NG BLOCKS
I
2
J4
J5
J6
J7
J8
JII
J 12
J3
134-[ 194-[ 254-[ 314-[ 374-[ 14-[ 14-E 74-[
144-[ 204-[ 264-[ 32A-[ 38A-E 2A-[ 24-[ 84-[
15A-E 214-[ 274-E 33A-[ 394-E 3A-[ 3A-[ 9A-[
'"
n
.....
m
4
JI5
JI6
JI7
JI8
J 14
J 13
134-[ 194-[ 25A-[ 314-[ 374-[ 43A-[
144-[ 204-[ 264-E 32A-[ 384-[ 444-E
15A-[ 214-[ 274-E 33A-[ 39A-[ 45A-[
0
5l
Z
~:,~~
III
~
00
~
III
,i.
ROW AND T[RM I NAL ASS I GNM[NT FOR JACKS
I
2
I
*
I
JI *
J3 *
J2
13G
36G
IG
7G
390
~
36[
2G
8G
14G
35[
3G
9G
15G
38B
~
33B
~
330
~
34G
14-[
74-[
134-[
[R I
2A-[
84-E
14A-[
EAI
3A-[
37[
9A-[ 37B
154-[
C41
lOG 49[-G
16G
4G 48[-G
S •
I BG
35G
12G
6G
3BE
CA2
320
ET2
43B-0
[R2
46[-G
[42
47B-D
64-[
34[
124-[
18A-E
TI
TI T2
RI R2
A 1,42
2
-;t-
-rn"-
J4 *
19G
20G
21G
~
~54-[
F'---:"I
194-[ 25A-[
204-[ 26A-[
214-[ 274-[
22G
2BG
24G
30G
244-E 304-E
174-[ 23A-E 29A-[ 354-[ 4IA-[ 54-[
164-[ 22A-E 284-E 34A-E 40A-[ 4A-[
114-[
104-E
4 A- E
J5 *
25G
26G
27G
CONNECT I NG BLOCKS
2
J8
JII
J7
J6 *
31G
IG
IG
37G
2G
2G
32G
3BG
3G
3G
33G
39G
43G
7G
44G
8G
45G
9G
I A-E
31 A-E 37A-[ I A-E
32A-[ 3BA-E 24-[ 24-E
1334-[ 39A-[ 34-E 3A-E
34G
40G
4G
4G
36G
42G
6G
6G
46G
lOG
43A-E 7A-[
444-E 84-[
454-[ 94-E
64-[
36A-[ 424-E 64-[
54-[
44-[
4
J12*
7G
BG
9G
J 13
13G
14G
15G
J14*
19G
20G
21G
J15* J16*
25G
31G
26G
32G
27G
33G
J17* J18*
37G
43G
44G
38G
45G
39G
L[AO COLOR
AND BI NO[R
B I NOER
G-W
BL W
JII
J 13
BK-BL BK-BL
BL-BK BL-BK
BK-O BK-O
7A-[
8A-E
94-[
lOG
12G
13A-[ 19A-[ 25A-[ 31 A-[ 374-[ 434-[
144-[ 204-E 264-[ 324-[ 384-[ 44A-E
15A-[ 21 A-[ 274-[ 334-E 394-[ 45A-[
16G
40G
46G t
22G
28G
34G
42G
48G
I BG
24G
30G
36G
~
~
~
r-<
r-<
r-<
r-<
O-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
124-[ I B4-[ 244-[ 304-E 36A-[ 424-E 48A-[
C
III
SHOWN FOR
REF ERENCE
ON LY
O-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
r-<
r-<
r-<
r-<
r-<
14
9
0
20
21
22
12
13
16
19
I
23
35
36
37
428A
KTU
II A-[ 17A-[ 234-[ 29A-[ 35A-E 414-[ 47A-[
104-[ 164-[ 22A-[ 28A-[ 34A-[ 40A-[ 46A-E
AI" (AI
,rtt1
SWITCH
§.\;:'!.. H~
LAMP
P~P
KEY
SWH
HOOK
EXCLUDED STA NO. I
-< 13
--< 12
f-f-) ~~TR
LINE
400-TV PE KTU
CONTROL
KEY
yl*,,+-I_ _-Q)CL
PICKUP~
L---++-oo-+-H8
*-ON[ CIRCUI T ONLY.
t -CONNECT To SPARE
T[RMI N4LS 4S
R[QU IRED •
• _oS' L[4D CAN ONLY
MUll TPL[ TO OTH[R
428A KTUS
CONTROLLED BY THE
SAM[ STATION.
KO I L1 Y
PICKUP
HOLD KEY
KEY
§ - NORMALL Y TH[ LAMP
0
~:
ASSOCIAT[D WITH
TH[ CONV[RT[D
PICKUP KEY USED
FOR CONTROL.
~~ ~~~ [~ 13 >>-
1-'-'-H--~+-----4------B~IT 8>-
CIRC
lOR 2)
J2
J3
J4
2
J5
J6
4
J7
J8
JII
JI2
J 13
J 14
J 15
JI6
9A-E
15A-E
2IA-E
27A-E 33A-E
39A-E
3A-E
3A-E
9A-E
15A-E
21>-E
27A-E
33A-E 39A-E
JI8
45A-E
6A-E
12A-E
18A-E
24A-E
30A-E
42A-E
6A-E
GA-E
12A-E
18A-E
24A-E
30A-3
3GA-E 42A-E
48A-E
36A-E
=}-
J 17
3A-E
~
~
I~
'r--
IA-E
7A-E
13A-E
19A-E
25A-E
3IA-E
37A-E
IA-E
IA-E
7A-E
13A-E
19A-E
25A-E
3IA-E
37A-E
43A-E
;~
3A-E
9A-E
15A-E
2IA-E
27A-E 33A-E
39A-E
3A-E
3A-E
9A-E
15A-E
2IA-E
27A-E
33A-E
39A-E
45A-E
16A-E
22A-E
28A-E
34A-E
40A-E
46A-E
2
[
.-1'6
4A-E
10A-E
16A-E
22A-E
28A-E
34A-E
40A-E
4A-E
4A-E
10A-E
r-
5A-E
IIA-E
17A-E
23A-E
29A-E 35A-E
4IA-E
5A-E
5A-E
IIA-E
17A-E
23A-E
29A-E
35A-E
41 A-E
47A-E
9G
15G
21G
27G
33G
39G
3G
3G
9G
15G
21G
27G
33G
39G
45G
lOG
ISG
22G
28G
34G
40G
4G
4G
lOG
16G
22G
28G
34G
40G
46G
LG
I-
0
,~ r-- r--
l - I - 3G
19
4G
~
~
LII
FLST
I~
LG
LINE CKTI ~
LINE CKT 2
cg::d
LAMP
AI
SWITCH
HOOK
t
L (2)
LI NE CKT I
LINE CKT 2
~~
~
I-.!:!L
2G
39G
3G
40G
4G
42G
6G
43G
7G
,,~
44G
8G
,,~ 45G
9G
~
L(I)
C9==J:
cg::::d
*
SP
T
A (I)
AI
SWITCH
HOOK
37A-E
IA-E
38A-E
2A-E
42A-E
6A-E
43A-E
7A-E
I-<
I-<
I-< o ;:'
I-< '""
14
19
f-<
T
R
A
AI
TO
ATTENDANT
STATION
3D
90
150
21D
27D
330
390
3D
3D
90
150
210
27D
330
390
450
40
100
16D
220
ZBO
340
400
40
40
100
160
220
280
34D
40D
4SD
SE
liE
17E
23E
29E
35E
41E
SE
SE
liE
17E
23E
29E
35E
41E
47E
LG
R* OR RCt
R* OR RGt
L(AT! )
L(AT21
NOTES:
I. 449A KTU CONTAINS TIIO CIRCUITS.
2. CONNECT B GRD ONLY Ir 448A KTU IS PROVIDED. Ir 448A KTU
IS PROVIDED, NONE or THE RINGER CONNECTIONS ARE REQUIRED.
3. TO 400-TYPE KTU ASSOCIATED WITH rlRST CIRCUIT or 449A KTU.
4. TO 4DO-TYPE KTU ASSOCIATED WITH SECOND CIRCUIT or 449A KTU.
5. PLACE STRAP ON 400-TYPE KTU AS rOLLOIIS:
.400B AND C - STRAP TE'RMINAL 4 TO 6
• 4000 • STRAP TERMINAL 6 TO 8
.4000 - CONNECT TERMINALS C3 TO C4
fOR LINE RINGING
fOR COMMON AUO I BLE RI MG I NG
USE 183A2 ADAPTER TO MULTI PLE LEADS
Fig. 32:-.Connections for 449A KTU (Immediate Transfer Control Circuit) (Sheet 1).
Page 52
t
LUI
I
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-405
ROW AND TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS FOR JACKS
J7
(NOTE 3)
g;r,----...
:::
r-I----J
~
(NOTE 4) - - '
(
J8
JII
SHOWN
ro R
JI3
CONN
CONN
BLK I
BLK 2
391:
40C
47G
IIG
BL-W
47A-E
IIA-E
BL-W
Y-O
G-W
Y-O
49G
13G
BL-W
BK-BR
G-W
BK-BR
BINDER
LEAD
BINDER
3G
BL
WOO
G
WoO
4G
BL
O-W
G
O-W
T OR RG
LEAD
R OR RC
R* OR RCt(PI)
B* OR RGt(PI)
L(I)
BK-G
LP(PI)
R* OR RCt (ATI)
B*ORRGt(ATI)
l--'
L(ATI)
EIK-G
49E
13E
BL-W
Y-S
G-W
Y-S
44G
8G
BL-W
BL-B'
G-W
BL-BK
43G
7G
BL-W
BK-BL
G-W
BK-aL
O-Y
G-w
o-y
BL-Y
G-W
BL-Y
48A-E
12A-E
BL-W
46A-E
10A-E
BL-W
S(PI)
B,,~~
G-W
42G
6G
39A-E
3A-E
BL
G-W
G
G-w
C(I)
T OR RG
R OR RC
BL
W-S
G
W-S
SOG
14G
BL-W
BR-BK
G-W
BR-BK
SOE
14E
BL-W
Soy
G-W
Soy
SOC
14C
Bl-W
BR-Y
G-W
SR-Y
L(2)
-
B* OR RGt(P2)
R* OR RCt(P2)
37A-E
IA-E
BL
W-BR
G
W-BR
38A-E
2A-E
Bl
BR-W
G
BR-W
38G
2G
BL
BL-W
G
BL-W
37G
IG
Bl
W-Bl
G
W-Bl
O-BK
G-W
O-BK
l(P2)
-
-
-
S(P2)
R* OR RCt(AT2)
46G
lOG
Bl-W
B* OR RGt (AT2)
B
(NOTE 2)
'I~~
~
~
SOA
14B
BL-w
G-Y
G-W
G-Y
4SA-E
9A-E
Bl-W
Y-al
G-W
Y-Bl
48G
12G
Bl-W
G-BK
G-W
G-1lI(
7A-E
Bl-W
BK-S
G-W
BK-S
43A-E
RE rERENCE
ON LY
f--<
~
I-<
I-<
~
f--<
~
19
25
24
31
30
21
20
26
39
I-<
t
I-<
~
~
~
~
f--<
f--<
16
38
TO 449A
KTU
(NOTE I)
34
33
12
13
14
23
32
37
27
35
TO 448A KTU
(Ir PROVIDED)
Fig. 32-Connections for 449A KTU (Immediate Transfer Control Circuit) (Sheet 2)
Page 53
SECTION 5 T8-21 5-405
34A VOICE
COUPLER
CUSTOi'IERl~~ __ 3 I
M~
SIC SOOlCE
'~
---
Jl
J7
J8
CONNECTING BLOCK
2
1
2
---'l!..
438 43A-E 7A-E
It!
466 44A-E 8A-E
RCO
466
40G
4G
R STA
33B 400
7G
T CO
3G
35E
38G
T STA
426
BG
356
~--..!!J..2!!.!
400 4BA-E lOA-E
33G
49E
13E
2NO I--..!!~
LINE 1---.1L!1!!!
33D
44G
8G
1---.1 Lill
346
456
9G
?--..!! L!1!!!
358 47A-E llA-E
3RD 1--..!! LillJ
32E
47G
llG
LINE 1---.1!£!!L lA-E
37A-E lA-E
1---1.m. 2A-E
39A-E 2A-E
?---'!.:£!!.L
3SG
37G
lG
3SE
2G
4TH I---'!. .m.
39G
LINE 1---1 :£!!.L
34E 42A-E BA-E
320
466
lOG
3BD
48G
13G
CO
5TH I---'!.~
37E 39A-E 3A-E
32G 48A-E 12A-E
35D
49G
12G
I
RCO
14E
34D
50E
STH
R STA
14B
33E
50A
LINE
T CO
47B 45A-E 8A-E
T STA
370
50G
146
13B
32B 48A
13049C
7THI~
34B
-5lIC- 14D
LINEI---.!J.!!!lJ..
1
:bb JJ
CIRCUIT
CO/P9X
STA
NOTE; FOR THE 7TH LINE.
CONNECT TI STA) TO THE
SAlE TER~INAL AS TI CO)
USING 1B3A2 ADAPTER.
l---J~
~r---'!.
'Mfl
>~
[:::mIT
"
•••
SIIlWN FDR
Jll
J13
REFERENCE
8INDER
ONLY
BL-W O-W
BK-S BK-S ~ 35
3B
S-BK S-BK
O-W O-W
19
20
BK-BL BK-BL
W-O W-O
G-W G-W
39
BL-Y BL-Y
Y-S Y-S
30
21
9L-9 BL-9K
22
BK-O BK-O
24
Y-O Y-O
25
BK-G BK-G
W-BR W-BR
12 TO
BR-W BR-W
13 451B
W-9L W-9L
14 KTU
9
9L-W BL-W
8
S-W S-W
23
O-BK 0-9K
31
BK-8I BK-8R
lS
W-S w-S
2S
O-Y O-Y
27
G-BK G-BK
34
S-Y S-Y
32
G-Y G-Y
37
Y-BL Y-9L
38
BR-BK BR-BK
28
Y-G Y-G
Y-9R Y-BR
29
BR-Y BR-Y
33
I----<
I----<
I----<
---<
---<
---<
---<
---<
---<
---<
---<
---<
---<
---<
I----<
---<
I----<
I----<
b
I----<
I ~
If----<~
Fig. 33-.Connections for 4518 KTU (Music-an-Hold).
Page 54
I----<
I----<
KEY TEL SET
TYP:~
SWITCH
NET.
PU
n
0
0
0
rMILAR
PRIVATE LINE
CKTAT
, DISTANT END
J2
7G
8G
IIG
5G
12G
66
7A-E
~7 IA-E
2A-E 8A-E
S
3A-E
9A-E
SG
4A-E 10A-E
LG
5A-E IIA-E
L
U-E 12A-E
~
I
LAMP~
AUO SIG
(SEE NOTE)
OIOY
MATRIX
JI
IG
2G
~
SIG KEY*
~
fu
ROR
RI
SHOW N
FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
ROW AND TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT FOR JACKS
CONNECTING BLOCKS
J3
13G
146
17G
18G
I
J4
J5
19G
20G
25G
26G
23G
24G
29G
30G
13A-E 19A-E 25A-E
14A-E 20A-E 26A-E
15A-E 2IA-E 27A-E
16A-E 22A-E 28A-E
17A-E 23A-E 29A-E
18A-E 24A-E 30A-E
J6
31G
32G
J7
37G
38G
35G
36G
3IA-E
32A-E
33A-E
34A-E
35A-E
36A-E
41G
42G
37A-E
38A E
39A-E
40A-E
4IA-E
42A-E
J
2
J8
IG
2G
4
JII
IG
2G
5G
6G
IA-E
2A-E
3A-E
4A-E
5A E
6A E
5G
6G
IA-E
2A-E
3A-E
4A-E
5A-E
6A-E
JI2
7G
8G
IIG
12G
7A-E
8A-E
9A-E
10A-E
IIA-E
12A-E
JI3
13G
14G
JI4
19G
20G
J 15
25G
26G
17G
23G
29G
18G
24G
30G
13A-E 19A-E 25A-E
14A-E 20A-E 26A-E
15A-E 2IA-E 27A-E
16A-E 22A-E 28A-£
17A-E 23A-E 29A-E
18A-E 24A-E 30A-E
JI7
JI6
31G
32G
37G
38G
JI8
43G
44G
35G
36G
3IA-E
32A-E
33A-E
34A-E
35A-E
36A-E
41G
42G
37A-E
38A-E
39A-E
40A-E
4IA-E
42A-E
47G
48G
43A-E
44A-E
45A-E
46A-£
47A-E
48A-E
kr--<~
R
r--<-
r--<- 8
NOTE:
DIODE MATRIX MUST 8E FURNISHED LOCALLY.
* SIGNAL KEY MAY BE A CONVERTED PICKUP KEY OR
ANY EXTERNAL NONLOCKING KEY.
@!@;!)
CA
'>----
@
OPTION STRAPPING ON 461A KTU OPTION BLOCK
CONN BLOCK I
A
0
TO
TEL
SET
B
0
I
T
----0
0
2
R
----0
S
3
----0
C
o
0
0
E
0
FIG
010
rEATURES
~J
60
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
))
0
0
0
o
0
0
0
0
~O
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
))
0
LG
5
----0 0
L
6
-=------0
0
0
0
0
0
o
DISTANT
T
R r
PRIVATE
LINE
AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
UNDER
CONTROL or
TIME-OUT
CIRCUIT
(B RELAY)
UNDER
CONTROL
R RELAY-
RGJ AUO
RC
SIG
60
or
OPTION
STRAP
TERMINALS
INTERRUPTED RING
W
STEADY RING
T
7 TO B
6 TO 7
COMMON WITH DIODE
MA TR I X CONTROL
S
7 TO B
STEADY RING
R
COMMON WI TH DIODE
MATRIX CONTROL
N
4 TO 6
10 SECONDS
x
I TO 2
16 SECONDS
Z
2 TO 3
23 SECONDS
WITHOUT
X OR x
REMOVE
x OR Z
STRAPS
TIME-OUT
TYPICAL EXAMPLE: INSTALLER WIRING
AUDIBLE R I NGBACK TONE:
Fig. 34-Connections for 461A KTU (Manual Signaling, Ringdown Private Line Circuit)
'l
ca
CD
UI
UI
M
9 TO 10
14
9
SECTION 518-215-405
J1-J4
128
12H
CONNECTING BLOCK 3
J5-J8 J11-J14 J15-J18
13A
12C
13C
13H
12F
13H
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
15 4S7A
fO
17 KTU
NOTE, 4S7A KTU CAN 8E INSTALLEO IN ANY
CONNECTOR. KTU MONITORS 8 BATTERY
WHICH IS FACTORY WIREO TO ALL
CONNECTORS. NO EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS
ARE REQUIREO.
Fig. 35-.Connections for 467A KTU (Low-Voltage
Monitor Circuit).
Page 56
RCN AND TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT FOR JACKS
CONNECTI NG BLOCK
LAMP
~
I
L
r--u(
JI
J2
6A-E
112A-E
5A-E
I IIA-E
J4
J6
I
I J3
I J5
I ISA-E 24A-E J 3OA-E 36A_E I
I 17A-E I 23A-E I 29A-E L35A-E
SHOWN FOR
REF ERENCE
4
2
J7
J8
42A-E
6A-E
6A-E
12A-E
4IA-E
5A-E
5A-E
IIA-E
JII
JI2
I JI3
I 18A-E
J
17A-E
I JI5
I 30A-E
36A-E
23A-E 1 29A-E
35A-E
JI4
24A-E
I
JI6
I
JI7
I
JI8
42A-E
48A-E
4IA-E
I 47A-E
ON~
TO
400TYPE
KTU
r--<
RCN AND TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT FOR JACKS
CONNECTI NG BLOCK
20 MAX
LAMPS
~
2
I
RC
'----L
LG
JI
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
SHOWN FOR
REFERENeE
4
J8
JII
JI2
JI3
JI4
JI6
JI5
JI7
JI8
12G
12A-E
ISG
24G
300
36G
42G
6G
6G
12G
ISG
24G
300
36G
42G
48G
SA-E
18A-E
24A-E
3OA-E
36A-E
42A~E
6A
6A-E
12A-E
18A-E
24A-E
30A-E
36A-E
42A-E
48A-E
5A-E
IIA-E
17A-£
23A-E
29A-E
3SA-E
4IA-E
SA-E
5A-E
IIA-E
17A-E
23A-E
29A-E
35A-E
4IA-E
47A-E
6G
I
TO KEY
TEL SET
[b
ON~
~
I) 469A
TO
8
KTU
\
4-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
~
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
----
~~
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CONN BLOCK I
A
B
0
0
I
o
0
0
G
0 :0
H
0
LG
L
2
STRAP
ADDED
LG 23
TO 20
ADDITIONAL
LAMPS
0
0
TYPICAL EXAMPLE, INSTALLER WIRING
SHCNING 400-TYPE KTU IN J3 AND 469A
KTU IN J4
iii
II>
Fig. 36-Konnections for 469A KTU (Lamp Extender Circuit).
.f>
II>
Q
(5
z
VI
'l
CD
.CD
VI
.....
SECTION 518-215-405
ROW AND TERMINAL ASSIGII'IENT Filii JAIlIS
CONNECTIND BLOCK
2
1
Jl
TICO)
10
RICO)
20
~ 8G
,....-- lA-E
2A-E
3A-£
TO CD LINE(
'Aim'"
UNRESTRICTED
TELEPIllNE
SET
J2
J4
J5
JS
J7
J3
Jll
70
laG
190 250 310 37G
10
lG
00
146 2GO 2BG 32G 38G ~
29
12G 100 24G 8GG 38G 42G ~
BG
7A-E 13A-E 19A-E 25A-E 31A-E 37A-E lA-E lA-E
9A-E 14A-E 20A-E 28A-E 32A-E SGA-E 2A-E 2A-E
9A-E 15A-E 21A-E 21A-E 33A-E 39A-E 3A-E 3A-E
4
J12 J13
70
laG
00
146
12G 100
7A-E 13A-E
I3A-E 14A-E
I3A-E lSA-E
J14
1$0
J15
JIB
25G 31G
2DG 28G 320
246 300 3BG
19A-E 2SA-E 31A-E
OA-E I!8A-E 32A-E
lA-E 7A-E 3A-E
J17
370
3SG
J18
4aG
446
42G 400
37A-E 43A-£
ISA-E I4A-E
9A-E ISA-E
rrr1
Jl
~'G
I RICO) 2G
RG
RC
T
R
A
AI
LG
L
5G
00
lA-E
2A-E
3A-E
4A-E
SA-E
BA-£
J2
7G
8G
llG
12G
7A-E
8A-E
9A-E
lOA-E
lIA-E
12A-E
ROW AND TERfUNAL ASSIGNlfENT FOR JACKS
CONNECTING BLOCK
2
J3
J4
J5
laG
196 25G
14G 2DG 2BG
170 23G 29G
100 246 3GB
13A-E 19A-E 25A-E
14A-E 20A-E 28A-E
15A-E 21A-E 27A-E
lBA-E 22A-£ 2!lA-E
17A-E 23A-£ 29A-E
19A-E 24A"E 30A-E
JB
31G
32G
35G
36G
31A-E
32A-E
33A-E
34A-E
35A-E
36A-E
4
J7
JB
Jl1
J12 J13 J14 J15 JIB
J17
370
370
lG
lG
7G
136 19G 25G 31G
38G 2G
20
8G
146 20G 2BG 320
380
41G 50
5G
llG
170 23G 29G 35G 41G
42G
G
120
100 240 300 300 429
BG
lA-E 7A-E 13A-E 19A-E 25A-E 31A-E 37A-E
37A-E lA-E
38A-E 2A-E 2A-E 8A-E 14A-E OA-E ~A-E 32A-E I18A-E
39A-E 3A-E 3A-E 9A-E lSA-£ lA-E 7A-E 3A-£ 9A-E
4OA-E A-E
4A-E 10A-E lBA-E 22A-E 29A-E 34A-E 4OA-E
41A-E SA-E SA-E l1A-E 17A-E 23A-E 29A-E 35A-E 41A-E
42A-E A-E BA-E 12A-E 19A-E 24A-E 30A-E 36A-E 42A-E
J18
43G
440
470
400
43A-E
4A-E
SA-E
4BA-£
47A-E
49A-£
Fig. 37-Konnections for 471A KTU (Battery Reversal Toll Restriction Circuit).
Page 58
SHawN FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
--<
~
~
--<
9
14]
1 TO
12 471A
KTU
13
16
,..... ,.--
f=
RESTRICTED
TELEPHONE
SET-
J3
S/lOWN FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
14
9
P
P
P
f-<
TO
12 40013 TYPE
lB KTU
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-405
NOTES,
1. THE 479A KTU IS AN B-INCH BOARD ANO
MOUNTS IN J1 AND J2. J11 ANO J12
OR J13 ANO J14.
2. REFER TO SECTION 518-215-401 FOR
INFOR~TION ON PLACEMENT OF OPTI ON
PLUGS ON 479A KTU AND 107A ANO
1078 CIRCUIT MOOUlES.
(NOTE 1)
ROW ANO TER~INAl
ASSIGN. FOR JACKS
CONNECTING 8l0CK
1
4
J1
T(CO}
TO CO (
lINE
R(CO)
A
T
R
A(U}
J11
J13
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
1G
1G
13G
14
2G
2G
14G
9
SG
SG
18G
1
1A-E
1A-E
13A-E
12
2A-E
2A-E
14A-E
13
3A-E
3A-E
15A-E
1S
TO 479A
KTU
(NOTE 2)
I
UNRESTRICTED
TELEPHONE
SET
RESTRICTED
TELEPHONE
SET
f-
rr-
ROW AND
TER~INAl ASSIG~ENT
SHOWN FOR
RE FERENCE
ONlY
FOR JACKS
CONNECTING BLOCK
1
1G
2G
5G
RC
G
T
1 -E
R
2A-E
3A-E
A1
4A5A-E
l
6A-E
-.:..J-
2
7G
8G
11G
1
7A-E
BA-E
A-E
1 -E
11A-E
12A-E
J3
13G
14G
17G
18G
13A14A-E
1 A-E
1 A-E
17A-E
18A-E
J4
J5
JS
J7
J8
19G
25G
31G
37G
IG
20
26G
G 3 G 2G
2$
29G
35G
41G
5G
4G
OG
3S
42G
SG
1 A-E
A-E 31A-E 37A-E 1A-E
20A-E 28A-E 32A-E 3BA-E 2A-E
21 -E 7A-E 33A-E 39A-E 3A-E
A-E
A-E 34 -E 40A-E 4A-E
23A-E 29A-E 35A-E 41A-E 5A-E
24A-E 30A-E 3SA-E 42A-E SA-E
J11
1G
2G
5G
1A-E
2A-E
3A-E
4A-E
5A-E
SA-E
J12
7G
8G
11G
12G
7A-E
8A-E
9A-E
10A-E
11 -E
12A-E
J13
13G
14G
17G
18G
13A-E
14A-E
15A-E
1SA-E
17A-E
18A-E
J14
19G
20G
23G
24G
19A-E
20A-E
21A-E
22A-E
23A-E
24A-E
J15
25G
2
29G
30G
2 A-E
2SA-E
27A-E
28A-E
29A-E
30A-E
J16
J17
J18
31G
43G
37G
32G
38G
44G
35G
41G
47G
42G
3SG
48G
31A-E 7A-E 3A-E
A-E 8A-E 4A-E
33A-E 9A-E 5A-E
34A-E 40A-E 4SA-E
5A-E 1A-E 7A-E
36A-E 2A-E 8A-E
-< 14
9
1
12
K ~~
-<
TO
~~~E
KTU
-<
Fig. 38-.Connections for 479A KTU (Rotary Dial Toll Restriction).
Page 59
SECTION 518-215-405
OPTION STRAPPING ON 421A KTU OPTION BLOCK
FEATURE
OPTION
PRESET
CONFERENCE
STRAP
TERMINALS
I TO 2
7 TO 8
W
~
TO 425A(MDI OR B KTU .
SELECTED STATIONS [ L
·"L" LEAD ,~
(NOTE II
J
TO 4 25A(MDIOR BKTU"L"LEAD
OF CODE ASSIGNED TO PRESET
CONFERENCE
L
1-1:..
1-1:..
TO L AMP (ASSOCIATED WITH DIAL
INTER COM) AT SELECTED STATION
407- OR 424TYPE KTU
B34
SIGN~~~~~L
BLOCK 2
.-
50B-D
ROW AND
TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT
LEAD COLOR
LEAD BINDER
BLOCK
BINDER
(NOTE 41
I
2
4
J7
J8
JII
JI3
BL
G
I
BL-W
JII
SHO WN
FOR
REFERENeE
ONLY
G-W
JI3
37G
IG
IG
136
W-BL
W-BL
-------J
>-----J
>-----J
>-----J
>-----J
>-----J
>-----J
>-----J
>-----J
7
>-----,
4
>-----J
3
18
15
17
5
6
10
II
20
21
22
23
25
CONDUCTOR BINDER
(SEE NOTEI
(W-Bl)
G
(Bl-W)
G
31
38
35
(O-Y)
BL-W
(Y-G)
BL-W
(G-Y)
BL-W
(Y-BR)
Bl-W
(BR-Y)
Bl-W
(Y-5 )
Bl-W
(5-Y)
BL-W
37
39
24
26
28
32
29
33
-
I
~
(W-O)
G
(O-W)
G
(G-W)
G
-
4
(W-BR)
G
~
6
(BR-W)
G
-
(W-S)
G
(S-w)
G
3
~
-L
-
9
10
~
~
~
14
-
~
-----'!...-
17
~
~
-
(BK-BLl
G-W
(Bl-BK)
6-W
(BK-O)
G-W
-
20
~
22
23
(O-BK)
6-W
-
(BK-G)
G-W
~
(G-BK)
G-W
~
(BK-BR)
G-W
~
~
(BR-BK)
G-W
(BK-S)
G-W
(S-BK)
G-W
(Y-BL)
G-W
(BL-Y)
G-W
(Y-O)
G-W
-
(O-Y)
G-W
-
(Y-G)
G-W
~
29
~
~
~
32
33
~
~
(G-Y)
G-W
(Y-BR)
G-W
(BR-Y)
G-W
(Y-5)
G-W
~
(S-Y)
G-W
-
30
34
~J
-
36
~
-
PIN
NO.
27
~
~
~
-
66B4-25 COHN BlK B
\
UPPER
CONN
(A)
NOTE,
CABLE PROY IDEO rOR APPARATUS MOUNTI NGS
DOES NOT CONTAIN All CONDUCTOR COLORS or
A NORMAL COLOR CODE.
~
-
37
39
40
~
=
41
Fig. 40-Connections from 69E or 69F Apparatus Mounting to External Connecting Blocks
Page 61
SECTION 518-215-405
I
CONN BLK 3
(66R3)
IN KSU
ABC
0
E f
0---0---<>---0-
SHOWN fOR
1
REfERENCE
CONN
ONLY
A!. B
A GRO
140
EXTERNAL 66B4-25
CONN BLK
BLK A
10
A BAT.
14E
B GRO
*
II
16
12
15
B BAT.
12E
ST
9f
Mel
100
±IOSV
II E
RN
9C
13
17
14
5
15
10
16
17
II
16
2
19
7
TO KTUS
AS
REQUIRED
LW
IE
Lf
10
±IOV
17f
LG
170
20
41ft
RG
110
42f
* CONNECT
TO ANY UNUSED AI
CONN BLK I. 2 OR 4
t
t
+
TERMINAL ON
RUN STRAP TO 41A ON CONN BLK B
RUN STRAP TO 42A ON CONN BlK B
Fig. 41-Power Supply Connections for 69E or F
Apparatus Mounting
Page 62
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-405
NOTES,
I. THE 4000 KTU IS FACTORY WIRED FOR 10-SECOND TIME-OUT AND 7-SECOND TIMEOUT
RESPECTIVELY PLUS WINDING-HOLD lAMP; AND WAND S WIRING OPTIONS.
Z. DIODE MATRIX MUST BE fURNISHED LOCALLY.
3. FOR 30 SECOND TIME-OUT CYCLE, REMOVE Z OPTION STRAP &TWEEN TERMINALS I AND 2.
4. TO PROVIDE TIME-OUT CYCLES OF RING-UP CIRCUITS FROM 3.4 TO 7.5 SECONDS REPLACE
Z OPTION STRAP WITH A KS-13490,ll OR EQUIVALENT (I WATT) RESISTOR. USE ONE
RESISTOR lEAD AS A STRAP BETWEEN TERMINALS I AND 2 AND CONNECT THE OTHER lEAD
TO TERMINAL 3. USE TABLE BELOW FOR RESI STOR VALUE REQUIRED FOR DESIRED TIME-OUT
INTERVAL.
TIME IN
SEC FROM
10 SEC TO:
RESI STOR
MEGOHM
7.5
EFFECT ON DELAYED
HOLD RELEASE OPT IONS
ZC
ZJ
NONE
1.2
6.7
.75
5.0
.39
3.4
.20
NOT
RECOMMENDED
(NOTE 5)
NONE
IF THE TIME-OUT CYCLE IS REDUCED IN CONJUNCTION
WITH ZC OR ZJ OPTION, CONNECT THE RESISTOR AND
CAPAC I TOR AS SHOWN BELOW:
TERMINALS ON KTU OPTION BLOCK
3
4
I
2
so~>-~ t..J:~
..
5. WHEN Z OPT ION IS PROV IDEO WITH ZC OR ZJ OPTI ONS,
REMOVE THE Z STRAP AND USE THE CAPACITOR lEAD AS
A STRAP BETWEEN TERMINALS I AND 2.
6. WHEN THE ZC OPTI ON I S USED DUE TO THE DELAYED
RELEASE OF THE HOLDING BRIDGE, SOME TRANSMISSION
lOSS IS ENCOUNTERED FOR .APPROXIMATElY I SECOND
WHEN A STATION REENTERS A HELD CALL.
7. ZD OPT ION I S REPLACED BY ZJ OPTI ON, HOWEVER IT IS
NOT NECESSARY TO UPDATE CIRCUITS PREVIOUSLY MODIFIED
WITH OPTION ZD.
S.
OPT I ON MAY BE USED IN lOCAllY ENG I NEERED OR
RELAY COMMON AUDIBLE ARRANGEMENTS.
[
®! ..
RI
:::
BI
CONN 6
CONN A
BlK B
BlK A
~
TO CO [
OR PBX
~
LINE
l'
R
TO KEY
TEL SET
TO
AUD
SIG
69E OR F APP MTG
66B4-25 CONN BlKS
®
RC
TO DIODE[
MATRIX
RG
(NOTE 2)
__
~
SOLDER
A
AI
~~
IA
IF
2A
2F
SHOWN FOR
REFER ENCE
ONLY
14
6A
6F
12
7A
7F
13
SA
8F
16
12B-E
TO
400-TYPE
KTU
41F
41B
9A
5A
426
OPTION STRAPPING ON 400-TYPE KTU OPTION BLOCK (NOTE 8)
FEATURES
OPTION
STRAP TERMINALS
4000 (NOTE I)
AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
VISUAL HOLD
CIRCU IT
TIME-OUT CONTROL
(NOTES 3 AND 4)
DELAYED
HOLD RELEASE
400A, B .... NO C
5 TO 6
INTERRUPTED RING
W
5 TO 8
STEADY RING
T
6 TO 8
4 TO 6
COMMON WITH DIODE MATRIX CONTROL
S
5 TO 8
5 TO 6
LAMP WINK
Y
7 TO 10
8 TO 9
lAMP STEADY
X
7 TO 9
7 TO 9
NO~E •
I TO 2
I TO~_
SHORT TI ME DELAY (APPROXIMATELY 10 SEC)
lONG TIME DELAY (APPROXIMATELY 30 SEC)
RELEASE or
HOLD I NG BR I DGE
FROM CO OR PBX
BY LINE CURRENT
OPENS GREATER
THAN
500 MilliSECONDS WHEN ASSOCIATED WITH NO. lESS
HAVING RESWITCH CAPABILITY
(USE 5 UF CAPACITOR,
ZC
60lA OR EQUIVALENT) t (USE 1.62 UF CAPACITOR,
(NOTES)
70 I G OR EQU I VALENT)
2 TO 3
50 MilLISECONDS WHEN ASSOCIATED WITH NO.5 X-BAR
CENTREX HAVING AUTOMATIC PERMANENT SIGNAL RELEASE
(USE 0.5 UF CAPACITOR, 575B OR EQUIVALENT)
t (USE 0.162 UF CAPACITOR OR EQUIVALENT)
2 TO 3
*
*
*
t
ZJ
NOTE 7)
WHEN USED WITH Z OPTION
WHEN USED WITH lONG TIME
Fig. 42-Connections from 400A, B, C, or D KTU (CO/PBX Line Circuit) in 69E or F Apparatus Mounting to
External Connection Blocks
Page 63
SECTION 518-215-405
69E OR F APP MTG
CONN A
CONN B
SHO WN FOR
REF ERENCE
ONLY
6684-25 CONN BLKS
TO CO
OR PBX
LINE
TO DIODE
MATRIX
(NOTE)
TO KEY
TEL SET
Cc
®l, . ~.
R1
B1
TOP VIEW OF OPTION BLOCK WITH HANDLE TOWARD
USER. OPTION SYMBOLS SHOWN CONNECTED
TO TERMINALS INDICATE FACTORY PROVIDED OPTIONS.
E2
•
® E3
02
C4
•
•
R.
000
0
SPARE 3
---0
o
0
0
6
SPARE 4
---0
000
0
0
SPARE 2
9
~
~
SPARE I
---0
0
[ ; -<13
R
:J
R
.---<16
0
.---
SIG
*
SA
~~21
IA
2A
41B
IF
2F
41F
14
4A
12B-E
4F
19
3A
42B
3F
42F
9
~O
SIGNAL KEY MAY BE A CONVERTED PI CKUP KEY OR ANY EXTERNAL NONLOCK I NG KEY.
USE CONTINUOUS METHOD OF STRAPPING.
OPTION STRAPPING ON 418A KTU OPTION BLOCK
fEATURES
TWO-WAY
AUTOMAT I C
AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
AUDIBLE
RING-BACK
ONE-WAY
AUTOMATIC,
ONE-WAY,
MANUAL
(NOTE I)
STRAP TERMINALs
OPT I ON
t
INTERRUPTED RI NG
W
2 TO 3 TO 4
STEADY RING
T
IT02T04t
COMMON WITH D lODE
MATR I X CONTROL
S
2 TO 3 TO 4 t
INTERRUPTED RI NG
R
3 TO 4
STEADY RING
COMMON WITH DIODE
MATRIX CONTROL
Z
I TO 4
K
3 TO 4
TWO-WAY MANUAL (NOTE 2)
Y
TWO-WAY AUTOMAT I C
Q
9 TO 10, 5 TO 7 TO 8t
ONE-WAY AUTOMATIC,
ONE-WAY MANUAL
H
5
TWO-WAY MANUAL
M
9 TO 10
TO 7, 9 TO 10
Fig. 50-Connections from 418A KTU (Short Range, DC Signaling, Private Line Circuit) in 69E or F Apparatus
Mounting to External Connecting Blocks
Page 70
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-405
SHOWN FOR
66B4-25
REFERENCE
CONN BlKS
ONLY
BlK A BlK B
T
TO SIMILAR TYPE [ T
14
IA
IF
TIE LINE CIRCUIT
R
2F
2A
AT OISTANT END .---L.~:=----l_.!::..._r--'
TO KEY [
TEL SET
T
R
A
AI
lG
l
AUD SIG
TO
6A
7A
BA
12B-E
41B
9A
6F
7F
SF
T
R
A
12
13
16
TO
419A KTU
41F
9F
C~RGc===~:===~~~====~~t==t~~~~~~~
~t
.~ ••_ _ _ _ _ __
0
(R,T,W)
DIODE
~
@
MAT:'~ (-".C~A_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _---l
OPTION STRAPPING ON 419A KTU OPTION BLOCK
rEATURES
AUD I BlE
SIGNALS
UNDER
CONTROL or
TI ME-OUT
C I RCU I T
(B RELAY)
UNDER
CONTROL or
R RELAY
OPT I ON
STRAP
TERM I NAlS
INTERRUPTED
RING
W
6 TO 8
STEADY RING
T
5 TO 6
COMMON WI TH
DIODE MATRIX
CONTROL
S
6 TO 8
STEADY RING
R
COMMON WITH
DIODE MATRIX
CONTROL
N
3 TO 5
6 SECONDS
X
17 SECONDS
Z
7 TO 10
25 SECONDS
WITHOUT
X OR Z
REMOVE
X OR Z
STRAPS
M
I TO 2
T I ME-OUT
AUDIBLE R I NGBACK TONE
9 TO 10
Fig, 51-Connections from 419A KTU (Automatic Signaling, Ringdown Private Line Circuit) in 69E or F
Apparatus Mounting to External Connecting Blocks
Page 71
SECTION 518-215-405
69E OR •
APP MTG
CONN A CONN B
TO OF.-ffiEMISE
TELEPHONE
SET
SHOWN 'OR
RE.ERENCE
ONLY
66B4-25
CONN BLKS
BLK B
BLKA
6.
SA
(O-X9)
12
[~TJQ~~=======================E~~jt~==~======~
Jl
13
7A
J 7F
1-----*lt:(~O-iX9~)==========~~~~~==3~~:
I
I
TTG
---_.
LJ
I
I
I
400J
IA
If
2A
SA
2.
5A
Sf
(I
9A
42B
9.
(8
42.
TTG
)
(SEE NOTE)
STRAP
~
S.
TO 420A KTU
(ONE PER STA CODE)
I
~---------I
I
CONN
BLOCK 2
I
~--r-'1·5A'-'
I
I
I
I
:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
[
[
I
I
I
OPT I ON STRAPPI NG ON 420A KTU OPT I ON BLOCK
CONN
BLOCK 2
19.
35B
16G
19G
350
17A
20A
35E
I7B
[ R
[
[~
[
[
.EATURE
160
190
34E
16E
19E
34G
16F
20B
35G
17C
20C
36B
170
200
360
17E
20E
3GE
AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
*
D.
TO ASSIGNED STATION
DIAL
INTERCOM (ANY DIGIT MAY BE
ASS I GNED TO AN
ffiEM I SE
STATION )
a..
t
OPTION
STRAP TERMINALS
OR.c.._'-,-IO_V+-::;----j I TO 4, 7 TO 8
BU
187'V=,
!-,A:-:C'-7
",Z:,:Z=ER;:",-::t7.
DC BUZZER, 24V DC
K
2 TO 4, 7 TO 8
RINGER, 'IOSV STEADY
M
WHEN THE INTERCOM SYSTEM IS
EQU I PPED WITH "TOUCH-TONE·,
PROVIDE A 400J DIODE 'OR
EACH 420A KTU INSTALLED.
PROCURE AND INSTALL DIODE
LOCALLY
NOTE:
WHEN MORE THAN ONE 420A
KTU I S USED, THE TTG
CONNECTI ONS MUST BE
MULTI PLED USING A
CONT I NUOUS STRAP.
EXAMPLE:
'----flll---'
5.
17.
20.
36G
Fig. 52-.Connections from 420A KTU (Dial Intercom, long line Circuit) in 69E or F Apparatus Mounting to
External Connecting Blocks.
Page 72
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-405
6684-2S
CONN 8LKS
8LK A
14
9
21A
22A
2310
29A
30A
24A
42C
21F
22F
23F
29F
30F
24F
42E
20
21
22
35
36
23
3410
33A
ZSA
3110
34F
33F
2SF
31F
32F
26F
42D
26
24
2S
37
IA
2A
TO DIODE MATRIX
RC Ol
9A
TO STA ~8-81 Ol
6A
RINGER R-RI Ol
7A
RG
8A
STRAP
428
.. [
, ""
TO CO OR
Pax LINE
~T (2)
R (2)
RC (2)
TO DIODE MATRIX l8-81(2)
~?N~l=
R-RI(2)
STRAP
3RD LINE
[
TO CO OR (T (3)
P8X LINE R (3)
::~~:3)
TO DIODE MATRIX
TO STA (
RINGER R-RI(3)
RG
8LK 8
IF
2F
9F
6F
7F
8F
42F
TO CO OR (T Ol
P8X LINE
R (I)
m "" [
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
3210
2610
420
12
13
16
TO
42110 KTU
39
27
STRAPS
OPTION STRAPPING ON 42110 KTU OPTION BLOCK
FEATURE
OPTION
GENERAL
PURPOSE
W
STRAP
TERMINALS
I TO 2
S TO 6
7 TO 8
Fig. 53-Connections from 421A KTU (Power Failure Transfer Circuit) in 69E or F Apparatus Mounting to
External Connecting Blocks
Page 73
SECTION 518-215-405
69E OR 69F
APP MTG
Pro 427B
SERIES 4 OR
427C KTU
E1.
®
B GRD
<
SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY
<-
\
TABLE FOR SELECTING WIRING ASSOCIATED WITH DIAL CODES
CONNECT LEADS WITH. FOR DESIRED STATION COOE (NOTE I)
I
Z
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
a
XI X2 X3 X4 X5 XI X7 X8 X9
CoiiN
xo
~
B
BLOCK
B
(NOTE I)
f
®
(NOTE 2)<
I
CONN
A
BLOCK
A
CONN
---~ B21
CONN
r~
~~TE 3-~
TO
SIGNAL
6A
6F
29A
29F
30A
30F
31A
31F
32A
32F
42,11
42F
42B
42E
8'\
8F
8A
8F
8B
8E
8C
80
:> "YI
YI
Y2
Y2
~
Y3
Y3
-
Y4
Y4
25F
Y5
..!!!!.....
28A
Y5
23A
23F
...o
LTZ*
~
LT2*
26A
26F
CG
CG
o
RH
34A
34F
24A
24F
I-
,."~
.
lI
~
0:
o
I
..
45H
~
~
39F
-
(NOTE 7)
I-
~
5HOWN FOR
REF ERENCE
ONL Y
~
~
12
35
.,
36
37
c
.
-< 39
*..'"
f-<
~
r-<
16
f-<
25
~
r-<
r-<
...z
......
N
...
...
0
22
27
26
23
NOTES:
I.
®
®
WITH
II
TOUCH-TONE-
WITHOUT "roUCH-TONE'
2. USE CONTINUOUS METHOD OF STRAPPING ON CONNECTING
3. PROVIDE SEPARATE SIGNAL KEY FOR EACH STATION CODE
4. PROVIDE A SEPARATE 421A KTU FOR EACH STATION CODE
G. IF MORE THAN ONE 421A KTU IS USED FOR 055, CONNECT
Pro 427B
SEll ES 4 OR
4E£.K~
B21
BLOCKS FOR B GROUND.
TO BE SELECTED.
TO BE SELECTED.
AS SHOWN:
1;:'1"1,t, 1~ 1 !::~.~ 1>-<
;:.1
37
l®
~----~
~
26
/0
[CONN
;]
2ND
421A KTU
T
37
H-7
26
>-<
37
~
§]
PART OF
407- OR
/O
LAST
421\ KTU
CONN
26
A
B21
I~t-T~~
~--~
""B
6. SELECT CODE AND CONNECT LEADS FOR SELECTED COD[ AS SHOWN IN VERTICAL COLUIIN.
7. A 40o.J DIODE (PROCURE LOCALLY) MUST BE CONNECTED AS SHOWN BElOW BETWEEN THE
LK AND RH TERMINALS OF THE 407- OR 424-TYPE KTU WHEN PROVIDING DIAL TONE.
LK
*
~
RH
424 - TYPE KTU ONLY
Fig. 54-t<:onnections from 421A KTU (DSS Feature of Dial Intercom) in 69E or F Apparatus Mounting to
External Connecting Blocks.
Page 74
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-405
6SE OR F
APP MTG
CONN
A
I
CO/PBX
LINE
CIRCUIT
RC
CO/PBX
LINE
CIRCUIT
I
401-, 407-,
OR 424TYPE KTU
I~
RINGER
I~
COI'I'ION
AUOIBLE
I~
SIGNAL
LS ,-,.
~
R(STA)
~
T
RG
R( )
RG
I
CONN
B
66B4-25
CONN. BLKS.
BLK A BLK B
2A
2F
7A
7F
lA
6A
5A
--<
--< 13
TO
lF
I
34A
31A
SHO WN FOR
REF ERENCE
ONL Y
34F
I
I
l'
12
6F
31F
'1---<
421A
KTU
(NOTE
2)
26
37
5F
8-81
R-Rl
B-Bl
R-Rl
BZl
BZ
BL
NOTES,
1. WIRE KEY TElSET FOR BUSY LAMP FE ATURE.
REFER TO 502 OIVISION FOR SET IN VOLVEO.
2. STRAP TERMINALS 1 ANO 2 ON 421A KTU
OPTION BLOCK.
3. INSTALL KS-21765, Ll OIOOE OR
EQUIVALENT. OBTAIN LOCALLY.
KEY TELSET
(NOTES 1
ANO 3)
Fig. 55-.Connections from 421A KTU (Automatic Signal Suppression) in 69E or F Apparatus Mounting to
External Connecting Blocks.
Page 75
SECTION 518-215-405
CONN
BLOCK 2
4SB
YI
Y2
Y3
Y4
YS
4SG
46B
46G
47B
49C
430
43f
6EE INSET
AI
'I
't
A
TO
PI CKUP
KEYS
*
"Il
LT I
LT2
41G
41E
KEY TEL SET
SWITCH
HOOK
CONNECT IN
SIMILAR
MANNER AS
REQU I REO
STA
STA
STA
STA
STA
STA
STA
STA
STA
STA
I
2
3
4
S
6
7
8
9
o
BR
*t
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
XI
X2
X3
X4
XS
X6
X7
X8
X9
XO
"
LTI,
LT2
BL
BL
BL
BL
BL
BL
BL
BL
BL
BL
8L
8L
r
69E OR f
APP MTG
CONN A CONN B
66B4-2S
CONN BLKS
BLK A BLKB
9A
9f
23A
23f
33A
33f
26A
26f
3f
3A
2A
2f
Sf
SA
29A
29f
IA
If
35A
24A
2SA
34A
21A
22A
36A
3Sf
24f
2Sf
34f
21f
22f
36f
39A
37A
40A
39f
37f
40f
SHOWNfOR
REfE RENCE
ONLY
=3
>-----<
~
fOR UN I TS 422B KTU
fOR TENS 422B KTU
fOR CONNECTION Of DIODE IN THE "A" LEAD, USE THE
STATI ON BUSY OPTION AS SHOIiN IN THE CONNECT ION
SECTION Of TYPE SET USED.
PROVIDE A SEPARATE 4228 KTU fOR THE UNITS GROUP
(1-0, SINGLE-DIGIT NOS.) AND fOR THE TENS GROUP
(XI-XO. TIIO-DIGIT NOS.)+
CONN
8l0CK A
CONN
alOCK 8
~
~
WHEN 424-TYPE
KTU IS
PROVIDED
1
WHEN 407-TYPE KTU
IS PROVIDED
OPTION STRAPPING ON 4228 KTU OPTION 8LOCK
fEATURE
STATION
BUSY TONE
OPT I ON
R
SO B-D
1------'
STRAP
TERMI NAlS
6 TO 8
~
CONNECT 422B KTU (UN ITS) TO L TI
AND CONNECT 422B KTU (TENS) TO
lT2 LEAD
,44IJ OR EQUIVALENT DIODE AS SHOIiN
Fig. 56-tConnections from 422A (MD) or 422B KTU (Dial Intercom, Station Busy Selector Circuit) in 69E or
F Apparatus Mounting to External Connecting Blocks.
Page 76
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-405
CONN BLK
2
IN KSU
248
240
CONN
BLK 2 IN
KSU OR
t
49E-G
17G
390
50G
*
50B
,~.[
BLK 3 IN
KSU
BYI
T
SS
LK
J
AT I
21G
21 E
21 A
21C
2A
6A
7A
2f
6f
7f
9
12
13
IA
IF
8A
8F
14
16
3A
3F
*
t
TO
423A
KTU
19
5F
16E-G
TO CONNECT ING BLOCK TERMINAL ASSOCIATED WI TH
MOUNTING FACILITY fOIl UNIT£ 422B KTU.
TO CONNECT IN' BLOCK TERMINAL ASSOCIATED WITH
MOUNTING FACILITY FOIl TENS 422B KTU.
WHEN ADDIN' THE 423A KTU TO A SYSTEM EQUI PPED FOR
'TOUCH-TONE' (426A AND 427B (SERIES 4) OR C KTUS).
A 400J DIODE MUST BE INSTALLED BETWEEN THE 'RH'
AND wLK w LEADS Of THE 407- OR 424-TYPE KTU.
REWIRE AS FOLLOWS,
REMOVE
TO 427B
(SERIES 4
OR
250
25F
(NOTE II
25H
26B
260
26F
26H
27B
270
27F
27H
28B
280
2BF
2BH
50F
IF THE SYSTEM IS EQUIPPED WITH DSS (421A KTU).
REWIRE 'RH' LEADS BY TERMINATING ONE LEAD TO
TERM I NAL 50f AND THE OTHER UAD TO A 183A2
ADAPTER INSTALLED OVER TERMINALS 50G AND 50H.
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
L8
L9
LO
LXI
LX2
LX3
LX4
LX5
LX6
LX7
LX8
LX9
LXO
22A
36A
39A
37A
40A
9A
38B
3BD
38E
44B-D
44E-G
370
49E-G
43E-G
43B-D
A27
AO
SA
38A
27A
2A
IA
AI
A33
A31
A9
AI4
B31
ALI
AL2
TC
BYI
A25
A26
A20
A21
A32
A8
A22
A24
23A
33A
26A
3A
FCI
FC2
FC3
LR
BR
01
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
A28
A23
A30
A29
A34
LA
46E-G
49B-D
37B
50B-D
's~~~CE/
ADO
24F.
24H
25B
LI
L2
66B4-25
CONN BLKS
8LK A
35A
24A
25A
34A
21A
3F
21F
BO
B20
SF
35F
26F
BI
B28
B27
A3B
B35
BI6
834
28A
29F
8F
40F
31F
4F
TO
425A
(MOl
OR B
KTU
(NOTE
31
B37
BI9
A39
A35
OPTION STRAPPING ON 423A KTU OPTION BLOCK
OPT ION
STRAP
TERMINALS
I TO 2
4 TO 6
DIAL TONE
STATION BUSY TONE
R
A I BL R I NGBACK
REQUIRES NO STRAPPING ON KTU
J
I
FEATURES
•
Fig. 57-.Connections from 423A KTU (Dial Intercom,
Audible Ringback, Dial and Busy Tone
Circuit) in 69E or F Apparatus Mounting to
External Connecting Blocks.
NOTES:
I. REMOVE FACTORY FURNISHED STRAPS FROM THESE
TERMINALS.
2. WHEN 407-TYPE KTU IS PROVIDED STRAP TO B GRD.
WHEN 424-TYPE KTU IS PROV IDEO STRAP TO TERMINAL
438-0 OF CONN BlK 2 IN THE KSU.
3. WHEN THE 425A (MOl OR B KTU IS INSTALLED IN A 69E OR 69F
APPARATUS MOUNTING, THE FOLLOWING LEADS MUST
BE INSULATED AND STORED: THE S- BK AND Y- BL
LEADS IN THE BL-W BINDER; THE BK-O, Y-O, BK-G.
AND BL - Y LEADS IN THE G- W BINDER.
Fig. 58-.Connections from 425A (MD) or 425B KTU
(Dial Intercom, Flashing Lamp Circuit) in
69E or F Apparatus Mounting to External
Connecting Blocks.
Page 77
SECTION 518-215-405
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
BI2
BI3
TO
B27 426A
CONNECTING
BLK 2 IN
KSU OR
~tr=~~i=~~d::==~B2B
IA35
*
KTU
f-------< A39
~B39
* FACILITY
TO CONNECTING BLOCK TERMINAL ASSOCIATED WITH MOUNTING
FOR 4278 (SERIES 4) OR C KTU, IF EXTERNAL
Fig. 59-Connections from 426A KTU (Part of
TOUCH-TONE Adapter Circuit) in 69E or F
Apparatus Mounting to External Connecting
Blocks
69E OR F
APP MTG
CONN A ICONN
66B4-25
CONN BLKS
BLK A
*
*
CONN
BlK 2 IN
KSU
~"[
BlK 2 IN
KSU
OR t
39E
46B-D
45E-G
45B-D
39B §
46E-G
478-0
48B-D
47E-G
*
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
BI9
B20
B21
B22
B24
B25
B26
A36
A37
B38
839
A39
A35
B28
827
CONNECT AS REQUIRED WHEN THE 11TH KEY (XYl
OR 12TH KEY (PPI IS USED.
REMOVE STRAP BETWEEN 39E AND 48B OF
CONNECTING 8LOCK 2. IF PROVIDED.
~
TO CONNECTING BLOCK TERMINAL ASSOCIATED
WITH MOUNTING FACILITY FOR 426A KTU, IF
EXTERNAL.
WHEN ADDING THE 4278 (SERIES 41
OR C KTU TO A SYSTEM
EQUIPPED
f~~~'R~'!t~A1o~g '!:~I~A~TJblF f~s~mTOF
39B. A 40DJ DIODE MUST ALSO BE INSTALLED
!~7B
BETWEEN THE "RH" AND "LK" LEADS OF THE
407- OR 424-TYPE KTU. INSTALL DIOOE AS FOLLOWS;
~:~IEK~~I
.!R'-'H,-_ _
¥-6~!R2 CO::LOCK 2
REMOVE
40A
408
ADD
ADO
SOE
SOF
IF THE SYSTEM IS EQUIPPED WITH DSS (421A KTUI
REWIRE "RH" LEAOS BY TERMINATING ONE LEAD
TO TERMINAL 50F AND THE OTHER LEAD TO A
183A2 ADAPTER INSTALLED OVER TERMINALS
SOG AND 50H.
11" WHEN ADDING THE 426A AND
4278 (SERIES 41 OR C KTUS
TO AN EXISTING SYSTEM EQUIPPED WITH A
420A KTU, A DIODE MUST BE INSTALLED IN
THE TTG LEAD CONNECTING TO THE 420A KTU.
SEE FIG. 52
Fig. 60-.Connections from 427B (Series 4) or C KTU (Part of TOUCH-TONE Adapter Circuit) in 69E or F
Apparatus Mounting to External Connecting Blocks.
Page 78
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-405
69E OR F
APP MTG
CONN A CONN B
400-TYPE [2
KTU liST OR 13
2ND LlNEI
16
RI
AI
T2
R2
TI OR T2
RI OR R2
AI OR A2
A2
ETI
TO EXCLUDED [
STATION
NO. I
ERI
EAI
AI
CAl
ro
""'~ [~
STATION
(SEE NOTEI
El
lG
AI
ET2
TO EXCLUDED [
STATION
NO.2
NOTE:
ER2
EA2
AI
~S" LEAD CAN ONLY MULTIPLE TO
OTHER 428A KTUS CONTROLlED BY
THE SAME STATION.
II TO CONNECTING BLOCK TERMINAL
ASSOCIATED WITH MOUNTING FACILITY
FOR 400- TYPE KTU.
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
6684-2S
CONN BLKS
ILK A
ILK I
IA
IF
2A
2F
3A
3F
21A
21F
22F
22A
23F
23A
SA
SF
7A
7F
IA
IF
121-E
4A
4F
SA
SF
24F
24A
9A
9F
411
41F
12&£
29F
29A
30F
30A
31A
31F
12&£
14
9
0
20
21
22
12
13
16
19
I
23
8
TO
428A
KTU
35
36
37
Fig, 61-.Connections from 428A KTU (Multiline Exclusion Circuit) in 69E or F Apparatus Mounting to External
Connecting Blocks.
"C' ""
TEL
AI2 A(21
(~LOI
I AND
21
L II
L02 L(21
MESSAGE(~
Pe2
REGISTER,
IF PROVIDED
430A [
12
0
KTU
19
16
400-TYPE
KTU(lINE
CKT I OR21
C
8
16
FL II OR 21
66B4-25
CONN BlKS
BlK A
BlK B
6A
6F
9F
9A
7F
7A
29A
29F
22A
23A
22F
23F
3A
5A
3F
5F
2A
IA
21A
4A
2F
IF
21F
4F
12
I
13
35
H~~
0
TO TEL SET
lTi OR lT2
ADIORA02
LII
I
lI2
A02
NOTES:
I. FOR PRIORITY HOLD, THE A AND l
LEADS FROM EACH TEL SET
CONNECT THROUGH THE 429A (MOl
OR S KTU TO THE 400-TYPE KTU.
2. FOR I HOLD, THE A AND l LEADS
FROM THE TEL SET SELECTED FOR
I HOLD CONNECT THROUGH THE
429A (MOl OR B KTU TO THE 400- TYPE
KTU. THE A AND l lEADS FROM THE
OTHER TEL SETS CONNECT DIRECTLY
TO THE 400-TYPE KTU.
3. THE 429A (MOl OR B KTU WI I I PROVIDE
TO
SUPPLEMENTARY HOLD FOR TWO
429A
CO OR P8X LINE CIRCUITS. EACH
(MDIORB HOLD CIRCUIT MAY BE ASSIGNED
AS PRIORITY OR I HOLD.
KTU
(NOTE 31
II TO CONNECTING BLOCK TERMINAL
ASSOCIATED WITH MOUNTING
FACiliTY FOR 430A OR 400- TYPE
KTUS.
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
14
20
19
Fig, 62-Connections from 429A (MD) or 429B KTU (Supplementary Hold Detector Circuit) in 69E or F
Apparatus Mounting to External Connecting Blocks
Page 79
SECTION 518-215-405
NOTE:
429A(
(MO)
0
AND 8
KTU
I
6684-25
CONN 8LKS
BLK A
BLK B
6F
6A
3F
3A
4F
4A
SA
BF
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
n
:::..~--tjttjtj-----< ::~
LIMITATIONS OF THE
430A
KTU
ARE
AS
FOLLOWS:
A, FLI OR FL2 LEAD CAN SERVE A
MAXIMUM OF 50 LAMPS.
B. SP LEAD CAN CONNECT TO A
MAXIMUM OF 20 STATIONS.
* ASSOCIATED
TO CONNECTION BLOCK TERMINAL
WITH MOUNTING FACILITY FOR
429A (MO) AND B KTU.
Fig. 63-Connections from 430A KTU (Flutter Generator Circuit) in 69E or F Apparatus Mounting to External
Connecting Blocks
Page 80
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-405
69E 011 F
A" NTG
61B4-2S CO... BLKS
(NOTE II
CONN BLK 2
39E
4118-D
e
BLK A
4F
y
PP
24F
CG (NOTE 21
Y3
Y2
39F
YI
IF
RH (NOTE 31
39B
46E-G
47B-D
488-D
47E-G
I7G
21F
37A
45E-G
458-D
BLK 8
Y4
34F
36F
Y5
36F
RSI
26F
TTG (NOTE 41
30F
T
6F
R
20G
7F
SHOWN FOR
RE FERENCE
ONLY
-< 819
~
~
h
h
I-<
h
B23
B21
829
B30
BI4
826
B32
TO
440A
OR
478B
KTU
833
f---< 838
f---< B36
f---< BI2
~ 813
NOTES:
I. CONNECT AS REQU I RED WHEN THE II TH KEY (XY) OR 12TH KEY
(pp) IS USED.
2. REMOVE STRAP BEMEN 39E AND 488 OF CONNECT I NG BLOCK 2.
IF PROVIDED.
3. WHEN ADDING THE 440 OR 478B KTU TO A SYSTEM EQUIPPED
WITH DIAL TONE (423A KTUI. CONNECT THE 'RH' LEAD TO
TERMINAL SOF INSTEAD OF 398. A 400J DIODE _T ALSO BE
I NSTALLED BETWEEN THE "RH" AND "LK" LEADS OF THE 407OR 424-TYPE KTU. INSTALL DIODE AS FOLLOWS:
66R2 CONN BLK 2
SOF
IF THE SYSTEM IS EQUIPPED WITH DSS (421A nu) REWIRE
"RH" LEADS 8Y TERNINATING ONE LEAD TO TERNINAL 50F AND
THE OTHER LEAD TO A 183A2 ADAPTER INSTALLED OYER
TERNINAlS 50G ;'ND SOH.
4. WHEN ADDING THE 440A KTU TO AN EXISTING SYSTEN EQUIPPED
WITH A 420A KTU. A DIODE I«IST IE INSTAlLED IN THE TTG
LEAD CONNECTING TO THE 420A KTU. SEE FIG. COVERING
COIIHECTI OHS OF THE 420A KTU.
5. REQUIRED FOR 478B KTU ONLY.
Fig. 64-.Connections from 440A or 478B KTU
(TOUCH-TONE Adapter Circuit) in 69E or F
Apparatus Mounting to External Connecting
Blocks.
Page 81
SECTION 518-215-405
SELECT JACK ASSOCIATED WITH 400-TYPE KTU AND CONNECT AS SHOWN
CONNECTI NG BlOCK
I
JI
TIl'l OR 1'2)
RIl'l OR 1'2)
AII'I OR 1'2)
AI ,,, OR '2)
TO
PRIMCII'AL
TEL SETS
LGII'I OR 1'2)
AG(I'I OR 1'2)
L(pi OR 1'2)
/
RCIpl)
3
J4
J5
J6
J7
J8
JII
JI2
JI3
JI4
JI5
JI6
JI7
JI8
IB
7B
13B
19B
258
31B
37B
IB
IB
7B
13B
19B
25B
31B
37B
438
28
8B
14B
20B
268
328
38B
2B
2B
8B
14B
208
26B
32B
38B
44B
~
6B
12B
18B
24B
30B
368
42B
6B
6B
12B
18B
24B
30B
36B
42B
48B
!---
6G!!
12G!!
18G!!
24G!!
30G!!
36G1!
42G!!
6G!!
6G!!
12G!!
18G!!
24G!!
30G*
36G*
42G1!
48G!!
r--
IC
7C
13C
19C
25C
31C
37C
IC
IC
7C
13C
19C
25C
31C
37C
43C
44C
2C
8C
14C
20C
26C
32C
38C
2C
2C
8C
14C
20C
26C
32C
38C
3C
9C
ISC
21C
27C
33C
39C
3C
3C
9C
15C
21C
27C
33C
39C
45C
4C
10C
16C
22C
28C
34C
40C
4C
4C
10C
16C
22C
28C
34C
40C
46C
5C
IIC
17C
23C
29C
35C
41C
5C
5C
IIC
17C
23C
29C
35C
41C
47C
5G!!
1IGl!
17Gl!
23Gl!
29Gl!
35Gl!
41Gl!
5Gl!
5Gl!
IIGl!
17Gl!
23Gl!
29Gl!
35Gl!
41Gl!
47Gl!
6C
12C
18C
24C
30C
36C
42C
6C
6C
12C
18C
24C
30C
36C
42C
48C
r--
I
T
R
A
TO
ATTENDAIIT
STATION
2
J3
I
RCIP2)
;:: RG
J2
AI
LG
10
7D
130
190
250
310
370
10
10
70
130
190
250
310
370
430
20
80
140
ZOO
260
320
380
20
20
80
140
200
260
320
380
440
30
90
150
210
270
330
390
3D
30
90
150
210
270
330
390
450
40
100
160
220
280
340
400
40
40
100
160
220
280
340
400
460
50
110
170
230
290
350
410
50
50
110
170
230
290
350
410
470
I,(ATI )
LIAT2)
At
"
MOTES.
I. 448A KTU CONTA INS TWO CI RCU ITS.
2. PLACE STRAP ON 400-TYPE KTUS AS fOLLOWS.
• 4008 AND C - STRAP TERMINAL 3 TO 6
• 4000 - STRAP TERNINAL 4 TO 8
• 400G - CONNECT TERMINAL CI TO C3
3. TO 400-TVPE KTU ASSOCIATED WITH FIRST CIRCUIT OF 44BA KTU.
4. TO 400-TYPE KTU ASSOCIATED WITH SECONO CIRCUIT OF 44BA KTU.
*
USE I B3A2 ADAPTER TO MULTIPLE LEADS
I
TO r I RST AND SECOND PR I NC I PAL TEL SETS IF COMMON AUD 18LE I S TO BE USED
AND RINGER I S NOT TO BE CUT OFF.
t TO 449A KTU OR TURN KEY If IMMEDIATE RINGER TRANSfER IS REQUIRED.
OPTI ON STRAPP I NG ON 448A KTU OPT ION BLOCK
AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
OPTION
FEATURE
W
STRAP TERMINALS
1ST CKT
2ND CKT
INTERRUPTED RING
B TO 7 §
3 TO 5§
T
STEADY RING
8 TO 6
3 TO 4
X
STEADY BUZZER
8 TO 10
3 TO I
§ FACTORY PROVIDED
Fig. 65-.Connections from 448A KTU (Variable Delay Timer Circuit) in 69E or F Apparatus Mounting to
External Connecting Blocks (Sheet 1 of 2).
Page 82
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-405
~
11114-2!I
COIIII BUS
[,"'"
a(ATI)
TO LINE
RINGERS
Ir REQD
(1ST CKT)
(NOT\ 3)
R(PI)
a(PI)
T(I)
\
R(I)
\
\
L(I)
RC(I) (NOTE 2)
t
----.
C(I)
RC(PI)
CONN
aLK 3
I
RC(PAI)
9C
L(ATI)
L(Ar2)
["~'
TO LINE
RINGERS
Ir REQD
R(P2)
B(AT2)
2ND CKT
R(AT2)
t
I
Cl21
RclpA2)
T(2)
T
T
T
T
1
R(2)
RC(P2)
L(2)
RC(2) (NOTE 2)
rOIl
RErEREllCE
ONLY
BU A
BUll
22A
m
21A
21r
20
2SA
2Sr
2S
33A
Dr
3A
3r
0
4A
4r
II
5A
SF
r
27A
27r
II
21
24
32A
32F
35A
w
•2.
34A
34r
21
37A
31,.
a
17A-E
.,
II
TO
II
lTU
22
(NOTE I)
eA
23A
W
2SA
2.
SA
.,
7A
7r
13
3SA
3.
12
24A
24r
23
IA
30A
28A
40A
29A
IF
28F
441A
27
12
14
3.
5.
40F
34
29F
IS
3IA
31F
57
38A
38F
3S
(NOTE 4)
Fig. 65-tcGnnections hm 448A KTU (Variable Delay Timer Circuit) in 69E or F Apparatus Mounting to
External Connecting Blocks (Sheet 2 of 2).
Page 83
SECTION 518-215-405
SELECT JACK ASSOCIATED WITH 400-TYPE KTU AND CONNECT AS SHIM!
CONNECTI NG BLOCK
JI
J2
J3
J4
JS
J6
J7
J8
JII
JI2
JI3
~14
JIS
JI7
JI8
IB
7B
13B
19B
258
31B
37B
IB
IB
7B
13B
19B
258
318
378
438
208
448
JI&
28
8B
148
268
328
388
28
28
88
148
208
26B
328
38B
SG t
IIG t
171t 23G t
29G t
3SG+
41st
5Gt
51t
IIG+
17Gt
23'*
2MI
3SCt
411a
47' t
68
128
18B
30B
388
428
811
68
128
188
248
3011
3111
428
488
l2Gt
IIGI
24GI
lOGt
36G!
42G!
4 IGI r - - -
24B
6G+ 12G+ 18GI 24Gt 30GI 36G! 42Gt 6Gt 'Gt
1M 011 RCt/PI)
11* 011 RGI (PI)
T
R
A
AI
LG
LlI)
TO
ATTDlllAIIT
STATI.
SG(PI AIID P2)
IC
7C
13C
19C
25C
31C
37C
IC
IC
7C
13C
19C
25C
31C
37C
43C
2C
BC
14C
20C
26C
32C
38C
2C
2C
8C
14C
zOC
26C
32C
3ac
44C
3C
9C
15C
21C
27C
33C
39C
3C
3C
9C
15C
21C
27C
SSC
39C
4SC
4C
IOC
16C
22C
,2BC
34C
40C
4C
4C
IOC
lac
22C
ac
34C
40C
4ac
SC
IIC
17C
23C
29C
35C
41C
5C
5C
IIC
17C
23C
2tC
35C
41C
47C
ac
12C
lac
24C
SOC
3ac
42C
ac
ac
12C
IBC
24C
SOC
sac
42C
4BC
4D
100
lID
220
2ID
340
400
4D
4D
100
lID
220
280
34D
4DD
4ID
15D IIiD II7D 123D I2tD 1350 141D 15D ISD I liD 117D 1 230
I29D
I35D
141D
1470
5'PI)
LI!" AND P2)
LI")
I
I*OR IGI!P2)
1*011 Ict(n)
L(n)
"P2)
>T
•
A
,41
TO
ATTEIIDAIIT
STATI.
La
ID
70
130
19D
25D
31D
370
ID
ID
7D
13D
19D
250
31D
370
430
20
III
14D
2DD
2ID
320
38D
20
20
ID
14D
20D
2&D
320
3aD
44D
3D
9D
ISO
21D
270
330
390
3D
3D
9D
15D
21D
27D
33D
39D
45D
4D
100
160
22D
21D
34D
400
40
4D
100
lID
220
280
34D
40D
4111
5[
liE
17E
23E
29E
35E
41[
5[
5E
liE
17[
23E
29E
SSE
41E
-47[
R* 011 Icl
8* 011 RGI
LIm!
qAT2!
NOTES:
I . . .IA KTU CONTAIIiS TWO CIRCUITS.
2. CONIlECT 8 GIlD OILY tr 448A KTU IS PROYID[D. Ir 448A KTU
IS PROYIDED. _E or TH[ RINGER COIIIlECTIONS ARE REQUIRED.
3. TO 4OO-TYPE KTU ASSOCIATED WITH rllST CIRCUIT or 449A KTU.
4. TO' 4OO-TYPE KTU ASSOCIATED WITH SECOND CIRCUIT OF 449A KTU.
5. PUCE STRAP 011 4OD-TYPE KTU AS rOLLOVS.
• 4DOB AND C - STRAP TERMINAL 4 TO 6
• 40DD - STRAP TERNINAL 6 TO 8
• 400G - CONNECT TERMINAL C3 TO C4
*
I
t
rOlt LIIiE RINGIIiG
rOIl C _ AUDIBLE RIIMIING
USE 183A2 ADA PTER TO MUTL! PLE LEADS
Fig. 66-tconnedions from 449A KTU (Immediate Transfer Control Circuit) in 69E or F Apparatus Mounting
to External Connecting Blocks (Sheet 1).
Page 84
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-405
(NO? 3)
~T~*~____••
~
-::t
----'·-+--7.,.......,
»__________________________-<~
i
)>----+-f
SHOIotI
CONN BLKS
Foa
R[F[II[IIC[
ONLY
IILK A
IILK B
T oa RG
----~-------------------------<~ +-+-4-~~
act
6684-25
~--~-----I
R oa RC
(NOTE S)
RII oa RCt (PI)
BII oa RGtlPI)
:
ZSf
33A
33r
~
~
27A
39A
m
r;~!
3".
~
...
22A
21l
22r
21f
~
2201
L(I)
L(PI)
R* oa RcHATI)
B* oa RGtlATI)
L(ATI)
S(PI)
II
(IIOTE 2)
'I~
!~U:I~T,.:ri:~ CII)
T oa RG
R oa RC
L(2)
11* oa RGt(P2)
RII OR RCtlP2)
34A
3.F
32A
32r
SA
Sf
..
Sf
40A
40f
3eA
3If
6A
•
7A
7r
21
2Il 2.
L(P2)
S(P2)
RII oa RCtlAT2)
II
11* OR KHAT2)
(NOTE 2)
'11 c..IZI
'2'-448l
)
TO 2ND
KTU (IF PROY) L1AT2)
~~9
:
2Sl
25
24
~
~
f--<
26
39
~
f--< II
f--< 3.
f--< 34
TO
::A
(lIOlt I)
f--< 33
f--< 12
f--<
13
~
14
~9
Ii
2r
If
24A
24f
3Il
3"
3&r
32
Slf,----- J7
21l
2.
21A
ZIF,----- 35
f--< 23
b
b
21
Fig. 66-tconnections from 449A KTU (Immediate Transfer Control Circuit) in 69E or F Apparatus Mounting
to External Connecting Blocks (Sheet 2).
Page 85
SECTION 518-215-405
69E III B8f
APP "'0
TO WSTIlPER[
PRO'lIIlED
MIC
SlUICE
•
T
B
BUICI(
A
"'III
RCD
R STA
TCD
_Fill
REFERENCE
lilLY
A
29A
4A
21A
CD/PBX STA
NOTE; Fill 7TH LINE.
~CT TISTAI TO
SAlE TERIUNAL AS TI CD I
USING 183A2 ADAPTER.
Fig. 67 -tconnectians fram 451 B KTU (Music-on-Hold)
in 69E or F Apparatus Mounting to External
Connecting Block.
Page 86
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-405
BLk A
TO SIMILAR TYPE [
PRIVATE LINE CIRCUIT
AT DISTANT END
TO KEY
TEL SET
T
R
[
R
SII
,
SG
LG
L
IA
2A
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
BLk B
IF
2F
14
9
6F
7F
8F
12
6A
7A
8A
12B-E
41B
41F
9A
9F
13
16
TO
461A kTU
TOAUDSIG[~
RI
®f
TO DIODE [
MATRIX ...;C::A:..-._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _- '
* SIGNAL KEY MAY BE A CONVERTED PICKUP KEY OR ,\NY
EXTERNAL NON LOCKING KEY.
OPTION STRAPPING ON 461A KTU OPTION BlOCK
rEATURES
TIME-OUT
STRAP
TERMINALS
INTERRUPTED RING
W
7 TO 8
TIME-OUT
STEADY RING
T
6 TO 7
CIKUIT
(8 RELAY)
C _ WITH DIODE
MA TR I X CONTROL
5
7 TO 8
UNOER
CONTROL or
R RELAY
STEADY RIN;
R
C _ WITH DIODE
MATRIX CONTROL
N
UNOER
CONTROL or
AUDIBlE
SIGIIALS
OPTION
4 TO 6
10 SECONDS
X
I TO 2
16 SECONDS
Z
Z TO 3
Z3 SEC_S
WITHOUT
x OR z
• • , ..E RI_CK TONE
M
REHOYE
x OR
Z
STRAPS
• TO 10
Fig. 68-Connections from 461A KTU (Manual Signaling, Ringdown Private Line Circuit) in 69E or F Apparatus
Mounting to External Connecting Blocks
Page 87
SECTION 518-215-405
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
LK3
~
•
13
17j :~~A
12E
BLKA
12
15l TO
NOTE, B BATT AND B GRD ARE ONLY LEADS REQUIRED .
• CONNECT TO ANY UNUSED A1 TERMINAL ON
BLOCKS 1. 2. OR 4.
Fig. 69-tConnections from 467A KTU (Low-Voltage
Monitor Circuit) in 69E or F Apparatus
Mounting to External Connecting Blocks.
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
TO
400-TYPE
KTU
NOTE
SA
NOTE
9A
I ~::::::::--~L~GJt~4il~B==t=~~=1
IJ
TO
469A
8
KTU
NOTES,
I. LAMP C I RCU IT TO BE EXTENOED.
TO CONNECT I NG BLOCK TERM I NAL
ASSOCIATED WITH THE MOUNTING
FACILITY FOR 400-TYPEKTU.
2. EXTENDED LAMP C I RCU I T TO
ADDITIONAL LAMPS. USE
ONE 469A KTU FOR EACH
20 ADDITIONAL LAMPS.
LAMPS-
Fig. 70-.Connections from 469A KTU (Lamp Extender Circuit) in 69E or F Apparatus Mounting to External
Connecting Blocks.
Page 88
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-405
69E OR F APP IIlG
CONN B
I
CONN A
T(CO)
TO CO (
LINE
R(CO)
A
T
R
A(U)
1UlflESTRICTEO
~~~EPHONE
6694-25
CONN BLKS
BLK A
BLK B
1A
1F
2A
2F
SIiOWN FOR
REFERENCE
ONL Y
14
5A
5F
1
6A
8F
12
7A
7F
13
9A
8F
18
=-
TO 471A
KTU
ROW AND TERI'I [NAL ,ssr'-NT FOR JACKS
'"'"'" FOR
""Lyn,"",
_
J3
J5
J15
J6
J18
J18
TO
1 40012 TYP
13 KTU
-<16
~
RESTRICTED
TELEPHONE
SET
12A-EI
I-EI24A-
_14
,-E
,-E
,-E
'H
-<9
Fig. 71-tConnections from 471A KTU (Battery Reversal Toll Restriction Circuit) in 69E or F Apparatus Mounting
to External Connecting Blacks.
Page 89
SECTION 518-215-405
_Fill
REFERENCE
OIII.Y
1-----<14
1-_ _--<8
1-_ _--< 12
TO 478A
KTU
(NOTE 2)
IllITES:
1. TIE 479A KTU IIIIIITS IN CCMECTIIIS
A MIl 8. CCMECTIDIIS ARE IWJE TO
CCMECTIII A III.Y.
2. REFER TO SECTIIII 518-215-401 fill
PlACEIDT OF II'TIIII PlUIIS III
478A KTU MIl I07A MIl 1078
CIRCUIT IIIIUL£S.
1-_ _--< 13
1-_ _--< 18
IIIIESlRICTED
TELEPIUE
SET
RESTRICTED
TElEPHIIE
SET
Fig. 72-Konnections from 479A KTU (Rotary Dial Toll Restriction Circuit) in 69E or F Apparatus Mounting
to External Connecting Blocks.
Page 90
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-405
6664-25
SHOWN FOR
CONN BlKS
OPTION STRAPPING ON 421A KTU OPTION BLOCK
FEATURE
PRESET
CONFERENCE
OPTI ON
W
STRAP
TO 425A (MOl OR B KTU [
SELECTED STATIONS
"C'LEAD
TERMINALS
I TO 2
7 TO 8
TO LAMP
IAg~~cl~TTE~R~61~
~
L
[E
L
~
AT SELECTED STATION
II
TO 425A (MD) OR B KTU
L" LEAD OF COOE ASSIGNED
TO PRESET CONFERENCE
BlK A
BlK B
2A
fA
21A
2F
IF
21F
7A
6A
29A
17F
6F
29F
TO DSS
SIGNAL KEY - - - - -••
~
9A
. SA
424 - TYPE KTU
STRAP
SF
8 31 3~
88
24F
.
.
1
3'OOE
TO
421A KTU
16
23
21
23A
23F
22
30A
5A
30F
5F
36
I
CONN BlKS A OR B
ASSOC WITH 413A KTU
MA:RIX
B GRO
STRAp'
RG
STRAp.,
TO 407- OR 424-TYPE
KTU
20
>>~(~S:!EE~N~OT~E:!)~_ _ _O~CTI~:=J
22A
I 22F f----<
407- OR
TO RINGER
AT
SELECTED
STATION
9
14
-----n:~C=r:::ii==1
9F
24A
CONN BLK 2
REFERENCE
ONLY
6A
6F
7A
7F
13
IF
I.
12B-E
IA
42B
42F
2A
2F
S~L~g:~S~I~::g ~6 ----------4---------.. >~~~£!I~..!!...---titjjtj
(SEE NOTE)
R
"]
TO
413A KTU
9
PRESET CONF
NOTE:
THE 413A KnJ IS USED ONLY WHEN ACCESS TO THE
PRESET CONFERENCE IS BY DIAL CODE OR BY
DIAL CODE AND DSS. THE ,13A KTU IS NOT USED
WHEN ACCESS TO THE PRESET CONFERENCE IS
LIMITED TO DSS. SEE FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATIC.
* MUST BE FURNISHED LOCALLY.
Fig. 73-.Connections from Preset Conference Circuit to Dial Intercom Line in 69E or F Apparatus Mounting
to External Connecting Blocks.
Page 91
SECTION 518-215-405
CONNECT I NG BLOCK
3
OPTIONS
X
KS- 15900. LI INTERRUPTER
10V AC MOTOR
W
KS - 19384. L2 INTERRUPTER
24V OC MOTOR
---- FACTORY FURNISHED WIRING
'Fig. 74-Factory-Furnished Wiring for ATl and BTl
Circuits
CONNECT I NG 8LOCK 3
18
33333333
IJI4 IJI3 1 m I
I
L
JII
Y
J4 I
J3 I
J2
I
JI
14
I
I
I
L--'-~---4-...:.::J f f
---*- 4- --+- ___ -- __(R-& 1-'
I
o
JII
0
Yy
18
J2 I
18
J3 I
18
18
18
J41
JIIY
ml
L~--4----!-~
L..I~-~
-
-
-
I
FACTORY FURNISHED WIRING
Fig. 75-Factory-Furnished Wiring for Bat. A (1) and Bat. A (2) Circuits
Page 92
18
JI41
I
I
I
I
____ -+----+--+--1
TO
INTERNAL
POWER
SUPPLY
-
18
JI3 I
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-405
CONNECTING BLOCK I
10
0
a
0
a
16
0
22
0
0
0
0
0
a
0
CONNECTING BLOCK 2
a<
0
0
0
~
0
0
a
a<
0
0
0
CONNECTING BLOCK 4
~
~
2800000~OO
4
3400000~OO
40
0
0
0
0
0
10
0
0
o
0
0...,
0
0
0
IOOOOOO~OO
0
a a
16
a
a
~
0
0
0
2200000~OO
2800000~OO
.-------~
34
0
0
0
0
~
0
0
0
4000000~OO
4600000a;OO
I
I
CONNECTING BLOCK 3
I
I ~ !L..L.JLJ:! I
I ~
~I
,.!A!:...,B...!..! '1!-!!" _
~j
0
y
r
15
15
J13!
J14!
0---- - - -
-+ ___ + J
I
L___ ..:
TO
INTERNAl..
SlFP!.y
15
J12!
r
.!!!.-~ ____ ~.....L -L..J
...!,R£..,B...!..!'1!-'!!'?-+.
POWER
15'
JI:(
-
-
-(:1- ~~_
4-_--1_
AI
(WI
r:-----~--;;-~-I;-
13\)
I
-
17
17
17
17
JIIY J12'( J13'( J14!
Y Y
Y Y Y
J 5Y
JSY
J7Y
J8Y
I
17
JI!
17
J2!
I
15
JI(
15
J2!
+-I
17
17
J3! J4!
-+-- -+.--+-..J
J3'(
15
15
J4'(
17
17
--L...L...L 1- J
...J
17
17
JI5Y JI6 Y
mY JI8Y
I I I
I I L _~ .J,... ......... ..J
I I I I
I I I
L+-~-!!!.. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ """ 4--4--....J
GRO B (21 (R-GI
I J I
I
- - - - - ---t15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
~~~I~~-+-t---J
J15'( JIS'( J17'( J18'(
J5Y JsY J7Y J8Y
L_-,-===
(R-OI
=~_L~-=-
__ 1-1-1-J
________ FACTORY FUlliISHED WIRING
Fig. 76-Factory-Furnished Wiring for Bat. B (1) and Bat. B (2) Circuits
Page 93
SECTION 518-215-405
CONNECTING BLOCK 3
(R-G)
ST
9000000r~======~------1
TO
INTERNAL [MG (R-O)
POWER
-SUPPLY
MB (O-R)
*
L
Q
---+ 10 QI
f 000..t -+- ------+----,.-'-(6
I
~ ~5
6
-----.. 5
(G-R)
---
I
MG
I
----i--------J I
, _ _ _ -1
I
_________ ---J
~35A
)
v.
JIO
t---< I
1M:
+-
-.:!.!~ 6
2!~
~~
6
+-~ 5
+- ~
+-
2)----r---------l
cj
-+
@
I~
L
JIO
3)---
-- I
r---mT~R~T~
L
I
I
I
I
I
I
HV\
I
L --<
J9
I~@
I 3 >- J9
10
M
- - --'I
I
I
L
t-.:!.!5-( 6
+-
I
I
I
JII
+-~
t~~6 t-~5
+-~~ 6 t-~5
I
~T~R~T~
I
I
I
r"'
I
I
I
I
I
JII
I . L ~2___
-
~
L
MG
JI
r~-'-(6
I
I
*
-
-
-
FACTORY FURNISHED WIRING
WHEN 19C2 POWER SUPPLY ("T" OPTION)
IS PROVIDED. AN EXTERNALLY LOCATED RINGING
SOURCE MUST BE LOCALLY PROVIDED.
I
I
I
- ' JI
-(5
.I.
J2
I - 'J2- ( 6 .,--,-(5
.L J3
.L J3
I T --:'4'-( 6 T -:;4'-( 5
I +--,-(6 t - - ( 5
I +-~~6 t+-~5-(5
J6___
I t - "J6___
,6
-",5
+-
J7-<
L -:;S
+-
6
J7-(
L -:;8
-'-(6
Z
KS-19175.LI INTERRUPTER
10V AC MOTOR
Y
KS-19385. L2 INTERRUPTER
24V DC MOTOR
X
KS-15900.LI INTERRUPTER
10V AC MOTOR
W
KS-193 84. L2 INTERRUPTER
24V DC MOTOR
Fig. 77-Factory-Furnished Wiring for MB, MG and ST Circuits
Page 94
5
5
It:
INTERRUPTER OPTIONS
-
5
ST
~ III >- - - - - - J
I
I
L ____________________ J
__
6
~
~
5
--(5
4
4
-+
4
YJ4YJ3
L.
r
4
4
4
't8~ J7
4
'tSi-
L
CONNECT I HG BLOCK 3
~
_ __
--1.- - - - - l
~rt3
----,
I
---0
4
~- -
2A
I
S
-'0
L-i
------1------------0
~fl
I
r~
----l.-----+----------
fl5
2A
f14)
2A-l
L- _ _
f2
5A
L __ - - - -
-
-
4
0--0--<>-0
2
Y J5
I
t
I
rt2(
2A
4
-+
YJ2YJI
-
80
-
Q
'L 0
0
'L OIO"olblo...
b
6
0I0 I ~
TO
INTERNAL
POWER
SUPPLY
I
II
L
I
. ~
18
CONNECTING BLOCK I
e>--o--<>--o-o-Io-o
0 0.0
0
I
I I
I
I I LG2
" 0 0 0 0 0 oJ 0
L---t-t--1t---------t-t---i70-0-0-0-0-O"O
0
0
0
0
: I
010 0 0
I I
6~
--ii----:.
LGI
CONNECTING BLOCK 2
~
0
0
0
0 0
0
oJo
0
290 0
0
'=-..?l 0
0
4_10_0_0_0_OJ 0
0
II r
I
I
--++-t-}---J
III I
I I I I
III L
I I
I I I
II
I
IlL
!
I I
'L~ ~ _~J
I
:
~
I
L
ABC
- - - - - FACTORY FURNISHED WIRING
I
CONNECTING BLOCK 2 (CONT)
D E F
G
H
. <>--<>--0---0-0
210
0 0
0 0
0
0
~
220
0
0
0
0
0)
0
0
0
230 0
0
I
I
---'
2300000000-'
Fig. 78-Factory-Furnished Wiring for Lamp Steady Circuits
0
CONNECTING BLOCK 4
~A8CDEFGH
I
0-0-0---0-0--o 10-0
1 _____ _
--r
50 0
0
0
O~O
0
l " o o o o o a J o·o
-
I
_--~t------+-r--~
50 0
0
II I
\1
-------1 I
I~
0
I I r--;5;-;;-~;;- 0 oJo
L_.i.Gi.. __ --1-- --,
0 0 0 0 0 a' LG
I
'L
50
I I
L+ __ + __ - - - - -----,
20'0
I
~B
C D E F G H
II
II
II
LG3 ~---I---------, I I
I ~--- --_l_- - - - -
I
I
+---+t---------++---------"
0 I 01"0
I
I
I
:
0101010i<'~-'1
r -t~
1 -1
.!!~(!L--.!!)-----_l__++_-i-t_-' I
.LO'/~~ ~ _ J!I--!)_____
I"
---+-+-+-h
-!=" - - -r + - -
-~.l
+-....J
I
r~4++~~-----------------~
'---t_
I
4
I(W-G)LS3
LS (W-G)
I
-t-++;-+i[w-G) L S 4 - - i : S ( w - G i - - - - - - - - - . J
-+-l-l
I
t-
-r-=-"tJ 0
17r-----f-+++.+-...J..l
I
I
4
(W-G) LSI
++-+-__________
--'
TW-21~--~ ~-21 ___ ---1
0 " " 0.,
L- 0__
0
0
-~----7ii-Bii')---'
(' 9-.9 010101?1b., 1(0) LGI
10V GRD (I)
r(BR)-- -;- - r
I I II L-+t-- - - - - - - - I
--------'
.--___ +_-+-++-_+;--w
I
(BL) LG2
!.LO~_j.!l _ _ .....J
I
II
I
L--t+ - - - - - - - - , I
I
4
JII(JI2) mYJI4) JI5 )JISY JI7Y JI8r'
I
LS (W-G) I J
I
LJ
i7;;-;-~~~J.
l
0
0
LL~ ~.L2~0_0_0_0_0 a 0 0
LG4 (5)
29 0 0
35 0 0
0
0
o~ 0
0
0
00"0
----------,
41 0 0 0 0 0 u.., 0
470
0
0
0
0"';0
0
0
0
0
SECTION 518-215-405
CONNECTING BLOCK 2
50
0
0
0
0
TO
SH2
TO
INTERNAL
POWER
SUPPLY
Fig. 79-Factory-Furnished Wiring for Lamp Flash Circuits (Sheet 1 of 2)
Page 96
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-405
CONNECT I NG BLOCK I
rROM
SH I
-
- - FACTORY FURNISHED WIRING
Fig. 79-Factory-Furnished Wiring for Lamp Flash Circuits (Sheet 2 of 2)
Page 97
SECTION 518-215-405
22222222
JI~ JI~ JI;r JI{ JI51 JISI JI71 JI~
t- t--- J t-- J t---'
CONNECTING BLOCK 2
50
0
0
0
~
0
0
I 0
0
~!
0
0
0
0
0
~~~
,
22 0
0
0
C1
0
0
0
0::)
23 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0-,)
-
-.
II
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
II
FROM
INTERNAL
POWER
SUPPLY
~i
~I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I~III:
~
-I
NI
",I".
L~L-==--=--l
"I
0
~I
I
I
CONNECTING BLOCK 3
CONNECTING BLOCK 2 (CONTI
21 0
~I
0
0
0
~
0
o----~L--~L---~---~--
0
J
20
0
0
0
0
30
0
0
0
0
I
I
I
I
I
I
~ 10 1o-+--------I..---+----~--
4 0
0
0
0
0
0
I 0 ~I
50
0
0
0
0
'i'
101
L_l!'.::l!L ___
~ ~ ~~
I I...L'
~l--
I
I
IR-S)
I
I
I
I
-j---------.I
0
0
0
0
70
0
0
0 10
II
I ? 1 0 1 0 - 4 - + - - - - - -----------+--
I II I
I I
I
IR-S)
I
I I L...f--.!--4+-----------------'
8000010101019-+J
I I
I
'-+,
r-----t-+-+-t-- J I
TO
I
SH2
LGI
r----t-I---+-t---+------------ - - - - - - - I ' r---r-t--+-t---I-------------------YlL
IOV GRD II)(W-BR)
~~ .If 9 0 10 1 0 I YI ~,--+------------(Oi---LiiT
------------I-!-j-t-----....
I I I L-+t--------------------1'1 ,
I I
-I-+ ____________ -.J~___ .!:.GL
.!!~.vJ.I.L_.!!~H_.!.------+--+-...J
I I
III 1'8
L-f------l-t---------,
I II '-'~ 0 0 0 0 I 0 0 o-J ,
I
III
I
I
'- ___ ~'!L ___ ~~
I"
I
q. __
r ______ +_____ J
:II:L--i-+=--=--=---=--t-=-=
== ==-=== =====-=-=--==---=--==~-=
r~.J ~ ~
I
0
0
L-r--- J ,
...!o~~RE~~w.:~_L_t----...J
0
\'
I
I
I
~~
Y
0
""--------------------
I
1
L_-+I __ -l_____________ ~L __ ~~
_t'Qv_If! __ .J~Ll--t---------------'
0
0
0
0
I
I
e>-J
I
L ___ .J
Fig. 80-Factory-Furnished Wiring for Lamp Wink Circuits (Sheet 1 of 2)
Page 98
I
o-t------------+----f---
_ll-L-i-------..lR.::l!L-J
1 /'to : o-t-,
S 0
I
I
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-405
22222222
J;Y J2( J;( J4Y J,;-( JSY J7Y J8Y
~J
I
J~I
~J
~J
I
I
",I
t-J
1
",I
.. I
III
I
~I
~I
IF41
~I
I
INTERRUPTER
CONNECTING8LOCKI
~
I
I
..l
----
I
~i
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I JIO
-".r"j---t---r"t.::.(12
I
1
~
1
-j.~-+----t---+-----,~15:r7
FlO
I
II
I
I I
-------.l~-l---Ll~21
I
II
I
___________
FII
I I
I
:r
b
@
8
8
I IL.:!~I
FROM
SH I
L_J~8
50
b
)
1AV\
0
0
Q. 0
110
0
0
0
0
cf) 0
0
1 I
17 0
0
0
0
0
Q.
0
0
0
0
I I
.1',
20~~-,III
I I r
)
I
I I
I
'f
I I I r ...-________
29 0
0
0
0
0
3500000Cfoo
,r
41 0
I
I ~!-t~
III
2
\Q.;
I
0
0
0
0
'Fit
5AI
I
0
CONNECT I NG 8LOCK 4
II 11 ~ABCOEFGH
t
0-0---0-0-0-o
I I
5 0
0
II II II
110
0
0
0
~i_--_fsG_----------------------t----tT.J
170
0
0
0
0
0
0-0
t,
0
0
0
0")
0
0
0
'r,0
0
0
1 ,...--------~ I
-----------------------------+---11"---------'
I I
1
0
..J
I II
I I
~!.------------.-------------I--t..J
.b.~-------------------------_+T________________________ ----+..J
23 0
0
0
0
0
t
0"") 0
~!!.3___ J!l!!l. _______________________ L--+l-~O-~-~~~-j'-l
~!..------_----------------------_L_---J
________________________________ -+ ____ -.JI 350 0 0 0 0 Cf) 0
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .....J
0
0
0
0
LG4
(S)
41 0
0
0
0
0
'rl 0
-----------------------------------------~ t
0
J 0
0
410
-
0
1I
F2~ I
: 7
_ 7 .a
0
I I r---------J)
II
2300000Cfoo
5A~
I~
0
I r---------J )
a 7
1~~~J~18
I I
14r:!!!?---,
-
-
-
0
0
0
0
a
FACTORY FURNISHED WIRING
OPTION
Z
KS-19175, LI INTERRUPTER
10V AC MOTOR
Y
KS- 19385, L2 INTERRUPTER
24V DC MOTOR
X
KS-15900, LI INTERRUPTER
10V AC MOTOR
W
KS- 19384, L2 INTERRUPTER
24V DC MOTOR
LAMP
LOAD
I TO
100
LAMPS
CONNECTING BLOCK NO. 3
STRAPS
PLACE
REMOVE
IG TO 5G
3G TO 7G
180 TO 190
101 TO
200
LAMPS
IG TO 5G
3G TO 7G
180 TO 190
Fig. 80-Factory-Furnished Wiring for Lamp Wink Circuits (Sheet 2 of 2)
Page 99
SECTION 518-215-405
CONNECTI NG BLOCK 3
ABC
O~'E
F G H
o----o---o--JJ.'4
I
I
II ) ... ~....
II
I
II ) ... ~....
>-o!.!.~
1
II ) ... ~....
II
>-~--+
II
1
I
I
>-,u~
II )-.j]--+
II
II >-o!.!.!J
I
>-~...J
I
I
.... .!!.3-< 10
. .J.!.3-< 10
I 16
10
t-J..!.4-< 10
:
... .!!~ 10
I
1 170
...J.!.!i...< 10
I
... ..:!~
10
t-J.!~
.!!to(
10
...J.!.7-< 10
L...:!'L(
10
LJ!'!!-< 10
I
I
>-:!.!~
II
. .J.!.2-< 10
I
I
1
>-o!.!.~
I
I
..
I
rt----J
+-..:!.2-< 10
I
+-.!!~
II >-J-l'4
I
II
i10V,±18V,ORiloev
90 b o o 0 0
0 0
r------------iii-iiRiiiov.±I8VOR±i05Y-----,
t-'J,---' tj'jj""-----""'j,--------,
+---<
10
..,:--<
10
r"'''' QI 0I 0 0 0
I
I
Jill
>--~I
I
0 0
0 0
0 0 Q
±18Y
I
.... - - - - - - .... ___ ... ___ ... _________ ~f!l...
t--<7 I( ~ )1
JIO
(
I
I
I
I
)(2
)
J9
~--
~
0
i
0
0
flOY
-------GRO-
...... -----... - ... -----
~ABCOEFGH
o-o---o-o--c>-O
0
0
0
0
1 0--0
0
0
" " - ... ,
'''1, 1
CONNECTING BLOCK 2 (CONT)
~'[~Jii
JIO
4 >-~
1
I
~
0
CONNECTI NG BLOCK 2
1
INTERRUPTER
L-( 4
'?
I
5 0
I
0
TO
INTERNAL
POWER
SUPPLY
-~~------- ... - - - - - - . . ,
10
INTERRUPTER
I
L _______ ...... _____ ..!'!!...
'i'
L
I
I
I
01... ...0_ _ _ _ ±I05V
__ _
11
I ±IOV, ±18Y
!
29 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
"'1-.J 1
300
0
0
0
0
0
0
0::,
0
0
0
0
0
0
",)
0.--'"
)
J9 OR ±Ioev
12 >-.......
31 0
CONNECT I NG BLOCK 4
CONNECTI NG BLOCK I
Ir\BCDEflGHl
..,
5 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1100000000::)
..,
II 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
11 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
23 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
"",!!.G...
17 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
o::~
23 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
«",
2900000000::~
29 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
350
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0::..,
41 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0::..,
47 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0")
)
41 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0::..,
<
)
)
0
<
<
)
)
35 0
.., RG
0::..,
)
","--~
Fig. 81-Factory-Furnished Wiring for ± 10 Volt, ± 18 Volt, ± 105 Volt, and RN Audible Signaling Circuits
. Page 100
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-405
CONNECTING BLOCK I
CONNECTING BLOCK 2
JIIAI
I~I
~
I
0
0
2 0
0
3 0
0
0
0
0
0
o
'l~
400000000--
6 0
0
0
-~----<14
I>-
--+----<12
-=t,----<9
+----<13
-++ ---<16
-t1 r--<19
-------- - - - - - - - " -HR----
L ____ _
I
L ______ _
36yO?OOt~~
I
310
L ____ _
0
0
0
0
+-+ +-+ + _ -< 25
_
t~
P+=lut=~;!
P+=lpt=~ :~
PP+=lt=~ ;~
nnnr--< 22
=tt++++=~ ~:
=
=~1l1--<27
::j ti t
--.I
46 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0-
47~~~":~~~~
48 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0-
-< 24
---++--< 31
==3f=~~:
~Lq
43L~~~~~~~
-
II
I
I
- - - -I- - -< 39
---+--<35
---r--<36
===t--<37
Fig. 82-Factory-Furnished Wiring for Jack 1
Page 101
SECTION 518-215-405
CONNECTING BLOCK 2
CONNECTING BLOCK I
J2 (B)
[iBCDEFG{]
~
70
0
0
--....,.---<14
+--4---<9
n--+---<13
0
.,- - -+ - - -< 12
80
0
0
0
90
0
0
0
100
0
0
0
o
0
0
120
0
0
0
o
9
0
L_ -
t-t,-+=t==~~
<>- ,'------<>--1------7c; -;;-~~-;;--;;- ....
~
~If,
<
160
0
0
0
0
0
17 0
0
0
0
0
0
o)t
0;)
':::::::::J
r!
1200000000),
CONNECTING BLOCK 2 (CONT)
A B~C0--0~E
F , 0--0
G H
0--0
~0--0
I
:;:':
,
t-tt- Tt r--<19
+-I--k+-h----- ....
-1-1. - - -< 14
'L ~-<>--1'
~ ~2
- - - - < 13
'L 0
--< 0
~
===
---
- - - - < 16
--
----<35
~'L: =1--:
i
t~~-I-===~;~
440
0
0
0
0
45 0
0
0
0
° 'L 0
0-- __ -
46 0
0
0
0
0
0-
47 0
0
0
0
0
48 0
0
0
0
0
J5
o
L~~=I====~ ~
I~~~~EF!GHI
37 0
24
000
Fig. 87 -Factory-Furnished Wiring for Jack 6
J4
ABCDEF!GH
0----0----0----
360
===
-
-
-
-
-< 22
'L ~- =--I:
~ ~~
I - - - - < 39
'L 0
-< 25
- ___ - - - - < 24
'L 0
-< 27
0-- __ -
0--
- -
CONNECTING BLOCK I (CONT)
=1-Wi - - -
-( 26
~:w
[~!~I~1PJ ~I~
490
0
0------
LJ
-----
O
500
° 'L °
t
~
LO 1° 'L
0--
- ( 31
----(30
- - - - < 29
5g
----(28
-I ==
Fig. 86-Factory-Furnished Wiring for Jack 5
Fig. 88-Factory-Furnished Wiring for Jack 7
Page 103
SECTION 518-215-405
·
I I).;
CONNECTING BLOCK 2
10
0
0
o
0
20
0
0
0
0
30
0
o
o
0
40
0
0
0
0
L~o--
0
0
0---
70
0
0
0
80
0
0
o
0
90
0
0
0
0
100
0
0
0
0
L~<>-
110
0
0
0
0
120
0
0
0
0
L~"=
L~"=
t~o--
J8
----<14
- - - - < 12
----<9
----<13
----<0
----<16
----<19
-----
-------
141 L
0
O
-.:
~
0
0-
-------
~iO--O
BLUE
BINDER
10
0
0
0
20
0
0
0
30
0
a
0
0
40
0
a
0
0
60
0
0
0
0
IW-Bl)
IW-BR)
0--
- -<
IBl-BK)
IBK-G)
~
IG-BK)
~
IY-BR)
~
IBK-BR)
~
~
~
IBK-S)
IS-BK)
IY-Bl)
IBR-BK)
IBl-Y)
BLUE -WHITE
BINDER
Fig. 90-Factory-Furnished Wiring for Jack 11
Page 104
19
- -< 20
- -< 21
- -< 22
- -< 23
- -< 24
--< 25
- -< 26
- -< 27
- -< 28
- -< 29
- -< 30
--< 31
- -< 32
- -< 33
- -< 34
- -< 35
- -< 36
- -< 37
- -< 38
- -< 39
18K-BLl
\O-BK)
Fig. 89-Factory-Furnished Wiring for Jack 8
0
i!.::!L..
IY-O)
- - - - < 31
----<30
- - - - < 29
----<28
- - - - < 38
----<34
----<33
- - - - < 32
0
~
IBK-O)
CONNECTING BLOCK 2 ICONT)
JIIIA)
CONNECTING BLOCK 4
ABCDEFIGH
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-405
ODNNECTI NG
CONNECTING BLOCK 4
ORANGE
BINDER
~!~
~r~ :~
800000t~~
~r~ ~3
0
0
(W-BLI
(W-BRI
(BL-Wl
(BR-Wl.
---- ----90
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
13 0
0
0
0
140
0
Q
0
0
t.~~
0
0
0
0
0
l~~
(W-BLl
(W-BRI
(BL-Wl
IBR-Wl
15
~T~ ~6
L~~
(W-Ol
(W-Sl
100
1- -<
0--
19
1200000t~o--
IW-Ol
IW-Sl
~
----- - - - -
160
000
0
0
180
0
0
t~ ~
0
0
18K-BLI
(BK-BLI
---< 20
,---< 21
---< 22
---< 23
---< 24
---< 25
(BL-BKI
~
..!.!2L
(BK-Gl
~
- - - < 26
(G-BKI
~
:::~"
(BR-BKI
---< 27
---< 28
---< 29
---< 30
---< 31
---< 32
---< 33
---< 34
---< 35
- --< 36
---<37
- - - ( 38
...!.!!:.:r.L
0
0--
IG-Wl
IS-WI
(G-Wl
(S-Wl
(Y-BLI
JI3 IAI
4
GREEN
BINDER
t~~
7000
BLOCK
JI2(BI
- - - ( 39
ORANGE -WHITE
BINDER
--<20
_-<21
- - < 22
IBL-BKI
IBK-OI
10-BK I
- - < 23
IY-Ol
- - < 24
IBK-Gl
- - < 25
IO-YI
- - < 26
IG"BKI
--< 27
IY-G I
- - ( 28
IY-BRI
--< 29
IY-Sl
- - < 30
I BK-BRI
- - < 31
IG-Yl
- - < 32
IBR-Yl
- - < 33
IS-Yl
- - < 34
~
--< 35
--< 36
--< 37
IS- BKI
IY-BLI
IBR-BKI
- - < 38
IBL-Yl
- - < 39
GREEN-WHITE
BINDER
Fig. 92-Factory-Furnished Wiring for Jack 13
Fig. 91-Factory-Furnished Wiring for Jack 12
Page 105
SECTION 518-215-405
CONNECTING
BROWN
BINDER
(W-Bl)'\.
IW-BR)
BLOCK
1}J
4
~[~JI
(L_~_o--l.·,~1'-~::
========
"'~r
'La
19000
O.
======== >:- r
0
0
0
o
22 0
0
0
0
21
CONNECTING BLOCK 4
JI5
0
2000000
0-'",
1'--<9
--=1:1
-< 13
~f~'~
IW-O)
~
10-W)
JI4IB)
0
0
0
0--
J-
300
o
0
0
-< 19
Fig. 94-Factory-Furnished Wiring for Jack 15
IG-W)
~
::::.~
~
CONNECTING BLOCK 4
IBK-Bl)
JI6
l
~I
~IC>--O
%
~
IBl-BK)
Wi
IBK- 0)
31 0
0
0
0
0
9
0
0- -
L___
IY-O)
3200000000--
L
IBK-G)
' - - -<25
10-Y)
IG-BK)
-
0
0
0
0
'L0
34 0
0
0
0
0
0
360
0
0
0
0
LO
---<27
-
-
-<28
-
-
C>- -
-
-
-< 14
----<9
-
-
-
-
-
-
-( 13
-< 0
.!i-- - - - -< 19
WJ
- - - . . . . . - - - - ( 16
-<26
IY-G)
-
33 0
-
----(12
0
C>- -
0--1=:" ----(
---
- --<29
kr.~
----<
I
8
IY-5)
- - -<30
IBK-BR)
-
-
-< 31
- -
-< 32
- -
-< 33
Fig_ 95-Factory-Furnished Wiring for Jack 16
IS-Y)
---<34
IBK-5)
-
-
-<35
---<36
IY- BLl
-- -
-<37
-
-
-<38
-
-'-<39
IBR-BK)
IBL-Y)
BROWN-WHITE
BINDER
~!~J ;l r~
JI7
: : ::: H:d~~ ~~:~
40 0
0
0
0
0
0
420
0
0
0
0
l
Fig. 93-Factory-Furnished Wiring for Jack 14
0
0- -
~
- - - - -<
19
~ ~ =1= ===~ ~
::::::;:~
Fig. 96-Factory-Furnished Wiring for Jack 17
Page 106
ISS 6, SECTION 518-215-405
JI8
CONNECTING BLOCK 4
430
0
0
0
0
440
0
0
0
0
450
0
0
0
0
460
0
0
0
0
t~~=
'L-'=----~=
'L-'=----~=
0
0
.--~
<>- -
~ ~f:
480
0
0
0
-----< 14
- - ---< 12
-----< 9
-----< 13
-----< 0
--< 16
- - - - -< 19
0
Fig. 97 -Factory-Furnished Wiring for Jack 18
Page 107
107 Pages
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT & TCo Standard
SECTION 518-215-407
Issue 1, July 1976
SERVICE
1A2 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
KEY SERVICE UNITS
550- AND 551-TYPE
1.
415A (Automatic, DC Signaling Tie Line
Circuit)
GENERAL
This section provides identification, installation,
connection, and maintenance information for
the 550- and 551-type KSUs. The information
pertaining to the 550A, 551A, 550B, and 551B KSUs
was formerly contained in Sections 518-255-101 and
518-255-401. These units have been rated MD and
replaced by the 550C and 551C KSUs, which are
covered for the first time in this section. Information
required for maintenance of existing installations
of the MD-rated KSUs has been retained in this
section.
1.01
467A (Low-Voltage Monitor Circuit).
2.02
Application
• IA2 KTS installations.
2.03
Ordering Guide
(a) Basic Units (Fig. 1):
1.02
Whenever this section is reissued, the reason
for the reissue will be listed in this paragraph.
• Unit, Service, Key-550C (for installations
where suitable external source of required
talk and signal voltages is available)
1.03
This issue of the section is based on the
following drawings:
• Unit, Service, Key-551C (built-in power
unit).
SD-69477-01, Issue 8A
(b) Replaceable Components:
CD-69477-01, Issue 4B
If this section is to be used with equipment or
apparatus reflecting later issues of the drawings,
reference should be made to the SD and the CD
to determine the extent of the changes and the
manner in which the section may be affected.
2.
• Interrupter, KS-19175, List I-furnished with
550- and 551-type KSU (requires 10V ac
motor supply)
• Unit, Power, J86738A, List I (MD)-furnished
with 551A KSU (MD)
• Unit, Power, 28A1-furnished with 551B
KSU (MD)
IDENTIFICATION
Purpose: A 550- or 551-type KSU provides
a factory-wired 1A2 KTS package arranged
to mount four of the following KTUs:
2.01
• Unit, Power, 28DI-furnished with 551C
KSU
• Lamp, 5IA
400-type (CO or PBX Line Circuit)
• Fuses, Bussman, MDL-I (1 ampere, one per
power unit)
401A (Manual Intercom Line Circuit)
NOTICE
Not for use or disclosure outside the
Ben System except under written agreement
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
SECTION 518-215-407
POWER UNIT
CONN ECTOR
~ Generator, Frequency U 8A-for use with
NOTE :
55 0C KEy SERVI CE UN IT I S
SA ME AS 5 5 1C EX CEPT I T DOES
NOT HAVE PO WER UN I T.
550B, 550C, 551B, and 551C KSUs; 105V ac
ringi ng supply (suppli ed with three mounting
screws)
• Bracket, Mounting, 841720857-for mounting
U 8A frequ ency generator on 550/ 551C KSU
• Kit of Parts, D-180699-for mounting U 8A
frequency generator on 550/ 551B KSU.
(d)
Ass o c i ate d
sep arately):
Apparatus
(or d er
• Cord, Power, 834167652 (P-41W765), 1-1/ 2
feet*
CO NN ECTIN G
BL OC K
• Cord, Power, 824013262 (P-40J326), 1-1/ 2
feett
• Cord, Power, 834167660 (P-41 W766), 2 feet*
• Cord, Power, 824013270 (P-40J327), 2 feett
• Cord, Power, 834167678 (P-41 W767), 4 feet*
• Cord, Power, 824013288 (P-40J328), 4 feett
• Co rd, Power, 834167686 (P-41 W768), 6 feet*
• Co rd, Power, 824013296 (P-40J329), 6 feett
• Cord, Power, 824010995 (P-40J099),
CABLE CLAMP
FOR EXTERNAL
A C POWE R
CO RD
118 A FREOUEN CY
GENERAT OR
1 ~ feett
• Plate, Adapter, 814862611 (P-48F261) t
"For 551A KSU (MD).
t For 551B KSU (MD) or 551C.
t For mounti ng two single width or one doubl e width
Fig . 1- 551C KSU With Frequency Generator
• Fuses, 24E (1/2 ampere, three per power
unit)
1A Key Telephone System angle bracket type KTUs
in 550-type KSU.
Order required combination of up to four of the
following KTUs, subj ect to specifi ed li mitations:
• Fuses, 24B (3 ampere, one per power unit).
(c) R eplaceable (Optiona l ) Components:
• Unit, Telephone, Key, 400D (maxi mum of
four)
• Interrupter, KS-19385, List 1 (MD) (requires
24V dc motor supply)
• Unit, Telephone, Key, 401A (maximum of
four)
• Interrupter, KS-19385, List 2 (req uires 24V
dc motor supply)
• Uni t, Telephone, Key, 415A (maximum of
three)
Page 2
ISS 1, SECTION 518-215-407
• Common audible signaling can be provided
by appropriate strapping on the connecting
block.
• Unit, Telephone, Key, 467A (maximum of
one)
2.04
Design Features
• 550-type KSUs do not have internal power
units, while 551 types are factory-equipped
with plug-in power units:
3.
INST ALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
• The basic KSU assembly contains four jacks
for 400-series KTUs, two separate jacks
for a plug-in KS interrupter and a plug-in
power unit, and a factory-wired connecting
block with "quick-clip" terminals.
The information in 3.02 through 3.17 applies
specifically to the 550C and 551C KSUs,
and also to the 550A, 551A, 550B, and 551B KSUs
(all MD), unless otherwise noted. Most new
installations will involve the "C" KSUs, but the
MD units will be encountered in existing installations.
For methods of strapping and terminating wire
and cable, refer to Section 461-604-100. Cables
and wire must be brought into the 550C and 551C
KSUs from the bottom. Clamps are provided for
retaining the power, line, and station cables. Dress
wires along the sides of the connecting block. In
the "A" and "B" KSUs, cable and wire may enter
from top or bottom.
• All external connections are made on front
of connecting block.
INSTALLATION
551C-28D1 Power Unit
551B (MD)-28Al Power Unit
551A (MD)-J86738A, List 1 Power Unit
(MD)
• The lO-volt ac operated KS-19175, List 1
interrupter furnished with each KSU provides
lamp flash, wink, and audible signal feature
interruptions. It is a plug-in unit locked
into place by a captive screw.
• A 24-volt dc operated KS-19385, List 1 (MD)
or List 2 interrupter can be substituted for
the one furnished with the KSU at locations
where only 24-volt dc power is available.
• Intended for vertical mounting on a wall or
other suitable surface.
3.01
Mounting: Mount the KSU on a clean,
firm, dry, vertical surface where it is easily
accessible for service (mounting hardware to be
obtained locally depending on mounting surface).
If the KSU has a built-in power unit or if it is to
be equipped with a U8A frequency generator, it
must be located within cord length of a grounded
U7V 60-Hz power outlet provided by the customer
(see Ordering Guide for cord lengths). The
outlet should be separately fused· and not under
the control of a switch. A KSU without built-in
power unit should be mounted as close as possible
to the separate telephone company power source.
3.02
Warning: Do not connect the KSU
to external power until all other
wiring is complete and all KTUs are
installed.
• Protective front and back covers provided.
• 550C and 551C have line status lamps which
display the same signals as the line lamps
at associated stations.
External AC Power Cord: An external
ac power cord is required with all 551-type
KSUs and with any KSU equipped with a frequency
generator.
3.03
• 550C and 551C are 17.18 inches high, 9.7
inches wide, and 7.12 inches deep.
• 550B/551B (MD) and 550C/551C can be
equipped with a. U8A frequency generator
which provides power for operating ringers
at associated stations. Earlier type KSUs
must be connected to an external ringing
supply.
(a) 5501551C KSUs: Open the cable clamp
in the lower left corner of the KSU and
insert the receptacle end of the external power
cord into the trough; secure the cord with the
clamp.
Page 3
SECTION 518-215-407
(b) 551B KSU (MD) Only: The 551B KSU
is shipped with its power unit cord carried
through an insulating grommet in the bottom of
the KSU case. To install an external power
cord:
(1) Compress the grommet to release it from
the case.
(2) Remove the grommet from the internal
power cord.
the kit. Mount the bracket on the door of the
KSU as shown in Fig. 2. Attach the frequency
generator to the bracket with the three screws
supplied with the generator. Connect the
feed-through type plug to the external ac power
cord and, if the KSU is a 551B, to the power
unit cord (see 3.03[b] for instructions on positioning
the grommet).
CONNECTIONS
Table A provides a key to the connection
diagrams in this section for the various
models of the 550/551 KSUs.
3.05
(3) Insert the receptacle end of the external
power cord through the cutout in the
housing where the grommet was removed.
(4) Place the grommet around the external
power cord.
(5) Seat the grommet in the cutout, again
from inside the case.
(6) Connect the external power cord to the
power unit cord.
3.06 Internal Power: The 5M-type KSUs
have built-in,factory-wired power units,
and normally require no internal power wiring by
the installer unless I05-volt ac ringing voltage is
required (see 3.07 for details). KSUs of the 550-type
must be wired to a suitable external power supply
for all operating voltages. Make all external
power lead connections to the terminals in the D
or E columns on the front of the connecting block.
Inspect existing installations of 551B
KSUs for improper installation of
grommets and power cords (ie, grommet
around power unit cord). Correct
where necessary.
(c) 551A KSU (MD): Connect the external
power cord to the power unit cord through
the cutout in the bottom of the KSU case.
3.04
Frequency Generator: Install the 118A
frequency generator on the 550/55IC KSU
as described in (a) or on the 550/551B as described
in (b). Connect as described in 3.07.
(a) Attach the generator to the mounting bracket
(841720857) with the three screws supplied
(Fig. 1). Then snap the pins of the bracket
arms into the holes in the backboard flanges of
the KSU. Let the generator rest against the
front of the interrupter with its power cord to
the left. Connect the feed-through type plug
to the external ac power cord and, if the KSU
is a 55IC, to the power unit cord.
(b) To mount a 118A frequency generator on a
550/551B KSU, first install kit of parts
D-I80699; Remove the cable clamp provided
with the KSU and replace it with the one in
Page 4
If an external power source is to be
used, be sure that it can supply the
minimum 20 volts dc signal battery
required by 400-series KTUs. If it
cannot, convert the KSU to a
551-type by installing an appropriate
power unit (see Ordering Guide).
3.07
Audible Signaling Voltage: Audible
signaling can be provided at the stations
associated with the KSU on either the ringer or
the buzzer at each telephone set. Ringer voltage
must be supplied from a separate I05-volt ac source,
such as the 118A frequency generator, connected
to the RG and RB terminals on the front of the
connecting block. Buzzer voltage can be derived
from the 18-volt ac audible signal supply available
at the internal or external power unit. Connect
buzzer voltage by installing straps from terminals
G± and S± to RG and RB, respectively.
3.08
Common Audible: This feature allows
multiple stations to receive incoming call
signals from the same line and a single station to
receive signaling from several lines. Common
audible signaling is provided by strapping together
the appropriate RI leads at the connecting block
and wiring signaling voltage to the RG and RB
terminals. Auxiliary control of common audible
ISS 1, SECTION 51 8-215-407
BRACKET I N CLUD ED IN
D- IB0699 KIT OF PARTS
GE NERAT O R
Fig . 2-5 51 B (MOl KSU With 118A Frequency Generator Installed
signali ng is possible t hrough the use of a separately
mounted 227-type KTU wi red to t he co nnecting
block.
50) in the A column of the con necting block. The
KSU can accommodate a maximum of four lines.
3.10
3.09
Line Connections: Con nect the incoming
CO/ PBX lines to t he T-R ter minals (43 to
Sta tion Connectibns : Terminate t he
station cables on t he connecting block, the
first cable on column A, the second on column B,
Page 5
SECTION 518-215-407
TABLE A
CONNECTION DIAGRAM INDEX
550/551C
550/551 BIMO)
550/551AIMO)
Terminal Layout
with Station and
Line Connections
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Fig. 4
Power Connections
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
Common Audible
Connections
Fig. 8
Fig. 10
Fig. 10
Common Audible
Auxiliary Control
Connections
Fig. 9
Fig. 11
Fig. 11
Manual Intercom
Connections
See 3.11
See 3.13
See 3.13
Lead Designations
Fig. 12
Fig. 12
Fig. 12
etc. A maximum of five stations can be wired
directly to the KSU. If more stations are required,
use loop-through terminations or provide distribution
facilities. Connect the ringer or buzzer leads of
the station cables to the B1-R1 terminals.
J4 for the manual intercom KTU, disconnect the
BR-W/W -BR pair from the back of the connecting
block, and connect the pair from the other jack
as shown in Table B. Insulate and store the
disconnected pair.
Manual Intercom
Grounding
This feature is provided by installing a 401A
KTU in the KSU. In early production models
of the 550/551C KSUs, only jack J4 was factory-wired
with the talk (A) battery and ground required for
operation of the 401A. Later models (indicated by
an asterisk [*] stamped after the code on the KSU)
are wired to accept a 401A KTU in any of the
four jacks.
Any installation of the 550/551-type KSU
should be grounded and protected in accordance
with the requirements in Section 518-010-105. The
frame of the KSU power unit is grounded through
the third, or "green," wire of its power cord. The
local or circuit ground of the power unit, which is
the positive side of the dc output, should be
connected to the same ground as the system
protector. Do not connect circuit ground
and frame ground together.
3.11
The early models can be modified to accept
a 401A in another jack by disconnecting the
green wires from terminals 3 (A grd) and 18 (A
bat) of J4 on the back of the KSU, and transferring
them to the same terminals of the desired jack.
3.12
On the 550/551A and B KSUs (MD), the
talk battery terminals are factory-wired at
each KTU jack, but only the BR-W/W-BR pair on
J4 is wired back to the talk battery terminals on
the connecting block. The pairs from the other
jacks are dead dressed. To use a jack other than
3.13
Page 6
3.14
The 550/551C KSU has an external grounding
terminal, labeled LOC GRD, on the front
of the backboard above the interrupter. It is wired
internally to the power unit ground circuit at the
G± terminal of the connecting block. Connect this
terminal to protector ground with a 14-gauge wire
brought through one of the cable clamps below
the connecting block. On 550/551A and B KSUs
(MD), a multiple-post grounding terminal is located
on the top of the connecting block.
3.15
ISS 1, SECTION 518-215-407
TABLE B
MANUAL INTERCOM WIRING
550/551A AND B (MD) KSUs
TALK BATTERY PAIR
CONNECT TALK BATTERY
PAIR TO CONN BLOCK
Jl
J2
J3
J4*
550/551B
~A (F43)
W-BL
BL-W
WoO
O-W
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W
550/551A
~A (F45)
W-BL
BL-W
WoO
O-W
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W
BA (F44)
BA (F46)
* Factory-wired.
3.16
Connecting of KTUs: Insert each KTU
into its receptacle with a gentle, vertical
rocking motion until it is firmly seated. Then
lower the locking bar to hold the KTU in place.
Note: Be careful when inserting or removing
plug-in type KTUs to avoid damage to the
printed wiring and other circuit components.
Blister packs should be used when returning
KTUs.
Do not drive more than 20 line lamps
from one 400-type KTU or more than
50 lamps from one interrupter contact.
3.17
External Power Connections: After all
internal connections have been made, the
KSU properly grounded, and the KTUs installed,
connect the KSU to the required external power
source.
4.
4.01
MAINTENANCE
4.02
Interrupter Replacement: When replacing
the KS-19175 lO-volt interrupter with a
KS-19385 24-volt type, either at initial installation
or as a repair procedure, it is necessary to change
the connecting block wiring (see Fig. 5, 6, and 7).
Remove the strap which supplies IOV ac to the
motor lead (Fig. 5), and connect whatever wiring
is required to supply 24V dc from internal or
external supplies. The interrupter is removed by
loosening the captive screw in the right center of
the unit, and pulling it out of the plug.
Maintenance activity on the 550/551-type
KSUs should be limited to the following:
4.03
• Clearing wiring troubles
• Fuse replacement
• Lamp replacement
Wire- Wrap Connections: The KS-16492,
List 2 unwrapping tool should be used when
removing solder less wrapped connections on line
jack contacts, if required, for circuit testing. The
635B tool may be used to reterminate a wire on a
wrapping terminal, but wires must be soldered
when reconnected to ensure circuit reliability.
• Replacement of defective KTUs, power units,
interrupters, and frequency generators.
Page 7
SECTION 518-215-407
A
LINE 1
LINE 2
TO KEY
TELEPHONE
SETS
LINE 3
"".
[
[
[
[
T
R
A
AI
LG
L
T
R
A
AI
LG
L
T
R
A
AI
LG
L
T
R
A
AI
LG
L
VACANT • (
(NOTE 4)
BI
RI
BI
RI
BI
RI
BI
RI
CA
CA
CA
CA
AUDIBLE
SI GNAL
CONNECT! ONS
VACANT
(NOTE 4)
TO CO OR
PBX LI NES
["'"
LINE 2
[
(
(
LINE 3
(
LI NE 4
(
T
R
T
R
T
R
T
R
(A)
(B)
(C)
(1) 0
0
0
(2) 0 - - - - - 0
0
(3)
(4) 0
0
0
(5)
(6)
(7) 0
0
0
(B) 0
0
0
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13) 0
o----- - - - 0
(28) 0 - - - - - - < > - - - 0
(29) 0 - - - - - - < > - - - 0
(30) 0
0
0
(31) 0 - - - - - - < > - - - 0
(32) 0 - - - - - - < > - - - 0
(33) 0
0
0
(34) 0
0
0
(35) 0 - - - - - - < > - - - 0
(36) 0
0
0
(37) 0
0
0
(38) 0 - - - - - - < > - - - 0
0
0
(39) 0
(40) 0
0
0
0
0
(41) 0
(42) 0 - - - - - 0
0
0
0
(43) 0
(44) 0 - - - - - - < > - - - 0
(45)0
0
0
(46)0
0
0
(47) 0
0
0
(48) 0 - - - - - - < > - - - 0
(49)0
0
0
(50) 0 - - - - - - < > - - - 0
(0)
(E)
B
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
T
R
A
AI
LG
L
T
R
A
AI
LG
L
T
R
A
AI
LG
L
T
R
A
AI
LG
L
0
0
NOTES,
1. NUMBERS AMJ LEmRS I N
PARENTI1ESES ARE FOR
REFERENCE ONLY AND 00 NOT
APPEAR ON BLOCK
2. LEAD DES I GNAT! ONS ARE MOLOEO
INTO FANNING STRIPS
3. ALL CONNECT I ONS TO KTU
JACKS, BUI LT-I N POWER UNI T,
AND I NTERRUPTER ARE FACTORYWI REO ON REAR OF CONNECTI NG
BLOCK
4. VACANT TERM I NALS MAY BE USED
FOR BUTTON AND BUZZER
SIGNALING CIRCUITS, ETC.,
AS REQUI REO
0-----0
0-----0
0
0
0
0
0-----0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
MG
It!
LG
LB
G.
S.
GA
BA
GB
GB
BB
BB
RG
RB
)
MOTOR START FOR
24V OC OPERATION
)
MOTOR START FOR
10V ± OPERATION
]
POWER SUPPLY
CONNECTIONS
) TO 11 SA FREQUENCY GENERA TOR
FOR RINGING VOLTAGE
FRONT V lEW
Fig. 3-Terminal Layout of Connecting Block on 550/551C KSU Showing Installer Connections for Incoming
Lines and Stations
Page 8
ISS 1, SECTION 518-215-407
FACTORY WIRING ON TERMINAL F
DESIG STRIP
--r-:-.------------"7'''T--:--,_
(I I
DESIG STRIP
0-_>--0--0-_>--<>'
(2~ 0 - - - - - 0 - - 0 - - - - -
CO." [
(3)~
AI
(4) 0 - - - - - 0 - - 0 - - - - -
LG
(!5) 0 - - - - - 0 - - 0 - - - - -
(6) 0 - - - - 0 - - - - - - 0 - -
,."
[
(1) 0 - - - - - 0 - - 0 - - - - (8) 0 - - - - - 0 - - 0 - - - - -
(9) 0 - - - - 0 - - - - - - 0 - -
AI
(10) 0 - - - - 0 - - - - - - 0 - -
LG
(II) 0 - - - - 0 - - - - - - 0 - -
TO KEY
TELEPHONE
SETS
(12) 0 - - - - 0 - - - - - - 0 - (13)
e>----<>---o---
FACTORY WIRING
FROM CLIP F
TO JACK 1-4
(14) 0 - - - - 0 - - - - - - 0 - -
CO." [
(I!5)
0----0------0--
AI
(16) 0 - - - - 0 - - - - - - 0 - -
L.
U1) 0 - - - - 0 - - - - - - 0 - (18) 0 - - - - 0 - - - - - - 0 - (19) 0 - - - - 0 - - - - - - 0 - -
*
(20) 0 - - - - 0 - - - - - - 0 - -
CO... [
(211 0---<>--0--0---0---<>
AI
(22) 0 - - - - 0 - - - - - - 0 - -
LG
(23) 0 - - - - 0 - - - - - - 0 - (24) 0-------0------
VACANT
t (
.,
.,
.,
RI
RI
AUDIBLE
SIGNAL
CONNECTIONS
.~." [
[
,." (
LINE 2 (
TO CO
OR PBX
LINES
LINE 3 (
LINE 4 (
(27)
~
(28) 0-------0------
I~
(30) 0---0---0
(311 0---0---0
(34) 0 - - - 0 - - 0
0----0----0 (29)
I
I
(33) 0 - - 0 - - 0
(35) 0---0---0
(36) 0---0---0
CA
(37) 0---0----0
CA
(38) 0---0----0
(39) 0---0----0
(40) 0---0----0
(4 II 0---0---0
(42) 0 - - 0 - - 0
(27)
0---0---0 (28)
(29) 0 - - 0 - - 0
RI
CA
0-----0---0
(25) 0 - - - - 0 - - - - - 0 - - 0
(32) 0----0-----0
CA
(Mo) OR KS-19385,L2
VACANT TERMINALS MAY BE USED FOR BUTTON AND BUZZER
SIGNALING CIRCUITS ETC. AS REQUIRED.
(26) 0 - - - - 0 - - - - - - 0 - -
.,
RI
FOR 24V DC OPERATED KS-1938S, U
INTERRUPTER (SEE FIG.7)
0---0---0 (30)
0-----0---0 (31)
VACANT
t
0----0---0 (32)
0----0----0 (33)
I
I
I
I
(35)
(35)
(36)
(36)
(37)
MG
(38)
MB
(39)
LG
(40)
L.
(41)
G±
J
MOTOR START
FOR 24V DC
OPERATION
(37)
MOTOR START
FOR 10V:!:
OPERATION
(39)
J
VACANT
(38)
(40)
(41)
MOTOR START
(42)
S±
(42)
L8
(431
GA
(43)
G±
(44) 0----0---0
(44)
BA
(44)
s±
(45)
GB
(45)
GA
(46)
GB
(46)
8A
(47)
BB
(48)
BB
(49)
RG
(50)
RB
POWER SUPPLY
CONNECTIONS
TERMINATE HERE
(SEE FIG. 6)
J
TO POWER SUPPLY
*
LG
(43) 0---0----0
I
t
(47)
GB
(48)
8B
(49)
RG
(50)
AB
POWER SUPPLY
CONNECTIONS
TERMINATE HERE
(SEE FIG.7)
TERMINATE INCOMING SERVICE
ON TERMINAL 8.
FOR 5508 AND 5518 KSU
FOR 550A (Mo)
AND 551 A (Mo) KSU
Fig. 4-Terminal Layout of Connecting Block on 550/551A and B (MD) KSU Showing Installer Connections for
Incoming Lines and Stations
Page 9
SECTION 518-2i5-407
PART OF
CONNECTI NG BLOCK
, - - - 1-- - -
(D)
MG
TO 24V DC
SUPPLY FOR
INTERRUPTER
(NOTE 2)
TO LAMP AND
INTERRUPTER
SUPPLY
TO AUDIBLE
SIG SUPPLY
---0
[
[
[
LG
1
~
--t---
r-
I
'---t----0
(40)
1DV±
-
-I--- (
]
''----0
8-PIN
r(BL-Y)
LG
LB
--
-
r- -
18V±
(Y-BL)
-
-0
,~~-- f - - f-r - - - - - --
',-~--
---.
1'-----
1
',--
[
~-o _ _ _
+ -
1
1
I
1
1
(
1
t-o
6
1
1
I
1
1
1
1
1
I
1
I
I
~
1
I
5);--
1
I
I
i
AUDIBLE
SIG SUPPLY
1/2 AMP
24E FUSE
]
24V DC
TALK BAT
1/2 AMP
24E FUSE
]
24V
SIG
1/2
24E
t-o 18V±
-4 >+ _ ~
~ 2>1- -
]
A GRD
A BAT
4;>B GRIJ
_ _ -+_-+_...J1
--
(BK-BR)
1
- - 4
I
1)..1.- - - 0 B BAT
RG
-,r-
-- - -RB
MULTI PLED
TO OTHER
TERM I NALS
ON CONN
BLOCK
TO KTU
JACKS
1-4
NOTES:
1. DASHED LINES REPRESENT FACTORY WIRING. SOLID LINES
REPRESENT WIRES TO BE RUN BY INSTALLER AS REQUIRED
2. WHEN KS-19~85 L2 24V DC INTERRUPTER IS USED, REMOVE
FACTORY STRAP BE~EEN ~8E AND 40E ON FRONT OF BLOCK:
IF KSU IS 551C, PUT STRAP BEMEN '8E ANO 47E. IF KSU
IS 550C, CONNECT EX TERNAL SUPP LY TO '7D ANO ~8D AS
SHOI.N ABOVE
,. NUMBERS ANO LEmRS I N PARENTHESES ARE FOR REFERENCEONLY AND DO NOT APPEAR ON BLOCK
It LOCATED ON FRONT PANEL
ABOVE INTERRUPTER.
Fig. 5-Power Supply Connections for 550j551C KSU
Page 10
1
I
----t7
f--
BB
--- -0
1
GB
j/ - - 0
BB
' - - - - f--
RG
-t7
>-r- --PG
....!.
~, 1 -
1
--- -- --
~---o
I
(O-Y)
-
BA
(45)
1
1
~
--~ 8>1-- ~G
GA
-- ...,r-:--o-- -- .)-.~
CONN
~ 7
1
LOC GRO It
S±
A BAT
INTERNAL
POWER UNI T
2801 (551C
KSU ONLY)
NOTE 2)
-- f-
-G± r-/ ' - - - - , - -- -
G
TO KTU JACKS 1-4
TO
INTERRUPTER
MOTOR
r-- "T- -- -- - - - - - - --<7'
B GRD
[
MG
"<1..).-- ~
'--
TO 11BA
FREQUENCY
GENERATOR
FOR RI NG I NG
VOLTAGE
-
MB
PROV I DE STRAPS
."EN 105Vi RINGING
SUPPLY I S NOT USED
TO 20-26V DC
SI G BAT
SUPPLY
-
(
I./r-_---
A GRD
TO TALK BAT [
SUPPLY FOR
MANUAL
INTERCOM
(E)
(mj,.-- -
OC
BAT
AMP
FUSE
ISS 1, SECTION 518-215-407
TO LOCAL GRD
14 GA OR EQUIV
~_~'::'Al_--,
GROUND TERM.
/
ON CONN BLOCK
To
MG
TO 24V DC [
SUPPLY FOR KS
INTERRUPTER
E
1
1
I
F
-------+-t-I -37-'1: ...-""'-------+-t-I -38-.1.(1'1
I
-
"
TO
-+ _
MG
MB
(NOTE 21
---,
'------t-
PART OF 66B5-37
CONNECTING BLOCK (NOTE Il
t~~KS
=: =i =J ~:~OR
INTERNAL
POWER UNIT
I
2BAI
(551B KSU ONLYI
*
.. [ 1
+
L- ~ ~ rl-~ L
,,,. ,," [-"---t---,rlH-,1-4<>-I-;IJ~<>i::J.: =;~~-=~~~ I_-=-:::rlll
T~
LG
l
I 39
I---
---.----+-.-++-<>'--"'9-+-'0r
", ,
LAMP SUPPLY
lev:!:
~-
:
SIG SUPPLY
SUPPL Y FOR
MANUAL
INTERCOM
-
10V+
- --
-
---+
...L+TI-<4>-2t-<~-o-
---+-----''-+--f--o-I-<>-+-o1
__ L
_
-
P
r- - - -
I
[
_
__
~~
- - - - -i - - l_ _Tt-_~R~I~~~~~- ~.v-
148
SUPPLY IS
NOT USED
- - - - - - -
--t-..L.....--+-li-O-~'+:>--
---
(
TO liSA
FREQUENCY
GENERATOR
49
(BII
,/
: 50
V
~:~
f---- - -
T
KS-19175, LI
KS-193B5, LI (MOl
KS-193B5,L2
10V±
38E (STRAPPED TO 40El
--
GRD
37E (STRAPPED TO 39El
---
GRD
4
+-C(l8V i l
J
J
AUD SIG
SUPPLY
112 AMP
24E FUSE
20V
TALK BAT,
1/2 AMP
Lo(A BAT.l
24E FUSE
I
I
P
I
l
~(B
r
GRDI
20 V
SIG BAT.
112 AMP
24E FUSE
J
I
~ I
>-'-
--0 (B BAT.l
POWER SUPPLY
TO JACKS 1-4
I. DASHED LINES REPRESENT FACTORY WIRING,
SOLID LINES REPRESENT WIRES TO BE RUN
AS REQUIRED,
MOTOR SUPPLY
---
....", (Gl
r
r
MULTIPLED
KSU TO
EXTERNAL
POWER
SUPPLY
24V DC
t-o(lOV i l
LAMP
SUPPLY
3 AMP
248 FUSE
TERMINALS
ON CONN
BLOCK
NOTES:
~R~G~_t-_ _ _ _ _-.~
FRbM 550B
]
105V i
~~WEE~T~~~:L\. ~1.::0:::.5V:..±=-t-_ _ _ _ _ _+
T_--l
FOR RINGERS
(
I
~(A GRDI
TO OTHER
[
-,o(Gl
P
1
I
I
~
-
~.v--
1 40 7+-9-+0
I
r
B BAT.
~3~
T
1 46
SUPPLY
:
-7
4().5-1-~H>- I- _ _ _ ~Il _ _
1
B GRD
+
-
P
'1
I
8-PIN
CONNECTOR
-
A GRD
A BPoT.
20-S~~VB~$.
I-
- -
-
18V±.
....:.:...:..-=-.+
__
'o'~", [
-
L..!_ ----+f--+--~7>-r
140
I >---\r'f--<>)
..:.::..:-=--+--....L.-+........
G
TO
_
(NOTE 21
LG
--
3BE (STRAPPED TO 4701 38E (STRAPPED TO 47Fl
37E (STRAPPED TO 4501 37E (STRAPPED TO 39El
2. REMOVE FACTORY STRAPS BETWEEN 37E AND
39E AND 3BE AND 40E FOR 24V DC KS
INTERRUPTER OPERATiON, THE POWER
SUPPLY CONNECTIONS FOR EITHER INTERRUPTER
MOTOR ARE SHOWN AT LEFT,
II
8 -PIN CONNECTOR AND WIRING TO
CONNECTING BLOCK FURNISHED IN
BOTH 550B AND 5518 KSU.
Fig. 6-Power Supply Connections for 550/5518 (MOl KSU
Page 11
SECTION 518-215-407
GROUND TERM.
ON CONN BLK
TO LOCAL GRD
~
J.!.8~L
_
-
-
---,
'---,
TO 24V DC
KS
I~~:~~~P~~=
IDE
....;M"-_ _ _ _ _ _-l-(-1-<4o-0
..!L:.:;:G..!IC::OR"-,,,GR:.:;D:!..).--....+-+-<4>-'
[
+- -
r- -
+-
'43
-
+~I-+-+-<'4,...4
! ,
!
B GRD
P
-6I
-0-
-<>- _
-<>-
I
l'""
-
-
-
-- -
-<>- -
L
49 .~
....:.:.:RG'-------+--.--f-+o[
_
_
~
_
-
~~N~~: US~:tLY
-"--"'=------i---.++,-O- l'""L -<>-_
P
_
-<>-
-
__ -
+:
P
-
-
--
>+I
t~;:'
----7
_ PROVIDE- WHEN- 105V- :!:
1 47 -
B BAT.
I
L
I
·:-
-I- ~ 3
-P----
,r
148
I CO~N~~~OR
7 >r-
+- ~
-
_
---
--Q;;:;, -<>- _
r--
~::1~3~~U ~~SD~ ~~~~i
*
1
,
~ e- Tt- - -
I
-="':~----,f-H-+->-I
I
4
>t,
2
I
I
t"1I0V
]
LAMP
SUPPLY
3 AMP
24B FUSE
]
AUD SIG
SUPPLY
1/2 AMP
24E FUSE
]
24V
TALK 8AT.
1/2 AMP
24E FUSE
]
24V
SIG BAT.
1/2 AMP
24E FUSE
±)
I
I
~(G)
I
I
I
t-<>120V:!: )
I
l
f"IA-GRD)
>-t-I
I
l-oIA-BAT.)
I
~IB-GRD)
5 >-t-)-l..'
I
I
-o18-BAT.)
P
,
_1:.:0;.:5..:.V.::+:-_---l_+-+_1-<15>-0
P
-<>- _ _ _ ....!.£!iV:!:
I
NOTES'
I. DASHED LINES REPRESENT FACTORY WIRING. SOLID
LINES REPRESENT WIRES TO BE RUN AS REQUIRED.
2. REMOVE FACTORY STRAP BETWEEN 40E AND 42E
FOR 24V DC KS INTERRUPTER OPERATION. THE
POWER SUPPLY CONNECTIONS FOR EITHER
INTERRUPTER MOTOR ARE SHOWN AT RIGHT.
8-PIN CONNECTOR AND WIRING TO CONNECTING
BLOCK FURNISHED IN BOTH 550A IMD) AND 551A IMD)
KSU.
TO KTU JACKS 1-3
MULTIPLIED
TO OTHER
TERMINALS
ON CONN BLK
MOTOR SUPPLY
KS-19175. L I
KS-19385.LIIMD)
10V:!:
42E ISTRAPPED
TO 40E)
-
GRD
41E
-
24V DC
GRD
-
KS-19385.L2
-
480
48F ISTRAPPED
TO 40F)
47F I STRAPPED
TO 40F)
470
Fig. 7-Power Supply Connections for 550/551A (MO) KSU
Page 12
riG)
I
6 ,n": _
-
_ _ _ .J!'L
FROM 550A IMD) KSU
TO EXTERNAL
POWER SUPPLY
*
2)
~)~-
J!O
PO':l~R~t;NT
1
~~;~~
..!!. -
-l- INOTE
l'"":::- f- _
4-0-5
TO TALK BAT. ...:.A;....:;;.:;DC----i----r-t-.;-',
GR
SUPPLY FOR [
MANUAL
I NTERCOM
A BAT.
46
TO 20-26V DC [
SIG BAT. SUPPLY
I
+-
...;.;18,",V':±:-_ _
FOR RINGERS
-0-
1
I, 42 4 - f - - t - ..!':::OV'-'±'--_--,~+-+!-c__ ~ -0- f- _
J!0~) ~ I
I
~~G A~~~~t~ [ ,
P~~EERX~~~~~~
F
i:J
INOTE 2)
LAM/~U~PVL$
~
1
I
I
I
PART OF 66B5-37
CONNECTING BLOCK
INOTE 1)
ISS 1, SECTION 518·215·407
PART IF COONECTI NG BLOCK
(A)
TO 1ST
AUD StG
TO 2ND
AOO StG
TO'RIl
AUO SIG
TO 41\<
AUD SIG
[
[
[
[
BI
(B)
)
BI
)
BI
RI
L
BIRI
CA
CA
CA
CA
J
-I~' --0
RI
,.-
(C)
. --o-:-~
.
RI
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
:./
(0)
-....a.- - - 0
(E)
0- - -0 (28)
r--
-1-0- 1- -<>0::
I
I
J
I
-~--o
I I
.,
0- - -0 (Z'l)
NOTE 2
0- - -0 ('0)
0- -
:-:.0-:- 4-
-0 ('1)
0- - -0 ('2)
I I
J
I-I"t:.:<'_,
0- - -0 (H)
:-1-0- _ -0- I
0- -
( ~J
I "'") -
-0 (")
I
L .:-_""- _I _ ": .: .:"..(:5~ -- _(!:!~,!'-_,!!C_
L U6)
...!1---- ------: - L .: _""- _:I _": .:-_""- ~7~
L...o- - Y: _",,-_I _ " : : _..... (:8~
I
d- -
NOlES:
1. DASHED LI NES REPRESENT
FAtTORY WIRING. SOLID
LINES REPRESENT WI RES
TO BE RUN BY INSTALLER
AS REQUI RED
2. STRAP RI TERMINALS AS
REQUI RED FOR COItION
ALOIB LE SIGNALING
0- - -0(2'7)
-0
:
0- -
-0
-0 ('9)
_(!:!~1)__
IIG
Ie
0- -
0---0
0
0- - -0 (40)
L8
0- - - 0
0
0- - -0 (41)
G<
0- - - 0
0
0- -
-0 (42)
S>
T
~-~--o
0- - -0 (4')
GA
R
~-~--o
0- -
-0 (44)
BA
T
0---0---0
0- -
-0 (45)
GB
R
~--o---o
0- -
-0 (46)
GB
T
o--~--o
0- -
-0 (47)
BB
R
~-~--o
0- -
-0 (48)
88
0---0--00
o--~--o
..,... -1 (49)
0- -
"5)
: :.0- -, -;. : -.; (;6) - -
I ~)_
I
-=-~--: -;. -: -.; (-;7)
I
~ -: - ~ :.-.; (~8)
---- - - - - - - -
:
L...o- 0---0
0
0- -
0- -
Me
R1
•
R1
•
R1
FROM COM AUO
AUX CONT CKT
(227. TYPE KlU)
!l __ 2
-'"~"--~-j
e_
(LINE ,)
Re
-------If!
.., ('9)
LG
-0
0
0- -
-0 (40)
LB
<>- - ..,
0
0- -
~
(41)
G±
0- -
0
0- - .., (42)
S±
-0
•
_(!:.)N!
I
-1"7>- _
R1
*
0- - . . , (l1)
I I
)
II
I
I- I -0- I -
R1
eA
-
0- -
-~--o
R1
TO 4TH [
AUD SIG
(D)
B1
B1
TO 3RD [
AUO SIG
(e)
-....or-) -~
T
0- -
-<>- -
-0
<>- - ..,
(4l)
GA
R
0- -
--0- -
-0
0- -
-0 (44)
BA
-0 (45)
GB
T
o---<>--~
0- -
R
0---0---0
0- - -0 (46)
GB
T
0---0---0
0- -
-0 (47)
BB
BB
R
0----0---0
<>- -
-0 (4B)
T
0---0---0
-0- -
(49)
RG
R
0---0---0
0- -
(50)
Re
FROM KlU
JACKS 1-4
_(':!N! ~ __ !e_
NOlES:
1. DASHED LINES REPRESENT
FACTORY WIRING, SOLID
LINES REPRESENT WI RES
TO BE RUN BY INSTALLER
AS REQUI REO
2, REMCNE FACTORY STRAPS
FROM FR ONT OF CONN
BLOCK
* -PART OF SAf.£ CABLE
RG
105V±
TO 118A
fREQUENCY
J
GENERATOR OR
EXTERNAL RINGING
SUPPLY
Fig. 9-Connections for Common Audible Auxiliary Control on 550/551C KSU
Page 14
ISS 1, SECTION 518-215-407
PART OF 668&-37 CONNECTOR BLOCK
27~--~---o
TO 'ST [ . ,
(I F REO)
A10D;'S~~
o---~---02B
r----'---'
L._~
[
I
299----~--_o
*
AUD SIO
* STRAP
RI TERMINALS FOR
COMMON AUOIBLE SIGNAL.
0 - - - - - - 0 - - - - - 0 29
r
I .09---+-r--+--
~
[
0----0-----030
L.-;I~ __ l-__ -o*
0----0----031
r-..J
RI
~-------r~--+------'
(IF REQI
- - SOLID LINES REPRESENT
WIRES TO BE RUN AS NEEDED.
_RC;'_ _ _ _ _--!-4_ _---jr --_-'__--,
(IF REO)
TO 4TH
- - - - DASHED LINES REPRESENT
FACTORY WIRING.
I 289---~--
.,
TO 2ND
AUD 910
0----0----027
-'R::.:'_ _ _ _ _--!_ _ _--!rl--_-'
_ _ _--.
AUD SIO
[
I 329"""'"--~--
I
~
o----<>---~32
I r-~-I
I
'--~
*
33~ ----6---- -0
I
I
I
0----0----<133
i l-+I ~ri--------'---,
-+_H
I I I:
'4-r----!---
..:R:.:.'_ _ _ _ _
0----0----0.4
I I I I ~--'
L~Trr-----'
I I I I .,<;>-----0.----<>
!
IL If-+-I------,
I
L - - - -
-
-
I
0----0----03.
-t----------------~~:.!!.....!'!:.
: 1 :
LI
+__ -=-=_-_-, - - - - 3Sr-----6----o
----~-------
I
37~---b----o
0-----0-----037
L
0----0----036
L_ - - - - ---t-----------~;~:----l-----o I 0 - - - - 0 - - - - - 0 3 8
39~~=-::_--~-l--.:===-=-=:,~:
400-----0----0
4Io----~---o
420-----0----0
RC
____ ~'!!.E.!l...._"~
FROM
JACKS
'-4
___ ...!~N~~_~£.
o---~--_o40
I
I
0------0-----041
0------<>-----042
430- -
-
-0- -
--0
0-----0----043
440-- -
- -0- -
---0
0----0-----044
0----0----045
4~o_--~---o
460-----0----0
I
I
0----0----046
470----0----<>
~
0----0----<>47
'- __4~':_=__-_-:-__=__=:::"_ _ _ ~__=_~-==490------0------0
!50o------48
~::.~49
0---
---050
r
Fig. 10-Connections for Individual or Common Audible Signaling on 550/551A and B (MDl KSU
Page 15
SECTION 518-215-407
PART OF 6685-37 CONNECTOR BLOCK
ABC
27
D
J----!-----o
~_________+------+r--------_,
0----0-----027
r~~--------------_+----_1~--~R~1
.... ___ -1- ~8..r_----!--'- 29}----L----<)
I
____________~----_+r--------_.
I
0----0-----028
I
r--
0----0-----029
r-~----------------_+------f_----~R~I
30o---~--
0----<1----030
+--'
FROM COM AUD
AUX CONT CKT
(227B OR
227A (MD) KTU)
<>----<1-----031
I
I I
I 32J'""----!---
,-+-
I I I
I I I
~
33}---J...--_<>
~----o-----o
33
RI
~--
: i : ! . . :.4..r_--.l---
I
0------0-----034
L r t t i 35t-==±==d
'
-:.~=-=~--..:~
Lt
t t ~6~~±-::=-,L-t
L++ _____
I
*
37~--~--
L_
0------0---_<>35
----------
0----~--_<>37
-----r--+--+-+L-------------------..--1.. - + - -
;;;;----=-X--
- - ---- -
(LINE I) RC
(LINE 2) RC
FROM
JACKS
(LINE 3) RC
,0------0----038
39~~~--=-~~=
-r-:.=-=--=--::.~-=::
400----0----0
0----0----040
410----0-----0
I
0----0-----041
420-----<>----0
I
0----0-----042
(LINE 4) RC
_ _ _ _ DASHED LINES REPRESENT
430----0----0
0----0------043
440----0----0
0----0------044
FACTORY WIRING
SOLID LINES REPRESENT
- - - - - WIRES TO BE RUN AS
NEEDED
* REMOVE STRAPS
t
450----0----0
46<>----0-----0
470----<>-----<)
_:':-~=~~~-:
49o---~----O
500----0----0
L
1-4
PART OF SAME CABLE
I_ _:==:----048
I
,
0-----0-----045
0-----0----046
0----0---_<>47
I
o---~----~49
I' 0--lr---<>50
--------------'---iiti=====~------'-~~J
I05V±
TO IIOA FREQUENCY
GENERATOR
RG
(B KSU ONLY I OR
EXTERNAL RINGING
'-------------=
SUPPLY
Fig. ll-Connections for Common Audible Auxiliary Control on 550/551A and B (MOl KSU
Page 16
ISS 1, SECTION 518-215-407
DESIGNATION STRIP "4
T
R
TIP
RING
"A" LEAD
AI
LO
DESIGNATION STRI P "B"
II
J
·..·'m
LAMP GRD
LINE I
lAMP LEAD
TIP
RING
',',... J
"A" LEAD
AI
LG
LINE 2:
LAMP GRD
LAMP LEAD
TIP
RING
j
"AM LEAD
AI
·..·'m
LO
LAMP GRO
LINE 3
LAMP LEAD
TIP
RING
... ]
.... ,
"A" LEAD
AI
LG
LINE 4
LAMP GRD
LAMP LEAD
.,
81 OR eZI LEAD
RI
RI OR BZ LEAD
.,
.,
81 OR BZI LEAD
J
BELL OR BUZZER LEADS
FOR LINE I
J
FOR LINE 2
RI
RI OR BZ LEAD
.,
81 OR eZI LEAD
RI
RI OR 9Z LEAD
CA
COMMON AUDIBLE CONTROL FOR LINE I
CA
COMMON AUDIBLE CONTROL FOR LINE 2
CA
COMMON
AUDIBLE CONTROL FOR LINE 3
CA
COMMON
AUDIBLE CONTROL FOR LINE 4
RI
RI OR BZ LEAD
81 OR eZI LEAD
TIP
RING
TIP
RING
TIP
RING
TIP
RING
J
J
FOR LINE 3
J
FOR LINE 4
INCOMING CO OR PBX
LINE I
J
LINE 2
J
LINE 3
J
LINE 4
FOR 550 AND 551 TYPE KSU
MG
MOTOR GRO
M.
MOTOR BAT.
LG
LAMP GRD
L.
LAMP BAT.
G±
GRO
LG
s±
Aue SIG SUPPLY
LB
LAMP BAT.
GA
"A" GRO
G±
GRO
MOTOR START
LAMP GRD
.A
"A- BAT
sj:
AUD SIG SUPPLY
GB
B GRD.
GA
"A" GRD
"A" BAT.
G.
B GRD.
BA
BS
e
BAT.
GB
B GRD
BB
B BAT.
.B
B BAT.
RG
RI NG GRD
RG
R'ING GRD
RB
RING BAT.
R.
RI NG BAT,
FOR 5508 (MOl, 5518 (MOl
550C AND 551C KSU
FOR 550A (MOl AND
551A (MOl KSU
Fig. 12-Lead Designations on 550- and 551-Type KSUs
Page 17
17 Pages
SECTION 518-215-410
Issue 7, December 1976
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT & TCo Standard
SERVICE
1A2 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
PANELS
583- AND 584- TYPE
1.
If this section is to be used with equipment or
GENERAL
The 583- and 584-type panels provide mounting
facilities for t4-inch, 400-series KTUs having
I8-con tact connectors .•
1.01
This section is reissued to add information
on the 400G (CO/PBX line circuit) and 471A
(battery reversal toll restriction circuit) KTUs.
1.02
1.03
This issue of the section is based on the
following drawings:
apparatus reflecting later issues of the drawings,
reference should be made to the SDs and CDs to
determine the extent of the changes and the
manner in which the section may be affected.
Station, power and interpanel connections to
583A (MD) and 584A (MD) panels are provided
with wire-wrap terminals. The KS-16363, List I
hand grip wrapping tool should be used to wrap
stripped wires. A KS-16492, List 2 unwrapping
tool should be used to remove a wire-wrapped
termination.
1.04
SD-69502-0l-Station Systems, Key Telephone
System IA2, 583-Type Panel
Connections
See appropriate sections in Divisions
069, 074, and 075 which provide reference
guides to tool identification, parts,
operational requirements, and ordering
informa tion, plus approved
preparation procedures for
connecting wires to terminals.
SD-69552-0l-Station Systems, Key Telephone
System IA2, 584B Panel
Connections
SD-69591-01-Station Systems, Key Telephone
System IA2, 584C Panel
Connections
SD-69559-0l-Station Systems, Key Telephone
System IA2, Tie Line and
Station Line Circuits
SD-699I7-01-Low-Voltage Monitor Circuit
Power and interpanel connections to 584B
(MD) and 584C panels are made to screw
terminals. Station connections are made by using
connector cables.
1.05
2.
IDENTIFICATION
PURPOSE
tSD-695I3-01-Key Telephone System IA2,
CO or PBX Line Circuit
• To provide mounting facilities for the following
KTUs:
(a) 400-Type-CO/PBX line circuit
SD-69651-0l-Key Telephone System IA2,
CO or PBX Line Circuit (400G)
(b) 40lA-Manual intercom line circuit
SD-69921-0l-Key Telephone System IA2,
Toll Restriction Circuit.
(c) 4I5A-Automatic de signaling, private
line circuit
NOTICE
Not for use or disclosure outside the
Bell System except under written agreement
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
SECTION 518-215-410
(d) 461A-Manual signaling, ringdown
private line circuit
be installed in J13. Common leads (LF, LW, etc)
are interconnected to like-designated terminal leads
on other 584-type panels.
(e) 467A-Low-voltage monitor circuit
The 584A (MD) panel accepts thirteen 400-type,
.467A, 469A, 471A,. or twelve 401A, 415A
or 461A KTUs. The KTUs can be installed in
any connector with the exception of the 401A,
415A, and 461A KTUs which cannot be installed
in J13. The panel is equipped with a KS-15900,
List 1 (10V ac) interrupter. When it is necessary
to use 24 volts dc to operate the interrupter,
substitute a KS-19384, List 1 (MD) or KS-19384,
List 2 interrupter.
2.05
(f) 469A-Lamp extender circuit
(g) .471A-Battery reversal toll restriction
circuit.
APPLICATION
• Large centralized 1A2 Key Telephone System
arrangements.
ORDERING GUIDE
• See Table A.
DESIGN FEATURES
Panels mount on any frame structure designed
for 23-inch wide mounting plates. Each
panel is 4 inches high.
2.01
Panels are equipped with 18-pin connectors
and are primarily intended, by internal
wiring, for use with the 400-type (CO or PBX line
circuit) and 401A (manual intercom line circuit)
KTUs. .Other 18-pin KTUs such as the 415A,
461A, 467A, 469A, and 471A are electrically and
physically compatible and can be used in these
panels.. The KTUs can be installed in any
connector, with the exception of the 401A, 415A,
and 461A KTUs which cannot be installed in J13
of the 583A (MD) or 584A (MD) panel. .The 467A
KTU monitors the -24 volt signal battery supply
for a low-voltage condition. No external connections
are required for this KTU .•
2.02
The KTUs are locked into place by a slide
retainer bar furnished with the panels. A
second retainer can be installed on the bottom of
the 584B (MD) panel. This 824015945 (P-40J594)
retainer bar and three 802108001 (P-210800) mounting
screws must be ordered separately.
2.03
A.
583A (MD) and 584A (MD) Panels
The 583A (MD) panel accepts up to fifteen
400-type, or fourteen 401A, 415A, 467A,
469A, .or 471A. plug-in KTUs. The KTUs can
be installed in any connector with the exception
of the 401A, 415A, and 461A KTUs which cannot
The 583A and 584A panels are equipped with
nine cartridge-type fuses for lamp, relay,
and talk battery as shown in Table B.
2.06
Lamp supply and "B" battery fuses serve
two groups of connectors per panel: J1
through J8, and J9 through J13 on the 584A panel;
J1 through J8, and J9 through J15 on the 583A
panel.
2.07
Common control leads such as LW, LF, etc,
are factory-wired between the connectors
and are terminated on individual 302A terminal
strips serving two connectors each. These common
leads are separated into two groups and can be
associated with separate common equipment, or
included as part of other grouped lines served by
another panel.
2.08
B.
584B (MD) and 584C Panels
These panels (Fig. 1 and 2) are similar in
capacity and function to the 584A (MD)
panel. The 400-series KTUs and the KS interrupter
must be ordered separately.
2.09
The 584B (MD) and 584C panels have identical
fron t sides and accept thirteen 400-type
401A, 415A, 461A, 467A, 469A, .or 471A. plug-in
KTUs. The KTUs may be intermixed in any
connector position. A single connector (J14) is
provided for the interrupter or for a 412A KTU
(auxiliary relay circuit).
2.10
2.04
Page 2
All line and station wiring is factory-wired
from the connectors to three 50-contact
KS-type plugs numbered 1, 2, and 3 (Fig. 1 and
2) on the rear of the panel; this permits use of
2.11
ISS 7, SECTION 518-215-410
• TABLE A.
ORDERING GUIDE
PANEL
583A (MOl
584A (MOl
REPLACEABLE
COMPONENTS
584B (MOl
584C
•
•
•
•
•
Fuse, 24C (2A)
•
•
•
Fuse, 24E (1/2A)
Fuse, 24F (5A)
Fuse, 24G (1-1/3A)
•
•
Fuse
I* AGX-l
(lA)
•
•
Fuse
I* AGX-2
(2A)
•
Interrupter
KS-15900, Ll
'I t 361001
·1 t 361002
•
•
•
•
Plug, Option
834482952
(P-44Y295)
Plug, Option
814688685
(P-46H868)
•
•
ASSOCIATED APPARATUS
(ORDER SEPARATELYI
•
•
Block, Connecting,
66B4-25
•
•
Cable, Connector,
A25B, A65A, or A75B
•
•
Interrupter,
KS-15900, Ll (lOV ac)
•
•
Interrupter,
KS-19384, Ll (MD)t
or KS-19384, L2 (24V dc)
•
Units, Telephone Key
400D, 40lA, 4l2A, 4l5A
46lA, 467 A, 469A, or
471A (order as required)
•
* Bussman No.
t Littelfuse No.
t 584B (MD) and Conly.
Page 3
SECTION 518-215-410
TABLE B
FUSE DISTRIBUTION OF 583A (MOl AND 584A (MO l PANELS
FUSE
DESIGN
LF1
1
2A
1-8
1-8
LW1
2
2A
1-8
1-8
LS
3
2A
1-8
1-8
BBAT.
4
1A
1-8
1-8
A BAT.
5
1A
7&8
7&8
SPARE
6
0.5A
-
LS
7
2A
9-15
9-13
BBAT.
8
1A
9-15
9-13
LF2
9
2A
9-15
9-13
LW2
10
2A
9-15
9-13
I NTERRUPTER
CONN SERVED
TERMINAL
U· CLAMP
DETA IL
PROG RAM
8 14688685
(P· 46H8681
PROGRA M PLUG
PLUG
Fig . 1-5848 (MO l Panel, Rear View
Page 4
*
584A (MD) panel is modified to accept 412A KTU.
SCREW
BOAR D
\
TI E SU PPORT
58 4 A (MOl
CAPACITY
* Fuse 6 used when
KS·TYPE
583A (MOl
NO.
FUSE
PANEL
ISS 7, SECTION 518-215-410
400-SERIES KTUS
}
FUSE AND TERMINAL
FIELD PANEL
Fig. 2-584C Panel, Rear View
A-type connector cables for line and station
terminations.
with 24-type fuses grouped according to potential
and rating.
One A65A connector cable is used to provide
connections to a distribution terminal for
each panel; or one A75A, or three A25B connector
cables may be used in place of the A65A connector
cable. When one A75A or three A25B connector
cables are used, the last 10 pair (green binder) of
the A75A cable or the last 10 pair of the A25B
cable, connected to plug 3, are spare pairs.
2.15
2.12
Power supply wiring, interpanel strapping,
and miscellaneous circuits are field-connected
to the 46-screw terminal field of the 584B panel
or 44-screw terminal field of the 584C panel.
2.13
The 584C panel features a combined fuse
panel and screw terminal field while the
584B panel has a separate fuse panel and screw
terminal field (Fig. 1). The panels are equipped
2.14
Factory-wired options allow rearrangement
of lamp distribution and fusing within and/or
between one or more of the panels.
Lamp fusing is divided into lamp flash (LF),
lamp wink (LW), and lamp steady (LS).
For lamp functions, each panel is divided into three
groups of three lines each and one group of four
lines (Table C). No more than 50 lamps can be
supplied from any group or the capacity of
the interrupter contacts will be exceeded.
2.16
Fusing and terminal assignments of the 584C
panel differ extensively from the 584B panel.
Fuse assignments are shown in Table D.
2.17
2.18
The three 34-contact connectors on the 584B
panel lettered A, B, and C (Fig. 1) serve
Page 5
SECTION 518-215-410
TABLE C
FUSE DISTRIBUTION OF 584B (MD) AND 584C PANELS
584C
584B (MOl
PROGRAM A
PROGRAM B
FUSE
CONN
SERVED
PROGRAM C
PROGRAM A
PROGRAM C
GROUP
FUSE
CONN
SERVED
LF1
14
1-3
22
1-3
14
1-3
18
1-3
18
1-3
LF2
16
7-9
24
7-9
16
7-9
17
7-9
17
7-9
LF3
18
4-6
26
4-6
14
4-6
16
4-6
18
4-6
LF4
20
10-13
28
10-13
16
10-13
15
10-13
17
10-13
LW1
13
1-3
21
1-3
13
1-3
13
1-3
13
1-3
LW2
15
7-9
23
7-9
15
7-9
14
7-9
14
7-9
LW3
17
4-6
25
4-6
13
4-6
11
4-6
13
4-6
LW4
19
10-13
27
10-13
15
10-13
12
10-13
14
10-13
L81
9
1-3
9
1-3
9
1-3
10
1-3
10
1-3
L82
10
7-9
10
7-9
10
7-9
9
7-9
9
7-9
L83
11
4-6
11
4-6
11
4-6
8
4-6
10
4-6
L84
12
10-13
12
10-13
12
10-13
7
10-13
9
10-13
FUSE
CONN
SERVED
as receptacles for the factory-wired lamp fusing
and programming options_ One 18-contact connector,
J15 (Fig_ 2), is used for the same purpose in the
584C panel. These permit distribution and fusing
of lamp circuits, either within or external to the
panel. One 814688685 (P-46H868) program option
plug is furnished with each 584B panel, and one
combined 834482952 (P-44Y295) Program A/Program
C option plug is furnished with each 584C panel.
When the 584B panel is used alone, the
program option plug is placed in receptacle
A. When the 584C panel is used alone, Program
A is used by inserting the option plug into receptacle
J15 so that Program A may be read from the
plug top. The full· output of the interrupter is
associated within that specified panel. Under this
arrangement, fusing for an average of 17 lamps
per line circuit is provided, not to exceed 50 lamps
per interrupter contact.
2_19
Page 6
FUSE
CONN
SERVED
FUSE
CONN
SERVED
2.20
Before changing programs, remove
power cord from outlet to preclude
any possibility of blowing fuses.
With the program option plug in receptacle
B of the 584B panel and the 10-volt ac input
to the interrupter changed to ground, the entire
output of the interrupter is used to synchronously
drive auxiliary (slave) relay equipment such as the
412A KTU. All lamp flash and lamp wink functions,
including those of the master panel, are served
from auxiliary relay contacts. The 584C panel is
not arranged for Program B.
2.21
With the program option plug in receptacle
C of the 584B panel or with the Program
C side of the program option plug in the 584C
panel, half of the output of the interrupter (LF1,
LF2, LW1, and LW2 leads) is used to power an
average of eight lamps per line within the panel.
2.22
ISS 7, SECTION S 18-21 S-41 0
TABLE D
FUSE ASSIGNMENT
584B(MDI
FUSE
CAPACITY
1
2
5A
3
4
0.5A
584C
CIRCUIT
10Vae
or de
CAPACITY
LW1, LW2
LF1,LF2
LW3, LW4
LF3,LF4
CIRCUIT
BBat.
1-l/3A
A Bat.
Busy Tone
B Bat.
Interrupter Motor
Supply (ae or de)
A Bat.
LW3
Lw:t
- LF3
-LF4
5
A Bat.
5A
- LWI
1-l/3A
-LW2
6
LFl
7
B Bat.
8
9
LSI
10
LS2
11
LS3
10Vae
or de
--u:;-LS4
-LS3
-LS2
LSI
- LW3
Lw:t
-LW1
-LW2
12
LS4
13
LW1
14
LF1
15
LW2
LF4
16
LF2
17
LW3
-LF2
18
2A
10Vae
or de
LW4
20
LF4
21
LWl
22
LF1
23
LW2
24
LF2
25
LW3
26
LF3
27
LW4
f--LF1
Interru pter Motor
Supply (ae or de)
0.5A
Busy Tone
AT, 105v ae
105v ae (RN)
LF4
AT, 105v ae
29
30
LF3
LF3
19
28
2A
0.5A
105v ae (RN)
Page 7
SECTION 518-215-410
The remaining interrupter leads (LF3, LF4, LW3,
and LW4) may I>e used to power up to 100 lamps
in succeeding panels not equipped with an interrupter,
or these leads may be used to drive auxiliary relays
requiring dc power. When driving auxiliary relays,
it is necessary to provide optional wiring at the
interrupter to avoid conflict with lamp battery
supply (ac power) connected to other interrupter
contacts.
3.
support the cable(s) and to assure positive mating
of plug and connector.
Power supply connections to the panels may
be made by using separate 20-gauge conductor
cables, such as 450M (3-pair) or 451M (6-pair) cables.
3.06
Note: Where more than one supply is used
to provide 10V ac and 24V dc power, the
ground terminals of these supplies should be
bonded together.
INSTALLATION
For information on apparatus mountings or
relay racks on which panels can be mounted,
refer to Section 463-140-100.
3.01
The number of station or key cables that
can be connected directly to the panels is
limited; accordingly, a master distribution point at
large key system installations is normally required.
For further information on centralized Key Telephone
System installations, refer to Section 518-010-101.
3.02
Power connections for the 583A and 584A
panels are made to the 302A terminal strips
or to a fuse. All power connections for the 584B
and 584C panels are made to the screw terminal
field.
3.07
Verify that each fuse in the panel is the
correct rating specified for the circuit. Refer
to Table Band/or D.
3.08
Do not exceed lamp limitations of the
interrupter in the 584-type panel or of
external interrupters connected to panels. Installation
of auxiliary relays may be required to provide
sufficient current carrying capacity for:
3.09
Caution: When installing a 584C panel
in the middle of a 16C apparatus
mounting, do not plug the 400-type
KTU into Jl. This may damage the
KTU.
Note: To permit subgrouping of common
audible signal controls, with or without separate
relays or diode matrices, the line circuit leads
may be cabled from the panels to a miscellaneous
terminal block.
(a) Line lamp multiples above 20 appearances,
or
(b) Lamp flash or lamp wink features exceeding
2 amperes per interrupter contact.
3.10
Panels may be intermixed in large installations.
To assist in the distribution of visual signals
within an installation, the 584A panel can be modified
to accept a 412A KTU in place of the interrupter
(Fig. 19). .
3.03
Field cabling is dressed along the top rear
of the 583A and 584A panels and fanned
through the distributing rings to minimize congestion
with factory wiring. Station and feeder cables are
connected to the 302A terminal strips by means
of an approved wire-wrapping tool. The terminal
strips are designated A through H on the 583A
panel, and A through G on the 584A panel.
3.04
The connector cable(s) must be brought in
from the left rear of the 584B or 584C panel
for connection to plugs 1, 2, and 3. A tie point
and a U-shaped clamping. detail are provided to
Install the program plug which provides the
required arrangement.
When the 584-type panel arranged for
Program A is used to provide interrupted
lamp signals to a 597B or 598B panel, the maximum
number of 51A lamps fed by each 2-ampere fuse
shall not exceed 50. If the 584-type panel is
arranged for Program C, the maximum number of
51A lamps fed by each 2-ampere fuse shall not
exceed 24.
3.11
Table E shows lamp capacities and average
lamps per line for the 583A and the 584A,
B, and C panels.
3.12
3.05
Page 8
When it is necessary to synchronize all visual
and audible signals for a particular telephone
set, all line circuits for lines appearing on that
3.13
ISS 7, SECTION 518-215-410
TABLE E
LAMP DISTRIBUTION FOR 583A (MOl, 584A (MOl, 584B (MOl AND 584C PANELS
5848 (MOl, 584C
CAPACITY
Lamps
Average
Lamps
Per Line
AS FIRST
PANEL
EfW KS-15900,
Ll, OR
KS-19384, L I,
(MOl OR L2
INTERRUPTER
PROGRAM 8
(58480NLYI
(MOl
AS FIRST
PANEL
EfW KS-15900,
Ll,OR
KS-19384, L 1
(MOl OR L2
INTERRUPTER
PROGRAM C
AS SECOND
PANEL
WITHOUT
412A KTU
PROGRAMC
AS SECOND
OR
SUCCEEDING
PANEL
E/W 412A
KTU
PROGRAM A
583A
(MOl
PANEL
584A
(MOl
PANEL
USED
ALONE
PROGRAM A
100
100
200
200*
100
100
200
7
8
17
17*
8
8
17
* Entire output of interrupter used to drive auxiliary relays.
Lamp flash and lamp wink functions are
served from an external source.
telephone set should derive visual and audible signals
from the same interrupter.
On the 583A and 584A panels, "A" Bat.
and GRD for the 401A, 415A, or 461A KTU
is factory-wired only to connectors J7 and J8
(Table B). If other connectors (except J13) are to
be equipped with 401A, 415A, tor 461M KTU,
"A" Bat. and GRD must be field strapped between
terminal strip D (associated with J7 and J8) and
other connectors to be equipped with the KTU.
The 401A, 415A, 461A, 467A, hnd 471A. KTUs
can be installed in any receptacle of the 584B or
584C panel without additional wiring.
RC lead of the 469A KTU on the connecting block.
The lamp output is on L lead of the 469A KTU.
See Table F.
3.14
3.15
When installing a 461A KTU in these panels,
RG must be connected to GRD B as follows:
4.
Terminate station, CO, or PBX line connections
directly to panels or to 66-type connecting
blocks at the master distribution point. (See Table
4.01
G.)
Fig. 3 shows a block diagram of typical
arrangements (and figure references) of 583and 584-type panels.
4.02
4.03
• 583A or 584A Panel-strap terminal 16 to
25 on TSC for jacks 1 through 8 or TSF
for jacks 9 through 15.
• 584B-strap terminal 42 to 25 on screw
terminal board.
• 584C-strap terminal 40 to 3 on screw
terminal board.
3.16
When installing a 469A KTU, the L lead of
the 400-type KTU must be strapped to the
CONNECTIONS
Connection Index:
Fig. 4-584A (MD) Panel Equipped With
Interrupter (Panel can be used alone
and also to control one other panel)
Fig. 5-583A (MD) or 584A (MD) Panel Not
Equipped With Interrupter or 412A
KTU
Fig. 6-584B (MD) Panel Equipped With
Interrupter (Panel not used to control
other panels)
Page 9
SECTION 518-215-410
TABLE F
STRAPPING FOR THE 469A KTU IN THE 583· AND 584·TYPE PANELS
A
400D KTU
CONN
BLK
C
469A OUTPUT TO LAMPS
B
469A KTU
TERM
CONN
~
BLK
BLK
TERM
TERM
CONN
Jl
10F
Jl
8F
20F
J2
18F
30F
J3
Jl
8F
J2
18F
J2
28F
J3
J4
38F
J4
40F
J4
38F
J5
48F
J5
50F
J5
48F
J6
8A
J6
lOA
J6
8A
J7
18A
J7
20A
J7
18A
30A
J8
r-f---
J3
1
1
1
28F
f---
r-r-f---
J8
r--
2
J9
28A
STRAP
- - - ---
J8
2
2
28A
38A
J9
40A
J9
38A
JI0
48A
JI0
50A
JI0
48A
Jll
8F
Jll
10F
Jll
8F
J12
18F
J12
20F
J12
18F
28F
J13
30F
J13
J14
38F
J14
40F
J14
38F
J15
48F
J15
50F
J15
48F
f---
r-r-J13
3
3
3
28F
f---
r--
Note: Strap L lead from jack requiring lamp multiple (Col. A) to connector containing 469A KTU
(Col. B). Connect lamp leads from telset to L lead of same 469A KTU connector (Col. C).
Fig. 7-584B (MD) Panel Equipped With
Interrupter (Panel used to control one
other panel)
Fig. 11-584C Panel Equipped With Interrupter
(Panel used to control one other
panel)
Fig. 8-584B (MD) Panel Not Equipped With
Interrupter or 412A KTU
Fig. 12-584B (MD) Panel Equipped With
Interrupter (Master panel used to
control up to 200 other panels each
equipped with 412A KTU)
Fig. 9-584C Panel Not Equipped With
Interrupter or 412A KTU
Fig. 10-584C Panel Equipped With Interrupter
(Panel not used to control other panels)
Page 10
Fig. 13-584B (MD) Panel Equipped With 412A
KTU (Panel used to control one other
panel)
ISS 7, SECTION 518-215-410
Fig. 14-584B (MD) Panel Equipped With 412A
KTU (Panel not used to control other
panels)
Fig. 15-584A (MD) Panel Equipped With 412A
KTU (Panel used alone and also to
control one other panel)
Fig. 16-584C Panel Equipped With 412A KTU
(Panel not used to control other panels)
Fig. 17 -584C Panel Equipped With Interrupter
(Master panel used to control up to
200 other panels each equipped with
412A KTU)
Fig. 18-584C Panel Equipped With 412A KTU
(Panel used to control one other
panel)
Fig. 19-Modification of 584A (MD) Panel to
Accept 412A KTU
MAINTENANCE
5.
Maintenance on panels should be limited to
tracing of wiring troubles, fuse replacement,
and replacement of improperly operating KTUs.
5.01
5.02
When trouble is encountered, proceed as
follows:
(a) Determine if trouble is located at the
individual station or is common to the system.
(b) If common to the system:
(1) Check power supply and fuses.
(2) Determine which KTU is not operating
properly.
(3) Replace KTU with one known to be in
operating condition to determine whether
trouble is located in the KTU or in external
circuitry.
Fig. 20-Manual Intercommunication Connections
for 583A (MD) and 584A (MD) Panels
Fig. 21-tTypical Functional Layout of 584B
(MD) and 584C Panels Showing Line
Circuit 1 Only
Fig. 22-Connections for 471A KTU in 583- or
584-Type Panel.
Note: Be sure that applicable options are
correctly strapped on the replaced KTU.
(4) If replacement of the KTU does not correct
the trouble, it is external to the KTU
and the complete wiring should be checked.
Page 11
SECTION 518-215-410
TABLE G
CONNECTIONS TO DISTRIBUTION POINT AND/OR PANELS
CIRCUIT
DISTRIBUTION POINT
BLOCK 1
66-TYPE CONNECTING
BLOCK
LEAD
DESIG
ROW
CO
PBX
Line
1
STA
CO
PBX
Line
2
STA
CO
PBX
Line
3
STA
CO
PBX
Line
4
STA
CO
PBX
Line
5
STA
I
Page 12
T
R
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
RG
RC
T
R
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
RG
RC
T
R
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
RG
RC
T
R
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
RG
RC
T
R
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
RG
RC
COL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
W-BL
BL-W
WoO
O-W
-W-=-G
G-W
..
W-BR
BR-W
W-S
SoW
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R
R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-O
O-BK
BK-G
G-BK
------"BK-BR
~
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18 - 19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
COLOR
BL-W BINDER
F
~BK
BK-S
8-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y
Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
soY
V-BL
BL-V
V-O
O-V
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V
V-S
S-V
TERMINAL ON PANEL
583A
(MOl
IS84A
(MOl
17A
18A
19A
20A
21A
22A
23A
24A
25A
26A
1A
2A
3A
4A
5A
6A
7A
8A
9A
lOA
17B
18B
19B
20B
21B
22B
23B
24B
25B
26B
IB
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
8B
9B
lOB
17C
18C
19C
20C
21C
22C
23C
24C
25C
26C
S84B(MDI,584C
PIN
CONNECTOR
26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8
34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12
38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16
42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24
50
25
1
ISS 7, SECTION 518-215-410
TABLE G (Conti
CONNECTIONS TO DISTRIBUTION POINT AND/OR PANELS
CIRCUIT
DISTRI BUTION POINT
BLOCK 2
66-TYPE CONNECTING
BLOCK
LEAD
DESIG
ROW
CO
PBX
Line
6
STA
CO
PBX
Line
7
STA
CO
PBX
Line
8
STA
CO
PBX
Line
9
STA
CO
PBX
Line
10
STA
T
R
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
RG
RC
T
R
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
RG
RC
T
R
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
RG
RC
T
R
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
RG
RC
T
R
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
RG
RC
COL
W-BL
BL-W
WoO
O-W
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W
W-S
SoW
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
COLOR
O-W BINDER
A
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R
R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-O
O-BK
BK-G
G-BK
r---sK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y
Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
soY
V-BL
BL-V
V-O
O-V
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V
V-S
S-V
TERMINAL ON PANEL
583A
(MOl
1584A
(MOl
1C
2C
3C
4C
5C
6C
7C
8C
9C
10C
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
10
20
30
40
50
6D
70
80
90
100
17E
18E
19E
20E
21E
22E
23E
24E
25E
26E
IE
2E
3E
4E
5E
6E
7E
8E
9E
10E
584B(MDI. 584C
PIN
CONNECTOR
26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8
34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12
38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16
42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24
50
25
2
Page 13
SECTION 518-215-410
TABLE G (Cont)
CONNECTIONS TO DISTRIBUTION POINT AND/OR PANELS
CIRCUIT
DISTRIBUTION POINT
BLOCK 3
66-TYPE CONNECTING
BLOCK
LEAD
DESIG
ROW
CO
PBX
Line
11
STA
CO
PBX
Line
12
STA
CO
PBX
Line
13
STA
I
I
CO
PBX
Line
14
STA
CO
PBX
Line
15
STA
T
R
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
RG
RC
T
R
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
RG
RC
T
R
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
RG
RC
T
R
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
RG
RC
T
R
T
R
A
Al
LG
L
- RG
RC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
COLOR
G-W BINDER
COL
W-BL
BL-W
WoO
O-W
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W
W-S
SoW
R-BL
BirR
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R
R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-O
O-BK
BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y
Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
Soy
F
I
V-BL
BL-V
V-O
O-V
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V
V-S
S-V
TERMINAL ON PANEL
583A
(MOl
584A
(MOl
17F
18F
19F
20F
21F
22F
23F
24F
25F
26F
IF
2F
4F
3F
5F
6F
7F
8F
9F
10F
17G
18G
19G
20G
21G
22G
23G
24G
25G
26G
17H
18H
19H
20H
21H
22H
23H
24H
25H
26H
IH
2H
3H
4H
5H
6H
7H
8H
9H
10H
584B(MD), 584C
PIN
26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8
34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12
38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16
42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24
50
25
CONNECTOR
3
(NOTE)
Note: When using other than A65A connector cable with the 584B (MD) panel, these leads are spare and are dead-dressed
long enough to reacb any screw terminal and stored behind back paneL
Page 14
ISS 7, SECTION 518-215-410
584A (MD) PANEL
EN INTERRUPTER
I NTERRUPTER USED TO
CONTROL TH I S PANEL
CAPAC I TV 13 CKTS
MAX. 100 LAMPS (5IA)
583A (MD) PANEL
FIG. 4
TOTAL 13 CKTS, 100 LAMPS
"'" ,." Lr
CAPAC !TV 15 CKTS
584A (MD) PANEL
EN INTERRUPTER
INTER RUPTER USED TO
CONTR
AND 0 NE OTHER PANEL
CAPAC lTV 13 CKTS
MAX. 100 LAMPS (51A)
MAX. 100 LAMPS (51 A)
f--<
rIG. 5
584A (MD) PANEL
r1G.4
I NTERRUPTER USED TO
CONTROL THIS PANEL
PROGRAMMED A
CAPAC I TY 13 CKTS
MAX. 200 LAMPS (51 A)
583A (MD) PANEL
rIG. 10
\/1 THOUT INTERRUPTER
OR 412A KTU CAPAC I TV
13 CKTS MAX. 100
LAMPS (5IA)
TOTA L 26 OR
28 CKTS. 200 LAMPS
584C PANEL
EN I NTERRU PTER
TOTAL 13 CKTS. 200 LAMPS
r----
r1G.5
CAPAC I TV 15 CKTS
MAX. 100 LAMPS
(5IA)
rIG. 5
583A (MD) PANEL
584A (MD) PANEL
r--
CAPAC I TY 15 CKTS
MAX. 100 LAMPS (51 A)
5846 (MD) PANEL
EN INTERRUPTER
r1G.5
INTER RUPTER USED TO
CONTR OL TH I S PANEL
PROGR AMMED A
CAPAC lTV 13 CKTS
MAX. 200 LAMPS (51 A)
584A (MD) PANEL
.-
r1G.6
TOTAL 13 CKTS. 200 LAMPS
r1G.5
5846 (MD) PANEL
EN INTERRUPTER
I NTERR UPTER USED TO
CONTRO L THIS PANEL
AND ON E OTHER PANEL
PROGRA MMED C
CAPAC I TY 13 CKTS
MAX. 100 LAMPS (5 I A)
IG.7
TOTAL 26 OR 28 CKTS
200 L AMPS
W!THOUT INTERRUPTER
OR 412A KTU
CAPAC ITY 13 CKTS
MAX. 100 LAMPS (5IA)
584C PANEL
EN INTERRUPTER
0-
I NTERRUPTER USED TO
CONTROL TH I S PANEL
AND ONE OTHER PANEL
~:::~~~~E~3
'eKTS
WITHOUT INTERRUPTER
OR 412A KTU
CAPAC I TY 13 CKTS
MAX. 100 LAMPS (5IA)
rIG. 5
f-< ....-<
MAX. 100 LA'4PS (5IA)
FIG. II ,
TOTAL 26 OR
28 CKTS. 200 LAMPS
5846 (MD) PANEL
rl
WITHOUT INTERRUPTER
OR 412A KTU
PROGRAMMED C
CAPACITY 13 CKTS
MAX. 100 LAMPS (5IA)
5848 (MD) PANEL
~",
r1G.8
WI THOUT INTERRUPTER
OR 412A KTU
PROGRAMMED C
CAPACITY 13 CKTS
MAX. 100 LAMPS (51A)
r1G.8
584C PANEL
\/1 THOUT INTERRUPTER
OR 412A KTU
PROGRAMMED C
'-- CAPACITY 13 CKTS
MAX. 100 LAMPS (5IA)
584C PANEL
II I THOUT INTERRUPTER
-
OR 412A KTU
PROGRAMMED C
CAPAC J TY 13 CKTS
MAX. 100 LAMPS (5IA)
r1G.9
r1G.9
Fig. 3-Block Oiagram Showing Arrangements of 583A (MOl. 584A (MOl. 584B (MOl. and 584C Panels
(Sheet 1)
Page 15
SECTION 518-215-410
583A (MO l PANEL
CAPAC I TY 15 CKTS
MAX. 100 LAMPS
(51AI
riG. 5
584B (MD) PANEL
E /II INTERRUPTER
I NTERRUPTER USED TO
CONTROL UP TO 200
PANELS. PROGRAMMED C
CAPACITY 13 CKTS
MAX. 100 LAMPS (51 A)
584B (MD l PANEL
E/II 412A KTU
>----------<1----....,
584A (MD l PANEL
412A KTU USED TO
CONTROL THIS PANEL
AND ONE OTHER PANEL.
PROGRAMMED C
CAPAC I TY 13 CKTS
MAX. lOa LAMPS (51A)
loll THOUT INTERRUPTER
OR 412A KTU
13 CKTS
>-----< _----J CAPACITY
MAX.
riG. 13
r1G.12
lao LAMPS (51Al
r1G.5
, ANY COMBINATION TO MAX.
200, rIGS.I3,14,15,OR 16
EQU I PPED loll TH 412A KTUS
584B (MD l PANEL
loll THOUT INTERRUPTER
OR 412A KTU
L---_--l~:~~~~~E~3C CKTS
584B (MD l PANEL
E/II 412A KTU
MAX.
412A KTU USED TO
CONTROL THIS PANEL
.....- - - - - . . j
100 LAMPS (5IA)
r1G.8
~~~:~~;YM~~ ~KTS
583A (MD) PANEL
MAX. 100 LAMPS (51Al
r1G.14
r
~_ _ _---lCAPACITY
584A (MD l PANEL
E/II 412A KTU
..- - - - - I
412A KTU USED TO
CONTROL TH I S PANEL
AND ONE OTHER PANEL •
CAPACITY 13 CKTS
MAX. 100 LAMPS (5IA)
15 CKTS
MAX. 100 LAMPS (51Al
1
riG. 5
1-----<
riG. 15
584C PANEL
E/II 412A KTU
412A KTU USED TO
CONTROL TH I S PANEL
PROGRAMMED A
' - - - - - CAPACITY 13 CKTS
584A (MO l PANEL
WI THOUT INTERRUPTER
'----~ ~:p:~7~Y Ki~
MAX.
CKTS
100 LAMPS (51 A)
r1G.5
MAX. 200 LAMPS (51A)
r1G.16
Fig. 3-Block Oiagram Showing Arrangements of 583A (MO), 584A (MO), 584B (MOl, and 584C Panels
(Sheet 2)
Page 16
ISS 7, SECTION 518-215-410
584C PANEL
EN 412A KTU
412A KTU USED TO
CONTROL TH I S PANEL
AND ONE OTHER PANEL
PROGRAMMED A
CAPAC ITY 13 CKTS
MAX 200 LAMPS (51 A)
583A (MO) PANEL
-
CAPAC I TY 15 CKTS
r--- MAX 100 LAMPS (5IA)
FIG. 5
FIG.18
584C PANEL
EN INTERRUPTER
584A (MD) PANEL
I NTERRUPTER USED TO
CONTROL UP TO 200
~::~~; ;;R~3GR~:T~D
C
\/1 THOUT INTERRUPTER
- - - - I ~:P~~ ~~/~~
r----<
CKTS
MAX 100 LAMPS (5IA)
MAX 100 LAMPS (5IA)
FIG.5
FIG. 17
ANY COMBINATION TO MAX 200,
FIG. 14,15,16, OR 18
EQUIPPED WITH 412A KTUS
584C
5846 (MD) PANEL
EN 412A KTU
\/1 THOUT INTERRUPTER
OR 412A KTU
' - - - PROGRAMMED C
CAPAC I TY 13 CKTS
MAX 100 LAMPS (5IA)
FIG.9
412A KTU USED TO
CONTROL TH I S PANEL.
PROGRAMMED A
CAPACITY 13 CKTS
MAX 200 LAMPS (51 A)
FIG. 14
584A (MD) PANEL
EN 412 KTU
412A KTU USED TO
CONTROL TH I S PANEL
AND ONE OTHER PANEL
CAPAC I TY 13 CKTS
MAX 100 LAMPS (5IA)
583A (MD) PANEL
FIG.15
CAPAC ITY 15 CKTS
MAX 100 LAMPS (SIA)
584C PANEL
EN 412A KTU
412A KTU USED TO
CONTROL TH I S PANEL
PROGRAMMED A
CAPACITY 13 CKTS
MAX 200 LAMPS (5IA)
FIG.5
S84A (MD) PANEL
FIG.16
L-_ _ _- /
\/1 THOUT INTERRUPTER
OR 412A KTU
CAPACITY 13 CKTS
MAX 100 LAMPS (5IA)
FIG. 5
Fig. 3-8lock Oiagram Showing Arrangements of 583A (MOl. 584A (MOl. 5848 (MOl. and 584C Panels
(Sheet 3)
Page 17
SECTION 518-215-410
584A (MD) PANEL
EQUIPPED WITH INTERRUPTER
TERMI NAL STR I PS
[-24V BAT.
(B)
POIIER
GRD (B)
SUPPL Y
POIIER
SUPPLY
(NOTE 2)
LAMP POWER
SUPPL Y fOR
MLAAMXP'S'OO
[-24V BAT.
(A)
GRD (A)
('0 VAC
..:G"R"D:.....,,-_ _ _ _ _
:..Y,~~:;:
-{Q
4
:-
ri.
Itt;
.*
11~
f,;\
~H,'N~~TUER~RrU~EpT~E-R'3[:t:B ~.
@ . >)-'C.J
__' - ;f'.~.~i.•,.l,:·.•·:f-,--4.!lf.'!If_:_\::.I_'4_~_
P
:~
®
(NOTE 5)
•.
·.[,1
+-----+>>----;ffill~~~if-::----'
MG
I
@)
~~~~L ~o~~:
,k ~,!;:,I t,
®
- l:;~:'i,".,tt.'~:r[. ,_!:
~@
MG
:jf*~
LF3
II
~t~~~
•
I "'
p;
LF4
~l
!~il:i:!---4!riIH0-llJ;!l!~~hl;.......-----::::..'----LW3
LW4
,.•.: , : . . . . '
:,:.,
;.,
.•... ....
......•
[.:..1O'---'V.:..A:::.C...:O::.R:....:.:VD:.:C=----_ _ _ _ _
~~~: ~ O~ONpL;A,~M~PGS [G~R:D5
___
LS
~~m~rf: ~f- i'~f1,r.jl.~.~fi.;~~.[·t.f!·.-: ~: -i~;:.:~.i'~!.;'..:~~. __- i l~.,.,:.~.~.:.[.,: :.;'.it,x.~.!.~=~ ->-=-=.: :.: . .- -,
..
tm
LSG
V'C
M
.....
__
Q
;:"1+
(NOTE 3)
t~t~
t)
TO MAX. ONE
FIG. 5 WHEN
REQU I RED
105 VAC
(NOTE 3)
.:>
~----------4~OO]H~~f@~;f-.--4ffi.---i*;»~~~~+>'-'---'------
II r,:. (f:,~;. :
:Ilj~.
.~.:.~;.;
AT, IOSVAC, IOVAC, P
[
d~~,
::t~~~
Ii ~2'58-4~.1,i;r.[,r.',~i~~~~--:....:.:----(NOTE 4)
:.:.:.;.;.
it\
t.f:; : ~.! ~
<;.;~..
~fJ~
.••..'.i:..:!:,
..
GRD
BZ OR BT
~~N~U~~PPLY[_GR_D
111'1·
f&
RN
RNI
5T
..
.
NOTE 4
,":::~:
:..:18~V~A~C~,_-~2~4V~D~C:.....,~_ _ _ ___lti!:;+1---,*N~:---4!;:~10 ~.;.;.t.r.;.1
AUD I BLE TONE
OR RINGING
SUPPLY
RG
(NOTE 6)
ST (A OR TO)
If!:;::.: fg',..-i!J·i;;::::·:>----~.,:__-=....:::::...=.:..!...RO OR ATI
\V ~:m
GRD (B)
~t~I~I----_wm_----4ill~--_4~--------~~~------____
TO INTERCOM
(NOTE 5)
BZI OR BTl
__________-1________
GRD
11 ~,..-i!J~----~~--~~;;~~----------~~--------LF
NOTES:
I. MAKE CONNECT IONS TO TERM I NAL I OF FUSE.
2. PROVIDE ONLY WHEN USING KEY TELEPHONE UNITS THAT REQUIRE -24V BAT. (A), SUCH AS THE 40lA KTU:
CONNECTIONS SHOWN SERVES CONNECTORS J7 AND J8 (SEE FIG. 201.
3. CAN BE MULTI PLED TO OTHER PANELS, PROVIDED THE POIIER SOURCE OUTPUT IS NOT EXCEEDED.
4. WHEN RN LEAD IS LOADED TO CAPACITY, ADDITIONAL AUDIBLE SIGNALS MAY BE CONNECTED TO RNI LEAD,
PRO V IDEO THE 6A KTS AND/OR
OPTION IS NOT USED.
®
5. WHEN®OPTION IS FURNISHED,
KS-19384, L2 (-24 VDC)
INTERRUPTER CANNOT BE USED FOR 6A KTS FEATURES.
@
®
KS-19384, LI
® KS-15900,
LI
(-24 VDC) (MD)
(10 VAC)
6. GROUND SUPPLIED TO ST LEAD FROM CONNECTING CIRCUIT MUST BE THE GROUND ASSOCIATED WITH THE SUPPLY
USED TO DR I VE THE I NTERRUPTER MOTOR.
7. ADD STRAP WHEN INSTALLING 461A KTU IN PANEL.
Fig. 4-584A (MD) Panel Equipped With Interrupter (Panel can be used alone and also to control one other
panel)
Page 18
ISS 7, SECTION 518-215-410
583A (MD) PANEL OR 584A (MD) PANEL
WITHOUT I NTERRUPTER OR 412A KTU
TERMI NAL STR I P
POWER SUPPLY
[-"'W_'"
l1li
~'i
:#
III
l~~
GRD (B)
~~~-----------------------{16}-4m------~--{
c~' ~,-,.,
II
TO FIG. 4,7,
II, 13, 15 OR 18
LS
LSG
RN OR RNI
i!J
------------------------------------~~------Wi------~~__{15
~~t1
It~
11
I
Ii'
NOTES:
I. MAKE CONNECT IONS TO TERM I NAL I OF FUSE.
2. PROVIDE ONLY WHEN USING KEY TELEPHONE UNITS THAT REQUIRE -24V BAT.(A), SUCH AS THE 40lA KTU. CONNECTION AS
SHOWN SERVES CONNECTORS J7 AND J8 (SEE FIG. 20).
3. IF LEADS FROM PRECEDING PANEL ARE LOADED TO CAPACITY, PROVIDE SEPARATE RINGING SUPPLY TO THIS PANEL.
4. ADD STRAP WHEN INSTALLING 461A KTU IN PANEL.
Fig. 5-583A (MOl or 584A (MOl Panel Not Equipped With Interrupter or 412A KTU
Page 19
SECTION 518-215-410
584B (MD) PAN EL
WITH INTERRUPTER
PROGRAM PLUG IN RECEPTACLE
POWER SUPPLY
t---'2~4::"V"':B;::A"T':"l!(B~)C-------------~0 41
(NOTE I)
GRD
(~~~~ ~~PPLY
B
42
-24V BAT. (A)
034
GRD (A)
0 35
10 VAC OR VDC
LAMP POWER SUPPLY
FOR MAX 100 LAMPS
CKTS 1-3 AND 7-9
(NOTE I)
P
::c:::
36
~~
GRD ________~~~______________~044
45
10 VAC OR VDC
LAMP POWER SUPPLY
FOR MAX 100 LAMPS
CKTS 4-6 AND 1013 (NOTE I)
~38
!
(NOTE 71
(NOTE 5)
~~
________~~~~__________~046
GRD
MB
-"''--.-----«
-QgD )>--------0 13
I NTERRUPTER MOTOR
SUPPLY (NOTE 4)
--«CVXCV,
_M-'GC-_L-_ _
105 VAC
RING I NG SUPPLY
(NOTE S)
43
[
(NOTE 5)
:=-:c:~:
@
31
.:.R;.:G'-_-.,-_r-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _0-_25.....J
(NOTE
AT 105 VAC, 10 VAC,
18 VAC, -24 VDC
5)A;~
~
~
AUD IBLE TONE OR [
RING I NG SUPPLY
~~N~U~~ PPL Y [
..:G;:;R:::;D_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _- 1_ _ _ _ _ _ _
BZ OR BT
~
GRD
!
29
10
P
~~)-~~6~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~:~:~~
t (NOTERD, 61OR AT I
~ 27
P
GRD
....
~ 28
~
GRD
II
!
BZ I OR BTl
~14
(NOTE
3)
TO
INTERCOM
(NOTE 4)
ST (A OR TO)
0----~~~~~~~
0~2
__________________~
LF
NOTES:
I. WHEN MORE THAN ONE SUPPLY I S USED TO
IF 6A KTS ANDIDR
OPTION IS NOT
PROVIDE -24V DC AND 10 VAC, POWER
USED, THIS LEAD MAY BE USED TO
SUPPLY GROUND TERMINALS SHOULD
ACCQMODATE ADDITIONAL RINGERS OR
BE BONDED TOGETHER.
BUZZERS AND FUSE 21 MAY BE INCREASED
2. PROVIDE ONLY WHEN USING KEY TELEPHONE UNITS THAT REQUIRE
TO A 2 AMP FUSE.
-24V BAT.(A), SUCH AS THE 40lA KTU. CONNECTION AS SHOWN SERVES
7. ADO STRAP WHEN INSTALLING 46lA KTU
ALL CONNECTORS ON PANEL.
IN PANEL.
3. GROUND SUPPLIED TO ST LEAD FROM CONNECTING CIRCUIT MUST BE THE
GROUND ASSOCIATED WITH THE SUPPLY USED TO DRIVE THE INTERRUPTER MOTOR.
4. WHEN Y OPTION IS FURNISHED, INTERRUPTER CANNOT
BE USED FOR 6A KTS FEATURES.
®
®
cv
o
KS-19384, L2 (-24 VDC)
KS-19384, LI
(-24 VDC) (MD)
KS-15900, LI
(10 VAC)
5. FACTORY FURNISHED STRAP.
Fig. 6-5848 (MO) Panel Equipped With Interrupter (Panel not used to control other panels)
Page 20
ISS 7, SECTION 518-215-410
NOTES:
I. WHEN MORE THAN ONE SUPPLY I S USED TO PROV I DE -24V DC
AND 10 VAC. POWER SUPPLY GROUND
TERMI NALS SHOULD BE BONDED TOGETHER.
2. PROVIDE ONLY WHEN USING KEY TELEPHONE UNITS THAT REQUIRE
-24V BAT. (A), SUCH AS THE 40lA KTU. CONNECT tONS AS SHOWN
ARE fOR ALL CONNECTORS ON PANE L3. wHEN RN LEAD IS LOADED TO CAPA CITY, ADDITIONAL AUDIBLE
SIGNALS MAY BE CONNECTED TO RN I LE AD, PROV I OED THE 6A
KTS ANDIOR
OPTION IS NOT USE D.
4. CAN BE MULT I PLED TO OTHER PANE LS PROV t OED THE POWER
SOURCE OUTPUT I S NOT EXCEEDED.
5. wHEN Y OPTION IS FURNISHED. IN TERRUPTER CANNOT BE USED
fOR 6A KTS fEATURES.
584B (MD) PANEL WI TH
r NTERRUPTER PROGRAM
PLUG IN RECEPTACLE C
4.:.
V-,B:.:Ac:.
T.:...",(",B.!..)- - - - - - - - 0 41
POWER SUPPLY [_--,2c:
(NOTE I)
POWER SUPPLY
[
(NOTES I AND 2)
GRO (B)
42
-24V BAT. (A)
034
GRD (A)
10 VAC OR VDC
LAMP POWER SUPPLY [
FOR MAX. 100 LAMPS
CIRCUITS 1-13 THIS
PANEL (NOTE I)
I NTERRUPTER MOTOR [
SUPPLY (NOTE 5)
GRD
I
®
035
(NOTE
C£)
"~:
®
o
MG
__
P
~
C£)
® KS-15900,
(NOTE 9)
l~"""~:
KS-19384, L2 (-24 VDC)
KS-19384, LI
12
6
5
(NOTE
7)~
GRD
!
38
(NOTE
LSG
7)~26
~ 30
(NOTE 4)
RINGING SUPPLY [
RG
~
f
J
(NOTE
4)
~
(NOTE
7)~~
GRD
TO BUSY [
TONE
SUPPl Y
AT, 105 VAC, 10 VAC,
18 VAC, -24 VDC
r
(NOTE 5)
~
l
P
!
RG
RN
ST
RN I
(NOTE 8) RO OR ATI
f
GRD
~
ST (A OR TO)
TO
INTERCOM
(NOTE 5)
10
i ~~
0
)
,
.
9
16
1
8Z OR BT
GRD
0
P
(NOTE 3)
14
AUO I BLE TONE OR [
RING I NG SUPPLY
.
2
TO MAX. ONE
FIG. 5,8.
OR 9
105 VAC
)
~
105 VAC
FUSE.
9. ADD STRAP WHEN
INSTALLING 461A KTU
IN PANEL
LS
" " 45
~ 46
T
(10 VAC)
LW4
nc 7
10 VAC OR VDe
(-24 VDC) (MD)
6. GROUND SUPPLI ED TO 51 LEAD FROM CONNECTING CIRCUIT MUST
BE THE GROUND ASSOCI ATED WITH THE SUPPLY USED TO DR I VE
THE I NTERRUPTER MOTOR.
7. fACTORY fURN I SHED STRAP.
8. IF SA t-----:-0
~(NOTE
5)
@
"24
MG
@
@"~.n.
~
__
26
@
MG
(NOTE 8)
LW3
21
'
'U
'U
(NOTE 5)
LAMP POWER
[
SUPPLY FOR
MAX. 100 LAMPS
(NOTE 2)
FIG. 5,8, OR 9
10 VAC OR VDC
!P
GRD
1
105 VAC
[
RINGING SUPPLY
RG
LB
9
'~14
'"
~
r>
LG
16
'U
~
TO
MAX. ONE
fiG. 5,8.0R 9
n. 43
1
",,-40
RG
)
(NOTE 6)
44
(NOTE5)~>
IPS VAC
30 (NOTE 6)
RN
(NOTE 5) ------c=:28
RNI
--<.
AT, 105 VAe , 10 VAe,
16 VAC, -24 VDC
AUD I BLE TONE [
OR
RING I NG SUPPLY
GRD
P
./
41
36
'U
3
BZ OR BT
BUSY TONE
SUPPLY
[
GRD
NOTE 7
'U
~
1
(NOTE 4)
ST
ST A OR TO
22
P
~
!
GRD(B)
RO,RI, OR ATI
39
! :::
0
35
TO INTERCOM
(NOTE 3)
P
GRD
1
BZI OR BTl
Lf
Fig. 11-584C Panel Equipped With Interrupter (Panel used to control one other panel)
Page 25
SECTION 518-215-410
564B (MD) PANEL
EQU I PPED II I TH
I NTERRUPTER PROGRAM
PLUG IN RECEPTACLE C
POWER SUPPLY [
-24V BAT.
(B)
0
ADD STRAP_
POWER SUPPLY
[
GRD
I
34
35
® KS-19364,
(NOTE
[4 -MB
I NTERRUPTER MOTOR
SUPPL Y (NOTE 5)
0
36
[10 VAC OR VDC
FOR MAX. 100 LAMPS
~:~~~ I ~~O~~ I T/H IS
42
45
REMOVE STRAP_
(NOTE 7 ) _--'2o.:4-'-V...:B::.:A.c:T..:.-"(A"')'-_ _ _ _ _ _-<
...:G"'R"'D--l.'(A'-')_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _---<
(NOTES I AND 2)
LAMP POWER SU PPL Y
41
...:G"'R"'D'-->'(B'-L_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-:l.?l.-
(NOTE I)
NOTES:
I. WHEN MORE THAN ONE SUPPLY IS USED TO PROV I DE -24V DC
AND 10 VAC POWER, POWER SUPPLY GROUND
TERM I NALS ARE BONDED TOGETHER.
2. PROVIDE ONLY \/HEN USING KEY TELEPHONE UNITS THAT REQUIRE
-24V BAT,(A), SUCH AS 40lA KTU. CONNECTIONS AS SHOWN
SERVES ALL CONNECTORS ON PANEL.
3. CAN BE MULTI PLED TO OTHER PANELS, PROVIDED THE POWER
SOURCE OUTPUT IS NDT EXCEEDED.
(NOTE B)
4. WHEN RN LEAD IS LOADED TO CAPACITY, ADDITIONAL AUDIBLE
SIGNALS MAY BE CONNECTED TO RNI LEAD, PROVIDrD THE 6A
AND/OR@OPTION KTS IS NOT USED.
5. WHEN Y OPTION IS FURNISHED, INTERRUPTER CANNOT BE USED
FOR 6A KTS FEATURES.
P
@
® KS-15900,
~)~0
~
@
@
(NOTE 7)
~
P
G:D
• ~ 26
30
(NOTE 7 ) -
105 VAC
RINGING SUPPLY [
RG
t
~
7)----..C
JA
15
29
(NOTE 3)
RG
J
(NOTE 4)
0
9
,-,. 16
~
AUD I BLE TONE OR [
RINGING SUPPLY
TO
[
BUSY TONE
SUPPLY
AT, 105 VAC, 10 VAe,
18 VAe, -24 VDC
GRD
t
P
~~~
INSTALLING 461A KTU
IN PANEL .
13,14,15 AND lOR 16
RN
ST
.~
RNI
RO,ATI
t
~
GRD
(NOTE 6) ST (A OR TO)
TO
INTERCOM
(NOTE 5)
10
B2 OR BT
8. ADD STRAP WHEN
TO MAX. 100 FIG.
~
3)
(NOTE 4)
P
(10 VAC)
105 VAC
)
14
GRD
(-24 VDC) (MD)
MG
~ 5 (NOTE
~
(NOTE
LI
6. GROUND SUPPLIED TO ST LEAD FROM CONNECTING CIRCUIT MUST
BE THE GROUND ASSOCIATED WITH THE SUPPLY USED TO DRIVE
THE I NTERRUPTER MOTOR.
7. FACTORY FURN I SHED STRAP.
13
33
12
........
MG
L2 (-24 VDC)
KS-19384, LI
P
t
GRD
B2 I OR BT I
0
2
LF
0
0
0
0
6
LF3
6
LF4
5
LII3
7
LW4
J""". '",
13,14,15 ANDIOR 16
m.
Fig. 12-5848 (MD) Panel Equipped With Interrupter (Master panel used to control up to 200 other panels
each equipped with 412A KTU)
Page 26
ISS 7, SECTION 518-215-410
584B(MD) PANEL
EQU I PPED WI TH 412A KTU
PROGRAM PLUG IN RECEPTACLE C
_-~2~4_V~B_A_T~.(~B~)______________________~41
("''''~
POWER SUPPLY
(NOTE I)
31
27
13
10
GRD(B)
[
42
-24V BAT. (A)
034
035
43
LAMP POWER SUPPLY [10 VAC OR VDC
FOR MAX. 100 LAMPS
CI RCU I TS 1-13
35
(NOTE 5)
TH I S PANEL
GRD
(NOTE I)
-"""-----------...L----------------0 44
(NOTE 5)~
NOTES:
I. WHEN MORE THAN ONE SUPPLY I S USED TO PRO V I DE
-24V DC AND 10 VAC POWER, POWER SUPPLY GROUND
TERMI NALS ARE BONDED TOGETHER.
2. PROVIDE ONLY WHEN USING KEY TELEPHONE UNITS,
THAT REQUIRE -24V BAT,(A). SUCH AS THE 40lA
KTU. CONNECT I ON AS SHOWN SERVES ALL
CONNECTORS ON PANEL.
3. I F LEADS FROM PRECED I NG PANELS ARE LOADED TO
CAPAC I TY, PROV I DE SEPARATE RING I NG SUPPLY TO
TH I S PANEl.
4. CAN BE MULTI PLED TO OTHER PANELS PROVIDED
THE OUTPUT OF POWER SOURCE I S NOT EXCEEDED.
5. DISTRIBUTE PANELS BETWEEN LF3, LW3, OR LF4,
LW4 LEADS.
5. FACTORY FURN I SHED STRAP.
7. ADO STRAP WHEN INSTALLING 461A KTU IN PANEL.
(NOTE 7)
38
LS
45
LAMP POWER SUPPLY [ 10 VAC OR VDC
FOR MAX. 100 LAMPS
(NOTE I)
GRD
LSG
45
FIG. 14,15. OR 16
~-"--------'---------_((r"_t------------=""---
RING I NG SUPPL Y
[. .:~.:. : :. .5_VA_C
_____
_,1
105 VAC
RG
.
I
.
26
(NOTE 5) '--..':
REMOVE STRAP
NOTE 3
30
NOTE 4
(NOTE 3)
~
(NOTE 4)
MG
.
.
105 VAC
RG
MG
,.,.12
~:(NOTE
6)
33 ___ REMOVE STRAP
TO FI G. 12
LW3 OR LW4
ST
(NOTE 5)
LF3 OR LF4
ADD STRAP
(NOTE 5)
RN OR RN I
TO
MAX. ONE
FIG.SORB
I I ___ ADD STRAP
0
-----"1
ST
14
9
15 ___ (NOTE 6)
2U~REMOVE
STRAP
RN OR RN
LF3
LF4
LW3
LW4
Fig. 13-5848 (MO) Panel Equipped With 412A KTU (Panel used to control one other panel)
Page 27
SECTION 518-215-410
584B (MO) PANEL
EQUIPPED IIITH 412A KTU
PROGRAM PLUG I N RECEPTACLE A
__-~24~V~BA~T~.~(B~)__________________~41
I,,"")~
POIIER SUPPLY
(NOTE I)
31
27
13
10
42
NOTES'
I.
WHEN MORE THAN ONE SUPPLY IS USED TO
PROVIDE -24 VOC AND 10 VAC POWER, POWER
SUPPLY GROUND TERMINALS ARE BONDED
TOGETHER.
2. PROVIDE ONLY IIHEN USING KEY TELEPHONE
UNITS THAT REQUIRE -24V BAT, (A), SUCH AS
THE 401 A KTU.
CONNECT ION AS SHOIIN
SERVES ALL CONNECTORS ON PANEL.
3. I f LEADS fROM PRECEO I NG PANELS ARE LOADED
TO CAPACITY, PROVIDE SEPARATE RINGING
SUPPLY TO THIS PANEL.
4. DISTRIBUTE PANELS BETWEEN Lf3,L1I3 OR Lf4,
LII4 LEADS.
5. FACTORY fURNISHED STRAP.
6, ADD STRAP WHEN INSTALLING 461A KTU
IN PANEL.
REMOVE STRAP
(NOTE 6)
MG
ST
FIG. 12,17 OR 18
Lf3 OR Lf4
(NOTE 4)
ADD STRAP--+-
LW3 OR LW4
(NOTE 5)
(NOTE 4)
ADO STRAP-L--G'F--'
RN OR RNI
29
Fig. 14--584B (MO) Panel Equipped With 412A KTU (Panel not used to control other panels)
Page 28
ISS 7, SECTION 518-215-410
5B4A {MOl PANEL
EQUIPPED WITH 412A KTU
{MODIFIED PER FIG.191
TERM I NAL STR I P
FUSE
DESIG
{NOTE II
-24V BAT. {BI
POWER [
SUPPLY
-'G"'R"'OC.l!{B"I_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _...".(
{NOTE 61
POWER [-24V BAT. {AI
SUPPLY
{NOTE 21
..:Gc.:R:;:.O..:.{:.:.AI:...._ _ _ _ _ _ _......::=:::...--fH
LAM P POWER [10 VAC OR VDe
~ ~~~"I:·
..;,G,.R"'D'-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _...,
~~$i
X SUPPL
MA . Ig~TSAI_t3
L:u~;L;~;i~
MAX. 100 ~~~~S
RINGING
LS
VAc.:C:....::0:.:.R...:V..:D..:C_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _--ii-__filllf_-_4@--{01.:
[_1;.::0'-"
-'G'-'R~D~_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _--ii-__filllf_-_4ffit---t~I_--------...:L:.:.S..:G
ttl
(NOTE 41
I
I
""""
_R_G_~~~~~~~~~~~~~'l) :NO>T-E~4~I-l*!+~...,~r~t_-~~~~i~---i~-'{~N~0~T=E_3:;:.1~~(
w,~{ ::::
••
MG
I
ftt;
""II
ST
FIG. 12.17 OR 18
LF3 OR LF4
{NOTE 51
LW3 OR LW4
{NOTE 51
RN OR RNI
G0~~
B
'"".-'RG~
••_ _ _
__________
M_G
ST
@
@
TO
MAX. ONE
FIG. II
f.:\
RN OR RN I
~}-.-----------
Ci)~1~i~i---------~~:~:
~~l@i~1---------Lc.:W~3
G)~.~j@~-----
~~li·n~\---------'L:.:.W~4:~
fu~~+~.
NOTES:
1.
MAKE CONNECTIONS TO TERMINAL 1 OF FUSE.
2.
PROVIDE ONLY WHEN USING KEY TELEPHONE UNITS THAT REQUIRE -24V
BAT (Ai, SUCH AS THE 401A KTU. CONNECTION AS SHOWN SERVES
CONNECTORS J7 AND Ja (SEE FIG. 20t
3.
CAN BE MULTIPLEO TO OTHER PANELS PROVIDED THE OUTPUT OF POWER
SOURCE I S NOT EXCEEDED.
4.
If LEADS FROM PRECEEDING PANELS ARE LOADED TO CAPACITY,
PROVIDE SEPARATE RINGING SUPPLY TO THIS PANEL.
5.
DISTRIBUTE PANELS BETWEEN lF3, LW3 OR lF4, LW4 LEADS.
6.
AOD STRAP WHEN INSTALLING 461A KTU IN PANEL
Fig. 15-584A (MO) Panel Equipped With 412A KTU (Panel used alone and also to control one other panel)
Page 29
SECTION 518-215-410
584C PANEL
EQUIPPED WITH 412A KTU
US I NG PROGRAM A PLUG
-24V BAT. (B)
POWER SUPPLY
(NOTE I)
ADD STRAPS
41
43
GRD (B)
[ t...l+L-__________
-24VBAT.(A)
POWER SUPPLY
(NOTES I AND 2)
..cG::..Rc:.D-"'-(A:..:)_ _ _
10 VAC OR VDC
LAMP POWER SU PPL Y [
FOR MAX. 100 LAMPS
CIRCUITS 1-3 AND
7-9 THIS PANEL
(NOTE I)
GRD
10 VAC OR VOC
LAMP POWER SUPPLY
FOR MAX.
P
0 7
5
0
I
6. ADD STRAP WHEN INSTALLING 461A KTU IN PANEL
P
~'8
'""" " ~~
P
[
(NOTE 6)
(NOTE 5)
100 LAMPS
CI RCU ITS 4-6 AND
10-13 THIS PANEL
(NOTE I)
NOTES:
I. WHEN MORE THAN ONE SUPPLY I S USED TO PRO V I DE
-24V DC AND 10 VAC POWER, POWER SUPPLY GROUND
TERMI NALS ARE BONDED TOGETHER.
2. PROV I DE ONLY WHEN US I NG KEY TELEPHONE UN ITS
THAT REQUIRE -24V BAT.(A). SUCH AS 40lA KTU.
3. I F LEADS FROM PRECED I NG PANEL ARE LOADED TO
CAPACITY, PROVIDE SEPARATE RINGING SUPPLY TO
THIS PANEL.
4. DISTRIBUTE PANELS BETWEEN LF3, LW3 OR LF4,
LW4 LEADS.
5. FACTORY FURNISHED STRAP.
GRD
IDS VAC
44
(NOTE 5)
RING I NG SUPPLY (...:R"G:-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _,
I OS VAC
RG
.1
.1
(NOTE 3)
REMOVE STRAP
42
40
(NOTE 3)
(NOTE 5)
MG
ST
STRAP
022
TO FIG. 12, 17, OR 18
LF3 OR LF4 (NOTE 4)
30
ADD STRAP
LW3 OR LW4 (NOTE 4)
ADD STRAP
RN OR RNI
~24
:---;; REMOVE
34
=c::
(NOTE 5)
REMOVE STRAP
28
Fig. 16-584C Panel Equipped With 412A KTU (Panel not used to control other panels)
Page 30
ISS 7, SECTION 518-215-410
-24V BAT,(B)
POWER SUPPLY
[
GRo(B)
P
-24V BAT, (A)
POWER SUPPLY
(NOTES I AND 2)
t
[
GRo (A)
10 VAC OR VDC
LAMP POWER SU PPL Y
FOR MAX. 100 LAMPS
CIRCUITS
[
1-13 THIS
584C PANEL WITH
I NTERRUPTER US I NG PROGRAM
C PLUG
NOTES:
REMOVE
14 I. PROVIDE ONLY WHEN USING KEY TELEPHONE UNITS THAT
STRAP
REQUIRE -24V BAT.(A), SUCH AS 40lA KTU.
2. WHEN MORE THAN ONE SUPPLY I S USED TO PROV I DE
-24 VDC AND 10 VAC, POWER SUPPLY GROUND TERMINALS
(NOTE 3)
ARE BONDED TOGETHER.
3. FACTORY FURNISHED STRAP.
4. WHEN RN LEAD I S LOADED TO CAPAC I TV, ADO I T I ONAL
AUDIBLE SIGNALS MAY BE CONNECTED TO RNI LEAD,
PROV IDEO THE 6A KTS ANDIOR
OPTION IS NOT USED.
5. WHEN Y OPTION IS FURNISHED, INTERRUPTER CANNOl
USED FOR 6A KTS FEATURES.
KS-19384,L2(-24 VDC)
18
@ KS-19384,lI (-24 VDC )(MD)
(NOTE 3)
@KS-15900,lI OR (10 VAC)
::
ADD STRAP
GRD
PANEL
@
MB
[ -M-G----«
-----«
0
~~ )>-(N-0-TE-3-)--
37
24
®
o
6. CAN BE MULTI PLED TO OTHER PANELS PRO V I OED THE
POWER SOURCE OUTPUT I S NOT EXCEEDED.
7. GROUND SUPPLI EO TO ST LEAD FROM CONNECT I NG
C I RCU I T MUST BE THE GROUND ASSOC I ATED WITH THE
SUPPLY USED TO OR I VE THE I NTERRUPTER MOTOR.
8. AOD STRAP WHEN INSTALLING 461A KTU IN PANEL
/'''\;
26 (NOTE 8)
MG
->----4o-+...:..;...~'-'--------
@
30
(NOTE 3)
28
_105
VAC----.-----_
0
f
AUD I BLE TONE OR
RINGING SUPPLY
AT, 105
-24 VDC
GRD
(NOTE 3)
105 VAC
RG
22
ST
41
ST(A OR TO)
(NOTE 7)
VAe, 10 VAC, 18 VDC
•
0
P
GRD(B)
38
34
TO BUSY
TONE SUPPLY
[
BZ OR BT
GRD
TO MAX. 200
FIG. 14,15,16 OR 18
RNI
RG
[
RN
(NOTE 4)
«
!
[
RINGING SUPPLY
(NOTE 4)
43
•
0
0
P
t
0
0
:::
.
RO,R I
OR ATI
TO I N1ERCOM
(NOTE 5)
39
36
32
•
P
t
GRD
BZ I OR BTl
35
LF
21
LW3
0
0
23
0
TO MAX.
LW4
100
FIG. 14,15,16 OR 18
0
29
0
31
LF4
LF3
J
Fig. 17 -584C Panel Equipped With Interrupter (Master panel used to control up to 200 other panels each
equipped with 412A KTU)
Page 31
SECTION 518-215-410
B,-,l'--t-=:::====~i:J
V-;;B;CA:.cT-=-..:c(
POWER SUPP LY [-;-;:;2;;;4-C
_G_R.cD..:.(B-:..l----'-I------~-<
20
I
12
13
16
22
24V BAT.@!--+<
(B)
I
17
23
(LAMP
UPPLY) 30
4
C§f-+-<
I
~J
~A
I
PA
24
I
FUSE
[ -24V BAT(A)
I
POWER SUPPLY
(NOTE I)
GRO (AI
( -24V BAT(A)
(NOTE 2)
21~
~6E'[
22~
(SPARE)
30 ~
(SPARE)
I
I
40lA KTU
------+
18
14
I
2
9
I
10
T
23:::
T
R
24;
R
A
25",
A
~
I
3
4
5
I
CONN
J8
I
(SPARE)
~
SPARE CONTA
FOR CONT
PURPOSE S AS
REQU IRED.
TO
TEL SET
(LINE 8)
GRO (A)
'rf~
I
18
I
I
I
)
12
j!~=1 ~I
13
16
AI
26"
AI
6 -24V BAT@!--+<
(B)
I
17
LG
27
LG
4
L
28
(LAMP ~
7 SUPPLY) 30
I
L
~A
I'
DA
8
I
'---
NOTES:
1.
A MAXIMUM OF SIX 401A KTUS CAN BE SERVED THROUGH FUSE 5.
-24V BAT. (A) MUST BE SUPPLI ED THROUGH A SPARE FUSE.
2.
IF ADDITIONAL 401A KTUS ARE REQUIRED, MULTIPLE TO ANY DESIRED TERMINAL STRIP
STRIP G (CONN J13), WITHIN THE LIMITATIONS OF NOTE 1-
*
IF ADDITIONAL 401A KTUS ARE REQUIRED,
EXCEPT TERMINAL
A MAXIMUM OF 3 STATION CABLES OR 2 STATION CABLES AND A DISTRIBUTING CABLE CAN CONK£eT DIRECTLY
TO PANEL.
FURNISHED WITH BASIC WIRING OF PANEL. FOR CLARITY, SAME TERMINAL SHOWN TWICE.
Fig, 20-Manual Intercommunication Connections for 583A (MOl and 584A (MOl Panels
Page 34
DISTRIBUTING
TERMINAL
KEY TEL SET
PICK
UP KEY
sWI TCHHOOK
CO OR PBX
LINE CKT
C
-
CONN
CABLE
4QO-TYPE KTU
584B (MD)
(W-BL)
R
26
(BL-W) I
R
I
(O-W)
I
(W-O)
I
(W-G)
R
2
)~:----------------------------------~~(
28
:
T
I(
)~:~------------------------------------~-r
14
13
12
I
I(
)~~:----------------------------------------------H
I
I
16
I
)~IL-
3
:6(C41@~
w
I
105 VAC
: 5(C21
II
~
I
INTERRUPTER
PROV I DE 24 VDC
@STEADYAUDIBLESIGNAL
KTU
OPTIONS
[
® INTERRUPTED
® STEADY HOLD
@
*
10 VAC OR VDC
POWER
SUPPLY
GRD (LAMP)
r
i'O(AIl
~
I 0
8 7(A21
1
7
I
I
5
8
I
AUDIBLE SIGNAL
IJ
LAMP
WINKING HOLD LAMP
584B (MD) PANEL ONLY. PROGRAM
PLUG IN 584C PANEL DOES NOT
SWITCH THESE CONDUCTORS.
( I 5848 PANEL TERM I NAL NUMBERS.
A
'~®
(10 VAC)
(MD)
PROV I DE 24 VDC
I
: 9(A31
LS I
OPTIONS:
O Ks-15900.LI
[0 KS-19384.LI
INTERRUPTER
® Ks- 19384. L2
C
I
I
I
I
I
105 VAC I
10
PANEL
OPT IONS
-24
~I
: '.~
~~
RG
I
I
____________________________________ RC : (
-
W
I
)~:~----------------------------------~-HII (
I
~
: A
I
A
L
4
5
I
:<
R I
I
I
(S-W)
)c:'NN I
I
)~~i----------------------------------------~
:<
I
I
(BR-W) I
RC
T
I
27
I
I
(NOTE II
584C PANEL
I
I
I
GRD (B)
NOTE:
TERMI NALS SHOWN WITHOUT PARENTHESIS ARE FOR
400D. THOSE IN PARENTHESIS ARE FOR 400G.
i
I
3 ( 421 I-It3 AMP
r,.
17
B
~-24V
I 8
GB I
15
~I'
I
PLUG*
'~t! ::I"~'
>----<
0---<
I
II>
....
II>
PROGRAM
35
Vi
,
I
I
I
I
~
LF
19
Fig. 21-.Typical Functional Layout of 5848 (MDl and 584C Panels Showing Circuit 1 Onl)1l
!S
oz
'"
7
c
HCO)
TO CO( R(CO)
LINE
AW)
Jl
lA
2A
3A
4A
SA
lOA
J2
llA
12A
13A
14A
lSA
20A
BLOCK 1
J4
J3
21A
31A
22A
32A
23A
33A
24A
34A
2SA
3SA
30A
40A
JS
41A
42A
43A
44A
4SA
SOA
J6
IF
2F
3F
4F
SF
10F
J7
llF
12F
13F
14F
lSF
20F
BLOCK
J8
21F
22F
23F
24F
2SF
30F
2
J9
31F
32F
33F
34F
3SF
40F
Jl0
41F
42F
43F
44F
4SF
SOF
Jll
lA
2A
3A
4A
SA
lOA
J12
llA
12A
13A
14A
lSA
20A
BLOCK
J&
21F
2ZF
23B-F
24B-F
2SB-F
26B-F
27B-F
28B-F
29B-F
30B-F
Z
J9
31F
32F
33B-F
34B-F
3SB-F
36B-F
37B-F
38B-F
39B-F
40B-F
Jl0
41F
4ZF
43B-F
44B-F
4SB-F
46B-F
47B-F
4&B-F
49B-F
SOB-F
Jll
lA
2A
3A-E
4A-E
SA-E
6A-E
7A-E
8A-E
9A-E
10A-E
J12
llA
12A
13A-E
14A-E
lSA-E
16A-E
17A-E
18A-E
19A-E
20A-E
BLOCK 3
J13 J14*
21A 31A
22A
32A
23A
33A
24A
34A
2SA
3SA
30A
40A
J1S*
41A
42A
43A
44A
4SA
SOA
BLOCK
J13
21A
2ZA
23A-E
Z4A-E
ZSA-E
26A-E
27A-E
28A-E
29A-E
30A-E
J1S*
41A
42A
43A-E
44A-E
4SA-E
46A-E
47A-E
48A-E
49A-E
SOA-E
~ 14J
9
kk
12 TO
13 471A
16 KTU
1
UNRESTR I CTED
TELEPHONE
SET
*S&3A PANEL ONLY
r--t--"'f--
RESTRICTED
TELEPHONE
SET
Jl
lA
2A
HSTA> 3A-E
R(STA) 4A-E
A '--------.... SA-E
Al 6A-E
LG 7A-E
L &A-E
RG 9A-E
RC 10A-E
J2
llA
12A
13A-E
14A-E
lSA-E
16A-E
17A-E
18A-E
19A-E
ZOA-E
BLOCK 1
J3
J4
21A
31A
ZZA
32A
Z3A-E 33A-E
Z4A-E 34A-E
ZSA-E 3SA-E
26A-E 36A-E
Z7A-E 37A-E
28A-E 38A-E
29A-E 39A-E
30A-E 40A-E
JS
41A
4ZA
43A-E
44A-E
4SA-E
46A-E
47A-E
48A-E
49A-E
SOA-E
J6
J7
IF
llF
2F
lZF
3B-F 13B-F
4B-F 14B-F
SB-F lSB-F
6B-F 16B-F
7B-F 17B-F
8B-F 18B-F
9B-F 1.9B-F
10B-F 20B-F
Fig. 22-lk:onnections for 471A KTU in 583- or 584-Type PaneHi
3
J14*
31A
32A
33A-E
34A-E
3SA-E
36A-E
37A-E
38A-E
39A-E
40A-E
~
Q
14
9
12
TO
13 40016 TYPE
kTU
-< 8
-<
ADDENDUM S 18-215-417
Issue 1, March 1978
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT & TCo Standard
SERVICE
1A2 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
597- AND 598-TYPE PANELS
1.
Fig. 27.1-400H KTU (CO or PBX Line
Circuit)
GENERAL
This addendum supplements Section
518-215-417, Issue 5. Place these pink
sheets ahead of Page 1 of this section.
1.001
2.003
This addendum is issued to add information
on the following KTUs:
1.002
On Page 6, after Fig. 49 of the list of
illustrations, add the following:
Fig. 49.1-498A KTU (Music-On-Hold)
2.004
• 400H KTU (CO/PBX Line Circuit)
On Page 5, add the following paragraph
after 4.02( c):
• 498A KTU (Music-On-Hold).
The 498A KTU should be used for four
circuits only. The 1I6Al circuit module
should not be added to this unit because of wiring
incompatibility in the 598-type panel.
4.03
2.
CHANGES TO SECTION
On Page 4, Table A is revised to show
the addition of the 400H and 498A KTUs.
A revised Table A is shown in this addendum.
2.001
2.005
On Page 15, add Fig. 10.1.
On Page 5, to the list of illustrations shown
under CONNECTION INDEX, add the
following in. numerical sequence:
2.006
On Page 32, add Fig. 27.1.
Fig. 10.1-400H KTU (CO or PBX Line
Circuit)
2.007
On Page 54, add Fig. 49.1.
2.002
NOTICE
Not for use or disclosure outside the
Bell System except under written agreement
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
ADDENDUM 518-215-417
TABLE A
KTUs USED IN 597B AND 598B PANELS
PANELS
KTU
FUNCTION
5986
4000 (MOl
400G
400H
co or PBX Circuit
-t
-t
401A
Manual Intercom Line Circuit
-t
-t
413A
Auxiliary Ringup Circuit
-t
-t
414A
Manual Signaling, Ringdown Tie Line Circuit
-
-t
415A
Automatic, DC Signaling, Tie Line Circuit
-t
-t
416A
Station Line Circuit
-
-t
417A
Add-On Conference Circuit
418A
Short Range, DC Signaling, Tie Line Circuit
-
420A
Long Line Circuit
-t
Power Failure Transfer Circuit
421A
Audible Signal Suppression Circuit
-t
-t
- - -t
-*
422B
Station Busy Selector Circuit
423A
Dial Tone, Busy Tone, and Audible Ringback Tone Circuit
428A
Multiline Exclusion Circuit
-
429A (MOl
429B
Supplementary Hold Detector Circuit
•
430A
Flutter Generator Circuit
448A
Variable Delay Timer Control
449A
Immediate Transfer Control Circuit
461A
Manual Signaling, Ringdown Tie Line Circuit
469A
Lamp Extender Circuit
471A
Battery Reversal TaU Restriction Circuit
498A
Music-On-Hold
* Will transfer only one circuit.
t Not recommended for initial installations; use for growth only when necessary .
• Usable as indicated.
Page 2
5976
-
·t
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ISS 1, ADDENDUM 518-215-41 7
FIELD
CONNECTIONS
BlKS 1 AND 3
lEFT -HAND BlKS
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE ONLY.
PART OF 9140 CONN
BlKS 2 AND 4
RIGHT -HAND BlKS
~~N~~X (~:~----II-;-~TI-;:~I~::ill~~~~JI-;:~:rl~:~;l1r;:;;:11--"""------=-=-----_!~ ~4
T
R
TO KEY
STATION
A
Al
lG
l
TO
[B OR Bl
AUDIBLE
SIGNAL
R OR
7
13
19 25 31
37
8
14
20 26 32
38
3
9
15
21
27 33
39
4
10 16
22 28 34
40
5
11
23
29 35
41
6
12 18
24 30 36
42
17
--+<
12
,....-f<
16
--+<
13
TO
400H
KTU
I
~8
® ®®
~~~
TO DIODE
MATRIX
1
2
( ~ 0T
1'0
TO RELAY
CONTROL
NOTES:
1. COLUMN ASSIGNMENTS FOR lEFT -HAND BlK IS A-E AND FOR RIGHT -HAND BlK IS
F-B. SEE BLOCK OIAGRAM OF 68B4-25 CONN BlK IN FIG. 5.
2. RING TIMEOUT IS NOT ADJUSTABLE; OCCURS IN 5 TO 8-1/2 SECONDS.
OPTION
FEATURE
PLUG
POSITION
W
INTERRUPTED RING
A2-A3*
V
COMMON AUDIBLE
WITH RELAY CONTROL
Al-A3
X
COMMON AUDIBLE
WITH DIODE MATRIX
S
lONG HOlO RlS
#1 ESS, #2 ESS, 812
770, DIMENSION PBX
Bl-B2*
R
SHORT HOLD RlS
All OTHERS
B2-B3
TOP VIEW OF OPTION-HANDLE ASSEMBLY. OPTION SYMBOLS
SHOWN CONNECTED ARE FACTORY-INSTAllED OPTIONS.
*FACTORY PROVIDED
Fig. 10.I-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 400H KTU (CO or PBX Line Circuit) in 597-Type Panel
Page 3
ADDENDUM 51 8-215-417
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE ONLY.
PART OF 914A CONN
~____~~tt~~_________________lH,~~4
T
R
A
A1
lG
l
TO KEY
STATION
8 OR 81
TO AUOIBlE [
SIGNAL
R OR
1
2
3
4
5
6
~G
®
( ~ @T-
12
13
33
34
35
36
37
38
16 TO
400H
KTU
8
3387
~'---'---'----'
6
.
®®
~~~
TO DIODE
MATRIX
I I
17
18
19
20
21
22
5
2221
<1
ICV
TO RELAY
CONTROL
NOTES:
1. COLUMN ASSIGNMENTS FOR lEFT -HAND BlK IS A-E AND FOR RIGHT 8lK IS
F-8. SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM OF 6684-25 CONN BlK IN FIG. 5.
2. TERMINALS 33 THRU 48 ARE SPARES ON CONN BlKS 9 AND 1D.
3. RING TIMEOUT IS NOT ADJUSTA8lE; OCCURS IN 5 TO 8-1/2 SECONDS.
OPTION
W
V
X
S
TOP VIEW OF OPTION-HANDLE ASSEMBLY. OPTION SYMBOLS
SHOWN CONNECTED ARE FACTORY-INSTAllED OPTIONS.
R
FEATURE
INTERRUPTED RING
COMMON AUDIBLE
WITH RELAY CONTROL
COMMON AUDIBLE
WITH DIODE MATRIX
lONG HOLD RlS
#1 ESS. #2 ESS. 812
770. DIMENSION PBX
SHORT HOLD RlS
ALL OTHERS
PLUG
POSITION
A2-A3*
A1-A3
B1-B2*
B2-B3
*FACTORY PROVIOED
Fig. 27.1-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 400H KTU (CO or PBX Line Circuit) in 598-Type Panel
Page 4
ISS 1, ADDENDUM 518-215-417
66B4-25
CONN BLK
~A B C 0 E FJ
~:.~~
ROW ASSIGNMENT
(NOTE 1)
~,[
TO
LINE
SIDE
OF
4DOH
KTUs
BLKS 1, 3, 5, 7
AND 9 (NOTE 2)
LEFT -HAND BLKS
T
A
[
T
':'
R
A
~,[
B
40
3
35
1141 1
A
[
R
M2
41
B 1 24 1 40
1 43
7
I,:, I~I
1
1= 1::
33
3B
7
39
1 :: 1
j ~ ~1
I(
l~
3B
I
19
25
T'
1>5
I
39
TO
49BA
KTU
I
I
3 119 1 35
B
37
!:;;
42
.
~ 34
I
10
41
:
:
I
11
A
M1
48
I:: I I
36
R
T
TO 34A (
VOICE
COUPLER
I I ~: I
:~
1 9
T
L
':'
1B
R
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE ONLY.
PART OF 914A CONN
BLKS 2, 4, 6, B
AND 10 (NOTE 2)
RIGHT-HAND BLKS
: ( 1B
I
! ~ ~O
117 1 33
1 1B 1 32 1 48
: ( 12
I
I (
38
NOTES:
1. COLUMN ASSIGNMENTS FOR LEFT -HAND BLK IS A-E AND FOR RIGHT -HAND BLK IS
F-B. SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM OF BBB4-25 CONN BLK IN FIG. B.
2. TERMINALS 33 THRU 48 ARE SPARES ON CONN BLKS 9 AND 10.
3. THIS KTU SHOULD BE USED FOR 4 CIRCUITS ONL Y. THE 11 BA 1 CIRCUIT MODULE
SHOULD NOT BE ADDED TO THIS UNIT BECAUSE OF WIRING INCOMPATIBILITY
IN THE 598-TYPE PANEL.
Fig. 49.1-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 498A KTU (Music-On-Hold) in 598-Type Panel
Page 5
5 Pages
SECTION 518-215-417
Issue 5, June 1977
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT & TCo Standard
SERVICE
1A2 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
597- AND 598-TYPE PANELS
1.
Panel, 598B (Fig. 2)
GENERAL
This section provides identification, ordering,
installation, and connection information on
the 400-series KTUs used in the 597- and 598-type
panels.
1.01
(b) Replaceable Components
• Fuse 24G (1-113 amperes)
(c) Associated Apparatus (Order Separately)
1.02
This section is reissued to:
• Block, Connecting, 66B4-25 (four required
for 597-type; ten required for 598-type)
• Rate the 400D KTU MD
• Cable, Connector, A25B (four required for
597-type; ten required for 598-type)
• Add new illustrations on the 421A KTU
(Audible Signal Suppression Circuit) and the
400G and 471A KTUs
• Unit, Telephone Key (as required, order per
Table A).
• Make minor changes to Table A and existing
figures.
2.04
1.03
This issue of the section is based on drawing
SD-69608-0l, Issue 4. If this section is to
be used with equipment or apparatus reflecting
later issues of the drawing, reference should be
made to the SD to determine the extent of the
changes and the manner in which the section may
be affected.
2.
2.01
Purpose: The 597-type (Fig. 1) and 598-type
(Fig. 2) panels provide auxiliary mounting
facilities for 20- and 40-pin (4-inch) 400-series KTUs,
respectively.
2.02
Application: Large centralized installations
of 1A2 Key Telephone System arrangements.
2.03
Ordering Guide:
Panel, 597B (Fig. 1)
(a) Each panel is 4 inches high and mounts on
any frame structure designed for 23-inch
wide mounting plates.
(b) Accepts up to fourteen 400-series KTUs in
any combination. KTUs may be intermixed
in any connector position. See Table A.
IDENTIFICATION
(a) Basic Units
Design Features:
Both panels have
essentially the same basic features, differing
only in the number of connector pins provided.
(c) The 597-type panel accepts only 20-pin KTUs,
and the 598-type panel accepts either 20or 40-pin KTUs.
(d) Factory wiring is provided from the KTU
connectors to the plugs, permitting the use
of A25B connector cables for line and station
terminations.
(e) Dedicated leads such as LF, LW, battery,
ground, etc, are factory-wired between the
connectors and screw terminal field (TSA).
NOTICE
Not for use or disclosure outside the
Bell System except under written agreement
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
SECTION 518-215-417
Fig. 1-597-Type Panel
(f) Screw terminal field (TSA) for power
connections and interpanel wiring.
3.02
Install panel on relay rack or in apparatus
cabinet in the usual manner.
(g) Screw terminal field (TSB on 597 type) for
optional field connections.
3.03
Install 66B4-25 connecting blocks and stencil
each block.
(h) Fuse panel provided with 24G fuses for
power distribution (Table B).
Connect the A25B connector cables to the
panel, then route cables to the proper 66B4-25
connecting blocks as shown in Fig. 3 or 4.
(i) A retainer is provided to lock the KTUs in
place in the connectors.
3.
INSTALLATION
For information on apparatus mountings
and relay racks on which the 597- and
598-type panels can be mounted, refer to Section
463-140-100.
3.01
Page 2
3.04
Cut down the A25B connector cables on the
66B4-25 connecting blocks as shown in Fig.
5 and 6 for the 597- and 598-type panels, respectively.
Fig. 5 and 6 contain block diagrams showing typical
connecting block and panel layouts.
3.05
Dedicated lead connections for both panels
are shown in Fig. 7. Fuse functions are
shown in Table B. These connections should be
made before installing KTU s in the panels. Dedicated
3.06
155 5, SECTION 518-215-417
Fig. 2-598-Type Panel
leads are those leads such as BAT, GRD, LF,
LW, etc, that appear on the same numbered pin
of each KTU. These panels must obtain interrupted
lamps and ringing signals from 583- or 584-type
panels.
3.07
4.
Install key telephone units as required.
Field connections are made for any KTU by
determining which connector on the panel
is to be used and its related connecting block (Fig.
3 or 4). For example:
4.02
CONNECTIONS
If 414A or 416A KTUs are to be installed
in the 597-type panel, wire G option per
Fig. 8 to place ring ground on pin 0 of required
connector. Fig. 9 through 49 cover the nondedicated
lead connections for the 400-series KTUs that can
be installed in the 597- and 598-type panels. Field
connections are shown on the left, connecting block
row assignments in the center, and connector pin
numbers on the right. Pin numbers are shown
for reference only, so that a complete picture of
4.01
the KTU circuitry can be seen when the connection
drawing of a KTU is compared with the functional
schematic.
(a) If a 400-type KTU (Fig. 9 or 10) is installed
in connector Jl of a 597-type panel (Fig. 3),
field connections are made to terminals 1, 2, 4,
and 6 on connecting block 1 and to terminals 1,
2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 on connecting block 2.
(b) If the 400-type KTU (Fig. 9 or 10) were
installed in connector J14 of a 597-type panel
(Fig. 3), field connections would be made to
terminals 37, 38, 40, and 42 on connecting block
Page 3
SECTION 518-215-417
KTU. USED IN 5978 AND 5988 PANELS
PANELS
KTU
FUNCTION
5988
400D (MD)
400G
CO or PBX Circuit
-t
-t
401A
Manual Intercom Line Circuit
-t'
-1-
413A
Auxiliary Ringup Circuit
-t
-t
414A
Manual Signaling, Ringdown Tie Line Circuit
-
-t
415A
Automatic, DC Signaling, Tie Line Circuit
-t
-t
416A
Station Line Circuit
-
-t
417A
Add-On Conference Circuit
418A
Short Range, DC Signaling, Tie Line Circuit
-
420A
Long Line Circuit
-t
Power Failure Transfer Circuit
-*
Audible Signal Suppression Circuit
-
421A
422B
Station Busy Selector Circuit
423A
Dial Tone, Busy Tone, and Audible Ringback Tone Circuit
428A
Multiline Exclusion Circuit
429A (MD)
429B
Supplementary Hold Detector Circuit
430A
Flutter Generator Circuit
448A
Variable Delay Timer Control
449A
Immediate Transfer Control Circuit
461A
Manual Signaling, Ringdown Tie Line Circuit
469A
Lamp Extender Circuit
471A
Battery Reversal Toll Restriction Circuit
* Will transfer only one circuit.
t Not recommended for initial installations; use for growth only when necessary.
- Usable as indicated_
Page 4
597B
-
-
-t
-t
-t
-t
-
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-417
TABLE B
FUSE FUNCTIONS FOR 597- AND
598-TYPE PAN E LS
CONN
A
BAT.
B
BAT.
Jl-7
Fl
F3
J8-14
F2
F4
SERVED
Fig. 14-415A KTU (Automatic, DC Signaling,
Private Line Circuit)
Fig. 15-416A KTU (Station Line Circuit)
Fig. 16-418A KTU (Short Range, DC Signaling,
Private Line Circuit)
Fig. 17 -420A KTU (Long Line Circuit)
Fig. 18-421A KTU (Power Failure Transfer
Circuit)
3 and to terminals 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, and 42 on
connecting block 4.
(c) If the 400-type KTU (Fig. 26 or 27) is
installed in connector J8 of a 598-type panel
(Fig. 4), field connections are made to terminals
17, 18, 21, and 22 on connecting block 5 and to
terminals 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, and 22 on connecting
block 6_
Fig. 19-.421A KTU (Audible Signal Suppression
Circuit), Arranged to Suppress Bridged
Ringing
Fig. 20-421A KTU (Audible Signal Suppression
Circuit), Arranged to Suppress Common
Audible Ringing.
CONNECTION INDEX
Fig. 21-423A KTU (Dial Tone, Busy Tone,
and Audible Ringback Tone Circuit)
Connections For:
Fig. 22-430A KTU (Flutter Generator Circuit)
Fig. 5-A25B Connector Cables to 66B4-25
Connecting Blocks for 597-Type Panel
Fig. 23-461A KTU (Manual Signaling, Ringdown
Private Line Circuit)
Fig. 6-A25B Connector Cables to 66B4-25
Connecting Blocks for 598-Type Panel
Fig. 24-469A KTU (Lamp Extender Circuit)
Fig. 7-Dedicated Leads (Signaling and Power
Connections) for 597-Type and 598-Type
Panels
Fig. 8-G Option (414A, 416A or 461A KTU)
on Terminal Strip B on 597-Type Panel
Fig. 25-.471A KTU (Battery Reversal Toll
Restriction Circuit).
Nondedicated Lead Connections for 59B-Type
Panel:
Fig. 26-400D (MD) KTU (CO or PBX Line
Circuit)
Nondedicated Lead Connections for 597-Type
Panel:
Fig. 27-.400G KTU (CO or PBX Line Circuit).
Fig. 9-400D (MD) KTU (CO or PBX Line
Circuit)
Fig. 28-401A KTU (Manual Intercom Line
Circuit)
Fig. 10-.400G KTU (CO or PBX Line Circuit).
Fig. 29-413A KTU (Auxiliary Ringup Circuit)
Fig. 11-401A KTU (Manual Intercom Line
Circuit)
Fig. 30-414A KTU (Manual Signaling, Ringdown
Private Line Circuit)
Fig. 12-413A KTU (Auxiliary Ringup Circuit)
Fig. 31-415A KTU (Automatic, DC Signaling,
Private Line Circuit)
Fig. 13-414A KTU (Manual Signaling, Ringdown
Private Line Circuit)
Fig. 32-416A KTU (Station Line Circuit)
Page 5
SECTION 518-215-417
Fig. 33-417A KTU (Add-on Conference Circuit)
Fig. 34-418A KTU (Short Range, DC Signaling,
Private Line Circuit)
Fig. 41-422B KTU (Station Busy Selector
Circuit)
Fig. 42-423A KTU (Dial Tone, Busy Tone,
and Audible Ringback Tone Circuit)
Fig. 35-420A KTU (Long Line Circuit)
Fig. 43-428A KTU (Multiline Exclusion Circuit)
Fig. 36-421A KTU (Power Failure Transfer
Circuit)
Fig. 37 -421A KTU (Wired for DSS Feature
for Dial Intercom Line)
Fig. 38-t421A KTU (Audible Signal Suppression
Circuit), Arranged to Suppress Bridged
Ringing
Fig. 39-421A KTU (Audible Signal Suppression
Circuit), Arranged to Suppress Common
Audible Ringing.
Fig. 44-429-Type KTU (Supplementary Hold
Detector Circuit) and 430A KTU
(Flutter Generator Circuit)
Fig. 45-448A KTU (Variable Delay Timer
Circuit)
Fig. 46-449A KTU (Immediate Transfer Control
Circuit)
Fig. 47-461A KTU (Manual Signaling, Ringdown
Private Line Circuit)
Fig. 48-469A KTU (Lamp Extender)
Fig. 40-421A KTU or 413A KTU (Wired for
Preset Conference Circuit for Deluxe
Dial Intercom Line)
Page 6
Fig. 49-t471A KTU (Battery Reversal Toll
RestrictionCircuit) •
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-417
F
-----------------------~
597- TYPE: PANEL
9130 CONNECTORS (20- PIN)
f
\
JI
J2
J3
J5
J4
elK I
J6
J7
J8
JIO
J9
elK 2
JII
8lK 3
JI2
JI4
JI3
BlK 4
6684-25 CONN BlKS
Fig. 3-597-Type Panel With Terminal Layout
I-~~-------------------------------~
914A CONNECTORS (40-PtN)
I
\
JI
J2
J3
J5
J4
J6
J7
J8
J9
JIO
JII
JI2
JI3
JI4
I
-~
l__~--~--~-----~--r_----_lr_-_t~-~~--_r~A25BCONN
CABLES
elK I
elK 2
elK 3
elK 4
aue
5
BlK 6
au(
7
BlK 8
BlK 9
BlK
to
I
6684-25 CONN BlKS
Fig. 4-598-Type Panel With Terminal Layout
Page 7
SECTION 518-215-417
6684-25
CONN 8l0CK
597- TYPE PANEL
AM PHENOL CONNECTORS
6684-25
CONN 8l0CK
BLOCKS I AND 3
BLOCKS 2 AND 4
LEFT-HAND BLOCKS
PI \,P3
~ I m~ES
P2\,P4
~------\--~----, ~~~~S ~ 1
.---\--
>r-
'l""1-..!.(w::.--8~l:':)~-I-+---.4 26
(8l-W)
I
(W-O)
27
(O-W)
~;
'tf-T
f-i-=--
!-2-
(W G)
(G~W)
,6
~ \:~~~)
~
ti:
~
~
~
~
~
~
I-#-
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
,..R
:*
~
:¥s-
350>+=
(O-R)
(R-G)
(R-S)
(S-R)
(BK-BLl
(Bl-BK)
(BK-O)
((O-BK)
BK-G)
(G-BK)
(BK-BR)
\:~=~~)
~
,.iL
:*
~
31 >+362
>+-~
7
~3~:
I
;4
~n-
;.;
35
10
36>+II
C-_
rr-
>+-
k
31
I-K
6
r+< 32
I-K 7
r+<33
H-5
~
I-K
t-!:;
~
I--k
I--k
8
34
9
35
10
36
II
~;,~d=
rr- i--k~~~
38
13
~
I ;;
~:
~~
::~~=:
(W-S)
(S-W)
~:~~~:
(R-O)
(O-R)
(R-G)
r--:--
+
~
6
~
'To~
~
~
~
~
:;=:~)
~
(BR-R)
~
(R-S)
(S-R)
(BK-Bl)
(Bl-BK)
( BK-O)
~
~
~
~
t-#-
(O-SK)~!
(BK-G)
(G-BK)
(BK-8R)
,_.
~
~
U
(S-BK)
(V-BLl
( Bl-V)
(V-O)
16
16
(V 8Ll
(Bl-Y)
(Y-O)
(O-Y)
(Y-G)
~ :e~;~)
~
f-+< ~9
(G~W)
~:~~~~) ~
(S-BK)
~
~
~
~
(W G)
28
i--k3
14
40
(O-V)
(V-G)
(G-V)
(V-SR)
~
7
f-t-
14
40>-i--
~
~
26 ....-+-+--'-(W::.....:-8~l:.:)_-I---rI
(8l-W)
27
(W-O)
2
(O-W)
~
d= P
t:::!::5
~
(S-W)
(G-Y)
(Y-BR)
(BR-Y)
( Y-S)
(S-Y)
(V-Bl)
(8l-V)
(V-O)
,E..
28
3>+-
(W-S)
~
:~=:~)
~
(BR-R)
~
2
~
>+-- H-<
>+f--i-<
I;;
c::CD
rr~
29>+4
f4 ~::~~i
~ (R-O)
RIGHT-HAND BLOCKS
(S-V)
f-+<
f-+<
!~ ±
I--k~!~
c::c=
~~ ~
~;~;
44
19
45
20
46
21
:;
48
23,
c:c:c:c;
c;
c;
c;
a=
~ ;
>+=
:: ~
~~
)::::
LL/
~~
~7:
I:
44
r-;-'!;
r;
r;
c;:
I-+rr
20
46
21
~:~
48
23
~
E
(O-Y):*
( V-G)
~
(G-Y)
(V-BR)
(SR-Y)
(Y-S)
(S-Y)
(V-Bl)
(Bl-V)
(V-O)
~
(O-V)
(V-G)
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~4
f4-+-+--l(-'G'::_"'V+)-~~
f4-+-+--l(~V:"'_-'B..!.R~)~~
t-t5 :: ~-+-+-;:";e"'~;';:;;~:;')--11-'=1
.:"~r
~ ~~
(S-V)
*
Fig. 5-Connections for A25B Connector Cables to 6684-25 Connecting Blocks for 597-Type Panel (Sheet 1)
Page 8
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-417
BLOCK DIAGRAM OF 66B4-Z5 CONN BLOCK
6684-25
CONN BLOCK
LEFT-HAND BLOCK
6684-25
CONN BLOCK
RIGHT-HAND BLOCK
~I
~J
COL
A.B.C.D.E
TO STATION
AND/OR
STRAPPING
AS REQUIRED
rum
COL
COL
:97~TYPE
~O
TO
PANEL
597TYPE
PANEL
mruun
COL
F.E.D.C.B
TO STATION
AND/OR
STRAPPING
AS REQUIRED
TYPICAL CONNECTIONS OF 597-TYPE PANEL TO CONNECTiNG BLOCKS
66B4-Z5
CONN BLOCK
LEFT-HAND BLOCK
~
T*
CO OR
PBX LINE
66B4-Z5
CONN BLOCK
RIGHT-HAND BLOCK
PANEL
AZ5B
CONN
CABLE
(W-BLI
0
PI
9130
CONN
JI
-fj
IZ
PZ
AZ5B
CONN
CABLE
(W-BLI
~J
I
0
-
T
TO KEY
STATION
AMPHENOL
CONNECTORS
* TIP OF FIRST CO LINE SHOWN ·AS EXAMPLE
Fig. 5-Connections for A25B Connector Cables to 66B4-25 Connecting Blocks for 597-Type Panel (Sheet 2)
Page 9
SECTION 518-215-417
66B4-25
CONN BLOCK
BLOCKS 1,3,5,7,9
LEFT-HAND BLOCKS
~
F
I
--t"
""3
--;0
""5
~
""7
8
"9""
10
II
12
13
""It-
it
'17
rt8
~
To2T
it
f-Ts-
23
24
25""R~
~
29
30
31
~
33
~
~
3s"
~
Ta~
To
4t
42
~
44
45
46
47
4a
Ts-
}£:
66B4-25
CONN BLOCK
BLOCKS 2,4,6,8,10
RIGHT-HAND BLOCKS
598- TYPE PANEL
AMPHENOL CONNECTORS
A25B
CONN
CABLES
(W-BL)
(BL-W)
(W-O)
(O-W)
(W-G)
(G-W)
(W-BR)
(BR-W)
(W-S)
(S-W)
( R-BL)
( SL-R)
(R-O)
(O-R)
(R-G)
(G-R)
( R-BR)
(BR-R)
( R-S)
(S-R)
( BK-BL)
(BL-BK)
(BK-O)
(O-BK)
( BK-G)
(G-BK)
( BK-BR)
(BR-BK)
(BK-S)
( S-BK)
( V-BL)
( BL-V)
( v-a)
(a-v)
( V-G)
(G-V)
( V-BR)
( BR-Y)
( Y-S)
(S-V)
(V-BL)
(SL-V)
(V-a)
(a-V)
(V-G)
(G-V)
(V-BR)
( BR-V)
(V-S)
(S V)
PI.P3,P5
P7, P9
P2,P4,P6
PB, Pia
\
\
~
216
q=
27 >+2>+28 ~
~
~26
M2~
~~8
:9~ ~~9
4?+-30 ?+-5?+-31
6?+-32 ?+--
?+-
~3
E:
~4~
35
)..i-
10~
::$
37
12
~ht
14~
r-+<30
~!I
r-+<
~;3
~8
r-+< ;5
~IO
r-+<
~37
34
36
II
12
38
13
~39
14
r-+<
?+- r-+<
?+- ~
40 ?+-15
41
32
40
15
41
16~
42 ~
17~
f:t ~:
43
18 >+44 >+19 ?+-45 )..i-
43
18
17
r-+<
>+- r-+<
~44
~§
47
22
48
23
>+-
49,~
24
50
25 )-L-
H-<
H-<
H-<
H-<
r-+-<
r-+<
19
45
20
46
21
47
~22
~::
24
50
~25
A25B
CONN
CABLES
(W-BLl
(BL-W)
(W-O)
(O-W)
(W-G)
(G-W)
(W-SR)
(8R-W)
(W-S)
(S-W)
( R-BL)
(BL-R)
(R-o)
(O-R)
(R-G)
(G-R)
(R-BR)
(SR-R)
(R-S)
( S-R)
( BK-BL)
( BL-BK)
( BK-O)
( O-BK)
(BK-G)
(G-BK)
( BK-BR)
(SR-BK)
( BK-S)
(S-BK)
(V-BL)
( SL-v)
( v-a)
( a-v)
( V-G)
( G-V)
( V-BR)
(BR-Y)
( Y-S)
(S-V)
( V-BLl
( BL-V)
( V-a)
(a-V)
( V-G)
( G-V)
( V~BR)
( BR-V)
( V-S)
( S-V)
~l
A
I""
2
-T
~
~
+
~
~
+0II
It
13
~
fsIs
17
"""'
is
fg20
21
T2
it
24
25
""R-
27
28
~
30
3t
3z
~
~
35-
36
37
38
39
To
41
42
4t
44
45
46
47
~
~
50
Fig. 6-Connections for A25B Connector Cables to 66B4-25 Connecting Blocks for 598-Type Panel (Sheet I)
Page 10
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-417
BLOCK DIAGRAM OF 66B4-25 CONN BLOCK
66B4-25
CONN BLOCK
RIGHT-HAND BLOCK
66B4-25
CONN BLOCK
LEFT-HAND BLOCK
~I
~J
COL
A.B.C.D.E
COL
TO STATION
AND/OR
STRAPPING
AS REQUIRED
COL
~ :98~TYPE
~O
TO
PANEL
598TYPE
PANEL
fML1JMlfll
COL
F.E.D.C .B
.
TO STATION
AND/OR
STRAPPING
AS REQUIRED
TYPICAL CONNECTIONS OF 598 -TYPE PANEL TO CONNECTING BLOCKS
66B4-25
CONN BLOCK
LEFT-HAND BLOCK
~
F
T*
66B4-25
CONN BLOCK
RIG HT-HAND BLOCK
PANEL
I
A25B
CONN
CABLE
(W-BL)
---___<0
CO OR
PBX LINE
PI
914A
CONN
JI
-f]
12
P2
A25B
CONN
CABLE
(W,.-BL)
-
!~
A
I
BC
D~
0
I -____- T
TO KEY
STATION
AMPHENOL
CONNECTORS
* TIP OF FIRST
CO LINE SHOWN AS EXAMPLE
NOTE:
TERMINALS 33 THROUGH 48 ARE SPARES ON CONNECTING BLOCKS 9 AND 10.
Fig. 6-Connections for A25B Connector Cables to 66B4-25 Connecting Blocks for 598-Type Panel (Sheet 2)
Page 11
SECTION 518-215-417
.
TERMINAL STRIP A
-24V.A BAT
!i
A GRD
,!
-24V.B BAT
)1
t
TO RINGING
SUPPLY
TO INTERRUPTER
IN ASSOCIATED
584 -TYPE PANEL
[
[
[
(NOTE I)
-<
--<
-<
-<
-<
f3
..rv---
~..rv--f4
B GRD
RN
RG
-
,..,.2
JO
'-
AI
J8-14
3
JI-14
17
JI-7
17
15
-
-<
ST
~
f-
- -< 5
MIl
.r!
I-
--{6
LG(I}
~
.'!- PS-
LV(I}
~
Lf(I}
,!.;
LS( I}
~
LG(2}
LG(2}
LG(2}
LV(2}
Jl.
Lf(2}
~
LS(2)
"t" -
(NOTE 2
-t- - - -
-
-< 2
I
-1---I
-,-- -
~S
~
10
TRAP
I
-
,t
NOTES:
I. DASHED LINES REPRESENT
fACTORY VIR ING
2. TO GROUND STANDOFF ON PANEL
JI-14
r-
LG(I}
J8-14
(NOTE 2)
~
105Vt
~
--<"
-
RG
18
---~NOTE 2)
~
r-
,
CONNECTOR
SERVED
J 1-7
- - ( 18
1-.
~
LG(I}
TO ASSOCIATED
584- TYPE PANEL
fl
""'""V---
L- ' " \ . r - - ~
~
.,.
f2
TO POWER SUPPLY
TO RN
AND RG TERM ON
584-TYPE PANEL
~
PIN ON
CONNECTOR ,
-(7
--<4
TRAPI
-~
I
.J
r-
19
'----
Fig. 7-Connections for Dedicated Leads (Signaling and Power Connections) for 597- and 598-Type Panel
Page 12
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-417
TO DISTANT
STAT ION
CONN BlKS
I AND 3
[JJ
RC2
u:u
RC2
UJ
RC2
[ill
RC2
I
U!J
[lL]
RC2
WJ
RC2
[R]
I
I
(w-O)
(BK-BL)
W
RC2
*l
o::J
A25B
CONN
CABLE
[R]
RC2
RC2
I'
~I
RC2
RC2
@U
[lU
~~;;~
RC2
RC2
RC2
Im. UJ
I UJ
·::11
II
Ii WJ
NOTES:
I. DASHED LINES REPRESENT rACTORY WIRING.
2. ADD STRAPS AS REQUIRED.
3. TERMINALS 25 THRU 30 ARt SPARES.
Fig. 8-Connections for G Option (414A, 416A or 461A KTU) on Terminal Strip B on 597-Type Panel
Page 13
SECTION 518-215-417
*
_ TO PROV I DE TI ME-OUT CYCLES OF RING-UP
CIRCUITS FROM 2.5 TO 7.5 SECONDS,
INSTALL KS-13490,LI,1 WATT OR EQUIVALENT
RESISTOR BETWEEN TERMINALS I ANO 3
WITH A STRAP FROM I TO 2.
TIME-OUT
CYCLE AND RES I STOR VALUES ARE AS
FOLLOWS:
2.5 SECONDS
3.3 SECONDS
5.0 SECONDS
6.7 SECONDS
7.5 SECONDS
_
_
_
-
O. I 3
0.20
0.39
0.75
1.2
MEGOHM
MEGOHM
MEGOHM
MEGOHM
MEGOHM
RES I STOR
RESISTOR
RESISTOR
RESI STOR
RESISTOR
t -
FOR 30_SECOND TI ME_OUT CYCLE REMOVE
ALL STRAPS FROM TERMINALS 1,2, AND 3.
WHEN THE DURATION OF MACHINE RINGING
I S I SECOND OR lESS, T I ME-OUT SHAll
NOT BE REDUCED BELOW 5 SECONDS.
*
OPTION STRAPS ON MD KTUS, 400A,
BAND C
6684-25
CONN BlK
l~
ROW ASSIGNMENT
(NOTE I)
SHOWN FOR
FIELD
CONNECTIONS
·NOTES:
I. COLUMN ASS I GNMENT FOR lEFTHAND BLK IS A-E AND FOR
RIGHT _HAND BlK IS F _B.
SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM FOR
66B4-25 CONN BlK IN FIG. 5.
2.WHEN ZC OPTION IS USED, DUE TO
THE DELAYED RELEASE OF THE HOLD
BR lOGE, SOME TRANSMI SS I ON lOSS IS
ENCOUNTERED FOR APPROXIMATELY
ONE SECOND WHEN STATION
TO
REENTERS A HELD CALL.
KEY
STATION
BlKS I AND 3
lEfT-HAND BlKS
REFERENCE ONLY
BlKS 2 AND 4
RIGHT-HAND BlKS
(PART OF 913D.CONN)
~~::R[~I·l~!t117!11,:~:~1~22-J
FEATURES
TWO_WAY
41
I
2
RG
[...;;R~I_ _--'t(§2)
m .cC::A~(R::,:C::"!)'-
S(2)
SG(2)
7
(PART OF
9130 CONN)
BlKS 2 AND 4
RIGHT-HAND BlKS
2 TO 3 TO 4 *
ONE_WAY
AUTOMATIC,
ONE-WAY
MANUAL
INTERRUPTED RING
R
3 TO 4
STEADY RING
Z
I TO 4
(NOTE 4)
MATR I X CONTROL
K
3 TO 4
*
,
COMMON WITH DIODE
TWO_WAY MANUAL (NOTE 5)
Y
TWO-WAY AUTOMATIC
Q
9 TO 10, 5 TO 7 TO B*
ONE-WAY AUTOMATIC,
ONE-WAY MANUAL
H
5 TO 7, 9 TO 10
TWO-WAY MANUAL
M
9 TO 10
(
o
NOTES:
I. COLUMN ASSIGNMENT FOR lEFT-HANO BlK IS
A_E ANO FOR RIGHT-HAND BlK IS F-B.
SEE
BLOCK 0 I AGRAM OF 66B4- 25 CONN BlK IN
FIG. 5.
2. SIGNAL KEY CAN BE A CONVERTED PI CKUP KEY
OR ANY EXTERNAL NONlOCKING KEY.
3. STATION "A" I S ALWAYS ASS I GNED AS THE
AUTOMATIC SIGNALING STATION WHENEVER THE
ONE_WAY AUTOMATIC, ONE_WAY MANUAL
SIGNALING OPTION IS USED.
4; THESE OPTIONS APPLY TO THE SIGNAL KEY AND
AUDIBLE SIGNAL AT STATION "B" ONLY.
THE
AUDIBLE SIGNAL AT STATION "A" IS UNDER
CONTROL OF SIGNAL KEY AT STATION "B".
THE
AUDIBLE SIGNAL AT STATION "A" MAY BE PART
OF A COMMON AUDIBLE ARRANGEMENT PROVIDED
THE DIOOE MATRIX IS USED FOR CONTROL.
5. THE AUDIBLE SIGNALS AT STATION "A" AND
"B" MAY BE PART OF A COMMON AUD I BlE
ARRANGEMENT PROV IDEO THE 0 lODE MA TR I X IS
USED FOR CONTROL.
USE CONT I NUOUS METHOD OF STRAPP I NG
Fig. 16-.Nondedicated Lead Connections for 418A KTU (Short Range, DC Signaling, Private Line Circuit) in
597-Type Panel.
Page 21
SECTION 518-215-417
66B4-25
CONN BLK
[~
ROW ASS I GNMEN T
(NOTE I)
FIELD
CONNECT IONS
TEL SET (NOTE 2)
407 OR
424-TYPE
TO OFF
PREMISE
KTU ASS IGNED "R"
lEAD OF DIAL
INTERCOM
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
(PART OF
913D CONN)
BLKS 2 AND 4
RIGHT-HAND BLKS
BLKS I AND 3
LEFT -HAND BLKS
[:T~~~================~~~~~~~~~~t~~~~~~~~E
I
7
13
19
25
31
37
2
8
14
20
26
32
38
3
9
15
21
27
33
39
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
RG
16
I
I
TO
420A
KTU
I
4
TO 407 OR
424-TYPE KTU
(NOTE 3)
13
I
R(I-XO)
I
I
I
STRAP
TO 407 OR 424-TYPE
KTU ASSIGNED
STATION OF
DIAL INTERCOM
12
I
R
10
16
22
28
34
40
7
13
19
25
31
37
I
~1. ~'r
8
14
12
18
20
26
32
I.
I
38
I
24
30
36
42
6
OPT I ON STRAPP I NG ON 420A KTU OPT I ON BlK
400J
OPTION
STRAP
TERM I NAlS
AC BUZZER, IOVi, IBV±
J ,X
DC BUZZER
K,X
I TO 4,
7 TO B
FEATURE
NOTES:
I. COLUMN ASSIGNMENT FOR LEFT-HAND BLK IS COLUMN A-E
AND FOR RIGHT_HAND BlK I S COLUMN F-B. SEE BLOCK
DIAGRAM COVERING 66B4-25 CONN BLK IN FIG. 5.
2. MAXIMUM STATION CONDUCTOR LOOP IS 500 OHMS. OFF_
PREMISE TELEPHONE SET MAY BE EQUIPPED WITH A
"TOUCH-TONE" DIAL PROVIDED THE INTERCOM CIRCUIT
IS SO EQUIPPED.
3. PROVIDE A 400J DIODE FOR EACH 420A KTU INSTAllED
WHEN THE INTERCOM IS EQUIPPED WITH THE "TOUCH-TONE"
ADAPTER [426A AND 427B (SER I ES 4) OR C KTUS
AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
24 VDe
RINGER, 105V± STEADY
2 TO 4
M,X,R
INTERRUPTED
X
INTERRUPTED WITH STATION BUSY
R
7 TO B
J.
Fig. 17-tNondedicated Lead Connections for 420A KTU (Long Line Circuit) in 597-Type Panel.
Page 22
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-417
66B4-25
CONN BLK
~
ROW ASSIGNMENT
(NOTE Il
BLKS I AND 3
LEFT -HAND BLKS
FIELD
CONNECT IONS
T
TO CO [
OR PBX
R
LINE
STRAP
LINE I
(NOTE 2)
I
BLKS 2 AND ~
RIGHT-HAND BLKS
I
7
L3
19
25
31
37
14
2
8
14
20
26
32
38
9
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
I
4
B-BI
TO STATION [
RINGER
TO DIODE
MATRIX
R-R I
RC
STRAP
L--r
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
(PART OF
9130 CONN)
10
16
22
28
34
40
I
I
7
13
19
25
31
37
12
2
8
14
20
26
32
38
13
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
8
3
9
15
21
27
33
39
16
TO
421A
KTU
4
10
16
22
NOTES:
I. eOLUMN ASSIGNMENT FOR LEFT- HAND BLK IS
A-E AND FOR RIGHT-HAND BLK IS F-B. SEE
IN FIG. 5.
2. ONLY ONE STATION RINGER CAN BE TRANSFERRED
WHEN THE 421A KTU IS USED I N A 597A PANEL.
28
34
40
OPTION STRAPPING 421A KTU OPTION BLK
FEATURE
FOR GENERAL PURPOSE USE
STRAP TERMINALS
I TO 2, 5 TO 6,
7 TO 8
Fig. 18-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 421A KTU (Power Failure Transfer Circuit) in 597-Type Panel
Page 23
SECTION 518-215-417
6684-25
CINI BlK
lfbf±fD
ROW ASSIGM'ENT
(NOTE 1)
FIELD
ClNlECTIDNS
BlKS 2 AND 4
RIGHT -HANO BlKS
T(STA)
TO 400
TYPE KTU
(
TO BRIDGED
(
RINOER (NOTE
BlKS 1 AND 3
lEFT-HANO BlKS
SHDWN FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
(PART Of
B130 COMI)
R(STA)
B-Bl
2)[-;~:!-R!.!.1_t-t-_ _ _-----------EIQ~~~~~~Q-----<
13
TO TElE_
SET (NOTE 3)
~
lsi
<1
~1~1~1301~1~1
TO INTERCOII
BUZZER OR
RINGER
(
BZ (OR Rl)
< 12
TO 401. 407
OR 424 TYPE
KTU
(
R()
< 14
NOTES:
1. COllJII ASSIGM'ENT FOR lEFT-HAND BlK IS
A-E IIIIl FOR RIGHT-HAND BlK IS F-B. SEE
FIG. 5.
2. ONLY ONE BRIDGED RINOER CAN BE SUPPRESSED
IfEN THE ~lA KTU IS USED IN A 597A PANEL.
S. TElE_ SET MT BE EQUIPPED
WITH STATION BUSY OPTION.
TO
421A
KTU
OPTION STRAPPING 421A KTU OPTION BlK
FEATURE
FOR GENERAL PURPOSE USE
OA AUDIBLE SIGNAL SUPPRESSION
OPTION
STRAP TERMINALS
W
1 TO 2. 5 TO 6.
7 TO B
Fig. 19-.Nondedicated Lead Connections for 421A KTU (Audible Signal Suppression Circuit) in 597-Type
Panel Arranged to Suppress Bridged Ringing.
Page 24
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-417
(flJTE 1)
FIELD
CllNllECTIOII
(MITE 2)
TO 400-TYPE Re
~
KTU
~~2
TO DIllIE
IlATRIX
CA(Re)
_Fill
REFERENCE
OIILY
(PART OF
9130 COWN)
BlKS 2 AMI 4
RIIlIIT -HA/Il BlKS
BLKS 1 AMI 3
lEFT-HA/Il 8lKS
<
9
l'
~
-<< 13
: £ T E :•. : . ; : . . - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 1 2 1 B 1 14 120 125 1 32 1 39 1-1_ _ _
TO IIITERCIII
::Z:fIIER
=.BZ...!.:(III:::....::.:Rl!...)- - - - - - - - - - 1 1 1 17 1131191251311371
<
~4~~Pe~TUIII
,::R:..(.:.)- - - - 4 1 1 17 113118 125131137
~T~~
;.Bl=-_ _ _ _41 B 11211B 1 2 4 1 3 0 1 3 9 1 4 2 1 - 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - _ <
12
TO
421A
KTU
~I--------------_<< 14
<1
MITES:
1. COLI'" ASSIIlIftIlT FIll lEFT-IWIl 8LK IS A-E AMI Fill
RIIlIIT-IWIl BLK IS F-B. SEE FIG. 5.
2. REFER TO 400-TYPE KTU Fill OPTIOII.
3 • OIIlY OIIEaI'IIII RIMIER CAlf BE Sll'PRESSEO IHN TIE
421A KTU IS USED IN A 587A PANEL.
4. TElEPIIIIE SET MT BE EQUIPPED WITH STATION
BUSY OPTIOII.
OPTIOII STRAPPING 421A KTU DPTIOII BlK
FEATURE
Fill GENERAL PURPOSE USE
III AUDIBLE SIGNAL SUPPRESSION
OPTIOII
W
STRAP TERIIINAlS
1 TO 2. 5 TO B.
7 TO 8
Fig. 20-tNondedicated Lead Connections for 421A KTU (Audible Signal Suppression Circuit) in 597-Type
Panel Arranged to Suppress Common Audible Ringing.
Page 25
SECTION 518-215-417
66B4-25
CONN BLK
~
ROW ASS I GNMENT
(NOTE I)
fiELD
CONNECTI ONS
TO 407 OR
424-TYPE
KTU
(NOTE 2)
IOV± ,
[
l
TO 4228 KTU fOR UN ITS
TO 422B KTU fOR TENS
B
'I
12D:I
18V± •
I
I
SS
BL
I9
1'5
6 1'2 1'8
I 21
I 24
27
33
20
26
32
38
3
9
15
21
27
33
39
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
13
16
I
I
TO
423A
KTU
30
36
42
43
45
47
I
®
I TERMINAL END
0( KTU
I
39
:
I
19
43145147149
T
NOTES,
I. COLUI4N ASSIGNMENT fOR LEfT-HAND BLK IS A-E AND fOR
RIGHT-HAND BLK IS foB. SEE BlOCK DIAGRAM COVERINCO
66B4-25 CONN BLK IN fiG. 5.
2. 422B KTUS ASSOCI AT ED WITH THE SAME 01 AL INTERCOM
AS THE 423A KTU.
3. If INTERRUPTED I05Vi IS USED fOR DIAL INTERCON, DO
NOT CONNECT THIS LEAD. If BUZZERS ARE USED fOR DIAL
INTERCON, AUDIBLE SIGNAL IS SUPPLIED ON THIS LEAD VIA
SPARE INTERRUPTER CONTACTS TO PIN I Of 423A KTU.
ON 423A KTU OPTION BLK, STRAP TERMINALS 6 TO 7 AND
REMOVE
OPTION STRAP BETWEEN TERMINALS 4 AND 6.
4. TURN KNURLED \/HEEL TO fULL CLOCKWI SE POS I TI ON fOR
MINIMUM DIAL TONE VOLUME AND TO fULL COUNTERCLOCkWISE
POSITION fOR MAXIMUM DiAl TONE VOLUME.
CCW
CW
0(0)
14
I
BTl
SPARE
INTERRUPTER
CONTACTS
fRONT END
Of KTU
8
BL
3
TO 407 OR 424-TYPE KTU
2
I
J
ATI
B
'I
I::
~~~1~I' ::~I~:I~::I:2~11~------;<:~~4
RN (NOTE 3 )
-24V
SHOWN fOR
REfERENCE ONLY
(PART Of 9130 CONN)
BLKS 2 AND 4
RIGHT-HAND BLKS
BLKS I AND 3
LEfT-HAND BLKS
I 7 I 13 I 19 I 25 I 31 I 37
I
I
I
I
I
I
12
423A
FEATURES
OPTION
STRAP
DIAL TONE
T
1-2
STATION
BUSY TONE
R
4-6
S
*
AUDI BLE
RINGBACK
* REQUIRES
NO STRAPPING ON KTU
Fig. 21-.Nondedicated Lead Connections for 423A KTU (Dial Tone, Busy Tone, and Audible Ringback Tone
Circuit) in 597-Type Panel.
Page 26
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-417
6664-25
CONN BlK
~
ROW ASS I GNMENT
(NOTE I)
FIELD
CONNECT IONS
TO
429A(MDl
~~Y S~:P
OR BHOLD
KTU
BlKS 2 AND 4
RIGHT-HAND BlKS
[.~F~t~==~~3519~1~151~2ItI2H7113~311~39~======~=======p0
43 45 47
19
~T'
(NOTE 2)
43 45 47 49~
7 13 19 251 31 137
9 15 21 27 1331 39
:~================~===================lj;~t1~j1~~~~~j:============~~
FlST
MODIFIED REG
HOLD KEY
(NOTE 3)
BlKS I AND 3
lEFT-HAND BlKS
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
(PART OF
913D CONN)
SP
TO
430A
12
KTU
16
NOTES'
I. COLUMN ASSIGNMENT FOR LEFT-HAND BlK
IS A-E AND FOR RIGHT-HAND BlK IS F-B.
SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM COVERING 6664-25
CONN BlK IN FIG. 5.
2. LIMITATIONS OF 430A KTU ARE
AS FOllOWS,
(A) FLI OR Fl2 CAN SERVE A MAXIMUM
OF 50 lAMPS (5IA) EACH. DIVIDE
lAMPS AS EVENLY AS POSSIBLE
BETWEEN THE TWO lEADS.
(B) SP lEAD CAN CONNECT TO A
MAX I MUM OF 20 STA T IONS
3. FOR MODIFICATION OF HOLD KEY, SEE
SECTION COVERING TELEPHONE SET IN USE.
Fig. 22-.Nondedicated Lead Connections for 430A KTU (Flutter Generator) in 597-Type Panel.
Page 27
SECTION 518-215-417
66B4-2S
CONN BLK
~
RO\t ASS I GNM(NT
(NOTE I)
fI ELD
CONNECTI ONS
~~~E (:~; ;~
TO SIMILAR TYPE
['
BLKS I AND 3
LEn-HAND BLKS
SHOWN fOR
REfERENCE ONLY
(PART or 9130 CONN)
BLKS 2 AND 4
RIGHT -HAND BLKS
:T-----------{~JI~=t~t~JI~~t~t~JI---------------r(l.
-!!R----------L~1~:~~:~:1~~~91~~~6J..::~:Jl:~:~f_---------____~:<9
01 STANT-
T
TO LOC4L KEY
TEL SO
[
R
LG
L
TO SIGNAL KEY
(NOTE 3)
[
S
SG
I
7
13
19
2S
31
37
2
8
14
20
26
32
38
5
II
17
23
29
35
41
I
I
12
13
I
I
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
3
9
15
21
27
33
39
I
4
10
16
22
28
34
40
I
I
TO 461>
KTU
16
B OR BI
TO AUDIBLE
SIGNAL
['~~~~----:~~:---~~=c~ti~iiJ[~[1~~~~~--------------~
~
R OR RI
c:: •
RI
@t
•
'5.N'
1
TO DIODE [
MATRIX
..:C::A~(R.:::C:.!)_ _ _ _-=~=~_
OPTION STRAPPING ON 461A KTU OPTION BLK
fEATURES
AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
UNDER
CONTROL or
TINE-OUT
CIRCUIT
(e RELAY)
UNDER
CONTROL
R RELAY
or
OPTIONS
STRAP
TERMINALS
7 TO 8
INTERRUPTED RI NG
W
STEADY RING
T
6 TO 7
COMMON WITH DIODE
MAlR I X CONTROL
S
7 TO 8
STEADY RING
R
COMMON WITH DIODE
MATRIX CONTROL
N
4 TO 6
10 SECONDS
x
I TO 2
16 SECONDS
Z
2 TO 3
TIME-OUT
23 SECONDS
AUO I BLE R I NGBACK TONE
WITHOUT
XOR Z
II
NOTES:
I. COLUMN ASSIGNMENT fOR LEn-HAND
BlK IS A-E AND fOR RIGHT-HAND
BlK IS f-B. SEE BlOCK 01 AGRAM
fOR 6684-25 CONN BLK IN fiG. 5
2. PRIVATE LINE CIRCUIT AT DISTANT END
MAY BE A 414A KTU "~O). 419A KTU.
461 A KTU. OR ANY OTHER TYPE PR I VA TE
LINE UNIT REQUIRING RINGING VOLTAGE
fOR THE RING UP CIRCUIT AND
fURNISHING RINGING VOLTAGE fROM THE
SIGNALING CIRCUIT.
3. SIGNAL KEY MAY BE A CONVERTED
PICKUP KEY OR ANY EXTERNAL
NONlDEK I NG KEY.
REMOVE
x OR Z
STRAPS
9 TO 10
Fig. 23-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 461A KTU (Manual Signaling, Ringdown Private Line Circuit) in
597-Type Panel
Page 28
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-417
BLOCK 2 OR ~
RIGHT -HAND BLK
BLOCK I OR 3
lEFT -HAND BlK
~~M!~lESET - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - , 1
400-TYPE
KTU
STRAP
TO TElES[T
lAMPS
----------------1[TIt------*-0
6664-25
CONN BlK
8 TO 10
--
•
21
6
221 38
37
®r
CA (RC)
[""
R (2)
TO TEL
SET
5
l
(2)
I
17
33
2
18
34
4
20 36
I
17
33
2
18
34
5
21
37
6
22
38
3
19
35
4
20
36
SHC7JN FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
(PART OF
914A CON N)
I2
I
I
-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TO
418A
14 KTU
I
19
lG (2)
C
STAT I ON
"S"
(2)
TO 51 GNAl KEY (NOTE 3)
!~DIBlE
SIGNAL
~! ~~~ X
TO
B OR BI
BI
(
S K
.--
21
37
TO 420A
KTU
1
1
1
I
17
33
14
2
18
34
9
6
22
38
400"
NOTES:
I. COLUMN ASSIGNMENT fOR lEn-HAND BlK IS A-E
AND fOR RIGHT-HAND BlK IS F-B. SEE BLOCK
DIAGRAM COVERING 6684-25 CONN eLK IN fiG. 6.
2. TERMINALS 33 THRU 48 ARE SPARES ON
CONN elKS 9 AIID 10.
3. MAXIMUM STATION CONDUCTOR lOOP IS 500 OHMS. Off-PREMI SE
TELEPHONE SET MAY BE EQUIPPEO WITH A "TOUCH-TONE" DIAL
PROVIDED THE INTERCOM CIRCUIT IS SO EQUIPPED.
4. PROVIDE i 400" DIODE fOR EACH 420A KTU INSTAllED
WHEN THE INTERCOM IS EQUIPPED WITH THE "TOUCH-TONE"
ADAPTER [426A AND 427B (SERIES 4) OR C KTUS].
OPTION STRAPPI NG TO OPTION BlK
FEATURE
AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
OPTION
x
AC BUZZER. 18Vi.IOV±
J.
DC BUZZER. 24 VOC
K.X
RINGER, I05V! STEADY
R. M,X
INTERRUPTED
X
I NTERRUPTED WITH STATION BUSY
R
STRAP
TERMINALS
I TO 4. 7 TO 8
2T04,7T08
Fig. 35-.Nondedicated Lead Connections for 420A KTU (Long Line Circuit) in 598-Type Panel.
Page 40
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-417
66B4-25
CONN BlK
~
ROW ASSIGNMENT
(NOTE I)
BlKS 1,3.5.7
FIELD
AND 9 (NOTE 2)
lEFT-HAND BlKS
CONNECT IONS
TO CO
OR PBX
liNE
[
TO STATION
RINGER
[
LINE 2
LINE 3
____r
TO STATION
RINGER
34
6
22
38
[
--.c:
./
T
R
I
RC
~)
(
(
B-BI
(
B-BI
5
21
7
23
39
8
24
40
I
4
20
36
I
17
33
2
18
34
6
22
38
3
19
35
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
37
I
STRAP
(NOTE 3)
TO CO OR
PBX LI NE
33
18
R-R I
TO DIODE
MATR IX
TO STATION
R ING£R
17
B-BI
STRAP
TO CO OR
PBX liNE
I
2
R
RC
TO DIODE
MATRIX
AND 10 (NOTE 2)
RIGHT-HAND BlKS
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
(PART OF
914A CONN)
T
STRAP
liNE I
BLKS 2, .. ,6,8
I
2
2
9
25
41
2
10
26
42
2
TO 421A KTU
I
I
R-RI
7
23
39
8
24
40
'"
I
I
T
R
R-RI
12
28
44
II
27
43
9
25
41
10
26
42
I
'"
2
2
I
3
I
I
TO DIODE
MATR I X
Y 12
RC
2B
44
II 127
43
I
'2
2
NOTES,
I. COLUMN ASS IGMMENT FOR lEFT- HAND BlK I S COLUMN A-E AND
FOR RIGHT-HAND BlK IS F-B. SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM COVERING
6664-25 CONN BlK IN FIG. 6.
2. TERMINALS 33 THRU 48 ARE SPARES ON CONN BlKS 9 AND 10.
3. ADD STRAPS ACCORDING TO NUMBER OF LINES SERVED.
OPTION STRAPPING ON 421A
FEATURE
FOR GENERAL PURPOSE USE
Fig. 36-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 421A KTU (Power Failure Transfer Circuit) in 598-Type Panel
Page 41
SECTION 518-215-417
T~O::;B;~;~I~S) 4
N
®
OR 427C K T U -
BLKS 1.3,5,1
BLKS 2,4,6,8
AND 9 (NOTE 2)
lEfT-HAND BlKS
AND 10 (NOTE 2)
RIGHT-HAND BlKS
t
(NOT
E
ro"m'['~
KEY
(NOTE 3)
6~H\
RH
9
25
41
-,-< 37
7
23
39
-7< 35
8
24
40
36
17
33
26
42
20
36
<
<
--
421A KTU
7. Ir MORE THAN ONE 421A KTU IS USED fOR 055, CONNECT AS SHOWN:
:~,
::':'~
--~
427C KTU
B21
1;:'1"
~~; 1 m..ru 1;:'1 :::..ru 1;.-:.1
® 1
10
8.
®
WITH "TOUCH-TONE"
o
WITHOUT "TOUCH-TONE"
*
USE WITH 424-TYPE KTU ONLY
T
37
~
\~: .ru
T
26 >-<
37
~
L -_ _~
26>-<
~~.
T
37
~
~--~
26
~
.:~
::
TYPE KTU
621
f----
-=B
Fig. 37-.Nondedicated Lead Connections for 421A KTU (Wired for DSS Feature for Dial Intercom Line) in
598-Type Panel.
Page 42
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-417
6884-25
CONN BlK
~
ROW ASSIIlNI'ENT (NOTE 11
SHOWN FOR
FIELD
CONNECTIONS
T (SrAl
TD 400-TYPE (
KTU LINE 1
TD BRIDGED
RINGER LINE
R (STAI
,(
~lEPI INE
BlKS 1. 3. 5. 7
AIIl 9 (NOTE 21
lEFT-HAM) BlKS
BlKS 2. 4. 6. 8
AM! lD (NOTE 21
RIGHT -HAND BlKS
REFERENCE DNl Y
(PART OF
914A CONNI
2\lB \34
13
211B 134
B-81
R-Rl
T
R
[
SET
(NOTE 3 I
T
R
Bl
61 22 138
"'
T
TD 400-TYPE (
KTU lINE 2
R
TO
BI2414D
21
421A
KTU
B-Bl
TD BRIDGED
RINGER LINE
T~~~Y:~TUOR
(
(
~~~R~-R~l~================~gi~~j=====:
BZ (OR Rll
1 81341~1
(38
1 1 17 133 I
( 12
TD INTERCIII
~~OR (~R~(11--------------------1:~1[ll~7II~33~1---------------------«14
R (STAI (AI
CONNECT
AS
REQUIRED
(NOTE 4)
I 7123138 I
( 2D
~R~-R~l(~AI~~~~~~~~~~~1171127113811~~~(
R (STAI (BI
1111271431
(24
R-Rl (B)
1 10 I 261 42 I
R (STA) (C)
112128144 I
( 39
35
( 26
I 9125141 I
( 37
R-Rl (C)
NOTES:
1. COL.... ASSIIlIIENT FOR lEFT-HAM) BlK IS COL.... A-£ AIIl
FOR RIGHT-HAM) BlK IS F-8. SEE BLOCK DIAOR,," COVERING
6884-25 CONN BlK IN FIG. 6.
2. TERftINAlS 33 THRU 48 ARE SPARES ON CONN 8LKS 9 AIIl 10.
3. TElEPIIINE SET IIlST BE EQUIPPED WITH STATION BUSY
OPTION.
4. lETTERS IN PARENTHESES ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. CONNECT
AS REQUIRED TO stJIPRESS BRIDGED RINGERS ON
ADDITIONAL LINES.
FOR GEWERAl P\IIPOSE USE
OR AUDIBLE SIONAL
_ESSION
Fig. 38-tNondedicated Lead Connections for 421A KTU (Audible Signal Suppression Circuit) in 598-Type
Panel Arranged to Suppress Bridged Ringing.
Page 43
SECTION 518-215-417
6684-25
CONN 8LK
~
ROW ASSIGlfENT
(NOTE 1)
FIELD
CONNECTIONS
TO 4OO-TYPE KlU
(NOTE 3)
8LKS I, 3, 5, 7
AND 9 (NOTE 2)
LEFT-HAND 8LKS
8LKS 2, 4, 6, 8
AND 1D (NOTE 2)
RIGHT-HAND 8LKS
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY (PART
>-----I[!]~I!~________________~~~9~1~~~CONII~)
:,
-----------I-t
~
~:"'---4)
2 1181341
;
(
CA(~)
TO DIODE IlATRIX
I
I
I
I
I 2 1 18 1 34 1
: <13
I 1 1 17 1 33 1
I
I
I
i
(
12
I
1 1171331
:
<14
1 6 1 22 138 1
;
(
I
I
I
1
I
1 8 1 24 1 40 1
( 21
(as
TO 421A KTU
( 20
( 35
( 24
( 39
(26
( 37
NOTES,
1. COLI"" MlSIIlIfENT FOR LEn-HANO BLK IS COLI"" A-E AND FOR RIGHT-HAND
2.
3.
4.
5.
BLK 18 F-B. SEE BLOCK OIAGIWI COVERINO 6BB4-25 CONN BLK
IN FIG. 6.
TERl'lINALS 33 TII!U 48 ARE SPARES ON CONN BLK6 9 ANO 10.
REFER TO 400-TYPE KTU FOR OPTION.
TELEPHONE BET IlIST BE EQUIPPED WITH STATION BUSY OPTION.
LETTERS IN PARENTHESIS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
FOR GENERAL PURPOSE USE OR
AUOISLE SIBNAL SUPPRESSION
Fig. 39-tNondedicated Lead Connections for 421A KTU (Audible Signal Suppression Circuit) in 598-Type
Panel Arranged to Suppress Common Audible Ringing.
Poge 44
421A KTU
66B4-25
CONN BLK
413A KTU
6684-25
CONN BlK
[~
L~]
ROW ASSI GNMENT
(NOTE I)
rl ELD
CONNECTIONS
TO LAMP
ASSOCIATED
WITH 01 AL
INTERCOM AT
SELECTED
STATION
TO 4258 KTU
SELECTED
STAT ION
"l" LEAD
BLKS 1.3.5.7
AND 9 (NOTE 2)
LEn-HAND BLKS
[ L (I)
L (2)
L (3)
L (I)
[
"L' LEAD or
TO 4258
CODE
ASSKTU
I GNED
TO PRESET
CONrERENCE
L (2)
L (3)
BlKS 2,4,6,8
AND 10 (NOTE 2)
R I GIlT-HAND BLKS
I
17
33
2
18
34
7
23
39
I
35
I
17
14
33
2
18
34
7
23
39
I
I
-;:::==~;;;~~~t~~~===~
38
35
20
16
I
TO DSS SIGNAL
KEY ASSIGNED
TO PRESET
CONrERENCE
CODE
STRAP-q:
13
6
22
38
9
25
41
8
24
40
36
I~:I::I
i(
I
I
JrSTRAP
1
.
.
.
:
17
33
~~~R~~ ~~ODE
BASIC DIAL
I NTERCOM
(NOTE 6)
FEATURE
I----------t--=-+=---:..::...-~.-:.:.:-=-_l
22
21
(NOTE 5)
NOTES:
'1
fa
CD
....en
12
CA
I
I. COLUMN ASSIGNMENT rOR LEn-HANG BLK IS A-E AND roR RIGHT-HAND BlK
IS r-B. SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM COVERING 6684-25 CONN BLK IN riG. 6.
2. TERMINALS 33 THRU 48 ARE SPARES ON CONN BlKS 9 AND 10.
3. WHEN THIS CIRCUIT IS PROVIDED. RING VOLTAGE (105Vt) MUST BE USED TO
OPERATE THE AUDIBLE SIGNALS CONNECTED TO THE DIAL INTERCOM LINE.
4. OW" OPTION MUST BE PROVIDED ON THE 421A KTU.
TO
413A
KTU
TO PRESET
CONrERENCE
I
---.!
4
I
CONrERENCE
FOR GENERAL PURPOSE USE
I
I
13
I
~~:~m:~~ED :S}=:dlj~~:jlt:~:d-I----------~ir: ~
TO PRESET
TO
421A
KTU
(NOTES
3 AND 4)
SHOWN rOR
RErERENCE
ONLY
(PART or
914A CONN)
BlKS 2.4.6.8
AND 10 (NOTE 2)
RIGHT-HAND BLKS
12
23
J
AND 9 (NOTE 2)
LEn-HAND BLKS
I
8124140
TO 407 OR
424-TYPE KTU
BlKS 1,3,5,7
I
I
_L__
ROW ASSIGNMENT
(NOTE I)
SHOWN rOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
(PART OF
914A CONN)
5. PROVIDE THE 413A KTU ONLY WHEN ACCESS TO THE PRESET COFERENCE IS BY
DIAL CODE OR BY DIAL CODE AND OSS. 00 NOT PROVI DE THE 413A KTU WHEN
ACCESS TO THE PRESET CONFERENCE IS LIMITED TO DSS.
6. THE "CA" lEAD MUST CONNECT TO THE DIODE MATRIX WHETHER OR NOT THE
413A KTU IS PROVIDED.
Fig. 40-.Nondedicated Lead Connections for 421A KTU or 413A KTU (Wired for Preset Conference Circuit for
Deluxe Dial Intercom Line) in 598-Type Panel.
66B4-25 CONN BlK
66B4-25 CONN BlK
~
~
ROW ASSIGNMENT
(NOTE I)
FIELD
BlKS I, 3, 5, 7
AND 9 (NOTE 2)
lEFT-HAND BlKS
CONNECTIONS
YI
[
~
12
28
44
I 13 I 29 I 45 k
Bl (4)
1 12 128 1 44
:~ ::~
~ I:: I:~ I
Bl (7)
r-+<
(0 )
JI
KTU~
:g~
I:! I;b I:~ H, ~~
>-i
I
I (
I
6 1221381
(NO TE 5) -,-
Bl
BYI
CONNECT AS(
J
REQUIRED
113 1 29 145
I4
1 20 1 36 1
I 3
119 1 35 K
26
I
~~frffi3====~;g~
I:~ I~~ I:~ p
I
Bl (XO
TO 424TYPE KTU
1';I~~I;:p 35
34
lT2
I
I
I
J2
16
~~
TO
422B
KTU
(NOTE 3)
-:~~~[I~~J3~----------------~:~(29
29
I( 14
I
I
I( 19
28
1,2128144
I
I I 1 '7 1 33 1
k
~=HH£HB=====*:
g~
H
TO
422B
KTU
(NOTE 3)
I':I~~ I::P;~
TO 407 OR 424-TYPE KTU- lTI
Bl
27
o
9
I
Bl (8)
Bl
26
8
.~~g'22
28
:g~
f-,--(
16 122138
I
~B:l~(:9)~1IJI~3]112~9]1~4~5JI--------------~:(
TO 423A KTU [
(NOTE 6)
8
27
22
:~~;~ I:~I~~I:~I
TO 407-TYPE
elKS 2, 4, 6, 8
::
Bl (I)
(5
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
(PART OF
914A CONN)
AND 10 (NOTE 2)
RIGHT-HAND BlKS
.~Y!2~~~tl9t1!215ll41'l=~~~~~~~=3~
:!
~
424-TYPE KTU~:
TO 407 OR
BR
TO ASSOCIATED
TEL SET "Sl" LEAD
(NOTE 4)
REFERENCE
ONLY
(PART OF
914A CONN)
AND 10 (NOTE 2)
RIGHT-HAND BlKS
....
ROW ASS I GNMENT
(NOTE II
SHOWN FOR
BlKS 2,4, 6, 8
6 122138
III
~
I
TO
422B
KTU
TO 424TYPE KTV
CONNECT AS [
REQUIRED
NOTES'
I. COLUMN ASSIGNMENT FOR LEFT-HAND BlK IS A-E AND FOR RIGHT-HAND BlK
IS F-B. SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM COVERING 66B4-25 CONN BlK IN FIG. 6.
2. TERMINALS 33 THRU 48 ARE SPARES ON CONN BlKS 9 AND 10.
3. PROVIDE A SEPARATE 422B KTU FOR THE UNITS GROUPS (1-0, SINGLE DIGIT
NOS.) AND FOR THE TENS GROUP (X I-XO, TWO DIGIT NOS.)
4. PROVIDE AND INSTALL A 440F DIODE IN THE "A" lEAD OF THE ASSOCIATED
TEL SETS. FOR CONNECTION, USE THE STATION BUSY OPTION AS SHOWN IN
THE CONNECTION SECTION OF THE TYPE SET USED.
5. CONNECT "Ji" LEAD OF UNITS 4228 KTU WHEN A 407-TYPE KTU IS PROVIDED
FOR THE DIAL INTERCOM CIRCUIT. WHEN A 424-TYP£ KTU IS PROVIDED, STRAP
THE "Ji" LEAD OF UNITS 4228 KTU TO "J2" LEAD OF TENS 4228 KTU.
6. 423A KTU ASSOCIATED WITH SAME DIAL INTERCOM AS THE 422B KTUS.
JI
Bl
BYI
C-
15
14
6
I
4
31
30
22
17
20
47
46
38
33
36
J
33
31
I
14
19
I 3 119135
r-L< 16
OPTION STRAPPING ON 422B -+-
~7~
28 >-+-
~9 ~
4>+30 >-+5>-+31~
6>-+32 ~
7>-+33 >-+8>-+34 >-+9>-+35 >-+-
10~
36
II~
37~
12
?+-
38~
>+-
42
17 >-t43 >-t18 >-t44 >-t19 >-+45 >-+20
46
>-t>+-
ll§
50
25
z
--,
.;
~
c
....
z
~
!€
--,
:t:
:::::
-+<
~II
~~~
38
13
39
c
z
40
!~16 s:!:
48
23
49
24
~
.....'" :t
c
E= .... --«
--«
s:!: 7 ~14
13
39
14 "
40
CD
:!::
:::::
:::::
:::::
:::::
:::::
/
26
I
27
2
28
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8
34
9
35
10
36
>+--
s:t
on
0
'"
....
u
~
0
u
...'"
en
0
....
§::
42
17
43
18
~44
-+<
-+c
-+c
-+c
-+<
-+c
-+c
-+<
:!
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24
~50
25
II
A25B
CONN
CABLE
(W-BL)
BL-W
W~O
O-W
W-G
G-W
W-BR)
BR-W
W-S
(s-W)
R-BL
BL-R)
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R
R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
BL-BK
BK-O
O-BK
BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y
Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
Soy
V-BL
BL-V
you.
lU-V
V-G
G-V
V-BR
BR-V
V-S
-V
66B4-25
CONN BLK
BLK 2
RIGHT HAND BLK
lfffGd]
'""1'1"
rt"""r-z
r?--r4-~
4
~r-4-f4--~
~~
.,L,...L
~+a
f-t'!"ffI'"
Cf2'12
~~
r4~
~~
*ctt
rt8~
~~
20 20
r'2I~
122rz2
t23~
'24
24
'25~
'26 26
'"WT7
Ta"~
29~
30
30
31ST
jtlt
~.R
~1!.
~~
-M-~
.g.~
¥-~
~~
~~
.g..4:':~#~#-~#-~~
~~
.g..g..
~~
~~
2Q...3!L
RG
RI
RG
R2
RG
R3
RG
R4
RG
R5
RG
R6
RG
R7
RG
R8
RG
R9
RG
RO
RG
RXI
RG
RX2
RG
RX3
RG
RX4
RG
RX5
RG
RX6
RG
RX7
RG
RX8
RG
RX9
RG
RXO
T
R
LG
L
TO
J
BYI
TTG
SPARE
SPARE
Fig. 14-601A Panel, Connection of A25B Connedar Cable. to 66B4-25 Connedlng Blocks
Page 14
603A
PANEL
® OPTION
(W-BL)
T
(BL-W)
R
(W-O)
YI
(O-W)
Y2
(ONE REQ'D
FOR EACH
INTERCOM
THAT IS
"rOUCHTONE"
EQUIPPED)
--
426A AND
427B
SERIES 4,
OR C KTU'S
MUST BE
LOCALLY
FURNISHED
(W-G)
Y3
(G-W)
Y4
(W-BR)
YS
(BR-W)
RH
(W-S)
(NOTE Il
®
TTG
(S-W) A BAT
(R-BL)
CG
(BL-R)
RSI
INSULATE
AND STORE
SPARE LEADS
NOTES:
1. TERMINATIONS AND OPTIONS
SHOWN IN COLUMNS C, B AND A
ARE DEDICATED TO 603A PANELS
USED WITH INTERCOM CIRCUITS IN
JACKS JI, J2 AND J3 RESPECTIVELY.
2. USE 20 GAUGE STRAPPING WI RE
(STRIP WIRE BEFORE TERMINATING
ON CONNECTING BLOCK) FOR POWER
CONNECTIONS. TO AVOID SHORTS,
MAKE CONNECT IONS ON
601A PANEL CONNECTIIIG
BLOCK BErORE COIINEeTl NG TO
POWER SUPPLY.
3.-<>--<>--0--0
CABLE
1"""1
W-BL)
T
R
tz
TO TEL SET
CONNECT
ACCORDING
TO TABLE
R(I-XOI
(ttt
~"~
.L
-!-~
RG (I-XOI
...L
..L
TTG (NOTE 31
J.Q....
.!.!-
fr
ii.
~
~
f.'l~
~
~
~
~
~
~
4
~
~
R
~
~
tit
~
TO POWER
SUPPLY FO R
584-TYPE
PANEL
B GRD
f3i.
~
105V±
~
A BAT.
A GRD
B BAT.
NOTES:
I. TERM INATE CONN CABLE TO
COLU MN F IF LEFT-HAND BLOCK
OR COLUMN A IF RIGHT-HAND
BLOCK. REFER TO BLOCK
DIAG RAM COVERI NG 66B4-25
CONN BLOCK.
2. SEE F IG.7 FOR PANEL AND
CONNECTING BLOCK LAYOUT.
~
r#
~
tiL
&
f1L
~
~
~
&
~
I.ft..
~
(RI-
WoO
O-W
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W
W-S
SoW)
R-BL
(BL-R)
R-O)
O-R
R-G
G-R
R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
(BK-BL)
BL-BK
(BK-O)
O-BK
BK-G
(G-BK)
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-BL
BL-Y
Y-O
O-Y)
Y-G
(G-Y)
Y-BR
BR-Y
(y-s)
Soy
V-BL
BL-V
v-o)
(O-V
V-G
(G-V
V-BR
BR-V
V-S
S-V
3. ~ 400J 0 lODE (FURN I SHED LOCALLY) MUST
BE CONNECTED BETWEEN THE TTG TERM I NAL
THE SELECTOR AND THE TTG TERMINAL
THE 420A KTU IN A "TOUCH-TONE"
EQU I PPED SELECTOR ONLY ARRANGEMENT.
DIODE SHOULD BE CONNECTED AS SHOWN BELOW.
or
or
AMPHENOL
CONN
26 (
I (
27 (
2 (
28 (
t
..
CONN A
( 14
( 9
(12
---<( 1613
~t==
3~~
4~OA
KTU
~ ~
0
5
19
3~~
6
~16f
33
8
34
9
35
10 ,
:~ ~
~17
r<18
r"F
t
36
'---
37
12
38
13 ( - 39
14
40
CONN B
I
0
19
8
7
14
2
15~
41
16 ~
42
17 0 - 43
18
44
:--
9
4
19~
12
5
6
10
13
45
II
~ t"-
16
18
3
17
15
21
47
~~ f---
23
~
it
5~
31 :
6 (--
~
49 ~
24 ~
50 ~
25 ~
TABLE
CONN 8LOCK
USING
4078
KTU
TO SELECTOR --+~Il-- TO 420A KTU
*
69B APPARATUS MOUNT I NG
III
34C
38C
488
ASSOCIATED WITH FIRST INTERCOM CIRCUIT. {JACK I) USING
ASSOCIATED WITH SECOND INTERCOM CIRCUIT .(JACK2) 424A
ASSOCIATED WITH THIRD INTERCOM CIRCUIT. (JACK 3I KTU
48B
4
2t
3+
340
34C
380
38C
AS ASSIGNED FOR STATION
CONNECTIONS, SEE FIG. 17
48C
480
4811
208t
248t
BBII
AS ASSIGNED FOR STATION
CONNECTIONS, SEE FIG. 18
48C
480
36Bt
40Bt
T
R
RG (1-0)
R (1-01
TTG
T
R
RG (I-XO)
R (I-XOI
TTG
J
]
Fig. l~OlA Panel, 420A KTU, Lang Line Circuit, Basic Dial Intercam, Cannedlons to Optional KTU Mounted
in 69B Apparatus Mounting
Pag_ 20
ISS 2, SECTION 518-215-418
6684-25 CONN BLK
CONNECT LEADS WITH
r
CODE (NOTE I)
~CONN
0--0--0--0--0-- CABL [
ROW AND COLUMN
ASSIGNMENT rOR
66T! CONN BLOCK
ROW ASGN COL A OR
(NOTES. AND 5)
FOR DESIRED STATION
I 2 3 4 567890
.,-
ON 60 I A PANEL
*I
t
C3
C4
B3
B4
A3
A4
C5
B5
A5
I
I
I
I
3
.-- f-¥--
YI
"- ~
Y2
/
Y3
f-2-6
I-+-
I{r-
f-fo
ff,12
13
C7
C8
B7
A7
B8
A8
TO POWER
SUPPLY ro R
584-TYP[
PANEL
~
16
Of
~
Y.
C6 B6 A6
CII BII All
TO SIGNAL KEY [
(NOTE 2)
~
YS
RH
CG
(NOTE 1)
20
S
~
B GRD
I-¥24
~
[i~
B
B
B
B
GRO
GRD
GRD
GRD
B GRD
25
g
NOTE
14
6~
~
~
31
32
i-#NOTES:
I. SiLEC T CODE AND CONNECT LEADS rOR SELECTED CODE AS
SHOWN IN VERTICAL COLUMN.
2. PROVID E SEPARATE SIGNAL KEY FOR EACH STATION CODE
TO BE SELECTED.
3. PROVID E A SEPARATE 421A KTU rOR EACH STATION CODE
TO BE SELECTED.
4. TERMI NATE CONN CABLE TO COL F IF LEFT-HAND BLOCK
OR CO LUMN A IF RIGHT-HAND BLOCK. RErER TO BLOCK
01 AGR AM COVER I NG 66B4-25 CONN BLOCK.
5. SEE F I G. 6 FOR PANEL AND CONN BLOCK LAYOUT.
6. IF "TOUCH- TONE" IS PROV IDEO. CONNECT CG LEAD
FROM 603A PANEL TO TERM. 29 IN PLACE or B GRD.
CG lE AD FROM EXT BLK TE'RM. 19 TO 66TI CONN BLK
TERM. II REMA I NS AS SHOWN.
7. WHEN MORE THAN ONE 421A KTU I S USED rOR DSS. CONNECT
B GRD OR THE CG LEAD AS FOLLOWS,
603A
~~~
PANEL
PANEL
CG
~
~
~
f#38
14
f4?~
~
~
i#~
'-~
!Tafit
ill:
A25B
(W-BL)
BL-W
W-O
O-W
>-t-------'
@
WITH"TOUCH TONE"
@
WITHOUT "TOUCH TONE"
2
1(
I (
EI
EI
;~~
29
4
30
I
8
H-
I
31
6
32
7
I~ l 0
19
20
21
33
8
34
23
24
2~tlI2~
9
35
10
36
II
37
R-S)
S-R
SK-Bl
BL-BK
BK-D
O-BK
K-G
G-BK
BK-BR
12
38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16
BR-BK
BK-S
(S-BK)
Y-Bt
BL-Y
Y-O
"
9
I( 12~1I ( 13
I( 16~1I
5
BR-R
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y
(V-BL)
BL-V)
V-O
O-V
(V-G)
G-V
v-BR
(BR-V)
V-S
S-V
CONN A
E
26
I
I (I
27
IW-G
G-w
W-BR
BR-W)
(w-s)
S-W
R-BL
BL-R
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R)
R-BR
26
29
~~ i-i-
35
36
37
39
II-
38
7
~! EI
I
44
19
45
20
421 A
KTU
(NOTE 3)
3'
I
17
I-
30
31
32
+t-
42
tl-
27
28
2
4
H-
I
E+-
I
;~~
47
22
48
23
49
24
10
II
1
5
6
18
3
17f- l 15
50~
25
fL-
*
66-TYPE CONN BLK
@
690 APPARATUS MOUNTING
UPPER
AMPHENOL
CONN
60 I A
ASSOCIATED WITH FIRST
INTERCOM CIRCUIT
ASSOC I ATED WITH SECOND
INTERCOM CIRCUIT
ASSOCIATED WITH THIRD
INTERCOM CIRCUIT
SELECT SPARE TERMINALS
ON 66B4-25 CONN BLOCK
TO MULTI PLE GROUNDS.
Fig. 20--601A Panel, 421A KTU, Arranged for DSS, Basic Dial Intercom, Connections to Optional KTU Mounted
in 69D Apparatus Mounting
Page 21
SECTION 518-215-418
TO SELECTED "R" LEAD Of CODE [. PRESET CONf I
ASSIGNED TO ORIGINATE
R(I-XOI
PRESET CONfERENCE. REfER
::[Rbl::::-x~o~===;-l
TO fiG. 17 OR 18 fOR
R LEAD TERMINATION.
DIAL CODE FOR STA A
PRESET CO...
Nf_2_,I ........,I ..........,I..---, <-,1.------,
I
IAI MATRIX BLOCK (NOTE 3)
NOTES:
I. USE 446f 0 lODE (PROCURE LOCALLY)
2. WHEN RINGERS ARE USED AS AUDIBLE SIGNALS, REMOVE RINGER CAPACITORS fROM
CIRCUITS.
Fig. 21-601A Panel, Basic Dial Intercom, Connections to Optional Dial Selected Preset Conference Circuit
Using 1A 1 Matrix Block
Page 22
ISS 2, SECTION 518-215-418
66B4-25
CONN BlK
BlKS I AND 3
lEFT HAND BlK
~
AMPHENOL
A25B
CONN
~:/CABlE
RG
RI
LG
LI
RG
R2
LG
L2
RG
R3
LG
L3
RG
R4
LG
L4
RG
R5
LG
L5
RG
R6
LG
L6
RG
R7
LG
L7
RG
RS
LG
LS
RG
R9
lG
L9
RG
RO
lG
lO
T
R
LG
l.LA
TO
TTG
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
rc- --;-
'-b- --k-~~
~~
-4--4~~
++rae
rgg-
'10 """"10
~"""iT
""T2"T2
1313
i41t"
TsTsTsI6
1717
TsTaCj9~
C202O"
2121
2222
'i3i3
'2424"
czsis
f26TsCZ7T7""
czaie
'2929
'30 Tof3I3I
'3232"
'33T3f34v
'35"35
'363e'37ir
138"38
'39"39
f40ToI4Itr
'4242"
'43T3~it~Ts-
C464s~~
f#-*~sO
'-=-
-=-
(W-Bl)
Bl-W
w-o
O-W
W-G
G-W
W-BR
BR-W
W-S
S-W)
(R-Bl)
Bl-R
R-O
O-R)
R-G
G-R
R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-Bl
Bl-BK
BK-O
O-BK
BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-Bl
Bl-Y
Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y
V-Bl
Bl-V
V-O
O-V
-0.
G-V
V-BR
BR-V
V-S
S-V
CONNS
P2 \
I PI P3
I
26
SOIA PANEL
R
?-r-
~7~
~ ~7
~8~
28
3
f-+-< 29
f-+-<4
30
r-r<5
f-+-< 31
~~
f-+<
~O~
31 !+6~
: 32
7)-t-33 )-t-8)-t-34 )-t-9)-t--
::§
36
II
~~ ?!=
38
13
39
(+-
h-
!~~
15
.41
16
42
17
43
18
44
?+h(+hh>+-
(-t19~
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24
50
25
hh>+-
>+>+-
S=t
h>+>+~
I
~6
~~2
~~3
ID
~
Q
':i
'"
~
cii
~
Q
z
'"
'"
~
cii
...,
Q
':i
...,,
~
'"'"g
::.::
z
z
e
"'"
'"
0
0-
.
~~4
9
35
r-r< 10
f-+-< 36
f-+-< I I
r-r< 37
f-+-< 12
f-+-< 38
f-+-< 13
K39
~14
40
g(
16
42
17
~43
~!!
19
45
20
46
21
f-+<
f-+<
f-+<
~ 22
47
48
k 23
~
24
49
50
25
II
A25B
CONN
CABLE
(W-BL)
BL-W
w-o
O-W
W-G
G-W
W-BR)
BR-W
w-s
(s-w)
R-BL)
Bl-R)
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R
R-BR
BR-R
R-S
S-R
BK-BL
Bl-BK
BK-O
O-BK
BK-G
G-BK
BK-BR
BR-BK
BK-S
S-BK
Y-Bl
Bl-Y
Y-O
O-Y
Y-G
G-Y
Y-BR
BR-Y
Y-S
S-Y
V-Bl
Bl-V
v-o
O-V
V-G
G"V
V-BR
BR-V
V-S
S-V
6684-25
CONN BLK
BLK 2
RIGHT HAND BlK
~
'Ir""I
rz-f-2
rt-f-3
r-t-'""'4
rsrs
I6rs
~rT
rsr-a
~rg10
'10
~'II
r,t-f-j2
~g
r-l?-~
~~
~~
~~
~~
~~
r#-~
*~
'24 24
czsrzs
f26f26
T7T7
czaf28
~~
~~
~~
~~
~~
r#-fM~~
~~
r#-t#~i#~~
~~
&&
~~
~~
~~
~~
~~
&&
~~
~~
~~
RG
RXI
LG
LXI
RG
RX2
LG
LX2
RG
RX3
LG
LX3
RG
RX4
LG
LX4
RG
RX5
LG
LX5
RG
RX6
LG
LX6
RG
RX7
LG
LX7
RG
RXS
LG
LXS
RG
RX9
lG
lX9
RG
RXO
lG
lXO
BLI
Bl2
Bl3
Bl4
Bl5
Bl6
Bl7
Bl8
Bl9
BlO
~TO
Q
TEL
SET
E NOTEl
NOTE:
WHEN Bl lEAD IS USED TO PROVIDE BUSY TONE. DONNEeT 400J
DIODE IN EACH BL lEAD AS REQUIRED. POLE LOCAllY
PROCURED DIODE AS SHOWN.
Fig. 22-602A Panel, Connection of A258 Connector Cables to 6684-25 Connecting 810cks
Page 23
SECTION 518-215-418
66T I CONN BLOCK ON 602A
PANEL
I(W-Bl)
603A
PANEL
(Bl-II)
OPTION
®
(11-0)
T
T
(0-11)
®
!."2
Y2
(II-G)
(II-BR)
Y5
®
0
RH
(11-5)
TTG
Y2
_®>--
-4
-()
t 0-1
0
-0
O
6" ~
0
S-
(Bl-R)
RSI
7 f-o
RH
OPTIONS
.!.
.!!.
TYPE Of
AUDI8LE
SIGNAL
SINGLE
SPURT
I AC
I DC
BUZZER OR BEll
A
BAT
BUZZER OR BELL
10
I RINGER
INTERRUPTED RINGING WITH
STATION BUSY TONE
INTERRUPTED RINGING
R
X
Z IIITHOUT 'TOUCHTONE"
S
AUD 18LE RI NGBACK TONE
T
01 AL TONE (NOTE 2)
-
V
fLASH I Ita US I NG 407B KTU
LINE
IUS I NG 424A KTU
LAMPS
N III TH 'TOUCHTONE"
r '0-
0
()+
OPTION
STRAPS
fACTORY
fURNISHED
®
-0
~
13
NOT
FACTORY
FURNISHED
®
55
~
,@
105V<
-24V
10V<
I
0
®~®
3 rCV
TO POIIER
SUPPLY fOR
584-TYPE
PANEL
(NOTE 3)
lG
-24V A BAT.
r::(NOTE 5)
A GRD
(NOTE 61
t®
-24V B BAT.
tOr
® r*-l
r
B GHD
XINOTEOX
14
®
IOV' OR 18V<
t®
o
CG
Ii
(NOTE 4
105V'
®t
NOTES.
I. If
AND
OPTIONS ARE PROVIDED, A 400J DIODE
(PROCURED lOCALLY) MUST BE PLACED BETWEEN TERMINALS
814,CI4 AND RH LEAD MOVED fROM TERM. A8 TO TERM. B8.
2. DIAL TONE PROVIDED BY PLUGGING IN 423A KTU.
3. USE 20 GAUGE STRAPPING IIIRE (STRIP IIIRE
BEfORE TERMINATING ON CONNECTING BLOCK)
fOR POWER CONNECTIONS TO AVOID SHORTS.
MAKE CONNECTIONS ON 602A PANEL CONNECTING
BLOCK BEfORE CONNECTI NG TO THE POWER SUPPLY.
4. CONNECT TO B GRD AS SHOWN.
5. REMOVE
OPTION IF 424A KTU IS USED.
®
~
18Y>
0
407B KTU USED
f
H
~
TO INTERRUPTER
lOCATED AT
584- TYPE PANEL
RG
TTG
9 ~
~
27*1 3911t1
1@
lNOTE Il
8" ~
INSULATE AND
STORE SPARE lEADS
J
11.
Y4
e--..
-
6
11*1321
(NOTE 7 I
r@
Y5
CG
RN
r+.>--
(s-w) A BAT.
(R-Bl)
®
10*1411rr
~
BTl
ST
0
Y3
(BR-II)
9 *1341
0
0
YI
Y4
CONTACTS
3
ATI
lG
-0
13 - 0
Y3
(G-II)
0
0
R
YI
INTERRUPTER
If
I i -0
6. REMOVE
® OPTION
IF 'TOUCH-TONE" IS USED.
7. CONNECT RN LEAD TO PANEL IF INTERRUPTED
SIGNAL FOR INTERCOM IS THE SAME AS
PROVIOED BY 584-TYPE PANEL INTERRUPTER.
IF DIFFERENT INTERRUPTED SIGNAL IS REQUIRED
FOR INTERCOM. CONNECT TO FIG. 25.
*
TERMINALS ON 584B (MOl PANEL
TERMINALS ON 584C (MOl PANEL
TERMINALS ON 5840 PANEL.
®
Fig. 2~02A Panel, Connection of Power and Interrupter Leads, Option Strapping, and TOUCH-TONE
Page 24
1552, SECTION 518-215-418
66B4-25
CONN BlK
BlK I
R I
R(2)
R(3)
R(4)
TO
R(5)
R(6)
R(7)
R (8)
2A
6A
lOA
14A
ISA
22A
26A
30A
R(9)
R(O)
(SEE NOTE)
34A
3SA
45A
NOTE:
ANY SELECTED DIGIT MAY BE MADE THE
INITIAL DIGIT OF THE TWO DIGIT DIAL
CODE. STRAP THE R LEAD OF OF THE
SELECTED DIGIT TO THE TO lEAD. THE
DIGIT SO ASSIGNED CANNOT BE USED
FOR A STATION CODE.
TPA 542935
Fig. 24-602A Panel, 424A KTU Connection of
Transfer Digit Lead
Page 25
SECTION 518-215-418
66B4-25
CONN BLOCK
ROW ASS I GNMENT
COL A OR F
(NOTES I AND 2)
ROW AN o COLUMN
ASS IGNMENT FOR 66T I
CONN BLOCK ON
602A PANEL
BL
B9
BR
BIO
YI
B3
B7
84
BII
BI3
TO
POWER
SUPPLY
~
rt
STRAP ---.
Y5
Y2
~Y4
812
lf8±SJ
r---r-
J3
J2
LT2
B BAT.
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
8L X5
8L X6
BL X2
8L(X3)
8L X4
8L(XI)
8L X9
8L(X8)
8L X7
BL
xo
r- ~
r!4~
f-#~
16
'IS
19
~
,.g.
4
...... -¥.~
~
4
-P-
690 APPARATUS MOUNT I NG
A25B
CONN
CABLE
UPPER
AMPHENOL
CONN
(W-BL)
4228
KTU
CONN A
26~14f-- fI~ 9 f - - I 4~ 8 f-- I 5~ 1 ' - -I 31~0 ' - - I 32~20 f - - I -
BL-W)
BR-W
S-W
R-BL
R-O
O-R
R-G
G-R
(8R-R)
R-S
S-R
(8K-8L
(8L-BK
(8K-0
0-8K
8K-G
G-BK
BK-BR
Y-BL
,i:::::::=g;§
fI-
8~23
l--
9~25
I-
35~2~f-- l--
10~2~f-- f-
f36~28
11~29~ f37~30 ! - 12~31 ! - 38~32 ! - 13~33!--
39~35E 49~17
41~34
4~~
.£..
66B4-25
CONN BLOCK
ROW ASS I GNMENT
COL A OR F
(NOTES 1,2 AND 3)
~
TO FIG
TO
[
POWER
SUPPL Y
23 [
ATI
RN
10V< lav< 105V<
B BAT.
lO
16
~
47
NOTES:
I. TERMINATE CONN CABLE TO COL F IF LEFT-HAND BLOCK
OR COLUMN A IF RIGHT-HAND BLOCK. REFER TO BLOCK
DIAGRAM COVER I NG 66B4-25 CONN BLOCK.
2. SEE FIG. 9 FOR PANEL AND CONNECTING BLOCK LAYOUT.
3. WHEN CONNECTING THE 421A KTU PER THE LAYOUT IN FIG. 9
THE FIRST a LEADS (W-BL THRU BR-W) OF THE A25B CONN
CABLE MUST BE I NSULATED AND STORED AND THE REMA I NOER
CUT DOWN I N THE NORMAL MANNER.
A25B
CONN
CABLE
LOWER
AMPHENOL
CONN
(S-W)
421A
KTU
CONN B
5~1~ f-
(G-R)
(BK-BR
(V-BR
a~23
I-
49~17
f-
39~35t= f-
*
TO TEL SET, SEE FIG. 27 FOR CONNECT IONS
TPA 551245
Fig. 25--602A Panel, 422B KTU, Xl-XO Station Busy Seledor Circuit Connedions for Adding Tens Group and
Optional 421A KTU to Provide Interrupted Signaling
Page 26
ISS 2, SECTION 518-215-418
STATION NUMBER
(I)
(2)
(3)
(5)
(4)
(6)
(7)
(9)
(8)
(0)
CONN BLOCK ROW AND COLUMN ASSIGNMENT ,OR STATIONS
l~
41A
TO TEL SET
VIA CROSSCONNS
Gil G£l
~
41E
~ ~ ~ [££J
47E
~ ~
STRAP*
~ 1426 I ~ ~
42E
STRAP
~ ~ ~ ~
48E
~ G;l
STRAP*
TO AUO
SIG VIA
CROSSCONNS
[:G(B)
R8 ~ tfuj
6A
lOA
ffiB
14A
22A
66B4-2S
CONN
BLOCK,
BLOCK 1#
STRAP*
ffiE ffiE ~ ~
18A
*
26A
30A
LEFT
HAND
BLOCK.
~ ffiE
34A
38A
66B4-25
CONN
J
NOTE:
WHEN BL LEAD I S USED TO PROV I DE
BUSY TONE, CONNECT 400J DIODE IN
EACH BL LEAD AS REQUIRED.
POLE
LOCALLY PROCURED DIODE AS SHOWN.
TO
TEL
SET
Bl
Bl
~I
I
2
BLOCK,
BLOCK 2t,
RIGHT
HAND
BLOCK +
*
USE CONTINUOUS METHOD Of STRAPPING.
t CONN BLOCK 2 I S NOT REQU I REO WHEN THE 407B
KTU IS USED WITHOUT STATION BUSY OPTION.
SEE FIG. 8 ,OR PANEL AND CONNECTING
BLOCK lAYOUT.
TO
CONN
BlK
Fig. 26--602A Panel, 4078 KTU, Station Connections via Cross-Connections for Deluxe Dial Intercom
Page 27
SECTION 518-215-418
STATION NUMBER
(I)
(2)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8 )
(9)
(0)
CONN BLOCK ROW AND COLUMN ASSIGNMENTS fOR STATIONS
TO TEL
SET VIA
CROSSCONNS
~@~~
~~~~
47E
G;J~
STRAP (SEE NOTE)
~~.~~
~~~@
48E
G;J~
STRAP (SEE NOTE)
TO AUD [RG(B)
SIG VIA
CROSSR
CONNS
TO TEL [LG
SET VIA
L
CROSSCONNS
8B888§jEffij
Effij8ili8lli8lli
8lli8ili
888BBiliEffij
8iB8lli8iliBili
8lliBlli
2A
4A
6A
8A
lOA
12A
14A
16A
18A
20A
22A
24A
26A
28A
30A
32A
34A
36A
J"
38A
40A
TO AUD
RG(B)
SIG
VIA [RG(B)
CROSS~R____________________________________________________________________~~___
~
~~TT~~A[~~_G
CROSSCONNS
________________________________________________________________________
~~~EJ
~~~~
~HEET
j
TO
~
~LG
_____
~~
]
66B4-25
~~~K.
BLOCK 2
NOTE'
USE CONTINUOUS METHOD Of STRAPPING.
* DENOTES
CONNECT IONS TO BE MADE
ON CONNECT I NG BLOCK 3
DENOTES CONNECTI ONS TO BE MADE
ON CONNECT I NG BLOCK 4 (ASSOC I ATED
WITH 69D APPARATUS MOUNTING)
SEE fiG. 9 fOR PANEL AND
CONNECTING BLOCK LAYOUT
Fig. 27-602A Panel, 424A KTU, Station Connections via Cross-Connections for Deluxe Dial Intercom (Sheet
1)
Page 28
ISS 2, SECTION 518-215-418
STAT ION NUMBER
(x I)
(X2)
(X3)
(X4)
(X5)
(X6)
(x71
(X8)
(X9)
(XO )'
CONN BLOCK ROW AND COLUMN ASSIGNMENTS FOR STATIONS
l
~~
IA*
STRAP (SEE NOTE)
~~~~T
[
SHEET
EJ~EJ~
STRAP (SEE NOTE)
6694-25
CONN
] BLOCK,
BLOCKS,
_-,---",'---,S",oc=-I",'"-S,,0,,D_1..J5OE ,-1__2_A*_I_'_2_B_*-.. .:.;I:.;:':.:2,-C",*=1,,1_2_D_*_1--,2F* '4
STRAP (SEE NOTEl
:R B)
fROM
~~~
STRAP (SEE NOH)
~
2f
0
~17rl
~0
_
STRAP
(SEE NOTEl
A- - -c>-- ~- -0----0
12
0--
~---o--~--o
13
0- -
-0---<>-'- --0---0
16
<>- -~ -
- 0 - - --0- - - 0
15
NOTES:
I. THERE ARE TWO TERMINAL F I (LDS AS
I LLUSTRATED ON THE 620A OR 620A2 PANEL.
EACH TERMINAL FIELD IS DIVIDED
INTO FOUR IDENTICAL QUADRANTS.
TYP I CAL QUADRANT (I A) I S SHOWN
HERE AND USED I N THE
FOLLOW I NG 620A OR 620A2 CONNECTION FIGURES.
2. FOR 18 VAC, 24 VDC, GROUND
OR AS REQU I RED FOR
S I GNALI NG PURPOSES OTHER
THAN PROV IDEO (EXTERNAL
POIlER SOURCE MAY BE
I
REQUIRED).
I 3. TERM I NAL NUMBERS RELATE
:
TO PINS ON 913B CONNECTOR.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
o--~---o--~---o-
o--~---o----o---o
0--- --o--~- - 0 - - - - 0 -
0- -
-0- -
- 0 - - -0- - - 0
.J
9138 CONNECTOR
PIN NUMBERING
rn
* FACTORY
FURNISHED
STRAP
I
Fig. 13-.Terminal Field Illustration and Terminal Designations for 620A or 620A2 Panel (CO/PBX and Private
Li ne Services).
• 66B4-25 connecting block on a
184Al, Bl, or B2 (RED) backboard-for
additional line service terminations in excess
of 620A/620A2 or 642A panel capacity (Fig. 9).
• 413A KTU -spare leads SP-l, SP-2, SP-3,
and SP-4 are substituted for T, R, A, and
L, respectively (Fig. 18).
• 414A, 461A, and 416A KTUs-S and SG
leads are substituted for A and AI, respectively
(Fig. 19 and 21).
• 66B3-50 or 66B4-25 connecting
block on a 185Al (YELLOW)
backboard-for additional dial intercom
terminations in excess of 641A panel capacity
(Fig. 7).
• 471A1B and 479B KTUs-A(U) and A leads
are substituted for A and RC, respectively
(Fig. 24 and 25).
The 620A or 620A2 modular panel fanning
strips are predesignated for typical line
services and repeated for each quadrant (Fig. 13).
Exceptions to the designations are the following:
4.08
.401-type KTU-spare leads SP-l, SP-2, and
SP-3 are substituted for T, R, and RC,
respectively (Fig. 17).
4.09
4.07
KTU options: Apply to optional features
offered by individual KTUs; they are indicated
in table form on their connection figures only.
Intercom options (Table G):
Wiring of
associated KTUs providing features directly
affecting or adding to the dial intercom system.
Page 25
SECTION 518-215-419
Many KTU and intercom system options
share like-designations and provide
similar optional features, but several
similarly-lettered options differ in
features they provide in the two
applications. Consult appropriate
KTU or intercom option table for
desired feature prior to applying
any options.
connections and related apparatus are
properly applied; then the following checks are
suggested before replacement of a KTU, modular
panel, or power unit is considered:
Caution: Several of the following
checks require testing live potentials
at the modular panel connectors and
power interconnect terminal field.
Closeness of these terminals to each
other requires extra care be taken
to a void shorting or otherwise damaging
them.
CONNECTION INDEX
Table A provides an index to KTU connection
figures and associated KTU tests. Other
related figures and tables are as follows:
4.10
KTUs
Fig. 13-Terminal Field Illustration and Terminal
Designations for 620A or 620A2 Modular
Panel (CO/PBX and Private Line
Services)
• Securely placed in proper connectors.
Fig. 26-Terminal Field Illustration and Terminal
Designations for 641A Modular Panel
(Dial Intercom Services)
• Replace suspected KTU with one known to
be in good working order to determine
whether trouble is in the KTU or external
to it [be sure to strap in the correct option(s)
on the replacement KTU, as applicable).
Fig. 35-Terminal Field Illustration and Terminal
Designations for 642A Modular Panel
(Miscellaneous Services)
Table H-Dial Intercom Arrangements (Fig. 27
through 32).
5.
MAINTENANCE
5.01
Maintenance of 600-series modular panels
can be done in the areas of:
• Checks of terminal field cross-connections
• Replacement of defective fuses, lamps, and
KTUs
• Continuity testing (913/914-type connectors,
power interconnect terminals, and cable
connectors, etc). Consult Table F and Fig.
1 through 4.
As a key telephone system, maintenance is
limited to normal station repairs, wiring
checks, and replacement of defective components.
5.02
When trouble is encountered, first perform
a thorough check of all cross connections and, second, assure all station
• Properly strapped for required option(s).
(See appropriate KTU connection figures.)
• Should the replacement KTU not clear the
trouble, the trouble is external to it and
the original KTU should be placed back in
service.
MODULAR PANELS (Check as Applicable)
• Option straps(s) properly applied.
• Fuses in place and in good working condition
(Fig. 5).
• Lamps in place and in good condition.
• Plug end of modular panel power interconnect
cable securely positioned in power unit
connector.
• KTUs securely mounted in 913/914-type
connectors with retainer and/or guide
assemblies in place.
• Dedicated leads (Table F) may be tested
for appropriate potential or function.
5.03
Page 26
Caution: Power interconnect cable
must be disconnected and modular
ISS 4, SECTION 518-215-419
DIAL INTERCOM ARRANGEMENTS
FIGURE
27
29
28
30
31
32
DELUXE
DIAL
INTERCOM
FEATURE
WITHOUT
BASIC
KTU
WITH
STATION BUSY OPTION
Selector
Codes
TOUCH-TONE
Selector
Dialing
10
407
19
424
19
494
R
t
R
TT
•
•
TT
R
TT
R
TT
R
TT
• • • • • •
•
t
TT 440/478
t
t
•
•
t
•
•
Station Busy
Selector
422
• •
Audible Tones
476
Flashing Lamps*
425
• • • •
• • • • • •
• Indicated KTU required.
t No KTU required.
* Interrupter required with flashing lamps.
panel void of KTUs prior to attempting
the following test.
POWER UNIT (Fig. 6)
• All fuses in place and in good condition.
• Dedicated leads (Table F) may be continuity
tested between the KTU connectors within
a given panel.
• Using the appropriate modular panel terminal
field illustration (Fig. 13, 26, or 35), continuity
tests of the nondedicated wiring may be
made between the KTU connectors and the
terminal field.
• Continuity testing of power unit interconnect
cable leads may be performed.
• AC power cord securely in place in both
the commercial ac receptacle and the power
unit input connector.
• Commercial ac input present at receptacle
and not controlled by a switch.
• Interrupter securely in place and operative.
Place ground on start lead (MS) pin at
power interconnect cable terminal field of
modular panel (Fig. 1) and, using IOI3A
Page 27/28
ISS 4, SECTION 518-215-419
test set or equivalent, test for interrupted
potentials on the LW, LF, 10 Vac RN, and
105V RN terminals in the modular panel
power interconnect field.
LW does not
appear on the 641A panel.
Remove MS
ground when check is completed.
• Using 1013A test set, or equivalent, verify
that battery, ground, and signal potentials
are present at output taps on the face of
the power unit panel.
KTU connection figures. (All circuits must be idle
prior to starting tests.) The tests are:
A.
400-Type KTU-CO/PBX Line Circuit
B.
401-Type KTU-Manual Intercom
Circuit
C.
414A and 461A KTU-Manual
Signaling, Ringdown, Private Line
D.
416A KTU-Automatic, DC Signaling,
Ringdown, Private Line
E.
416A KTU-Station Line Circuit
F.
419A KTU-Automatic Signaling,
Ringdown, Private Line
G.
469A KTU-Lamp Extender
H.
471A1B KTU-Battery Reversal Toll
Restriction
I.
407B and 424-Type KTUs-Dial
Intercom Selector Circuit
J.
.494A KTU-TOUCH-TONE Selector
• Circuit and frame grounds properly applied
(see paragraphs 3.14 and 3.15).
• AC voltage adjustment lead on appropriate
tap.
If the above checks fail to reveal the source
5.04
of trouble, it can be reasonably assumed
that the trouble is external to the power units,
modular panels, and KTUs, and that cross-connections,
station wiring, and components should be checked.
TESTING
Prior to termination of cross-connections,
station and distributing cabling, continuity
testing may be performed between terminal field
terminals and like-designated connector pins. See
appropriate terminal field illustration.
5.05
Caution: Power unit connector cable
must be disconnected and modular
panel void of KTUs before attempting
continuity tests.
The line lamp or circuit busy lamp (641A
panel), provided in the lamp and fuse block
assembly, offers a visual indication of a circuit
under operational test.
5.06
TESTS
It is impractical to attempt operational tests
of several KTUs prior to termination of
appropriate cross-connections. The following KTUs
may be tested at the modular panel regardless of
cross-connections, station or distributing cables
applied. The tests appear adjacent to the related
. 5.07
Circui~
K.
420A KTU-Long Line Circuit
L.
417A KTU-Add-On Conference Circuit
M. 418A KTU-Short Range, DC Signaling,
Private Line
N. .461B or 498A KTU-Music-OnHold (MOH) Circui~
Lettered Steps: A letter a, b, c, etc,
added to a step number in Part 5 of this
section indicates an action which mayor may not
be required depending on local conditions. The
condition under which a lettered step or a series
of lettered steps should be made is given in the
ACTION column, and all steps governed by the
same condition are designated by the same letter
within a test. Where a condition does not apply,
all steps designated by that letter should be omitted.
5.08
Page 29
SECTION 518-215-419
PIC 620A OR 620A2 PANEL
TEL SET
\
Ico
PICKUP
SWITCH
l
~
~
1
A
HOLD
KEY
-
AI
§
SIGNAL
~
A
1
AI
B OR BI
~
R OR RI
i
R OR RI
DIODE
®
MATRIX/
B OR BI
®
---l
l
I
I
-0--0- -0--0
:
I
I
I
-0--0- -0--0
I
-0- -0--0--0
I
I
_J
-o--Q- -0- -0- - -
L
8-0--0--0--0
RG
-0--0- -0- -0- - -
RC
_ _ JI
8 -0--0--0--0
~
Jt®
RN
-0--0- -0--0
LG
r
L
RN
o RGc:rtO-ACG
~
R
~
LG
LAMP
l=r~105V
r---
R
T
R
'----
10V
RN
T
~
T
NET .1
1
OR PBX
LINE
'>--
OPTION STRAPPING (SEE NOTE 11
OPTION STRAPPING
ON
KTU
OPTION
FEATURES
c
AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
WITHOUT DIODE
MATR IX CONTROL
~
::>
I!!
z
WITH DIODE
MATRIX CONTROL
10V AC
I!!
0.
It:
It:
VISUAL HOLD
CIRCUIT
RING
TIMEOUT
105V RNTDRN
S
10 RN TO RN
5 TO B
1000RNTORN
Y
7 TO 10
LAMP STEADY
X
7 TO 9.
SHORT TIME DELAY (10 SECONDS)
LONG TIME DELAY
(30 SECONDS)
2.
ZD OPTION IS REPLACED BY ZJ OPTION.
HOWEVER IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO UPDATE
CIRCUITS PREVIOUSLY MODIFIED WITH OPTION ZD.
*
TO
W
LAMP WINK
500 MILL I SECONDS WHEN ASSOC I ATED
WITH NO.1 ESS HAVING RESWITCH
CAPABILITY
RELEASE OF
HOLDING BRIDGE
FROM CO OR PBX
LI NE CURRENT
OPENS GREATER
THAN
4000
KTU
10RNTO RN
105V AC
~
MODULAR
PANEL
CONN BLK
NOTES:
I. THE 4000 KTU IS FACTORY WI RED FOR 10-SECOND
TIMEOUT. PLUS WINKING-HOLD LAMP. AND W
AND S WIRING OPTIONS.
Z*
I TO 2.
t
ZC
t
2 TO 3 USING GOIA
(5 uF) CAPACITOR
OR EQU I VALENT §
100 MILLISECONDS WHEN ASSOCIATED
WITH BOOA PBX AND/OR NO.5 X-BAR
ZD
CENTREX NOT HAVING AUTOMATIC
(NOTE 2)
PERMANENT SIGNAL RELEASE
2 TO 3 USING 575C
I uF) CAPAC I TOR
OR EQUIVALENT
50 MI LLI SECONDS WHEN ASSOC I AT ED
WITH NO.5 X-BAR CENTREX HAVING
AUTOMATIC PERMANENT SIGNAL
RELEASE
2 TO 3 USING 575B
(0.5 UF) CAPACITOR
OR EQU I VALENT
ZJ
i
PROVIDE TIME-OUT CYCLES OF RING-UP
CIRCUITS FROM 3.4 TO 7.5 SECONDS. INSTALL
KS-13490,L1, I WATT OR EQUIVALENT RESISTOR
BETWEEN TERMINALS I AND 3 WITH A STRAP
FROM I TO 2. TIME-OUT CYCLE AND RESISTOR
VALUES ARE AS FOLLOWS:
3.4 SECONDS - 0.20 MEGOHM RESISTOR
5.0 SECONDS - 0.39 MEGOHM RESISTOR
6.7 SECONDS - 0.75 MEGOHM RESISTOR
7.5 SECONDS - 1.2 MEGOHM RESISTOR
WHEN THE DURATION OF MACHINE RINGING IS
I SECOND OR LESS, TIME-OUT SHALL NOT BE
REDUCED BELOW 5 SECONDS.
FOR 30 SECOND TIME-OUT CYCLE REMOVE ALL
STRAPS FROM TERM'INALS I, 2 AND 3.
FACTORY
FURNISH
INSTALL
POLARIZED
2
STRAPS
CAPACITOR
o----=-j ~3
Fig. 14-.400D (MD) KTU Connections (CO/PBX Line) in 620A or 620A2 Panel.
Page 30
AS FOLLOW:
ISS 4, SECTION 518-215-419
TEL SET
P/0 B20A OR B20A2 PANEL
PIQ
3223234232
CONNECT
TERIIINALS
FEATIJ!E
LONG TIlE DELAY
(APPROXIllATEL Y 20 SECONDS)
B1-B2
~~~~~T~W~. 75 SECONDS
82-83.
VISUAL
LAII' WINK
HOLD Q
1
-0--0--0--00
-0--0---0--00 {
-o--o--o--o-}
-0--0--0---0
- 0()- - 0()- - 0()- - . . . , -
Lp
-0--0--0--00
-
OPTIONS
OPT
T*
w*
r-V
FEATURES
CO OR PBX LINE CIRCUIT
INTERRUPTED RING
AUDIBLE COMMON AUDIBLE WITH
SIGNAL GROUND FOR RELAY
CONTROL
LONG HOLD ABANDON
TIMEOUT (FOR ESS 111.
S* HOLD
ESS 112. 812 PBX. 770
CIRCUIT PBX. DIMENSION PBX)
I - - RELEASE
SHORT HOLO ABANDON
R
(FOR ALL OTHERS)
*FACTORY INSTALLED
TOP VIEW OF OPTION
BLOCK-HANDLE ASSEMBLY.
OPTION SYMBOLS SHOWN
CONNECTED ARE IN
FACTORY INSTALLED
POSITIONS.
FUNCTION
>-
.......
<
IX
ANSWERING
INCOMING
OR
RINGHOLD
INITIATING
CYCLE
CALL
R
0
RL
RL
H
RL
RL
0
RL - RELEASED
o - OPERATED
Fig. 16-.400H KTU Connections (CO/PBX line) in 620A or 620A2 Panel.
Page 32
ISS 4, SECTION 518-215-419
A.
400-Type KTU-CO/PBX Une Circuit (Fig. 14,
15, and 16)
ACTION
STEP
1
Short A & Al terminals.
2a
If CO or PBX T & R battery is presentMaintaining A & Al short, short T & R (STA)
VERIFICATION
Panel lamp lights steadily (BUSY).
terminals.
3a
Remove A & Al short.
Panel lamp winks.
4a
Reapply A & Al short.
Panel lamp lights steadily.
5a
Remove T & R short.
6
Remove A & Al short.
7b
If interrupter is operating (another line in
system in use and working from same power
unit as line under test)Place El ringer, or equivalent, across T &
R (STA).
8b
Place straps RG to T (CO) and l05V RN to
R (CO).
Panel lamp flashes (CALL).
Ringer sounds.
Remove straps l05V RN to R (CO) and RG
Panel lamp continues to flash.
Ringer continues (Time-out circuit operating
until ... )
Panel lamp extinguishes.
Ringer silences.
(Time-out complete.)
9
to T (CO)
lOb
Remove ringer from T & R (STA).
Panel lamp extinguished.
(END TEST)
Page 33
SECTION 518-215-419
PIO 620A OR 620A2 PANEL
TEL SET
B S,\ I.OV
'b
INSET
r)''";l ~5~Z
PART OF 401- TYPE KTU
6 ·6
RN RN(,
RN
SPI_+T-+_.r'IC)
(SEE NOTE)
1:. ________ _
S\lITCH
HOOK
PICKUP
KEY
SP2
-
--1f.!R4--__(.i)I~; ~ - ~
T
RGACG
I--I---+--+*-+-+!----.-r---+,T+---V--o-~ _0__0__0
=___~-= ~ -II
I
I
I--HH----1~-+-_t+-R-_r---t'R+__(.()-.>_.~_o__o__o
I
I
A
A
r--~O-+--+*+-*--r---I_4-_C~)__o__o__o__o
I
NET.,
I
~
I'--____-__
LAMP
I
-i-i---FA"-'f---{~::>-_o_-o-_o_-o
tt"-A:..I
LG
~
r----tl.::.c..-.----FLG't--o-_o__o__o__o_ - -
1
L---~---TJp-----+~--()-~-o--o--o
L
RG
0-_0__0__0_ _0_ -
I
I
I
:
I
I
I
I
J
L
SP3 _pR,,-CI---C>-_o__o_ _0_ -0-
~41~A
:
I
- - - j
- - - - -
I~
BLOCK EXPANDED FOR CLARITY
NOTE:
SP I, SP2, ANO SP, LEADS CAN BE USEO FOR CONTROL
PURPOSES AS REQU I REO (SEE INSET). ON 620A2 PANELS,
IOV AC OR B S I G CAN BE CONNECTED ON TERM I NAL
FIELD TO OPERATE AUDIBLE SIGNAL. IDV AC TERMINAL
APPEARS I N ALL EIGHT QUADRANTS - B S I G APPEARS
IN IA ONLY.
Fig. 17-.401-Type KTU Connections (Manual Intercom) in 620A or 620A2 Panel.
Page 34
ISS 4, SECTION 518-215-419
B.
401-Type KTU-Manual Intercom Circuit (Fig. 17)
STEP
ACTION
VERI FICA TlON
I
Place IOI3A, or equivalent, test set (MONITOR)
across T & R (STA) terminals.
2
Put test key in TALK position.
Side tone heard.
3
Put test key in MONITOR position.
Sidetone lost.
4
Apply A & Al short.
Panel lamp lights steadily.
5
Remove A & Al short.
Panel lamp extinguished.
6
Remove test set from terminals.
(END TEST)
P/O 620A OR 620A2 PANEL
OPTION
INSET
OPTION STRAPPING ON
rEATURE
MODULAR
PANEL
N
IOV
413A
KTU
E:J
~
SPI
0
T
CONTACTS
FOR
*
rACTORY rURNISHED STRAP
0- -0- -0--0--0
LG
SP4 L
I
B OR BI
AUDIBLE
SIGNAL
1 R OR RI
+-'-<
I I
-H- -<
-v- -0--0--0--0- - t- il
Al
PURPOSES
AS REQUIRED
(SEE INSET)
"']1
I I
SP3 A
CONTROL
--,
RG ACG
8 -0--0- -0- -0---
SPARE
I05V RN
TO
RN
~=
8 -0- -0--0- -0- - -
SP2 R
TO
10
105V
IOvG~1I05V
RN
RN
RN
T
R
LINE
10V RN
TO
RN
AUDIBLE
SIGNAL
*
KTU
OPTION
PART Of 413A KTU
I
-<
1
I I
0--0--0--0--0- -
..11
8 -0--0--0--0--
- r-<
RG
-0--0- -0- -0--
RC
1
:3
R
]
_.J
-0--0- -0--0
L--- -
rACTORY rURNISHED WIRING
Fig. 18-t413A KTU Connections (Auxiliary Ringup) in 620A or 620A2 Panel.
Page 35
SECTION 518-215-419
TEL SET
PIO 620A OR 620A2 PANEL
SIMILAR TYPE
SWITCH
HOOK
NET.
I
n
I
L.:.:..J
l
PRIVATE LINE
PI CKUP
KEY
0
T
IL:.2.JI
R
SIGNAL KEY
I
CKT AT
DISTANT END
SG
R OR RI
~
f>
~
0
RG
R
S
A
SG
AI
ACG
I
I
~-o-o-o-o
I
I
-0- -0-0--0
I
I
-V-
I
-0- -0- -o--Q
LG
~
L
I
-0-0--0--0 -- _J
8 -0-0--0-0- -
RC
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-0-0-0--0
RG
--,
510-- - -,
v--o-o-o-o
T
I-
__ J
-0-0--0--0
J
y
ORNOTOI~~V
r- - - -
~
i
~
r
B OR BI
T
R
~
~
LG
L
SIGNAL
I
II
r
~
r
S
LAMP
a
*
----FACTORy FURNISHED WIRING
R OR RI
DIODE
MATRIX
®
CA
®
l®
>---
OPTIONS
OPTION STRAPPING ON
FEATURES
AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
UNDER
~ WITHOUT DIODE
CONTROL OF ~ MATRIX CONTROL
TIME-OUT
II:
CIRCUIT
~ WITH DIODE
(B RELAY) ~ MATRIX CONTROL
MODULAR
PANEL
414A OR
KTU
105V RN TO RN
7 TO 8
SI
t
FACTORY FURNISHED STRAP
"
10 SECONDS
I TO 2
2 TO 3
Z
23 SECONDS
REMOVE
X OR Z
STRAPS
WITH
OUT
X OR Z
9 TO 10
M
AUDIBLE RINGBACK TONE
419A KTU, 461A KTU, OR ANY OTHER
TYPE PRIVATE LINE UNIT WHOSE
RINGUP CIRCUIT REQUIRES RINGING
VOL TAGE AND WHOSE SIGNALING
CIRCUIT SENDS OUT SIGNALING VOLTAGE.
WI
105V
16 SECONDS
TIME-OUT
* CI RCU I T AT DISTANT END MAY BE A 414A KTU
OPTION
461A KTU
X
Fig. 19-t414A KTU and 461A KTU Connections (Manual Signaling, Ringdown, Private Line) in 620A or
620A2 Panel.
Page 36
ISS 4, SECTION 518-215-419
C.
414A KTU and 461A KTU-Manual Signaling,
Ringdown, Private Line (Fig. 19)
ACTION
STEP
VERIFICATION
I
Place EI ringer or equivalent across T & R
(DISTANT END).
2
Place IOI3A, or equivalent, test set (MONITOR)
across T and R (STA) terminals.
3
Put test key in TALK position.
Sidetone heard;
Panel lamp lights steadily.
4
Apply S & SG (A & AI) short.
Ringer sounds (interrupted).
5
Remove S & SG short.
Ringer silenced.
6
Put test key in MONITOR position.
Sidetone lost;
Panel lamp extinguished.
7
Remove test set from terminals.
8
Remove ringer.
(END TEST)
Page 37
SECTION 518-215-419
PIO 620A OR 620A2 PANEL
J
P
I;";~ ~~I~!~~L~~E I ~
AT DISTANT END
(415,416,OR 419 KTU) 11
TEL SET
EJ
I
SWITCH
HOOK
r--
PI CKUP
KEY
-
~~9D-
'--
LAMP~
'
T
I
AUDIBLE
SIGNAL
R
:
V
T
1
R
A
~
A
!
AI
R OR RI
o RN£'1)05V
RN
,---0 6'"fORG ACG
-0 -o-o--D
~
L
~
RG
l'I I
,I
II
I I
I I
-0-0-0-0- J I
I
-0 -0- -o-D
I
•
-V- -0 -0--0--0-
RC
-l
I I
-o-o-o--D
-V -0 -o-o--D
-0-0- -o--D
V"
LG
1
:
1
B OR BI
-V
AI
p
LG
~
~
R
L
~
T
r- .J
-0 -0- -o--D
,
- - - fACTORY fURNISHED WI RING
R
OR RI
®
DIODE /
MATRIX
OPTIONS
RC
OR CA
FACTORY FURNISHED ST RAPS
t®
'>---
*
OPTION STRAPPING ON
FEATURES
AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
MODULAR PANEL
CONN BLOCK
WITHOUT DIODE
"t MATR
CONTROL
~
f
KTU
OPTION
wt
I~
I05V
I!' WITH
415A KTU
I05V
RN TO RN
4 TO 6
DIODE
st
;!; MATRIX CONTROL
AUDIBLE RING8ACK TONE
I TO 2
Mt
VISUAL HOLD SIGNAL
7 TO 8
yt
* FOR
IDLE LINE TERMINATION CONNECT A KS-13490, LI 910-0HM
RESISTOR IN SERIES WITH A 542F, 2UF CAPACITOR ACROSS TERMINALS
9 AND 10,
ORDER COMPONENTS LOCALLY AND INSTALL,
Fig. 20-.415A KTU Connections (Automatic, DC Signaling, Ringdown, Private Line) in 620A or 620A2 Panel.
Page 38
ISS 4, SECTION 518-215-419
D.
STEP
415A KTU-Automatic, DC 5ignaling, Ringdown,
Private Line (Fig. 20)
ACTION
VERIFICATION
1
Place I013A, or equivalent, test set (MONITOR)
across T & R (STA) terminals.
2
Put test key in TALK position.
Sidetone heard.
3
Put test key in MONITOR position.
Sidetone lost.
4
Remove test set from terminals.
5
Place test set across T & R (DISTANT END)
terminals.
6
Put test key in TALK position.
7
Apply A & Al short.
Sidetone heard;
Panel lamp lights steadily.
8
Remove A & Al short.
Sidetone lost;
Panel lamp extinguished.
9
Remove test set from terminals.
(END TEST)
Page 39
SECTION 518-215-419
PIO 620A OR 620A2 PANEL
TEL SET
SWITCH
HOOK
PICKUP
KEY
n
NET .1
1
T
1
R
1
L..:..J
L..:.J
I
~
SIGNAL KEY
TEL SET AT
DISTANT END
I
S
B OR BI
R OR R I
-0
T
®
CA
A
~
AI
P
LG
r
L
'--1---,
crt'o- - - ,
RN
* ---.9
RG
ACG
I
-0--0--0--0
'-'
-0- -0- -0--0
V
-0--0--0--0
I
I
+
-0- -0--0--0- -
RG
1
RC
'-' -0--0- -0- -0
~
-0- -0- -0- -0- - --~
v-o--o--o--o
1
~--- FACTORY FURNISHED WIRING
SPARE CONTACT FOR CONTROL
PURPOSES AS DESIRED.
*
!®
t
FACTORY FURNISHED STRAPS.
>--
@)
OPTIONS
OPTION STRAPPING ON
FEATURES
I
AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
,¥
:~
,
T
0
WITHOUT DIODE
MATRIX CONTROL
WITH DIODE
MATRIX CONTROL
MODULAR
PANEL
IOV
10V RN TO RN
IOSV
IOSV RN TO RN
10V
105V
10V RN TO RN
lOS V RN TO RN
AUDIBLE RINGBACK TONE
KTU
OPTION
416A KTU
wt
5 TO 8
st
9 TO 10
Mt
Fig. 21-.416A KTU Connections (Station line) in 620A or 620A2 Panel.
Page 40
J
(
~
~
R OR RI)
DIODE~
MATR IX
~
'-'
P
IOv~J71'0SV
RN
30HZ
C -0- -0--0--0
R
t
I
~
R
SG
L
SIGNAL
T
i
l
it
r
•
LG
~
1
P S
SG
LAMP
I
ISS 4, SECTION 518-215-419
E.
416A KTU-Station Line Circuit (Fig. 21)
STEP
ACTION
VERIFICATION
1
Place ringer across RG & RC terminals.
2
Place l013A, or equivalent, test set (MONITOR)
across T & R (DISTANT END) terminals.
3
Put test key in TALK position.
Side tone heard;
Panel lamp (STA) flashes;
Ringer sounds (interrupted).
4
Apply T & R (STA) short.
Momentary audible click in test set;
Sidetone continues;
Panel lamp (STA) lights steadily;
Ringer silenced.
5
Remove T & R (STA) short.
Momentary audible click in test set;
Sidetone continues;
Panel lamp (STA) flashes;
Ringer sounds (interrupted).
6
Put test key in MONITOR position.
Sidetone lost;
Panel lamp (STA) extinguished;
Ringer silenced.
7
Remove test set from T & R (DISTANT END).
8
Remove ringer from RG & RC terminals.
(END TEST)
Page 41
SECTION 518-215-419
PlD 62.OA OR 620A2 PANEL (SEE NOTE)
II *
TEL SET
SWITCH
HOOK
,----
8
I
'-
~~~D
TY~ I111L!
aMILAR
PRIVATE LINE
CKTAT
DISTANT END
PICKUP
KEY
,----
SIGNAL
T
R
1
R
A
~
A
J
:
LG
.~
0
"
AI
LAMP 1.9'
~
'~
T
'-
o RN~oeV
RN
r-- l
T
R
AI
LG
L
1
L
B OR BI
~
RG
R OR RI
1
RC
(ffO- -,
RG
ACG
I I
I I
I I
I I
~-o--o--o-~
-o--o--o-~
~-o--o--o-~
~-o--o--o--o--
I I
I I
JI
-o--o--o-~
-0--0--0--0- -
I
I I
'""'-o--o--o-~
-
I
I
.J
r-.-o--o--o-~
___ FACTORY FURNISHED WIR ING
R OR RI
~
DIODE
MATRIX
CA
®
l®
"
PRIVATE LINE CIRCUIT AT DISTANT END
MAY BE A 419A KTU,414A KTU,46IA KTU OR ANY
OTHER TYPE PRIVATE LINE UNIT WtlO SE
RING UP CIRCUIT REQUIRES RINGING VOLTAGE AND WHOSE SI GNALING CIRCUI T
SENDS OUT RINGING VOLTAGE.
FACTORY FURNISHED STRAPS
OPTION STRAPPING ON
FEATURES
UNDER CONTROL
AUDIBLE
OF TIME-OUT
SIGNALS
CIRCUIT (B
RELAY)
TIMEOUT
~
~
MODULAR PANEL
419A KTU
I05V RN TO RN
6 TO 8
KTU
OPTION
WITHOUT DIODE
MATRIX CONTROL
0:
~
wt
I05V
AC
WITH DIODE
_ MATRIX CONTROL
st
6 SECONDS
9 TO 10
X
17 SECONDS
7 TO 10
Z
25 SECONDS
REMOVE X
OR Z
STRAPS
AUDIBLE RINGBACK TONE
I TO 2
WITHOUT X
ORZ
Mt
NOTE.
INSTALLATION OF A 419A KTu IN A 620A OR 620A2 PANEL REQUIRES TWO 913B CONNECTORS
IN A VERTICAL PLANE AND REMOVAL OF A GUIDE ASSEMBLY. CONNECTIONS ARE
MADE TO THE UPPER QUADRANT OF THE TERMINAL FIELD AND THE LOWER
QUADRANT REMAINS VACANT.
Fig. 22-.419A KTU Connections (Automatic Signaling Ringdown, Private Line) in 620A or 620A2 Panel.
Poge 42
ISS 4, SECTION 518-215-419
F.
419A KTU-Automatic Signaling, Ringdown,
Private Line (Fig. 22)
STEP
VERIFICA liON
ACTION
1
Place ringer across T & R (DISTANT END)
terminals.
2
Place 1013A, or equivalent, test set (MONITOR)
across T & R (STA) terminals.
3
Put test key in TALK position.
Sidetone heard.
4
Apply A & Al short.
Ringer (DISTANT END) sounds;
Panel lamp (STA) lights steadily.
5
Remove A & Al short.
Ringer (DISTANT END) silenced;
Panel lamp extinguished.
6
Put test key in MONITOR position.
Sidetone lost.
7
Remove test set from T & R (STA).
8
Move ringer from T & R (DISTANT END)
terminals to RC & RG (STA) terminals.
9
Factory furnished straps RN to 105V RN and
RG to ACG in place, add strap RG to T
(DISTANT END) and strap RN to R (DISTANT
END).
Ringer (STA) sounds;
Panel lamp flashes.
10
Apply A & Al short.
Ringer (STA) silenced;
Panel lamp lights steadily.
11
Remove A & Al short.
Ringer (STA) sounds;
Panel lamp flashes.
12
Remove RN to R (DISTANT END) strap.
Ringer (STA) silenced;
Panel lamp extinguished.
13
Remove RG to T (DISTANT END) strap.
14
Remove ringer from T & R (STA) terminals.
(END TEST)
Page 43/44
ISS 4, SECTION 518-215-419
PIO 620A OR 620A2 PANEL
T
R
T
TEL SET
R
A
AI
LAMP
LG
LG
L
L
(NOTE I)
C
L G(10 VAC)
RG
RN
0
0
--,
d'*C:r - -l- ,I
RG ACG
I
0- -0- -0- -0- -0
1
I
I
0- -0- -0- -0- -0
1
0- -0- -0- -0- -0
I
I
I
I
0- -0- -0- -0--0
~
_J
-0- -0- -0- -0- -
~-o--o--o--o
__ .J
~ -0- -0- -0- -0- -
RC
'---
o R~I05V
r---
0
-0- -0- -0- -0
-
-
j
NOTES,
I. FROM L ANO LG TERMINALS OF QUADRANT OF ASSOCIATED
400 LINE CIRCUIT OR ANOTHER 469A KTU.
2. 469A KTU CAN DRIVE MAXIMUM OF 20 LAMPS (OR 19 LAMPS
AND ANOTHER 469A).
--- FACTORY FURNISHED WIRING
* FACTORY FURNISHED
STRAP
Fig. 23-.469A KTU Connections (Lamp Extender) in 620A or 620A2 Panel.
G.
469A KTU-Lamp Extender (Fig. 23)
STEP
ACTION
VERI FICATION
1
Place strap from lOV RN terminal on panel
to RC (L lead) terminal.
Panel lamp flashes.
2
Remove strap.
Panel lamp extinguished.
(END TEST)
Page 45
SECTION 518-215-419
NOTES,
1 QUADRANT OF TERMINAL
CONNECTOR CONTAINING
2. QUADRANT OF TERI'IINAL
CONNECTDR COIITAINING
FIELD C(JlRESPONDING TO
471A KTU.
FIELD CDRRESPONDING TO
400-TYPE KTU.
P/0 S20A OR S20A2 PANEL
(NOTE 1)
T
TO COL
LINE
R
T
R
A(U)
I
A
A1
L(
L
IJII!ESTRICTED
TELEPHOIIE
SET
R(
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
.......... - 0 - .
-0- -0- -0--0
.... -0-0--0
~-o-
.... o--o
0 - +- -0- -0--0
0 - -0- -0- -0--0
0 - ..... -0- .... -0
.... -0- . . . . . .
-
P/0 S20A OR S2DA2 PANEL
(NOTE 2)
T
R
T
R
A
RESTRICTED
TELEPHONE
SET
A1
L
L
Rfl
R
-
0
0
o
0
0
0
I
--oO
--oO
"- --oO
"- -_oO
"- --oO
-_oO
-_oO
-_oO
Fig. 24-471A/B KTU Connections (Battery Reversal Toll Restriction) in 620A or 620A2 Panel
Page 46
ISS 4, SECTION 518-215-419
H.
471A/B KTU-Battery Reversal Toll Restriction
(Fig. 24)
STEP
ACTION
VERIFICATION
1
Test requires that CO line be connected to
T and R (CO) terminals.
2
Strap Al and RC terminals.
3
Connect IOI3A test set or equivalent to T
and R (STA) terminals with switch in MONITOR.
4
Operate switch to TALK.
Dial tone heard.
5
Dial toll code.
CO line opened for approximately 1 second.
Dial tone heard.
6
Operate switch to MONITOR.
CO disconnects.
7
Move strap to Al and A terminals.
8
Operate switch to TALK.
Dial tone heard.
9
Dial toll code.
Call not restricted.
10
Operate switch to MONITOR.
Remove IOI3A test set and Al and A strap.
(END TEST)
Page 47/48
ISS 4, SECTION 518-215-419
P/0 820A OR 820A2
(NOTE 1 AND 2)
NIlTES:
1. 479A KTU I SAN81
- NCH 8OAR0 RE QUIRING TWO VERTI CAL
CONNECTIIIS ANIl REIIOVAL OF A GUIDE ASSErliL Y•
2. CONNECTIONS TO THE 479A KTU ARE I'IAOE ON THE UPPER
QUADRANT ONLY (1A-4A).
TO
3. QUADRANT OF TERIIlNAL FIELD CIlRRESPONOING TO
LINE
ClJlMCTDR CONTAINING 4IIO-TYPE KTU.
4. REFER TO 518-215-401 FDR INFDRI'IATION ON PLACEMENT
OF OPTION PLUGS ON KTU ANIl CIRCUIT IIODULES.
T
COl
R
PANEL
0
0
o
0
0
0
I
T
R
A(U)
I
A
A1
LG
L
UNRESTRICTED
TELEPHONE
SET
RG
A
RC
• • , • •
• , , • ,
, , ,
• • , • ,
.
.
P/0 820A OR 820A2 PANEL
(NOTE 3)
T
R
T
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
\..
\.
A
RESTRICTED
TELEPHONE
SET
A1
L
L
\.
R
\..
R
\..
-
Fig. 25-4798 KTU Connections (Rotary Dial Toll Restriction) in 620A or 620A2 Panel
Page 49
SECTION 518-215-419
(SEE NOTE)
LA
L
I
~==
1-==
I-
OPTiONS
=
~c::=Ic:::::I==r::::::I=
I==c:::::It::::Ic:::::I==c::::I
1==::::::
1=
0
4
===
===
•
8
T
YI
@
~
12
*
@
@
13
24
R
10V
RN
~c::::::Ic:::::Ic:::::Ic:::::Ic::::I==t::::::I==~
~
==t=::Ic:::::Ic:::::Jc:::::Jt::::::I=c:::::Ic:::::I
RG
c:::::It::::::I========;
L-
LA
o
@
105V
o
4 I
r-- J
I
22
TTG
SS
10@ /
@
~c:::::.c:::::I==r::::::::::Ic:::::Ic:::::Ic:::=:::Ic:::::Ic:::::I;
@
0
@,
@
39
36
35 I
34
J
•
LI
•
34
28
L2
•
L3
23
•
L4
25
26
L5
•
•
20
•
L7
21
32
TO
@
0
La
16
30
•
LXO
37
•
L9
29
14
TC
tK
OPTIONS
BR:
LO
31
L6
I
Y4Il.R
I
LAMP fLASH
105V
RN
'O~
Y3
•
~=r::::::Ic:::::Ic:::::I=c:::::Ic:::lc::::::lt::::::lc:::::l~
TC
•
•
Y5
@-,
I
@
@ r--o
LXI
~=========t:::::::I~
Rc::::::J=========~
39 I
19
37:
8
•
LX3
37
•
LX2
26
I
0
L T2 : XY /BY I
R- = = = = = = = = = = R -
22
24
CG
I RSI
LTI:
@
I @
0
8-G I
I
c;>RH
LX4
27
•0
LX6
21
•
LX5
LG ====.=====c:::::I~
55
~--o
=======c:::::I==~
==========~
RSI
@
PP
@
01
@
LK
Lk I
@- __ ~.J
@
RH
LX7
LX9
==========R-
38
23
16
30
26
•
LXB
33
31
7
8
§;.-.
~
*
POWER
TT
RH
0
10
FOR IBV AC, 24V DC,GROUND OR
AS REQUIRED FOR SIGNALING
PURPOSES OTHER THAN PROVIDED
(EXTERNAL POWER SOURCE MAY
BE REQUI RED)
•
-0- - --0- - - -0- ---0- -
•
•
I
•9
9\
-@--12
::..:..-+=-+--o----o----o---~--_o_-
-o----o---~---o---_@_13
~--_o_--_o_--_o_--_o_-
(tA)
LlO)
L
o
0
12A)
o
o
o
o
0
,,
,,
or,
,
,
·0"
39
Til
I 'I
I :'
-ni-"""\
o
~R.:.G-+R.:.G+-_<>- __ -<> __ -o- __ ~ __ -o-_ ~---o----o----<>- - - - 0 - R(O)
R
34
OJ
LEGEND
CONNECTOR
TERMINAL
SYMBOL
IA
0
18
@
2A
•
@
x
J.T_-I-T4-_o-0
TYPICAL
WIRING TO R
INTERCOM
STATION
LG
28
o
STATION
CODE
o
25
o
26
o
20
o
21
o
32
o
30
o
29
o
--~--~--~--~- ~--~--2.--~--~--
I
,, :
I
,
I
,
I
I
,
,
I
I
:
I
I
I
.J
I
--~--~--~--~- ~--~--~--~--~----~
LG
-0-- --0-- - -0--
--<:r ---0----0-- --0- - --0--
liB)
L
o
o
(2B)
o
o
o
o
0
____ ,...1
,
o
I
RG
_____ JI
!fiG
-~--~----<:r--~-
"xc"
R(XO)
R
14
0
8
o
22
o
24
o
27
o
~---o---~---o----o---
o
o
I
o
33
o
31
o
9
o
- - - - - - FACTORY fURNISHED WIRING
Fig. 26-Terminal Field Illustration and Terminal Designations for 641A Panel (Dial Intercom Services)
Page 50
I I
-:-~L
I
R
--1-1'---<>- -- -0-- -
L(XO)
23
I
I
,:
,
STATION
CODE
NOTE:
TERMINAL NUMBERS RELATE TO
914B CONNECTOR PINS.
2B
6
4
- -0- -
TYPICAL
WIRING TOR
:!_-l-!R!.I-_o- __ -o- __ ~--__o_--~INTERCOM
STATION
LG
LG
Plrn"~F'
~
2
r"rL-4_T4-_<>-_ - ~ __ ~ _ --0- -
914B CONNECTOR
19
0
___3~ _____ lLLJ
L~
-----...,
ISS 4, SECTION 518-215-419
I.
4078 and 424-Type KTUs-Dial Intercom Selector
Circuit (Fig. 26)
ACTION
STEP
VERIFICATION
1
Place appropriate type audible signal device
(bell or buzzer) across RG & R-5 terminals.
2
Place 1013A, or equivalent, test set (MONITOR)
across T & R (STA) terminals.
3
Put test key in TALK position.
Sidetone heard;
Panel lamp lights steadily.
4
Dial digit 5.
Audible signal sounds.
5
Put test key in MONITOR position.
Sidetone lost;
Panel lamp extinguished.
6
Remove test set from terminals.
7
Remove audible signal device.
Sa
If 407-type KTU under test-
9b
If 424-type KTU under testPlace appropriate type audible signal device
across RG & R-X7 terminals.
lOb
Strap TD terminal to R-2 terminal.
(R-2 selected as transfer digit for testing
purposes.)
llb
Place 1013A, or equivalent, test set (MONITOR)
across T & R (STA) terminals.
12b
Put test key in TALK position.
Sidetone heard;
Panel lamp lights steadily.
13b
Dial intercom code 27.
Audible signal sounds.
14b
Put test key in MONITOR position.
Sidetone lost;
Panel lamp extinguished.
15b
Remove test set from terminals.
16b
Remove audible signal device.
17b
Remove strap between TD and R-2 terminals.
(END TEST)
(END TEST)
Page 51/52
ISS 4, SECTION 518-215-419
641A PANEL (SEE NOTE) (FOR 407- OR 424-TYPE KTU AND 440A OR 478B-KTU)
TT
SS
RN
0
0
0
0
0
I05V
RN
®LX..J®
IOV~
*I!!J
L-.o®
I05V
M
0
0
.
~I
*
*
®
o
LTI
o
RSI
o TC 6
0
®' X
B-G
o
0
N
.
~
~
r;
o TC 9
/ ,..---....;...,.®
~
0
0
IRH
*
RH
NOTES,
1. SEE TABLE G FOR I NTERCOM OPT I ONS AND
FIG.26 FOR TYPICAL STATION CONNECTIONS.
2. ADD 44DA OR 4788 KTU IN THIS SLOT IF
OPTION
IS REQUIRED. REMOVE
OPTION. IF 440A OR 4780 KTU MUST BE
MOUNTED IN 642A PAN£L INSTALL PE.R FIG.28.
3. PROVIDE OPTION ON 478B I(TU AS FOLLOWS,
641A PANEL-STRAP A-B
642A PANEL-STRAP B-C
®
®
®
R(O-9)
t@
0
~
§
A
0
~
'"
OPTIONS
0
0
lAMP flASH
POWER
IOV
D
0
4. REMOVE @OPTION IF 424-TYPE KTU IS USED
FACTORY PROV I OED STRAP
t USE CONTINUOUS STRAPPING METHOD,
WHEN REQUIRED.
*
641A
I0
Fig. 27-8asic Dial Intercom Selector Connections (407- or 424-Type KTU) With Rotary or TOUCH-TONE Dialing
(440A or 4788 KTU)
Page 53
SECTION 518-215-419
641A PANEL (SEE NOTE 1) FOR 494A KTU
TT
POWER
10V
RN
0
0
0
SS
0
,~~
*®
0
0
0
LAMP FLASH
105V
RN
:::>
....
....""""'
....
'"
®*
0
OPTIONS
0
0
0
TC
oTC
0
(NOTE 2)
0
0
0
0
TC
0
D
0
*
RSl
CO
CG
'--
0
0
0
l~~
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
8
91
}iL1
r7' b
55
B-G
RSI
0
t
TO
cifV51 lTI
I
NOTES:
1. SEE TABLE G FOR INTERCOM OPTIONS AND F)G. 26 FOR TYP)CAL
STATION CONNECTIONS.
2. REMOVE OPTION
(FIG. 27) WHEN FURNISHING FLASHING LAMPS.
3. CONNECT TO TERMINAL R(0-9) FOR TRANSFER D)GIT IN
19-5TATION INTERCOM. TRANSFER DIGIT CANNOT BE USED AS
A SINGLE DIGIT CDDE.
4. PROVIDE OPTlON(!l ON 47BA KTU IF USED IN 642A PANEL.
0,(NOTE3)
®§ TC
RSI
E
BLOCK EXPANDED FOR CLAR I TV
r
TC
0
0
0
0
0
I
2
3
4
r
H
RH
5
6
®
*
t
§
'11
FACTORY PROV I OED STRAP
USE CONTINUOUS STRAPPING METHOD, WHERE REQUIRED
REMOVE
OPTI ON WHEN 424-TYPE KTU IS USEO
425B KTU MUST BE USEO TO PROVIOE INTERRUPTED RING
®
~~DE I~~~~ 0~0~78B
KT/-,U,,---._--,
CATION IF TOUCH- ~-_L.....
TONE
DIALING
IS REQUIRED.
®
:::>
I-
.
:.:
,."'
l-
GUIDE
ASSEMBLY
MUST BE
REMOVED
...
...'"
I
0:
0
0:
o
I
t-
...
......C!
440A OR 478B KTU
CONNECTIONS
TO LOWER
QUADRANT
ONLY
i"
:.:
.,
'"'"...
O
,,
----i----642A
D
641A
Fig. 29-Deluxe Dial Intercom Connections (407- or 424-Type KTU) With Flashing Lamp (4258 KTU) and
Rotary or TOUCH-TONE Dialing (440A or 4788 KTU)
Page 57
SECTION 518-215-419
PART
or
642A PANEL
SEE I "SET 8
SEE INSET A
8C
PIO 641A PANEL (NOTES 1 AND 5)
(FOR 407- OR 424-TYPE AND 4256 KTU)
'4"76A
440A
OR
4788
KTU
KTU
f-TT
POWER
1 ®L~-10
10V
RN
80
,
80
~
6C
90
Y2
~.
98
60
9E
5E
76
40
Y4
TTG
t%~
Y5
I@$
RH
RSI
CG
7A
l!1'
1
Y3
Y4
~, ~
9C
a
Y5
90
55
l
RH
!
l-
I
BC
'-----
LK
0
1X r
1 !~
a
0
0
0
0
0
0
a
a
(NOTE 3)
000
a
a
a
a
a
a
o
TC
(NOTE 4)
Ii -+--+---lll&-::......j-++~:
f!w
>--__
RH
0
RSI
CG
4B
105V
RN
TC
TTG
BYI
~~ .of
SS
0
68
!I
1I
crri
~
~(I
a
RH
®/
(NOTE 4)
RH
a
10
2
3
4
S
6
91
7
(BLOCK EXPANDED FOR CLARITY)
NOTES,
1. SEE TABLE G FOR INTERCOM OPTIONS AND FIG. 26
FOR TYPICAL STATION CONNECTIONS.
2. WHEN 476A KTU IS USED, ALL POWER OPTIDNS EXCEPT THE TC TO TC
STRAP FOR cs:J) WILL BE APPLIED ON THE 642A PANEL INSTEAD OF THE 641A PANEL.
3. CONNECT TO TERMINAL R(O-9) FOR TRANSFER DIGIT OF 19-CODE
INTERCOM. TRANSFER DIGIT CAN NOT BE USED AS A SINGLE DIGIT
CODE.
4. STRAP RH TO LK WHEN 440A OR 478B AND 476A KTU ARE BOTH USED.
STRAP RH TO RH WHEN EITHER IS NOT USED.
KTU
5. REMOVE OPTION@ (FIG. 27) WHEN FURNISHING FLASHING LAMPS.
* REMOVE
LAMP fLASH
YI
YI
OPTION F WHEN 424-TYPE KTU IS USED.
OPT I DN STRAPP I NG ON KTUS
FEATURES
STRAP TERM I NALS
Z
ZO
I TO
STA BUSY TONE
ZF
7 TO 8
ZE
4 TO 5
Y
B TO C
476A
RINGBACK
TONE
4788
OPT! ON
DIAL TONE
I±
~
IIOV
10V
USED IN 642A PANEL
Fig. 30-Deluxe Dial Intercom Connections (407- or 424-Type KTU) With Flashing Lamp (4258 KTU), Audible
Tone (476A KTU), and Rotary or TOUCH-TONE Dialing (440A or 4788 KTU) (Sheet 1 of 2)
Page 58
ISS 4, SECTION 518-215-419
INSET
B
A
(FOR 440A OR 478B KTU-®OPTION) PIO 642A
PANEL (LOWER QUAORANT)
(FOR 476A KTU)
plo 6424 PANEL (NOTE 2)
r--~
I
2
3
'? '?
~
b
~
0
0
0
0
'?
b
b
b
A
I'
RSI
4
0
0
Y5
Y4
5
0
0
0
B
I
!
0
o
1
I'
I
I
I
Y2
D
IOV
RN
RN
E
I05V
RN
:®lXJ®
I
? ?
2
C
3
b
b
0
I'
b
0
0
0
0
0
I'
b
RH
!
4
o
!
5
0
0
T
6
01
0
0
0
YI
7
0
0
0
0
0
B
0
o
b
0
9
0
061
0
6
0
o
0
RH
CG
!
7
8
0
0
0
6
TTG
0
1
J
0
T
0
LK
R
SS
Y3
9
0
0
A
B
C
1
D
BYI
~
)
I
E
(BLOCK EXPANDED FOR CLARITY)
=>
GUIDE
ASSEMBLY
MUST BE
REMOVED
..
'" Ie..
.....
.....
!;;
=>
I-
lD
lD
0:
0
0
440A OR
4786 KTU
CONNECT IONS
TO LOWER
QUANDRANT ONLY
642A
t
~
>;-
~
g;
,
=>
I-
'"
'""'
lD
..
~
~
D
641A
Fig. 30-Deluxe Dial Intercom Connections (407- or 424-Type KTU) With Flashing Lamp (4258 KTU). Audible
Tone (476A KTU). and Rotary or TOUCH-TONE Dialing (440A or 4788 KTU) (Sheet 2 of 2)
Page 59
SECTION 518-215-419
r - - PART OF 642A
PANEL ----""\,
-
PIO &42"
~EL
SEE
INSET
A
FOR TENS
4228 KYU
FOR UNITS
4228 KTU
,--
t
YI
7C
·7C
FOR
,--
YI
f7[
Y2
I TT
YI
eo
7E
PIO 641A PANEl(NQTES I AND !5)
(FOR 407- OR 424-TYPE AND 425B)
411A KYU
SEE INSET B
I'OIOtR
b
T
10V
RN 0
LAM, rLASH
o RN
0
10V
0
A
105V
0
0
(NOT[ 2)
0
iE
t
l1li
Y4
9C
t 6E
BR
611
J
BR
Y4
Y4
8E
ADD Sf"P - - [ 4A
9C
LT2
Y5
t
ADD~
4B
KEY TEL SET
(NOTE 71
sw
8C
BL XO
HOOk
t-
..ru..J!l.
t
BL
8E
50
8B
~ 70
TO I'U
kEYS
..!.':..!!
TO TEL SET
CONNECT
AS SHOWN
ABOVE
9A
~ 7B
~ 6A
~
~
~
8C
~ 50
~ 8B
J!h..£
TO TEL SET
CONNECT
AS SHOWN
AT LEFT
7A
0
0
0
,~.J!.
®X)s,
~
..!!!:..1.
t ~X
.+®(NOTE41
tTl
BG
I
c!{ooOo
'--
10
~ 7B
~ IA
.!':...!.
6C
+
CG
.§l.....i 9A
~
60
70
~(NOTE3)
TC
obl1oLk
TC
7C
LK
'0
0
LTI
8C
0
0
@
SS
LTI
1
11
0
0
0
Y5
9~
BL
l
0
0
STRAP
:f,AI
o
LT2
Y5
4A
4B
0
TO
0
BYI
t
0
Y2
12
0
Ie
1
105V
SS
0
I
2
3
4
5
RH
0
0
0
RH
0
0
0
7
8
91
6
(BLOCK EXPANDEO FOR CLAR ITY) ______
7A
60
6C
9B
'--
NOTES:
1. SEE TABLE G FOR INTERCOM OPTIONS AND FIG, 26
FOR TYPICAL STATION CONNECTIONS.
2. OPTIONS
(M) CANNOT BE USED WITH STATION BUSY
TONE (476A KTUJOR FLASHING LAMPS (4258 KTU).
~. CONNECT TO TERMINAL R(O-9) FOR TRANSFER DIGIT
OF 19-CODE INTERCOM. TRANSFER DIG I T CANNOT BE
USED AS A SINGLE DIGIT CODE,
4, REMOVE FACTORY FURNISHED OPT!ON
WHEN A 424A
KTU IS USED,
5, REMOVE OPTION
(FIG, 27) WHEN FURNISHING FLASHING LAMPS,
6, WHEN 476A KTU IS USED, ALL POWER OPTIONS EXCEPT
THE TC TO TC STRAP FOR
I-
'"
'"
KTUS MAY USE
ANY CONNECTOR
DESIRED
0-
~
::>
.. ..'"
'".
I
l-
on
a:
0
...'"
.
,.!.
0
642A
D
641A
Fig. 31-Deluxe Dial Intercom Connections (407- or 424-Type KTU) With Flashing Lamp (425B KTU), Audible
Tone (476A KTU). and Rotary Dialing With Optional Station Busy Selector (422A or B KTU) (Sheet
2 of 2)
Page 61
SECTION 518-215-419
P/O 642A PANEL
(SEE I NSET A)
4228
XTU
4228
XTU
(~S)
(~)
7C
PIO 642A
PANEL (SEE
INSET B)
440A/4788
KTU
-@OPTION
P/O 642A
PANEL
or
(SEE
INSET e)
('-OWER
PART
Q~TI
eONN BLoeK (NOTE 7)
66B4-25
476A
~
VI
7C
(rOR 407- OR 424-TYPE AND 425. KTU)
plO 641A PAN'EL (NOTES 1 AND 3)
YI
10V
10511
RN SS RN
000
7E
o
0
0
0
0
0
0
(NOTE 4)
Y2
o
9C
~BR~I---~--+-oo~IH--+-~~+--'1
'E
~Y4~______~~__
o
o
0
105V
10V
9C ~~~~~~--li~~~~~~~BR~5--+__+-il~BR~~____- ,
4mH--4__~i-~~
6E
Y4
60
9E
Y4
11
Y4
TO
Te ~
o
1
~TT~G~i-~________~__j i__1--+__~~TT~G1-+-~
II@
9C~~~B~Y~I~________,
aE
4A
LT2
1-T2
YS
4A
ADD
~Y58+---+---4-1---,
5E
Y$
j
ST"RtAP
I
Y5Y5
RH
48
78
fu
RH
90
40
;
ae
xo
.. A
BL
T
!!!:2.!...
88
~
70
9A
I~
78
TO TEL S,T
eOOllECT AS
0
2)
0
000
'(NOTE 6)
®
AH
000
RH
0
0
0
6
7
8
91
t....;-
4B~~~L~X~+-~/-------
"
SHCMII ABOVE
7 0--
RH
'(NoTE'i)l!
TO",
,--"X',-Y-,-5-,
LK
1-=--&-----&----+--+--ii~eG+f-:::--,CG
7A~e~G~Ii---------------it-~--+--I!---'--+-t-~
~
KEY TEL SET
SW
HOOK
Te
~~~L:::'T'-'~--------,I ____
~~~!---~R-s-,-ii---------------ii--+-~--~-R~s~I+-t------fJ\'(F~~
LTI
8E
~
~--.----------------ii---+--1--I!---s::s:--t-l-- Q
c) c)
6 6
Q Q
6 6
6 6
0
A
I
2
3
5
YI
t~
B
\> \>
c) c)
......*
BR
BL 9
BL 3
5
Y2
BLX2
BLX4
BLX6
LT2
@t,~
(FOR TENS OR UNITS
422B KTU *) P/O
642A PANEL
I
2
Y~
3
..... * 4
C
(FOR 440A KTU
-@OPTIONl
PIO 642A PANEL
(LOWER QUADRANTl
T®lXj®
0
6
b
\> '1I
;,
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
T
LK
ss
~
1
!
1
BYI
0
0
BLOCKS EXPANDED FOR CLARITY
440A KTU
IN EITHER
LOCAT ION
GUIDE
ASSEMBLY
MUST BE
REMOVED
440A KTU
CONNECT I ONS
TO LOWER
QUADRANT
ONLY
4228
KTU
407-
OR
424-
476"
KTU
4258
KTU
TYPE
KTU
4228
KTU
NOTES:
1. SEE TABLE G FOR INTERCOM OPTIONS AND FIG. 26 FOR TYPICAL STATION
CONNECT IONS.
2. CONNECT TO R(0-9) TERMINAL FOR TRANSFER DIGIT OF 19-5TATION INTERCOM.
TRANSFER DIGIT CANNOT BE USED AS A SINGLE DIGIT CODE.
l. REMOVE OPTION
(FIG.27) WHEN FURNISHING FLASHING LAMPS.
4. WHEN 476A KTU IS USED, ALL POWER OPTIONS EXCEPT THE TC TO TC STRAP FOR
@ WILL BE APPLIED TO THE 642A PANEL INSTEAD OF THE 641A. BOTH
PANELS MUST USE SAME POWER SUPPLY.
5. FOR CONNECTION OF DIODE, USE BUSY LAMP OPTION AS SHOWN IN SECTION FOR
SET USEO.
6. REMOVE OPTION
IF A 424-TYPE KTU IS USED.
7. YELLOW BACKBOARD (185A1) RECOMMENDED.
®
®
-+ -
DD
641A
642A
'*
WHEN A 424-TYPE KTU IS USED, SEPARATE 422B KTUS MUST BE PROVIDED FOR THE
UNITS GROUP (0-9) AND THE TENS GROUP (XO-X9). TENS GROUP LEADS ARE BRIDGED
(LOOPED) FRDM THE UNITS GROUP EXCEPTING THE SEPARATE LT1 AND LT2 LEADS.
t USE CDNTI NUOUS STRAPP I NG METHDD
tDISCONNECT
OPTION AT CG TERMINALS
®
Fig. 32-Deluxe Dial Intercom Connections (407~ or 424-Type KTU) With Flashing Lamp (4258 KTU), Audible
Tone (476A KTU), and TOUCH-TONE Dialing (440A or 4788 KTU) With Optional Station Busy Selector
(422A or 8 KTU) (Sheet 2 of 2)
Page 63
SECTION 518-215-419
KTUS MAY USE
ANY CONNECTOR
DESIRED
MAY BE 44014 OR
4788 KTU I TOUCH TONE)
OR 4258 KTU (FLASH ING LAMPS)
EQUIPPED.
. .
.
--
lFOR 407- OR 424 KTU) 641A PANEL
N
D
'420AKT~ U
USE ONE
PER LONG LINE
UNTERCOM CODE).
.........
.....
--
0:
0
,!.
0
64214
-
\,
\
T
T
R
R
LG.
tRto)
I
A
~
I
TTG 3
4
,
R-O
tr
0
DISTANT
STATION
I
T
R
j
10 VAC
~~~~~~~
OPTION
E OR G
STRAP TERMINALS
I>
0
E
0
0
0
0
~
ADD
6STR\
t
it
~
0
X OR M
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
10
I
2
3
4
5
7
8
91
6
--<>---0----0---0-
-<>---<>--~--o---o
--0---0---0---0-
-0---0---0---0----0
0---0---0---0---0- -0---0---0---0----0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
RG
0---0---0---0---0- -0---0---0- --0---0
R
0
0
0
0
b
0
0
0
0
0
T
X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9
lID XI
0---0----0---0---0- -0- - -0-- -0-'--0---0
R
0---<>---0---0---0- -0---0----0---0---0
LG
o---G--....c>--o---o-
L
0
RG
0---0- -.:0---0---0-
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
0
8
0
0
0
0
b
0
0
0
0
-0--..0---0---0---0
0
0
0
0
0
-0- --0---0- --0---0
0
0
0
0
0
(BLOCK EXPANDEO FOR
CLARITY)
i t - 400J 0 lODE. PROCURE LOCALLY.
t -
ANY DIGIT MAY BE ASSIGNED TO A DISTANT
·0· I S SHOWN AS EXAMPLE ONLY.
STAT ION.
7 TO 8
Fig. 33-Long line (420A KTUj Option for Basic or Deluxe Dial Intercom
Page 64
0
0
I TO 4, 7 TO 8
2 TO 4.
0
0
-24 VDC
30 HZ
0
0
5
9
OPTION. STR APPING ON 420A KTU OPTION BLOCK
?
C
6
P
FEATUR E
8
I
2
0
0
L
IFOR 42014 KTU)
P/O 64214 PANEL
®
0
0
P
t
0
TTG
64114
®
0
0
0
DD
-
0
0
0
ISS 4, SECTION 518-215-419
K.
STEP
420A KTU...-Long Line Circuit (Fig. 33)
VERIFICATION
ACTION
1
Place l013A, or equivalent, test set (MONITOR)
across T & R (DISTANT END) terminals.
2
Put test key in TALK position.
Sidetone heard.
3
Put test key in MONITOR position.
Sidetone lost.
4
Remove test set from T & R (DISTANT END)
terminals.
(END TEST)
Page 65
SECTION 518-215-419
SHOIIN F'OR REFERENCE 011\.'
(42IA KTU
VI liED
,.,./D
C_EeT LEADS IIITH. FORDESlRED,STATlOII CODE
M2A
~
I
-
811
9A
7D
2
3
4
~
6
7
8
9
0 XI X2 X3 X4
X~
TI
TI
T2
Y2
'3
n
TS
Y5
lT2
lT2+
RH
R~
48
L-
SIGNAL
KEY
CG
PANEL
FIRST
421A KTU
~~~E=TU
~::z KTU
r-~----~--~~--~~
0
TO
Ie:
0
TC
RSI
0
LTI S9 B"':G
(NOTE I)
*
RSI
o
0
0
0
I
2
3
4
F
RH
5
6
)..-
7
8
91
(FOR 421A KTU) P/D 642A PANEL
A
8
C
0
E
S)-J
TO EXT POWER
(NOTE
2. PROVIDE A SEPARATE 421A KTU AND
SIGNAL KEY PER STATION CODE TO
BE SELECTED.
S. fOR 18V AC. 24V DC. GROUND. OR
AS REQU I RED fOR S I GNALI NG
PURPOSES OTHER THAN PROVIDED
(EXTERNAL POWER SOURCE MAYBE
REQUIRED).
4. If MORE THAN ONE 421A KTU IS USED
fOR DSS. CONNECT AS SHOWN:
PART OF
642A
PANEL
l I:-
TC
0
f:®x
U~
®
10
PART OF
642A
PANEL
*
®
®*
NOTES:
I. WHEN "TOUCH-TONE" AND OSS ARE
BOTH PROVIDED REMOVE STRAP:
• RSI TO RSI
PART OF
642A
1
b b
I®
I'
8
®®
I
®
(NofE 4)
10~~V
!
R(0-9)
o
I
>--
®LXJ®
o
®
I
CG
LAMP FLASH
OPTIONS
'4
7B
POVER
10V
105V
!RNSSRN
o
CG
4E
ITT
X6 X7 X8 X9 XO
'4
7E
6E
(FOR 407- OR 424-TYPE AND 440A OR 4788 KTU)
P/O 641A PANEL
TAIIlE FOR SnECTING IIIRING ASSOCIATED IIITH DIAL COD£S
P'DII OSS)
I
9
I
I
2
Q
3
.I
I
I
®
CG
TO
SIG KEY
S
PART OF 641 PANEL
LT2
®
TO
64 IA
PANEL
+
0~
o®;®
i
(NOTE 2)
0
0
I
b
STRAPo
4
0
5
0
0
6
0
b
7
0
~
0
S
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
YI, Y2, Y3
Y5
0
I--
ADO
STRAP
0
RH
®
CG
RSI
*
t
fACTORY fURNISHED STRAP.
USE COIITINUOUS STRAPPING
METHOD.
@)
Y4
9
10
1
:-1.-
(SlOCK EXPANDED FOR CLARITY)
+ USE WITH 424-TYPE KTU ONLY.
Fig. 34-Direct Station Selection Option (421A KTU in 642A Panel) for Basic or Deluxe Dial Intercom (Sheet
1 of 2)
Page 66
ISS 4, SECTION 518-215-419
I
::>
><
ADD PANELS AND EQUIP
WITH 421A KTUS AS
REQUIRED; ONE 421A
KTU PER DSS CODE
(8 CODES SHOWN).
N
-
::>
... .
l-
I-
><
~
N
ra-p
. .'"
.. ..
::>
l-
><
N
~
N
~
::>
~
~
::>
I-
..
"
. .
N
UJ
N
>-
..
';"
~ fD
::>
N
,/
425B KTU (FLASHING
1/LAMPS)
EQUIPPED
OJ
....
II:
0
::>
...'" ...'"
I-
MAY BE 440A OR 4788 KTU
(TOUCH -TONE) OR
I-
><
.
I-
0
N
I
BJ BJ D
642A
642A
641A
Fig. 34-Direct Station Selection Option (421A KTU in 642A Panel) for Basic or Deluxe Dial Intercom (Sheet
2 of 2)
Page 67/68
ISS 4, SECTION 518-215-419
~~RN
IOV RN
0
II
IOSV
RN
Y
'?
b
b
10V
0
4
(SEE
NOTE 31
I
I
I
I
0
0
38
37
0
0
0
39
34
33
0
0
0
30
32
27
0
0
0
8
23
22
0
0
0
14
12
35
0
0
0
9
13
36
NOTES:
I. TERMINAL FIELD IS DIVIDID
INTO QUADRANTS. TYPICAL
QUAD~ANT (I A) SHOWN HE~E AND III
FOLLOWING 642A OR 642AR
MODULAR PANEL CORRECTIONS FIGU~E'.
2. FOR 18V AC, 24V DC,
GROUND OR AS REQUIRED FOR
SIGNALING PURPOSES OTHER TIWI
PROVIDED (EXTERNAL POWER
SOURCE MAY 8E REQUIRED I.
3. TERMINAL NUMBERS RELATE TO
PINS ON 914 B CONNECTOR.
9148 CONNECTOR
PIN NUMBERING
rn
19
39
Fig. 35-Terminal Field Illustration and Terminal Designations for 642A Panel (Miscellaneous Services)
Page 69
SEE INSET
NOTE:
DIODE MUST BE INSTALLED IN "A"
LEAD OF TEL SET WHEN CONFERENCE
CIRCUIT IS CCWTROLLEO BY A NONLOCKING KEY. FOR METHOD OF CON-
NECTION. USE STATION BUSY OPTION
AS St«)WN IN CONNECTION SECTION
PF TYPE SFT USED.
I
CO OR
LINE I
.417A
--
(FOR 40o-TYPE KTU 1ST LlNEl
620A PANEL
P/O
9C
4A
sa
KEY TEL
rLINE
PICKUP
KEY(I)
T(I)
SA
R(I)
8B
9B
All)
'--
T
T
R
R
T
T
R
R
AI(I)
I\.
;~~~~.t
:;rC§:!'
LANP
~:~LUSlGII
.~
£R
T(2)
"-
R(2)
AS REQUIRED
3B
L
MODULAR PANEL
SA
-l--<>--o--~
~
6B
SA
~
T
T
R
A
KTU
OPTION
STRAP TERN I NALS
GIIE STATION CONTROLLED BY
MI STATIONS _LOCKIIIC KEY
X
6 TO 10
BY EXCLUSION KEY
Y
CDIITROLLED BY NONLOCK I KG KEY
V*
Ie!..:.!
~
3 TO S
I TO 2
TO
TEL
SET
::QD
[-=
__
f-o---o-- -0---0--0()
rlRG
f-o---o---o-- -0- --<>- - t-!£f-o--....--o---o---o
f-
L..-
ET
I
I
I
I
I
OR
R
-
®
o
6
0
7
0
I
I
0
0
1
0
0
11
61
&
0
1
T
1
0
0
J!
S
R
R
9
I
J
\' 9
b 6
0
~E ,I R
I
--0---0---0----0
r-o--
0
I
TO 2ND CONTROL
STATION BL2
(IF PROVIDED)
A
B
co
I
-~--o---o--~
~ rc>--o---o---o--~
-0- - -0---0-- - 0 - - ~
I>I
3
L
I
-..()--~-~-~
A
2
T
I
I
RG ACG
/
R
0
BL
T
I
I
OPTION STRAPPING ON 417A KTU OPTION BLOCK
I
-,
d't6---r------
0
E
0
T
5E
9A
2
RNRNtRN
~ j-o
0
0
5
®
IOV r : r l " O
30V
HZ
t!- t-<>
C
9
A
I
TO 2ND CONTROL
STATION
~
(IF PROVIDED)
FEATURES
A
AS REQUIRED
PBX
LINE 2
B
9
I
SG
LG
R
TO TEL SET
8D
A
I
4
.
(FOR 400-TYPE KTU 2ND LINE)
P/0 620A PANEL
.~
ER
I
I
I I
(
,
T R LG I LIRGIRI'
·9D
A(2)
--0-- -0-- --~--o---o---<>--- oJ,
I
~ I-<>- --0-- -0-- -0- - 0()
~ 1-<>---0- --0---0---<>- - - --'
I
8E
-
I,
-~
(10- OR 19-CODE
7C
''>::-0
TYPE
KTU
IN
620A
. PANEL
I I
RG ACG
-0---0-
PANEL AND REMOVE
WHEN 417A KTU IS
TAKEN OUT OF SERVI CE
TO
CTRL
STA
KEY
TEL
SET
400-
~--- , I
~ 1-<>---0---0---0---0
TO 641A
9E
L
ET
rom~[
60
.~
LG
.~
LINE
PICKUP· I
KEY
(2)
*
sa
s
-
'ST
LINE
-,
r----~
0
AI
SVITCH
HOOK
IOV r : r l , O . V
RN RN
RN
A
A
6C
IS£[ NOTE)
LINE
40 0TYPE
KTU
IN
620 A
PANEL:
8C
PBXC
* PRIATE
ADD 51A LAMP APPROSOCKET OF 642A
INSET
2ND
UU
IN
642A
I PANEL
I
10
I
I
!
11
(BLOCK EXPANDED
FOR CLARITY)
I
_.J
- - - FACTORY FURNISHED
t FACTOR Y FURN I SHED
+ INSTALL KS-15724,
BEMEN TERMINALS
Fig. 36-417A KTU Connections (Add-On Conference) in 642A Panel
WIRING
STRAP
LI DIODES OR EQUIVALENT
AS SHOIotI
ISS 4, SECTION 518-215-419
L.
417A KTU-Add-On Conference Circuit (Fig. 36)
STEP
ACTION
VERIFICA liON
I
(Z option in place.)
Apply S & SG (A & AI) short.
Panel lamp lights steadily.
2
Remove Sand SG short.
Panel lamp extinguished.
(END TEST)
Page 71
SECTION 518-215-419
(411A KTU t )
P/0 64ZA PAlIIl
STATION
8
A
'KEY TEL SET - STA A
(NOTE I)
PICKUP
SVITCH
KEY
HOOK
;-;--
-
41IA
KTU
IN
64ZA
PANEL
L
NET.
T
-
L
SO
ttJ
H-h
3
I
I
I
~ACG
0
I
I
I
I
I
I
ZA
IA
RC
4
L
5
I
!
0
S
S
7C
L
3(
t
RC
T
R
®
/
'~
4B
P
t ADD 51 LAMP IN APPROPRIATE SOCKET OF
642A PANEL AND REMOVE WHEN 418 KTU
IS TAKEN OUT OF SERVICE,
=
KEY TEL SET - SlA 8
SWITCH PICKUP
KEY
HOOK
-
r-
-
P
LT
NET.
-
'--
:~~NAl
LAMP
ac
R
*
C9l.
-
{w
0
0
0
7
0
0
!
0
0
a
0
0
b
9
o
10
3B
5A
RG
3D
/
AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
@
~
!~
.~
AUDIBLE
RING-BACK
4A
-
0
(BLOCK EXPANDED
FOR CLARITY)
OPTION
WITHOUT 0 lODE
MA TR I X CONTROL
W
~::>
WITH DIODE
MATR IX CONTROL
S
ONE-WAY
0AUTOMATIC ;!'
ONE-WAY
MANUAL
(NOTE Z)
WITHOUT DIODE
MATRIX CONTROL
R
WITH DIODE
MA TR I X CONTROL
K
TWO-WAY
AUTOMATI C
3A
fL
0
OPT ION STRA PP I NG ON 41SA KTU OPTI ON BLOCK
RC
DIODE MATRIX
0
1
b 1
NOTES;
- - ___ fACTORy FURNISHED WIRING
I. STATION "A" IS ALWAYS ASSIGNED AS THE AUTOMATIC SIGNALING
STATION WHENEVER THE ONE-WAY AUTOMATIC, ONE-WAY MANUAL
SIGNALING OPTION IS USED.
2. THESE OPTIONS APPLY TO THE SIGNAL KEY AND AUDIBLE SIGNAL AT
STA "B" ONLY. THE AUDIBLE SIGNAL AT STA "A" IS UNDER CONTROL
OF RELAY "SO; THE AUDIBLE SIGNAL AT STA "A" MAY BE PART Of A
COMMON AUDIBLE ARRANGENENT PROVIDED THE DIODE MATRIX IS USED
fOR CONTROL.
3. THE AUDIBLE SIGNALS AT STA "A" AND "B" MAY BE PART Of A C_
lUD ARRANGEMENT PROVIDED THE DIODE MATRIX IS USED fOR CONTROL.
l< USE CONTINUOUS METHOD Of STRAPPING, WHEN REQUIRED.
6B
@9
LG
SIG
0
fEATURES
LS
! SG
!
[§J
9C
P
0
0
0
R
®!@
0
0
6
T
DIODE MATRIX
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
RC
68
Tl
~ RG
AUD
SIG
RG
La
II
lAMP
2
RG
90
S
loav
N
P
1 51 <9
SIGNAl*
KEY
E
0
C
10V
I
80
R
'---
'--
8
SO
-
P
A
I
La
0
'"'"
'"
STRAP TERMI HAL
2 TO 3 TO 4 II
3 TO 4
TWO-WA Y MANUAL (NOTE 3)
Y
TWO-WAY AUTOMATIC
Q
9 TO 10,
5 TO 7 TO 8 l<
ONE-WAY AUTOMATIC,
ONE-WAY MANUAL
H
5 TO 7,
9 TO 10
TWO-WAY MANUAL
M
9 TO 10
Fig. 37-418A KTU Connections (Short Range, DC Signaling, Priwate Line) in 642A Panel
Page 72
ISS 4, SECTION 518-215-419
M. 418A KTU-Short Range, DC Signaling, Private
Line (Fig. 37)
STEP
ACTION
VERIFICATION
1
Place ringer across RG2 & RC2 (STA B)
terminals.
2
Place 1013A or equivalent, test set (MONITOR)
across T & R (STA A).
3
Put test key in TALK position.
Sidetone heard;
Panel lamp (STA A) lights steadily.
Ringer (STA B) sounds (interrupted).
4
Apply S & SG/ A (A & AI) short (STA A).
Ringer (STA B) sounds (steady).
5
Remove S & SG short (STA A).
Ringer (STA B) sounds (interrupted).
6
Put test set in MONITOR position.
Sidetone lost;
Panel lamp (STA A) extinguished.
Ringer (STA B) silenced.
7
Move ringer from RG2 & RC2 (STA B)
terminals to RG1 & RC1 (STA A) terminals.
8
Move test set from T & R (STA A) terminals
to T & R (STA B).
9
Put test key in TALK position.
Sidetone heard.
Ringer (STA A) sounds (interrupted).
Panel lamp (STA A) flashes.
10
Apply S & SG (A & AI) short (STA B).
Ringer (STA A) sounds (steady).
11
Remove S & SG short (STA B).
Ringer (STA A) sounds (interrupted).
Panel lamp (STA A) flashes.
12
Apply T & R (STA A) short.
Ringer (STA A) silenced.
Panel lamp (STA A) lights steadily.
13
Put test key in MONITOR position.
Sidetone lost.
14
Remove test set from T & R (STA B) terminals.
15
Remove ringer from RG 1 & RC1 terminals.
(END TEST)
Page 73
SECTION 518-215-419
IIEY TEL SET
-
SVITC"
I'ICKUP
IIOOIC
k~
-
NET
"OLD IIEY
-
I -
....
!
,R
,," ,:
.R
-
0
,II
0
T
II
AI
,AI
LG
LG
l
BI
!
!
III
-,
RN
-,
IRG .CG
I
I
I
I
--o--...o--~-o()
I
I
--0-- ~--O--o()
I
I
J
-+--0---0--.-0
--o---o--""i>--o-
RC
-
:,~'" .,
n
--0---0---0--.0-
RG
"';,
n
AN 105V.
--o--~--o-- 0()
L
Tp
KTUI
--0---0---0---0
A
L
E
r
,A
"
'SIG
,
1
r
'TO CO
lOR PIIX
IlINE
(FOR _-TYPE
iI'/O 620A OR a20A2 _ L
.T
~
--o-7~,;:--o-:.~4;'~:'i
';';.".7'
~:-::r;,V\,
----FACTORy FURNISHED VIRING
p-~
(FOR 421A KTU)
P/0 642A PAIIEL
,I
Rem
'2
BI(3) 3
TO
FIRST
LINE
iii
B
C
0
E
'?
9
0
0
0
~ ~ ~lJ
~~
0
RI (3) .4
0\..,..1../ 0
RG(3)
0
5
400.1
DlODE
~;
o
~
0
0
!
0
0
1:
,RG(I)
,., .T(2)
6
RC(2)
DO
~
STRAF
RG(2)
R(2)
'TO
,SECOND
LINE
I
CO OR PIIX ,T
,LINE CKT I ~
TO
THIRD
LINE
.\
T(3)
!
7
,BI (2)
~
f
BI (I)
T(I)
R(sl
8
IIC(S)
9
o
! 1
o
!
III (2)
RI (I)
.....
H(I)
....
10
1
'(BLOCK EXPANDED
FOR CLARITY)
-""
Fig. 38-421A KTU Connections (Power Failure Transfer) in 642A Panel
Page 74
.J
(
ISS 4, SECTION 518-215-419
PIO 820A OR 820A2 PANEL
(FOR 400-TYPE KTU)
}
T
-LS
-
R
PU
-:;
0
000
0
000
T
I
NET.
J
-
R
J
I
I~
""'-
1
A
J
0-0-0-0
-0-0-0-0
LG
-0-0-0-0
RG
B-Bl
-0-0-0-0
RC
-0-0-0-0
)
INTERCOM
AUDIBLE
~
@~@
PIO 842A PANEL
(FOR 421A KTU)
1
2
® WITHOUT DIODE MATRIX
o
-0-0-0-0
L
COItION
AUDIBLE
LINE
RINGER
(NOTE 2)
0-0-0
AI
H ""'-
TELEPHONE
~
SET (NOTE 1)
0-0-0
3
A B C D E
o 0 000
000
o
0
o
0
o
0
o
!
0
o
0
000
B2
WITH DIODE MATRIX
4
5
I
8
407- OR 424TYPE KTU
R( )
7
000
o
1
0
o
0
011
R-Rl
R-Rl
8
NOTES:
1. CONNECT DIODE FOR BUSY LAMP OPTION.
SEE SECTION PERTAINING TO SET USED.
2. IF LINE RI.NGER IS TO BE SUPPRESSED.
STRAP 1 2 ON 421A KTU OPTION BLOCK.
9
o
1
0
000
!1
0
0
-
Fig. 39-421A KTU Connections (Audible Signal Suppression) in 642A Panel
Page 75
SECTION 518-215-419
(rOR 428A KTU II)
P/0 142A PANEL
ABC
0
E
S8
(IIOTE 5)
EXCLUDED ST4TI0II " (LINE II
~
~Y
IIET.
I
'4U
r1
ET(I)
80
ER(I)
90
EA(I)
L--
~LD KEY
'--
f
000
~
88
EAI(I)
2E
t
CONTROL STAT I 011 TYPICAL KEY TEL SET
HOLD
~[Y
S~ KEY
8
CAl
T(I;)
T
T
'---
'--
T
I
R
I
400 TYPE
KTU
LINE I
(NOTE I)
R(I)
t
A(I)
Ii.
~EY
r
t
AI (I)
CA2
T(2)
t
T
'--
TI
RT
400 TYPf
A
KTU
LINE 2
(NOTE I)
CONTROL
KEY
(NOTE 2)
*
'INOTE4)
ST~TlON
r
A1(2)
8C
9C
4A
28
70
6A
7A
7E
~E
50
38
~
SG /
T
S \
f
EL
LG
IB
4B
3A
7C
8 (LINE 21
~EY
~OK
r
1
NET.[
r~
A(2)
t
(NOTE 5)
EXCLUDED
~
t
~
.'91
R(2)
SA
,
-,
HOLD
KEY
ET(2)
ER(2)
EA(2)
L--
r
!
EAI (2)
BE
9E
~
(NOTE 3)
BLOCK EXPANDED FOR CLAR ITY
*
ADD 51 A LAMP IN APPROPR I ATE SOCKET
OF 642A PANEL AND REMOvE WIlEN 428A
KTU I S TAKEN OUT OF SERV I CE.
NOTES:
I. SELECTED LI NES ON 820A OR 6200 PANEL
2. CONTROL KEY MAY BE LOCKING OR
NONLOCK I NG.
3. USE 18382 ADAPTER OR LOOPING METHOD
4. ·S· LEAD ·CAN ONlY MULTIPLE TO
OTHER 428A KTUS CONTROLLED BY
THE SAME STATION.
5. STA A MAY BE EXCLUDED FROM LINE
I. ANO STA B MAY BE EXCLUDED
FROM LINE 2. IN THE
CONF I OURATI ON SHOWN.
4E
20
L--
Fig. 40-428A KTU Connedions (Multiline Exclusion) in 642A Panel
ISS 4, SECTION 518-215-419
(rOR 4oo-TYPE KTU: 2ND LINE)
NOTES,
l.rOR I HOLD. THE A AND L LEADS rROM
THE TEL SET SELECTED rOR I HOLD
CONNECT THROUGH THE 429B KTU TO THE
4000 KTU.
THE A AND L LEADS rROM THE
OTHER TEL SETS CONN 0 I RECTL Y TO THE
4000 KTU.
l
1
TO TEL SET
4.~~~I~~T~~:!G~~DT~~ :~~~R~~~ ~:E I
HOLD.
* - TO MESSAGE REG I STER I r PROV IDEO
t - I HOLD
I - PRIORITY HOLD
§ - MAY REQUIRE CONTINUOUS STRAPPING METHOD
i----1~
AI
LG
[
SI G
I
I
(FOR 400-TVPE KTU, 1ST LINE)
I
P/O 620A OR 620A2 PANEL
L __________ -,
429B
KTU
IN
~
90
L11)
I~
LG(I}
t;.;J.
LINE CKT 2
9E
LG(2)
eB
L(2}
BE
AI (I)
8B
5P
SWITCH
HOOK
HOLD
KEY
*
PICKUP KEY (I)
1
PICKUP KEY (2)
t
A(I}
80
A(2}
7C
AI (2)
70
TEL SET WIRED rOR I HOLD (NOTE I)
~l
LAMP
LINE CKT 2
J
ca:
L( I}
90
LG( I}
9E
LGt2\
5B
L(2}
8E
A I (I )
8B
PICKUP KEY (I)
HOLD
KEY
*I
Supp HOLD
KEY
PICKUP KEY (2)
At I)
80
A(2}
7C
A I (2)
I
I
I
I
RG
0-0
0
0-0
~oo()--o--o
~~--o--o
-Q--o--o--o
-c--o--o--o
-0- -0- -0--0
-0--0- -0--0
-0- -0--0--0
TO AUD SIG [
-0--0- -0--0
--t3~~~~~~J
AS REQO
FOR 430A KTU (
RC
E 4) P/O 642A PANEL
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I I
I I
o
FL(11
~
A
B
C
0
E
0
0
0
~
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
~
FL(2)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SP
6
0
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
10
SP
II
I L ___
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L ____
I
2
rL
3
(lOR 2)
rLST
(rOR 429B KTU)
(NOTE 3)
P/O 642A PANEL
A B C o E
9 9 o 0 0
¢
0 9 9
Q
6 6
6 6
!
000
4
LG(2)
LG
A
5
L
AI
6
~§O
o
o
o
0
0
\§
0
0
*A~~~
A(2)
*L~ .1--<>
AU)
AU!)
A
AI
LG
8
o
9
o
~§11
L
SP
SWI TCH
HOOK
)
I
I
LAMP
LI NE CKT I
[--4f!.!...+-C~
R
L
LAMP
LI NE CKT
R
~O 6 = PANEL
A
I
AUO
AS REQD
B. SP LEAD CAN CONN TO A MAXIMUM
or 20 STATIONS.
R
TO TEL SET
•
I TO
AS rOLLOWS,
A. rll OR rL2 LEAD CAN SERVE A
MAX I MUM or 50 LAMPS.
T
T
2.rOR PR I OR I TY HOLD. THE A AND L LEADS rROM EACH TEL
SET CONNECT THROUGH THE 429B K TU TO THE 400- TYPE KTU.
3. THE 429B. KTU WI LL PROV IDE SUPPLEMENTARY HOLD rOR TWO
CO OR P8X LINE CIRCUITS. EACH HOLD CKT
r--
T
70
'---
LG I
L !)
0
T
\
§
~
(BLOCK EXPANDED
rOR CLAR I TY)
TEL SET WI REO rOR PR I OR I TV HOLD (NOTE 2)
Fig. 41-4298 KTU Connections (Supplementary Hold Detector) and 430A KTU (Flutter Generator) in 642A
Panel
Page 77
SECTION 518-215-419
..
PU
SW
~K
~
SEE IN SET
620A OR
620A2 PANEL
1ST LINE CKT
400-.2!."E KTU
1ST PRINCIPAL TELSET
448A KTU IN
642A PANEL
T
T(I)
T
NET·I
R
R(I)
R
A
r -
8(ATI)
A
L.-
AI
©=::J
LG
L
L(I)
L
RC(I)
RC
RG(PI)
:~~
r
H
RG(PI)
i~
r--
TO 1ST PRINCIPAL TEL SET RG(PAI)
IF COMMON AUDIBLE IS
~
USED AND R I NIlER I S NOT
~
TO BE CUT orF
T
R
RIl PI
3A
T
B
'I
R
A
A
CI
-
~
ra-1
~
~
L(ATI )
L(ATI )
LG
LG(ATI)
LG(ATI )
T I
SG
RG(ATI)
RC(ATI)
C2
(NOTE 3)
'I
TURN KEY
6B
2ND PRINCI PAL
TO 2ND CO OR
Pax liNE CKT
TO 2ND PRINCIPAL TEL SET IF
COMMON AUDIBLE IS USED AND
RINGER I S NOT TO BE CUT orF
TO ATND STATION
7B
[~
I~
3A
,~
9
OPTION STRAPPING ON 448A KTU OPTION BLOCK
. fEATURE
AUDllllE
SIGNALS
INTERRUPTED RING
STEADY RING
STEADY BUZZER
*
OPT
W
T
X
CIRCUIT
2
I
7-8
3-5
6~8
3-4
8-10 1-3
" FACTORY PROVIDED
2E
7B
60
70
80
NOTES:
1. ADD V OPrION TO 400-TYPE KTU.
2. KTU IS fACTORY SET TO TIME-OUT IN 6-1/2
SECONDS, HOWEVER IT MA Y BE ADJUSTED fROM
I TO 30 SECONDS.
3. If IMMEDIATE RINGER TRANSfER IS REQUIRED,
A 449A KTU OR A TURN KEY MAY BE USED. EACH
METHOD IS SHOWK.
90
L....-
Fig. 42-448A KTU Connections (Variable Delay Timer) in 642A Panel
Page 78
II
j j
011
S
IA
I--~ r2!.
"-
i 0 1.s
BLOCK EXPANDED FOR CLAR I TY
SE
[~
1~
1~
111
b 0 11
RC PA2
R P2
50
l--",..
TO liNE RINGERS
IF REQUIRED
b
11
C 2
R PI
6E
(~
l
5
7
RC(PI)
B PI
8C
9E
[,(m
I
40
"~
I~
I
0
b
RC P21
B P2)
RC(PAI)
4E
RCIZI
l - 5E
RG(P2)
30
RC(PA2)
I
I
I
4
6
R ATI
1_
(~
'.l.
RC(ATI)
7E
C2
TO 2ND
(~
PRINCIPAL TEL S E T l _
SECOHD
CIRCUIT
2A
~ 1=
R(2)
3
L AT2
B AT2
6E
RC(ATI )
~
RC 21
R 2
L(AU)
RG(ATI )
E
R(AT21
IA
L(AT2)
D
of\o 0
L(I)
(NOTE 3)
L
L
RG PA2
llP21
T 2
L(ATI)
B ATI
AI
L....-
2
9
RG(PAI)
SC
PIC 449A KTU
AI
L....-
OP
I
RG P2
CI
RC I
R I
T
R
L.-
RG(ATI )
48
9B
ABC
ADD STRAPS
LG AT2
RG AT2
7A
8A
9A
58
2ND CKT
LG(ATI )
88
PBX
LINE R
'---'
r
SA
P/0 642A PANEL
1ST CKT:
RC(PI)
RC(PI)
PU
KEY
~
4A
3E
ATTENDANT TELSET
SW
-
INSET
(FOR 448A KTU)
SA
TO LINE RINGERS[.
IF REQUIRED
: ~:
AI
LG
-
r--
-
ISS 4, SECTION 518-215-419
1ST LINE
CIRCUIT
SEE
(N~ I)
400-TYPE KTU
I / IN 620A OR
¥ V 620A2 PANEL
1ST PRINCIPAL TELSET
SW
HOOK
~
I--
~
~
NET
~
4A
L-..
n~
CIRCUIT I
~_I-.!.'-,-lIc.. >- 5A
'-----'
I
INSET
(FOR 449A KTU)
449A KTU IN /'-'"
642A PANEL /
PU
KEY
f-II
'-"+-+---;~+I"":""----! T ~
I
~ET
I
I
B GRD (NOTE 2)
8 GRD (NOTE 2)
\l
~J LG(P2)
~i ~H 2
~
L(PI)
*8 OR tRG ATI
NET·r~~I---I4f++-_ _-<
IL-
'---
L(ATI )
IIR OR IRC AT
ADD
STRAPS ____ ___
AI
AI
'---
LG(ATI)
IA
L(ATI)
L-_ _~~~~_______L~(A_T_'':'')_17B
LG(ATI)
f..f-o
r -____~~~~---------L.:..G~(A-T.:..Z.:..)_1ZA
LG(ATZ)
L(ATZ)
liB OR IRC(PI)
II
II
« L AT2
illl
IIR OR tRG(PI)
~E
o
o
E
0
'I I'
I
I
I
6
6 6
I
111
!
'" 1
IIR OR tRC(AT2)
~8 p~R
IRG P2
IIR OR IRC(PZ)
L PZ
L(ATZ)
L-----+-'---'-------------~......:..__l BE
8 OR RG
I
1
~
D
I
I
'"
C I
PU
KEY
C
OR tRG 2)
S(PI)
L I
*R OR IRC
SW
HOOK
8
0
LG(PI)
ATTENDANT STATION
A
1';@;1
SG(PI)
LG ATi)
L-..
P/0 642A PANEL
CIRCUIT 2
~Jo
o1 1
o1 1
0
lIB OR tRG (ATZ)
R OR RC
~~~ 1~__-I--"---=.::...:.:,,-_
_l!R_OR_'_R_C......:..(A_T_Z.:..)__l ~~ V
TO ZND [*T(Z) OR tRG(Z)- 40
PBX/CO
*R(Z) OR IRC(Z)- 50
LINE CKT
L(Z) _ 5E
TO ZND
PRINCIPAL
TEL SET
[
*B OR tRG(PZ)-
BD
l!R OR IRC(PZ) -
90
~~U2::,o ~~~DED
SG(PZ) S(PZ) _
Z8
LG(P2) -
all
BC
tL(P2) -
(NOTE 2)
9C
6"-7 >-
4E
*
t
FOR LINE RINGING
FOR COMMON AUDIBLE RINGING
NOTES:
1. PROV I DE INTERRUPTED OR STEADY RING
OPT ION ON 400-TYPE KTU WHEN
USING COMMON AUDIBLE RINGING.
2. CONNECT 8 GRD ONLY IF 448A KTU IS PROVIDED.
IF 44BA KTU IS PROVIDED, NONE Of THE RINGER
CONNECTIONS SHOWN ARE REQUIRED.
3. THE ATTENDANT LAMP WILL BE CONTROLLED BY THE
44BA KTU.
C2- 6E
L
Fig. 43-449A KTU Connections (Immediate Transfer Control) in 642A Panel
Page 79
SECTION 518-215-419
400-TYPE
KTU IN B20A
OR B20A2 PANEL
(NOTE 3)
T
R
(NOTE 1 AND 2)
1
2
4A
5A
3
T(1) STA
T( 1) CO
T
4B
T(B) STA
R
BA
T(B)
R(2)
LINE
~[
LINE
orH
LINE [
T
7A
R
5C
T
5TH
LINE [
BTH
LINE [
7~
LINE [
BC
T
80
R
8A
T
90
R
9A
T
7C
R
8C
T
70
R
9C
78
R
5B
T
BE
R
BB
T
4E
R
50
T
40
R
BD
T
5E
R
88
T
5E
R
9B
CT1
TO 34A
(
VOICE COUPLER
7E
R
T
CR1
A 8
C 0
000
PU
~[
PIO B42A PANEL
8E
R(5)
R( 1)
0
000
o
0
o
L T
5
R(B) CO
T(7) CO-STA
0
1
d T1
R(2) STA
R(5) STA
R( 1) STA
B
R(B) STA
T(5) STA
d T1
T(4) CO
T(5) CO
T(2)
co
7
T(4) STA
T(2) STA
11 ! 1
R(4) CO
R(7) CO
R(3)
co
8
T(3) CO
CT1
11 T1
R(4) STA
R(7) STA
R(3) STA
9
T(3) STA
CR1
11 T1
---
-
BLOCK EXPANDED FOR CLARITY
9E
NOTES:
1. DO NOT INSTALL STATUS LAMP FOR JACK CONTAINING 4518 KTU
2. USE 183A2 ADAPTER ON TERMINAL 5E FOR T(7) CO AND T(7) STA
3. USE 4000 OR G KTU. DO NOT USE 400H
Fig. 44-.451 B KTU Connections (Music-On-Hold) in 642A Panel.
Page 80
0
o
4
co
co
co
co
E
o
ISS 4, SECTION 518-215-419
NOTES,
1. IW
RC
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
2
A1
L
I
-«(
,
16
TO 400TYPE KTU
B
I
9
23
1--_ _--1'-_ _--1
10
24
1--_ _ _ _--« 1
NOTES:
1. COLUMN ASSIGNMENT FOR LEFT -HANO BLK IS COLUMN A-E
ANO FOR RIGHT -HANO BLK IS COLUMN F-B. SEE BLOCK
OIAGRAM COVERING THE 66B4-25 CONN BLK IN FIG. 4 OR 5.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATEO LEAOS PER FIG. 7.
FEATURES
CO OR PBX LINE CIRCUIT
INTERRUPTEO RING
AUOIBLE
COMMON AUOIBLE WITH
SIGNAL
GROUNO FOR RELAY CONTROL
HOLO
CIRCUIT
RELEASE
LONG HOLD ABANDON TIMEOUT
(FOR ESS #1, ESS #2, B12
PBX, 770 PBX, OIMENSION
PBX
SHORT HOLO ABANOON
(FOR ALL OTHERS)
TOP VIEW Or OPTION BLOCK-HANDLE ASSEMBLY. OPTION SYMBOLS
SHOWN CONNECTED ARE FACTORY INSTALLEO POSITIONS.
* FACTORY INSTALLED
Fig. 9.1 -Nondedicated Lead Connections for 400H KTU (CO or PBX Line Circuit) in 69B or 69D Apparatus
Mounting
Page 3
ADDENDUM 518-215-420
66B4-25 CONN BlK
69D
T
69B
R
T
TO ( C.O .• ~
A
Al
RESTRICTED
KEY TEL
SET
T
~
lG
R
l
-
A(U)
RG
A
RC
-
~
R
T
lEFT -HAND BlK
COL A ~
BlK 1
. . - - RIGHT -HAND BlK
COL B
lE FT OR RIGHT-HAND
BlK 2
Bl K
CONN A
CONN B
471A KTU
I
15
14
2
16
3
17
4
18
5
19
10
24
r---<
r---< 9
r---< 12
r---<
r---< 16
r---<
13
400 TYPE KTU
14
"'
9
12
R
13
A
UNRESTRICTED
KEY TEL
SET
Al
,
16
lG
l
8
RG
RC
Fig. 34-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 471A KTU (Battery Reversal Toll Restriction Circuit) in 69B or
69D Apparatus Mounting
Page 4
ISS 1, ADDENDUM 518-215-420
66B4-25 CONN BlK
IA
~
B C O:n
0
0
0 ~
ROW ASSIGNIIENT
(SEE NOTES)
T1 (STA)
Rl (STA)
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
II
Al
T2 (STA)
R2 (STA)
l2
A2
T3 (STA)
R3 (STA)
l3
A3
T4 (STA)
R4 (STA)
TO KTS
EQPT
l4
A4
T5 (STA)
R5 (STA)
l5
A5
T6 (STA)
R6 (STA)
l6
A6
T7 (STA)
R7 (STA)
l7
A7
112
TO 33A (
III
OR 34A
COUPLER
lG
TO
[
POWER
SUPPLY
B GRO
B BATT
31
31
29
29
11
11
14
14
28
2B
12
12
17
17
lB
lB
27
27
30
30
16
16
15
15
1
1
5
5
13
13
10
10
41
23
23
21
21
8
8
4
4
24
24
20
20
2
2
26
26
25
25
22
22
19
19
32
32
3
3
44
44
6
47
Y-Bl
34
BK-S
R-Bl
0
O-R
24
BR-BK
36
Bl-R
19
R-BR
24
BR-R
25
BK-BR
35
S-BK
39
G-R
R-G
W-Bl
W-G
R-O
S-W
V-Bl
BK-O
BK-Bl
BR-W
O-W
O-BK
S-R
Bl-W
G-BK
BK-G
Bl-BK
R-S
Bl-Y
w-o
O-V
G-W
V-BR
NOTES:
1. COlUIIN ASSIGNIIENT FOR lEFT HAND BlK IS
COlUIIN A-E AND FOR RIGHT HAMD BlK IS B-F.
SEE BlK DIAGRAII COVERING 66B4-25 CONN BlK
IN FIGS. 4 OR 5.
2. IF A 498A EQUIPPED WITH A 116Al CII IS
INSTAllED IN CONNECTOR A, A SECOND KTU
REQUIRING THE RN lEAO CANNOT BE USED IN
CONNECTOR B. IF A SECOND 498A IS USED IN
CONNECTOR B, DO NOT EQUIP IT WITH A 116Al
CII_
37
23
~
22
14
16
20
.1
11
30
TO
49BA
KTU
28
8
13
, 31
27
9
33
32
29
26
38
12
6
15
17
Fig. 35.1-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 498A KTU (Music-On-Hold Circuit) Equipped With a 116A1
Circuit Module in 69D Apparatus Mounting
Page 5
5 Pages
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT & TCo Standard
SECTION 518-215-420
Issue 5, June 1977
SERVICE
1A2 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
• 698, D, AND G APPARATUS MOUNTINGS
1.
SD-69590, Issue 2-413A, 421A, 448A, and
449A KTUs
GENERAL
This section provides identification, installation,
and connection information for the 69B, D,
and G apparatus mountings used in the 1A2 Key
Telephone System (KTS).
1.01
1.02
SD-69595, Issue 8-426A and 427C KTUs
.SD-69651-01, Issue 1-400G KTU.
This section is reissued to:
SD-69917, Issue 1-467A KTU
• Rerate 400D KTU from AT&TCo Standard
to Manufacture Discontinued (MD)
.SD-69921-01, Issue 1-471A and 479A KTUs.
SD-69924, Issue 1-470A KTU
• Add 400G KTU (Fig. 9)
SD-69599, Issue 2-69-Type Apparatus
Mounting.
• Add 421A KTU-used as Audible Signal
Suppressor (Fig. 21)
If this section is to be used with equipment or
• Add 471A KTU-Battery Reversal Toll
Restriction (Fig. 34)
• Add 479A KTU-Rotary Dial Toll Restriction
(Fig. 35).
1.03
This issue of the section is based on the
following drawings:
apparatus reflecting later issues of the drawings,
reference should be made to the SDs to determine
the extent of the changes and the manner in which
the section may be affected.
2.
IDENTIFICATION
2.01
Purpose:
The purpose of the 69B, D,
and G apparatus mountings is to provide
alternative mounting facilities for 400-series KTUs
in centralized installations of the 1A2 KTS in
conjunction with 584-type panels.
SD-69475, Issue 6-401A KTU
SD-69489, Issue 5-428A KTU
SD-69513, Issue 15-400D (MD) KTU
2.02
Ordering Guide
SD-69530, Issue 6-429A and 430A KTUs
(a) Basic Units
SD-69559, Issue 9-414A, 415A, 416A, 418A,
419A, 461A, and 469A KTUs
• Mounting, Apparatus, 69B
SD-69561, Issue 2-417 A KTU
• Mounting, Apparatus, 69D
SD-69567, Issue 14-407B (MD), 407C, 420A,
422B, 423A, 424A (MD), 424B (MD), 424C,
and 425B KTU s
• Mounting, Apparatus, 69G
(b) Replaceable Optional Components
NOTICE
Not for use or disclosure outside the
Bell System except under written agreement
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
SECTION S 18-215-420
Note: The 99A (MD) or B bracket consists
of two 23-inch mounting bars on which a
maximum of 12 apparatus mountings may be
installed.
The upper bar includes cable
supports which retain the connector cables.
The bracket requires a 9-inch vertical mounting
space.
• Assembly, Guide, 834055907 (P-40V590)
• Assembly, Tab, 834481699 (P-44Y169)
• Strip, Designation, 834481673 (P-44Y167)
(c) Associated Apparatus or Equipment
(order separately)
(h) The A25B connector cables are required to
extend the mountings to distributing terminals.
• Block, Connecting, 66B4-25 (as required)
• Bracket, Mounting, 99A (MD) or B
3.
INSTALLATION
• Cable, Connector, A25B (as required)
PLANNING
• Unit, Telephone, Key (as required, see
Table A).
2.03
3.01
Select the type apparatus mounting(s) required
for specific KTUs to be used per Table A.
Design Features
Apparatus mountings, connecting blocks,
and power supply should be located with as
short a distance between them as possible.
3.02
(a) Equipped with two connectors aligned vertically
to accommodate one 8-inch KTU or [by
adding an 834055907 (P-40V590) guide assembly
which must be ordered separately] two 4-inch
KTUs (Table A).
(b) The 69B apparatus mounting consists of
two 913A (20-pin) connectors wired to a
KS-16671, List 1 plug mounted on the back of
the apparatus mounting (Fig. 1).
(c) The 69D or G apparatus mounting consists
of two 914A (40-pin) connectors wired to
two KS-16671, List 1 plugs mounted on the back
of the apparatus mounting (Fig. 2).
(d) Tab assemblies hold the KTUs in place, and
provide mountings for designation strips.
Verify that fusing requirements for the
apparatus mountings can be met. See Table
B for fusing requirements.
3.03
INSTALLING
3.04
installed in a cabinet, 16C apparatus mounting,
or relay rack, install the 99A (MD) or B brackets
(Fig. 3).
3.05
Install the 69-type apparatus mounting (using
mounting hardware furnished).
3.06
Install the necessary 66B4-25 connecting
blocks at the distribution point.
(e) The same numbered pins of each connector
on which the 11 dedicated leads (BAT, GRD,
LF, LW, etc) appear are strapped between the
two connectors, and each dedicated lead is then
brought out on one conductor.
(f) The 69B, D, and G apparatus mountings are
wired for those 400-series KTUs indicated
by a bullet (.) in Table A.
(g) The 69B, D, and G apparatus mountings are
designed for frame mounting with a 99A
(MD) or B bracket (Fig. 3). Mounting screws
are furnished with each apparatus mounting.
Page 2
If the 69-type apparatus mounting is to be
In installations where a number of
69-type apparatus mountings are
installed, be sure to identify each
connecting block with its associated
apparatus mounting.
Connect the A25B connector cables to the
apparatus mountings and route to the
distributing point.
3.07
Cut down the A25B connector cables on the
66B4-25 connecting blocks as shown in Fig.
4, 5, and 6 for the 69B, D, and G apparatus
3.08
mountings, respectively.
Fig. 4, 5, and 6 also
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-420
tTABLE A.
ARRANGEMENT OF 400 SERIES KTU. IN 69·TYPE APPARATUS MOUNTINGS
KTU
SIZE
UN.)
FUNCTION
PINS
APPARATUS
MOUNTING
698
400·Type
CO or PBX Line Circuit
4
18
401A
Manual Intercom Line Ckt
4
18
407B (MO) or 407C
Dial Intercom 10-Code
Selector Circuit
8
80
413A
Auxiliary Ringup Circuit
4
18
414A
Manual Signaling, Ringdown
Private Line Circuit
4
20
415A
Automatic DC Signaling,
Private Line Circuit
4
18
416A
Station Line Circuit
4
20
417A
Add'on Conference Ckt
4
40
418A
Short Range, DC Signaling,
Private Line Circuit
4
20
Automatic Signaling, Ringdown
*
*
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
• •
• •
• •
• •
t
•
• •
• •
•
•
*
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
8
80
Long Line Circuit
4
18
421A
Power Failure Transfer Ckt,
General Purpose Relay or
Audible Signal Suppressor
4
40
422B
Station Busy Selector Ckt
4
40
423A
Dial Tone, Busy Tone, and
Audible Ringback Tone Ckt
4
20
424A (MO), 424B (MO),
or 424C
Dial Intercom 19·Code
Selector Circuit
8
80
425A (MO) or 425B
Flashing Lamp Circuit
8
80
•
•
8
80
•
8
80
Private Line Circuit
426A
427B (MO)
(Series 4) or 427C
TOUCH·TONE Adapter Ckt
•
•
•
•
•
*
*
•
•
• •
• • •
*
Multiline Exclusion Ckt
4
40
Supplementary Hold
Detector Circuit
4
40
430A
Flutter Generator Circuit
4
20
448A
Variable
4
40
*
449A
Immediate Transfer Cont Ckt
4
40
*
•
*
461A
Manual Signaling, Ringdown
Private Line Circuit
4
20
Voltage Monitor Circuit
4
18
469A
Lamp Extender Circuit
4
18
• •
• •
• •
*
467A
470A
External Signaling Circuit
4
12
471A
Bat. Reversal Toll Rstcn Ckt
4
18
479A
Rot. Dial Toll Rstcn Ckt
8
20
Note:
WORKING LIMITS:
The maximum permissible length of cable run
for the lamp feeder pairs
(10V±, LW, LF) is
determined by the lamp
load. For a load of 20
lamps, the run from
apparatus mounting to
power supply shall be a
maximum of 30 feet. For
lesser loads, the length of
run may be increased
proportionately.
*
429A (MO) or 429B
Circuit
When the 417 A, 420A, or
421A KTU is used in the
69-type apparatus mountings,
the cable run from the
apparatus mounting to the
connecting block should be
as short as possible, preferably
not longer than 10 feet to
reduce the possibility of
noise pickup on unpaired leads.
*
428A
Delay~Timer
REMARKS
69G
• •
• •
420A
419A
690
•
• •
*
•
* •
• •
*
•
•
•
*
*
*
•
*
*
* Not usable .
• Usable.
t Restricted to transfer of one station ringer.
Page 3
SECTION S 18-21 5-420
TAB
Fig . 1-698 Apparatus Mounting
Assembly)
(With
Guide
Fig. 2-690 or 69G Apparatus Mounting
Guide Assembly)
(Without
contain schematics and block diagrams showing
typical layouts of the apparatus mountings.
Dedicated lead connections for the 69B and
D apparatus mountings are shown in Fig.
7. These connections should be made before
installing KTUs in the apparatus mountings.
Dedicated lead connections for the 69G apparatus
mountings are shown in various figures covering
the connections for dial intercom. Dedicated leads
are those leads, such as BAT, G RD, LF, LW, etc,
that appear on the same numbered pin of each
KTU.
3.09
4.
CONNECTIONS
Fig. 8 through 35 show the nondedicated
lead connections of the 400-series KTUs that
can be installed in the 69B and D apparatus
mountings.
Each figure is divided into three
sections: fi eld connections are shown on the left,
row assignments in the center, and pin numbers
of the connector on the right. Pin numbers are
shown for reference only, so that a complete picture
4.01
Page 4
of the KTU circuitry can be seen when the
connection drawing of any KTU is compared to
the functional schematic.
Field connections are made for any KTU by
determining the connector used (connector
A or B) and the connecting block on which the
connector appears. For example, (see Fig. 8) if a
400-type KTU is installed in connector A of a 69B
apparatus mounting, field connections are made to
the rows shown in column 1. If a 400-type KTU
is installed in connector B, field connections are
made to the rows shown in column 2. If a 400-type
KTU is installed in connector A or B of a 69D
apparatus mounting, field connections are made to
the rows shown in column 1, with the connections
to connector A made to block 1 and the connections
to connector B made to block 2.
4.02
Fig. 36 and 37 show pewer supply connections
and strapping required to furnish a basic
dial intercom, using a 407B (MD), 407C, 424A (MD),
4.03
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-420
424B (MD), or 424C KTU. Fig. 38 covers the
station connections and Table C covers the necessary
connections to optional KTUs.
CABLE SUPPORT
Fig. 39 and 40 show the power supply and
strapping required to furnish a deluxe dial
intercom, using a 407B (MD), 407C, 424A (MD),
424B (MD), or 424C KTU. Fig. 41 shows the
connections required when a 425B KTU is installed
in a 69G apparatus mounting for a deluxe dial
intercom system. Fig. 42 shows the station
connections, and Table D or E shows the necessary
connections to associated and optional KTUs.
4.04
CONNECTION INDEX
Fig.
4~Schematic
of 69B Apparatus Mounting
and Connections of the A25B Connector
Cable to a 66B4-25 Connecting Block
MOUNTING SCREWS (2 REOD)
USE 801608100 (P-1608101 RHM OR
#8-32 X 1-1/8 RHM FOR 99A
USE 802065680 (P-206568) RHM OR
8-32 X 3/4 RHM FOR 99B
Fig. 5-Schematic of 69D Apparatus Mounting
and Connections of the A25B Connector
Cable to a 66B4-25 Connecting Block
"*
824431688 (P-44L1681 SCREW (4 REODI
Fig. 6-Schematic of 69G Apparatus Mounting
and Connections of the A25B Connector
Cable to a 66B4-25 Connecting Block
Fig. 3-69B, 690, or 69G Apparatus Mounting on
a 99A (MOl or 99B Bracket
TABLE B
FUSING FOR 69-TYPE APPARATUS MOUNTINGS
FUNCTION
FUSE SIZE
(AMPI
VOLTAGE
Lamp steady (10V±)
2
10Vac
Lamp flash (LF)
2
10Vac
Lamp wink (LW)
2
10Vac
Ringing (105V±)
.5
105Vac
Buzzer (18V±)
.5
18Vac
Talk battery (BAT. A)
1-1/3
24Vdc
Signal battery (BAT. B)
1-1/3
24Vdc
NUMBER OF
FUSES NEEDED
One per 50 lamps
As determined by total
load connected to supply
Page 5
SECTION 518-215-420
Fig. 7-Dedicated Lead Connections (Interrupter
and Power) for 69B and 69D Apparatus
Mountings
Nondedicated Lead Connections for:
Fig. 8-400D (MD) KTU (CO or PBX Line
Circuit) in 69B or 69D Apparatus
Mounting
Fig. 9-.400G KTU (CO or PBX Line Circuit)
in 69B or 69D Apparatus Mounting.
Fig. 10-401A KTU (Manual Intercom Line
Circuit) in 69B or 69D Apparatus
Mounting
Fig. 11-413A KTU (Auxiliary Ringup Circuit)
in 69B or 69D Apparatus Mounting
Fig. 12-414A KTU (Manual Signaling, Ringdown
Private Line Circuit) in 69B or 69D
Apparatus Mounting
Fig. 13-415A KTU (Automatic, DC Signaling
Private Line Circuit) in 69B or 69D
Apparatus Mounting
Fig. 14-416A KTU (Station Line Circuit) in
69B or 69D Apparatus Mounting
Fig. 15-417A KTU (Add-on Conference Circuit)
in 69D Apparatus Mounting
Fig. 16-418A KTU (Short Range, DC Signaling
Private Line Circuit) in 69B or 69D
Apparatus Mounting
Fig. 17 -419A KTU (Automatic Signaling,
Ringdown Private Line Circuit) in
69B or 69D Apparatus Mounting
Fig. 18-42OA KTU (Long Line Circuit) in 69B
or 69D Apparatus Mounting
Fig. 19-421A KTU (Power Failure Transfer
Circuit) in 69B or 69D Apparatus
Mounting
Fig. 22-422B KTU (Station Busy Selector
Circuit) in 69D Apparatus Mounting
Fig. 23-423A KTU (Dial, Busy and Audible
Ringback Tone Circuit) in 69B or 69D
Apparatus Mounting
Fig. 24-426A and 427B (MD) Series 4 or 427C
KTUs (TOUCH-TONE@ Adapter Circuit)
in 69D Apparatus Mounting
Fig. 25-428A KTU (Multiline Exclusion Circuit)
in 69D Apparatus Mounting
Fig. 26-429A (MD) or 429B KTU (Supplementary
Hold Detector Circuit) in 69D Apparatus
Mounting and 430A KTU (Flutter
Generator Circuit) in 69B or 69D
Apparatus Mounting
Fig. 27-448A KTU (Variable Delay Timer
Circuit) in 69D Apparatus Mounting
Fig. 28-449A KTU (Immediate Transfer Control
Circuit) in 69D Apparatus Mounting
Fig. 29-Preset Conference Circuit of a Deluxe
Dial Intercom Line (421A KTU in a
69D Apparatus Mounting and a 413A
KTU in a 69B or 69D Apparatus
Mounting)
Fig. 30-Nondedicated Lead Connections for
461A KTU (Manual Signaling, Ringdown
Private Line Circuit) in 69B or 69D
Apparatus Mounting
Fig. 31-467A KTU (Voltage Monitor Circuit)
in 69B or 69D Apparatus Mounting
Fig. 32-469A KTU (Lamp Extender Circuit)
in 69B or 69D Apparatus Mounting
Fig. 33-470A KTU (External Signaling Circuit)
in a 69D Apparatus Mounting
Fig. 34-H71A KTU (Battery Reversal Toll
Restriction Circuit) in a 69B or 69D
Apparatus Mounting
Fig. 20-421A KTU (Wired for DSS Feature)
in 69D Apparatus Mounting
Fig. 21-.421A KTU (Used as Audible Signal
Suppressor) in 69D Apparatus Mountin~
Page 6
Fig. 35-479A KTU (Rotary Dial Toll Restriction
Circuit in 69B or 69D Apparatus
Mountin~
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-420
Basic Dial Intercom
Fig. 36-Strapping and Power Supply Connections
for 407B or 407C KTU
Fig. 40-Strapping and Power Supply Connections
for 424A (MD), 424B (MD), or 424C
KTU
Fig. 37 -Strapping and Power Supply Connections
for 424A (MD), 424B (MD), or 424C
KTU
Fig. 41-Strapping and Power Supply Connections
for 425A (MD) or 425B KTU
Fig. 38-Station Connections
Fig. 42-Station Connections
Table C-Connections from 407- or 424-Type
KTU to Optional KTUs
Table D-Connections from 407-Type KTU to
Associated and Optional KTUs
Deluxe Dial Intercom
Fig. 39-Strapping and Power Supply Connections
for 407B (MD) or 407C KTU
Table E-Connections from 424-Type KTU to
Associated and Optional KTUs
Page 7
SECTION 518-215-420
66B4-25
CONN BLOCK
ROW ASSIGNMENT
COL AORF
(SEE NOTE)
A25B
CONN
CABLE
~
---t-
3~
---g--i-
--t~
~
"""10
---tI
---jT-
13
14
15
15
17
15
-Ts-To~
22-
--E-
---tr""i5
--Ts-
-if28
~~
#.- 30~
~
%vt ----32
t::G- ~
Tr- ~
~~
~~
~~
~~
40
~~
~ 41
~ ----q2
~ 43
~
-«
4s
~
47
4B
~
~
W-Bl
(Bl-W)
(W-O)
(0 -WI
(W-G)
(G-W)
(W-BR)
(BR-W)
(W-S)
( S-W)
( R -Bl)
(Bl- R)
( R-O)
(O-R)
(R- G)
(G - R)
( R -BR)
( BR-R)
( R-S)
( S-R)
(BK Bl)
( Bl-BK)
( BK-O)
( O-BK)
(BK-G)
(G- BK)
( BK-BR)
( BR-BK)
( BK-S)
( S BK)
( Y -BLl
(Bl-Y)
(Y-O)
( O-y)
(Y - G)
(G - Y)
(Y -BR)
( BR-Y)
( Y S)
(S- Y)
( V- BLl
( Bl-V)
(V-O)
( O-V)
(V-G)
(G-V)
(V- BR)
( BR-V)
( V-S)
( S V)
1
10 . - - - - - - - - - - -
APPARAT~;BMOUNTING-----------·>l1
AMPHENOL
CONN
CONN A
26 ~<~I----------------------------------------------------~I< 14
I
2
1<
( I
27 (
(
I
I(
12
I
1<
13
16
I(
2B ( I
29
30
4
31
o
I
~
32
19
7
6
33
7
10
II
34
9
35
15
17
18
10
36
II
37
CON N B
12
I
38
o
13
~
I
39
19
14
8
40
7
15
41
14
2
16
9
42
4
17
12
43
IB
44
10
19
13
5
45
II
20
16
46
IB
21
17
15
47
22
48~
23~
49
f-t--
24~
50tt25
f-L----
NOTE:
TERMINATE CONN CABLE TO COLUMN F IF LEFT-HAND
BLOCK OR COLUMN A IF RIGHT-HAND BLOCK. REFER
TO BLOCK DIAGRAM COVERING 66B4-25 CONN BLOCK.
Fig. 4-Schematic of 69B Apparatus Mounting and Connecting of the A25B Connector Cable to a 66B4-25
Connecting Block (Sheet 1)
Page 8
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-420
BLOCK DI AGRAM 69B APP MTG
6684-2.5
CONN BLOCK
69B
APP MTG
,----,
CONN A
NON DEDICATED
LEADS
~----,
14
---------
15
CONN B
NON DEDICATED
LEADS
1
28
---------
29
1
44
CONN A AND B
DEDICATED
LEADS
--
-- - -
---
45
FRONT
REAR
SPARE
*
50
BLOCK DIAGRAM OF 66B4-25 CONN BLOCK
TO STATIONS
AND/OR
STRAPPING
AS REQUIRED
66B4-25
CONN BLOCK
LEFT - HAND BLOCK
66B4-25
CONN BLOCK
RIGHT-HAND BLOCK
I~J
L~I
COL
A, B,C,
D, E
COL
COL
COL
~~T069B
APP MTG
T069B
APP MTG
~~
F,E,D'TOSTATIONS
C,B
AND lOR
-------+ STRAPPING
AS REQUIRED
BLOCK OIAGRAM FOR CENTRALIZED INSTALLATIONS
*
-J
A25B
CONN
CABLES
}- ---{ ••
~
~
~
/'"
I I
,---
LEFTHAND
BLOCKS
I
2
3
CIL TO
IDEN TIFY
APP MTG
WITH CONN
BLOC K
4
RIGHTHAND
BLOCKS
'--698-1
~
69B-2
~
69B-3
'--69B-4
_
~~:~;I~\ TO
APP MTG
WITH CONN BLOCK
* REFER
\
MOUNTING FRAME
FOR 69B APP MTGS
TO SECTION 518-0JO-101 FOR BACKBOARDS TO BE USED IN CENTRALIZED LOCATIONS
Fig. 4-Schematic of 69B Apparatus Mounting and Connections of the A25B Connector Cable to a 66B4-25
Connecting Block (Sheet 2)
Page 9
SECTION 518-215-420
101.-------
66B4-25
CONN BLOCK
BLOCK I
lEFT- HAND BLOCK
~
r-r-
~
~
f--;j-
r---s
I----S
1---7
f--jj-
f--Tf-!'o
I-fff-T.!---j3
I-i4
~
f-fsf--j-f-
r--;a-
r---t9
~
1--21
f--IT~
~
f--Tsf--TsI--Trf-ie
r--r.f--To-
~
LF
LG
LW
LG
IOV!
LG
I05Vt
RG
RN
RG
ST
f--32
f--TI-
~
~
!-it""
1-37
~
~
~
1--41
r-tr-
: 43
MG
44
A25B.
CONN
CABLE
-
~~:~~NOL
CONN
{W Bl I
{Bl-WI
{ W-OI
{O-WI
{W-.GI
{G-WI
{W-BRI
{BR-WI
{ W-SI
{ 5-wl
{ R-BlI
{Bl-RI
{ R-OI
{O-RI
{ R-GI
{G- R I
{R - BRI
{BR- Rl
{R-51
{ 5-RI
{ BK-BlI
{ Bl-BKI
BK- S
{ 5-BKI
{ Y-BlI
{ Bl-YI
{ Y-OI
{ O-YI
{ Y-GI
{G- YI
{Y- BRI
{ BR-YI
{ Y- 5 I
{ 5-YI
{ V-BLI
{ Bl-VI
{V- 0 I
,---+
7~
~
---t?
---t?
--t-7
--t-7
4.
--t-7
{ O-VI
1
{V- GI
1
f--
{G-VI
1
7
{ V-BRI
1
f-;j-
{ BR-VI
i
I4g-
{V-5 I
{ S-VI
1
r--,
r--,
r--,
24
1
15
A25B
CONN
CABLE
CONN
~
B BAT.
~
~I NO'I~
~~~~;NOL
26 ~(,.I-------« 14 )~------,-I~) 26
1(1
(9)
1)1
27 (I
( 12 )
I ) 27
2 (I
( 13 )
I) 2
~
~
( 16 )
3
29
29
4
B
30
30
I
5
31
31
~ 0
6
19
32.
32
20
21
33
33
22
8
23
34
24
34
9
25
35
26
35
10
10
27
36
2B
II
29
II
37
37
30
12
31
12
32
38
38
13
13
33
39
35
39
36
14
14
40
40
37
15
39
15
34
41
41
16
16
38
42
42
17
17
43
---t-? 43
2>---,
18
---t-? 18
44
---t-? 44
4>--:J
19
19
45
45
10 >---,
20
~ 20
~ 46
II~
21
---t-? 21
47
47
5>---,
I
---t-? 22
22
48
6 >---,
---t-?
I
---t-? 23
48
IB
49
I
-+7 24
23
3
50
I
17
49
25
~
A GRD
B GRD
1 PIN I
3.
A BAT.
46
1
•
{ BK-OI
{O -BKI
{BK-G I
{G -BKI
{BK-BRI
{ BR-BKI
66B4-25
CONN BLOCK
BLOCK 2
RIGHT-HAND BLOCK
---------+l.1
+L-
r--45
69D APP MTG
--+7
--+7
---'-7
{ W-BLI
{ BL-WI
{W-O I
{ O-WI
{W-GI
{ G-WI
{W -BRI
{ BR-w
{W- 51
{ S-WI
{ R-BlI
{ Bl-RI
{ R-O I
{O -R I
R- G I .
{G- RI
{ R-BRI
{ BR-RI
{R -S I
{S-RI
{ BK-BlI
{ Bl-BKI
{ BK-OI
{ O-BKI
{BK-G I
{G -BK I
{BK BRI
{BR-BKI
{ BK- SI
{ S BKI
{ Y-BLI
{ BL-YI
{ Y-OI
{O YI
{ Y-GI
(G-y)
{Y BRI
{ BR-YI
{Y- SI
{ S-YI
{ V-BLl
{BL VI
{ V-OI
{ O-VI
{V GI
{G - VI
{ V BRI
{ BR-VI
{V - S I
{ S-VI
~
~
-T-
~
-;j
-T-
-i-
-r
-ij-i--To--f,--it~
----j4
~
"16
~
--t8
~
20
-2j-ff23
-i;f-
--z-s-
--Ts27---Ta-
...g..
~
~
~
+
~
~
~
~
~
c4~
~
~
I::
~
f-f.-
"47
Ts
~
~
50 B 25~
Fig. 5-Schematic of 690 Apparatus Mounting and Connections of the A25B Connector Cable to a 66B4-25
Connecting Block (Sheet 1)
Page 10
ISS 5, SECTION 518·215-420
BLOC!( DIAGRAM 69D APP MTG
66B4-25 CONN BLOCKS
69D APP MTG
[J
EJ
FRONT
BLOCK 2
RIGHTHAND
BLOCK
BLOCK I
LEFTHAND
BLOCK
CONN A
NONDEDI CATED
LEADS
U
CONN B
NONDEDICATED
LEADS
-----CONN A AND B
DEDICATED
LEADS
32
32
33
33
I
1
48
------
49
SPARE
50
50
REAR
SPARE
A25B
CONN CABLES
BLOCK DIAGRAM OF 6684-25 CONN BLOCKS
66B4-25
CONN BLOCK
BLOCK 2
RIGHT-HAND BLOCK
66B4-25
CONN BLOCK
BLOCK I
LEFT-HAND BLOCK
~
~
COL
COL
TO STATIONS
ANDIOR
STRAPPING
AS REQUIRED
-
A. B. C,
D, E
.
.
COL
~F
TO
TO
UPPER
----+ AMPHENOL
69D
APP MTG
COL
LOWER
A
AMPHENOL+--69D
APP MTG
BLOCK DIAGRAM FOR CENTRALIZED INSTALLATIONS
~
F,E,D,
TO STATIONS
C,B
ANDIOR
------+ STRAPPING
AS REQUIRED
*
A25B
CONN
CABLES
LEFT·
HAND
BLOCKS
r--
r--
'---
'--69D-1
* REFER TO SECTION
518-010-101
r--
'---
----
RED
BACKBOARO
STENCIL TO
IDENTIFY
APP MTG
WITH CONN
BLOCKS
r-'-IY-*---,
RIGHTHAND
BLOCKS
-
2
_ _ _ _ STENCiL TO
69D-2 _ _ _ _
IDENTIFY
APP MTG WITH
CONN BLOCKS
MOUNTING FRAME
FOR 69D APP MTGS
FOR BACKBOARDS TO BE USED IN CENTRALIZED LOCATIONS.
Fig. 5-Schematic of 69D Apparatus Mounting and Connections of the A25B Connector Coble to a 66B4·25
Connecting Block (Sheet 2)
Page 11
SECTION 518-215-420
I+-
PART OF 69G
l A P P MTG
KTU LEAD
DESIGNATIONS
PART OF
(NOTE I)
425
TYPE
KTU
424
TYPE
KTU
407
TYPE
KTU
T
R
T
R
CONN
A AND 8
PIN NO.
H
r-----:>'
---+\
I
(NOTE 21
A2!5B
UPPER
AMPHENOL
CONN
B12)
I ) 26
BI3 )>-------+1~) I
27
A28
r-+-+~ 28
3
29
L (I)
R (I)
R (I)
f----7
LA
L. LA
L. LA
~B31
L (2)
R (2)
R (2)
~A23~--~+-~
)----+--+~
L (3)
R (3)
R (3)
~
A25
)---+-+--+~
L (4)
R (4)
R (4)
f----7
A26
)---+-+--+~
L (5)
R (5)
R (5)
~
A20
~--~+-~
L (6)
R (6)
R (6)
~
A21
)---+-+--+~
L (7)
R (7)
R (7)
A32
)---+-+-__4
f----7
1...,-="+~=-+,""",.,-1
L (8)
R (8)
R (8)
~A30
L (9)
R (9)
R (9)
~
.A29
).---I---I--..H
L (0)
R (0)
R (0)
1-"-~!....I-.!!..!::----1--+---+4
L (X2)
R (X2)
L (X3)
R (X3)
L (X4)
R (X4)
}-----?
}-----?
}-----?
}-----?
L (X5)
R (X5)
~
L (X6)
R (X6)
f----7
L (XI)
R (XI)
~~~~~~_~~
R (X8)
30
5
31
32
7
33
8
34
35
10
36
II
37
12
38
AS
I3
39
A22 ).---1---1--14 14
40
A24 >---+-+--+-'> 15
41
A27 >----1--+---+4 I6
42
AO >---+-+--t~ 17
43
AI >---+-+---+4
L (X7) R (X7) ____~~----? A33>---+-4--~
~~~~~
L (X8)
A31
18
44
19
45
>---+--+--+~20
L (X9) R (X9) __--I~ A. >----1---+---+4
~~~-"-'~'+
46
L (XO)
R (XO)
21
47
AI4 >----+-+-j~ 22
LCI
LC2
LC3
LC4
LC5
J
YI
Y2
Y3
825
824
822
48
23
49
LR, Y4
A36
24
Y5
A37
834
50
25
J
66B4-25 CONN BLOCK
LEFT- HAND BLOCK
CONN
CABLE
BLOCK I
?~I
( W-BLl
(BL-W)
( WoO)
(O-W)
(W-G)
(G-W)
(W-BR)
( BR-W)
( W-SI
( SoW)
( R- BLl
( BL-R)
(R-O)
(O-R)
(R-G)
(G- R)
( R-BR)
(BR- RI
(R oS)
(S- R)
(BK- BLl
(BL-BK)
(BK- 0)
(0 -BK)
( BK-G)
(G -BK)
(BK-BR)
( BR-BK)
(BK- S)
( S- BK)
(Y- BLl
(BL- Y)
( Y-O)
( O-y)
( Y G)
( G-Y)
( Y-BR)
( BR-Y)
( Y-S)
( Soy)
(V-BLl
( BL-V)
(V- 0)
( O-V)
( V-G)
( G-V)
( V BR)
( BR-V)
( V-S)
(S -V)
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
f--.J-
~
~
(W-BLl (T)
(BL-WI (R)
(W-G) (LG)
(G-W) (Ll
10-- ~ 10--
. . - PROVIDE WHEN
f---jf--
FURNISHING BASIC DIAL
INTERCOM (USE CONTINUO us
METHOD OF STRAPPING,
SEE INSET)
f---jt-
f--;-Sf---jt-
WHEN
10-- ....- PROVIDE
FURNISHING DELUXE
f-ji-
DIAL
INTERCOM AND 69G APP MTG
IS DEDICATED TO A 407 T YPE
OR 424 TYPE KTU
(USE CONTINUOUS METHOD OF
STRAPPING, SEE INSET)
~
f----it-
~
~
f-i'6f---ff-
I-Tz"
~
f-T.~
ffsf---#-
~
~
lfof-ij'--
( W-BLl
(BL-W)
(W G)
( G W)
~
~
~
~
ffsf----fr-
1--fa'f.~
f---;jf-
l-T,--
~
~
1-fs~
~
~
t-49
~
lj
TO
SH 2
INSET: CONTINUOUS
METHOD OF STRAPPING TO
PROVIDE FOR STATION MULTIPLES
~
COL
A
ROW
G-
.
~
COL
A
L.-----------------------------------------------------------------J~~2
Fig. 6-Schematic of 69G Apparatus Mounting and Connections of the A25B Connector Cable to a 66B4-25
Connecting Block (Sheet 1)
Page 12
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-420
66B4-25 CONN BLOCK
RIGHT-HAND BLOCK
BLOCK-2
~J
~
----t-
--t~
-5
---s
----cr
---t---to
~
--t2
---t"3
~
~
--tt~
--Te---
It20
f,-
-tr-
23
~
-E26
-Tt-Ta29-
--w
"""31-
~-
~
I Y-OI
-T.--
(W-BL)
IBL-W)
I W-G)
LG
R
=E=-
-+=
T
I
~-
-i!-
L
I~~I.!!-+--LG
L
""""""40" _
""""""4i""""""-
-;it--
1~-43-
LG
L
1.!Lr--~45 _
-Ts--
1~47-
LGI~~:-L
~~-
A25B
CONN
CABLE
IW-BLl
BL-W)
I W-O)
10-W)
I W-G)
IG-W)
IW-BR)
I BR-W)
I WooS)
IS-W)
I R-BL)
(BL-R
IR-O)
10-R)
IR- G)
IG R)
I R-BR)
I BR- R)
I R-S)
I 5 R)
I BK-BL)
I BL- BK)
I BK 0)
( O-BK)
I BK-G)
I G -BK)
IBK-BR)
I BR- BK)
I BK-S)
IS-BK)
I Y-BL)
(BL-Y)
~
FROM [
SH I
r--
(NOTE2)
(0 -V)
( V-G)
I G-Y)
I Yo. BR)
I BR- Y)
IY 5)
I So. y)
I V- BL)
(BL- V)
IV-O)
10 V)
I V- G)
IG - V)
IV-BR)
(BR-V)
( V-S)
IS V)
LOWER
AM PHENOL
CONN
PART OF 69G
APP MTG
(NOTE 2)
I
KTU LEAD
DESIGNATIONS
PART 0 F
CONN
A AND B
PIN NO
~
t=
407
TYPE
KTU
FCI
FC2
FC3
All
AL2
26 ~(TI---------« BO
I (I
(B20
27(1
(BI
2(1
(B2B
2B(1
(B27
3 (I
( AI6
TC
2'(1
(B37
4(1
(AM
30 ( I
( BI6 ~ D1
5(1
(B3B
R51
31 ( I
( AI. f - 6(1
(A35 '----32(1
(A3'
7(1
(B39 f - - TTG
BR
33(1
(B35
LK
B(I
(B30
RH
34
I
( B26
• (I
( B21
eG
35(1
(BI. ~ BYI
10~
A BAT.
36 ~(+I--------« BI8
A GRD
" (I
( B3
37 ( I
( BI7
B BAT.
12 ( I
( AI5
B GRD
IOV ±
3B(1
(B4
E=
:----:-----
~
<
+==
t=
424
TYPE
KTU
FCI
FC2
FC3
All
AL2
TO
Te
TG
01
RSI
RS2
LTl
LT2
TTG
BR
LK
RH
eG
BYI
A BAT.
A GRD
B BAT.
B GRD
IOV ±
13~---..,
E=
3' ~----+-----< B7
~ LF
LF
40 ~----+-----< BI4 ~ 55
15
41 ~--+--+-----< A5
16
A6
42
A7
17
AIO
43
All
18
AI2
44
AI3
19
AI7
45
AI8
20
82
46
BB
21
89
47
810
22
811
48
A3
23
A4
49
B23
24
B29
50
832
25
836
55
425A
IMO)OR
B KTU
FCI
FC2
FC3
All
AL2
Te
LR
01
*
Ke
LTl
LT2
Le6
BR
BYI
B GRD
14~---"'"
I(
I(
I(
I(
I(
I(
I(
I (
I(
I(
I(
I(
1(
I(
«
I (
I(
I(
I(
'(
§
~
E
*
FROM [
SH I
-------------------------------"
B BAT.
§
t=
§
NOTES:
I. NUMBERS IN PARENTHESIS ( ) DENOTE STATION CODES. X IS THE FIRST DIGIT
OF A 2-01G1T CODE WHICH CAN BE ANY DIGIT FROM 1 TO O.
2. TERMINATE THESE LEADS ONLY WHEN THE 69G APP MTG IS DEDICATED TO A
425A (MOl OR B KTU. WHEN THE 69G APP MTG IS DEDICATED TO A 407 OR 424 TYPE
KTU. CUT THESE LEADS OFF WHERE THE CABLE IS BUTTED. IN THIS CASE THE
SPACE IS USED TO PROVIDE FOR STATION MULTIPLES.
ON 4258 KTU ONLY, USE FOR "PICTUREPHONE" INTERCOM SERVICE.
5T
MG
BLOCK 01 AGRAM 69G APP MTG
6684-25
CONN BLOCKS
69G APP MTG
CONN
~
A25B
CONN
CABLES
BLK 1
BLK 2
rn
FRONT
Fig. 6-Schematic of 69G Apparatus Mounting and Connections of the A25B Connector Cable to a 66B4-25
Connecting Block (Sheet 2)
Page 13
SECTION 518-215-420
690· APP MTG
69B APP MTG
66B4-25
CONN BLK
66B4-25
CONN BLK
I~
fiELD
CONNECT IONS
LF
LG*
ROW ASS I GNMENT
(NOTE 3)
lfffffd]
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
CONN
A AND B
~~----«
1~
1 01-----«
o
t I :: f-I---_
t
tI
LF
7
LG*
P
LW
TO
INTERRUPTER
(NOTES I AND 2 )
LG*
ST
MG
RG*
IOVi
LG
LW
t
2
LG*
TO
INTERRUPTER
(NOTES I AND 2 )
P
P
ST
I05V:t
TO
POWER
SUPPLY
(NOTES I AND 2
RG
P
A GRD
B BAT.
B GRD
4
P
RN
II
RG*
TO
KTUS
AS
REQU IRED
10V'
LG
1 :: 1
7
~I----~( 2
~
t
~I-.-----<
~
~
(
t~
~
1~
~
t~
II
(
4
(
10
TO
KTUS
AS
REQU I RED
P
t I ::
t I :~ 1-1---t 1:: 1-1---(
P
A BAT.
(
~I---~(
t~
MG
I :: 1
i
33A-E
34A-E
CONN
A AND B
P
P
RN
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
ROW AND COLUMN
BLK I
105V±
10
1
18
RG
TO
POWER SUPPLY
(NOTES I AND 2 )
P
A BAT.
A GRD
P
B BAT.
17
B GRD
15
P
t
18
~I-.----
~
~~.---
*THESE LEADS USED FOR BALANCING PURPOSES TO PREVENT INDUCED NOISE.
17
15
THEY MUST
BE TERMINATED TO APPROPRIATE GROUND TERMINAL ON PANEL NEAR THE INTERRUPTER.
66B4- 25 CONN BLKS
L_L--.l---+--fo----f--r---- ~~~~-HAND
L_I--+-+---t...--- :~~~T-HAND
FUSED AT 3 AMPS OR LESS
PER FEED AT POWER SUPPLY
69B-1
69B-2
BLK I
BLK 2
690-1
OR AT 584-TYPE PANEL,
18 GAUGE OR SMALLER WI RE
DEPENDING ON LOAD
JUMPERS FOR INTERRUPTER
AND POWER CONNECT IONS
(DEDICATED LEADS)
BLOCK DIAGRAM FOR CENTRALIZED INSTALLATION (NOTE 4)
NOTES:
I. CONNECT AS REQUIRED (FUSE WHERE NEEDED) SO AS NOT TO EXCEED THE MAXIMUM LOAD
LIMITATIONS OF' THE POWER SUPPLY.
2. THESE LEADS MAY BE MULTI PLED FROM BLOCK TO BLOCK PROVIDING THE LIMITATION OF THE
POWER SUPPLY IS NOT EXCEEDED.
3. COLUMN ASSIGNMENT FOR LEFT-HAND BLOCK IS COLUMN A-E AND FOR RIGHT-HAND BLOCK IS
COLUMN F-B.
SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM COVERING 66B4-25 CONN BLK IN fiG. I OR 2.
4. REFER TO SECTION 5IB-010-101 FOR BACKBOARDS TO BE USED IN CENTRALIZED INSTALLATIONS.
Fig. 7-0edicated Lead Connections (Interrupter and Power) for 698 and 690 Apparatus Mountings
Page 14
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-420
6684-25 CONN BlK
~
* - TO
t -
PROV I DE TIME-OUT CYCLES OF RING-UP
CIRCUITS FROM 2.5 TO 7.5 SECONDS.
INSTALL KS-I3490.lI.1 WATT OR EOUIVALENT
RESI STOR BETWEEN TERMINALS I AND 3
WITH A STRAP FROM I TO 2. TIME-OUT
CYCLE AND RES I STOR VALUES ARE AS
FOLLOWS:
2.5 SECONDS - 0.13 MEGOHM RESISTOR
3.3 SECONDS - 0.20 MEGOHIII RESISTOII
5.0 SECONDS - 0.39 MEGOHM RES I STOR
6.7 SECONDS - 0.75 MEGOHM RESISTOR
7.5 SECONDS - 1.2 MEGOHM RESISTOR
FOR 30-SECOND TIME-OUT CYCLE REMOVE
ALL STRAPS FROM TERMINALS 1.2. AND 3.
WHEN THE DURATION OF MACHINE RINGING
I S I SECOND OR LESS. TI ME -OUT SHALL
NOT BE REDUCED BELOW 5 SECONDS.
OPTION STRAPS ON MO KTUS.400A,
BAND C.
ROW ASS I GNMENT
(NOTES I AND 2)
LEFT-HAND BlK
CONN A
(BlK I)
690
CONN B
69B
CONN A
(BlK2)
~~~~O
TO CO
~~N~X
LEFT OR RIGHT -HAND BlK
SHOWN FOR
[~t=~=t3Ej======R=E:FERENCE
R
T
T~~[ :1
lli
SET
4
15
(914
16
(
t
18i = 1 73 1 2
13
5
19
6
20
LG
ONLY
16
TO 4000 KTU
21
22
:~DI BlE [_B~O~R'-!I.B!..I----;@=.=T:;--.-~-.£:!!:~--;-T12;3-l
R OR RI
( ...---"='---.. ~t.=~I~O~t::i24~j--------«
SIGNAL
TO
[...!R:..:,I_ _--"
® l®
I
o lODE
_C"'A.;....>.("'RC"')'-_ _ _ _ _-'_
MATRIX
NOTES:
I. COLUMN ASSIGNMENT FOR LEFT-HAND BlK IS COLUMN A-E AND rOR RIGHT-HAND BLK IS COLUMN F-B.
SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM COVERING THE 66B4-25 CONN BlK IN FIG. 4 OR 5 •.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATED lEADS PER FIG. 7.
3. WHEN ZC OPTION IS USED. DUE TO THE DELAYED RELEASE OF THE HOLD BRIDGE, SOME TRANSMISSION lOSS
IS ENCOUNTERED FOR APPROXIMATELY ONE SECOND WHEN STATION REENTERS A HELD CALL.
OPTION STRAPPING ON 4000 KTU OPTION BlK
-
OPTI ON
FEATURES
STRAP TERMI NAlS
W
INTERRUPTED RING
5 TO 8,15 TO 6
~
AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
S
~
X
-
l*
t
lC
(NOTE 3)
-
lD
lJ
V I SUAl HOLD
CIRCUIT
TIME-OUT
CONTROL
RELEASE OF
HOLD I NG BR lOGE
FROM CO OR PBX
LI NE CURRENT
OPENS GREATER
THAN
STEADY RI NG
6 TO 8, 14 TO 6
COMMON WITH DIODE MATRIX CONTROL
5 TO 8,15 TO 6
lAMP WI NK
7 TO 10,18 TO 9
lAMP STEADY
7 T09.I7T09
SHORT T I ME DELAY (10 SECONDS)
I TO 2, II TO 9
LONG TI ME DE lAY
t
500 MILLISECONDS WHEN ASSOCIATED WITH
NO. I ESS HAVING RESWITCH CAPABILITY
2 TO 3 USING 60lA (5 ur)
CAPACITOR OR EQUIVALENT
100 14 I III SECONDS WHEN ASSOC I ATED WI TH
800A PBX AND/OR NO.5 X-BAR CENTREX NOT
HAVING AUTOMATIC PERMANENT SIGNAL RElEASE
2 TO 3 USING 575C (I ur)
CAPACITOR OR EQUIVALENT
50 MilliSECONDS WHEN ASSOCIATED WITH
NO.5 X-BAR CENTREX HAVING AUTOMATIC
PERMANENT SIGNAL RELEASE
2 TO 3 USING 575B (0.5 ur)
CAPAC ITOR OR EQU I VALENT
Fig. 8-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 4000 (MO) KTU (CO or PBX Line Circuit) in 69B or 690 Apparatus
Mounting
Page 15
SECTION 518-215-420
6684-25 CONN 8LK
IA8CDEFI
~II
II
C
II
~
ROW ASSIGff'lENT
(NOTES 1 AND 2)
69Il
CONN A
LEFT-HAND 8LK
(8LK 1)
~..-Ih\l~~I-,=,...........,;' LEFT DR RIGHT-HAND BLK
FIELD
CONN
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
~,
-«<914
TO CO OR(
_____
PBXLINE ~_
li
TO TEL[ T
SET
8 OR 81
TO AUDIBLE(
SIGNAL
R OR Rl
RG
I'itT\ ~
C~~I-------«
DIODE(-"R~l_ _.......Jt~
TO
I'IATRIX
TO 400-TYPE KTU
1
l~
...J_
~CA!:!!....l(~RC!<.!)_ _ _ _
NOTES,
1. COLlfti ASSIGlftNT FOR LEFT-HAND BLK IS COLlfti A-E AN) FOR RIGHT-HAND 8LK IS
COLlfti F-8. SEE BLOCK DIAGRAII COVERING TIE 6684-25 CONN 8LK IN FIG. 4 DR 5.
2. TERIUNATE DEDICATED LEADS PER FIG. 7.
OPTIONS
OPT
~
I-Z
>-!-X
I-!.
~
S
~
V
R
~
K
N
FEATURES
LONG TIlE DELAY
(APPROXII'IATELY 20 SECONDS)
TI~DUT
SHORT TIlE DELAY
(APPRDXII'IATELY 8±1.5 SECONDS)
LMP WINK
VISUAL
HOLD CKT LMP STEADY
INTERRII'TED RING
STEADY RING
AUDIBLE ctJI'OI DIODE
SIGNAL
I'IATRIX CONTROL
ctJI'OI WITH RELAY
CONTROL
RELEASE OF
~INIM
DELAYED HOLDING BRIDGE
OF 25 ~
HOLD
FRIJI'I CO OR PBX
RELEASE BY LINE CURRENT
BOD ~
OPENS
CONNECTS TO 5DA
PR~ISES SYSTEN
CUST~
OPTION
TOP VIEW OF TIE OPTION BLOCK HANDLE TOWARD
USER. OPTION SYIIlDLS SHOIfII CONNECTED TO
TERIUNALS lNOlCATE FACTORY PROVIDED OPTIONS.
Z
Y
X
T
W
V
R
N
K
N
CONNECT
OPTION PLUG
TO TE~INALS
FACTORY
PROVIDED
B2-BS
Al-A2
"
A2-AS
CS-C4
C2-CS
Cl-CS
E2-ES
01-02
El-E2
81-82
"
"
Fig. 9-.Nondedicated Lead Connections for 400G KTU (CO or PBX Line Circuit) in 69B or 690 Apparatus
Mounting.
Page 16
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-420
6684-25
CONN BLOCK
I~J
ROW ASS I GHMENT
(NOTES I AND 2)
lErT-HAII1l BLOCK
CONN A
690 (BlK I)
COHN 8
(BlK 2)
fiELD
CONNECT IONS
69B
T
AI
lG
~~N:~~IRED
(SEE INSET)
SHOWN rOR
RErERENCE ONLY
17
R
TO TEL SET
lErT OR RIGHT-HAND BLOCK
CONN A
["-
12
4
18
13
5
I'
16
8
20
7
21
8
22
TO 40lA KTU
INSET
PART or 40lA
SPARE CONTACTS
SPARE 2,
SPARE 3
15
14
2
16
9
10
24
5.:J
IIOTES:
I. COLUMN ASS I GHMENT rOR lEn HAND BLOCK
IS COLUMN A-E AND rOR RIGIIT HAND BLOCK
IS COLUMN roB. SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM
COVERING THE 8884-25 COHN BlK IN fiG. 4
OR S.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATED lEADS PER fiG. 7.
Fig. 10-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 401A KTU (Manual Line Intercom Circuit) in 698 or 69D Apparatus
Mounting
Page 17
SECTION 518-215-420
66B4-25
CONN BlK
ROW ASS IGNMENT
(NOTES I AND 2)
lEfT -HAND BlK
CONN A
690
(BlK I)
RIGHT -HAND BlK
CONN B
(BlK 2)
FIELD CONNECT IONS
TO CO
698
lEfT OR RIGHT-HAND BlK
===(
CONN A
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
[·~T= = 8 3 3 1 816= 5
~~N~8X ~
914
(
TO 413A KTU
TO RINGER,
RElAY,ETC,
OR AS REQ
CONNECT AS
REQUI RED
RC
10
[::::~ ~
( I
24
17
12
18
13
_~SP~A~R~E~3t==~=~=t3Ej======:
19
(SEE INSET)
._SPARE 4
22
16
INSET
(PART OF 413A)
I~ ~ :I
:
I
I
NOTES:
I. COLUMN ASSIGNMENT FOR lEfT-HAND BU< IS COLUMN A-E
AND FOR RIGHT-HAND BlK IS COWMN F-B. SEE BLOCK
DIAGRAM COVERING THE 6684-25 CONN BlK IN FIG. 4 OR 5.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATED lEADS PER FIG. 7.
OPTION STRAPPING ON 413A KTU OPTION BlK
OPTION
FEATURES
I STEADY
X
AUDIBLE
Z
SIGNALS [INTERRUPTED RING
i----------
RING
STRAP
TERMINALS
9 TO 10
8 TO 10
Fig. 11 -Nondedicated Lead Connections for 413A KTU (Auxiliary Ringup Circuit) in 698 or 690 Apparatus
Mounting
Page 18
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-420
66B4-25
CONN BLK
ROW ASS I GNMENT
(NOTES I AND 2)
690
LEFT-HAND BLK
CONN A
(BLK I)
RIGHT-HAND BLK
CONN B
(BLK 2)
69B
FIELD CONNECT IONS
LEFT OR RIGHT-HAND BLK
CONN A
SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY
TO SIMILAR
TYPE PRIVATE
LINE UNIT
AT DISTANT
END (NOTE 3)
14
15
16
::i~:'[~~'~Iml;:1=
TO SIGNAL
.!S~G'-------------t~=1~~=
CONNECT AS
REQ FOR
CONTROL
PURPOSES
(SEE INSET)
SPARE
~~~------------+---~
[
~~~~~~E
_
j~;;;::;::::~~![::~~:ST;R~A:P=l ~ !-~ -l:::::::::::::
B OR BI
R OR R I
RG
i@
( ..._...:C",W=;=[,=R,,-)___
RC
[.~RJ-I_ _...Jt@
~~~~~ X -",CA~(~R",CL)_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _"':_
TO
13
[S
KEY (NOTE 4)
TO
12
__
__
OPTION STRAPPING ON 414A KTU OPTION BLK
OPT ION
FEATURES
\I
NOTES:
1_ COLUMN ASSIGNMENT FOR LEFT-HAND BLK
IS COLUMN A-E AND FOR RIGHT-HAND
BLK IS COLUMN F-B.
SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM
COVERING 66B4-25 CONN BLK IN FIG.
4 OR 5.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATED LEADS PER FIG, 7.
3. PVT LINE CKT AT DISTANT END MAY BE A
f--T
f--S
I---
AUD I BLE
SIGNALS
R
f--N
INTERRUPTED RING
STRAP
TERM I NALS
UNDER
CONTROL OF
TIME-OUT
CIRCUIT
(B RELAY)
STEADY RING
6 TO 7
COMMON WI TH DIODE
MA TR I X CONTROL
7 TO 8
UNDER
CONTROL
R RELAY
COMMON II ITH DIODE
MATR I X CONTROL
7 TO 8
STEADY RING
or
4 TO 6
414A KTU,419A KTU,204A KTU, OR ANY
OTHER TYPE PVT II NE UN I T REQU I RING
RING I NG VOLTAGE FOR THE R I NGUP
CIRCUIT AND FURNISHING RINGING
VOLT AGE FROM THE S I GNALI NG CKT.
4. SIGNAL KEY MAY BE A CONVERTED PICKUP
KEY OR ANY EXTERNAL NON LOCK I NG KEY.
5. FOR SATISFACTORY AUDIBLE RINGBACK TONE, THE
RINGING SUPPLY MUST CONTAIN AN AUDIBLE
COMPONENT.
X
10 SECONDS
I TO 2
~
16 SECONDS
2 TO 3
WITHOUT
X OR Z
23 SECONDS
REMOVE
x OR Z
STRAPS
M
AUD I BLE R I NGBACK TONE (NOTE 5)
9 TO 10
f--TIME-OUT
Fig. 12-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 414A KTU (Manual Signaling, Ringdown Private Line Circuit) in
698 or 690 Apparatus Mounting
Page 19
SECTION 518-215-420
6664-25
CONN BlK
r I ElD
ROW ASS I GNMENT
(NOTES I AND 2)
lEFT -HAND BlK
CONN A
(BlK I)
690
RIGHT-HAND BlK
CONN B
(6lK 2)
lEFT OR RIGHT-HAND 6lK
CONNECT IONS
696
TO SIMilAR
[
LINE
TYPE UNIT
TIE
AT DISTANT
END (NOTE 3)
16
A
AI
lG
l
6 OR 61
R OR RI
RI
TO
[
DIODE
MATR I X
SHOWN FOR
:=~==========================~==~===t=='~5~~============:
T
TO
[
AUD I BlE
SIGNAL
CONN 6
REFERENCE ONLY
R
TO lOCAL
TEL SET
CONN A
CA(RC)
(
.
to
®
.~
10
3
17
4
18
5
19
6
20
7
21
8
22
9
23
10
24
14
12
13
16
(
TO 415A KTU
I
OPTION STRAPPING ON 415A KTU OPTION BlK*
NOTES:
I. COLUMN ASSIGNMENT FOR lEFT-HAND BlKIS
COLUMN A-E AND FOR RIGHT-HAND BlK IS COLUMN F-B.
SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM COVERING 66B4-25 CONN
BlK IN FIG. 4 OR 5.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATED lEADS PER FIG. 7.
3. PVT LINE CKT AT DISTANT END MAY BE A 415A
KTU,203A KTU, OR ANY OTHER TYPE PVT LINE UNIT
REQUIRING DC VOLTAGE FOR THE RINGUP CIRCUIT
AND FURN I SH I NG DC VOLTAGE FROM THE S I GNALI NG
CIRCUIT.
OPTION
-
FEATURES
W
T
S
AUD I BlE
SIGNALS
STRAP
TERM I NAlS
INTERRUPTED RING
4 TO 6
STEADY RING
5 TO 6
COMMON \/1 TH DIODE
MATR IX CONTROL
4 TO 6
M
AUD I BlE R I NGBACK TONE
I TO 2
Y
V I SUAl HOLD SIGNAL
7 TO 8
* - FOR IDLE liNE TERMINATION CONNECT A
KS-13490,LI 910 OHM RESISTOR IN SERIES
WI TH A 542F, 2 UF CAPAC I TOR ACROSS
TERM I NAlS 9 AND 10. ORDER COMPONENTS
LOCAllY AND INSTAll.
Fig. 13-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 415A KTU (Automatic, DC Signaling Private Line Circuit) in 69B
or 69D Apparatus Mounting
Page 20
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-420
6684-25
CONN BlK
ROW ASSIGNMENT
(NOTES I AND 2)
690
lEFT - HAND BlK
CONN A
(BlK I)
RIGHT-HAND BlK
CONN B
(BlK 2)
69B
"ElD
CONNECT IONS
lEFT OR RIGHT-HAND BlK
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
CONN
SET[:~~===========================t==~==~==1~5~j============:~914
AT DISTANT
TO TEL
END
.
2
16
:~:
17
18
21
22
TO SIGNAL
["
19
(
:S~------------------------~c=~~=r==~==}-----------~
~~!T ~6N lOCAl --::.SG=-------------------------~L___'~..1__~..J
20
16
TO 416A KTU
(NOTE 3)
INSET
(PART OF 416A)
CONNECT AS
REQ FOR
69B
ROW 13
[SPARE
CONTROL
PURPOSES
(SEE INSET)
[
AUDIBLE
SIGNAL
TO
[
DIODE
MATR IX
(
690
ROW 12
STRAP
TO
27
------------------------------~----~
B OR BI
R OR RI
RI
CA(RC)
::::
.
1®
II
8
25
RG
@
19
23
RC
10
24
J®
OPTION STRAPPING ON 416A KTU OPTION BlK
NOTES:
I. COLUMN ASS I GNMENT FOR lEFT-HAND BlK
IS COLUMN A-E AND FOR RIGHT-HAND BlK
IS COLUMN F-B. SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM
COVER I NG 66B4-25 CONN BlK IN FI G.
4 OR 5.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATED lEADS PER FIG. 7.
3. SIGNAL KEY MAY BE A CONVERTED PICKUP
KEY DR AN EXTERNAL NONlOCK I NG KEY.
OPT I ON
FEATURES
W
INTERRUPTED RING
~
-
T
S
M
AUD I BlE
SIGNALS
STRAP
TERM I NALS
5 TO 8
STEADY RING
7 TO 8
COMMON WITH DIODE
MATR I X CONTROL
5 TO 8
AUD I BlE R I NGBACK TONE
9 TO 10
Fig. 14-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 416A KTU (Station Line Circuit) in 698 or 690 Apparatus Mounting
Page 21
SECTION 518-215-420
6684-26 CONN BlK
~
ROW ASS I GNMENT
(NOTES I THROUGH
fiELD
CONNECT IONS
~~N~R
TO
..:.:.._ _ _ _
(1ST LINE)
TO STATION SIDE
OF 400-TYPE KTU
ASSIGNED TO
1ST LINE
(NOTE 4)
lEn-HAND BlK
CONN B
(BlK 2)
./'
RIGHT-HAND BlK
~
T (I)
R (I)
[
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
~ ~4
...;.;,._ _ _~
TO
/'
~
II
TO LINE SIDE [
OF 400-TYPE KTU
~~~I~~~~
CONN A
(BlK I)
690
[
PBX
3)
A (I)
0
12
19
21
28
22
29
23
30
TO STAT ION SI DE
OF 400-TYPE KTU
ASS I GNED TO 2ND
LI NE (RESTR I CTED
PBX LI NE)
OR
TO
417A
KTU
TO ASSIGNED STA
OF 01 Al INTERCOM
LINE
T (2)
TO
PICKUP KEY AT
CONTROL STA
FOR 2ND LI NE
TO EXCl KEY
AT CONTROL STA
(NOTE 5)
12
R (2)
[
13
A (2)
16
AI
[ ~~7
®
ER
-
35
6
OPTION STRAPPING ON 417A KTU OPTION BlK
OPTION
TO SIGNAL KEY
AT CONTROL STA
(NOTE 6 )
TO 1ST
CONTROL STA
(NOTE 7 )
FEATURES
I CONTROLLED BY
I NONlOCKING KEY
STRAP
TERMINALS
X
ONE STAT I ON
W*
TWO STATIONS
Y
CONTROllED BY EXCWSION KEY
3 TO 5
Z
CONTROllED BY NON LOCKING KEY
I TO 2
6 TO 10
4 TO 6,8 TO 10
o--.r-o
C>--M-O
* - INSTAll KS-15724,LI DIODES OR EQUIVALENT
(PROCURE lOCALLY) BETWEEN TERMINALS AS SHOWN.
TO 2ND
CONTROL STA
(NOTE 7 )
TO CONFERENCE
CKT lAMP
(NOTE 8)
NOTES:
I. COLUMN ASSIGNMENT FOR LEFT-HAND BlK IS COLUMN
A-E AND FOR RIGHT-HAND BlK IS COLUMN F-B.
SEE
BLOCK DIAGRAM COVERING 66B4-25 CONN BlK IN
FI G. 5.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATED lEADS PER FIG. 7.
3. ASSOCIATED lAMP AND RINGING CKlS FROM 400-TYPE KTU
AND OIAl INTERCOM LINE CONNECT DIRECTLY TO
TELEPHONE SETS.
4. STATION lEADS FROM THE TEL SET FOR THE 1ST LINE
MUST ALSO BE TERMINATED TO THE STA SIDE OF THE
ASSIGNED 400-TYPE KTU.
S. REMOVE AND INSULATE EXClUS I ON KEY lEADS FROM IT
AND IR IN THE TEL SET IF SO CONNECTED.
6. SIGNAL KEY MAY BE A CONVERTED PICKUP KEY OR AN
EXTERNAL NONlOCK I NG KEY.
7. A DIODE MUST BE INSTALLED I N THE "A" lEAD OF THE
TEL SET WHEN Z OPTION IS PROVIDED.
FOR METHOD
OF CONNECTION USE STATION BUSY lAMP OPTION AS
SHOWN IN CONNECTION SECTION OF TYPE SET USED.
8. lAMP INDICATING CONFERENCE CKT IS ACTIVATED.
(llG
_____
~
7
8
8
Fig. 15-Nondedicoted Lead Connections for 417A KTU (Add-on Conference Circuit) in 69D Ap)laratus Mounting
Page 22
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-420
66B4-25 CONN BlK
~
ROW ASS I GNMENT
(NOTES I AND 2)
lEfT-HAND BlK
CONN A
(BlK I)
690
CONN B
(BlK 2)
fiELD
CONNECT IONS
lEfT OR RIGHT-HAND BlK
CONN
69B
~~l [~G (::)
SET
l
17
12
IS
13
21
(I)
22
TO SIGNAL( S II)
STATION A
(NOTE 4)
~~TE
19
..::S=..G..).(.:.,1):..-_ _ _ _..::(!)=_
3)
TO
(B OR BI
AUDIBLE
R OR RI
SIGNAL
_.
'
------I' ®
(!;.0.
1®
TO DIODE (.';:R.!..I
MATRIX
CA (RC)
16
20
RG
RC
23
10
24
I
15
_
T (2)
R (2)
TEL [
TO
SET
SHOWN fOR
REfERENCE ONLY
2
16
14
2S
14
TO
41SA
KTU
lG (2)
l
(2)
69B
~
27
19
5
19
16
6
20
9
23
II
2S
690
ROW 12
STAT ION B
.
TO SIGNALC S (2)
KEY
SG (2)
INOTE 3)
B OR BI
!~DIBlE
SIGNAL
TO DIODE
MATRIX
(
~.
,.
(Z,Y, W, T,R)
R OR RI
----It@)
(~R.!..I_ _
.
RG
RC (2)
l@)
..::C:::A...:(~R,::,CL)_ _ _ _ _---1_
OPT I ON STRAPPI NG ON 41SA KTU OPT I ON BlK
OPT ION
fEATURES
~
TWO-WAY
AUTOMAT IC
f...--..!.S
>-----~
AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
Z
>-----K
>------
H
I--M
AUTOMATI C,
ONE-WAY
MANUAL
(NOTE 5)
2T03T04*
STEADY RING
IT02T04*
COMMON WITH 0 lODE
MATRIX CONTROL
2T03T04*
INTERRUPTED RING
3 TO 4
STEADY RING
I TO 4
COMMON WITH DIODE
MATRIX CONTROL
3 TO 4
TWO-WAY MANUAL (NOTE 6)
Y
~
ONE-WAY
STRAP TERM I NAlS
I NTERRUPED RING
TWO-WAY AUTOMATIC
AUDIBLE
RING-BACK
9 TO 10. 5 TO 7 TO S*
ONE-WAY AUTOMATIC,
ONE-WAY MANUAL
5 TO 7. 9 TO 10
TWO-WAY MANUAL
9 TO 10
o
NOTES:
I. COLUMN ASSIGNMENT fOR lEfT-HAND BlK IS
COLUMN A-E AND fOR RIGHT-HAND BlK IS f-B.
SEE BLOCK 0 I AGRAM COVER I NG 66B4- 25 CONN
BlK IN fiG. 4 OR 5.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATED lEADS PER fiG. 7.
3. SIGNAL KEY MAY BE A CONVERTED PICKUP KEY
OR AN EXTERNAL NONlOCK I NG KEY.
4. STATION "A" IS ALWAYS ASSIGNED AS THE
AUTOMATIC SIGNALING STATION WHENEVER THE
ONE-WAY AUTOMATIC, ONE-WAY MANUAL
SIGNALING OPTION IS USED.
5. THESE OPTIONS APPLY TO THE SIGNAL KEY
AND AUDIBLE SIGNAL AT STA "B" ONLY.
THE
AUDIBLE SIGNAL AT STA 'A" IS UNDER
CONTROL Of THE SIGNAL KEY Of STA "B".
THE AUDIBLE SIGNAL AT STA "A" MAY BE
PART Of A CONN AUD I BlE ARRANGEMENT
PROVIDED THE DIODE MATRIX IS USED fOR
CONTROL.
6. THE AUDIBLE SIGNALS AT STAS "A" AND "B"
MAY BE PART Of A COMM AUD I BlE ARRANGEMENT
PROVIOED THE DIODE MATRIX IS USED fOR
CONTROL.
* - USE CONTI NUOUS METHOD Of STRAPP I NG
Fig. 16-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 418A KTU (Short Range, DC Signaling Private Line Circuit) in
698 or 69D Apparatus Mounting
Page 23
SECTION 518-215-420
66B4-25
CONN BLK
ROW ASS I GNMENT
(NOTES 1,2, AND 3)
LEfT -HAND BLK
LEfT OR RIGHT-HAND BLK
F IELO
CONNECT IONS
TO SIMILAR
TYPE TIE
~~N~I~~~~T
[
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
T
TO LOCAL
TEL SET
~A:.:I
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
STRAP
SIGNAL
TO
~!~~;X
~ :~4
i
::::
--'-'----------------1
LG
!~DIBLE
E8
--.:R~_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-1
ENG (NOTE 4)
II
TO 419A KTU
AO
RG
[ B OR BI
R OR RI
[RI
RC
10
1-------<
AI
(W,T,R)
< ..,-......:==:.-_-+
@::ll
R:.:
C)'--_ _ _ _ _ _
_C:.:A,-,(c.:
r@
~.
OPT I ON STRAPPI NG ON 4 I 9A KTU OPT I ON BLK
OPT I ON
W
f----
~
S
NOTES:
I. COLUMN ASSIGNMENT FOR LEFT-HAND BLK IS COLUMN A-E
AND FOR RIGHT-HAND BlK IS COLUMN F-B. SEE BLOCK
DIAGRAM COVERING 66B4-25 CONN BlK IN FIG. 4 OR 5.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATED lEADS PER FIG. 7.
3. THE 4 I 9A KTU REQU I RES THE USE OF BOTH CONNECTORS
IN THE APP MTG BUT CONNECTIONS ARE ONLY MADE
THROUGH THE "A" CONNECTOR.
4. PVT LINE CKT AT DISTANT END MAY BE A 419A, 414A,
OR 204A KTU OR ANY OTHER TYPE PVT LI NE UN IT
REQUIRING RINGING VOLTAGE FOR THE RINGUP CIRCUIT
AND FURNISHING RINGING VOLTAGE FROM THE SIGNALING
CIRCUIT.
~
R
~
AUD I BlE
SIGNALS
WI THOUT
X OR Z
M
UNDER
CONTROL OF
TIME-OUT
CIRCUIT
(B RELAY)
INTERRUPTED
RING
6 TO 8
STEADY RING
5 TO 6
COMMON \/1 TH
DIODE MATRIX
CONTROL
6 TO 8
STEADY RING
UNDER
CONTROL OF
R RELAY
N
~
~
STRAP
TERM I NAlS
FEATURES
COMMON \/1 TH
DIODE MATRIX
CONTROL
3 TO 5
6 SECONDS
9 TO 10
17 SECONDS
7 TO 10
25 SECONDS
X OR Z
STRAPS
AUD I BlE RI NGBACK TONE
I TO 2
TI ME-OUT
REMOVE
Fig. 17-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 419A KTU (Automatic Signaling, Ringdown Private Line Circuit)
in 698 or 690 Apparatus Mounting
Page 24
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-420
66B4-25
CONN BlK
ROW ASSI GNMENT
(NOTES I AND 2)
690
lEFT-HAND BlK
CONN A
(BlK I)
RIGHT-HAND BlK
CONN B
(BlK 2)
69B
TO 407B(MD), 407C OR 424A (MD),
424B(MD) OR 424C KTU ASSIGNED [
STATION OF DIAL INTERCOM
R
TO OFF. PREMISE
[
TEL SET (NOTE 3)
R
T
T
TO 407B(MD), 407C OR 424A(MD){ R I-RXO
424B(MD) OR 424C KTU ASSIGNED
"R" lEAD OF DIAL INTERCOM
STRAP
c:::::::=:
r-
CONN A
lErT OR RIGHT-HAND BlK
CONN B
I
15
2
16
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
14
3
17
12
4
18
5
19
13
16
8
22
9
23
IO
24
:~OA
KTU
INOTE 5)
TO 407B(MD), 407C OR
424A(MD), 424B(MD)
OR 424C KTU (NOTE 4)
NOTES:
I. COLUMN ASSIGNMENT FOR lEFT-HAND BlK IS COLUMN A-E
AND FOR RIGHT-HAND BLOCK IS COLUMN F-B. SEE BLOCK
DIAGRAM COVERING 66B4-25 CONN BlK IN FIG. 4 OR 5.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATED lEADS PER FIG. 7.
3. MAXIMUM STATION CONDUCTOR lOOP IS 500 OHMS. OFF-PREMISE
TELEPHONE SET MAY BE EQUIPPED WITH A "TOUCH-TONE" DIAL
PROVIDED THE INTERCOM CIRCUIT IS SO EQUI PPED.
4. PROV I DE A 400J 0 lODE FOR EACH 420A KTU INSTAllED
WHEN THE INTERCOM IS EQUI PPED WITH THE "TOUCH-TONE"
ADAPTER (426A AND 427B, SERIES 4 OR C KTUSl.
5. THE CABLE RUN FROM THE APPARATUS MOUNTI NG TO THE
CONNECTING BLOCK SHOULD BE AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE,
PREFERABl Y lESS THAN 10FT.
OPTION STRAPPING ON 420A KTU OPTION BlK
OPTION
~
~
~
~
R
AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
FEATURE
AC BUZZER,IBV+ OR 10V+
DC BUZZER 24V DC
RINGER,I05V ± STEADY
INTERRUPTED
INTERRUPTED WITH
STATION BUSY
STRAP TERMINALS
I TO 4,7 TO 8
2T04,7T08
Fig. 18-Nondedicated lead Connections for 420A KTU (long line Circuit) in 698 or 690 Apparatus Mounting
Page 25
SECTION 518-215-420
6684-25
CONN BlK
ROW ASS I GNMENT
(NOTES I AND 2)
690
CONN A
(BlK I)
lEFT-HAND BlK
RIGHT-HAND BlK
CONN 8
(BlK 2)
69B
TO CO OR [
PBX LI NE
TO STATION [
RINGER
LINE I
(NOTE 3)
TO DIODE MATRIX
T
R
B-BI
R-RI
RI
)c
STRAP
(NOTE 4)
LINE
2
I
STRAP
(NOTE 5)
TO CO OR [
PBX LI NE
TO DIODE MATRIX
TO STATION [
RINGER
T
LINE 3
TO DIODE MATRIX
TO STATION [
RINGER
RIGHT OR lEFT-HAND BlK
CONN B
I
15
2
16
SHOWN fOR
REFERENCE ONLY
14
3
17
12
4
18
13
8
22
10
24
6
20
5
19
9
23
16
13
20
R
~
21
RI
---;s
22
B-BI
~
35
R-R I
----u"---
36
~
23
~
~
~
~
27
T
TO CO OR [
PBX LI NE
>
CONN A
R
RI
B-81
R-RI
C
26
24
25
~
30
37
39
L--
NOTES:
I. COLUMN ASS IGNMENT FOR lEFT-HAND BlK IS COLUMN A-E AND FOR
RIGHT-HAND BlK IS COLUMN F-B. SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM COVERING
66B4-25 CONN BlK IN FIG. 4 OR 5.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATED lEADS PER FIG. 7.
3. ONLY ONE STATION RINGER CAN BE TRANSFERRED WHEN THE 421A
KTU IS USED WITH A 69B APP MTG.
4. STRAP MUST BE ADDEO REGARDLESS OF APP MTG. USED.
5. ADD STRAPS ACCORDI NG TO NUMBER OF LI MES SERVED.
TO 421A KTU
FEATURE
FOR GENERAL PURPOSE USE
Fig. 19-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 421A KTU (Power Failure Transfer Circuit) in 698 or 690 Apparatus
Mounting
Page 26
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-420
6664- 25 CONN 8lK
lfffffD
ROW ASSIGNMENT
(NOTES I AND 2)
690
ONLY
TO 427B
SERIES 4 OR ----'-.~------___1
427C KTU
(NOTES 7 AND 8)
37
35
36
12
39
NOTE 61
I~
CONNECT lEADS WITH. FOR DESIRED STATION CODE (NOTE 5)
I
2
4
3
5
6
7
8
9
o
XI X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 XO
~B
L,6
GRD
"----
S
10
RH
16
23
5
16
YI
YI
TO
407-
TO SIGNAL
KEY (NOTE 3)
Y2
Y2
\
TYPE
OR
Y3
Y3
/
424-
Y4
Y4
TYPE
KTU
Y5
Y5
TO
421 A
KTU
(NOTE 4)
~~ 2522
lT2 *
LT2*
CG
CG
~f----<
~~ 27
~f----<
26
NOTES:
I. COLUMN ASSIGNMENT FOR lEFT-HAND BlK IS COLUMN
A-E AND FOR RIGHT-HAND BlK IS COLUMN F-B. SEE
BLOCK DIAGRAM COVERING 6684-25 CONN BlK IN FIG. 5.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATED lEADS PER FIG. 7.
3. PROVIDE SEPARATE SIGNAL KEY FOR EACH STATION
CODE TO BE SELECTED.
4. PROVIDE A SEPARATE 421A KTU FOR EACH STATION
CODE TO 8E SELECTED.
S. SELECT CODE AND CONNECT lEADS FOR SELECTED CODE
AS SHOWN IN VERTICAL COLUMN.
6. A 400J DIODE (PROCURE lOCAllY) MUST BE CONNECTED
AS SHOWN BELOW WHEN PROVIDING DSS IN A DIAL
EQU I PPED SELECTOR ONLY ARRANGEMENT.
6~7B'C[~826 ~
~~~C ~830?-l
7.
pIO
SERIES 4
OR 427C
KTU
CONN
---~ 821
*
g
I F MORE THAN ONE 421 A KTU I S USED FOR DSS. CONNECT AS SHOWN:
PIO 4278
8.
RH) 23 >--421A KTU
®
®
8
'Ir-,®
plo
pIO 1ST
421 ~ KTU
CONN
®~
37
H--7
PIO 2ND
421 A KTU
g/O
CON,N
26
>--<
/O
T
37
~
P 10 lAST
421 A KTU
CONN
26
>--<
37
T
~
26
PIO
plO 4078
CONN
OR 424A
KTU
~
821
~---
WITH "TOUCH-TONE",
WI THOUT "TOUCH- TONE".
USE WITH 424A, 4248, 424C KTU.
Fig. 20-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 421A KTU (Wired for OSS Feature) in 690 Apparatus Mounting
Page 27
SECTION 518-215-420
TO OTHER
RINGER DR
421A KTU
T(STA)
3 R(STA)
B-B1
R-R1
BRIDGED
RINGER
:T:~ET (T
9
,- ___________ _
r=:--II}---( 14
12
~-I~--L1-r---< 13
,--,...,;;...;--""", 26
--------- ______ 1
COItIlN
27
AUDIBLE
RINGER
~m
TO
421A
KTU
(NOTES
AND 2)
R-R1
I'IATRIX BLOCK
(NOTE 4)
------------------------------
NOTES:
1. THE 421A KTU IS DESIGNED FOR USE
IN A 4D-PIN CONNECTOR. IF THE
421A KTU IS USED IN A 20-PIN
CONNECTOR. USE RELAY CONTACTS
ASSOCIATED WITH CONNECTOR PINS
INTERCDII
9-13 ~2-14.
2. OPTION W REQUIRED WHEN 421A KTU IS
~~ZER
USED FTO SECTION
UIlIBLE SIGNAL
SUPPRESSION.
RINGER)
3. REFER
PERTAINING
TO
_______________________
_
TELEPHONE SET USED.
4. 40D TYPE KTU WIRED FOR CIlIf'IDN
AUDIBLE WITH DIODE I'IATRIX
OPTION
TELEPHONE SET EfW
STATION BUSY OPTION
LS
BL
(NOTE 3)
Fig. 21-.Nondedicated Lead Connections for 421 A KTU (Used as Audible Signal Suppressor) in 690 Apparatus
Mounting.
Page 28
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-420
66B4-25
66B4-25
CONN BlK
CONN BlK
I~
[~
ROW ASS I GNMENT
FOR TENS (TRANSFER DIGITI
422B KTU
(NOTES I 2 AND 3)
LEFT -HAND BLK
CONN A
(BlK I)
690
R I GHT- HAND BLK
~
CONN B
SHOWN FOR
(BlK 2)
REFERENCE ONLY
ROW ASS I GNMENT
FOR UNITS
4228 KTU
(NOTES I 2 AND 3)
..
CONN A
(BlK I)
690
CONN B
(BlK 2)
..
I-- lEFT-HAND BlK
-
R I GHT-HAHD BLK
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
r---
TO 407B(MD) •
407C OR
424A (140),
424B(MO)
OR 424C KTU
Y2
~
Y4
f--
["
Y5
22
~
II
27
Bl (I)
~
21
Bl (2)
f--
Bl (3)
f--
Bl (4)
Bl
(5)
Bl
TO 424A(MD).
424B(MO) OR
424C KTU
(i)
28
16
23
~
19
25
26
~
20
I--14
(a)
Bl (9)
Bl (0)
:
YI
r---
Y2
f--
[.
f--
B
15
Y4
TO
4228
KTU
TO
ASSOCI AT EO
TEL SET
21
25
32
23
30
Tz
I---
"Bl w LEAD
(HOTE 4)
29
31
34
--.:.IT:..:I~---....jsa2170
TO 407B(MDI,
407C KTU
JI
1
•
I TO
35
424A(MD).
424B(MD) OR
424C KTU
.
1------
(NOTE 5)
~
2
Bl (XI)
f--
Bl (X2)
f--
Bl (X3)
f--;a
21
28
16
BL (X4)
f--
Bl (X5)
f--
BL (X6)
I--
Bl (X7)
~
23
25
19
26
20
13
14
BL (XB)
I--
BL (X9 )
f--
BL (XO)
I-~
21
32
23
TO
422B
KTU
30
i!9
22
34
lT2
-=------101-----...(
J2
( 14
27
f--
TO 407B(MD)
407C OR
424A (140).
424B(MO)
OR 424C KTU
22
20
BR
Bl (7)
Bl
I
f--
BR
TO
ASSOC I ATED
TEL SET
"Bl· LEAD
(NOTE 4)
15
I---
TO
422B
KTU
35
26
33
24
31
10
14
NOTES,
I. COLUMN ASSIGNMENT FOR lEFT-HAND BlK IS COLUMN A-E AND FOR RIGHT-HAND BlK
COLUMN IS F-B. SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM COVERING 66B4-25 CONN BlK IN FIG. 5.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATED lEADS PER FIG. 7.
3. PROVIDE A SEPARATE 422B KTU FOR THE UNITS GROUP (1-0, SINGLE DIGIT NOS.)
AND FOR THE TENS GROUP (XI-XO. TWO DIGIT NOS.)
4. PROVIDE AND INSTAll A DIODE IN THE "A" lEAD OF THE ASSOCIATED TEL SETS AS
SHOWN IN TEL SET CONNECTION SECTION. FOR CONNECTION, USE THE STATION BUSY
OPT I ON AS SHOWN I N THE CONNECT I ON SECT ION OF THE TYPE SET USEO.
5. CONNECT "JI" lEAD OF UNITS 422B KTU WHEN A 407B KTU IS PROVIDED FOR THE DIAL
INTERCOM CIRCUIT. WHEN A 424(140), 424B(MD). vR 424C KTU IS PROVIDED. STRAP
THE "J I" lEAD OF 422B KTU TO "J2" lEAD OF TENS 422B KTU.
6. 423A KTU ASSOCIATED WITH SAME DIAL INTERCOM AS THE 422B KTUS.
OPTION STRAPPING ON 422B KTU OPTION BlK
OPT! ON
FEATURE
R*
STATION
BUSY TONE
STRAP
TERM I NAlS
S TO B
~
* -INSTALL 441J OR EQUIVALENT DIODE
(PROCURE LOCALLY) AS SHOWN.
Fig. 22-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 422B KTU (Station Busy Selector Circuit) in 69D Apparatus
Mounting
Page 29
SECTION 518-215-420
66&1-25 CONN BlK
Lff££J
R(1J ASS I GNMENT
(NOTES I AND 2)
690
CONN A
(BlK I)
CONN B
(BlK 2)
69B
RIGHT OR
lEFT _HAND BlK
CONN A
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ :j
SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY
~l;KE-
TO 407B(MD)'[
407C OR
BYI
424A(MD),
SS
424B(MD)
OR 424C KTU
J
,t~1t~~~~~
15
16
18
_ ___________________
19
TO 422B KTU FOR UN I TS Bl
(NOTE 3) [
Bl
TO 422B KTU FOR TENS - - - - - - - - - - - - '
22
14
13
16
TO 423 A KTU
(NOTE 5)
SPARE
INTERRUPTER
CONTACTS
-I
B
(NOTE 4)
-I
B
ATI
®>-
(NOTE 7)
BTl
®
:-'>-
II
25
69B
R(1J 13
- --
19
27
690
R(1J 12
10V± 18V± ,-24V
TO 407B(MD), 407C OR
424A(MD), 424B(MD)
OR 424C KTU
RN(NOTE 6)
T
,-
NOTES:
I. COLUMN ASSIGNMENT FOR lEFT-HAND BlK IS COLUMN A-E
AND FOR RIGHT-HAND BlK IS COLUMN F_B. SEE BLOCK
01 AGRAM COVER I NG 66&1-25 CONN BlK IN FIG. 4 OR 5.
2. TERMI NATE DEDI CArED lEADS PER FIG. 7.
3. 422B KTUS ASSOCIATED WITH THE SAME DIAL INTERCOM
AS THE 423A KTU.
4. CONNECT TO B GRD AS SH(1JN,
5. TO ADJUST DIAL TONE VOLUME ON 423A KTU.
TURN KNURLED WHEEL (RII ON 423A) TO FUll
CLOCKWISE POSITION FOR MINIMUM DIAL TONE VOLUME
AND TO FUll COUNTERCLOCKWISE POSITION FOR MAXIMUM
DIAL TONE VOLUME.
10
24
3
17
6.
12
IF INTERRUPTED 105V± IS USED FOR DIAL INTERCOM,
DO NOT CONNECT THIS lEAD. IF BUZZERS ARE USED
FOR DIAL INTERCOM, AUDIBLE SIGNAL IS SUPPLIED
ON THIS lEAD VIA SPARE INTERRUPTER CONTACTS TO
PIN I OF 423A KTU ON 423A KTU OPTION BlK, STRAP
TERMINALS 6 TO 7 AND REMOVE
OPTION STRAP
BETWEEN TERM I NAlS 4 AND 6.
®
OPTION STRAPPING ON KTU OPTION BLOCK
OPTION
FEATURES
STRAP TERMINALS
ON 423A
T
DIAL TONE
I TO 2
R
STATION BUSY TONE
4 TO 6
S
AUDI BLE R INGBACK
NO STRAP
Fig. 23-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 423A KTU (Dial Busy and Audible Ringback Tone Circuit) in
69B or 69D Apparatus Mounting
Page 30
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-420
426A KTU
4278 (SERIES 4) OR C
ROW AND COLUMN ASS I GNMENT
(NOH I)
TO 690
APP MTG
6684-24
CONN 8lK
ROW AND COLUMN ASS I GNMENT
(NOTE I)
r----\
~
66B4-25
CONN BlK
~~
~~
8lK 2
(CONN B)
8lK I
(CONN A)
TO 690
APP MTG
6684-25
CONN 8lK
66B4-25
CONN BlK
8lK I
(CONN A)
BlK 2
(CONN B)
A35
HI
A35
A39
II
A39
TO 407B(MO), [Y4
407C OR
~28A-E A36
424A(MO).
-"Y.::.5_ _ _. 29A-E
A37
4248(MO),
OR 424C KTU
lB
827
828
HB
~B12
TO 407B(MO)'[ T
407C OR
R
424A(IID),
424B(MO),
OR 424C KTU
2 TG
4F-B
~TE_
2)
YI
BI3
Y2
~
~ B39
I
TO 407B (MO).
407C OR
4244(MO),
424B(MO ).
OR 424C KTU
Y3
RSI
CG
TTG(NOTE 2)
-RH
RH
B28
18F-B
825
17F-B
B24
15F-B
B22
32F-8
838
14F-B
821
30F-8
B39
19F-B
826
~
(SEE NOTE 3)
NOTES:
I. TERMINATE DEDICATED lEADS FOR THE 690 APP MTG PER FIG. 7.
2. WHEN ADDING THE 426A AND 4278 (SERIES 4) OR C KTUS TO AN EXISTING SYSTEM EQUIPPED
WITH A 420A KTU,A DIODE MUST BE INSTAllED IN THE TTG lEAD CONNECTING
TO THE 420A KTU,SEE CONNECTING FIGURE COVERING 420A KTU.
3. A 400J DIODE (PROCURE LOCALLY) MUST BE CONNECTED AS SHOWN WHEN PROVIDING
DIAL TONE IN A "TOUCH-TONE" EQUIPPED SELECTOR-ONLY ARRANGEMENT.
Fig. 24-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 426A and 4278 (MO) Series 4 or 427C KTUs (TOUCH-TONE
Adapter Circuit) in 690 Apparatus Mounting
Page 31
SECTION 518-215-420
6684-25
CONN BlK
~
ROIl ASSIGNMENT
(NOTES 1.2.3. AND
CONN A
(BlK I)
690
CONN B
(BlK 2)
ro
M"'~ '"OC OC _ [
T (I)
(I)
T'iPE KTU ASS I GNED TO
EXCLUDED liNE (NOTE 4)
EXCLUSION
CIRCUIT I
TO "A" AND "AI" lEADS [
OF PICKUP KEY AT
CONTROL STATION
CA (I)
AI
[
"i
£T
(I)
ER (I)
lEADS OF PICKUP KEY
AT EXCLUDED STATION
EA (I)
AI
M"'~
EXCLUSION
CIRCUIT 2
TO "A" AND "Al n lEADS [
OF PICKUP KEY AT
CONTROL STATION
(2)
(2)
(2)
ET (2)
TO T,R,A, AND AI
lEADS OF PICKUP KEY
AT EXCLUDED STATION
[
ER (2)
EA
AI
TO CONTROL KEY
AT CONTROL STATION
(NOTE 6)
TO EXCLUSION
lAMP (NOTE 7)
[
[
SG
lG
EL
lErT-HAND
BlK
RIGHT-HAND
~ BlK
6§3
~
14
9
0
19
12
4
13
5
16
6
CA (2)
AI
.---
I)
TOT,R,AANDAI
ro KTU ASS",OC
TYPE
I GNED TO
EXCLUDED LI NE (NOTE 5)
4)
NOTES:
I. COLUMN ASSIGNMENT FOR lErT-HAND BlK IS
COLUMN A-E AND FOR RIGHT-HAND BlK IS
COLUMN F-B. SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM COVERING
THE 66B4-25 CONN BlK IN FIG. 5.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATED lEADS PER FIG. 7.
3. ASSOC I ATED lAMP lEADS FROM THE 400-TYPE
KTU TERMINATE DIRECTLY TO TEL SETS.
4. FOR AUTOMATIC EXCLUSION. REMOVE
B GRD FROM TERM 48A- E ON
CONNECTI NG BLOCK I.
5. T AND R LEAD rROM STATION SIDE or 400-TYPE
KTU ALSO TERM I NATES TO TEL SET or CONTROL
STATION.
nA" LEAD rROM STATION SIDE or
400- TYPE KTU MUST CONNECT THROUGH 428A KTU
BErORE CONNECTING TO TEL SET (CA(I) OR
CA(2) LEAD).
6. CONTROL KEY MAY BE A LOCKING OR NONLOCKING
TYPE.
7. LAMP INDICATING AN EXCLUSION CIRCUIT IS
ACTIVATED.
2)
13
20
14
21
15
22
~
TO
428A
KTU
23
27
35
28
36
29
37
6
~
~8
Fig. 25-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 428A KTU (Multiline Exclusion Circuit) in 69D Apparatus Mounting
Page 32
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-420
6664-25
CONN BlK
6664-25
CONN BlK
~
~
ROW ASS I GNMENT
(NOTES I AND 2)
CONii'B
690
fiELD
CONNECT IONS
SUPPLEMENTARY
HOLD DETECTOR
CIRCUIT I
[
L-_ _--L.:..(B_l_K_2...;).J
6~ !6~~~~~ES~~~ [ ~
TO PICKUP KEY
AT TEL SET
_':'PC"'-'-'-'-i
HOLD DETECTOR
CIRCUIT 2
A (2)
l
(NOTE 3)
TO PICKUP KEY
AT TEL SET
[A (2
l (2)
TO MESSAGE REG
PC
If PROVIDED
-""'-"~"-i
nST
CONN A
(BlK I)
690
ONLY
14
[A (I
l (I)
TO STATION SIDE [
Of 400-TYPE KTU
[
~~~~E~~~
(NOTES I AND 2)
I
lEfT OR
RIGHT-HAND
BlK
69B
(NOTE 3)
~~ ~~~e~~~DREG
SUPPLEMENTARY
ROW ASS I GNMENT
CONN A ...... lEfT-HAND BlK
(BlK I)
--:RI GHT-HAND BlK
fiELD
CONNECTI ONS
12
TO SUPP HOLD
KEY OR
13
21
19
!~A(MD)
20
OR B KTU
MODifiED REG
HOLD KEY
SHOWN fOR
REfERENCE ONLY
SP
r--<
~
19
L--"'--L-:"::"'.J
(NOTES 5 AND 6)
flST
16
12
TO
430A
KTU
35
22
TO
429A(MO)
OR B KTU
o
-+-r__
L-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
--'-fl~
fLi
f--.:..I...;I-l---=25:.......J
fl2
(NOTE 4)
690
ROW 12
0
19
690
ROW 13
430A KTU
429A (MD) OR B KTU
NOTES:
I. COLUMN ASSIGHMENT fOR lEfT-HAND BlK IS COLUMN A-E AND fOR RIGHT-HAND BlK IS COLUMN f-B. SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM COVERING
THE 6664-25 CONN BlK IN fiG. 4 OR 5.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATED lEADS PER fiG. 7.
3. T AND R lEADS fROM STATION SIDE Of 400-TYPE KTU TERMINATE DIRECTLY TO THE ASSIGNED PICKUP KEY AT TELEPHONE SET.
4. LIMITATIONS Of 430A KTU ARE AS fOllOWS:
(A) fLi OR fl2 CAN SERVE A MAXIMUM Of 50 lAMPS (5IA) EACH. DIVIDE lAMPS AS EVENLY AS POSSIBLE BETWEEN THE TWO lEADS.
(B) SP lEAD CAN CONNECT TO A MAXIMUM Of 20 STATIONS.
5. ANY TELEPHONE SET EQUIPPED WITH A HOLD KEY HAVING A SET Of TRANSfER CONTACTS AND SUffiCIENT CORD lEADS CAN INITIATE
I HOLD. REWIRE HOLD KEY ACCORDING TO CONNECTION SECTION Of TYPE SET USED.
6. WHEN USED WITH CONCENTRATOR SETS AND THE 657 KEY MODUlE, CONNECT AS fOllOWS:
TA
27
P/O
429B
KTU
SUPP
HOLD
KEY
PIO
400-TYPE
KTU
PB
HOLD
KEY
lG5
38~16
AI
2~1'
-24
p/O 430A KTU
Fig. 26-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 429A (MD) or 4298 KTU (Supplementary Hold Detector Circuit)
in 69D Apparatus Mounting and 430A KTU (Flutter Generator Circuit) in 698 or 69D Apparatus
Mounting
Page 33
SECTION 518-215-420
6684-25
CONN BlK
OPT I ON STRAPP' NG ON 448A KTU OPT I ON BLOCK
~
STRAP TERMINALS
OPTION
FEATURE
1ST
AUDIBLE
SIGNAlS
ROW ASSIGNMENT
(NOTES I AND 2)
RIGHT-HAND
BLk
2ND CKl
§ 3 TO 5§
INTERRUPTED RI ~G
T
STEADY RING
8 TO 6
3 TO 4
X
STEADY BUZZER
8 TO 10
3 TO I
LEFT-HAND
Blk
en
W
8 TO 7
§FACTORY PROVIDED
Norrs:
TO
[
LINE
449A "TU (NOTE 3)
TUftN KEY OR
TO 1ST
R All ..
R P' ..
COLUMN "-8. SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM COVERING
BPI *
~~N:i:
TO 1ST PRINCIPAL
I. COLUMN ASS I Ghtt£NT F'OR LEF'T-HAND BLK IS
COLUMN A-E AND FOR RIGHT-HAND BLK IS
B(ATI )*
THE 6664-25 CONN BlK IN riG. 5.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATED LEADS PER riG. 1.
3. If IMMEDIATE RINGER TRANSFER
IS REQU I RtD, CONNECT TO A TURN
KEY OR A 4494 KTO.
... MAKE SURE' THAT ROW 33 IS NOT CONNECTED
CO)
:~[1lIP!'~~~~~~~~~i~~§
~~
t
RC PI
AI
P
.. AI
•
TO THE I NTERRUPT£R OR USED FOR
ANY OTHER CONNECT ION.
RG t
PR INCI PAL
TEL SET
5. MULTI PLE RC LEADS
A(PI)
FROM BOTH CIRCUITS TO
SAM[ AUDIBLE SIGNAL
AT ATTENDANT STATION.
T PI
TO 448,\ KTU
1ST CIRCUIT
TO 1ST CO
OR PBX
* rOR
LINE RINGING
t rOR COMMON AUDIBLE RINGING
• CONNECT WHEN COMMON AUD I au:
IS USED AND RINGER IS NOT TO
8E CUT orr
lINE COT
A(ATI)
T(ATI )
R(ATI)
(NOTE 5)
J,.....,-s>-----.<
RC(ATI )t
L ATI
TO
5
7
&
9
20
lG
AI
ATTENDANT
STATION
L AT2
Re AT2 t
.......1L
R AT2
T AT2
I 1
A AT2
TO 2ND CO
OR PBX
LINE CICT
[
I
R(2)*
T 2
• 2
RC 2
l 2
*
t
TO 2ND
PRINCIPAl
TEL SET
TO 2ND PRINCIPAL
TURN KEY
OR
[
3
33
26
22
3'
38
33
i \::"(NOTE 4)
TO 448A kTU
RC PA2 •
l P2
RG
lG
AI
C 2
R P2
a AT2
R A1'2
~ 27
2ND CI ReUIT
RC(P2) t
449A "TO (NOTE 3)
16
31
'I
I
A(P2)
TP2
RP2
26
~I-----< 35
28
36
29
37
~
34
48
~
I.
*
*'
*
Fig. 27-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 448A KTU (Variable Delay Timer Circuit) in 69D Apparatus
Mounting
Page 34
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-420
6684-25 CONN BLK
ROW ASSIGNMENT (NOTES I AND 2)
CONN A . / LEfT-HAND
(BLK I)
BLK
690
CONN B
(BLK 2)
TO 448A KTU
{IF PROVIDED )
C (I)
V
RIGHT-HAND
BLK
~ 16
(NOT(3)~
AI
LG
L (PI
R * OR RC
B * OR RG
S PI
L I
T PI
R PI
A PI
L I
T I
R I
A I
RC t
TO 1ST
PRINCIPAL
TEL SET
TO 1ST CO
OR PBX
LINE CKT
q;::s
PI
PI
t
t
'fa~
r---JO
'--=--
L~r-<
I I
:
*~ ::-- r----n=tc.::~
c.....:..-
t
(NOTE 6)
(NOTi 4)
••
*
TO
TO 2ND CO
OR PBX
LINE CKT
*
"
TO 448A KTU
{IF PROVIDED )
C (2)
H
f--ji-~
6~
It fOR LINE RINGING
t FOR COMMON AUDIBLE RINGING
26
21
20
23
r-zs~ 32
1
(NOTE 5)
1'22
•
*_t
*to
: 28
r-¥---~
34
f-4!:i-~ r---< 38
tt.::=1
~f--<
P2
P2
19
0
~f--< 35
t
TO 2ND
PRINCIPAL
TEL SET
'i9
r-t4
f---j"s~
~
(NOTE 6)
L (2)
A (P2)
R P2
T P2
L 2
S P2
B * OR RG
R
OR RC
L P2
LG
AI
31
TO
449A
KTU
1ST
CIRCUIT
f-T-
*
I
30
25
24
39
15
+
r--w-~
*-y
A (ATI)
R ATI
I" I
L ATI
OR RC {A"
t
R
B* OR RG ATI t
AI
LG
R
OR RC {AT2 t
B * OR RG AT2 t
L AT2
T AT2
R AT2
A AT2
T 2
R 2
A 2
RC
ATTENDANT
STATION
I
r---s
NOTES:
I. COLUMN ASSIGNMENT FOR LEfT-HAND BLK IS
COLUMN A-E AND FOR RIGHT-HAND BLK IS
COLUMN F-B. SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM COVER I NG
THE 6684-25 CONN BLK IN fiG. 5.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATED LEADS PER fiG. 7.
3. PROVIDE STRAP ONLY IF CIRCUIT IS USED
WITH A 448A KTU. IF CIRCUIT IS USED WITH
A 448A KTU, NONE or THE RINGER CONNECT I ONS
SHOWN FOR THAT CIRCUIT ARE REQUIRED.
4. MULTIPLE THE RINGING LEADS FROM BOTH
CIRCUITS TO THE SAME AUDIBLE SIGNAL AT THE
ATTENDANT STAT ION.
5. MAKE SURE THAT ROW 33 IS NOT CONNECTED TO
THE I NTERRUPTER OR USED FOR ANY OTHER
CONNECTI ON.
6. FOR RINGING OPTIONS, CONNECT AS FOLLOWS:
fOR LINE RINGING - 1ST CIRCUIT - PROVIDE
A STRAP fROM ROW 15 TO ROW II AND A STRAP
FROM ROW 21 TO ROW 12 AND.!1Q..l!Q! CONNECT
THE RC LEAD.
FOR COMMON AUDIBLE RINGING - 1ST CIRCUIT PROV I DE A STRAP FROM ROW 9 TO ROW II AND
CONNECT THE RC LEAD FROM THE LINE CKT TO
ROW 12.
FOR LINE RINGING - 2ND CIRCUIT - PROVIDE
A STRAP FROM ROW 22 TO ROW 32 AND A STRAP
FROM ROW 28 TO ROW 31 AND DO NOT CONNECT
THE RC LEAD.
FOR COMMON AUDIBLE RINGING - 2ND CIRCUIT PROV I DE A STRAP FROM ROW 40 TO ROW 32 AND
CONNECT THE RC LEAD fROM THE LINE CKT TO
ROW 31.
33
TO
449A
KTU
2ND
CIRCUIT
r;-~ 14
t
t
1-1- ---< 12
~---<
r--z---<
r-w
.c..1 ----<.
t-"34
(NOTE 3)
29
13
9
37
~---< 27
Fig. 28-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 449A KTU (Immediate Transfer Control Circuit) in 69D Apparatus
Mounting
Page 35
SECTION 518-215-420
421A KTU
6684-25
CONN BlK
413A KTU
6684-25
CONN BlK
ROW ASS I GNMENT
(NOTES 1.2 AND 3)
CONN A
(BlK I)
690
CONN B
(BlK 2)
TO lAMP ASSOCIATED [
WITH DIAL
INTERCOM AT
SELECTED ST ATI ON
[
TO 425A (MD) OR
B KTU SELECTED
STATION "l" lEAD
STRAP
TO 425A (MD) OR B KTU 'l'
~D OF CODE ASS I GNED
TO PRESET CONFERENCE
Lei)
l(2)
l(3)
Lei)
l(2)
ROW ASS I GNMENT
(NOTES I AND 2)
lEFT-HAND
BlK
lEFT-HANO
CONN A ~ BlK
(BlK I)
RIGHT-HAND
BlK
690
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
3
12
4
13
27
35
69B
VRIGHT-H AND
BlK
RIGHT-HAND
OR
CONN A
LEFT-HAND
CONN B
BLK
CONN ~
(BLK 2)
I
9
20
16
TO
421A
KTU
TO SELECTED "II'
LEAD OF CODE
ASSIGNED TO
PRESET
CONFERENCE
23
TO PRESET
CONFERENCE CKT
OR DIODE MATRIX
OF BASIC DIAL
INTERCOM
(NOTE 5)
36
15
22
14
21
18
13
15
14
STRAP
14
2
l (,3)
TO 407B(MD) ,. 407C OR
424A(MD), 424B(MD) OR
424C KTU
~
]
TO
413A
KTU
16
3
17
12
TO DSS SIGNAL
~~s~~S~~:~~R~~CE ---.I
(NOTE 4)
CODE
NOTES:
I. COLUMN ASSIGNMENT FOR LEFT-HAND BLK IS COLUMN A-E AND FOR RIGHT-H~ND
BLK IS F-B. SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM COVERING 6684-25 CONN BLK IN FIG. 4 OR 5.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATED LEADS PER FIG. 7.
3. \/liEN THIS CIRCUIT IS PROVIDED. RING VOLTAGE (I05Vt) MUST BE USED TO
opERATE THE AUDIBLE SIGNALS CONNECTED TO THE DIAL INTERCOM LINE,
4. PROVIDE THE 413A KTU ONLY \/liEN ACCESS TO THE PRESET CONFERENCE IS BY
DIAL CODE OR BY DIAL CODE AND DSS. DO NOT PROVIDE THE 413A KTU WHEN
ACCESS TO THE PRESET CONFERENCE IS LI MIlED TO DSS.
5. THE "CA' LEAD MUST CONNECT TO THE 0 I ODE MATR I X \/IiETHER OR NOT THE
413A KTU IS PROVIDED.
OPTION STRAPPING ON 421A KTU OPTION BLK
OPTION
W
FEATURE
PRESET
CONFERENCE
STRAP
TERMINALS
I TO 2,
7 TO 8
Fig. 29-Nondedicated Lead Connections for Preset Conference Circuit of a Deluxe Dial Intercom Line (421A
KTU in 69D Apparatus Mounting and a 413A KTU in a 698 or 69D Apparatus Mounting)
Page 36
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-420
66B4-25
CONN BlK
ROil ASS I GNMENT
(NOTES I AND 2)
lEFT-HAND BlK
CONN A
690
(BlK I)
RIGHT-HAND BlK
lEFT OR RIGHT-HAND BlK
F I (LD CONNECTI ONS
TO SIGNAL
KEY
(NOTE 4)
TO
._SG
20
*"
( B OR BI
~~~~~~E
TO
(~S~====================~::::~~t=~==~19t=~------------~
~!~~~X
R OR RI
II
RG '--- \
,.
@;])
•~
23
10
24
OPTION STRAPPING ON 461A KTU OPTION BlK
OPTION
FEATURES
II
*
STRAP TO B GRD (DEDICATED WIRING)
APPARATUS MOUNT I NG
TO 461A KTU
25
('~R~I
;;;::_-_...J_t_@_S'_N___..Jl@
SAtRe)
_
NOTES:
I. COLUMN ASS I GNMENT FOR lEFT-HAND BlK
IS COLUMN A-E AND FOR RIGHT-HAND
BlK IS COLUMN F-B. SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM
COVERING 66B4-25 CONN BlK IN FIG.
4 OR 5.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATED lEADS PER FIG. 7.
3. PVT LINE CKT AT DISTANT END MAY BE A
414A KTU.419A KTU,204A KTU, OR ANY
OTHER TYPE PVT LINE UNIT REQUIRING
RINGING VOLTAGE FOR THE RINGUP
CIRCUIT AND FURNISHING RINGING
VOLTAGE FROM THE SIGNALING CKT.
4. SIGNAL KEY MAY BE A CONVERTED PICKUP
KEY OR ANY EXTERNAL NONlOCKING KEY.
5. FOR SATISFACTORY AUDIBLE RINGBACK TONE, THE
RINGING SUPPLY MUST CONTAIN AN AUDIBLE
COMPONENT.
16
I---
~
S
I---
AUD I BlE
SIGNALS
R
UNDER
CONTROL OF
TI ME-OUT
CIRCUIT
(B RELAY)
UNDER
CONTROL OF
R RELAY
f----N
~
INTERRUPTED RING
STEADY RI NG
COMMON IIITH DIODE
MATR I X CONTROL
STRAP
TERM I NAlS
7 TO 8
6 TO 7
7 TO 8
STEADY RING
COMMON WITH DIODE
MATR I X CONTROL
4 TO 6
10 SECONDS
I TO 2
15 SECONDS
2 TO
WITHOUT
X OR Z
23 SECONDS
REMOVE
X OR Z
STRAPS
M
AUDIBLE RI NGBACK TONE (NOTE 5)
9 TO 10
~
TIME-OUT
3
OF
Fig. 30--Nondedicated Lead Connections for 461A KTU (Manual Signaling, Ringdown Private Line Circuit) in
698 or 690 Apparatus Mounting
Page 37
SECTION 518-215-420
6684-25 CONNECT! NG BLOCK
RO\I ASS I GNMENT (NOTES I AND 2)
LEFT-HAND BlK
CONN A
(BlK I)
"B" BAT
47
"8" GRO
48
CONN B
(BlK 2)
(
RIGHT-HAND BlK
J
SEt
NOTE 3
6
'-_6_9_B_-'-_ _C_0_N_N_A_ _--'-_ _ _C_ON_N_B_--'rRIGHT OR lEfT-HAND BlK
nB" BAT
43
"e"
GRD
6, 20, 44
43
6, 20, 44
17l
15J
TO
467A
KTU
NOTES,
I. COLUMN ASSIGNMENT FOR lEfT-HAND BlK IS COLUMN A-E AND rOR
RIGHT-HAND BlK IS COLUMN roB. SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM COVERING
66B4-25 CONN BlK IN FIG. 4 AND 5.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATED lEADS PER FIG. 7.
3. KTU MAY BE PLUGGED INTO EITHER CONNECTOR. BUT "B" BAT MAY BE
PICKED UP ON RO\I 47 or BLK I ONLY.
Fig. 31-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 467A KTU (Voltage Monitor Circuit) in 698 or 69D Apparatus
Mounting
Page 38
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-420
66B4-25 CONNECT I NG BLOCK
~
/
CONN A
690
LEFT-HAND BLK
I
RIGHT-HAND BLK
CONN B
,------
~--~----~.------~~
~'q
.-JI
STRAP TO BE
PROVIDED IN FIELD -
;~~
37
~~IO=:l--_-+------«J
4000
KTU
4690
KTU
RIGHT OR LEFT-HAND BLK
69B
CONN A
CONN B
,
______
~~------~----~~
~=±3=============r==~ 4~~
~
33
4000
KTU
STRAP TO BE
PROV IDEO IN FIELD _______
24
4690
KTU
22
NOTES,
I. COLUMN ASSIGNMENT FOR LEFT-HAND BLK IS COLUMN A-E AND FOR
RIGHT-HAND BLK IS COLUMN F-B. SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM COVERING
66B4-25 CONN BLK IN FIG. 4 AND 5.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATED LEAD PER FIG. 7.
3. KTU MAY BE PLUGGED INTO EITHER CONNECTOR BUT ±IOV MAY BE
PICKED UP ON ROW 37 OF BLK I ONLY.
Fig. 32-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 469A KTU (Lamp Extender Circuit) in 698 or 69D Apparatus
Mounting
Page 39
SECTION 518-215-420
66 64-25
CONN BLK
ABCDEf
0--0---0---0--<
ROW ASS I GNMENT
(SEE NOTE)
690
CONN A
(BLK I)
CONN B
(BLK 2)
TO RC
LEAD Of
400-TYPE
KTU
CONT
BREAK
TO
EXTERNAL
SIGNAL
TO SIGNAL
POWER
SUPPLY
I
COM
®~®
,
MAKE
~;~J[------------------~-=~----~
(B) GRD
TO RC
LEAD Of
400-TYPE
KTU
;~ER
RIGHT-HAND BLK
(o-R)
( 21
14
18
17
16
13
15
CONT
20
BREAK
TO SIGNAL
POWER
SUPPLY
/"
LEfT-HAND BLK
(BR-R)
(R-BR)
(G-R)
,
-24' (B) BAT
TO
EXTERNAL
SIGNAL
/"
r
COM
®l ®
,
MAKE
23
-24 (B) BAT
[
SUPPL Y __________________l!(BCJ)~G:::!R!.!:D:..._____l
®
®
24
22
::~::
(S-R)
(O-BK I
(BK-O)
(BL-BK)
19
21
25
24
23
TO
470A KTU
fiRST
CIRCUIT
:::
<27
31
30
29
TO
470A KTU
SECOND
CIRCUIT
:::
fOR SIGNALING DEVICES REQUIRING A CONTACT CLOSURE
fOR
SIG.~ALING DEVICES REQUIRING A CONTACT OPENING
NOTE:
COLUMN ASSIGNMENT fOR LEfT-HAND BLK IS COLUMN A-E AND fOR RIGHT-HAND
BLK IS B-f. SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM COVERING 6664-25 CONN BLK IN fiG. 4 OR 5
Fig. 33-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 470A KTU (External Signaling Circuit) in 69D Apparatus Mounting
Page 40
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-420
6884-25
COllI BlK
~
DG
C D
~
a
.
E~
471A
KTU
14
9
12
13
1S
~ ~ ---<
~~ f
RESTRICTED
TElEPIII£
SET
~
A
~
(IIITE)
I--
l-
IllRESTRICTED
TElEPIII£
SET
~5 H.7 ~
1......1....-
TO
C.O.
T
R
A
A1
lG
l
C
~r-~fI-I--
R6
RC
ffff-
4DD-TYPE
KTU
14
9
12
13
1S
I--
f0ol--
B. ALTERNATE WIRING _ N T
Fig. 34-.Nondedicated Lead Connections for 471A KTU (Battery Reversal Toll Restriction Circuit)
in 69B or 69D Apparatus Mounting,
Page 41
SECTION 518-215-420
BBB4-25
MITE:
TERIIINALB DF IIlUNTIMl
ARRANGEI'IEIIT CONTAINIMl
4DO-TYPE LINE CIRCUIT
CONN BlK
lEFT HAND BlK
RIGHT HAMI BlK
RIGHT DR
......or+-IOiiiiM+.."""...,.(" lEFT-HAMI
BlK
690 APP. PlTG
( T (CD)
R (CD)
A (U)
---'
...-1 -15
~
-~ If"
""*"
.=:~
~
UNRESTRICTED
TElEPIIlNE
'-SET
-
CONN. A
~41
12
13
TD
16
KTU
479A
1
(MITE)
-,...-
~
14
L---r--
T
R
RESTRICTED
TElEPIIlNE
SET
A
A1
lG
l
RG
RC
...........
---
12
13
18
TD
400-TYPE
KTU
-
'-'--
Fig. 35-.Nondedicoted Lead Connections for 479A KTU (Rotary Dial Toll Restriction Circuit) in 698 or 69D
Apparatus Mounting).
Page 42
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-420
66B4-25 CONN BlK
RIGHT-HAND BlK
ROW AND COLUMN
BlK 2
TO 69G APP MTG
-----~lfff8dJ
Z
WI THOUT
N
WITH
"TOUCH-TONE II
DIAL STATION
~
A BAT.
_A:....:G:::R.::D_ _ _ _ __I~
M
RINGER
K
DC BUZZER
OR BEll
J
AC BUZZER
OR BEll
X
INTERRUPTED
~
BBAT.
TO POWER SUPPLY
OPTIONS
..,;B:!.-::G::;RD~_ _ _ __I~
0
10Vi
TYPE
AUD IBlE
SIGNALS
L...,;l~G!.--_ _ _ _ __I~
RN
TO I NTERRUPT[R
-24 VDC
TO POWER
[
SUPPLY rOR
AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
105V'
!®
®;1'"~
0
®
K
18V',IOV±
~
RG
~
NOTE:
A COMMON RINGER MAY NOT BE
USED WITH THE R2 LEAD IN
THE 407B (MOl KTU. A COMMON
RINGER MAY BE USED ON R2
or 407C KTU.
~
~
TO 4278,
SERIES 4
OR C KTU
~
..,;C:.:G'--_ _®"'N::.....
~
Fig. 36-.Basic Dial Intercom, Strapping and Power Supply Connections for 407B (MD) or 407C KTU.
Page 43
SECTION 518-215-420
6684-25 CONN BlK
lEFT-HAND BlK
ROW AND COLUMN
BlK I
APP MTG
4A
lOA
12A
14A
16A
18A
20A
22A
24A
BlK 2
'----lB±±BJ
L££9l±]1----'..J1
8A
66B4-25 CONN BlK
RIGHT-HAND BlK
ROW AND COLUMN
TO 69G
LI
R(I)
~
~
R(2)
R(3)
R(4)
R(5)
OPTIONS
Z
WITHOUT
N
WITH
M
RINGER
K
DC BUZZER
OR BEll
J
AC BUZZER
OR BEll
X
INTERRUPTED
TO (SEE NOTE)
R(6)
R(7)
"TOUCH-TONE'
DIAL STATION
TYPE
AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
R(8)
R(9)
R(O)
~
A BAT.
A GRD
-=-=~---~~
8 BAT.
TO
POWER
SUPPLY
~
8 GRD
...::....::::.:::...------~
10Vi
Q5Q
lG
...::.:=--------~
l
TO I NTERRUPTER
TO POWER
SUPPLY FOR
AUDIBLE
::4 VDe
I05Vi
18Vi IOV+
•
-
~l ~
NOTE:
I. ANY SELECTED R lEAD IR(I )-R(O»)
MAY BE ASSIGNED AS THE INITIAL
DIGIT OF A 2-DIGIT CODE. THE R
lEAD SO ASSIGNED MAY NOT BE
USED FOR A STATION CODE.
2. R2 LEAD OF 424A (MD) AND 4248
(MD) AND 4248 (MD) MAY NOT BE
USED WITH COMMON RINGER. THE
424C KTU M8r BE USED WITH
A COMMON RINGER.
Jfl~
@ 0
-
.B!!!G=---_ _ _ _ _-Ir-::::-l
SIGNALS
~
[
~R~SI'___®::::::N:.I ~
TO 4278,
SERIES 4
OR C KTU
l~
.:C:::G=---_.....:®:::N_.
®
~
Fig. 37-Basic Dial Intercom, Strapping and Power Supply Connections for 424A MD, 424B (MOl, or 424C
KTU
Page 44
ROW AND COLUMN ASSIGNMENTS rOR STATIONS
424 TYPE KTU
35E
3S0
35C
3S8
39r
39E
390
39C
39B
43r
43E
430
43C
43B
47r
47E
470
36E
360
36C
368
40r
.oE
400
40C
40B
44r
44E
440
44C
44B
4¥
48E
480
48C
41B
45r
45E
450
45C
4SB
49r
49E
490
49C
42B
46r
46E
460
46C
468
50r
SOE
SOD
SOC
37E
370
37C
378
41r
41E
410
41C
38E
380
38C
388
42r
42E
420
42C
47C
::: ~
49B
SOB
6664-25
COHN BlK
BlK 2
(NOTE I)
143A~IJ ~=-~K
!~O [-;-ff3Al f7Al
~EJ EJ
44A
5";
BlK I
INSET
TOP
FRONT END
OF KTU
TERM I NAl
END OF
KTU
NOTES,
I. WHEN MAK I NG STAT ION CONNECT IONS,
RUN STRAPS (T ,R,lG,L) BETWEEN CONN
BLKS I AND 2 AS SHOWN I N INSET.
2. RESISTOR R4 CAN BE ADJUSTED TO
PROV I DE A TIM I NG CYCLE FOR THE
RELEASE OF RELAY B FROM O.S SEC TO
2.S SEC. A TIMING CYCLE OF 1.5 SEC
IS PRO V I DED BY THE FACTORY. TURN
KNURLED WHEEL TO FULL CCW POSITION
FOR O.S SEC TIMEOUT AND TO FULL CW
POSITION FOR 2.S SEC TIMEOUT.
TERM. ON
CONN
BLK I
TERM I NAlS ON CONN BlK
I A ~----~r---------------------~~ 3SA
2A
39A
SA
43A
6A
47A
DIAL INTERCOM
(USE CONT I NUOUS
METHOD OF
STRAPP I NG)
Fig. 38-Basic Dial Intercom, Station Connections
SECTION 518-215-420
TABLE C
BASIC DIAL INTERCOM CONNECTIONS
FROM 407-TYPE OR 424-TYPE KTU TO OPTIONAL KTUs
LEAD
DESIG
407OR
424TYPE
6684-25
CONN BLKS
407- OR 424-TYPE KTU
ROW AND COLUMN
ASSIGNMENT
BLK 1
OPTIONAL KTUS
"TOUCH-TONE"
420A
KTU'
426A
BLK2
•
•
427B.
SERIES4
OR427C
•
•
T
lA-E
R
2A-E
Yl
45A-E
•
•
Y2
46A-E
•
Y3
47A-E
•
•
•
•
LR, Y4
48A-E
Y5
49A-E
J
50A-E
•
•
•
•
RSI
10F-B
LT2t
13F-B
TTG
14F-B
RH
17F-B
•
•
CG
18F-B
•
•
B (l-XO)
R (l-XO)
As assigned
for station
connection
(See Fig. 36)
•
•
•
•
* Connect required leads per Fig_ 20.
t Connect only when 424-type KTU provided_
Page 46
421 A
KTU'
IDSSl
•
•
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-420
66B4-25 CONN BlK
RIGHT-HAND BlK
R OW AND COLUMN
BlK 2
TO 69G APP MTG
------~
Z
WI THOUT
N
WITH
M
RINGER
I2'3Fl
K
DC BUZZER
OR BEll
...:B~G~RO~_ _ _ _-I~
J
AC BUZZER
OR BEll
~
BE
A BAT.
21 F
_A~G~R.::O_ _ _ _ _ _ .
B BAT.
TO POWER SUPPLY
OPT r ONS
22F
~
10V±
"TOUCH-TONE"
X
L...:l",G~_ _ _ _ _-I~
I27rI
IF
TO POWER
;~~~~~/OR
SIGNALS
INTERRUPTED
WITH STATION
BUSY TONE
...:l:!G~*~_ _ _ _--I~
RN
TO 423A KTU
TYPE
AUO I BlE
SIGNALS
INTERRUPTED
R
TO I NTERRUPTER [
DIAL STATION
[
SS
fPl ®
18V±'10II±Q)~ ~
-24 VOC ®/ @
-.:,:10::.:5c:V.:±__---l
~
RG
NOTE:
A COMMON RINGER MAY NOT BE
USED WITH THE R2 LEAD ON
407B (MOl KTU. A COMMON
RINGER MAY BE USED WITH R2
LEAD ON 407C KTU.
* - PAIRED WITH IF lEAD TO
PREVENT NOISE CONDITION.
~
~
400J
PRO V I DE
lOCAllY
~
~
Fig. 39-Deluxe Dial Intercom, Strapping and Power Supply Connections for 4078 (MD) or 407C KTU
Page 47
SECTION 518-215-420
66B4-25 CONN BlK
lEn-HAND BlK
ROW AND COLUMN
66B4-25 CONN BlK
RIGHT-HAND BlK
ROW AND COLUMN
TO 69G
BlK I
APP MTG
BlK 2
~r----'---"
....I '-----1Lf±fffD
...
~
4A
8A
L-G:J
lOA
12A
14A
1---'-"-"-'- I--,T=-D...;(",S.:.EE:....:;N",OT.:.:E:..<)_ _
>----G:::J
OPT IONS
Z
WI THOUT
N
WITH
M
RINGER
K
DC BUZZER
OR BEll
tlTOUCH~TONE n
J
16A
~
18A
20A
L-G:J
22A
RIOI
24A
TYPE
AUD I BlE
SIGNALS
OR BELt..
X
INTERRUPTED
R
INTERRUPTED
WITH STATION
BUSY TONE
~
A BAT.
A GRD
....::.-=-"------~
B BAT.
TO
POWER
SUPPl Y
AC BUZZER
DIAL STATION
~
B GRD
--=.-="-------~
lG
~
IF
~
IOV±
l--'=-------~
TO INTERRUPTER [ -'l:.:G,,*'-_ _ _ _ _ _~
NOTES:
I. ANY SELECTED R lEAD IR(1 )-R(o)1
MAY BE ASSIGNED AS THE INITIAL
DIGIT OF A 2-DIGIT CODE.
THE R
lEAD SO ASS I GNED MAY NOT BE
USED FOR A STAT I ON CODE.
2. A COMMON RINGER MAY NOT BE USED
WITH R2 LEAD OF 424A (MDI AND
424B (MOl KTU'S. A COMMON RINGER
MAY BE USED WITH 424C KTU.
* - PAIRED WITH LF LEAD TO PREVENT
NOISE CONDIT/ON.
RN
~1®
TO 423A KTU
SS
18V±,IOVtQ) ::
TO POWER
-24 VDC
SUPPLY FOR
AUD I BlE
[
®
~
@
I 05V ±
--'-''-'-'--'--_ _....J
_R_G_ _ _ _ _ _---i~
SIGNALS
400J DIODE c § g 6 F
PRO V I DE
LOCALLY
TO 427B,
SERIES 4
OR C KTU
17F
RSI
@ _
r-::::-l
-----"'-... ~
[
--'C:..:.G_----=@==-.l
~
Fig. 40-Deluxe Dial Intercom, Strapping and Power Supply Connections for 424A (MDl, 4248 (MDl, or 424C
KTU
Page 48
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-420
TO 69G
APP MTG E/W 4078(MOI OR 407CI
BLK I
424A(MOl. 4
J4
8(T'
424~
1
~~
SA
6A
TO 69G APP MTG
r/w 425A {MOl OR 8 KTU
~n~
~~
LG
LG
LA
LA
SA
6A
SOA
SOA
LR,Y4
LR
IF
2F
3F
4F
SF
7F
9F
ISF
19F
FCI
rCI
Fe2
rC2
FC3
rC3
ALI
ALI
AL2
AL2
TC
TC
01
01
BR
BR
BYI
BYI
~WER
IF
2F
3F
4F
SF
7F
9F
ISf
19f
--IBB
[_B"-B...:;:"'::=---_ _ _ _
SUPPLY
_~LG=---_ _ _ _ _--I~
TO
(
STRAP WHEN I NTERRUPTER
424A(MOI.
424B(MOI
OR 424C
KTU PROV
LTI
ST
0
_;.;.MG=---_ _ _ _ _--I~
407B{M~1
24E .
STRAP WHEN
OR 407C KTU PROV
_.~
r-~LT~2~----Ir----~~-------~
Fig. 41-Deluxe Dial Intercom, Strapping and Power Supply Connections for 425A (MD) or 425B KTU
Page 49
-:
CI:I
CD
'"
o
424 TYPE KTU ROW AND COLUMN ASSIGNMENTS FOR STATIONS
407 TYPE KTU
r~
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ Bili ~ Bili ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
SET~::I BE ~ tffij ~ ~ ~ ~ Bffi ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 8lli 8lli 8lli ~ Bffi
R
TO
TEL
36r
36E
360
36C
368
40r
40E
400
40C
40B
44F
44E
440
44C
44B
48F
48E
480
48C
SA
lOA
12A
14A
16A
leA
20A
22A
24A
26A
2BA
30A
32A
34A
36A
3BA
40A
42A
!~D[~BB BE ~ ffiB ~ ~ ffiB ~ ffiE ~ ~ ~ ~ ffiE ffiB ~ ffiB ~ Bil
SIG
R
4A
BA
lOA
12A
14A
16A
18A
20A
22A
24A
26A
2BA
30A
32A
34A
36A
3BA
40A
42A
66&1-25
147B 1 CONN BLK
48B BLK 2 (NOTE I)
407B/424A
KTU
~ 66B4-25 CONN
BlK BlK I
44A 425A (MD)
OR B KTU
~
44A
6694-25
CONN BLK
BLK I
407B/424A
KTU
INSET
TOP
FRONT END
OF KTU
TERM I NAL
END OF
KTU
NOTES:
I. WHEN MAKING STATION CONNECTIONS, RUN
STRAPS (T ,R) BETWEEN CONN BlKS I AND 2
AS SHOWN I N INSET.
2. RES I STOR R4 CAN BE ADJUSTED TO PROY I DE
A TIMING CYCLE FOR THE RELEASE OF RELAY
A TIMING
B FROM 0.5 SEC TO 2.5 SEC.
CYCLE OF 1.5 SEC IS PROY IDEO BY THE
FACTORY. TURN KNURLED \/HEEL TO FULL
CCW POS IT I ON FOR 0.5 SEC TIMEOUT AND TO
FULL cw POSITON FOR 2.5 SEC TIMEOUT.
Fig. 42-Deluxe Dial Intercom, Station Connections
TERM. ON
CONN BLK
TERM ON
CONN BLK
35A
39A
PROY I DE WHEN FURN I SH I NG
DELUXE 0 I AL INTERCOM
AND 69G APP MTG IS
OED I CATED TO A 407B OR
424A KTU (USE
CONT I NUOUS METHOD OF
STRAPPING)
43A
47A
4BA
ISS 5, SECTION 518-215-420
TABLE D
DELUXE DIAL INTERCOM CONNECTIONS FROM 407·TYPE KTU TO ASSOCIATED AND OPTIONAL KTU.
LEAD
DESIG
407TYPE
ASSOCIATED KTUS
86114-26
TO PROVIDE
CONN BLKS
OELUXE OIAL INTERCOM
407- OR 424-TYPE KTU
ROW AND COLUMN
ASSIGNMENT
426AIMD)
423A
422B
OR426B
KTU
KTU
KTU
BLK2
BLKI
T
1A-E
R
2A-E
LA
6A-E
V1
45A·E
Y2
46A-E
Y3
47A·E
•
48A·E
Y5
49A·E
J
50A·E
1F-B
•
•
•
•
FC2
2F-B
FC3
3F-B
ALl
4F-B
•
AL2
5F-B
TC
7F-B
D1
9F-B
•
•
•
RS1
10F-B
TTG
14F-B
BR
15F-B
LK
16F·B
RH
17F-B
CG
18F-B
BY1
19F-B
SS
20F-B
B (1-0)
lOSS)
•
•
42BA
427B
SERIES 4
OR427C
PRESET CONFERENCE
421A
413A
IAI
MAT.
BLK
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
As assigned
for station
connection
(See Fig. 39)
*
42IA
KTU·
•
Y4
R (1-0)
"TOUCH-TONE"
420A
KTU
•
LR
FC1
OPTIONAL KTUS
•
•
•
•
•
•
Connect required leads per Fig. 20.
Page 51
SECTION 518-215-420
TABLE E
DELUXE DIAL INTERCOM CONNECTIONS FROM 424-TYPE KTU TO ASSOCIATED AND OPTIONAL KTUs
ASSOCIATED KTUS
DELUXE DIAL INTERCOM
88....25
LEAD
OESIO
424TYPE
CONNBLKS
407- OR 42+ TYPE KTU
ROW ANO COLUMN
424A(MO)
ASSIGNMENT
OR425B
KTU
BLK 1
OPTIONAL KTUS
"TOUCH·TONE"
422B
KTU
(UNITS)
42211
KTU
ITENS)
423A
KTU
420A
KTU
421A
KTU·
(OSS)
426A
SERIES.
BLK2
•
413A
1A1
MAT.
BLK
•
•
•
lA-E
R
2A-E
LA
6A·E
YI
45A·E
•
•
•
•
Y2
46A·E
•
•
•
Y3
47A·E
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
LR
Y4
48A-E
Y5
49A·E
J
50A·E
IF-B
FC2
2F·B
FC3
3F-B
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ALl
4F-B
AL2
5F·B
TC
7F·B
•
•
D1
9F-B
•
RSl
lOF-B
LTI
l2F·B
LT2
l3F·B
TI'G
14F-B
BR
15F·B
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
16F-B
RH
17F·B
•
CG
18F·B
•
BYl
19F·B
SS
20F·B
B(l-XO)
As assigned
R(l-XO)
connection
•
(See Fig. 39)
20.
•
•
•
•
•
•
for station
* Connect required leads per Fig.
•
•
LK
Poge 52
52 Pages
421A
OR427C
T
FCI
PRESET CONFERENCE
427B
•
•
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT & TCo Standard
SECTION
518-215-421
Issue 1, September 1976
SERVICE
1A2 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
626A MODULAR PANEL
1.
or
GENERAL
This section contains identification, installation,
connection, and maintenance information for
the 626A modular panel.
• 454B-3-path access circuit
1.02
• 440A
1.01
• 444A-Selector extender circuit
Whenever this section is reissued, the reason
for reissue will be listed in this paragraph.
or
1.03
This issue is based on CD- and SD-69658-01,
Issue 3. If this section is to be used with
equipment or apparatus reflecting a later issue of
the drawing, reference should be made to the CD
and SD to determine the extent of the change(s)
and the manner in which the section may be affected.
2.
DESCRIPTION
2.01
The 626A panel (Fig. 1) is designed for use
with the 1A2 Key Telephone System (KTS).
It provides a means for interconnecting a
button-per-path type dial intercom service. The
626A panel can accommodate intercom configurations
of 1, 2, or 3 paths with capacities of 19 or 37
stations. Rotary and/or TOUCH-TONE® dialing
can be provided. Lead terminations are provided
in a quick-connect field to facilitate connecting
optional features and for connecting to station
blocks of a 1A2 KTS cross-connect field.
2.02
The 626A panel measures 8-1/2 inches wide,
18-1/2 inches high, and 6 inches deep. It
is equipped with eight 914B connectors paired
vertically to accept four 8-inch key telephone units
(KTUs). The connector section is arranged to
mount, in order from left to right (on a dedicated
basis), the following KTUs (Fig. 2):
• 424B or C-19-code selector circuit
• 460B-2-path access circuit
• 478B-TOUCH-TONE adapter circuit
2.03
The 2- and 3-path access circuits provide dial
tone, selector seizure, and flashing lamps to
all stations during selector seizure (dialing and
ringing) and steady lamps to all stations while the
circuit is in the busy mode. If I-path intercom is
provided (option Y or N), steady lamp only is
supplied. The selector extender circuit is used with
the intercom selector to extend the dial code
capability of the intercom from 19 to 37 codes.
Audible signaling in the 2- and 3-path intercoms is
an interrupted signal, while the audible signal for
the I-path intercom is an uninterrupted single spurt
signal.
2.04
Power for the 626A panel is provided by
an external power source and is fed to the
panel by a plug-ended power cable. The power
cable is located at the top of the panel above the
KTU connectors. Fuses are provided in a fuse
block, located just below the power cable, for the
-24V talk, -24V signal, and the 10V ac interrupted
ringing sources (Fig. 2 and 3). Located below the
KTU connectors and above the terminal field are
seven lamps and six fuses. One lamp is connected
to the code selector (424B or C KTU) lamp lead
to indicate the status of the selector. The remaining
six lamps and six fuses are connected to the path
access circuit lamp leads on a 2-lamp/2-fuse per-path
basis (Fig. 3) .
NOTICE
Not for use or disclosure outside the
Ben System except under written agreement
Printed in U.S.A.
Page 1
SECTION S 18-21 5-421
TER MI NALS
( POWER UN IT INTER - CONNECT CABLE)
WITH L-461493 COVE R
FUSE BLOCK
NOTE :
NUMBERED FOR REFERENCE ONLY
CONNE
FUSE BLOCK
Fig . 1-626A panel
Page 2
ISS 1, SECTION 518-215-421
FUSE BLOCK
424B/424C 19 COOE
SELECTOR CI RCU IT
444A SELECTOR
EXTENOER CI RCU IT
(NOTE 2)
440A/47BB TOUCH-TONE
ADAPTER
460B/454B 2 OR 3 PATH
ACCESS CIRCUIT (NOTE I)
~~~~~~~- FUSE AND
LAMP BLOCK
626A PANEL
NOTES:
I. THE 460B KTU
THE 454B KTU
2. THE 444A KTU
424B OR 424C
IS A 2-PATH ACCESS CIRCUIT.
IS A 3-PATH ACCESS CIRCUIT.
CAN ONLY BE USED WITH THE
KTU.
Fig. 2-KTU Arrangement, 626A Panel
KS-14174, LB(BR(J,IN)
FUSE, 70A 1-1/3 A
SELECTOR
STATUS
LAMP
FUSE, 70H 3/4 A
FIRST INTERC~
PATH 10V
FIRST INTERCOM
LAMP FUSE,
PATH LAMP,
STAT I ON CODES
STATION CODES
.0-19
.0-1
o
o
SECOND INTERCOM
PATH 10V
SECOND INTERCOM
PATH LAMP,
STAT ION CODES
.0-1
THIRD INTERCOM
PATH 10V
Till RD INTERCOM
PATH LAMP,
STATION CODES
.0-1
o
FIRST I NTERC~
PATH 10V
LAMP FUSE,
STATION CODES
20-39 (70A,
1-1/3A)
FIRST INTERCOM
PATH LAMP,
STATION CODES
20-39
SECOND INTERCOM
PATH 10V
LAMP FUSE,
STAT I ON CODES
20-39 (70A,
1-1/3A)
SECOND INTERCOM
PATH LAMP,
STATI ON CODES
20-39
TH I RD INTERCOM
PATH 10V
LAMP FUSE,
STATION COOES
20-39 (70A,
1-1/3A)
TH I RD I NTERC~
PATH LAMP,
STATI ON CODES
20-39
Fig. 3-Fuse and Lamp Arrangement, 626A Panel
Page 3
SECTION 518-215-421
The lower section of the 626A panel has
two connecting blocks, light yellow in color,
that contain 66-type quick-connect terminals (Fig.
4). These blocks are 20 terminals high by 10
terminals wide. The upper 4 horizontal rows of
the connecting blocks contain power option and
function terminals to interconnect the various
intercom arrangements and optional features. The
lower 16 horizontal rows of the connecting blocks
provide the station cross-connect terminals for
station codes and for the first- and second-path
intercom stations. The third intercom path access
circuit common leads are brought out on rows 1
and2 of the second connecting block. Straps must
be run to a separate 66-type connecting block
(Fig. 5) for distribution to the third-path intercom
station.
2.05
recommended for intercom systems with large
lamp multiples.
ORDERING GUIDE
(a) Basic Panel
• Panel, Modular, 626A
(b) Replaceable Components
• Lamp, 51A
• Fuse, 70A (1-1/3 amp)
• Fuse, 70H (3/4 amp)
• Designation Pin (Indicator, Fuse)
The total :l::1OV lamp power required per
intercom path is approximately 1.6 amperes
(37 station lamps and 2 maintenance lamps). The
maximum :l::1OV power required is dependent on
the number of intercom paths and the number of
stations on each path. In a fully equipped 3-path
intercom, power required for the lamp steady mode
is 4.8 amperes. Lamp flash power requirements
do not exceed 1.6 amperes as the selector serves
only one path at a time. The 67D2 power unit is
2.06
KS-14174, L1-White
KS-14174, L8-Brown
(c) Associated Apparatus (Order Separately)
• Unit, Telephone, Key 424B or C (Dial Intercom
19-Code Selector)
(IT3)
(IR3)
012'456789
AoooooooooOA
~~~! O:H~~D~
A [INTERCOM PATH 3
(TO AUXILIARY
800000000008
Coo 0 0 0
000000000000
000000000000
TI 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TI
RIo 0> 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RI
Llo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LI
RIo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RI
(RCOOOOOOOOOORC
S A
TTIONCODES~9
RGo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 oRG
RCo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RC
RGo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RG
INTERC!»l PATH I [
T20 0
INTERC!»l PATH 2 [
INTERCOM PATH I [
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 T2
CODES 20-29
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
T20 0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 LZ
L20 0
TID 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
all
Tlo
00000000
Rio 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RI
Rio
Llo
RCo
RGo
120
R20
L20
0
0
0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RC
RGo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 oRG
T20 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 T2
R20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R2
L2ooooooooooL2
BLOCK I
0
0
0
0
0
0
INTERC!»l PATH I
J
STATION
CODES 10-19
0 T2 ]
R200 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 oR2
0
0
CONNECTING BLOCK)
TI. ]
L20 0
(RC 0
I NTERC!»l PATH 2 [
0
LlooooooooooLi
R20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R2
LlOOOOOOOOOOLI
STATION
Tlo
0
0 0 0 0
~
cooooooooooc
(
CODES ARE USED
INTERC!»l PATH 2
0 L2
Oll ]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 oRI
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LI
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RC
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RG
INTERCCM PATH I
J
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 012 ]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R2
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 L2
BLOCK
STATION
CODES '0-'9
INTERC!»l PATH 2
2
Fig. 4-lntercom Path and Station Code Terminations, 626A Panel
Page 4
ISS 1, SECTION 518-215-421
P
~
1
J
LK I~ ILJ
0
1
(A)
TTG IR3 IL3
0
?
A
IT3
r-
(B)
B
C
0
E
V
YZ
Y3
0
0
0
0
0
PIO
0
IR3
oj
o (C>
R3
o
(D)
BLOCK Z. 6ZOA PANEL
NOTE
)
-.......
V
,1
NOTES:
1. STATION LAMP LEADS
MUST BE DIVIDED
BETWEEN THE IL3
TERMINALS. DO NOT
CONNE CT AL L STATIONS
TO A SINGLE IL3
TERMINAL
Z. RING GROUND (RG) ALSO
SERVES AS LAMP GROUND
(LG) AND MUST BE
STRAPPED
'"
w
a:
I L3
I
T3
I
/
Y'
F
Ll
'"
~
a:
'"<
IT3
r -V
IR3
T3
'"
R3
'"....
'"
r-
III
L3
i IT3
T3
I
~
II>
·
·
::;
w
S
a:
w
..."
r - ../
IR3
'"g;
R3
~-
...'"
w
IL3
L3
IT3
IR3
-
IL3
'"
T3
·'""
R3
...w
:=
w
~
....
L3
PID
AUXILIARY CONN BLK (66-TYPE)
Fig. 5- Typical Arrangement for Connecting Stations to Third Intercom Path
Note: The 424A KTU is not recommended
for use in the 626A panel as it is not compatible
with the 444A KTU.
• Unit, Telephone, Key 454B (3-Path Access
Circuit)-order when 3-path intercom service
is provided
• Unit, Telephone, Key 440A
• Unit, Telephone, Key 460B (2-Path Access
Circuit)-order when 2-path intercom service
is provided
or
Unit, Telephone, Key 478B (TOUCH-TONE
Adapter Circuit)-order when TOUCH-TONE
service is provided
• Unit, Telephone, Key 444A (Selector Extender
Circuit)-extends the codes of the 424B or
C code selector to 37 codes
• Cord, P12D (Power Interconnect Cable)-order
when necessary to extend the panel power
cable
• Unit, Power, 79B2
• Cord, Power-order length required:
824013288 (P-40J328) (4 feet)
Page 5
SECTION 518-215-421
824013296 (P-40J329) (6 feet)
3.02
Refer to the following sections for information
on Key Telephone Systems:
824010995 (P-40J099) (12 feet)
• 518-010-101-Centralized Key Telephone
Installations
• Unit, Power (19-, 20-, 29-, or 30-Type)-order
as required for a separate power source if
interrupted power can be obtained from an
existing 584C panel or 232-type KTU
• 518-010-105-Grounding and Special Protection
Requirements
• Unit, Power, 67D2-order as required (see
3.06)
• 518-215-419-620A, 641A, and 642A Modular
Panels.
• Block, Connecting, 92A-order as required
to connect separate power unit to panel
• Unit, Telephone, Key 232C (Interrupter
Type Key Telephone Unit)-used with
separate power unit to supply interrupted
voltages to panel
• Block, Connecting, 66B4-25
Use care when transporting and unpacking
the modular panel and KTUs to prevent
damage to them.
3.03
Power for the 626A panel may be supplied
by a 79B1 or 79B2 power unit associated
with a 1A2 KTS. In the event the power cord of
the panel is too short to connect to the power
unit, a P12D cord can be used.
3.04
Warning: 110 volts may be present
on the 110V 30-Hz RN terminal of
the 626A panel when power is applied.
Install a C clip terminal insulator
over the HOV 30-Hz RN terminal.
or
• Block, Connecting, 66B3-50-order as required
for terminating common leads for third
intercom path
• Block, Connecting, 66Ml-50-order as required
for preset conference arrangement
• Diode, KS-21765, L1, or equivalent-order
as required for preset conference arrangement
• Insulator, Terminal, C Clip-order as required
• Cover, 151A
• Cover, 153A, End Cap
Where power cannot be supplied by a 79B1
or 79B2 power unit, power can be supplied
from a separate 19-, 20-, 29-, or 30-type power
unit. A 92A connecting block (Fig. 6) provides a
means for connecting the power cable of the 626A
panel to the power unit. An interrupter must be
provided with the separate power unit to furnish
the interrupted voltages to the panel. All straps
between the power unit and the 92A connecting
block are made with 18-gauge (solid) wire.
3.05
• Backboard, 185A1 (yellow)-order as required
Note: In the 626A modular panel the Ring
Ground (RG) also serves as Lamp Ground
(LG) and must be connected on the station
cross-connect field to the lamp grounds
(continuous strapping is required).
• Adapter, Plug, Power Cord, Hubbell BL-12433
• Adapter, Bridging, 183B2-order as required.
3.
INST ALLATION
The 626A is a wall-mounted panel and should
be located with or in close proximity to
1A2 KTS panels and power sources.
3.01
Page 6
For modular panel installations that are
subject to expansion or where a large lamp
multiple is anticipated, a 67D2 power unit, for 10V
ac power, can be used with two 92A connecting
blocks to provide the required power for the lamps
(Fig. 7).
3.06
ISS 1, SECTION 518-215-421
92A COHNECTI NG BLOCK
IIOV RN
",I05V RN
IOV AC
TO 19-. 20-.
29-, OR 30-TYPE
P(J,/ER UN I TS
AS REQU I REO
(NOTE I)
,.,. 10V AC
8 SIG
::: B SIG
IIOV30HZ
,.,. I05V
A TLK
~ A TLK
A GRD
,.,. A GRD
LF
~ LF
IOV RN
,.,. IOV RN
8 GRO
B GRO
LW
LW
MS
MS
ACG AND MG
...,
I
ACG
POWER
CORD
I
( 1
4
( 1
8
(I
9
( 1
12
(I
16
( 1
17
( 1
19
( 1
20
21
(I
(I
22
( 1
24
( 1
II
6
10
l
9
8
TO 626A PANEL
2
12
I
7
5
4
(NOTE 2)
IB GAUGE
SOLIO WIRE
NOTES'
I. INTERRUPTED VOLTAGES, WHEN REQUIRED
MUST BE SUPPLI EO THROUGH AN INTERRUPTER.
2. CONNECT! NG BLOCK TERM I NAL ARRANGEMENT
Fig, 6-19-, 20-, 29-, or 30-Type Power Unit Connection Using 92A Connecting Block
4.
4.01
OPTIONS AND FEATURES
connecting block (Fig. 5) is required to connect
the common leads.
The various optional arrangements for the
626A panel are listed in Table A.
Transfer digits are not restricted to
digits 1, 2 or 3. Any digit(s) can be
used as a transfer digit(s). However,
the digit(s) selected as a transfer digit(s)
is forfeited as a station code.
FW Option
The FW option (Fig. 8) is a factory-provided
option. The FW option provides for two
or three intercom paths with 37 station codes.
Stations can utilize both rotary and TOUCH-TONE
dialing. Digits 1, 2, and 3 are used as transfer
digits and are not available for station codes. Where
the third intercom path is used, an external (66-type)
4.02
4.03
See Fig. 2 for location of the following
KTUs which are required for FW option:
• 424B or C-19-code selector circuit
Page 7
SECTION 518-215-421
92A
CONNECTI NG BLOCK
P12D
CORD
105V RN
I)
1
~
I
I) ) I
I
I
1)
1
I)
I
I)
I
TO 79B2
POWER
UNIT
1
I
I
1)
1
I)
1
1
I)
I
I
I
~
«)
,.,.
,.,.
105V
,.,.
,.,.
105V
no
,..,.
A TLK
,.,.
A GRD
.'U
,..,.
I
I
I
I
( I
1
(I
I
(I
I
(I
I
( 1
I
I
( I
LF
LF
10V RN
10V RN
I
I
B GRD
I
(I
I
B GRD
LW
,.,.
,..,.
'"
,.,.
'"
no
MS
,.,.
,.,.
'"
,.,.
~
I
B SIG
1
,.,.
~
I
I
,.,.
A GRD
<0
10V AC
B SIG
A TLK
POWER
CORD
1D5V RN
~
I
~
1)
I
I)
I
I)
10V AC
92A
CONNECTI NG BLOCK
~
I
1)
I
,.,.
TO 6702
POWER
UNIT
ACG
r
'"
\
LW
MS
ACG
TO 626A
PANEL
(I
I
I
( I
I
I
(I
I
I
( I
1B GAUGE
SOLID WIRE
Fig. 7-6702 Power Unit Connections Using 92A Connecting Block
• 460B-2-path access circuit
or
• 454B-3-path access circuit
Where a third intercom path is used, an external
(66-type) connecting block (Fig. 5) is required to
connect the common leads.
4.05
See Fig. 2 for location of the following
KTUs which are required for S option:
• 444A-Selector extender circuit
• 424B or C-19-code selector circuit
• 440A
• 460B-2-path access circuit
or
or
478B-TOUCH-TONE adapter, if required.
(Z option must be applied where TOUCH-TONE
adapter is not provided.)
S Option
The S option (Fig. 9) provides for two or
three intercom paths with 19 station codes.
Stations can utilize both rotary and TOUCH-TONE
dialing. Digit 1 is used as the transfer digit and
is not available for a station code. Station codes
10 through 19 are connected to row C, terminals
o through 9 on block 1 of the 626A panel (Fig. 4).
• 454B-3-path access circuit
• 440A
4.04
Page 8
or
478B-TOUCH-TONE adapter, if required.
(Z option must be applied where TOUCH-TONE
adapter is not provided.)
ISS 1, SECTION 518-215-421
TABLE A
626A PANEL OPTIONS
OPTIONS
INTERCOM
PATHS
FW*
2 or 3
STATION CODES
8
37
2 or 3
19
y
1
37
Nt
1
19
St
REFER TO
FIGURE
Rotary
and/or
TOUCH·TONE
dialing
9
10
11
Z
Non·TOUCH·TONE dialing
12
E
Interrupted ±10V buzzer
13
X
Interrupted 110V 30·Hz ringer
14
G
Uninterrupted (single spurt) ±10V
buzzer or for 18V ac, 24V dc, ground,
or as required for signaling purposes
other than provided (may require an
external power source)
15
Note: Ring ground (RG) also serves as lamp ground (LG) and
must be connected on the station cross·connect field to the
lamp grounds (continuous strapping is required).
* Factory·provided option. The 1, 2, and 3 digits are factory·
wired as transfer digits and cannot be used as station codes.
Other digits can be used as transfer digits, but it is not
recommended. In the event it becomes necessary to use
other digits, consult supervisor.
t When no more than 19 codes are provided, obtain the R(10)
to R(19) codes from the terminals on block 1, row C,
terminals 0 to 9, respectively, and not from the R(10) to
R(19) terminals of block 2.
Y Option
• 454B-2-path access circuit
The Y option (Fig. 10) provides for one
intercom path with 37 station codes. Stations
can utilize both rotary and TOUCH-TONE dialing.
Digits 1, 2, and 3 are used as transfer digits and
are not available for station codes. Option G must
be used with the Y option to provide audible
signaling.
• 444A-Selector extender circuit
4.06
4.07
See Fig. 2 for location of the following
KTUs which are required for Y option:
• 424B or C-19-code selector circuit
• 440A
or
478B-TOUCH-TONE adapter, if required.
(Z option must be applied where TOUCH-TONE
adapter is not provided.)
Page 9
SECTION 518-215-421
BLOCK 1
t::::J c:::::::::I t::::J c:::::::::I
c:::::J
c:::::J c:::::J
c:::::J
c:::::J c:::::J t::::J c:::::J
c:::::J
c:::::J
c:::::J
=
RI
=lI
=
Re
=
12
c:::::J
c:::::J c:::::J c::::::J c:::::I
c:::::J t::::J
c:::::J
c::J
c:::::J c::::J
=12
c:::::J
c:::::J
c:::::::::I
c:::::J
=
c:::::J
c:::::J
l
FACTORY PROV I DED OPTI ON FOR 2 OR ~ I NTERCOH PATIt>
AND n STATION CODES EQUIPPED FOR ROTARY AND
TOUCH-TONE DIALING. (ONLY TI£ STRAPS SHOWN
SUPPLY THIS OPTION)
Fig. 8-FW Option
o
BLOCK 1
c:::::J c:::::J
c:::::J
c:::::J
c:::::J c::::J c:::::J c:::::J
c:::::J
c:::::J c:::::J
c:::::J
c:::::J t:::::I t:::::I
c:::::J
c:::::J
c::::::I
c= ItS
c:::::J
T2
I:::::Ic:::::::::Ic:::::Jc::::::Jc:::::Jt:::::Ic:::::Jc:::::Jc:::::Jc:::::tR2
OPTI ON FOR 2 OR 3 INTERCOM PATIt> AND 19 STATI ON
CODES WITH ROTARY AND TOUCH-TONE DIALING.
(ONLY THE STRAPS SHOWN SUPPLY THIS OPTION)
Fig. 9-S Option
paths and where more station codes will be
required in the future.
N Option
Note: This option is a standard 1A2 KTS
offering that can be provided with the 641A
modular panel (see Section 518-215-419). It
is included here for those installations that
are expected to expand to two or three intercom
Page 10
The N option (Fig. 11) provides for one
intercom path with 19 station codes. Stations
can utilize both rotary and TOUCH-TONE dialing.
Digit 1 is used as the transfer digit and is not
available for a station code. Station codes 10
4.08
ISS 1, SECTION 518-215-421
c::::::::J c::::::::J c::::::::J c::::::::J
c::::::::J T2
c::::::::J c::::::::J c::::::::J c::::::::J
c::::::::J
R2
c::::::::J c::::::::J c::::::::J c::::::::J
c::::::::J
L
*
USE 1B~B2 ADAPTER OR TERMINATE ON
UNUSED TERMINAL OF TRANSFER DIGIT CODE.
OPTION FOR ONE INTERCOM PATH AND ~7 STATiON CODES
WITH ROTARY AND TOUCH-TONE DIALING.
(ONLY THE STRAPS SHOWN SUPPLY TH I S OPTi ON)
Fig. 10-Y Option
through 19 are connected to row C, terminals 0
through 9 on block 1 of the 626A panel (Fig. 4).
Option G must be used with the N option to provide
audible signaling.
• 454B-2-path access circuit
• 440A
or
4.09
See Fig. 2 for location of the following
KTUs which are required for N option:
478B-TOUCH-TONE adapter, if required.
(Z option must be applied where TOUCH-TONE
adapter is not provided.)
• 424B or C-19-code selector circuit
=
Ke
=RG
c::::::::Jc::::::::Jt::Ic::::::::Jc::::::::Jr:::::Jc::Jr:::::Jc::::::::Jc::::::::JT
c::::::::Jc::::::::Jc::::::::Jr=:::Ic::::::Jc::::::::Jc:::::Jc:::::Jc::::::::Jc::::::::JR2
c:::::J c:::::J c::::::J c::::::J c::::::J c::::::J c:::::J c:::::J c::::::::J
r:::::J
L
* USE 1B~B2 ADAPTER OR TERMINATE ON UNUSED
TERMINAL OF TRANSFER DIGIT CODE.
OPTiON FOR ONE INTERCOM PATH AND 19 STATION CODES
WITH ROTARY AND TOUCH-TONE DIALING.
(ONLY THE STRAPS SHOWN SUPPLY THIS OPTION)
Fig. ll-N Option
Page 11
SECTION 518-215-421
Z Option
X Option
The Z option (Fig. 12) is required when
rotary dial service is provided. It consists
of a strap on block 1 of the 626A panel between
row A, terminal 2, and row B, terminal 2. The
Z option must be removed if the intercom is
changed to TOUCH-TONE dialing.
4.12
4.10
The X option (Fig. 14) provides interrupted
nov 30-Hz ringing to operate station ringers
when station codes are dialed. Option X consists
of a strap on block 1 of the 626A panel between
terminals 5 and 6 on row A.
o
o
3
ri:~~=-"T .::::=
BLOCK 1
3
,
5
!
4
c:::::lI
c::::J c::::J c::::J c::::J
c::::J
A
L...I:~;;;:..=.:;rc::::Jt:::::Ic::::::Jc::::Jc::::Jc::::Jt:::I8
c::::Jc::::Jt:::::Ic::::::Jc::::Jc::::Jc::::Jc::::::Jc::::J.,:::::::IC
t:::::::::I c::::J c::::J
c::::J c::::J
c::::J c:::::I c::::J c::::J
c::::::J
D
c::::::J
c::::J c::::J
t:::I c::::J
c::::::I c::::J c::::J c::::::J
c::::J
n
RI
c::::J
c::::J c:::::::J c::::J c:::::::J t:::::I r::::::l c::::::J c:::::J
LI
t:::::l c::::J c:::::J c:::::J
Re
r:::::::I
RG
TI
c:::II
II
II
c::::J c:::::::J c:::::J c::::J
c:::::J
LI
OPTION FOR 110V
c::::J c:::::J c:::::J c::::::J c::::::J c:::::J c::::J c::::J
c::::J
c:::::J c:::::::J c::::::J c::::J c:::::J c:::::::J c::::J c:::::J c:::::J
c:::::J
c::::J c::::J c:::::J
c::::J c:::::J c:::::J c:::::I
c:::::J
T2
R2
c:::::::J t:::::I c:::::J c::::J c::::J c:::::J c::::::J c:::::J c:::::::J
c:::::I
R2
L2
c::::Jc::::::Jc::::Jc:::::Jc:::::::Jc:::Ic::::::Jc:::Jc:::::lIt:::::Il
Tl
c::::J c::::J c::::::J c:::::J c::::J c:::::J c:::::J
2
c::::::J
c:::::l
c::::J
~OHZ
INTERRUPTED RINGING
Fig. 14-X Option
G Option
The G option (Fig. 15) is used with I-path
intercom only and provides uninterrupted
10V ac power (single spurt) to operate station
buzzers when the station codes are dialed. Option
G may also be 18V dc, 24V dc, ground, or other
voltages that may be required for signaling purposes.
When any potential (voltage or ground), other than
lOV ac, is to be used for (uninterrupted single
spurt) signaling, the potential must be connected
to block 1, row A, terminal 5 of the 626A panel
by a separate lead.
4.13
OPTION FOR ROTARY
OIAL SERVICE
Fig. 12-Z Option
E Option
The E option (Fig. 13) provides interrupted
10V ac to operate station buzzers when the
station codes are dialed. Option E consists of a
strap on block 1 of the 626A panel between terminals
4 and 5 on row A.
4.11
Preset Conference
Preset conference is a feature which permits
up to five preselected intercom stations to
be signaled simultaneously by dialing a predesignated
code.
4.14
BLOCK 1
3 4
o
To connect preset conference, a lead is
strapped from the R( ) terminal of the
designated code to an external 66-type connecting
block for distribution, via diodes (5 maximum), to
the signaling leads of the selected conference
stations. A typical preset conference arrangement
is shown in Fig. 16. As illustrated in Fig. 16,
stations 8, 18, 27, 28 and 29 are signaled when
code 39 is dialed. In this arrangement, code 39
cannot be used as a station code.
4.15
OPTION FOR INTERRUPTED 10V AC BUZZER
Fig. 13-E Option
Page 12
ISS 1, SECTION 518-215-421
When it is suspected a KTU is defective,
replace the KTU with one known to be in
good working order. This will determine if the
KTU is defective or if there is a trouble external
to it. Should a replacement KTU not clear a
trouble, the trouble is external and the original
KTU should be returned to service. No
field maintenance is to be performed on KTUs.
5.03
TO
POWER
SOURCE
FOR
18\1 OR
24V DC
KTU functions are as follows:
5.04
• 424B or C-Basic selector-only 19-code
OPT I ON FOR 10V AC BUZZER UN INTERRUPTED
SIGNAL OR FOR 1BV DC, 24C DC, GROUND
OR ~ REQU I RED FOR S I GNALI NG PURPOSES
OTHER THAN PROV I DED (EXTERNAL POWER
SOURCE MAY BE REQUIRED).
Fig. 15-G Option
When 10V ac signaling is used, the sound
of the audible signal will be noticeably
different on a conference call than on a normal
call due to the effect of the diode on the signal
voltage.
4.16
5.
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance of the 626A panel is limited to
normal station repairs (including cable and
inside wire), wiring checks of the panel, replacement
of defective lamps and fuses, and replacement of
defective KTUs. The internal circuitry of the 626A
panel consists of a flexible printed' board and
requires no maintenance.
rotary dial intercom circuit, capacity of a
maximum of nineteen 1- and 2-digit codes
(refer to CD- and SD-69567-01).
• 440A-Adapter circuit used to convert the
multifrequency signals (TOUCH-TONE) from
the telephone to contact closures which
supply ground to the proper leads of the
424B or C selector (refer to CD- and
SD-69906-01).
• 444A-Extender circuit that expands the
capacity of the 424B or C KTU to 37 codes
by providing two additional transfer digits
(refer to CD- and SD-69653-01).
Note: The 424A is not compatible with the
444A KTU.
5.01
5.02
Before considering the replacement of the
626A panel, make a check of the following:
•
454B~-path access circuit containing three
separate intercom paths. Provides dial tone,
flashing lamps during station selection, and
steady lamps during a busy condition.
Provides talking battery for all three intercom
paths. Has the common control circuitry
to connect the 424B or C KTU to one path
at a time. Has a detect circuit to free the
424B or C KTU at the proper time (refer
to CD- and SD-69930-01).
• Fuses in place and not blown
• Lamps properly seated and not burnt out
• KTUs securely mounted in proper connectors
wi th retainers in place
• Wiring on connecting blocks not loose, broken,
or shorted
• Power cable is securely connected
• Proper options have been connected.
• 460B-2-path access circuit with the same
features as the 454B KTU except it operates
on two intercom paths (refer to CD- and
SD-69652-0l).
• 47BB-Adapter circuit used to convert the
multifrequency signals (TOUCH-TONE) from
the telephone to supply ground to the proper
leads of the 424B or C selector. When used
with the 626A panel, Y (factory-provided)
option must be provided on the 478B KTU.
Can be used with the 626A panel in place
Page 13
SECTION 518-215-421
626A PANEL
en \IT
PIO BLOCk 1
7
o
a
PIO BLOCk 2
9
R R R R
16171819
0
o
~
R R R
27 2a 29
0
-
0
STATION
CONNECT ION
BLOCkS
I
STA. COD E 8
Rca
STA. COD E 18
RC18
STA. COD E Z7
RCZ7
PIO BLOCk 2
-
R R R R
36 37 3a 39
0
0
~I-
0
I-
/"
za
RCZ8
STA. COD E 29
RCZ9
STA. COD E
l:
66M1-50 CONN BLk
L---i--
KS Z1765. L1 (OR EOUIVALENT)
NOTES:
1. AS ILLUSTR ATED. STATION
CODES a. 1a. Z7. 2 a. AND
29 ARE SIG NALED WHEN CODE
39 IS DIAL ED
2. A MAXIMUM OF 5 STATIONS
CAN BE CON NEtTED FOR
PRESET CON FERENCE
3. THE CODE A55 I GNED TO
ESTABLl SH A CONFERENCE
CALL tANNOT BE USED AS A
STATION CODE
4. RING GROUND (RG) ALSO
SERVES AS LAMP GROUND
(LG) AND MUST BE STRAPPED
Fig. 16-Typical Preset Conference Arrangement
of the 440A KTU (refer to CD- and
SD-69931-01).
As an aid for maintenance, Fig. 17 is provided
to identify the terminals of the connecting
blocks in the 626A panel. The letters above the
5.05
Page 14
terminals are the terminal designations. The
terminals are symbolized in order to identify them
with a connector. The numbers below the terminals
indicate the pin number of the connector. An
asterisk below the terminal indicates the terminal
is connected to the power cable.
ISS 1, SECTION 518-215-421
NOTES:
1. NUMBERS UNOER TERM I NALS OES I GNATE CONNECTOR PINS (SEE LEGEND).
UNNUMBERED TERM I NALS APPEAR ON TERM I NAL BLOCKS ONLY.
LEGEND
CONNECTOR
TERMINAL
SYMBOL
J1A
0
J1B
@
J2A
•
J2B
@
JM
0
J'B
@]
J4B
00
P(1.IER CABLE
TERMINALS
*
2. AN AUXILIARY CONNECTING BLOCK IS REQUIRED WI£N THIRD INTERCOM PATH IS
USED IN ORDER TO TERMINATE TI£ In, IR3, AND IL3 LEADS.
,. CONNECTOR ARRANGEMENT:
'0'"
J1A
19
"9
"OW
J1B
19
'9
'~O
,!!1
R2
L2
L2
~
16
11
TI
R1
RI
L1
LI
•
RI2Q1
034
RG
RI211
RI221
Ral
28
2'
25
0
0
RI241
026
R12!1
020
RI261
021
RI271
0
'2
RI281
0lO
Ral
29
RG
1]
12
R2
R2
L2
L2
19
4
Fig. 17-Connecting Block Terminal Identification (Sheet 2 of 3)
Page 16
TO
BLOCK
2
ISS 1, SECTION 518-215-421
0
1
2
,
TOX
01
LT1
OH
@)
3.
El
36
TOl
~
LBID
@
"
~
LTV
039
LTZ
~
LB20
@
2
71
0
35
LT2
0
39
LA
J
>---,
>---,
>---,
i~
---#
---#
I~
F5
17
18
43
18
44
18
45
~ 20
411
Il
t+I
12
38
.... 2
T
37
32
FI _
f+-
48
IG-VI
9
3S
10
36
II
28
29
30
31
40
48
34
27
37
18
44
19
7
33
8
2S
26
12
38
13
39
14
43
31
8
32
24
34
9
35
10
36
II
15
41
18
42
17
e
I
0
19
20
21
22
23
31
I
IV-51
IS-VI
<12
<13
27 (I
I
49
AMPHENOl
CONN P2
~(+I=====~<<9)14 )>-=====~I~)
1)1
IV-GI
18R-VI
I
I PIN I
~ I NO,1 ~
28
1(1
10-VI
48
:::!t:
I
AMPHENOl
CONN PI
-------1.1
>---,
>---,
>--,
>--,
>--,
~ 21
---#
47
~
~
~
~
~
~
23
48
24
110
25
~ 22
48
~
~i
§.
~
6684-2S
CONN IlOCK
8LOCK 2
RIGHT-HAND kOCK
A,58
CONN
CA8lE
IW-8l1
I Bl-WI
WO-WI
W-G
G-W
W-BR
IBR-W
W- S
SoW
I R-BlI
Bl-R
R-OI
I O-R I
R-G
I G- RI
I R-BRI
IBR-RI
I R -51
IS-RI
I BK-8LI
8L-BK
18K-OI
10-8KI
BK-G
S-BK
BK-BRI
I BR-8KI
BK-SI
I S-BKI
Y-BlI
(8l-Y
Y-O
O-YI
IY-GI
G-YI
I Y-8RI
8R-YI
Y-II
II-Y
V-8l1
8l-V
I V-OI
O-V
IV-GI
IG-VI
IV-8RI
18R-VI
IV-II
II-VI
~
--,
--t-
-T ~INOTEII
IRI
""4
-y-
-;-
--r-T-
IlGI
T
-W-
-.g...
+
-4-
+
IS
~
17
1"8
~
+
fz"""ii""
f4""
III
25
~
27
"ii"
""ii~
31
""""i2
""""ii""
--w
r---!+.
--F-
R
lG
""ii-
r--L
~
40
"""""4i""" RNIII
~
43 r--L
~
....g....
~
4
l
R
lG
l
R
lG
l
T
-4!4--..!2...
R
lG
l
IIO~
28~
II RN lEADS MUST 8E PLACED SEPARATELY
WHEN REQUI RED.
NOTES:
1. PROVIDE T, R, LG, L STRAPPING WHEN FURNISHING BASIC DIAL INTERCOM.
PROVIDE T, R STRAPPING (ONlY) WHEN FURNISHING DELUXE DIAL INTERCOM
AND 11DA APP HTG IS DEDICATED TO A 407- OR 424-TYPE KTU.
2. RE/4OVE (OR 00 NOT TERMINATE) THESE LEADS WHEN 110A APP HTG IS DEDICATED
TO A 4CY1- OR 424-TYPE KTU. IN THIS CASE THE SPACE IS USED TO PROVIDE
FOR STATION MULTIPLES.
Fig. 3-Schematic of 110A Apparatus Mounting and Connections of the A25B Connector Cables to 6684-25
Conneding Blocks (Sheet 1 of 2)
Page 8
ISS 1, SECTION 518-215-422
BLOCK DIAGRAM IIOA APP MTG
66B4-2e CONN BLOCKS
IIOA APP MTG
BLOCK I
LEFTHAND
BLOCK
BLOCK 2
RIGHTHAND
BLOCK
I
I
-
CONN A
NONDEDI CATED
LEADS
CONN
A
------
---- -
PI
P2
!
32
32
33
33
1
--
CONN A AND B
DEDICATED
LEADS
[]
CONN
B
r---
CONN B
NONDEDICATED
LEADS
--
1
SPARE
48
--
------
49
SPARE
-
~O
~O
'-----0
~
'\.A2~B
CONN CABLES
BLOCK DIAGRAM OF
66B4-2~
CONN BLOCKS
66B4-2~
66B4-2~
CONN BLOCK
BLOCK I
LEFT-HAND BLOCK
CONN BLOCK
BLOCK 2
RIGHT-HAND BLOCK
~
~
TO STATIONS
ANDIOR
'STRAPPING
AS REQUIRED
COL
A, B, C,
D, E
COL
~F
TOPIPLUG
----. OF IIOA
APP MTG
TO P2 PLUG
OFF IIOA
COL
A
Jfl rf1
~
Ifi rll rfl
+--I'UIUIUIUIUq
APP MTG
COL
F,E,D,
TO STATIONS
etB
ANDIOR
------+ STRAPPING
AS REQUIRED
BLOCK DIAGRAM FOR CENTRALIZED INSTALLATIONS II
A2~B
CONN
CABLES
}---{-f----t+-.,
LEFTHAND
BLOCKS
-
r---
-
REO
BACKBOARD
r---
STENCIL TO
IDENTIFY
APP MTG
WITH CONN
BLOCKS
--
RIGHTHAND
BLOCKS
-
'-----0
I lOA-I
II REFER TO SECTION
~18-01O-IOI
-
'-----0
2
~STENCIL TO
IIOA-2 _ _ _ _
IDENTIFY
APP MTG WITH
CONN BLOCKS
WALL MOUNTED
IIOA APP MTGS
FOR BACKBOARDS TO BE USED IN CENTRALIZED LOCATIONS.
Fig. 3-Schematic of 110A Apparatus Mounting and Connections of the A25B Connector Cobles to 6684-25
Connecting Blocks (Sheet 2 of 2)
Page 9
SECTION 518-215-422
TABLE B
FUSING FOR 110A APPARATUS MOUNTING
OESIG
Page 10
FUNCTION
F1
Lamp Wink
LW
F2
Lamp Steady
10Vac
F3
Lamp Flash
LF
F4
Ringing
105Vac
F5
Signal Battery
BBat.
F6
Talk Battery
A Bat.
VOLTAGE
TYPE
SIZE
(AMP I
10Vac
70B
2
105Vac
700
1/2
24Vdc
70H
3/4
ISS 1, SECTION 518-215-422
110A API' HTG
6684-25
CIillN BLK
~J
ROW AND COLUIIN
BLK 1
LF
LG*
LW
TO
I~ERRUPTER
(NOTE 1)
LG*
P
ST
Me;
RN
t
RG*
10V±
LG
105Vt
TO
FWER SUPPlY
(NOTE 1)
RG
A BAT.
A GRD
B BAT.
BGRO
*
t~
~
1~
~
1~
~t-.----<
I~
~
P
P
1~
~
I I :~: I
P
P
1~
~f-'----<
~
I §]t-.----<
P
THESE LEADS USED FOR BALANCING PURPOSES TO PREVENT INDUCED NOISE. THEY MUST
BE TERMINATED TO APPROPRIATE GRDUND TERMINAL ON PANEL NEAR THE INTERRUPTER.
t RN LEADS ARE TO BE PlACED INDIVIDUALLY AS REQUIRED PER CONNECTOR.
CONN BLK
6684-25 CONN BLKS
l.--'--+---
~~~ -HAND
RIGHT -HAND
BlK
FUSED AT ~ AMPS OR LESS
PER FEED AT FWER SUPPLY,
1B GAUGE OR SMALLER WIRE
DEPEND I NG ON LOAD
BLK 1
BLK 2
JUMPERS FOR I ~ERRUPTER
AND POWER CONNECT IONS
(DEDICATED LEADS)
BLOCK DIAGRAM FOR CENTRALIZED INSTALLATION (NOTE 2)
NOTES:
1. CONNECT AS REQUIRED (FUSE WHERE NEEDED) SO AS NOT TO EXCEED THE MAXIMUM LOAD
LIMITATIONS OF THE FWER SUPPlY.
THESE LEADS MAY BE MULTIPlED FROM BLOCK TO BLOCK PROVIDING THE LIMITATION OF THE
POWER SUPPLY IS NOT EXCEEDED.
2. REFER TO SECTION 51B-010-101 FOR BACKBOARDS TO BE USED IN CENTRALIZED INSTALLATIONS.
Fig. 4-Dedicated Lead Connections (Interrupter and Power) for 110A Apparatus Mounting
Page 11
SECTION 518-215-422
S6B4-25 COllI BLK
~
ROW ASSIIlII£NT
(NOTES 1 ANO 2)
CONN A
(BLK 1)
CONN B
LEFT-HANO BLK
RIGHT-HAM! BLK
(BLK 2)
FIELD
CONN
_FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
NOTES:
1. SEE BLOCK DIAGRAII COVERlNO 8884-25
CONNECTING BLOCK IN FIG. 3.
2. TERIIlNATE DEDICATED LEADS PER FIG. 4.
3. WHEN IC OPTION IS USED. DUE TO THE DELAYED
RELEASE OF THE HOLD BRIDGE. SlJIE TRANSIIISSION
LOSS IS ENCOUNTERED FOR APPROXIMTELY ON SECONO
WHEN STATION REENTERS A HELD ~LL.
4. OPTION PLUCI NOT PROVIDED FOR THIS POSITION:
USE PLUCI NDRMLLY USED TD PROVIDE OPTION R.
1
TO CO OR (_.::..._ _ _QJ---<2
914
PBX LINE
R
0---<
TO TEL[
SET
TO
400-TYPE
KTU
:,
....::~----l
-I
..:::LG~_ _
...!:...----I
* FACTORY PROVIDED OPTIONS
t TO PROVIDE TIlE-OUT CYCLES OF
RING-UP CIRCUITS FRII'I 2.5 TO 7.5
SECONDS. INSTALL KS-13480. L1. 1 WATT OR EQUIVALENT RESISTOR BETWEEN
TERIIlNALS 1 ANO 3 WITH A STRAP FRII'I 1 TO 2. TIIE-DUT CYCLE ANO
RESISTOR VALUES ARE AS FOLLOWS:
2.5 SECoMls - 0.13 IEIlOIfI RESISTOR
3.3 SECONDS - 0.20 IEIlOIfI RESISTOR
5.0 SECONDS - 0.39 IEGM RESISTOR
6.7 SECONDS - 0.75 IEGIlIfI RESISTOR
7.5 SECONDS - 1. 2 IEIlOIfI RESISTOR
t
FOR 3O-8ECIlNO TIIE-DUT CYCLE REIIlVE ALL STRAPS FRII'I TERIIlNALS 1. 2 •
ANO 3. WHEN THE DURATION OF MCHINE RINGING IS 1 SECONO OR LESS.
TIlE-OUT SHALL NOT BE REDUCED BELOW 5 SECONDS •
TO
(BORB1
~
AUDIBLE
R OR R1
~ 9
SIGNAL
~~
10
1
r It.h
ri~OOE. (~____J <9 1<9
MMIX
~~~(R~C~)_ _ _ _~_
OPTION STRAPPING ON 4000 (I'll) KTU OPTION BLK
OPT
FEATURE
W*
T
1sT
y*
IT
JJ.
+
AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
VISUAL HOLD
CIRCUIT
TIIEOUT
ze
~
ZO
f----,.
ZJ
RELEASE OF
HOLDING BRIDGE
FRII'I CO OR PBX
LINE CURRENT
OPENS GREATER
THAN
STRAP TERIIINALS
INTERRUPTED RING
5 TO 8
STEADY RING
6 TO B
CIII10N WITH DIODE MTRIX CONTROL
5 TO B
LAIIP WINK
7 TO 10
LAIIP STEADY
*
*
*
7 TO 9
TIlE
SHORT (10 SECONDS)
1 TO 2
DELAY
LONG
t
t
500 ftILLISECONDS WHEN ASSOCIATED WITH
NO. 1 ESS HAVING RESWITCH ~ABILITY
2 TO 3 USING 801A (5 UF)
~ACITOR OR EQUIVALENT
100 ftIlLISECONDS SWEN ASSOCIATED WITH
800A PBX ANO/OR NO. 5 X-BAR CENMEX NOT
HAVING AUTOOTIC PERMNENT SIGNAL RELEASE
2 TO 3 USING 575A (1 UF)
~PAClTOR OR EQUIVALENT
50 ftILLISECONDS WHEN ASSOCIATED WITH
NO. 5 X-BAR CENTREX HAVING AUTOOTIC
PERMNENT SIGNAL RELEASE
2 TD 3 USING 5758 (0.5 UF)
CAPACITOR OR EQUIVALENT
4000 (MO) KTU
Fig. 5-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 4000 (MOl. 400G (MOl. and 400H KTU (CO or PBX Une Circuit)
in 110A Apparatus Mounting (Sheet 1 of 2)
Page 12
ISS 1, SECTION 518-215-422
I
M
Z*
y*
~
TM
DELAY
TMOOT
R
~
LIlIIl
SIDIT
APPROXDlATELY
20 SECDIIlS
APPROXDlATELY
8 SECDIIlS (l1.5 SEC)
B1 - B2
*
A1 *
- AS
B2-B3
VISUAL
HOLD
CIRQJIT
LAllI
WINK
LAllI
STEADY
INTERRII'TED
C2~CS
AUOIBLE
SIDNAL
STEADY
CS-C4
W*
~
OPTIOII
PLUG TO
TERllINALS
FEATIIIE
OPT
AS - A3
DIODE IIATRIX CIlIITRDL
CDIIIIIlII
RELAY CIlIITRDL
DELAYED
HOLD
RELEASE
RELEASE OF HOLDINB BRIDGE
FROII CD OR PBX
BY LINE QIIRENT OPENS
C1 - CS
I
I
IIINIIUI
OF 25 lIS
BOD lIS
*
E1 - E2
CONNECTS TO 5DA CUSTDIIER PREIIISES SYSTEII (NDTE 4)
01 - D2
OPT
FEATIIIE
OPTIOII
PLUG TO
TERIIINALS
IW*
t!V
S*
~
CD OR PBX LINE CIRCUIT
INTERRIJ'TED
AUOIBLE
SIGNAL
HOLD
CIRQJIT
RELEASE
TOP VIEW OF OPTIOII BLOCK WITH HANDLE TOWARD
USER. OPTIOII SYIIBDLS SHOWN CONNECTED TO
TERIIINALS INDICATE FACTORY PROVIDED OPTIONS.
E2 - E3
N
T*
400G KTU
(J1 - J3)
AS-AS
*
*
400H KTU
TOP VIEW OF OPTIOII BLOCK WITH HANDLE TOWARD
USER. OPTION SYIIBOLS SHOWN CDNNECTED TO
TERIIINALS INDICATE FACTORY PROVIDED OPTIIlIIS.
DIODE IIATAIX CIlIITRDL
CDIIIIIlII
RELAY CONTROL
A1 - AS
LIlIIl
ESS 11. ESS 12. DIIlENSIOII
812. 770 PBX
B1 - B2
SIDIT
ALL OTHERS
B2 - B3
*
Fig. 5-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 400D (MD). 400G (MD), and 400H KTU (CO or PBX Line Circuit)
in 110A Apparatus Mounting (Sheet 2 of 2)
Page 13
SECTION 518-215-422
l18l4-2I5
CIIII BLOCK
lA!~~~
BCD E ~
ROIl ASSIGIIIEIIT
(NOTES 1 AlII 2)
TELSET
....!:!
NET.
I,
.!!!.
T
,
R
HOLD
...:..
L--
LAMP
~
1
c_~
AS REQUIRED
(SEE INSET)
CONN
A (P1)
LEFT
BLOCK
CONN
B (P2)
RIGHT
BLOCK
a
A
f-4
f--
A1
f--
LG
f---
L
[
5
8
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
12
I
13
16 TO
4018
KTU
7
f---
8
SPARE 1 f - - 1
SPARE 2 f - - 2
SPARE 3 f - - 10
L....--
8
INSET
PART OF 401A
KTU ONLY
:'] 5J
A
SPARE CONTACTS
NOTES:
1. SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM COVERING THE 66B4-25
CONN BLK IN FIG. 3.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATED LEADS PER FIG. 4.
Fig. 6-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 4011 KTU (Manual Intercom Une Circuit) in 110A Apparatus
Mounting
Page 14
ISS 1, SECTION 518-215-422
84-2&
CIIfI BUIIlK
If!!fH]
00000o
AIIIIABS_
(IIDTES 1 AlII 2)
TO
CO/PBX
LINE
CONN
EQUIRED [
AS Rm
(SEE INSET)
T
CONN
A (P1)
LEFT
BLOCK
R
-
CONN
B (P2)
RIGHT
BLOCK
1
2
SPARE 1 r--3
SPARE 2 f - - 4
SPARE 3 f - - -
5
SPARE 4
TO RINGER, RC RC
RELAY, ETC OR
AS REQUIRED
r-8
r-10
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
J 14
TO 413A KTU
INSET
.- 9
(PART OF 413A)
R
.- 12
~E
.- 13
.- 16
~
.- 9
.-
:
:
R
I
I
I
"---
NOTES:
1. SEE BLOCK DIAGRA" COVERING THE 66B4-25
CONN BLK IN FIG. 3.
2. TER"INATE DEDICATED LEADS PER FIG. 4.
OPTION STRAPPING ON 413A KTU OPTION BLK
STRAP
DPTION
FEATURES
TER"INALS
X AUDIBLE I STEADY RING
9 TO 10
SIGNALS I INTERRUPTED RING 8 TO 10
!----z"-
Fig. 7-Nondedicatecl Lead Connedions for 413A KTU (Auxiliary Ringup Circuit) in 110A Apparatus Mounting
Page 15
SECTION 518-215-422
66B4-25 CONN BLK
NOTES:
1. SEE BLOCK DlAOIWI COVERING 6684-25
CONN BLK IN FIG. 3.
2. TERIUNATE DEDICATED LEADS PER FIO. 4.
3. PVT LINE CKT AT DISTANT ENOIlAY BE A 414A KTU. 418A KTU. 2D4A KTU.
OR ANY OTHER TYPE PVT LINE UNIT REQUIRIND RINGING VOLTADE FOR TIE
RINIlU' ClRaJIT AND FURNISHING RINGING VOL TADE FRIll TIE SIGNALING CKT.
• SIGNAL KEY IlAY BE A CONVERTED PICKII' KEY OR ANY
E~L NllNLOCKING KEY •
• FOR SATISFACTORY AUDIBLE RINIlBACK TONE. TIE RINGING SUPPLY MT
CONTAIN AN AUDIBLE CO'I'DNENT.
~~
ROW ASSIIlII'ENT
( NOTES 1 AND 2)
CONN
A (PO
LEFT
BLOCK
T
PIO SIfllILAR
TYPE PRIVATE LINE
CKT AT OISTANT
ENO (NOTE 3)
TEL SET
-
-
LS
~
lTRDi
T
R
g
~
l
'---
LAPP
(~t
SO
6
L
R OR Rl
S
FEATURES
UNDER
CONTROL OF
R RELAY
R
I-N
r+Z
TIIE-DUT
IWITHOUT
X OR Z
"
16
INTERRUPTED RIND
STEADY RING
I
STRAP
TERfIIINALS
7 TO 8
7 TO 8
STEADY RIND
_
WITH DIODE
IlATRIX CONTROL
4 TO B
IO SECONDS
1 TO 2
16 SECONDS
2 TO 3
REllJVE
XORZ
STRAPS
8 TO 10
23 SECONDS
€V
CA
€V
N.S
J
o
10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1m
:>-SPARE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~
1----«18
~~RD~ L -_ _~
INSET
(PART OF 414A)
A
( )(
II'
DESIRED
B TO 7
_
WITH DIODE
IlATRIX CONTROL
AUDIBLE RINIlBACK TONE (NOTE 5)
Rl
TO 414A KTU
8
-
I
OPTION STRAPPIND ON 414A KTU OPTION 8LK
11
RD
RC
OIODE IlATRIX
I--
J
8
L
B OR 81
----
'"'"T
13
7
AUD
SIG
-
4
5
STRAP
UNDER
CONTROL OF
TIIE-DUT
AUDIBLE ClRQ/IT
SIGNALS (8 RELAY)
12
LG
r--
W
FOR
REFEREICE
ONLY
14
3
S
I
OPTION
-
2
r--
NET
RIIlHT
BLOCK
1
R
PU
CONN
B (P2)
Fig. 8-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 414A KTU (Manual Signaling, Ringdown Private Line Circuit) in
110A Apparatus Mounting
Page 16
ISS I, SECTION 518-215-422
BB84-25 aJIIN BLK
NOTES:
1. SEE BUla( DIAIlRM alVERlNO BllB4-25
aJIIN BLK IN FIB. 3.
2. T£IIIINATE DEDICATED LEADS PER FIB. 4.
3. PVT LINE DKT AT DISTANT ENO IlAY BE A 415A KTU, 2D3A KTU,
OR ANY DTI£R TYPE PVT LINE UNIT REQUIRlNO DC VOLTABE FOR TIE
RINIllJ' CIRaJIT AlII FURNISHlNO DC VOLTAGE FRIll TIE SIGNALINO DKT.
~J
ROW ASSIClII£NT
(NOTES 1 AlII 2)
TEL SET
-
NET
LS
-
"
-
I
--
PU
L::=
Bi
B"t
aJIIN
B (P2)
LEFT
BLOCK
T
P/0 SIIIILAR
TYPE PRIVATE LINE
DKT AT DISTANT
ENO (NOTE 3)
aJIIN
A (PI)
R
T
R
J
"
-IIILD ' - -
RIIlHT
BLOCK
SHOIIII FOR
RfFERE lICE
ONLY
1
14
2
"'
a
"' 12
"' 13
4
A
5
Al
8
18
TO 415A KTl
LG
7
LMFI
L
r--AUD
SIB
----
B OR Bl
RG
R OR Rl
RC
8
"'
9
rDIODE IlATRIX
I
Rl
@
CA
IO
1
1m
.'>--
,S
OPTION STRAPPlNO ON 415A KTU OPTION BLK*
FEATURES
OPTION
W
INTERRUPTED RINO
STEADY RlNO
ry--r--S
"
Y
AUDIBLE
SIGNALS
CIIIDI WITH DIODE
IlATRIX CONTROL
STRAP
T£IIIINALS
4 TO 8
5 TO 8
4 TO 8
AUDIBLE RINIlBADK TONE
1 TO 2
VISUAL IIILD SIGNAL
7 TO 8
• FOR IDLE LINE TE~INATION CONNECT A KS-I3490,L 1 910 ~
RESISTOR IN SERIES WITH A 542F, 2 UF CAPACITOR ACROSS
T£IIIINALS 8 AlII 10. ORDER COPIPOIENTS LOCALLY AlII INSTALL.
Fig, 9-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 415A KTU (Automatic, DC Signaling Private Line Circuit) in 110A
Apparatus Mounting
Page 17
SECTION 518-215-422
SSB4-25 CONN ILK
NOTES:
1. SEE ILOCK DI_ COVERING 8S84-25
CONN ILK IN FIG. 3.
2. T~INATE DEDICATED LEADS PER FIG. 4.
3. SIGNAL KEY MY BE A CONVERTED PICKII' KEY OR ANY
EXYERNAL __ OCKING KE Y.
~
ROW ASSI_NT
(NOTES 1 AND 2)
CONN
CONN
B (P2)
A (P1)
LEFT
BLOCK
TO SI"IlAR
TYPE PRIVATE LINE
cn AT DISTANT
ENO
TEL SET
PU
r0:-
LS
-
;-NET
oi
~
I
'---
1
R
a
12
4
13
S
5
"" 18
so
8
R
LG
lMPl
7
L
AlII
SIG
11
L
a OR a1
R OR R1
RG
9
RC
-
'--
DlOOE MTRIX
I
R1
@
CA
.1
1m
:>-,s
SPARE
~ESTRD~
DESIRED
TO 418A KTU
a
STRAP
.---
14
2
T
~Y
(~)
SHOWN FOR
REFERENeE
ONLY
T
"
RIGHT
BLOCK
1D
"
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
(PART DF 418A)
12
t-----«
L _ _ _~
19
I. iul
OPTION S_ING ON 418A KTU OPTION aLK
FEATURES
OPTION
W
~
I--
AIIIIILE
SIGNALS
S
"
llITERRII'TED RING
STEADY RING
_
WITH DlOOE
MTRIX CONTROL
AIIIIBlE RINGBACK TONE
STRAP
TERmNALS
5 TO a
7TOI
5 TO I
9 TD 10
Fig, 10-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 416A KTU (Station Line Circuit) in 110A Apparatus Mounting
Page 18
ISS 1, SECTION 518-215-422
CPTI.. B1RN'PIIII .. 417A KTU IIPTIIIII aLK
NOTES:
lUll ILK
1. SEE BLOCK OIAGRAII COVERING
IPTIIII
F£ATIIIES
STRAP ~LB
lAaCDE~
88B4-25 CONN BLK IN FIG. 3.
_
_
_
KEY
x _ BTATI.. CIIITIIDLI.ED BY 8 lO 10
~a!~
2. TERllINATE DEDICATED LEADS PER
ROIl ABBIIIIIIEIT
FIG. 4.
II"
TIll STAn.-a
~~ (IIITES I ~ I)
3. ASSOCIATED L~ AND RINGING
CONN CONN
IlOG
CKTS FR~ 400-TYPE KTU AND 0IAL y CIIIIROLLED BY EXCLUBllIII KEY
A (Pl) B (P2)
SHDIIN FOR
INTERC~ LINE CONNECT DIRECT LY
z CONTROLLED BY -.ocKINII KEY 1 lO 2
REFERENCE
LEFT RIGHT
TO TELEPHONE SETS.
• - IIISTALL K8-2178&. LI DIODES III EQUlVALENT
0NLY
BLOCK BLOCK
4. STATION LEADS FR~ THE TEL SET
(PRIICUIE LDCALL Y) IETlEEN TERllIllALS AS _ .
FOR THE 1ST LINE NUST ALSO BE
T
1
14
TERI'IINATEO TO THE STA SIDE 0F THE
CD III PIlI LIE
fill 1ST LIE
R
ASSIGNED 400-TYPE KTU.
~
9
5. REROVE AND INSULATE EXCLUSION KEY
r--T
11
LEADS FROII IT AND IR IN THE TEL
o
I-I~TYPE
LIELIE I.B..
SET IF SO CONNECTED.
CKT fill 18T
12
19
8. SIGNAL KEY I'IAY BE A CONVERTED
KEY TEL SET
:---,
R A
PICKUP KEY DR AN EXTERNAL
IT
NONLOCKING KEY.
~
T111 '""""21""
28
7. A DIODE RUST BE INSTALLED IN THE
"
R11I~ "A" LEAD OF THE TEL SET WHEN Z
...
29
22
OPTION IS PROVIDED. FOR I'IETHOD OF
.... "
IINDTE 41 A11I~ - 23
CONNECTION USE STATION BUSY LAIIP
30
OPTIDN AS SHOWN IN CONNECTION
LG -1 COit"CKT
SECTION OF TYPE SET USED.
7
LA""--
STRAP
TE~NALS
UNDER
COIIITROL OF
TIIE-IJUT
CIRCUIT
(B RELAY)
INTERIIUPTED RING
STEADY RING
5 TD B
6 TD B
CIJftlN WI' H DIDDE
!lATRIX COIIITROL
8 TD B
UNDER
COIIITROL DF
R RELAY
CIJftlN WITH DIDDE
I-R
I-N
~
~
WITHOUT
X(IIZ
"
TIlE-OUT
STEADY RING
a TD 5
!lATRIX COIIITROL
B SECOIIIDS
9 TO lD
17 SECOIIIDS
7 TD lD
REI'IIIVE
X (II Z
STRAPS
1 TD 2
25 SECOIIIDS
AUDIBLE RINflBACK TOIlE
Fig. 13-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 419A KTU (Automatic Signaling, Ringdown Private Line Circuit)
in 110A Apparatus Mounting
Page 21
SECTION 518-215-422
_ _ COlIN BLK
~~
RIll ASSI1II'IEIIT
(1IIT£8 1 MIl 21
COlIN
COlIN
B (Pal
A (Pll
_FOR
REFEREIEE
lilLY
PNIT OF
112
113
~T
LEfT
ILOCK
}-Jm
RB
RXO
FOR
REFERENCE
14
2
TO OFF
PRElUBE
TEL SET
RO
TO 407C OR
424C K1U
ONlY
1
~A~
R
RIGIIT
ILOCK
ASSI
(NOTE 81
--~ (...::R~l-R;::X::O:"""_-I
ASSI
R-LEAO
-----",
ADO STRAP
3
12
4
13
5
11
I--~
I
TO 420A KTU
(NOTE 51
I
RXB
B
B3B
TTB
...
400J
~
no
.. >---""':";':""-1
10
,
L-_ _.....I
(NOTE 41
NOTES:
1. BEE ILOCK OIAIIRAII COVERING BSB4-25
COlIN BLK IN FIO. 3.
2. TERllIllATE DEDICATED LEADS PER FIO. 4
3. IlAXIIIII STATIIII COIIJUCTOR LOOP 18 500 DIllS. OFF-I'REIIIBE TELEPHOIIE BET
MY BE EQUIPPED WITH A "TtIICH-TONE" DIAL PROVIDED TIE IIITERCIII CIRQJIT
IS 80 EQUIPPED.
4. PROVIDE A 400J DIODE FOR EACH 420A K1U INSTALLED WI£N TI£ IIITERCIII
IS EQUIPPED WITH TI£ "TtIICH-TONE" ADAPTER (44OA OR 4788 KYUI
5. THE CABLE RUN FRIll THE APPARATUS IIIl.WTING TO THE CCIIIECTINII BLOCK
8IIRILD BE AS 8IIIIT AS P088IILE, PREFERABLY LESS THAll 10 FT ~
OPTIIII BTRAPPIIII III 420A KTU OPTIIII ILK
FEATURE
OPTIIII
~
~
".X,R
f-'j-
~
R
AUOISLE
SIGIIALS
AC 1IUZZBI.18Y> OR lOV>
DC BUZZER.24Y DC
RINGER, 105V> STEADY
IIITERRIJPTEO
STRAP T_LS
1 TO 4. 7 TO I
2 TO 4, 7 TO 8
INTERRUPTED WITH
STATIIII BU8Y
Fig. 14-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 420A KTU (Long Line Circuit) in 110A Apparatus Mounting
Page 22
ISS 1, SECTION 518-215-422
8884-25
COllI BLK
IITlil1I
=
ROIl ABBI_NT
IllITES 1 AlII 2)
CONN
A (P1)
LEFT
BLOCK
T
R
B-B1
LINE 1
R-R1
!~o- TYPlC=.A=......t_""""::l_
KTU
~
-4~
____~-~~~
CONN
B (P2)
SHoliN FOR
RIGHT
REFERENCE
BLOCK
ONLY
1 1---<14
2 1----< 9
3 1---<12
4 1----(13
5 1----(18
8 1----( 9
20
R
LINE 2
TO
21 421A KTU
35
38
RC
T
R
B-B1
LINE 3
OPTION STRAPPING ON 421A KTU OPTION BLK
OPTION
STRAP TERI'IINALS
FEATURE
FOR
GENERAL
1 TO 2. 5 TO 8.
II
PURPOSE USE 7 TO 8
R-R1
23
22
28
24
37
99
27
RC
25
NOTES:
1. SEE BLOCK oIAGRAI'I COVERING
88B4-25 CONN BLK IN FIG. 3.
2. TERI'IINATE DEDICATED LEADS PER FIG. 4.
3. ADD STRAPS ACCORDING TO NUI'IBER OF LINES SERVED.
Fig. 15-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 421A KTU (Power Failure Transfer Circuit) in 110A Apparatus
Mounting
Page 23
SECTION 518-215-422
NOTES:
1. SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM COVERING 88B4-25 CONN BLK IN FIG. 3.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATED LEADS PER FIG.. 4.
3. OPTION ® REQUIRED WJiEN 421A KTU IS USED FOR AUDIBLE SIGNAL
SUPPRESSION
4. 400-TYPE KTU WIRED FOR COMMON AUDIBLE WITH DIODE MATRIX OPTION.
5. REFER TO SECTION PERTAINING TO TELEPHONE SET USED.
88B4-25 CONN BLK
~
ROW ASSIGNMENT
(NOTES 1 AND 2)
CONN
A (Pll
CONN
B (P2)
LEFT
BLOCK
RIGHT
BLOCK
TEL SET
il
-
LS
I
PU
r---
,
NET
-.L_
'-L ..
~
R
T
B-B1
R-R1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~
400-TYPE
KTU
~
'--
I
13
2
12 ~
r
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R-R1
4
I
BRIDGED RINGER
400-TYPE
KTU
COMMON AUDIBLE RINGER
R-R1
B-B1
DIODE
MATRIX
(NOTE 4)
---10
1tzj
, ,.
R1
~ RG
f------------------------------- -------------------------------------401, 407\
I
---
I
I
INTERCOM BUZZER
(OR RINGER)
-----------~------------------LS
I
I
f---<13
_______________________________________IL _______ IL __ .
~------------~-----------------
I
~9
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
BZ
BZ1
OR 424TYPE KTU\
R(
3
I
I
I
I
I
-------
-{12
I
I
I
I
I
--
)
19
-{28
R1
23
-{3 7
I
I
I
I
I
I
~
TO
421A
KTU
(NOTE 3)
I
I
I
I
I
I
--------------------------------------~--------~--.
l
BL
l
10
1
A11
STATION BUSY OPTION
(NOTE 5)
Fig. 16-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 421A KTU (Wired as Audible Signal Suppressor) in 110A Apparatus
Mounting
Page 24
ISS 1, SECTION 518-215-422
66B4- 25 CONN BLK
lffff9J
ROW ASS I GNMENT
(NOTES I AND 2)
CONN
CONN
A (P1) B (P2)
LEFT
BLOCK
47B8 KTU
(NOTES 7 ANO B)
®
RIGHT
BLOCK
.
SHOWN fOR
REfERENCE ONL
37
35
36
12
NOTE 6)
I~
TO
407-
TYPE
OR
424TYPE
KTU
CONNECT LEADS II I TH •
I
2
4
3
5
6
7
B
fOR DESI RED STATION CODE (NOTE 5)
9
o
XI X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 XB X9 XO
TO SIGNAL
KEY (NOTE 3)
YI
Y2
Y2
Y3
Y3
Y4
Y4
Y5
Y5
*
Lr---;GRD
S
10
RH
YI
LT2
~B
"
LT2
16
23
5
16
TO
421A
KTU
(NOTE 4)
~~ 25
~f---< 22
*
~f--< 27
~f---< 26
CG
CG
39
NOTES,
1. SEE BLOCK OIAGRAM COVERING 66B4-25 CONN 6LK IN FIG. I.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATED LEADS PER fIG.4.
3. PROVIDE SEPARATE SIGNAL KEY fOR EACH STATION
CODE TO BE SELECTED.
4. PROVIDE A SEPARATE 421A KTU fOR EACH STATION
CODE TO BE SELECTED.
5. SELECT CODE AND CONNECT LEADS fOR SELECTED CODE
AS SHOWN I N VERT I CAL COLUMN.
6. A 40DJ DIODE (PROCURE LOCALLY) MUST BE CONNECTED
AS SHOWN BELOW WHEN PROVIDING DSS IN A DIAL
EQU I PPED SELECTOR ONLY ARRANGEMENT.
407C.
OR
[~.
H
------626
~~~
~ B30
:JRH
LK
RH ) 23
>--- 421 A KTU
7. If MORE THAN ONE 421A KTU IS USED fOR DSS. CONNECT AS SHOWN:
plO
440A(MO)
OR 4786
KTU
----t 821
~.
f
P/O 1ST
421~KTU
H-7
26
g/O
CONN
P/O 2ND
421A KTU
>--<
T
~
137
g
/O
CONN
126
>--< 137
P/O LAST
421 A KTU
P/O
CONN
T
f-+--?
126
~
P/O 407C
OR 424C
KTU
821
~---
® WITH "TOUCH-TONE".
® I WI THOUT "TOUCH- TONE".
USE WITH 424C KTU.
Fig. 17-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 421A KTU (Wired for DSS Feature) in 110A Apparatus Mounting
Page 25
SECTION 518-215-422
S8B4-25
CONN BLK
~
QOQDQO
ROIl ASSIllM'ENT
(MlTES 1 AN) 2)
CONN
CONN
A (PO B (P2)
LEFT
BLOCK
TO 425-TYPE KTU [ L
SELECTED STATION _L- - - i
L LEAD
L
----i
~
TO LAMP (ASSOCIATED [
WITH DIAL INTERCOM) - - - - I
AT SELECTED STATION
L
--'----I
STRAP~
TO 425-TYPEKTU L LEAD ( L
OF CODE ASSIGNED TO
"";;"--="'1
PRESET CONFERENCE
STRAP
TO 407- OR 424-TYPE KTU (
TO DSS SIGNAL KEY
ASSIGNED TO PRESET CONFERENCE CODE
RIGHT
BLOCK
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
1
2
13
1----<14
3
4
1----<12
~--<9
1----<20
1----<13
27 t---<35
5 1---<18
8 I----{ 8
TO
421A KTU
(NOTE 4)
18 1---<23
10
44
38
J
15 1---<22
1
14 1---<21
(NOTE 3)
TO 413A KTU
(IF PROVIDED)
OPTION STRAPPIMl ON 421A KTU OPTION BLOCK
FEATURE
OPTION
PRESET
CONFERENCE
W
STRAP
TERMINALS
1 TO 2
5 TO 8
7 TO 8
NOTES:
1. SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM COVERING 88B4-25 CONN BLK IN FIG. 3.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATED LEADS PER FIG. 4.
3. PROVIDE 413A KTU ONLY WHEN ACCESS TO THE PRESET CONFERENCE IS BY
DIAL CODE OR BY DIAL CODE AND DSS. DO NOT PROVIDE 413A KTU WHEN
ACCESS TO THE PRESET CONFERENCE IS LIMITED TO DSS.
4. PROVIDE
OPTION.
®
Fig. 18-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 421A KTU (Wired as Preset Conference Circuit) in 110A Apparatus
Mounting
Page 26
ISS 1, SECTION 518-215-422
IIIII4-2Ii COllI BlK
~
..
RIll AIISIlREIIT
FOR TEllS (TRAIISFER DIGIT)
42211 KlU (NOTES 1 2 AlII 8)
..
r'
TO 407C
OR 424C
KTU
,T ElSET
,LS
--tA
CONN
A IP1)
lEFT
BLOCK
Yl
8
Ts
Y2
~
Y4
Y5
7
BR
Bl(4)
Bl(5)
SlIB)
Bl(7)
SlIS)
Bl(9)
BlIO)
AI
TO 407C
OR 424C KTU lT1
Jl INOTE 5)
TO
407CKTU
TO 423B [
KTU
INOTE B)
Bl
Bl
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
S'
r'
~
18
1'8
TO 424C
KTU
27
LS
I' .J.A
23
~
30
~
29
TO
ASSOCIATED
TEL SET
"Sl" lEAD
INOTE 4)
~21
~32
34
6
7
f---1
'---
1
I
20
- 11
27
Y5
BR
~
BlIX1)
SlIX2)
21
18
Y4
BlIX5)
BlIXB)
BlIX7)
~
~
'1s
'1'4
f---25
23
f---22
BlIXS)
BlIX9)
f----
BlIXO)
.... AI
31
S-
- 27
24
10
~
- 26
-
J2
I
IIITES;
1. SEE BUICK DIMRM COVERINIl TI£ 11884-211 COllI BlK III FIG. a.
2. TEllllDlATE DEDIcATED LEMIII PER FIG. 4.
8. PROVIDE A SEPARATE 42211 KTU FOR TI£ lIIIT8 IIRIIP (1-0. SIIIBI.E DIGIT NIlS.)
AlII FOR TI£ TEll! IIRIIP (Xl-XU. TIll DIGIT NIlS.)
4. PROVIDE AlII IIIITALL A DIODE III TI£ "A" LEAD OF TI£ ABSOCIATED TEL SETS AS
_
III TEL SET COMECTIOII SECTIOII. FOR COMECTIIil. USE TI£ STATIOII IllSY
lPTilil AS _
III. TI£ COMECTIOII BTIIil OF TI£ TYPE. SET USED.
5. CIIIIECT "Jl" LEAD OF IIIITS 42211 KlU lIEN A 4D7C KlU IS PROVIDED FIJI TI£ DIAL
IIlIER\DI CIRQlIT. lIEN A 424C KTU IS PROVIDED. STRAP TI£ "Jl" LEAD OF 4228
KTU TO "J2" LEAD OF TEllS 42211 KlU.
8. 4238 KlU ABSOCIATED WITH _
DIAL IIlIER\DI AS TI£ 42211 KTUB.
S
22
TO J1L--....
424w
KTU
Bl
14"
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE
0NlY
8
TO 424C KTU l T2
STRA'!. J3
35
CONN
B IP2)
RIGHT
BLOCK
1'5
SlIX4)
TO
422B
KTU
f----
~
Yl
BlIX3)
~25
"2S
{20
~
TELSET
2S
19'"
1"3
1'4
25
CONN
A IP1)
lEFT
BLOCK
Y2
22
0
9
7
Bl{U
Bl(2)
Sl(3)
TO
ASSOCIATEO
TEL SET
"Bl " lEAD
INO TE 4)
CONN
B IP2)
RIGHT
BLOCK
o
~
9
".2S
'"
23
'"
25
'"
~;
2B
20
21
;.
TO
422B
KTU
32
30
~.
29
34
35
31
14
",33
IPTIOII STRAPPINIlS III 42211 KlU IPTIOII BUICK
OPTION
FEATURE
R*
STATION
BUSY TONE
STRAP
TERMINALS
B TO B
............
• - INSTALL 441J IJI EQUIYALEIIT DIODE
(PAOCIIIE LOCALLY) AS _ .
Fig. 19-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 422B KTU (Station Busy Selector Circuit) in 110A Apparatus
Mounting
Page 27
SECTION 518-215-422
66B4-25
CONN BLK
~
ROW ASSIGfI£NT
(NOTES 1 ANO 2)
CONN
A (P1)
LEFT
BLOCK
LK
1
TP 407C
OR 424C T
KTU
SS
r---s4
J
r---sBL(UNITS)
422B KTU[
(NOTE 3) BL(TENS)/,~,
'Ir---+--~:--+----""
NOTES:
1. SEE BLOCK DIAGRAI'I COVERING THE 66B4-25
CONN BLK IN FIG. 3.
2. TERI'IINATE DEDICATED LEADS PER FIG. 4.
3. 422B KTUS ASSOCIATED WITH THE SAI'IE
DIAL INTERCOI'I AS THE 423A KTU.
4. CONNECT TO B GRO AS SHOWN.
5. TO AOJUST OIAL TONE VOLUI'IE ON 423A KTU
TURN KNURLEO WHEEl TO FULL CLOCKWISE
POSITION FOR I'IINII'IUI'I DIAL TONE VOLUI'IE
ANO TO FULL COUNTERCLOCKWISE POSITION
FOR I'IAXII'IUI'I DIAL TONE VOLUI'IE.
ccw
n ,
FRONT END
OF KTU
U
RN
ATI
Bll
TERI'IINAL END
OF KTU
9
12
13
16
8 TO
423A KTU
(NOTE 5)
10
11 1---< 0
12 1---<19
6. IF INTERRUPTED 105V± IS USED FOR DIAL INTERCOI'I,
DO NOT CONNECT THIS LEAD. IF BUZZERS ARE USED
FOR DIAL INTERCOI'I, AUDIBLE SIGNAL IS SUPPLIED
ON THIS LEAD VIA SPARE INTERRUPTER CONTACTS TO
PIN 1 OF 423A KTU ON 423A KTU OPTION BLK, STRAP
TERI'IINALS 6 TO 7 AND REI'IOVE (]) OPTION STRAP
BETWEEN TERI'IINALS 4 ANO 6.
OPTION STRAPPING ON KTU OPTION BUIa<
OPTION
T
OW
el
f---
""""8
10V±, 18±,-24V (NOTE 6)
B
®
'I;r--+-~:----+----'"
(NOTE 4) B
®
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
14
~
BYI
SPARE
INTERRUPTER
CONTACTS
CONN
B (P2)
RIGHT
BLOCK
R
S
STRAP TERI'IINALS
ON 423A
DIAL TONE
1 TO 2
STATION BUSY TONE
4 TO 6
AUDIBLE RINGBACK
NO STRAP
FEATURE
Fig. 20-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 423B KTU (Dial Tone, Busy Tone, and Audible Ringback Tone
Circuit) in 110A Apparatus Mounting
Page 28
ISS I, SECTION 518-215-422
l16li4-25
CONN BlK
If£ff!J
oaoooo
ROW ASSIIlII'IENT
( NOTES 1 AlII 2 J
TYPICAL KEY TEL SET CIRCUITS
EXCLUDED STA - LINE 1
PU
LS
..,...,.
ETl
r--
NETI
Al
ERl
EAl
'1
'--
HOLD
~
CONTROL STATION
l400-TYPE .1
KTU LINE 1
Tl
RI
A
Tl
Rl
9 *NET
LS
'1
Al
(NOTE 3)
CONT
rg
1~
HOLD
CAl
'--
.... d
~
Iv
'--
~
EXCLUDED STA - LINE 2
LS
.----. r--
S
PU
Al
HOLD
12
~
R2
~
ET2
'--
18
0
14
9
/
19
10
1
EL
... 13
/
5
~
T2
SHOWN FOR
REF ERENCE
ONL Y
/
12
r--11
r--1
r--2
r---
CA2
EA2
'--
~
~
~
·1
~
A
ER2
INETI
CONN
B (P2)
RIGHT
BLOCK
3
400-TYPE .I
(NOTE 4) KTU LINE 2
T
RI
LG
~
CONN
A (P1)
LEFT
BLOCK
15
16
- 14
13
22 TO
428A
23 KTU
21
8
7
,
,, - ,,,
20
~
35
28
38
29
37
-
8
NOTES:
1. SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM COVERING 88B4-25 CONN BLK IN FIG. 3.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATED LEADS PER FIG. 4.
3. CONTROL KEY MAY BE LOCKING DR NONLOCKING.
4. S LEAD CAN ONLY MULTIPLE OTHER 428A KTUS CONTROLLED BY THE SAME STATION.
Fig. 21-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 428A KTU (Multiline Exclusion Circuit) in 110A Apparatus Mounting
Page 29
SECTION 518-215-422
IIITES:
1. SEE BLOCK 0 1 _ CllVERIIII 8884-25 CCNI BLK IN FIG. 3.
2. TElllINATE DEDICATED LEADS PER FIG. 4.
3. T AlII R LEADS FRIll STATIDII SIDE OF 4OD-TYPE KTU TERllINATE DIRECTLY TO THE ASSIGNED PICKUP KEY AT TELEPHONE SET.
4. LIIIlTATIDIIS OF 43DA KTU ARE AS FOLLIIIS:
88B4-25
(A) FL1 DR FL2 CAlI SERVE A IlAXIIUI OF 50 LAIPS (51A) EAal. DIVIDE LAIPS AS EVENlY AS POSSIBLE
CCNI BLK
BETWEEII TIE TIIO LEADS.
(B) SP LEAD CAlI CONIECT TO A IlAXllUI OF 2D STATIDIIS.
5. Nfl TELEPIIIE SET EQUIPPED WITH A 1IIl0 KEY HAVIIII A SET OF TRANSFER CDIITACTS AlII SUFFICIENT
CORD LEADS CAlI INITIATE I IllLO. REWIRE 1IIl0 KEY ACCORDIIII TO CONIECTIDII SECTIDII OF TYPE SET USED.
ROIl ASSllllfENT
8. 11£. USED WITH CDIICENTRATDR SETS AlII THE 857 KEY IlllULE. CONIECT AS FOLLOWS:
(IIITES 1 AlII 2)
lffB±!]
CONN
B (P2)
RIGHT
BLOCK
TA 27
SUPP
HOLD
KEY
P/O
429B
KTU
P/O 235 OR 236
TYPE KTU
P/O
400-TYPE
KTU
SP
8
HOLD
FL (2)
38~16
Al
2~1'
5
11
FL (1)
-24
12
FLST
3
P/O 430A KTU
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
o TO
lS]
19 430A
KTU
12
8884-25
CCNI BLK
lffB±!]
ROIl ASSIIlIftNT
(IIITES 1 AlII 2)
TEL SET WIRED
FOR PRIORITY
HOLD (NOTES)
FLST
FL
(lOR 2)
A (1)
A (2)
A
TEL SET WIRED
FOR I HOLD
(NOTES 5 AND 6)
LAI'IP
LINE CKT
LAI'IP
LINE CKT 2
(1 )
LG
L (2)
",.rv''t'
L
A
L
11
10
3
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
0
12
8
6
8
4
7
27
2
13
12
I'IR (1)
13
PCl
I'IR
14
PC2
-24..:B
:....j.-I-_ _ _-I-_ _ _ _ _-.:...:.:.._-I
15
IIESSAGE REGISTER
IF PROV
LAI'IP
L(l)
LINE CKT
LG
LAI'IP
)
LINE CKT 2cel===~~~L.!.!(2~
LINE CKT 1
(NOTE 3)
TO
TO 400-TYPE
LINE CKT 2
(NOTE 3)
CONN
A (Pl)
LEFT
BLOCK
35
TO
429B
KTU
9
14
19
20
21
22
Fig. 22-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 4298 KTU (Supplementary Hold Detector Circuit) and 430A
(Flutter Generator Circuit) in 110A Apparatus Mounting
Page 30
ISS 1, SECTION 518·215-422
~TES:
1. SEE BLOCK OIAORNI COVERING TIE _25 CINI BLK IN FIG. S.
2. TERIIINAre OEOICATEO LEADS PER FIG. 4.
3. IF IIftOIATE RINGER TRANSFER IS REQUIREO, CONNECT TO A TIIIII KEY OR A 44IIA Kru.
4. IIJLTIPLE RC LEADS FRIll BOTH CIRCUITS TO SN!E AUOIBLE SIGNAL AT ATTE~ANT STATION.
• FOR LINE RINIIING.
FOR CIIIIIII AUOISLE RINGINII
CONNECT IIEII CIIIIIII AUOIBlE IS USEO ~ RINGER IS ~T TO BE CUT OFF.
t
OPTION STRAPPING ON 44IIA Kru OPTION BLOCK
OPTION
STRAP TERllINAlS
FEAruRE
S7EAOY RINII
• TO 8
S7EAOY IIUZZ£R
BT0103TOl
3 TO 4
I I
!LEFT
CONN
CONN I RIGHT:
BLOCK A (P11 B (P2I BLOCK
13
SHOWN FOR
OREFERENCE
NLY
f--<20
-
TO 1ST
R
R (11*
~~N~R C~~X [
RC
RC (1)t
'1"2" '--< 19
24 '--< 31
L (1)
~
L(11
1ST PRINCIPAL TEL SET
~
A
T
~~~-+~-4~--------------~
NET
I d II,
_T_ _--------T-(.;...1..;..*---I1'1 '--< 0
• FACTORY PROVIDEO
~
RIll ASSIGIIENT
(~SI~2)
B (AT1I*
SIGNAlSI-~-F=;;;;";';;;:";'=r-';';;"'-+~~
X
lff!±H]
TO LINE
R (AT1I* ~f--<21
[
RINGERS
B (P11* -17 ~
(IF REQOI
~24
R (P1)*
18 f--<25
1ST CKT 2M) CKT
AUOIBlE I - W
--tI-NTERRlP----TEO--R-ING-t.-T-0-7":'.rS-TO""""5-::i.
T
18114·215
CINI BlK
I
R
A
A1 'II-_+*I-_+-H~_+-'---------------+-+...
KILO L L(P11
~rr=;I--,:,-L-G-+--'--'-----+t-t--'
'--<
TO FIRST PRINCIPAL C (1 I r--=TIIIII KEY OR 44IIA
-'--'30 - - <
Kru(~re3)
~
TO 1ST PRINCIPLE TEL SET
"
IF CIIIIIII AUOIBLE IS USED RC (PA 1 I +f - - ~ RINGER IS ~ TO BE
+ 22
CUT OFF
RN
f - - - '----./
TO INTERIIIJITER
41 ~
1
39
TO
448A KTU
1ST CKT
'--< 29
RC (P1 It ~
IJ
11
f--< 2B
RC (P1 I
RG t
f--AUD
RG . t
SIG 1-------t...:.R;.;;,G------iH-1--' r-------::R~C...L.(,A""T"lI·t 19 f--< 28
I
./---.!...
(NOTE 41
ATTENDANT STATION
LS
PU
r--
-
T
LG
11--_ _ _ _~RC~(A;.;;,T...:.1..:.0R;,;..;.;;AT,;.;;2;.:,.1-----'
L(AT2I
SG~
I
TO
2M)
PRINCIPAL reL SET
[B (AT2I*
32
R (AT2I* 1S~23
_~
B (P2I*
R (P2I*
.--_ _ _...:.C_(:.:;2.:.,.1
~~:::t-LG_--;::============::J_I
(NOTE 31
--:;-
25f--<
TO LINE
RINGERS
(IF REQDI
A1 '1~4*1--+#El-+':"'--------------....I
' - l1li.0 RG (AT1)
2ND PRINCI!AL TURN KEY
(AT2lt1'5 f--<22
-120 f--< 27
R
A
~~~
I RC
.--_ _ _ _ _L_(;...AT_2.;.,1
~C::t:I~~ ~~:,O
3
'--< 12
~ - - < 13
--1--:;- - - < 14
TO
448A KTU
2ND CKT
RC (PA2W2S- --<38
TO SECINl [RC (2 I t
'--< 33
'::~NC~~AL LC(21
:-----,
26
[L (P2I
CUT OFF
1 ~~37
TO SECINl
RC (P2 I t
r-27}___<35
co
T (2 I *
""32l_-.J 3B
OR PBX
LINE CKT
R (21*
f--o-- ~
31
f-- L 2
PRINCIPAL
TEL SET
....
40
~
~
R(2)
.Rill.ff
S(P2)
l(P21
B OR RG (P2)
R OR RC (P2)
TO
449A KTU
1ST CKT
(NOTE 5)
/
~ ~38
~ ~34
r-~ ~33
1
f---< 14
f---y - - < 9
~ --<12
'-t'" --<13
~
Fig. 24-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 449A KTU (Immediate Transfer Control Circuit) in 1I0A Apparatus
Mounting
Page 32
ISS 1, SECTION 518-215-422
8884-25
CONN BLK
~
ROW ASSIIlNIENT
(NOTES 1 AIfJ 2)
34A VOICE
COUPLER
TO CUSTOMER (
PROVIDED
MUSIC SOURCE
1
2
SHOWN FOR
ILEFT [I CONN) I CONN) IRIGH~ REFERENCE
BLOCK A (P1) B (P2) BLOCK ONLY
MT
35
27
I--MR
36
28
I--T1(CO)
---- 3
---- 4
TO
( T
CO/PBX R
R1(CO)
T1(STA)
TO STA( :
R1(STA)
T2(CO)
lINE CIRCUIT
r
rD
T(CO)
T(STA)
R2(CO)
2ND
CKT
T2(STA)
R2(STA)
R(CO)
C
."
T3(CO)
R(STA)
4000(MO) OR
400G
(NOTE 3)
3RO
CKT
R3(CO)
I---
T3(STA)
I---
R3(STA)
T4(CO)
NOTES:
1. SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM COVERING
66B4-25 CONN BlK IN FIG. 3.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATED lEADS
PER FIG. 4.
3. 400H NOT CO"PATABlE WITH 451B
KTU.
4. 7TH CKT T(CO) AND T(STA)
MUST BE BRIDGED ON SAME
ROW OF CONN BlK.
R4(CO)
4TH
CKT
T4(STA)
R4(STA)
T5(CO)
R5(CO)
5TH
CKT
T5(STA)
R5(STA)
T6(CO)
R6(CO)
6TH
CKT
T6(STA)
>
R6(STA)
T7(CO)
R7(CO)
7TH
CKT
(NOTE 4)
T7(STA)
R7(STA)
"
11
12
I--10
13
- 14
30
- 15
23
- 3
o
I---
17
4
18
I--8
I--1
I--18
2
19
- 24
I---
~
I---
- 295
I--31
I--32
I--25
I--28
I--- \ I
21
I - - - 1--1
28
I--22
"--
19
"
"2o
/2
39
22
3o
" 12
24
/1 3
/
25
" 8
TO 451-TYPE
KTU
" 14
23
/
/
9
/
26
31
" 27
" 16
" 37
/
34
38
~
32
" 33
" 28
/
29
Fig. 25-Nondedicated lead Connections for 4518 KTU (Music-On-Hold Circuit) in 110A Apparatus Mounting
Page 33
SECTION 518·215·422
88114-25
CONN BlK
~
QQQQQO
ROIl ASSIIlNIENT
J
(NOTeS 1
AM)
2)
CONN
PIO SIMILAR
I
B (P2) SHO WN FOR
TYPE PRIVATE
RG
RIGHT REF ERENCE
LINE CKT
105V±
BLOCK ONL Y
TEL SET
AT DISTANT
.I~
____
T
1 1--_-< 14
END
f
R
I-(NOTE 3)
2 1-_-<, 9
LS
PU
T
I-,
~rN-ET~I~~------~~~I'~I~================~~R--~~~~ 12
, 13
'*"
CONN
A (P1)
LEFT
BLOCK
--'1--1-----1-;..-.-...,
II'~~~---~~----------~~-~~I-----<
SIG KEY§'
S
, 16
~~---~~~~~--------------------~--__i~
'---'
I
(NO-tn)
L-
SG
S
L-_ _ _ _~~~----------~~~~
LG
L
LAMP <.!:d---.
7
I---
IL-_ _~----------------~--~
STRAP
AUO
SIG
~
_ _+
L...--
B OR B1
OR R1
_______R......:........:.,
TO
461A
KTU
,
8 1___---< B
48 1--_-<, 15
I---
~RGI--
~
9
RCI--
r---=- L . .10
1----<
---
DIODE MATRIX
I
_ _ _-...j..!R.:..:1=_... A
©
+ /___~C:;.;A-=-_....
1®
©
OPTION STRAPPING ON 481A KTU OPTION BlK
OPTION
W
T
S
R
N
X
Z
WITHOUT
X OR Z
M
STRAP
TERMINALS
UNDER
INTERRUPTED RING 7 TO 8
CONTROL OF STEADY RING
6 TO 7
TIME-OUT
COI'II'ION WITH DIODE 7 TO 8
CIRCUIT
AUDIBLE (B RELAY) MATRIX CONTROL
SIGNALS
STEADY RING
UNDER
CONTROL
COMMON WITH DIODE 4 TO 6
OF R RELAY MATRIX CONTROL
10 SECONDS
1 TO 2
2 TO 3
16 SECONDS
FEATURES
TIME-OUT
23 SECONDS
AUDIBLE RINGBACK TONE (NOTE 5)
REMOVE
X OR Z
STRAPS
NOTES:
1. SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM COVERING 66B4-25
CONNECTING BLOCK IN FIG. 3.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATED LEADS PER FIG. 4.
3. PVT LINE CKT AT DISTANT END MAY BE A
414A KTU, 419A KTU, 204A KTU, OR ANY
OTHER TYPE PVT LINE UNIT REQUIRING RINGING
VOLTAGE FOR THE RINGUP CIRCUIT AND
FURNISHING RINGING VOLTAGE FROM THE
SIGNALING CKT.
4. SIGNAL KEY MAY BE A CONVERTED PICKUP KEY
OR ANY EXTERNAL NONLOCKING KEY.
5. FOR SATISFACTORY AUDIBLE RINGBACK TONE, THE
RINGING SUPPLY MUST CONTAIN AN AUDIBLE
COMPONENT.
9 TO 10
Fig. 26-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 461 A KTU (Manual Signaling, Ringdown Private Une Orcuit) in
110A Apparatus Mounting
Page 34
ISS 1, SECTION 518-215-422
BBB4-26
CONN BLK
B8Il4-26
CONN BLK
IITITDI
=
~
OOOOOCI
ROIl ASSIIIIIIENT
ROIl ASSIIllllENT
(NOTES 1. 2. AM) 3)
(NOTES 1. 2. AND 3)
I'IAY BE
[
PART OF
DEDICATED
WIRING
B BAT
B GRO
CONN
CONN
A (P1) B (P2)
LEFT
RIGHT
BLOCK BLOCK
(SEE
47 NOTE
3)
48
6
SHOWN FOR
REFEREN CE
ONLY
17
15
J
TO
467A
KTU
CONN
CONN
A (P1) B (P2)
LEFT
RIGHT
BLOCK BLOCK
10 VAC (NOTE 4)
37
8
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
4
I----:--+---< B
STRAP AS
REQUIRED
NOTES:
1. SEE BLOCK OIAGRAI'I COVERING 88B4-25 CONN
BLK IN FIG. 3.
2. TERI'IINATE DEDICATED LEADS PER FIG. 4.
3. KTU I'IAY BE PLUGGED INTO EITHER CONNECTOR.
BUT B BAT IS APPLIED AS A DEDICATED LEAD
ON ROW 47 OF THE LEFT BLOCK ONLY.
J!~O-TYPE
t
*
L
L_>---- j 10 1--_--< : ]
L
LG
8
KTU
!~9A
KTU
1---<8
UP TO 20 LAI'IPS
PIO TELSET
Fig. 27-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 467A
KTU (Voltage Monitor Circuit) in 110A
Apparatus Mounting
NOTES:
1. SEE BLOCK DIAGRAI'I COVERING 66B4-25 CONN BLK IN
FIG. 3.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATED LEADS PER FIG. 4.
3. 469A KTU MAY BE PLACED IN CONN A OR B WITH L
LEAD EXTENDED FRDI'I AN EXTERNAL LINE CIRCUIT OR
PAIRED WITH LINE CIRCUIT AS IN THIS EXAMPLE.
4. 10 VAC IS APPLIED AS DEDICATED LEAD ON ROW 37
OF LEFT BLOCK ONLY.
*
t
EXTERNAL LINE CKT
LINE CKT IN CONN A
Fig. 28-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 469A
KTU (Lamp Extender Circuit) in 110A
Apparatus Mounting
Page 35
SECTION 518-215-422
RESTRICTED TELSET
~
~
NET.
A1
1
T
A
,
ROW ASSIGN£NT
(NilTES 1 ANQ 2)
0
'--
HDLD '--
R
NONRESTRICTED TELSET
~
NET.
A1
If£fHJ
4DO-TYPE
LINE
CIRCUIT
R
T
T
~
,
T
R
.,
R
A
A{U)
A{U)
,
1
CONN
A (P1)
LEFT
BLOCK
HOLD
T (CO)
L....-
TO CD(
LINE
A.
3
SHOWN FDR
REFEREN CE
ONLY
12
4
13
TO
471A
10
0
L....-
CDNN
B (P2)
RIGHT
BLOCK
R (CO)
5
18 KTU
1
14
2
9
STANDARD (PREFERRED) WIRING ARRANGEMENT
If£fHJ
ROW ASSIGffENT
(NOTES 1 ANQ 2)
RESTRICTED TELSET
~
NET.
AH
,
L--
~
,
T
T
"
R
R
A
T
i "
HOLD
L....-
CONN
A (P1)
LEFT
BLOCK
CONN
B (P2)
RIGHT
BLOCK
.-
3
4
13 TO
12]
471A
:4 KTU
1
R
SHOWN FOR
REFEREN CE
ONLY
2
NONRESTRICTED SET
NET.
A1 1
0
~
~
.,
T
T
.,
.,
R
R 400-TYPE
LINE
A C:tRCUIT
.,
~
A
"
HOLD ~
13.
ALTERNATE WIRING ARRANGEMENT
T (CO)
R (CD)
J
TO CD
LINE
NOTES:
1. seE BLOCK DIAGRAM CO VERING
88B4-25 CONN BLK IN FIG. 3.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATED LEADS
PER FIG. 4.
Fig. 29-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 471A KTU (Battery Reversal Toll Restriction Circuit) in 110A
Apparatus Mounting
Page 36
ISS 1, SECTION 518-215-422
6884-25
CONN BlK
KEY TEL SET
PU
LS
~
-
"--
'--
ABC D E F
00000o
R
ROW ABSIIlM'ENT
(NCT£S 1 ANC 21
NET.
CiiNN
T
'-
~
RIGHT
T
.-
-
4
B13
1
B14
23
B30
Yl
-
Y2
-
Y3
~
Y4
~
R
TO 407
OR 424TYPE KTU
3
SHOWN FDR
REFEREN CE
ONLY
B12
BLOCK
22
25
Y5 f - - -
26
CG f - - 14
TTG r--19
RSl r--RS2
I
32
RH f - - -
---:: -.>--
-1J
28
~
B29
TO
B32 47BB
KTU
(NOTE 3)
B33
B21
B26
B38
B36
(NOTE 4)
NOTES:
1. SEE BLOCK OIAGRAM COVERING 66B4-25 CONN BlK IN FIG. 3.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATED LEADS PER FIG. 4.
3. REQUIRES USE OF BOTH A AND B CONNECTORS.
4. DIODE (400J. LOCALLY PROVIDED) MUST BE FURNISHED IN
SYSTEM EQUIPPED WITH DIAL TONE.
Fig. 30-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 4788 KTU (TOUCH-TONE Adapter Circuit) in 110A Apparatus
Mounting
Page 37
SECTION 518-215-422
RESTRICTED TELSET
...!:!.
..!!..
"'
j
NET.
T
A
AH
-
HDLD -
T
NDNRESTRICTED TELSET
PU
~
r--
NET.
,
Al 'I
~
"-
R
R
A
A(U)
A(U)
HOLD ~
FEATURE
W TOLL ALLOWED
X TOLL DENIED
479A
KTU
Y LOOP START
Z
107A
CM
107B
CM
(NOTE 7)
GROUND START
2-DIGIT ABSORBTION
V 1ST DIGIT
2ND DIGIT
ABSORB REPEATEDLY
AND/OR
ABSORB .ONL YONCE
NPA CODE RESTRICTION
R
T
T (CO)
OPTIONS:
OPT
ROW ASSIIlNIENT
(NOTES 1 AMI 2)
T
TO CO[
LINE
UNIT
~
4DD-TYPE
LINE
CIRCUIT
R
PLACE
KS-CONN
(NOTE 3)
G- H
H- J
B- C
E- F
A- B
D- E
A- B
(NOTE 4)
(NOTE 5)
R (CO)
CDNN
A (Pl)
LEFT
BLOCK
CDNN
B (P2)
RIGHT
BLOCK
3
SHDWN FOR
REFERENCE
ONLY
12
4
13
10
5
/
TO
479A
16 KTU
1
14
2
9
NOTES:
1. SEE BLOCK DIAGRAM COVERING 66B4-25 CONN
BLDCK IN FIG. 3.
2. TERMINATE DEDICATED LEADS PER FIG. 4.
3. PLACE KS-21290, Ll CONNECTOR ON TERMINALS
AS INDICATED.
4. PLACE KS-CONN ACROSS LIKE-NUMBERED TERMINALS
AS NUMBER TO BE ABSORBED:
• 1ST DIGIT -IN OPTION FIELD AR/l
• 2ND DIGIT -IN OPTIDN FIELD A/2
5. REMDVE KS-CONN, IF PRDVIDED, FROM TERMINALS
A-B, AND PLACE KS-CDNN ACRDSS LIKE NUMBERED
TERMINALS AS EACH NUMBER TD BE ABSDRBED AS
FDLLDWS:
• REPEATEDLY -IN DPTIDN FIELD AR/l
• DNLY DNCE -IN DPTIDN FIELD A/2
6. PLACE KS-CDNN ACRDSS LIKE-NUMBERED TERMINALS
AS NPA CDDE TD BE RESTRICTED. EACH lD7B
CIRCUIT MDDULE WILL HANDLE TWD NPA CDDES.
7. IF lD7A IS NDT REQUIRED, TWD lD7B MDDULES
CAN BE MDUNTED DN THE 479A KTU FDR A TDTAL
DF FDUR NPA CDDES.
(NOTE 6)
Fig. 31-Nondedicated Lead Connections for 479A KTU (Rotary Dial Toll Restriction Circuit) in 110A Apparatus
Mounting
Page 38
ISS 1, SECTION 518-215-422
RESTRICTED TELSET
LS
PU
r--
;V'
NET
I
Al -.
...
....
~L~
L
RG
RC
SIG
-
,
I
,
FL:-
00
SIG
PU
r--
HOLD
T
R
A
"
'--
l
88B4-25
CONN BLK
~
R
NONRESTRICTED TELSET
LS
Al -.
400-TYPE
LINE
CIRCUIT
HOLD '--
00
NET
T
R
A
T
ROW ASSIGrI'IENT
(NOTES 1, 2 AND 3)
CONN A (Pl)
LEFT BLOCK
T
3
R
4
A
10
A (U)
5
T (CO)
1
TO CO( R (CO)
lINE
2
SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
A12
A13
" Al
" AlB
", A14
" A9
TO
479A
KTU
I
RG
RC
NOTES:
1. SEE BLOCK OIAGR~ COVERING BBB4-25 CONN BlK IN FIG. 3
2. TER"INATE DEDICATED LEADS PER FIG. 4
3. THE 479A KTU REQUIRES BOTH CONNECTORS (A AND B) BUT
CONNECTIONS ARE "AOE VIA CONNECTOR A (Pl) ON lEFT
BLOCK ONLY
Fig. 32-Nondedlcated Lead Connections for 498A KTU and 116A1 CM (Music-On-Hold Circuits) In 110A
Apparatus Mounting
Page 39
SECTION 518-215-422
TABLE C
BASIC AND DELUXE DIAL INTERCOM CONNECTIONS
407- AND 424-TYPE KTUS TO ASSOCIATED AND OPTIONAL KTUS
ASSOCIATED KTU. TO PROVIDE
407.TVPE
CONN BLOCKS
ROW AND COL
424-TYPE
(RIGHT)
8
T
T
3F-B
R
R
4F-B
YI
YI
18F-B
)Y2
Y2
17F-B
Y3
Y3
15F-B
Y4
Y4
28F-B
LR
LR
28F-B
Y5
Y5
29F-B
LA
LA
24F-B
J
J
3IF-B
RSI
RSI
32F-B
FCI
FCI
llF-B
FC2
FC2
lBF-B
FC3
FC3
10F-B
ALI
ALI
2lF-B
AL2
AL2
20F-B
TC
TC
29F-B
D1
Dl
5F-B
TTO
TTO
30F-B
BR
BR
27F-B
LK
LK
23F-B
RH
RH
19F·B
CO
CO
14F·B
BYI
BYI
l2F·B
SS
SS
IF·B
LTI
27F·B
LT2
32F·B
TD
5F·B
B(l·O)
B(l·XO)
R(l-O)
R(l·XO)
• To 407·Type KTU Only.
UNITS
TENS
4228
4228
As Assigned
for Station
Connection
AUDIBLE
TONES
423A
FLASHING
LAMPS
4258
•
"TOUCH
TONE"
4788
PRESET
CONFERENCE
"3A
421A
•
•
•
DSS
421A
·•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
·
•
•
·
·
•
•
•
·
.2OA
•
•
·
··
·•
•
LINE
•
•
*
LONG
•
· •
· ·
•
·
·
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
t
t
t
30F·B
TO
t To 424·Type KTU Only.
Page 40
STA BUSY SEL
ASSIGNMENTS
(LEFTI
A
OPTIONAL KTU.
DELUXE DIAL INTERCOM
8884-25
LEAD
DESIGNATION
KTU
t
t
•
•
•
ISS 1, SECTION 518-215-422
TO 110A
APP I'1TG
88B4-25
CONN BLOCK (RIGHT)
r---'\
I
L._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
~~
ROW ASSIGNMENTS
ROW ASSIGNMENTS
CONN
A (P1)
10 VAC
LG
TO
POWER
SUPPLY
A BAT
A GRD
B BAT
B GRO
37
TO
INTERRUPTER
B4
3B
45
B18
48
B3
47
B17
4B
TO PIO
407C
KTU
TO
POWER SUPPLY
FOR AUOIBLE
SIGNALS
[
RN
-~~
1
>I
>I
>I
>I
>1
>1
>1
) I
) 1
) I
(/)3
(/)4
50
(/)5
~0
(/)6
70
(/)7
8 0
(/)8
90
(/)9
10 0
(/) 10
([)"
13 0
(/) 13
1
I
14 0
15 0
(/) 14
17 )
I
I
16 0
17 0
< 18)
I
18 0
I(
14 )
15)
16 )
I([)
21 ([)
I
> II
> Ii
>I
I
>I
I
> II
>i
2(/)
22 (/)
i
1< 2
I
1< 3
I
,< 4
I
1< 5
I
I( 6
I
I < 7
I
I < 8
I
,< 9
I
1< 10
I
,< "
I
30
(/) 12
I<
I<
I<
o >i
i
I
"0
I
I < 13) I
12 )
B
A
I <
([)2
40
19 0
20
0
I
(/) 15
~
(/) 18
(/) 19
(/) 20
TERM.
STRIP
B
CONN
CONN
20
Fig. 2-259A KTU (MD) Schematic, Arrangement af
Screw Terminals
Page 2
2 Page.
([)I
1(21
12 0
< II
I(
I
TERM.
STRIP
A
TERM.
STRIP
B
<
i
I <
I
1<
I
,<
I
1<
I
I <
I
I <
I
1<
I
I <
I
) I
I
) I
I
) I
I
) I
I
) I
I
12 ) I
I
13 ) 1
I
14
I
I
15 ) I
I
16) I
I
17 ) I
I
18 ) I
I
19
i
>
>
3(/)
23 (/)
4(/)
24 (/)
5(/)
25 (/)
6(/)
26 (/)
7(/)
27 (/)
8(/)
28 (/)
9(/)
29 (/)
10 (/)
30 (/)
II(/)
12 (/)
13 (/)
14 (/)
15 (/)
I
"J
17 (/)
18
0
19 (/)
20
(21
Fig. 3-2591 KTU Schematic, Arrangement of Screw
Terminals
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT&TCo Stondord
SECTION 518-300-417
Issue 1, October 1973
272A KEY TELEPHONE UNIT
IDENTIFICATION
1.
IDENTIFICATION
(a) Purp ose: To provide an auxiliary mounting
for anyone 4-inch, 400-series key telephone
unit (KTU).
(b) Application : lA2 Key Telephone System.
Note: For connection information refer to
Section 518-215-400 to determine pin numbers
used for a particular KTU and make connections
to corresponding terminals of the 272A KTU.
(c)
Ordering Guide
• Unit, Telephone, Key, 272A (Fig. 1)
(d) Design Features
• Screw type termina ls mounted on two
terminal strips designated A and B.
Fig. 1-272A KTU, Reor View
• Equipped with one 914A (40-pin) connector
(Fig . 2) which is factory-wired to the
terminals (Fig. 3) on a terminal per pin
basis.
• Front panel equipped with a retainer for
locking KTUs in place.
• Terminals 21 through 30 of terminal strip
B are vacant and may be used for miscellaneous
connections.
• Mounts in standard equipment cabinets and
apparatus mountings .
© American Telephone and Telegraph Company, 1973
Printed in U.S.A.
Poge 1
SECTION 518-300-417
TERNINAL
STRI' A
9141
CONNECTOR
PINS
TERNINAL
STRIP B
I
I
0
( 0
20
0
( I
21
0
( 2
22
0
( 3
23
0
( 4
24
0
( 5
25 )
0
( 6
26 )
0
( 7
27 )
0
( 8
28 )
0
( 9
29 )
( 10
30
2
0
2
3
0
3
4
0
91 4 A
(4 0 PI N)
CON NECTOR
4
5
0
5
6
0
6
7
0
7
8
0
8
9
0
9
10
0
II
0
0
( II
31
( 12
32
( 13
33
34
( 15
35
( 1&
36
( 17
37
10
30
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
19
( 18
38
20
0
29
0
18
19
0
28
0
17
18
0
27
0
16
17
0
26
0
15
( 14
16
0
25
0
14
15
0
24
0
13
14
0
23
0
12
13
Fig. 2-272A KTU, Front View
22
0
II
12
0
21
0
0
20
( 19
39
0
Fig . 3-272A KTU, Sch emotic o nd Arrong ement of
Screw Termino ls
Poge 2
2 Poges
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
Plant Series
SECTION 518·310·401
Issue 2, January 1967
AT&TCo Standard
227 A (MD) AND 227B KEY TELEPHONE UNITS
AUDIBLE AND VISUAL SIGNALING
IDENTIFICATION AND CONNECTIONS
1.
• Rate t he 227A KTU Manufac ture Discon·
tinued.
GENERAL
This section is r eissued to:
1.01
• Incl ud e t he 227B KTU.
2.
Since this reiss ue covers a gener al revision,
arrows ordinarily used to indi cat e changes
have been omitted.
1.02
IOENTIFICATION
( SE VEN
l - MODULE S) -l
I 3 .1/ 3 2 IN . I
-...-----,-,
400 A
DIOD ES
FACTORY
W IRED
7 IN .
Fig. 1 -
227A (MO) and 227B KTU
(Front View)
Fig. 2 -
227 A (MO) and 2278
KTU (Rear View)
© American Telephone and Telegraph Compan y, 1967
Printed in U .S.A .
Page 1
SECTION 518-310-401
3.
• Operating two or more signals which
reqilire different operating voltages.
PURPOSE
3.01
To serve as a visual and audible signaling
control, and switching relay for key telephone systems.
4.
DESIGN FEATURES
(a) Operates on 14 to 26 volts dc.
(b) 227B KTU - all wire spring relay contacts factory-connected to screw terminals
on back panel.
(c) 227B KTU - (CAl) and (CA2) relay
windings are not commonly strapped within the unit as in the 227A KTU (MD).
(d) Four 400A diodes factory-wired to provide four CAl leads.
5.
APPLICATlON
• lA, lAl, lA2, and 6A key telephone systems.
• 2A communication system.
Fig. 5 - 227 A (MD) or 227B KTU - Multisignal Control for Ringers .
• A power failure feature is provided by
having the common or line signals, with capacitors, connected to the tip and ring of
CO, PBX or private line while relays are
unoperated.
Fig. 6-227A (MD) or 227B KTU-Common
Audible or Station Audible for 6A Key
Telephone System.
Fig. 7 -227A (MD) or 227B KTU - Multisignal Control Circuit for Ringers
Arranged for Combination of Audible
Signal and Visual Signal.
Fig. 8 - 227 A (MD) or 227B KTU - Multisignal Control Circuit for Buzzers or
Bells Arranged for Combination of
Audible Signal with Visual Signal.
Fig. 7 and 8 provide for:
• Key equipment No. lOlA or lOlB.
• Audible signal with locked-in visual signal.
6.
CONNECTION INDEX
• Locked-in visual signal can be released by
manual operation of a SHUNT-DOWN
key at called station.
Fig. 3-227A (MD) or 227B KTU-Auxiliary
Lamp Relay Circuit.
• Used when additional lamps over the maximum permitted for a given circuit are
required.
Fig.4-227A (MD) or 227B KTU-Multisignal Control Circuit for Buzzers,
Bells, or Ringers,
Provides for:
• Using the same audible signal as a line signal and common signal.
Fig. 9-227A KTU (MD) or 227B KTU with
228A or 265A KTU - Method of Connecting 400A Diodes for Additional
CAl Leads.
6.01
Connect CAl leads through 400A diodes
when an audible signal is common to more
than one group of line or signal circuits. This
prevents false operation of audible signals not
common to the same group of line or signal circuits.
6.02
• Associating a common audible signal with
one or more groups of line or signal circuits.
• Operating one or more audible signals
from one line or signal circuit.
Page 2
CA leads may multiple to other CA leads,
and CAl leads may multiple to other CAl
leads if they are common to the same line or
signal circuit.
6.03
For additional information refer to
SD~69294-01.
227A KTU (MOl
ONE REQUIRED PER 3 GROUPS OF 40 LAMPS PER LINE
-
TO POWER
SUPPLY GRO
TO LAMPS IN
KEY TEL SET
OR INDICATOR
[~
LG
CAl
~31
EBM8
•
TO LINE AND
SIGNAL CKT OF
KEY TEL SYSTEM
,
400A
5
L
14
,
ESM6
18
:-
TO POWER
SUPPLY GRD
"4
-=------
5000
W
t
26
t
U
3
:t OR LP
t
SUPPLY
BAt.
TO LAMPS
IN KEY TEL
SET OR
INDtcATOR
.
la
27
LG
14-26V DC
II~I'
TO LINE AND
SIGNAL CKT
OF KEY TEL
SYSTEM
L
N9
2
:tORLPUT.
TOLAII.
] POWER
±OR LP BAT.
SUPPLY
22
I
I
33
0
M4
DIODE
U
400A
DIODE
5000
L
10
-....
37
liS
MIC!J: a
0
23
" "8t ,
,
t
U
TOLAIIP
] POWER
SUPPLY
26
.811~:
114
:!:ORLP BAt.
25
±OR LP SAT.
28
I
0
40
L
20
I
L
0
17
I.
• 811B t,
3'
5000
0
L
] POWER
28
I
LG
V
TO LAII.
25
,
£BM.
+ OR LP BAT.
I
I
I
,,4
2
I
I•
0
U
32
MIC!J : a
34
8
I
5~OO
.... 8t,
: -h 2 .
TO POWER
SUPPLY GRD
37
0
CA2
j400&
L
31
L
U
400A
DIODE
21
SUPPLY
:tOR LP 8AT.
16
,
[:
TO LAII.
] POWER
"4
400A
DIODE
18
9
I
E8M8
TO UNE AND
SIGNAL CKT OF
KEY TEL SYSTEM
14
1,
I
h35
± OR LPBAT.
13
,
6
LG
10
L
liS
0
,
7
MIOti a
30
0
LP BAT.
TO LAMPS
IN KEY TEL
SET OR
INDICATOR
t
400A
DIODE
27
•
0
"
I
I
l~ ~35
TO LINE AND
SIGNAL CKT 0 F L
KEY TEL SYSTEM
± OR
] POWER
SUPPLY
22
I
0
(
20
U
[~ po"
• 8116
t
4
V
TO LAII.
I.
DIODE
24
E8MI
15
-'-0
400A
8
•
L
± OR LP BAT.
EBM6, I
2.
TO LAMPS IN
KEY TEL SET .
OR INDICATOR
17
,
....bL- ~33
L
TO POWER
SUPPLY GRD
I
21
TO LAMPS
IN KEY TEL
SET OR
INDICATOR
TO UNE AND
SIGNAL CKT OF
KEY TEL SYSTEM
£8M8 ' I
p->34
r
12
NOTES:
3
MIOt: a
h38
t--.,3B
CA2
TO POWER
--'
SUPPLY GRD
TO LINE AND
SIGNAL CKT 0 F L
KEY TEL SYSTEM
LP BAT.
16
"'Oti'
~
+ OR
SUPPLY
5000
DIODE
(
] POWER
~
400A
L
TO LAM.
114r
[).lODE
6
TO LAMPS IN
KEY TEL SET
OR INDICATOR
+OR LP BAT.
13
I
I
I
.....
"
"
Ii
I-=-- p..,32
CAl
TO POWER
SUPPLY GRO
MIOti
12
L
2278 KTU
ONE REQUIRED PER 3 GROUPS OF 40 LAMPS PER LINE
la
L
3.
0
40
5000
38
0
Fig_ 3 - 227A (MD) or 2278 KTU-Auxiliary Lamp Relay Circuit
14-26V DC
II
I. CONNECT ALL LAMPS
ASSOCIATED WITH THE
LINE TO THIS FIGURE.
2. CONNECT RELAY GROUND
TO TERMINALS DESIGNATED
LAMP BATTERY ON LINE
AND SIGNAL CIRCUn:.
3. CONNECT L LEAD OF 227 A
OR 8 KTU TO L LEAD OF
LINE AND SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
4. MAXIMUM 20 LAMPS PER
L LEAD.
-:
.
227A KYU (MD)
ID
It
2278 kTU
ONE REQUIRED PER 8 AUDIBLE SIGNAL ARRANGEMENT
ONE REQUIRED PER 8 AUDIBLE SIGNAL ARRANGEMENT
CAl
TO POWER
SUPPLY GRD
BI
TO FIRST [
AUDIBLE
.,
TO SECOND [
.,
BI
AUDIBLE
(
l..,
12
.BM.
3
'"
EBMI
DIODE
DIODE
•
BI
TO FOURTH [
AUDIBLE
(
±
OR IO!SV
I
TO SECOND [
AUDIBLE
V"
I.
I'-...
V
.,
.,
81
~
+T"
MIO
,/
'.M.
OR I05V
TO THIRD [
t I
•
I.
.8M6-.! I
I
Ie
4
M4
400A
•
DIODE
20
BAT. OR
± OR
I05V!
SUPPLY
t
22
TO FOURTH [
U
DIODE
V
AUDIBLE
400.
CA
..,
.,
CAl
TO FIFTH (
AUDIBLE
,
BI
TO SIXTH (
AUDIBLE
r
L
•
DIODE
•
f-....
400A
DIODE
r I-"
l..,
24
81
TO SEVENTH [
AUDIBLE
.,
.,
81
TO EIGHTH [
AUDIBLE
CA
34
2.
r....,
(
27
l..,
1'-...31
30
2
10
L
t ; CI
MID
+I
M'
2.
.8M.
I
I
I'
20
18
!
.8M8
21
2.
BAT. OR
BAT. OR
± OR
8AT. OR
± OR
I05V
±
I05Y
±
± OR
I05V
+
I
,I
2.
"
M4 t
3.
U
BAT. OR
+
OR I05V
±
BAT. OR
+
OR 10SV
±
31*
0
I
32*
0
I
!
'8M.
TO
20
POWER
SUPPLY
BAT. OR
±
OR 10SV
±
OR 10SV
±
OR I05V
±
I
22
1"-.34
81
L
('
7
CA
' a
BAT. OR
4,6++---=L:'::'G
TO LAMP
7
CA
l~OOA
DIODE
400A
DIODE * --::-:-..
CAl
TO SIGNAL
KEY ASSOCIATED
SK
WITH_COMB.
OF AUDIBLE
SIG AND
L
LAMP SI. [
TO
:uo;:~y
FOO
TO LAMP
DIODE
..
f-t.
~
TO SIGNAL KEY'
J*
RESISTOR
GRD
L...._ _--=S=..D
[~
TO BllZZEO
ASSOCIATEO W I T H @
COMBINATION OF
AN~U~:~~ ~II~~~
EBMS
33
0
10
23
t I
2.
' 'COl
2.
LG
TO
POWER
SUPPLY
FOO
LAMPS
EaMa! I
I
14-2SV
oc
40
AUDIBLE SIGNAL
AND LAMP SIGNAL
POWER
SUPPLY
2a
'-I-+--9----=-tf"---'~H-"-S_""~"~:~0-3,4-1G-----i.
A~~~~~~T~O:I~~ ",SK"'-t:t:l--j::~~~~_--+-D
105V±
BAT.OR±
3l
MS
I
27
-"'1"
22
M1Dt:
3.
*
"
20
.k'o..
*
LG
0
105V±
UnL
.OOA
LAMPS
32
17
I
I
M4
•
2a
-400A ,
DIODE
1
ESM.! I
CAl
(NOTE 2)
30
TO BUZZER [
ASSOCIATED
WITH COMB.
OF AUDIBLE
SIGNAL AND
LAMP SIGNAL
...!L-
r
2
M.
3'
t
IillL
..
.:;'.,
01
.!. ORBAT.I
DIRECT
. OPERATION
OF BUZZER
OF COMB. SIG
NOTES:
I
'~O"
'r@ ~t~
o
EBMe
34
~~>- h
®
37
24
21
BI
X
POWER
SUPPLY
10~V±
0
EaMa! I
01
W
BAT. OR ±
31
u[lL
MIDt
FEATURE
INDIRECT
OPERATION
OF BUZZER
OF COMB. SIG
105V±
M4
I
EBMS
M'' l
OPTION
16
I
I
5t~OOA
5
DIODE
01
14
EaM6! I
20
L
.
"
13
I
TO SECOND [
BUZZER
OR BELL
17
MIO
0
EBMI! I
I.
01
16
EBMS
al
3
I
EaM6
MIO
CAl
40
I I
1270
KS~14603.
L2A
RESISTOR
*
GRD)
~.
±OO BAT.
400A
...:O::.I_ _.:D""Oo.:D;:E..::*'--'
Fig. 8 -. 227A (MD) or 2278 KTU -- Multisignal Control Circuit for Buzzen or
Bells Arranged for Combination of Audible Signal with Visual Signal
14-26V
DC
(NOTE 2)
I. W OPTION USE THIRD AND/OR
FOURTH AUDIBLE CIRCUIT.
2, TO SIGNAL KEY ASSOCIATED
WITH COMBINATION OF
AUDIBLE SIGNAL ARRANGED
TO SHUNT DOWN LOCKED IN
LAMP SIGNAL "MANUALLY
WHEN CALL IS ANSWERED.
LOOP RESISTANCE SHALL
NOT EXCEED 6.5 OHMS.
FURNISHED I.OCALLY
*
,Ie:
n
~
o
z
-1-:
UI
§
227A
KTU (MOl
2278 KTU
2284 OR 265A KTU
CAl
~ I--
I
400A
DIODE
_C~
2
021
*
400A
DIODE
*
012-
\
022
(STRAP)
400A
DIODE
~
"r ~
all
~.
*
01'
.21-
01
CAl
014
400A
DIODE
(NOTE .)
~ 1---<5
\
M
~ 1---<6
018
M
.023
024
.4
CA
02
012
022
15
0
~
CAl
O.
01.
02.
330
CAl
o.
CAl
*
~ 1- 8
ll~
.J
2.
CA
~
'00~A,400A
DIODE
*
CA
4
:..t
II
MID
18
0
E8M8
*
CA
05
015
025
~ 1--9
'6
CAl
06
018
020
.60
~
027
.7
CAl
.J
020
27
1,7
400A A,400A
DIODE
DIODE
.OOA
DIODE
*
'8
07
*
CA
o.
CA
018
*
02.
i :'
029
CAl
t
'9
(NOTE I)
OS
019
02S
29
0
24
a
CA
120
*'0
/\
J
L
U
MS
MIO
EBM8
EBMO
0
,,2
M4
17
0
19
0
20
0
22
0
••
0
10
500.0
.7
t :'
f:•
,I
30
010
030 400
(NOTE .)
'90
CAl
400A
DIODES
I Q
M4
DIODE
(NOTE.,
9
a
CAl
Q
EBM6
.EL- /J ~~~~
27
*
'2
0
t :
'80
400A
DIODE
CAl
010
I
500.0
7
~ 400A
81
3. 400A DIODE FURNISHED WIRED AS
SHOWN.
*
0
i:
~l
2J
*
018
028
(STRAP)
019
"
I
350
NOTES:
I. DO NOT USE TERMINALS 29 AND 30 FOR
ANY CONNECTIONS •
2. STRAP NEGATIVE END OF 400A DIODE
TO OPERATING LEAD OF RELAY.
16
0
L
CA2
.5
14
0
M'
U
a
0
400A
DIODE
026
Q
,
400A
DIODE
(NOTE 3)
400A
DIODE
(NOTE 3)
I
••J
(NOTE I)
400A
DIODE
(NOTE .)
"0
bG '
55t
~
DIODE
400A
DIODE
I
I
.6
8
.OOA
DIODE
(NOTE ')
E8MG
0
II
0
i:
.20
CAl
017
E8Me
0
CAl
~ 1--7
Q
•
I,
I
-I
••
t:
i:
MtO
12
400A
DIODE M
01.
025
(STRAP)
400A
DIODE
(NOTE ')
•8
0
400Aj\~00A
DIODE
DIODE
CA
CAl
~ 1---<4
J
CAl
.,1
21
II
Q
i:
t
U
a
2'
a
25
0
28
0
I
28
0
I
I
39
0
Q
L
40
5000.
.0."
."a
aIG
III
II
-
.0
Fig. 9 -
227A KTU (MD) or 227B KTU with 228A or 265A KTU Connecting 400ADiodes for Additional CAl Leads
Method of
PROVIDE LOCALLY.
BELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
Plant Series
SECTION 518-310-405
Issue 5, April 1970
AT&TCo Standard
STATION LINE CONCENTRATORS
235- AND 236-TYPE KEY TELEPHONE UNITS
IDENTIFICATION AND CONNECTIONS
1.
1.01
GENERAL
ORDERING GUIDE
This section is reissued to:
Unit, Telephone, Key, 235B
.Revise option information in Fig. 3, 4, 5,
and 6
Unit, Telephone, Key, 236B
(a)
.Add Table A
Optional Components (ordered and installed
separately)
When a 446F diode and 185A network are
added to the 235A (MD) or 236A (MD) KTU
they become identical to the 235B and 236B KTUs,
respectively (Fig. 1 and 2).
.Diode, 446F for 235A (MD) and 236A (MD)
KTU
2.
.Diode, 400(*) for 235A (MD) and 236A (MD)
KTU
.P-90D033 Printed Wiring Board Assembly
1.02
IDENTIFICATION
.N etwork, 185A for 235A (MD) and 236A
(MD) KTU
PURPOSE
.To reduce the number of conductors required
to connect key system line circuit units and
CALL DIRECTOR® concentrator telephone
sets or large capacity 400-type key mountings
• Add type suffix
DESIGN FEATURES
• Circuitry for connecting a common transmission
pair and control lead through a combination
of two switching relays to the selected line
circuit. Refer to Table A for relay operating
combinations .
APPLICATION
• Used with lAl, lA2, or 6A Key Telephone
Systems.
.Option of common audible or individual line
ringer.
.A 235B KTU can be used as a station line
concentrator for a maximum of 18 line
circuits in conjunction with 634-, 638-, or
their equivalent TOUCH-TONE type CALL
DIRECTOR telephone sets. A 236B KTU
can be used for a maximum of 30 lines with
635-,639-, or their equivalent TOUCH-TONE
type sets or 400-type key mountings. More
than one 236B KTU may be required with
larger 400-type key mountings where the
number of lines exceed 30, with a maximum
of 120 lines. Station line concentrator units
must be supplied on a per station basis.
.Power failure option when common audible
is not required.
.Common audible with power failure.
3.
CONNECTIONS
All lamp control, speakerphone, and Al·leads
from CALL DIRECTOR set or 400-type key
mountings bypass station concentrator units and
are wired directly to the station line unit.
3.01
© American Telephone and Telegraph Company, 1970
Printed in U.S.A.
Poge 1
SECTION 518-310-405
~r----- 6 - 3/32
t----
"------Jl
8-2 3 /32"
6-511 6 "
23 5-TY PE KTU
236 - TYPE KTU
Fig . l - Statian line Cancentratar KTUs, Frant View
235- TYPE
KTU
236- TYPE KTU
Fig. 2-Statian Line Cancentratar KTUs Rear View
Page 2
ISS 5, SECTION 518-310-405
.TABLE At
COMBINATIONS OF RELAYS OPERATED IN STATION
LINE CONCENTRATOR WHEN ASSOCIATED KEY POSITION IS OPERATED
KEY
POS
(NOTE)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
RELAYS
236A OR B KTU
A
B
•
•
•
•
30
CAl
D
E
235A OR B KTU
F
G
H
J
•
•
•
•
•
B
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
G
•
•
•
•
•
F
•
•
•
•
E
•
•
•
•
D
•
•
•
C
•
•
•
A
•
•
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
C
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
i
• I
•
•
Note: Key Mountings with more than 30 pick-up key positions would require additional 236-type
KTUs and relay combinations would be identical for each 30 succeeding key positions.
Page 3
SECTION 518-310-405
When the busy lamp feature is furnished in
CALL DIRECTOR telephone sets equipped
with headset jacks (638-, 639-, and equivalent
TOUCH-TONE types), a P-90D033 Printed Wiring
Board Assembly must be added to the 235- or
236-type KTU as shown in Fig. 4 or 6.
3.02
Modification of 235A and 236A KTUs are
required when used with 400D KTUs. The
modification prevents a false-hold condition or
damage to the Q3 transistor in the 400D KTU
caused by large transient voltages occurring when
the associated concentrator type CALL DIRECTOR
set goes on-hook. Modification of concentrator
units is not required when used with 1A1 KTS,
or 400B or C KTUs in 1A2 KTS.
3.03
CONNECTION INDEX
Table B-Options
Fig. 3-Connections for 235-Type KTU When
Used With 634-, 635-, and Their
Equivalent TOUCH-TONE Telephone
Sets
Fig. 4-Connections for 235-Type KTU When
Used With 638-, 639-, and Their
Equivalent TOUCH-TONE Telephone
Sets and P-90D033 Printed Wiring
Board Assembly.
Page 4
Fig. 5 -Connections for 236-Type KTU When
Used With 634-, 635-, and Their
Equivalent TOUCH-TONE Telephone
Sets
Fig. 6-Connections for 236-Type KTU When
Used With 638-, 639-, and Their
Equivalent TOUCH-TONE Telephone
Sets
For other information, refer to:
DRAWING
TITLE
SD and CD-69498-01(Key Telephone System No.
6A, 1A1, and 1A2, Station Line
Concentrator, 634-, 635-, 1634-,
and 1635-Type Telephone Set
Circuits)
SD and CD-69499-01(Key Telephone System No.
1A1, 1A2, and 6A Station Line
Concentrator Key and Telephone
Circuit, 638-, 1638-, 639-, and
1639-Type Telephone Sets)
SD and CD-69513-01(Key Telephone System No.
1A2, CO, or PBX Line Circuits)
SD and CD-69580-01(Key Telephone System No.
1A1 or 1A2, Station Busy Lamp
Circuit)
ISS 5, SECTION 518-310-405
TABLE B
OPTIONS
KTU
235
236
B
A
..
....
t;
ZZ
00
ZZ
00
ZZ
00
u~
u~
u~
...... .. .~ ...... .....
........
x
.... x
........
x
.....x...
x ..
x ..
x....
..
x ..
t;
FEATURE
ZZ
00
u~
5~
.... ~
~~
e( ....
,.. ifi
~~
0 ....
6~
....
....
","
~
~
~~
~~
I"~
... ~
.
e( ....
~
... e(
.. >
..... ~~
.....
,$5
... 0
e( ....
"'~
"'e(
",'"
0 ....
.... ~
~~
e( ....
o:~
"'e(
....
....::: .... .. . .
ZZ
00
~;E
xIj~
..
",'"
","
.... ~
....
u~
0 ....
~~
e( ....
I"~
"'~
...
e(
"'>
,"5
"'>
,$5
..
~
ZZ
00
x ..
"'>
,"5
;lIo
...
B
A
u~
0 ....
~
~
ZZ
00
....
.... x
x ..
u~
",'"
0 ....
....
~
Q>Z ....
c>Z ....
,.. ffi
,.. a:i
.
e( ....
~
~~
..... ...... ~~
.....
~o
~
ZZ
00
...
... 0
ljiE
x ..
u~
",'"
0 ....
....~
~~
..,.. ffi
... .. ....
e( ....
"'~
"'e(
e( ....
~
... e(
"'>
,":;
;lIo
"'>
,":;
~o
Common Audible
X
X
X
X
y
y
y
y
Power Failure
W
W
W
W
Z
Z
Z
Z
Common Audible With Power Failure
J
H
J
H
K
J
K
J
With Station Busy Lamp Circuit
M
G
M
G
M
G
M
G
Without Station Busy Lamp Circuit
E
F
-
-
E
F
-
-
Individual Line Signaling
V
V
V
V
T
T
T
T
Not Associated With 400D KTU
F
B
-
-
F
B
-
-
Associated With 400D KTU in No. lA2 KTS
G
E
-
-
G
E
-
-
29 Lines With Hold
-
-
-
-
R
K
R
K
-
-
-
N
M
N
M
30 Lines Without Hold
Page 5
SECTION 518-310-405
235 A (MO) KlU
I
235 B KTU
[:
[: •,
T
:
:
[:
[:
[:
[:
[:
TO
IAt ,tAl
OR SA
KTS LINE
I RCUll
e
8
10 [
"
:
"
]
LINE
}.
}.
}s
}S
l·
12
12
12
13
I.
"
15
15 R
15
I.
I. A ]17
I.
I. T
17
18
17 T
18:
I.
19
:
13
I.
J
17
"
18
22
CE
10
CF
20
CO
23
10" CALL
DIRECTOR" SET
TT
2'
}.
l'
T }.
30
21
CE
CF
CO
TT
TO "CALL DIRECTOR" SET
TR
TR
25
TA
2.
®
27
28
,.
~
81.
~ ~
2.
TO STA BSY LAMP
]
TO "CALL
DIRECTOR" SET
TO INO LINE
5 I Gel Reu IT
®~J
TO INO LINE
T
SIG CIRCUIT
"
32
J
33
0RI OR CAl
IAI 1A2
::- ®RI OR CAlOR 'SA' KTS
3'
35
::-@
36
)'@
3.
LINE
I.
21
38
J
13
;:-
,
37
12 [
T
"
[:
[
[
TS8
TS8
TSA
LINE
38
34
35
28
2.
@
.......:
T
SIG CIRCUIT
]
·.']
TO LINE FOR USE
IN POWER FAI LURE
B GRD
TO POWER SUPPLY
GRD OR RG
.® 9Al,:tOR ± I05V
CD t
RI-8Z-RG
IAI, tA2.oR 6A
KTS SIG CIRCUIT
NOTE:
THE 44,6F DIODE (®OPTIONl PROVIDES
PROTECTION TO THE 40Q'-TYPE KTU AND ALSO
PREVENTS FALSE BUSY LAMP INDICATION .
• Fig. 3-Connections For 235-Type KTU When Used With 634-. 635- and Their Equivalent TOUCH-TONE
Telephone Sets.
Page 6
ISS 5, SECTION 518-310-405
235A {MOl KTU
235B KTU
TSA
TSB
TS8
:JI3
"
A
2[:
: }4
:}4
3 [ :
:},
LINE [
I
T
"
A
4 [ :
,
TO IAI,IA2
OR 6A KTS
LINE CIRCUITS
12
12
13
13
[: ::I.
I.
I.
"
12
13
:~
I.
18
: }8
I.
CE
.[: 2.~:
10 [ :
(y)
;~
CF
CG
TT
TT
22
TO "CALL
DIRECTOR" SET
T"
81
BI
@
RI
>---
®L--1!...
TO
FIG.
T
48
TO "CALL
DIRECTOR" SET
(NOTE J)
[: ::
@
@
@
@
3.
12 [ :
RI OR CAl
T
R
J
TO IND LINE
SIG CIRCUIT
30
40
TO
TO STA
FIG.
J
BUSY LAMP
48
JAI, IA2 OR 6A
KTS SIG CKT
J
TO LINE FOR
USE IN PWR
FAILURE
7~~~
::::]
[~: ~~
CD
8L
RI OR CAl
::
3.
CC
TO "CALL
DIRECTOR" SET
TR
TA
33
"
CE
CG
30
2.
: }8
10
CF
20
::
: }7
17
21
8 [:
:}.
IS
:}7
10
23
TO IAI,IA2
OR 6A KTS
LINE CIRCUIT
14
17
18
13
:},
TO IAI,IA2
OR 6A KTS
LINE CIRCUIT
14
.[: ::I.
7 [:
:}.
T ] LINE
4000 KTU
446F
DIODE
(NOTE 2)
TO
FIG
48
~ ;O='-----'!.~'- ~~~~~ER
G:!>=@
E~
~E
37
I
185A
@
(Y)
NET.
~
-'-''----~
-,(",8L,-,)_ _ _~
~-,("O),-_ _ _
®
®
TA
(NOTE J)
BL
@
TO "CALL
DIRECTOR" SET
TO STA
BUSY LAMP
NOTES:
I.
IF P-90D033 PRINTED WIRING BOARD ASSEMBLY
IS NOT PROVIDED, TERMINATE "BL" LEAD ON
TERMINAL 39B.
2.
THE 446F DIODE
OPTION} PROVIDES
PROTECTION TO THE 400-TYPE KTU AND ALSO
PREVENTS FALSE BUSY LAMP INDICATION.
*
FIG.4B
P-90D033 PRINTED WIRING
BOARD ASSEMBLY
{®
D-1614B8 CONNECTOR.
®
0
RI OR CAl
1
~
~
CE!)
RI OR CAl
T
R
J
IAI,IA2 OR
;~G K6~RCU IT
J
TO LINE FOR
USE IN PWR
FAILURE
.; GRD :R::: J~~p~~~ER
®
BAT., + OR +105V
tl®
RI-BZ-RC
~~'~;S OR
SIG CIRCUIT
tFig. 4-Connections for 235-Type KTU When Used With 638-, 639- and Their Equivalent TOUCH-TONE
Telephone Sets and P-90D033 Printed Wiring Board Assembly.
Page 7
SECTION 518-310-405
236 A (MO) KTU
236 B KTU
TSA
LINE
I
TS6
[T I
I
13
A
T
R
J
A
14
4
:
J
[:
7
15
7
:
J
[::;
16 [ :
2.
J
27
KTS LINE
CIRCUIT
:; : ] 26
I.
22
I. [: :;
21,
23
23
OR 6A
KTS LINE
CIRCUIT
2.
13
I.
:: : J 30
30
10')-_----:~-----"C"--J
r---=_®_R_
TO "CALL
24
RI
25
20[:::
26
26
27
28
21 [ :
~:
2'
29
31
32
22 [ :
33
~
33
34
35
23 [ :
36
:
37
38
24 [ :
3'
TYPE
MOUNTINGS
NOTE:
r
CD
:
3.
TO "CALL [CE
DIRECTOR"
CF
20
OR 400 TYPE
MOUNTINGS
30
40
CG
CH
10
20
DIRECTOR" SET
OR 400 - TYPE
'-'="""+>o",-l'--"-!-
KEY MOUNTINGS
~
~
®
R
~:'
®
T
L---_-+R"--
~
@j ~~
(£)
6L
RI- CAl
) TO INO
LINE S IG
CIRCUIT
~J
~
@
T
'KZ'
~
10
CC
IAI,IA2
KTS LINE
CIRCUIT
::I. : J
16
:
TO
OR 6A
I. [: ::
I.
17 [ :
TO
IAI,IA2
21
OR 400-
27
A
OR 6A
:::]2'
I.I.
C6
:]
:::]2'
I.
17
TO "CALL
7
TO
IAI,IA2
2.
::
16
DIRECTOR"
:
12
13
14
15
10
J
4
:;
13
13
CIRCUIT
T JLINE
25
R
A
4
TO
IAI, tA2
OR SA
KTS LINE
I
LINE
25
[:
T
TSC
TSC
LINE
R
TOSTA
6usr LAMP
IAl t lA20R 6A
SIG. CIRCUIT
J
TO LINE FOR
USE IN PWR FAIL
rKY';-::~ J
30
~
40
BAT± I05V
RI-BZ-RC
TO POWER
SUPPLY
IAI, IA2 OR
6A KTS SIG
CIRCUIT
(®
THE 446F DIODE
OPTION) PROVIDES
PROTECT I ON TO THE 400- TYPE KTU AND
ALSO PREVENTS FALSE BUSY LAMP INDICATION.
Hig. 5-Connections for 236-Type KTU When Used With 634-, 635- and Their Equivalent TOUCH-TONE
Telephone Sets.
Page 8
ISS 5, SECTION 518-310-405
236 A (MOl KTU
236 B KTU
Tsa
1SC
1SC
I 1JUNE
"
I
25
:}.
A
7:}7
TO
IAI,IA2
:~ : J2.
OR 6A
KTS LINE
CIRCUIT
"
"
12
13
10
IAI,IA2
OR 6A
KTS LINE
CIRCUIT
IAI,IA2
OR 6A
KTS LINE
CIRCUIT
25
: ] 2.
}7
TO
' ] LINE
"
A
'I.,: : ]29
:]
28
A
:::]29
I.
: : ]'0
I. : ] '0
19
10l-_~~_-,C",J
19
CJ
21
~
22
TO "CALL
>=+_,,"'-.1
;-,....,=rl-~
~~R~~:~~'~::T
MOUNTING
25
RI
TO "CALL
DIRECTOR" SET
OR 400-TYPE
MOUNTING
SUPPLY
~
®
(1)
TO "CALL
DIRECTOR"
OR 400TYPE
MOUNTINGS
[CA
CB
10
20
CC
CO
30
40
@
@
TOSTA
BSY LAMP
RI-CAIJIAI'IA2 OR
RI-CAI
6A SIG
T
R
TO "CALL DIRECTOR" SET
OR 4DO-TYPE MOUNTING
~~~~~:
::j~;~E:AIL
] FOR USE IN
~ SUPPLY
Rl-BZ RC
IAI,IA2
OR 6A
KTS SIG
CIRCUIT
NOTE:
THE 446F DtOOE (@OPTIONS PROVIDES
PROTECTION TO THE 400-TYPE KTU AND
ALSO PREVENTS FALSE BUSY LAMP INDICATION)
IAI, IA2 OR 6A KTS
SIG CIRCUIT
tFig. 6-Connections for 236-Type KTU When Used With 638-, 639- and Their Equivalent TOUCH-To'NE
Telephone Sets.
Page 9
9 Pages
IELL SYSTEM PRACTICES
AT&TCo Standard
SECTION 518-310-407
Illu. 8, May 1974
KEY TELEPHONE UNIT
237-TYPE
IDENTIFICATION, OPERATION, AND CONNECTIONS
1.
1.01
GENERAL
This section is reissued to:
• Delete Speakerphone System No. lA and
1A1 connections
• Add Speakerphone System No. 4A connections
to Fig. 2, 3, and 4.
2.
IDENTIFICATION
PURPOSE
6 - 15/1 6 IN.
.The 237-type key telephone unit (KTU)
(Fig. 1) provides for bridging of two lines
for a 3-way conference in the following arrangements:
2.01
• A central office (CO) line and a PBX line
• Two PBX lines or two CO lines
Note: Transmission quality cannot be
guaranteed when two CO lines are bridged.
• A CO or PBX line and an intercom line .•
APPLICATION
• . CO or PBX lines used in Key Telephone
System No. lA, 1A1, or 1A2.•
Fig. 1-2371 K.y T.I.phan. Unit
• Circuit may be controlled by two stations
when diode protection is locally furnished.
DESIGN FEATURES
• .Circuit can be operated by exclusion switch,
external nonlocking key, or converted line
pickup key.
• Either control station can disconnect from
conference leaving two parties to continue
conference.
• Circuit busy lamp when line pickup key is
used.
• Compatible with speakerphone.
• Control station can leave conference by
placing line on hold and remaining off-hook,
allowing other parties to continue conversation
without transmission loss.
• Circuit is arranged to cancel conference
when handset is placed on-hook or speakerphone
is returned to OFF.
© American Telephone and Telegraph Company, 1974
Printed in U.S.A.
Pag.1
SECTION 518-310-407
• One of the conference lines may be disconnected
by returning exclusion key to normal or by
operating the nonlocking key.•
Note: The control party can remain connected
to either line after the conference has been
released by depressing the pickup key for
the line which is to remain connected, and
momentarily operating the nonlocking key or
restoring the exclusion key to normal.
• No operator assistance necessary.
3.
METHOD OF OPERATION
4.
3.01
CONNECTIONS
Initiating a Conference Call:
When a nonlocking key is used to control
the bridging circuit, a locally provided
KS-15724, List 1 diode (or equivalent) must be
installed in the A lead of the control station set.
For KS-15724 diode connections, refer to "Station
Busy Lamp" option for the particular set in the
associated connection section. Failure to install
the diode may cause damage to transistor Q3, a
false hold condition, or both, in the 400D KTU line
circuit. These conditions are caused when the
control station goes on-hook after a conference is
completed.
4.01
(1) Establish a call (either an incoming or
outgoing call) on either of the lines associated
with the bridging circuit.
(2) Place call on HOLD.
Note: Under certain conditions, it is possible
to establish a call on the other line without
placing the first call on HOLD. This is
undesirable since the first party hears the
dialing signals which are intolerably loud under
these conditions.
Two-Station Control
(3) Establish a call on the other line associated
with the bridging circuit.
(4) Operate the bridging key when both parties
are available, thereby conferencing both
lines.
3.02
4.02
When two stations are connected to the
bridging circuit, each of the station sets may
independently or jointly control the circuit. When
the circuit is connected to two station sets, operation
is the same as when connected to only one station
set.
Leaving a Conference Call (Control Party
Only):
Note: When two station sets are to be
provided with bridging circuit control by using
nonlocking keys, two KS-15724, List 1 (or
equivalent) diodes must be locally supplied
and connected as shown in Fig. 4.
(1) Operate the hold key.
(2) Operate a third pickup key to answer or
establish a call on another line.
4.03
Note: The control party may return to the
conference by reoperating either of the two
associated pickup keys. However, when a
conference is placed on HOLD, transmission
losses are introduced by the holding bridge
which may prevent the remaining conferees
from continuing the conference until the control
party returns.
3.03
Releasing a Conference Call:
(1) Control party-Place handset on-hook or
When one of the two control stations is using
the bridging circuit and the other station
goes off-hook, the BL leads from each telephone
set will provide a locking path for the operated
circuit. If the first station terminates the call
before the second station, the nonlocking control
key on the telephone set at the first station must
be momentarily operated to release the bridging
circuit.
4.04
When one station is using the bridging circuit
and the other station is not in use, the circuit
will release when the station goes on-hook or the
speakerphone is turned off.
(2) Return manual exclusion key to normal or
4.05
(3) Operate speakerphone OFF button.
Page 2
When a conference call is in a held condition,
the bridging circuit remains operated.
ISS 8, SECTION 518-3111-407
Note: To minimize transmission losses, each
line associated with the 237A or B key telephone
unit should be connected to the same type
line equipment. This is necessary due to the
differences in design of holding circuits.
4.06
Connection Index
Fig. 2-237 A (MD) KTU, Schematic and
Connections
Fig. 3-237B KTU, Schematic and Connections
Fig. 4-AG and BL Lead Connections for
2-Station Control.
Page 3
SECTION 518-310-407
TO CO OR PBX CKT
ASSOC WITH
SECOND LI NE
TO SECOND LINE
I N TEL SET ASSOC
WITH B~IDGING
CKT (NOTE 2)
TO KTS LI NE CKT
FOR SECOND LI NE
(NOTE 2)
TO LAMP
[:
[:
B BAT.
B GRD
"-
If
S
_Ii
"
I
~
~
II
10
5
~
B
'I
II
5
@
~
R
.®
9
7
5
A
TO KTS LINE
CKT FOR FIRST
LINE (NOTE 2)
J
T
II
TO FIRST LINE
IN TEL SET
~
1+
s
13
5
17
18
.®
~
CD
4
5
2
ASSOC WITH
BRIDGI NG CKT
(NOTE I AND 2)
R
3
6
~
@
T
I
~
®
,i
~
"
4
)!
[~:
--LB
s
~
[~~
LG
TO POWER SU PPL Y
237A (MD) KTU
3!
A
5 OR 51
r-
~
10
2fC
10
H
C
~
14
16
~
~-20
~
19
B
20
B
(NOTE 4)
-20
~
I'
;;
<2>
24
<2>
6
~
15
25
C 6
<2>
26
27
28
29
30
<2>
<2> <2>
<2>
<2>
5
~r;®;=!
l-
Q)
:::>
:::>
I-
l-
II>
Q)
Q)
:::>
I-
Q)
:::>
l-
Q)
C)
l-
I-
II>
NI
N
N
N
N
CD
N
C)
I-
l-
I-
I
Q)
co:
len
en
I
en
....I
I
en
l-
en
II>
;:
I
I
Q)
I-
....
CD
l-
I-
en
en
en
I
CiiI
II>
II>
II>
l-
I-
I-
II>
I
N
I
C)
en
II>
en
Q)
en
484A KTU
J1
8
N
....
:z
w
'"zw
II>
-'
-'
-'
I
....
CD
I
I
zw
....
....
...
-'
Q)
....
I
In
co
N
w
z
....
-'
I
. . - 488A KTU_
'"'"
J7~ J81
J9IJ10IJ11IJ12IJ13IJ14IJ151J161J171J18
8 8 8 8 8 8 B 8 8 8 8 J1981 J2181 J2381 J258
J2 J3 J4 J5 J61
8 8 8 8 8 8
206A
POWER
UNIT
484A
485A
486A
487 A
KTU-STA TION CIRCUIT
KTU-CONTROLLER CIRCUIT
KTU-SERVICE CIRCUIT
KTU-BA TTERY FEEO CIRCUIT
488A KTU-LINE INTERFACE CIRCUIT
489A KTU-TOUCH- TONE OECOOER
CIRCUIT
KS-21651 •L4-FUSE BOARO
A. 572A 1 KSU-FRONT VIEW
TERMINAL
8LOCK\
/
1
---
jOVERRIDE
STATIONS
SWITCH
PAGING
ACCESS
SWITCH
~
~
~~~'1~~~~~~~~~~.
206A
POWER
UNIT
POWER
CONNECTOR
-l
I
I
»
B. 572A1 KSU-REAR VIEW
Fig. I-Layout of 572A 1 KSU
restored will be out of service until they go
on-hook momentarily.
B.
memory, timing circuits, and the -lOV voltage
regulator. The 485A KTU is installed in J2.
485A KTU-Controller Circuit
C.
The controller circuit processes the calls
and features through the system. Contained
on the board are the central processing unit,
486A KTU-System Service Circuit
2.15
Page 6
2.16
The service circuit performs the following
functions.
ISS 1, SECTION 518-411-100
TABLE 0
6B KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM OPTIONS
OPTION
A - Continuous
Ring
OPTION PLUG OR SWITCH POSITION
KTU
484A
(Note 1)
B-C (1st and 2nd stations)
E-F (3rd and 4th stations)
B - Interrupted
Ring
C - Single-spurt
Audible Ringback
486A
(Note 2)
D - Repeated Audible
Ringback
E - Fast Disconnect
(CSBR)
H - With Paging
Access
J - Two Station Override
K - Ten Station Override
A-B, D-E
B-C, E-F
B-C (1st Circuit)
E-F (2nd Circuit)
488A
F - Slow Disconnect
(ESS Office)
G - Without Paging
Access
A-B (1st and 2nd stations)
D-E (3rd and 4th stations)
A-B (1st Circuit)
D-E (2nd Circuit)
Paging
Access
Switch
(Note 3)
Override
Switch
(Note 3)
Switch Off (Factory-provided)
Switch ON
"10 & 11" (Factory-provided)
"10-19"
Notes:
1. If HF AI is provided, install option A for station involved. If one of
paired circuits has option A, other stations will have it
2. If any station has HF AI, system must have option C.
3. The Paging Access and Override Option switches are located on the rear
of the 572A1 KSU.
• Generates required system tones
and lamp wink, and also sets other system
timing standards.
• Switches the tones to the talking links
• Interfaces the control signals from the line
and station circuits to the controller
Refer to Table B for an outline of the tones used
in the 6B KTS. The 486A KTU is installed in J3.
D.
• Switches the TOUCH-TONE receiver to the
talking links as required
• The timing generator produces timing signals
required by the system, such as lamp flash
487A KTU-Battery Feed Circuit
Each 487A KTU provides the dc voltages
for two links. The KTU for the first two
links is installed in J4; if a third and fourth link
is provided, another KTU must be installed in J5.
2.17
Page 7
SECTION S18-411- 100
The 487A KTU also provides an LED for call
supervision and dial pulse detection.
E.
488A KTU-Line Interface Circuit
The 488A KTU provides limited access to
the CO/PBX lines. One 488A KTU is
required for each two lines to perform the following
functions:
2.18
The plugs accept A25B connector cables to provide
connections between the backboard and the 572Al
KSU. Fig. 2 shows the layout of the 184Cl
backboard and the plugs to be used in connecting
to the 572Al KSU. All station connections and
the A and lamp leads from the station side of the
line circuits are made on the terminal blocks of
the 184Cl backboard. Tip and ring of the CO/PBX
lines (from ahead of the line circuit) are fed through
a separate cable to P13 on the KSU.
• Isolate the 6B KTS from CO/PBX line
potentials
3.
• Detect and acknowledge supervisory signals
from the line
• Transfer control information on the A and
L leads from the CO/PBX line circuit to
the controller circuit.
The 488A KTUs are installed in jacks J19, J21,
J23, and J25, as required. These KTUs occupy
double-width jack positions.
F.
489A KTU- TOUCH-TONE Decoder Circuit
The 489A KTU performs the function of
interpreting the tone address signals from
the station dial. The frequency detectors of the
489A KTU convert the information to bits which
are processed by the controller circuit. The
controller resets the TOUCH-TONE receiver after
each dialed, digit in preparation for subsequent
dialing. The optional 489A KTU is installed in J1.
2.19
INSTALLATION
ORDERING GUIDE
Basic System
• Unit, Key Service, 572Al-one required per
system. Where desired, the 572Al KSU
can be mounted in a 16C apparatus mounting
with a 117C cover. These items must be
separately ordered.
• Backboard, 184Cl-equipped with one
14A2-125 terminal block. Order one per
system when yellow field of centralized
system is not used. Has terminations for
8 CO/PBX lines (A and L leads) and 20
stations.
• Block, Terminal, 14A2-125-order one to
add additional 25 stations to 184Cl backboard.
Order second block to extend number of
stations over 45.
184Cl BACKBOARD
The optional 184Cl backboard consists of a
yellow metal backboard equipped with a
14A2-125 terminal block, providing terminations
for 8 CO/PBX lines and 20 stations (Fig. 2). Space
is provided for the addition of two more terminal
blocks which must be separately ordered. Addition
of the second block adds capacity for 25 more
stations. Addition of the third block adds the
final stations. The 184Cl backboard offers a
convenient method of grouping the 6B KTS
terminations, but is not required if the yellow field
of a centralized key system installation can be
utilized.
2.20
The 14A2-125 terminal blocks used with the
184Cl backboard consist of a 66-type
connecting block wired to five microribbon plugs.
• Cable, Connector, A25B-order as required
for connections between 572Al KSU and
184Cl backboard and yellow field. Cables
used with 184Cl backboard must be
double-ended.
• Unit, Key Telephone, 484A (station
circuit)-order as required. Each KTU has
circuitry for 4 stations.
• Unit, Key Telephone, 485A (controller
circuit)-order one per system.
• Unit, Key Telephone, 486A (service
circuit)-order one per system.
2.21
Page 8
• Unit, Key Telephone, 487A (battery feed
circuit)-order one per system.
KTU
ISS 1, SECTION 518-411-100
ABCOEFGHI
o
BLOCK A
0000.
BLOCK B
BLOCK C
1
0000
0
0
500
...
CO>
I
0
ecce
~t-""I-
CI)
en
(I)
en
0000
0000
0000
m
"'II" CD
(W)"
..,.
..
LD
I
I
I
I
1,1')011)0
CO>
('I)""""
...
«-i.e
.... I - ........
(W)
J.. (BK-BL)
"-'
,..,.
"-'
(G-W)
18
H )~
(NOTES 3 AND 4)
(O-BK)
ri
~B__~(~Y_-0~)__________________~~22
,
(BR)
29n.
(S)
~
(Y)
Al
(O-W)
BZ
(BR-V)
: BZl
(V-BR)
1
(BL)
~
(NOTE 2)
NOTES:
1. FOR 4A SPEAKERPHONE (WITH ADAPTER TERMINATED IN SET) MOVE
LEAD IN M18C CORD AS FOLLOWS:
SET
LEAD
585 HKM
2585 HKM
WoO
8300, 8310
28300, 28310
830DAM, 2830DAM
831DAM, 2831DAM
BL-W
FROM
TO
N
L2
N
1
5
8
13
L2
2. 8TH LINE PICKUP BUTTON CANNOT BE USED. DISCONNECT AND STORE
(BR-V) AND (V-BR) LEADS FROM PLUG CONNECTED TO TERMINALS
1 AND 4.
3. ON SETS USED FOR MULTILINE CONFERENCING, DO NOT USE SPARE
INTERCOM BUTTONS FOR CO/PBX LINES
4. IF SPEAKERPHONE POWER (4A) IS SUPPLIED FROM ASSOCIATED KEY
SYSTEM, USE SPARE PAIR OTHER THAN (Y-O) (O-Y) AND CONNECT
THEM TO THE (R-G) (G-R)INi'HE M18C CORD USING SPARE
TERMINALS OR 0-181488 CONNECTORS.
Fig. 3-Modification of Telephone Sets for Use With 68 Key Telephone System (Sheet 2 of 2)
Page 14
ISS 1, SECTION 518-411-100
S35A
CONN BLK
T
5
~
R
~ )
~)
3
~ ~
TO
Al
S
SBKTS ~
~
~
~
BZl
TELEPHONE SET
(NOTES 1 AND 2)
4
~
A
DSAL OR
DSAM
CORD
7
~ ~
:
:
2
(G)
1
(R)
(2)
5
(BK)
!
!
(Y)
3
(BL)
(W)
F
(G)
(2)
(R)
(2)
L2 (G) LS (W)
)(
(2)
C
(2)
(BR)
(V)
LS
f)(
8
(NOTE 3)
NOTES:
1. REMOVE (BK) RINGER LEAD FROM TERMINAL 2 AND (S) STRAP FROM TERMINAL 1.
INSULATE AND STORE.
2. REMOVE (BK) EXCLUSION KEY LEAD FROM L 1 AND (V) FROM L2 OF NETWORK.
INSULATE AND STORE.
3. 10V AC BUZZER MUST BE SEPERATELY ORDERED
AND INSTALLED.
Fig. 4-Modification of 502/2502 BM Telephone Set for Use With 6B Key Telephone System
with a 2A transmitter-receiver adjunct. The cord
of the adjunct can be wired directly to the telephone
set terminals or to a separately supplied 66E8-25
connecting block. A 2012B transformer is also
required to power each adjunct. Fig. 6 shows
typical adjunct to telephone connections. For further
information on the 2A transmitter-receiver, refer
to Section 518-010-115.
Note: Tip and ring to the adjunct must
be reversed for proper operation of S HOLD.
OFF-PREMISES EXTENSIONS
Off-premises extensions from the 6B KTS
can be provided using a 420A KTU (long
line circuit). The maximum station conductor loop
is 500 ohms. A separate mounting must be provided
for the 420A KTU(s). For one or two circuits, use
a 110A apparatus mounting-for a larger number
of circuits use a 642A panel. The necessary voltages
can be obtained from the associated key system if
sufficient capacity is available. Connections for an
off-premises station are shown in Fig. 36.
4.
OPERATION-STANDARD FEATURES
INTERCOM LINE PICKUP AND HOLD
Intercom calls are originated by depressing
the designated button on the telephone set.
Only one button appearance is required in either
single link or multilink systems. Only the calling
and called stations enter into an intercom call,
unless special features such as conferencing, call
add-on, or override are used. Intercom calls are
processed through the controller circuit (485A KTU)
with tones supplied by the service circuit (486A
KTU) and talk battery by the battery feed circuit
(487A KTU).
4.01
3.16
4.02
To make a station-to-station intercom call:
(1) Depress line pickup button associated with
intercom.
Note: Button should be dark-if lit steady,
system is busy and no links are available.
Page 15
SECTION S 18-411-100
150A
DESIGNATION STRIP
7 4A FACEP L ATE
Fig . 5 - Application of 150 Designation Strip and 74A Faceplate
Page 16
ISS 1, SECTION 518-411-100
TELEPHONE
SET (NOTE 3)
2A T-R
(NOTE 2)
r--
,.,.
(W-BL)
T
r--
~
(BL-W)
R
" T
R
A
A1
L
TO STATION
CUTDOWN
(NOTE 1)
LG
BZ
BZ1
B(NOTE 5)
H
TO 2012B
TRANSFORMER
*
(
~
~
(NOTE 4)
;;:
;;:
~
~
;;:
;;:
::::
;;:
-
JIj
'V
*
(O-W)
A1
(S-W)
VS
(W-S)
LG2
(BR-W)
LP
(W-BR)
LG1
(G-W)
AC1
(W-G)
AC2
party will hear audible ringback and the called
station will have a flashing intercom lamp.
The intercom audible signal at the called station
will be blocked.
(4) When called station answers, the flashing
lamp goes steady and the audible signal is
silenced. Two-way private conversation is now
possible.
(5) When both stations restore their handsets,
the link returns to normal and both lamps
go dark.
With a talking circuit established as in
4.02(4), the intercom call can be placed on
station hold (S HOLD) by depressing the HOLD
key on the telephone set. The lamp at the calling
station will wink and the associated pickup button
will restore. S HOLD cannot be activated by the
following:
4.03
(W-O)
'---
INSULATE AND STORE
NOTES:
1. TERMINATE ON TERMINALS FOR STATION CODE
ASSIGNED ON 1B4C1 BACKBOARD OR YELLOW FIELD.
2. IF TELEPHONE SET IS EQUIPPED WITH SCREW
TERMINALS, D10W CORD FROM 2A TRANSMITTERRECEIVER CAN BE TERMINATED DIRECTLY IN SET.
WHERE SCREW TERMINALS ARE NOT AVAILABLE, SUCH
AS IN CAll DIRECTORS, USE 8BE3-25 OR 66E8-25
CONNECTING BLOCK TO ACCESS PROPER LEADS.
3. T, R, LP AND LG ARE LEADS ASSOCIATED WITH
PICKUP BUTTON ASSIGNED TO 8B INTERCOM.
4. T AND R TO 2A TRANSMITTER - RECEIVER MUST BE
REVERSED.
5. DISCONNECT B LEAD FOR OPERATION OF HFA 1 UNIT
WHEN STATION IF OFF=HOOK ON CO/PBX LINE
B. ADD CONTINUOUS RING OPTION TO 484A KTU.
• Calling stations before the called station
answers
• Called station in consultation hold (C HOLD)
• Intercom-only stations
• Paging calls.
SUPERVISORY FLASH FEATURES
Consultation hold (C HOLD), call add-on
(CADD), and call transfer (XFER) are features
activated by breaking the calling party A lead using
the line switch. The flash must take place with
the intercom call in the talk mode with the duration
of the flash from 275-ms to 1.5 seconds. If the
flash is too short, no action will take place, and
if too long, disconnect will occur.
4.04
Fig. 6-Connections Between 2A Transmitter-Receiver
and Telephone Set for HFAI
(2) Lift telephone handset. Lamp should light
steady and intercom dial tone heard. Refer
to Table B for call progress tones.
4.05
(3) Dial desired 2-digit station code. Lamp
associated with intercom at called station
will flash and 10-volt ac audible signal will
operate. Audible ringback is heard at the calling
station.
Note: If the called station is busy on intercom
(handset off-hook), the calling station will hear
the busy signal. If the called station is busy
on a CO/PBX call (handset off-hook) the calling
To activate supervisory flash features:
(a) Assume station 20 is talking to station 30
and station 20 flashes (either station could
initiate flash). Station 30 is put on hold (C
HOLD) as indicated by hold tone followed by
dial tone which is returned to station 20.
(b) Station 20 may now dial a third station
(assume station 40) for consultation. Station
30 does not hear the conversation.
Page 17
SECTION 518-411-100
(c) At this point:
(1) Station 20 may flash a second time to
(5) Audible ringback will be heard by station
20 and audible signals will operate at 30
and 40.
return to the original connection with
station 30. Station 40 leaves the call by going
on-hook.
(6) When conference stations answer, talk path
is established to all parties.
Note: If either of the conference stations
do not answer, the ring will time out after
approximately 12 seconds. However, the
lamp will continue to flash at the unanswered
station for the duration of the conference call.
The unanswered station may enter the call
at any time while the lamp is flashing.
(2) Either 20 or 40 can flash a second time
to add 30 to the conversation (CAD D), or
(3) Station 20 may disconnect from call by
going on-hook, leaving 30 connected to 40
(XFER).
Supervisory flash cannot be used to activate paging,
flexible conferencing, or remote answer.
Note: If the station originating C HOLD
hangs up before the third station answers,
the 6B KTS calls the originating station back.
This prevents the held station being accidentally
forgotten.
If a busy station (off-hook) is encountered while
setting up a conference call, busy tone will be
returned to the originator and the call procedure
terminated. Only station codes (10 through 69)
can be dialed in setting up conferences. If a
feature, paging, or CO/PBX access code is dialed,
error tone will be returned when the invalid code
is dialed~
DIAL-ACTIVATED FEATURES
The procedure for setting up a 4-party
conference call is the same as covered in
paragraph 4.07 except that the access code is 04.
One additional dial tone will be received to permit
dialing the fourth station before all stations are
rung.
4.08
The 6B KTS can furnish both standard and
optional features activated by dialing a 2-digit
access code (Table A) and, where required, the
station code(s) to which the feature is directed.
The standard dial-activated features are flexible
dial conferencing (FLEX), do-not-disturb (DND),
call forwarding (CFWD), automatic callback (ACBK),
remote answer (REAN), and override.
4.06
A.
No cancellation of this feature is required.
The circuit returns to normal when all parties
go on-hook.
4.09
Flexible Dial Canferencing
Conferencing on intercom of either three or
four parties (including originator) can be set
up by any 6B KTS station. To set up a conference
call of two stations plus the originating station
(assume station 20 wants to conference with stations
30 and 40):
4.07
(1) Depress intercom button (button should be
dark).
(2) When first dial tone is received, dial access
code 03.
(3) When second dial tone is received, dial code
of one station to be conferenced (30).
(4) When third dial tone is received, dial code
of other station to be conferenced (40).
Page 18
B.
Do-Not-Disturb
With the DND feature in effect, all 6B KTS
audible signals at the station activating the
feature are silenced. On incoming calls, the lamp
on the intercom button will flash as an indication
that the feature is in effect. All stations can
originate DND. The automatic callback feature
cannot be used while a called station is in DND.
4.10
4.11
Operation of DND is as follows:
(1) The feature is put into effect by dialing
the access code 06 from the station desiring
the feature. Acknowledgment tone is returned
to the user to indicate the feature is in effect.
The station can then hang up or switchhook
flash to originate another call.
ISS 1, SECTION 518-411-100
(2) Incoming calls to a DND station will be
indicated by a flashing lamp at the DND
station. The calling station will hear busy tone.
The DND station can elect to answer the flashing
lamp or ignore it.
Note 1: Station codes 10 through 19 have
the capability to override the DND feature
upon receiving the busy tone. Refer to the
override feature.
is, station 20 cannot have calls forwarded to both
stations 30 and 40 at the same time. Also, calls
for station 20 can be forwarded to 30, station 30
can forward to 40 but station 20 will not forward
to 40.
4.13
Assuming station 20 wants to forward calls
to station 30, the sequence is as follows:
(1) Station 20 goes off-hook on the intercom,
receives first dial tone, and dials 02.
Note 2: If a station activates DND after
it becomes an alternate station for the call
forwarding feature (see paragraph 4.12) it will
receive forwarded calls in a normal manner,
but if the code of the station is dialed directly
the calling station will hear busy tone.
(2) When second dial tone is received, station
20 dials 30.
Note: If originating station is already in
CFWD, the system will update to the new
alternate. If the alternate station is in DND,
station 20 will receive busy tone. If alternate
selected is not a working station or a nonstation
code is dialed (such as a feature code), error
tone will be returned.
(3) To cancel the feature, the station code of
the station originating DND must be dialed
from the originating station. For example,
if station 20 has DND in effect, to cancel DND,
20 is dialed from station 20. Acknowledgment
tone is heard at the station to indicate the feature
is canceled.
(3) Station 20 hears acknowledgment tone
indicating feature is in effect.
Note: Selective cancellation is not possible;
that is, if a station has more than one
dial-activated feature in effect, cancellation
of one feature will cancel all others in effect
for that station.
(4) With CFWD in effect, when station 20 is
dialed, the call is terminated at station 30.
The audible and visual signals will operate at
both stations with those at the originating station
timing out after 12 seconds.
C.
(5) To cancel CFWD, the station code of the
originating station must be dialed from
the originating station.
Call Forwarding
With this feature, calls intended for a user's
station can be routed to an alternate station.
The audible and lamp signals will operate at both
the originating and alternate stations but the
originating station can answer the call with the
feature in effect. All calls for the originating
station will be forwarded. If the alternate station
is busy the calling station will receive a busy signal
even though the originating station is idle. Calls
for the originating station will be forwarded to
the alternate even if the alternate activates DND
after call forward is activated. A station cannot
be set up for call forwarding and automatic
callback at the same time. An attempt to
activate one with the other in effect will result in
error tone. Up to 16 call forwarding indications
can be handled by the 6B KTS. Additional attempts
will result in error tone. More than one connection
can go to the same alternate station. The system
will not forward to more than one alternate, that
4.12
D.
Call Farwarding-Do-Not-Disturb
When these two features are put into effect
in sequence, calls will be forwarded as
described, but no signals will be received at the
originating station. With CFWD alone, audible
and lamp signals are received at both stations.
To affect, activate CFWD as shown in paragraph
4.12 then DND as shown in paragraph 4.10. Canceling
either feature will cancel the other.
4.14
AUTOMATIC CALLBACK
Automatic callback (ACBK), when activated
by a user who has dialed a busy station,
will automatically attempt to establish the connection
when both stations become idle and a link is
available. For instance, if station 20 gets a busy
4.15
Page 19
SECTION 518-411-100
in calling station 30 and if station 20 activates
ACBK, the system will call back station 20 when
station 30 becomes idle, then ring station 30. The
system can process up to eight requests for ACBK.
The ninth request will result in busy tone indicating
memory is unavailable. A station can originate
only one ACBK call at a time, but the called party
can receive more than one ACBK call. An attempt
to originate more than one ACBK call at a time
will result in error tone.
will be suspended and the system will attempt
completion again when both stations are idle.
(5) If it is desired to cancel ACBK before the
system has completed the call, station 20
must go off-hook and dial its own code from
station 20.
Acknowledgment tone will be
returned to station 20 to indicate the feature is
canceled.
CALL SCREENING
The called station in an ACBK connection
cannot be a station in the DND mode, a
paging access code, or a CO/PBX access code
(results in error tone). If the calling station has
activated call forwarding to another station in
addition to ACBK, the ACBK call will still go to
the calling station. If the called station is call
forwarding, the ACBK call will be forwarded to
the alternate station.
4.16
Once originated, the ACBK feature stays in
effect until (a) the callback call is completed,
(b) the feature is canceled by the originating station,
or (c) the system attempts ACBK and the originating
station does not answer in approximately 16 seconds.
4.17
4.18
The automatic callback feature operates as
follows:
(1) Assume station 20 is calling station 30 and
receives a busy tone.
(2) Station 20 flashes the switchhook to obtain
dial tone again, dials 09, and when a second
dial tone is received, then dials 30. Acknowledgment
tone will be heard by station 20, indicating the
feature is in effect.
Note: If station 30 becomes idle while ACBK
is being effected, the system will complete
the call by ringing station 30 and returning
audible ringback to station 20. The ACBK
feature will not be put into effect.
(3) When both stations are idle and a link is
available, the system will attempt to complete
the call. Station 20 will be rung first and when
it answers, station 30 will be rung. Station 20
will hear ringback as an indication that the ACBK
call is being attempted.
(4) If during callback, station 30 becomes busy
again before station 20 answers, callback
Page 20
Where desired, station 20 can also activate
DND (see paragraph 4.10) after ACBK to
selectively screen incoming calls; that is, with
DND in effect, all incoming calls to station 20 will
receive busy tone, but the ACBK call will be
completed. Once ACBK has been completed, DND
can be canceled to permit other incoming calls.
4.19
OVERRIDE
This feature permits selected stations to
bridge onto other stations that are in a busy
status, that is, engaged in conversation or in the
DND mode. Override (OVRD) is availahle in two
versions depending on the location of the toggle
switch on the rear of the 572Al KSU (Fig. 1).
With the switch in one position, station codes 10
and 11 have override capability (factory-provided)
in the other position, codes 10 throug11 19 are
override stations. OVRD cannot be effected to
the following stations or codes:
4.20
• A station in consultation hold
• A paging access code
• A CO/PBX access code.
Any of the preceding conditions will result in error
tone being returned to the station attempting
override.
Assuming station 10 encountered a busy in
calling station 20 and wishes to override,
the sequence is as follows:
4.21
(1) Station 10 flashes to obtain system dial tone
and dials 01.
(2) When second dial tone is heard,
dials station code 20.
~tation
10
ISS 1, SECTION 518-411-100
(3) If station 20 is busy in a conversation,
override tone (128 Hz for 500-ms) will be
heard by the talking parties before the override
station is bridged onto the conversation. The
overriding station does not hear the tone.
(4) If station 20 is in the DND mode, or had
become idle while OVRD is being activated,
station 10 will hear ringback and station 20 will
be rung.
(5) If station 20 was being called, i.e. by station
30 but has not answered, station 30 will
hear the override tone while 10 will enter the
connection and hear ringback. When station 20
answers the three parties will be connected.
REMOTE ANSWER
Remote Answer (REAN) permits one station
to answer any incoming calls intended for
another station while the call is in the ringing
state. Calls cannot be remotely answered under
the following conditions:
will be intercepted, therefore, the feature does
not have to be canceled.
5.
OPERATION-OPTIONAL FEATURES
FOUR LINKS
The basic 6B KTS is furnished as a two-link
system. To add the third and fourth link,
a second 487A KTU must be separately ordered
and installed in J5.
5.01
TOUCH-TONE SETS
TOUCH-TONE sets require the addition of
a 489A KTU to the system installed in J1.
With the 489A KTU installed, the system will
recognize either rotary or TOUCH-TONE signals.
5.02
4.22
• A call to a station that has answered
• Calls to a nonstation code such as paging
access or CO/PBX line access unless CO/PBX
call is in the ringing or hold state.
• A call-forwarded call where the call has
been answered by the alternate station.
Call intercepts attempted under the above will be
routed to error tone.
4.23
HANDS-FREE ANSWER ON INTERCOM
This feature requires the addition of a 2A
transmitter-receiver adjunct at each station
desiring the feature. HF AI permits a calling station
to voice-signal an HFAI-equipped station and also
allows the HF AI station to answer without going
off-hook. In addition to equipping the desired
stations with an adjunct, the continuous ring option
(option A) must be installed on the 484A KTUs
involved and the single spurt audible ringback
option (option C) installed on the 486A KTU (service
circuit). If HFAI is removed from a station, the
484A KTU should be changed back to the interrupted
ring option (option B).
5.03
Note: If any station in the system has
HF AI, all stations will have single spurt audible
alerting tone since option C is on a system
basis. In addition, the station associated on
the station circuit KTU with the HF AI station
will have continuous ring. For example, if
station 20 has HF AI, station 21 will have
continuous alerting tone.
REAN is accomplished as follows:
(1) If station 20 is in the ringing state and
station 10 wishes to answer the call, station
10 dials 07; and after the second dial tone is
received, dials 20-the code of the station to be
answered.
(2) If the feature is properly activated, station
10 will be immediately connected to the
calling party. At station 20, the intercom lamp
will flash the same as for a regular call and
station 20 can enter the call at any time. No
audible signal is received at station 20.
The 2A transmitter-receiver is connected to the
station as shown in Fig. 6. Additional information
on the 2A transmitter-receiver can be found in
Section 518-010-115.
(3) The REAN feature is on a one-call basis,
that is, only the one incoming call in progress
(1) When an HFAI station is dialed, the microphone
in the adjunct is turned on as indicated by
5.04
Stations with HF AI operate as follows:
Page 21
SECTION 518-411-100
the MIKE-ON LED, and a single 1I2-second tone
burst is heard at both stations.
(2) After hearing the tone burst, the calling
party can voice-signal the HFAI station.
The HF AI station may answer without going
off-hook via the mike in the adjunct.
(3) If the HF AI station does not want local
conversation or noise to be heard, the
MIC-OFF button must be depressed, during
which time the LED will turn off. In this
condition, incoming calls can be received but
cannot be answered. The called station may
return to HF AI by releasing the MIC-OFF button.
5.05
The 2A transmitter-receiver adjunct is
equipped with a DND button which operates
separately from the system DND. Station DND is
operated by depressing the DND button which
locks down. To allow incoming calls, the DND
button must be depressed again, releasing it. If
the station DND and system DND are activated
at the same time, or if just the system DND is
activated, the calling station will hear the system
tone (busy signal). If only the station DND is
activated, both stations will hear a double tone
burst from the adjunct.
5.06
PAGING ACCESS
The following conditions apply to HF AI calls:
This feature permits the 6B KTS stations
to access a customer-owned and maintained
(COAM) or Telephone Company provided amplifier
and loudspeaker for paging. Up to three paging
zones, plus one all-page zone, can be, provided.
When paging access is provided, the number of
station codes is reduced by four since the 484A
KTU in J16 becomes dedicated to paging. These
leads appear in J9 on the rear of the KSU. Each
paging zone (except all page) requires a 278A
adapter as an interface between the 6B KTS and
the amplifier (Fig. 7). A separate amplifier should
be supplied for each zone. If desired, a separately
supplied music source can be connected to the 278A
adapter(s) as background music through the amplifiers
to the paging speakers. If background music is
connected, one 278A adapter must be st?"apped to
present an 8-ohm load to the music source. The
adapters must be separately mounted from the
KSU and require -24 volts dc and ground which
must be supplied from a separate source.
5.07
(a) If an HFAI station is called on a dial
conference call, it must go off-hook within
16 seconds of the first called station going off-hook
to prevent the possibility of a conference call
being broadcast at an unattended HF AI station.
After 16 seconds the alerting tone will time out
but the lamp at the HF AI station will continue
to flash. The HF AI station can enter the
conference while the lamp is flashing but only
using the handset.
(b) A station in HF AI cannot be 'added as the
third party in call add-on. The station can
be called and can converse while in HF AI but
to be added on, must go to handset operation
before the calling station operates the switchhook
a second time to return to the original connection.
Failure to go to handset will cause the HF AI
station to be dropped.
(c) Calls cannot be transferred to a station in
the HFAI mode without going off-hook before
the transfer. As in add-on, the HFAI station
will be dropped.
(d) HFAI stations can be placed on station hold
but not consultation hold. This prevents an
HF AI station being connected to a CO/PBX line
for transmission reasons.
(e) Two HFAI stations called on a dial conference
call will not be able to communicate with
each other and must go to their handsets.
(f) Calls cannot be orignated in HF AI.
Page 22
The codes assigned to paging addesss are
71, 72, and 73. If all page is de~ired, the
code is 70. When paging access is provided, station
codes 50 through 53 are converted to lIse as 70
through 73 and, therefore, are not available as
station codes. The conversion is accomplished by
operating the toggle switch marked PAG ACC to
the ON position. The switch is located on the
rear of the 572Al KSU just above the connectors
for the incoming cables. As factory-provided, the
switch is in the OFF position. The 484A KTU
for codes 50 through 53 must be cOll"erted for
the continuous ring option (option A).
5.08
ISS 1, SECTION 5 18-411-100
T
R
~R
A
TO STATION
CONNECTIONS
COOES 51,
52 OR 53
r>. BY2
-..u
A1
Co
,.-,. BZ1
'. CT
....,
TO COAM (
AMPLIFIER
f>o
~
-24B
: : J (NOTE 1)
CR
~ -V
B GRO
::J(NDTE 1)
BY1
r>.
BZ1
(
278A ADAPTER
(NOTE 2)
"-"T
'.
...., GRD
J
0A
K0
0
o C1
o C2
TO BACKGROUND (
MUSIC SOURCE
TO OTHER
(
278A ADAPTERS
r
V
I
r>.
M1
M2
NOTES:
1. OPTION PLUGS MUST BE POSITIONED IN E-F AND G-H ON
ONE ADAPTER ONLY - LEAVE PLUGS STORED ON SECOND AND
THIRD ADAPTER. POSITION PLUG IN A-B ON ALL ADAPTERS
2. ADD CONTINUOUS RING OPTION TO ASSOCIATED 484A KTU.
Fig. 7-278A Adapter Cannections for Paging Access
5.09
Any 6B KTS station can make a paging call
as follows:
(1) Paging station goes off-hook and dials 71,
72, 73 for desired paging zone or code 70
if all zones are to be paged.
(3) Paging station can now make announcement
to speakers using telephone handset.
CO/PBX LINE ACCESS
5.10
(2) The 278A adapter associated with the zone(s)
will disconnect the background music if
provided and connect the paging station to the
amplifier. No alerting tone will be sent through
the speakers but the paging station will hear
acknowledgment tone.
All 6B KTS stations can access up to eight
CO/PBX lines under the following conditions
only:
• While ringing is applied to the line
• If the line has been placed on hold through
the associated key system line circuit.
Page 23
SECTION 518-411-100
Access cannot be made when the line is idle or in
the talk mode; therefore, outgoing calls cannot be
made through the 6B KTS. The CO/PBX line
must be terminated in a 1A1 or 1A2 line circuit
having A lead control. The line circuit is required
to determine whether the CO/PBX line is ringing,
idle, busy, or on hold. Access to the lines in the
proper state is made by dialing a 2-digit code.
Once an incoming call has been answered and put
on hold, the call can be transferred to another
station or a station can be added on.
5.11
Incoming CO/PBX calls are handled by
intercom stations as follows:
(1) When line is called, associated line circuit
will provide flash indication.
(2) Answering station accesses line by dialing a
2-digit CO/PBX access code (80 through 87)
assigned to line.
6.
MAINTENANCE
6.01
Maintenance information pertaining specifically
to the 6B KTS is provided in three forms:
• Feature sequence charts (Tables F through
0)
• Trouble analysis charts (Fig. 9 through 18)
• Diagnostic Test Sequences (Fig. 19 through
30)
Feature Sequence Charts
These charts provide a method of testing
for the proper sequence of each feature.
No equipment failure indications are given.
6.02
Trouble Analysis Charts
This series of charts provide an analysis of
the probable trouble causes depending on
the more likely trouble reports. Some results may
require further testing using the Diagnostic Test
Sequences.
6.03
(3) The answering station can then either:
(a) Handle the call and disconnect by going
on-hook.
(b) Pass the call to another intercom station
by flashing the switchhook to place call
on hold, dialing the other station and, when
they have answered, disconnecting.
(c) Add another station by flashing the
switchhook to place call on hold, dialing
the other station and, when they have answered,
flashing the switchhook a second time to
reenter the original connection.
The above procedure is for 6B KTS stations and
does not prevent the CO/PBX line being picked
up in a normal manner on key system sets if it
appears.
ATTENDANT RECALL
To recall the attendant on a PBX call that
is connected through the 6B KTS, the
answering station must flash the switchhook which
will return intercom dial tone. The station then
dials 00 which will send a timed flash to the PBX
attendant.
Diagnostic Test Sequences
These tests require the use of the optional
HK-14 circuit pack (Fig. 8) and a 1013-type
hand test set. Maintenance operations involving
the HK-14 circuit pack should be performed by
2nd-tier maintenance personnel only. Using the
test sequences, the status of the major signaling
busses and the system power for all links can be
tested. Visual signals are provided on the circuit
pack and audible tones heard in the hand test set.
6.04
The HK-14 circuit pack must be plugged
into J6 in place of the first 484A KTU.
As soon as it is plugged in, the stations associated
with the first 484A KTU will get a system busy
indication, that is, the intercom lamp will light
steadily at the stations. When the ON switch is
operated, all stations will see a system busy and
the system will be taken out of service until the
.
switch is turned off.
6.05
5.12
Page 24
To start the sequence after the switch is
turned to ON, 05 must be dialed. The circuit
pack will then test each link for each test. For
instance, after 05 is dialed the digit 1 will be
displayed and link 1 tested for dial tone, then link
6.06
ISS 1, SECTION S 18-411- 100
CIRCU IT PACK
ON SWIT CH
TEST VIS U AL
DI SPLAY
2 and if provided, links 3 and 4. The test will
then be repeated unless the STEP switch is depressed
or the circuit pack turned off. If the STEP switch
is depressed, the circuit pack will make the next
test of each link in sequence. The test being
made is displayed visually (Fig. 8). If it is desired
to make a particular test, the circuit pack must
be stepped until the proper digit or letter is
displayed. Refer to Table P and Fig. 19 through
30 for the circui t pack preparation sequence and
the individual test sequences.
The voltages used in the system are monitored
continuously as soon as the ci rcuit pack is
plugged in.
6.07
TEST STEP
SW ITCH
TERMINALS FOR
HAND TESTSET
Fig . 8- HK- 14 Circuit Pack Faceplate
Page 2S
SECTION 518-411·100
TABLE F
OVERRIDE
(OVRDI
At override station,
depress IC,button,
go off-hook
OK
I
IC dial tone
I
I
I
Dial 01
I
I
FAILURE
Error tone1. Feature attempt by nonoverride station.
2. Invalid procedure, station must reattempt
feature activation.
IC dial tone
I
I
Dial code of station to be overridden
~__~O~K~____~______________________~I~
overridt tone heard by conversing
parties then override station enters
call.
or
Override station hears audible
ringback and called station in
DND or idle mode is rung.
Page 26
________________________~FA=I,LURE
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
Error tonePaging code dialed or called station paging.
Called station not a working station.
Called station on hold.
Called station link at maximum
capacity.
ISS 1, SECTION 518-411-100
TABLE G
DO-NOT-DISTURB
(DND)
At any station, depress IC button, go
off-hook
OK
I
IC dial tone
I
I
Dial 06
I
OK
I
Acknowledgment Tone
I
I
Calling stations receive busy tone. Lamp
will flash at DND station but audible
signal is silenced. Call can be answered
or ignored.
Page 27
SECTION 518·411·100
TABLE H
CONFERENCING
(FLEX)
At any station, depress IC button, go
off-hook
OK
IC dial tone
I
Dial 03 (3-party conference) or 04 (4party conference)
OK
FAILURE
I
IC dial tone
Error tone - Invalid procedure station
must re·attempt feature activation.
I
Dial code of 1st station to be
conferenced
OK
FAILURE
I
IC dial tone
Busy tOlle
I
l. Busy station dialed. Procedure terminated.
I
Dial code of 2nd (and 3rd) station
to be conferenced. Dial tone
returned after each code dialed.
OK
FAILURE
I
Audible ringback heard at calling
Error tone
station - audible signals heard at
called station
I
l. Invalid code (other than 10 through 69) in
conference call.
Called stations go off-hook
OK
I
Conference established
Page 28
FAILURE
I
If HF Al station answers from adjunct it
may be dropped - must go to handset.
ISS 1, SECTION 518-411-100
TABLE I
REMOTE ANSWER
(REAN)
At any station, depress IC button, go
off-hook.
OK
I
IC dial tone
I
Dial 07
FAILURE
OK
I
I
IC dial tone
Error tone - invalid procedure, station
must reattempt feature activation.
I
I
Dial code of station to be answered.
OK
I
Feature activated
Call answered
I
Error tone1. Non-station code dialed.
2. Call already answered by remote station.
3. Attempt is to station which has activated
CFWD and alternate station has answered.
Page 29
SECTION 518-411-100
TABLE J
CALL FORWARDING
(CFWD)
At any station, depress IC button, go
off-hook
IC dial tone
I
Dial 02
FAILURE
OK
I
IC dial tone
Error tone - Automatic Callback in effect.
Busy tone - no memory avaUable.
I
I
Dial code of alternate station
I
OK
I
Acknowledgment tone
Error tone1. Alternate station not a working station.
I
2. Nonstation code.
Busy tone1. Alternate station off-hook or in DND
Audible and lamp signals operate
at both stations on calls to originating station. Calls can be answered
at either station. Signals time out
at originating station after twelve
seconds.
Page 30
FAILURE
ISS 1, SECTION 518·411·100
TABLE K
CO/PBX OPERATOR RECALL
CO/PBX call in progress
Station flashes switchhook
OK
I
Flash dial
tone
Dial 00
FAILURE
OK
I
I
Error tone - no CO/PBX link available
Timed flash (450 ms)
to CO/PBX operator
I
Operator answers
TABLE L
SUPERVISORY FLASH FEATURES
(C HOLD, CADD, XFERI
Connection established to another 6B
station or CO/PBX line
I
Station flashes switch hook
I
Flash dial lone -
I
connection put
on hold (C HOLD)
I
Third station dialed } answers
rl---------------------«V»----------------~I
Third station goes on-hook.
Originating station flashes.
I
Original Connection
re-established.
Originating station flashes
Originating station goes on-hook
Original connection re-established,
third station added (CADD)
Third station connected to held station
(XFER)
I
I
Page 31
SECTION 518-411.100
TABLE M
AUTOMATIC CALLBACK
(ACBK)
Busy tone received when IC station is
called
I
Flash switchhook
OK
Flash dial tone
Dial 09
OK
FAILURE
I
I
IC dial tone
Error tone1. ACBK already originated by station.
2. Invalid procedure - station must reattempt
feature activation.
Busy tone1. Memory unavailable.
I
Dial code of busy station
OK
I
Acknowledgment tone
I
When called station becomes
idle, system will ring originating
station then called station.
FAILURE
I
Error tone1. Code of nonworking station dialed.
2. Busy station is in DND
3. Nonstation code dialed
Audible ringback 1. Busy station became idle during feature
activation. Call completed in normal
manner.
Page 32
ISS 1, SECTION 518-411-100
TABLE N
FEATURE CANCELLATION
DND, ACBK or CFjD feature in effect
Originating station goes off-hook
I
OK
Reminder dial tone
I
Originating station dials own station
code
OK
Acknowledgment tone
I
DND, ACBK and/or CFWD canceled
TABLE 0
CO/PBX LINE ACCESS
Line button flashes, indicating incoming
call
I
At any 6B station, depress IC button,
go off-hook
OK
IC dial tone
I
Dial code (80-87) assigned to CO/PBX
line
I
FAILURE
OK
Connection eltablished to
CO/PBX line
I
CO/PBX line not ringing
I
6B station can handle call, then go
on-hook
or
Transfer call by flashing (call goes on
hold), calling another station and going
on-hook when answered
or
Add station by flashing, calling another
station and flashing a second time when
other station answers.
Page 33
SECTION 518-411.100
IS ONLY
ONE STATION
AFFECTED
YES
REPLACE LAMP
AT AFFECTED
STATION
YES
NO
YES
CHECK FOR
10 VAC ON
LG LEAD
CHECK FUSE
IN FUSE
BOARD*
NO
CHECK
LG LEAD
CHECK 10 VAC
WIRING. CHECK
LAMP WIRING
CHECK
L LEAD
NO
REPLACE
ASSOCIATED
484A KTU
Fig. 9-lntercom Lamp Does Not Light
Page 34
* IF FUSE IS OPERATED. BOTH LAMPS
AND BUZZER WILL BE AFFECTED.
ISS I, SECTION 518-411-100
REPLACE
ASSOCIATED
484A KTU
REPLACE
486A KTU
YES
NO
REPLACE
485A KTU
YES
PERFORM
DIAGNOSTICS
TEST NO.1
Fig. 10-No Dial Tone (Sheet 1 of 2)
Page 35
SECTION 518-411-100
FROM SHEET 1
YES
YES
REPLACE
ASSOCIATED
484A KTU
TROUBLE
CLEARED
NO
YES
REPLACE
486A KTU
PERFORM
DIAGNOSTICS
TEST NO. 1
CHECK FOR
FAULTY A LEAD
CONNECTIONS
Fig. 10-No Dial Tone (Sheet 2 of 2)
Page 36
CHECK FOR
FAUL TV T AND R
CONNECTIONS
ISS 1, SECTION 518-411-100
YES
REPLACE
ASSOCIATED
4B4A KTU
YES
CHECK FOR
FAUL TV T AND R
WIRING
REPLACE
4B5A KTU
CHECK FOR
LINK
CROSSTALK
TROUBLE
CLEARED
PERFORM
DIAGNOSTICS
TEST NO. 1
Fig. ll-Cannot Dial From TOUCH-TONE Telephone Set
Page 37
SECTION 518-411-100
YES
REPLACE
ASSOCIATED
484A KTU
CHECK FOR
FAUL TV T AND R
WIRING
REPLACE
489A KTU
NO
REPLACE
TELEPHONE
SET
YES
REPLACE
486A KTU
YES
REPLACE
485A KTU
PERFORM
DIAGNOSTICS
TEST NO. 1
Fig. 12-Cannot Dial From Rotary Dial Telephone Set
Page 38
ISS 1, SECTION 518-411-100
YES
CHECK OPTION
PLUGS ON
ASSOCIATED
4B4A KTU
TROUBLE
CLEARED
YES
CHECK FUSE
ON FUSE
BOARD
REPLACE
ASSOCIATED
4B4A KTU
REPLACE
BUZZER
ARE ALL
STATIONS
AFFECTED
NO
YES
REPLACE
4B8A KTU
TROUBLE
CLEARED
NO
CHECK FOR FAUL TV
BZ, BZ1, OR B
LEAD WIRING
Fig. 13-lntercom Buzzer Does Not Operate
Page 39
SECTION 518-411-100
IS DIAL TONE
PRESENT
SEE PROCEDURE
FOR NO DIAL
TONE
YES
CHECK OPTION
PLUGS ON 4BSA
KTU
TROUBLE
CLEARED
YES
NO
REPLACE
4BBA KTU
YES
REPLACE
4B5A KTU
TROUBLE
CLEARED
NO
PERFORM
DIAGNOSTICS
TEST ~. 2
Fig. 14-No Audible Ringback
Page 40
YES
ISS 1, SECTION 518-411-100
CHECK FOR PROPER
INTERCOM CODE
ASSIGNMENT AND
CUT -DDWN (NOTE)
TROUBLE
CLEARED
YES
NO
NOTE: IF AUDIBLE RINGBACK DOES
NOT STOP AFTER CALLEO PARTY
ANSWERS, REFER TO PROCEOURE
FOR NO DIAL TONE.
REPLACE 4B4A
KTU ASSOCIATED
WITH CALLED
STATION
Fig. IS-Cannot Call Specific Station-Audible Ringback Heard
Page 41
SECTION 518-411-100
ARE ALL STATIONS
AFFECTED
YES
REPLACE
486A KTU*
TROUBLE
CLEAREO
NO
NO
GROUND H LEAD
AT AFFECTED
STATION. PUT
CALL ON HOLD
DOES CALL GO
ON HOLD
PERFORM
DIAGNOSTICS
TEST NO.8
YES
*CALLS MAY BE GOING ON HOLD
BUT LAMP WINK FUNCTION IS NOT
OPERA TING. REPLACE 486A KTU.
CHECK WIRING
OF HOLD KEY
NO
CHECK FOR
FAUL TV H LEAO
WIRING
TROUBLE
CLEARED
YES
NO
REPLACE
ASSOCIATED
484A KTU
Fig. 16-Cannot Place Intercom Call On Hold
Page 42
ISS I, SECTION 518-411- 100
8USY TONE HEARO
WITH LINE BEING
RUNG OR ON HOLO
REPLACE
ASSOCIATED
488A KTU
TROUBLE
CLEARED
NO
CHECK FOR
FAULTY A AND/OR
L CONNECTIONS
CHECK FOR
PROPER LINE
ACCESS CODE
ASSIGNMENT
LINE OROPPED OR
GOES INTO HOLO
WHEN ACCESSED
REPLACE
ASSOCIATED
488A KTU
TROUBLE
CLEARED
NO
CHECK FOR
OPEN T AND R
CONNECTIONS
Fig. 17-Cannot Access a CO/PBX Line in Ringing State or On Hold
REPLACE
ASSOCIATED
488A KTU
TROUBLE
CLEARED
YES
NO
CHECK FOR
FAUL TY A LEAD
Fig. IS-Cannot Release From Answered CO/PBX Line
Page 43
SECTION S 18-411-1 00
TABLE P
CIRCUIT PACK HK-14 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCHES
FUNCTION
LAMP OR SWITCH
1
2
Indicates which link is being tested
3
4
PASS
Indicates the outcome of a test
FAIL
A
Status
Lamps
When lit, indicates proper operation of
the A lead buss
ATLL
When lit, indicates A TLL buss is
operating properly
RTC
When lit, indicates proper operation of
Real Time Clock
SCN
When lit, indicates processor is scanning
stations
+7V
-lOV
+lOV
When lit, indicates presence of proper
voltage in system
-24V
-5V
Display
lamp
1
Link operation and dial tone
2
Audible ringback
3
Busy tone
4
Error tone
5
Automatic transfer function*
6
Flash rate
7
Ring rate
8
Wink rate
9
Slow CO disconnect
A
Fast CO disconnect
B
Check for Alert Time Out
ON
In the ON position, provides off-hook
indication to the system
Switch
STEP
Steps the Diagnostic Test program
through the steps
ATXFR
Used with test number 5*
*When making this test, FAIL lamp is normally lit.
When ATXFR switch is depressed, PASS lamp lights_ Test
5 is presently not used with 6B KTS.
Page 44
ISS 1, SECTION 518-411-100
REMOVE FIRST
484A KTU FROM
JS
,-
1
1
PLUG HK-14
INTO JS
TURN SWITCH
TO ON
1
ALL VOLTAGE
SUPPL Y LAMPS
ON
1
NO
CHECK FUSING
AND POWER
CONNECTIONS
rES
RTC LAMP
ON
CONNECT HANO
TEST SET TO
TERMINALS
LINK LAMP
ON
NO
SYSTEM MAY BE
BUSY - IF NOT.
REPLACE 4BSA KTU
rES
NO
REPLACE 48SA KTU.
485A KTU OR
POWER SUPPLY
DIAL 05
rES
SCN LAMP
FlASHING
NO
REPLACE
485A KTU
1
DIGIT 1 SHOWS
ON VISUAL
DISPLAY
rES
A LAMP
ON
I
YES
NO
REMOVE 484A ANO
488A KTUs ONE AT
A TIME UNTIL LAMP
LIGHTS. REPLACE
DEFECTIVE KTU
NO
TURN BOARD OFF.
RECHECK STATUS
LAMPS. RESTART
PROCEDURE.
rES
READY FOR
TESTS
Fig. 19-HK-14 Diagnostic Circuit Pack Preparation
Page 45
SECTION 518-411-100
DIGIT 1 SHOWS
ON VISUAL
DISPLAY
NO
SEE FIGURE FOR
CIRCUIT PACK
PREPARATION
REPLACE 4BGA
KTU DR FIRST
4B7A KTU
NO
REPLACE
FIRST
4B7A KTU
NO
REPLACE 4BGA KTU
DR FIRST 4B7A KTU.
REMOVE 4B4A AND
4BBA KTUs ONE AT
TIME UNTIL DIAL
TONE IS HEARD.
NO
YES
LINK 2
LAMP ON
REPLACE 4BGA
KTU DR FIRST
4B7A KTU
NO
REPLACE
FIRST
4B7A KTU
NO
DIAL TONE
HEARD
NO
LINK 4
LAMP ON
NO
PASS
LAMP ON
NO
DIAL TONE
HEARD
NO
YES
REPLACE 4BGA KTU
DR FIRST 487A KTU.
REMOVE 4B4A AND
4BBA KTUs ONE AT
TIME UNTIL DIAL
TONE IS HEARD.
NO
YES
IS SYSTEM
EQUIPPED WITH
TWO 487A KTUs
REPLACE
SECOND
4B7A KTU
YES
NO
END OF
TEST 1
Fig. 20- Test 1 Sequence-Link Operation and Dial Tone
Page 46
REPLACE 4BGA KTU
DR SECOND 4B7A KTU.
REMOVE 4B4A AND
4BBA KTUs ONE AT
TIME UNTIL DIAL
TONE IS HEARD.
REPLACE 4BGA
KTU DR SECOND
4B7A KTU
REPLACE
SECOND
4B7A KTU
YES
YES
DIAL TONE
HEARD
NO
YES
YES
PASS
LAMP ON
PASS
LAMP ON
YES
YES
DIAL TONE
HEARD
REPLACE 4BGA
KTU DR SECOND
4B7A KTU
YES
YES
PASS
LAMP ON
NO
YES
YES
LINK 1
LAMP DN
LINK 3
LAMP ON
REPLACE 4BGA KTU
DR SECOND 4B7A KTU.
REMOVE 4B4A AND
4BBA KTUs ONE AT
TIME UNTIL DIAL
TONE IS HEARD.
ISS 1, SECTION 518-411-100
-
DEPRESS
STEP
SWITCH
NO
1
IF 1 IS DISPLAYED
DEPRESS SWITCH
AGAIN. IF 1 STILL
DISPLAYED, START
FROM PREPARATION.
t---
AUDIBLE
RINGBACK
HEARD.
NO
REPLACE
485A OR
486A KTU
NO
SEE
TEST 1
NO
REPLACE
485A OR
486A KTU
J,"
YES
LINK 1
LAMP ON
SEE
TEST 1
YES
1
DIGIT 2 SHOWS
ON VISUAL
DISPLAY
NO
LINK 3
LAMP ON
NO
SEE
TEST 1
t---
LINK 4
LAMP ON
YES
rES
AUDIBLE RING
BACK HEARD.
(NOTE)
I
NO
AUDIBLE
RINGBACK
HEARD.
REPLACE
485A OR
486A KTU
YES
YES
J,LINK 2
LAMP ON
1
NO
SEE
TEST 1
t--NOTE: IF SYSTEM IS EQUIPPED
WITH SINGLE SPURT AUDIBLE
RINGBACK OPTION, THE AUDIBLE
RING BACK TONE WILL BE
CONTINUOUS FOR THE TEST.
YES
AUDIBLE
RINGBACK
HEARD.
NO
REPLACE
485A OR
486A KTU
1
.-
YES
IS SYSTEM
EQUIPPED WITH
TWO 487 A KTUs
YES
I
NO
END OF
TEST 2
Fig. 21-Test 2 Sequence-Audible Ringback
Page 47
SECTION 518-411- 100
DEPRESS
STEP
SWITCH
LINK 3
LAMP ON
IF 2 IS DISPLAYED
DEPRESS SWITCH
AGAIN. IF 2 STILL
DISPLAYED, START
FROM PREPARATION
NO
1YES
LINK 1
LAMP ON
SEE
TEST 1
NO
REPLACE
485A OR
488A KTU
NO
SEE
TEST 1
BUSY TONE
HEARD
NO
REPLACE
485A OR
488A KTU
YES
+
NO
~
SEE
TEST 1
f----
LINK 4
LAMP ON
YES
rES
BUSY TONE
HEARD
•
BUSY TONE
HEARD
REPLACE
485A OR
488A KTU
NO
I YES
LINK 2
LAMP ON
YES
NO
SEE
TEST 1
I---
1
YES
BUSY TONE
HEARD
NO
~
REPLACE
485A OR
488A KTU
lYES
.~
IS SYSTEM
EQUIPPED WITH
TWO 487A KTUs
YES
I
NO
END OF
TEST 3
Fig. 22-Test 3 Sequence-Busy Tone
Page 48
r---
YES
1
DIGIT 3 SHOWS
ON VISUAL
DISPLAY
NO
f----
ISS 1, SECTION 518-411-100
DEPRESS
STEP
SWITCH
LINK 3
LAMP ON
NO
IF 3 IS DISPLAYED
DEPRESS SWITCH
AGAIN. IF 3 STILL
DISPLAYED. START
FROM PREPARATION
ERROR TONE
HEARD
NO
REPLACE
485A OR
486A KTU
NO
SEE
TEST 1
YES
.-
rES
LINK 1
LAMP ON
SEE
TEST 1
YES
1
DIGIT 4 SHOWS
ON VISUAL
DISPLAY
NO
NO
SEE
TEST 1
I---
LINK 4
LAMP ON
~
YES
IYES
ERROR TONE
HEARD
NO
ERROR TONE
HEARD
REPLACE
485A OR
486A KTU
NO
--
REPLACE
485A OR
486A KTU
YES
LvES
.-
LINK 2
LAMP ON
NO
SEE
TEST 1
NO
REPLACE
485A OR
486A KTU
-
1
YES
ERROR TONE
HEARD
lYES
,r
IS SYSTEM
EQUIPPED WITH
TWO 487A KTUs
YES
I
NO
END OF
TEST 4
Fig. 23-Test 4 Sequence-Error Tone
Page 49
SECTION 518-411-100
DEPRESS
STEP SWITCH
NO
IF 4 IS DISPLAYED
DEPRESS SWITCH
AGAIN. IF 4 STILL
DISPLAYED, START
FROM PREPARATION.
TEST 5 NOT
PRESENTl Y USED.
PROCEED TO
NEXT TEST.
Fig. 24-Test 5 Sequence
DEPRESS
STEP SWITCH
NO
REPLACE 485A OR 488A
KTU OR REMOVE 484A
>-NO_-liOI KTUs ONE AT A TIME
UNTIL DISPLAY
FLASHES. REPLACE
DEFECTIVE KTU.
END OF
TEST 8
Fig. 25-Test 6 Sequence-Flash Rate
Page
sO
IF 5 IS DISPLAYED
DEPRESS SWITCH
AGAIN. IF 5 STILL
DISPLAYED, START
FROM PREPARATION.
ISS 1, SECTION 518-411-100
DEPRESS
STEP SWITCH
NO
DISPLAY TURNS
ON AND OFF
AT RING RATE
YES
IF B IS DISPLAYED
DEPRESS SWITCH
AGAIN. IF 6 STILL
DISPLAYED, START
FROM PREPARATION.
REPLACE 485A OR 486A
KTU OR REMOVE 484A
KTUs ONE AT A TIME
}--~ UNTIL DISPLAY SHOWS
RING RATE. REPLACE
DEFECTIVE KTU.
NO
END OF
TEST 7
Fig. 26-Test 7 Sequence-Ring Rate
Page 51
SECTION 518-411-100
DEPRESS
STEP SWITCH
NO
NO
REPLACE 485A OR 48SA
KTU OR REMOVE 484A
KTUs ONE AT A TIME
UNTIL DISPLAY WINKS.
REPLACE DEFECTIVE
KTU.
END OF
TEST 8
Fig. 27-1e$t 8 Sequence-Wink Rate
Page 52
IF 7 IS DISPLAYED
DEPRESS SWITCH
AGAIN. IF 7 STILL
DISPLAYED. START
FROM PREPARATION.
ISS 1, SECTION 518-411-100
DEPRESS
STEP SWITCH
NO
END OF
TEST 9
IF B IS DISPLAYED
OEPRESS SWITCH
AGAIN. IF B STIll
DISPlAYEO, START
FROM PREPARATION.
REPLACE 4BSA KTU
OR REMOVE 4BBA
KTUs ONE AT A TIME
UNTIL DISPLAY SHOWS
9. REPLACE
OEFECTIVE KTU.
Fig. 28-Test 9 Sequence-Slow CO Disconnect
DEPRESS
STEP SWITCH
NO
END OF
TEST A
IF 9 IS DISPLAYED
DEPRESS SWITCH
AGAIN. IF 9 STIll
DISPLAYED, START
FROM PREPARATION
REPLACE 4BSA KTU
OR REMOVE 4BBA
KTUs ONE AT A TIME
UNTIL DISPLAY SHOWS
A. REPLACE
DEFECTIVE KTU.
Fig. 29-Test A Sequence-Fast CO Disconnect
Page 53
SECTION 518-411-100
DEPRESS
STEP SWITCH
NO
NO
REPLACE 485A OR
486A KTU OR REMOVE
484A KTUs ONE AT
A TIME UNTIL DISPLAY
SHOWS b. REPLACE
DEFECTIVE KTU.
END OF
TEST b
Fig. 30- Test B Sequence-Alert Time-out
Page 54
IF A IS DISPLAYED
DEPRESS SWITCH
AGAIN. IF A STILL
OISPLAYED. START
FROM PRE PARA TION.
ISS I, SECTION 518-411-100
572Al KSU
A25B
CONNECTOR CABLE
PLUG
13
TO J19B
1ST 4BBA KTU
[~9)
B19)
B37 )
B17)
TO J21B
2ND 488B KTU
TO J23B
3RD 4BBB KTU
TO J25B
4TH 4BBB KTU
['~)
B19)
B37)
B17)
['§)
B19)
B37)
B17)
["9)
B19)
B37)
B17)
(26 (
( 1 (
( 27 (
( 2 (
( 28(
( 3 (
(29 (
( 4 (
( 30 (
( 5 (
( 31 (
6 (
32(
( 7 (
( 33(
( B (
34(
9 (
35(
10(
36 (
11 (
37(
12(
3B (
13(
39 (
14(
40(
15(
41 (
16(
42 (
17(
43 (
lB (
44 (
19 (
45 (
20(
46 (
21 (
47(
22 (
4B(
23 (
49 (
24(
50(
25(
<
<
(W-BL)
(BL-W)
(A-Ill
(O-W)
(W-G)
(G-W)
(W-BR)
(BR-W)
(W-S)
(S-W)
(R-BL)
(BL-R!
(R-O)
(O-R)
(Ii-G)
(G-R)
(R-BR)
(BR-R)
(R-S)
(S-R)
(BK-BL)
(BL-BK)
(BK-O)
(O-BK)
(BK-G)
(G-BK)
(BK-BR)
(BR-BK)
(BK-S)
(S-BK)
T( 1)
R( 1)
T(2)
R(2)
T(3j
R(~l
ml
1i(41
IISl
R(5)
T(6)
R{6!
T(7)
R(7)
T(SI
R(B)
TO
INCOMING
CO LINES
(Y-B[l
(BL-Y)
(Y-O)
(O-Y)
(Y-G)
(G-Y)
(Y-BR)
(BR-Y)
(Y-S)
(S-Y)
(V-BL)
lB[-iil
(V-O)
(O-V)
(V-Ill
(G-V)
!V-BR)
(BR-V)
(V-S)
(S-V)
Fig. 31-Terminations of Incoming CO/PBX Lines in 572Al KSU
Page 55
SECTION 518-411-100
572A1 KSU
A258
CONNECTOR CABLE
184C 1 BACKBOARD
PLUG
12
811 )
831)
TO J198
1ST 488A KTU
814)
812)
832)
B15)
811}
831)
TO J218
2NO 488A KTU
B14)
812)
B32)
815)
811)
831)
TO J238
3RD 488A KTU
814)
B12)
832)
815)
811 )
831)
TO J258
4TH 488A KTU
814)
B12)
B32)
B15)
BLOCK A
COLUMN A
1
~____~(~W-~B~L)~__4)2S~
-0
2S(
(BL-W)
1 ~-----4(iTW_:"'OT')
(
a
~-~) 1 )
( 27(
a
~------~(0~_W~)----~)27 )
( 2 ~----~~----4)2
(
)
05
~____-4(~W-~G~)____~)28 )
a
28(
(G-W)
(3 (
~------"(W~_B~R~)----~)3 ~
a
29(
~-----4(~BR~_rrW)~--~)29 )
4 (
~
!======~(tw-j,S~)~===~~~O
0 10
( 3C(
)
(5 ~
( _____(~S~-W~)~__7)5 )
a
~
______
(~R~-8~L~)
____
~)31
31 (
~
(6 ~
( ____~(~8~L-~R~)____7)S )
a
~
____
~(~R--::O+-)
----4)
32
32 (
a
)
(O-R)
)
7
0 15
7 (
)
~
____
--7(.;;.R--=G.;...)
____
~)
33
a
( 33(
)
(G-R)
)8 ~
(8 (
34 ~
( ____---l(.;;,R-==8:;;..R)f----~) 34 ~
(BR-R)
( 9 ~----~(~R~_Sn)~---7)9
(
a
)
0
35(
~----~(~S_~R~)----4)35 )
20
10(
~----~(~B~K_~B~L~)---7)10 ~
( 3S(
~-----4(~BL~_=BK~)--~)36 ~
( 11 ~------(~B~K_~0~)~--~)11
(
)
a
37 ~-----4(~0_~B~K)~--~)37
(
a
)
( 12(
~------(~B~K_;G~)----~)12 )
0l!!i
38 ~-----4(~G_~8~K)~--~)38
(
a
)
13(
~------~(B~K_~B~R~)---7)13 ~
( 39(
~-----4(~8R~_~8K~)--~)39 ~
a
( 14(
~----~(~8~K_~S~)~--~)14 )
0 30
40(
~-----4(~S_~8~K)~--~)40 )
( 15(
~------(rnY~_B~L+)----7)15 ~
41(
~------(~B~L_~y~)----~)41 ~
1S ~-----4(~Y_~0~)~--~)1S
(
a
)
(42 ~-----4(~O_~Y+-)
(
a
----4) 42 )
(17(
0 35
~-----4(';Y_-:G+-)----4) 17 )
43(
a
~-----4(";"G_~Y~)----4) 43 )
( 18(
~----~(~Y~_B~R~)----7)18 ~
44(
~----4(-i::BR~_rry)~--4) 44 ~
a
19(
~-----4(~Y_~S~)~--~)19 )
0
( 45(
~-----4(~S_7.Y~)----~)45 )
40
( 20(
a
~------(~V~_B~L~)----~)20 )
4S(
~------(~BrL_~V~)----7)4S ~
( 21 ~~-----l(';;;V_:""O';";)
(
a
~--4) 21 )
47 ~-----4(~0_~V+-)----~)47
(
~
22(
~-----4(';V_~G~)----~)22 )
a~5
( 48(
a
~------~(G~_V~)----~)48 )
(23(
a
~-----4(';V_~B~R)r---~)23 )
49 ~------n(B=R_~V~)----~)49
(
~
( 24(
~----7(n:V_:"'ST')~--7) 24 ~
50(
a 50
~----7(';"'S.."V.;...)- - 4 ) 50)
25(
~------~-~----7)25~
A(1!
L( 1)
A(2)
L(2)
A(3)
L(3)
A(4)
L(4)
~
A(5)
~
~
c
L(5)
A(S)
L(S)
A(7)
L(7)
A(8)
[(B)
Fig- 32-Connections Between Plugs 12 and 1 to 4 of 572A 1 Key 5ervice Unit and 184Cl Backboard (Sheet
1 of 5)
Page 56
ISS I, SECTION 518-411-100
572A1 KSU
>
"B6
B26>
B7 >
TO
FUSE 1
B28>
B27
B8
B9
BO
B12~
B32
B31
A25B
CONNECTOR CABLE
P1
TO J6B
1ST 48 4A KTU
B11
B30
B29~
B20
B13
B33
B14
B35
B34
B15
B16
B2
B19,..
B39
B38,..
B17
TO J7B
2ND 48 4B KTU
TO
FUSE 2
B18>
B37>
B36>
B22)
B6 >
B27>
B7 >
B28)
B27>
B8 >
B9 >
... BO >
BLOCK A
COLUMN E
1
I
)
26~(_ _ _-+(;,W-.!::B~l' - - 4 ) 26 >
<
<1 (
<27 (
2 (
28 (
53 (
~
(Bl-W)
(W-O)
) 1
(O-W)
(W-G)
(G-W)
) 27
) 2
) 28
(W-SRI
29(
(BR-W)
4 (
(W-s)
" 30 (
5 (
31(
6 (
32 (
7 (
B10'
184C 1 BACKBOARD
(SEE TABLE E)
33 (
~8 (
34 (
9 (
35 (
10(
36(
~ 11 (
37 (
12 (
38 (
13 (
39 (
14(
40 (
15 (
~ 41 (
; 16(
42(
" H(
43(
18(
44 (
19(
45 (
20(
46(
21(
47(
22 (
48(
23(
49(
24 (
50 (
25 (
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
(S-W)
(R-Bl)
(Bl-R)
(R-O)
(O-R)
(R-G)
(G-R)
(R-BR)
(BR-R)
(R-S)
(S-R)
(BK-Bl)
(Bl-BK)
(BK-O)
(O-BK)
(BK-G)
(G-BK)
(BK-BR)
(BR-BK)
(BK-S)
(S-BK)
>
0
0
>-----<>
>-----<> 5
>
>
)29 >
)3
0
0
0
>-----<>
>-----<>0 10
)5 )
)31
>-----<>
)6
)4
) 30
) 32
>
0
)7 >
) 33 >-----<> 15
) 8 >-----<>
0
) 34 >-----<>0
>
) 9 )-0
) 35 )-020
0
)10 >
)38
0
) 11 >
) 37
12
)-025
) 38
>-----<>
>-----<>
>-----<>
>-----<>0
13
)39 >
)14
) 40
>-----<>
>-----<> 30
(V-Sl)
) 15 >
(Bl-Y)
(Y-O)
(O-Y)
(Y-G)
(G-Y)
)41
0
)16
)42
)17 )-035
0
)43 >
) 18
) 44
)19
) 45 )-040
0
)20
)46
0
)21 >
)47
) 22 )-045
)48
)23
0
)49
) 24
) 50 )-050
)25
(V-SR)
( BR-Y )
(Y-S)
( S-Y )
(V-Bl)
(SL-V)
(V-D)
(O-V)
(V-G)
(G-V)
(V-BR)
(BR-V)
(V-s)
(S-V)
0
>-----<>
>
>-----<>
>-----<>
>-----<>
>-----<>
>
>-----<>
>-----<>
>-----<>
>-----<>
>
>-----<>
>-----<>
T
R
A
TO
STATION 10
l
lG
H
B
BZ
BZ1
T
R
A
•
l
lG
TO
STATION 11
H
B
BZ
BZ1
T
R
A
<
l
lG
TO
STATION 12
OR 62
Ii
Ii
liz
BZ1
T
<
R
~
l
lG
TO
STATION 13
OR 63
H
B
BZ
BZ1
T
R
A
l
lG
Ii
Ii
•
TO
STATION 14
OR 64
BZ
BZ1
Fig. 32-Connections Between Plugs 12 and 1 to 4 of 572Al Key Service Unit and 184Cl Backboard (Sheet
2 of 5)
Page 57
SECTION 518-411-100
572Al KSU
B12)
B32)
B31)
TO
FUSE 2
Bl0)
Bll
B30~
B29'
B20
813'
B33
B14~
B35
TO J7B
2ND 48 4A KTU
B34
B15,
B18
B2 ,
B19
839
B38,
017
B18)
B37)
838)
>B22)
B8 )
B26)
B7 )
T0
FUSE 3
TO J8B
3RD 484A KTU
B28)
B27
B8
B9
BO
B12
832
B31~
Bl0
811)
B30)
B29)
B20)
A25B
CONNECTOR CABLE
P2
184C 1 BACKBOARD
(SEE TABLE E)
BLOCK A
COLUMN F
1
28~(_ _ _+(W;:-;:::;BL~)_ _~) 28 )
a
1 (
(BL-W)
1 )
a
27 (
(A-O)
) 27 )
a
2 (
(O-W)
) 2 )
05
28(
(W-G)
) 2B )
a
(G-W)
a
3 (
(A-SRI) 3 )
a
29 (
(8R-W)
29 )
a
4 (
(A-s)
) 4 )
30 (
(S-W)
) 30 )
010
a
5 (
) 5 )
31 (
(R-8L)
31 )
a
8 (
(BL-R)
)8 )
a
32(
(R-O)
)32 )
a
7 (
(O-R)
) 7 )
0 15
33(
(R-G)
)33 )
a
8 (
(G-R)
) 8 )
a
34 (
(R-BR)
34 )
a
(8R-R)
a
9 (
(R-S)
) 9 )
"' 35 (
0 20
(S-R)
) 35 )
;
a
(8K-BL)
10 )
~ 10 (
a
38 (
(OL-BK)
38 )
a
11(
(BK-O)
)11 )
a
37(
(O-BK)
)37 )
0 25
12(
(8K-G»
12 )
a
38 (
(G-BK)
38 )
a
13 (
(BK-BR)
13 )
a
39(
(BR-BK)
39 )
a
14 (
(8K-S)
14 )
<
<
<
<
"'
<
<
<40(
<15 (
<41 (
<18(
<42 (
17 (
<43(
18 (
~
44(
"' 19 (
; 45(
20(
; 48 (
21 (
47 (
22 (
48 (
23 (
49(
24 (
50 (
25 (
<
<
<
<
<
40 )
(y-sO) 15 )
(BL-V)
41 )
(V-D)
) 16 )
(O-V)
) 42 )
(V-G)
) 17 )
(G-Y)
)43 )
(Y-BR»
18 )
(BR-Y)
)44 )
(Y-S)
) 19 )
(S-Y)
)45 )
(V-BL)
)20 )
(BL-V)
48 )
(V-D)
) 21 )
(O-V)
) 47 )
(V-G)
) 22 )
(G-V)
) 48 )
(V-BR)
23 )
(BR-V)
49 )
(v-S)
) 24 )
(S-V)
) 50 )
) 25 )
(S-BK)
0
a
a
a
a
30
0
a
a
a
0
40
45
a
a
0
a
056
a
TO
STATION 15
OR 85
L
LG
TO
STATION 18
OR 88
Ii
B
BZ
BZl
f
<
R
A
L
TO
STATION 17
OR 87
[~
H
II
BZ
lizl
T
L
LG
H
B
OZ
•
TO
STATION 18
OR 88
on
T
R
A
0
0
L
LG
H
B
BZ
BZl
T
R
A
R
~
°35
a
a
a
T
R
A
L
[II
H
II
TO
STATION 19
OR 89
OZ
IiZl
Fig. 32-Connections Between Plugs 12 and 1 to 4 of 572AI Key Service Unit and 184CI Backboard (Sheet
3 of 5)
Page 58
ISS 1, SECTION 518-411.100
572Al KSU
A25B
CONNECTOR CABLE
lB4Cl BACKBOARD
(SEE TABLE E)
BLOCK A
COLUMN G
..... B13)
B33)
B14)
TO
FUSE 3
B35)
B34
Bl~(
TO J8B
3RD 484A KTU
(
(w-HR)
; 29(
(BR-W)
53
~
B17'
.- 733((
B18)
B37)
B38)
>B22)
B8 )
B28)
B7 )
Bl0
Bll
B30"
B39
B20"
B13
B3~~
B14
FUSE 4
28(
(BL-W)
(W-O)
(O-W)
(W-G)
(G-W)
4 (
; 30(
5 (
; 31 (
; B (
~ 32(
B27,
B8
B9 ,
BO
B12,
B32,
B31
T0
2B~(_ _ _~(;,W-..::B~L)!--4) 2B )
<
1 (
<
27(
<
2 (
B18
B2
B19
B39
B38
B28)
TO J9B
4TH 484A KTU
P3
B35
B34)
B15)
B1B)
B2 )
~
;8 (
34 (
<
9 (
<
35 (
<
< 10(
< 38 (
< 11 (
37 (
12 (
38(
~ 13 (
~ 39 (
14(
~
") 40(
; 15 (
") 41 (
; lB (
42 (
17 (
.- 43(
;
; 18 (
; 44 (
19 (
~
; 45(
; 20 (
; 48(
~ 21(
47(
22 (
48 (
~
23(
( 49 (
(24(
<50(
<
5
"'
<
<~(
) 1 )
)27)
) 2 )
0
(S-W)
)30)
(R-BL)
(BL-R)
(R-O)
(O-R)
(R-G)
(G-R)
)31)
)B )
)32)
)
a
a
)7
0
)33)
a
)8 )
0
) 34 )
) 9 )
) 35 )
a
(S-R)
(BK-!iL)
(BL-BK)
(BK-O)
(O-BK)
(BK-~)
(G-BK)
(BK-BR)
(BR-BK)
(BK-S)
(S-BK)
(V-dL)
(BL-Y)
(Y-O)
(O-Y)
(Y-G)
(G-Y)
(Y-SR)
(BR-Y)
(Y-S)
(S-Y)
(V-BLI
(8L-V)
(V-D)
(O-V)
(V-G)
(G-V)
(V-BR)
(aR-V)
(V-S)
(S-VI
5
L
LG
H
B
BI
Bll
T
R
A
0
(W-S)
(R-S)
T
R
A
a
a
a
)3 )
)29~~
a
)4 )
(R-BR)
(BR-R)
1
0
)28)
)5 )
0
)1 )
3B )
) 11 )
) 37 )
) 12 )
)38 )
13 )
39 )
) 14 )
)40 )
) 15 )
) 41 )
) lB )
) 42 )
) 17 )
)43 )
) 18 )
) 44 )
) 19 )
)45 )
) 20 )
)48 )
)21 )
)47 )
) 22 )
) 4B )
)23 )
) 49 )
)24 )
)50 )
)~
)
0
10
0
a
15
L
LG
H
B
BI
20
!ill
0
0
0
T
R
A
0
a
a
0l!!
0
0
a
30
0
0
35
0
a
a
40
0
a
0
0
TO
STATION 22
[~
BZ
Bi:l
-<
L
LG
H
TO
STATION 23
B
a
0
-<
R
A
0
a
a
TO
STATION 21
[
f
a
0
<
H
B
a
0
TO
STATION 20
45
a
0
a
°5ii
0
BI
Bll
T
R
A
L
TO
STATION 24
LII
H
6
liZ
Bll
,
Fig. 32-Connections Between Plugs 12 and 1 to 4 of 572A1 Key Service Unit and 184C1 Backboard (Sheet
4 of 5)
Page 59
SECTION S 18-411-100
A25B
CONNECTOR CABLE
572Al KSU
To J9B
4TH 48 4A KTU
B19)
B39)
B38)
B17)
TO
FUSE 4
B18)
B37)
B36)
)B22)
86 )
826)
B7 )
828)
827,..
B8 .B9
BO
B12
B32~
B31
Bl0
o
T Jl0B
5TH 48 4A KTU
Bl1
B30,..
B29~
B20
B13~
B33
B14
B35,..
834,..
B15
B16,..
B2
B19
B39
B38
TO
FUSE 5
817
B18)
B37)
B36)
.... B22)
P4
184Cl BACKBOARO
(SEE TABLE E)
BLOCK A
COLUMN H
BL::..f)_ _4) 26 >-0 1
26~(_ _ _...l.(W;..-.=;
1 (
(BL-W)
) 1
------=C
27 (
(W-O )
) 27 )
a
2 (
(O-W)
;> 2 - " 5
28 (
(W-G )
) 28 >-0
<
<
<
<
3 (
<29 (
<4 (
<530 ((
<31(
<6 (
<
<32(
7 (
<833 ((
"-
34 (
<
r-<
r-<
(G-W)
(W-BR)
(BR-W)
(W-S)
(S-W)
(R-BL)
(BL-R)
(R-O)
(O-R)
(R-G )
(G-R)
(R-BR )
(BR-R)
) 3 >-0
) 29 >-0
;> 4 ) a
) 30 >-0
) 5 >-0 10
)31>-0
)6 >-0
)32 )
a
) 7
>-0 15
) 33
>-0
) 8
>-0
) 34 )
a
(R-S)
) 9 >-0
35 (
10(
~ 36 (
11 (
37 (
12(
38 (
13 (
39(
14(
40 (
15(
41 (
16 (
42(
17 (
43 (
(S-R)
(BK-BL)
(BL-8K)
(BK-O)
(O-BK)
(BK-G)
(G-BK)
(BK-BR)
(BR-BK)
(BK-S)
(S-BK)
(V-BL)
18(
44 (
19 (
45 (
20 (
48(
21 (
47 (
22 (
" 48(
23 (
49 (
24 (
( 50(
( 25 (
(V-aR)
) 35 >-0 20
10 >-0
38 >-0
) 11 >-0
) 37 >-0
0 25
)12 )
) 38 >-0
13 >-0
)39 >-0
)14 >-0
) 40 >-0 30
) 15 >-0
) 41 >-0
) 16 )
a
)42 )
a
) 17 )
0
35
) 43
>-0
) 18 >-0
) 44 >-0
) 19 >-0
) 45 >-0 40
) 20 >-0
) 46 >-0
a
) 21 )
a
) 47 )
) 22 >-0 45
a
)48 )
9
"
"
<
<
(BL-V)
(V-O)
(O-V)
(V-G)
(G-V)
(BR-V)
(V-s)
(S-V)
(V-BL)
(BL-V)
(V-O)
(O-V)
(V-G)
(G-V)
(V-BR)
(BR-V)
(V-S)
(S-V)
) 23 >-0
) 49 >-0
a
) 24 )
)50 >-0 50
) 25 >-0
T
R
A
L
LG
H
B
BZ
BZl
T
R
A
...
TO
STATION 25
OR
CODE 70
(ALL ZONE
PAGING)
<
TO
STATION 28
OR
COOE 71
(PAGING
ZONE 1)
L
LG
H
B
BZ
BZl
T
R
A
L
LG
H
B
BZ
Bzl
T
R
A
L
LG
H
B
BZ
BZl
T
TO
STATION 27
OR
CODE 72
(PAGING
ZONE 2)
<
TO
STATION 28
OR
CODE 73
(PAGING
ZONE 3)
R
A
L
LG
H
B
BZ
Bll
TO
STATION 29
OR 5A
Fig. 32-Connections Between Plugs 12 and 1 to 4 of S72Al Key Service Unit and 184Cl Backboard (Sheet
S of S)
Page 60
ISS 1, SECTION 518-411-100
572A1 KSU
A25B
CONNECTOR CABLE
184C1 BACKBOARD
(SEE TABLE E)
BLOCK B
COLUMN A
BB )
B2B)
B7 )
TO
FUSE B
B28)
B27
B8
B9 (
BO
B12
B32
B31
B10
To J11B
BTH 48 4A KTU
B11
B30
B29
B20,
B13
B33
B14,
B35
B34
B15
B1B(
B2
B19
B29"
B38
B17
B18)
B37)
B36)
>B22)
B6 )
B26)
To J12B B7 )
7TH 48 4A KTU
B28)
TO
FUSE 7
B27)
B8 )
B9 )
BO )
P5
E
<2B
1
<27 E
<2 E
E
<28
3 E
E
29 E
4 E
30E
~
5 E
31E
6 E
32 E
7 E
33E
8 E
34E
9
~
35E
10E
3BE
11 E
37E
12E
38E
13 E
;
39 E
14 E
E
; 40
15E
41 E
1BE
42 E
17E
43 E
18 E
44 E
19 E
45E
20 E
4BE
21 E
47 E
22 E
48 E
23 E
49 E
24 E
50 E
25E
E
"
"
"
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
(W-Bl)
(Bl-W)
(Q-Dj
(O-W)
(W-G)
(G-W)
HI-BRI
(BR-W)
HI-Ill
(S-W)
(R-Bl)
!Bl-Rl
(R-O)
(O-R)
(R-G)
(G-R)
(R-BR)
(BR-R)
IR-!:j
(S-R)
(BK-Blj
(Bl-BK)
(BK-O)
(O-BK)
IBR-Gj
(G-BK)
(BK-BR)
(BR-BK)
(BK-S)
(S-BK)
(Y-Bl)
(Bl-Y)
(V-O)
(O-Y)
(V-G)
(G-Y)
IY-IIRj
(BR-V)
(Y-S)
(S-V)
(V-Bl)
(Bl-Vi
(V-O)
(O-V)
lii-Gj
(G-V)
(V-BR)
(BR-V)
IQ-1l1
(S-V)
~
2B )
o1
~ 1 }-o
~ 27 }-o
0 5
~2 )
0
~ 28
0
~3 )
0
~ 29
~4 }-o
0 10
~ 30 )
0
~5 )
0
~ 31 )
0
~6 )
~ 32 }-o
>
>
P
}-o15
~ 33 }-o
0
~8 )
0
~ 34 )
)9 }-o
~ 35 )
~20
~ 10 )
~ 3B }-o
0
~ 11 )
~ 37 }-o
~ 12 }-ol!5
~ 38 }-o
~ 13 }-o
0
~ 39 )
0
~ 14 )
0 30
~ 40 )
0
~ 15 )
~ 41 }-o
) 1B }-o
~ 42 }-o
~17 }-o35
~
43 )
0
0
18 )
0
44 )
19 }-o
0
45 )
0 40
20 )
0
~ 4B )
0
~ 21 )
~ 47 }-o
~ 22 )
0 45
~ 48 }-o
0
~ 23
0
~ 49 )
~ 24 }-o
0 50
~ 50 )
0
~ 25 )
~
~
~
~
~
>
T
R
A
l
lG
H
B
BZ
BZ1
T
TO
STATION 30
R
A
l
lG
H
B
BZ
BZ1
T
TO
STATION 31
R
A
l
lG
H
B
BZ
BZ1
T
TO
STATION 32
R
A
l
lG
H
B
BZ
BZ1
T
TO
STATION 33
R
A
[
TO
•
STATION 34
lG
R
B
BZ
BZ1
,
Fig. 33-Connections Between Plugs 5 to 8 of 572Al Key Service Unit and 184CI Backboard (Sheet 1 of 4)
Page 61
SECTION 518-411-100
572A1 KSU
1B4C 1 BACKBOARD
(SEE TABLE E)
A25B
CONNECTOR CABLE
BLOCK B
COLUMN E
B12)
B32)
B31)
TO
FUSE 7
B10)
B35
B34
B15
B14
B2
B19~
B39
B38
B17
B18)
B37)
B36)
>B22)
B6 )
B26)
B7 )
B2B)
To J13B
8TH 48 4A KTU
TO
FUSE 8
0
<2B (
B27
B8
B9
BO
B12
B32
B31"
B10
~
(BR-W)
4 (
(W-S)
)4 )
30 (
(S-W)
) 30 }---olO
) 5 }---o
)31 }---o
)6 }---o
) 32 }---o
) 7 )
0 15
) 33 )
0
" B20)
(W-BR)
5 (
, 31(
6 (
~
32 (
7 (
33 (
") 8 (
34 (
;
}---o5
) 2B }---o
29 (
9 (
35(
10(
36 (
; 11 (
37 (
12 (
38 (
13(
39 (
14(
40 (
15(
41 (
16(
42 (
17(
43 (
~ 18 (
44 (
19(
45(
~ 20(
46 (
21 (
; 47 (
22(
48 (
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
5
<
23 (
B11 )
B30)
B29)
(W-G)
(G-W)
1
)3 )
) 29 )
3 (
B20
B13,
B33
B14
7TH 48 4A KTU
)~--7) 26 )
<26 f(_ _ _-+(~W-~B~l
(Bl-W)
(W-O)
) 1 }---o
<1 (
(
(O-W)
) 27 }---o
<27
2 (
)2
B11
B30
B2~(
To J12B
P6
<49 (
<24 (
(
<50
<25 (
(R-Bl)
(Bl-R)
(R-O)
(O-R)
(R-G)
(G-R)
( R-BR)
(BR-R)
(R-S)
(S-R)
(BK-Bl)
(Bl -BK )
(BK-O)
(O-BK )
(8K-G)
( G-BK)
(BK-BR)
( BR-BK )
(BK-S)
(S-BK)
(y-ell
(Bl-Y)
(Y-O)
( 0-Y)
(Y-G)
(G-Y)
(V-BR)
(BR- Y)
(V-S)
(S-Y)
(V-Bl)
(Bl-V)
(V-O)
(O-V)
(V-G)
(G-V)
(V-BR)
(eR-V)
(V-S)
(S-V)
0
0
0
)8 }---o
) 34 }---o
) 9 }---o
)35 }---o20
)10 }---o
) 36 }---o
) 11 }---o
0
) 37 )
) 12 }---o25
) 38 }---o
)13 }---o
) 39 }---o
0
) 14 )
0 30
) 40 )
)15 }---o
) 41 }---o
)16 }---o
0
) 42 )
0
)17 )
35
) 43 }---o
}---o
) 18
) 44 }---o
)19 }---o
)45 }---o40
0
)20 )
) 48 }---o
) 21 }---o
) 47 }---o
)22
}---o45
) 48 }---o
) 23 }---o
) 49 }---o
) 24 }---o
) 50 }---oSO
) 25 }---o
T
R
A
TO
STATION 35
l
lG
H
B
BZ
BZ1
T
R
A
<
l
lG
TO
STATION 36
H
B
BZ
BZ1
T
R
A
•
l
lG
TO
STATION 37
H
8
BZ
liZ 1
T
R
A
•
l
lG
TO
STillION
H
B
BZ
BZ1
T
R
A
38
<
l
lG
TO
STATION 39
H
B
BZ
BZ1
...
Fig. 33-Connections Between Plugs 5 to 8 of 572Al Key Service Unit and 184Cl Backboard (Sheet 2 of 4)
Page 62
ISS I, SECTION 518-411-100
572Al KSU
A25B
CONNECTOR CABLE
184C 1 BACKBOARO
(SEE TABLE E)
BLOCK B
COLUMN F
'" 813)
B33)
B14)
TO
FUSE 8
To J13B
8TH 48 4A KTU
B35)
B34
B15,
B16
B2
B19
B39
B38
B18)
B37)
B36)
B22)
B6 )
B26)
B7 )
B28)
B27
B8 ~
B9
BO
B12
B32
B3P
Bl0,
TO
FUSE 9
<26~
<271 E~
<2 E
<28E
3 ~
29 ~
4 ~
~
30E
5 ~
31 ~
6
Bll
B30'"
B39
B20'"
B13
B33'
B14
B35'"
B34)
B15)
B16)
.... B2 )
~
32 (
7 ~
B17
>
To J14B
9TH 48 4A KTU
P7
33~
8 (
34 ~
9 (
35 ~
<
<
<10~
<36 (
<11 (
<37(
<12(
(
<38
13(
~
~
39(
14 ~
40 (
15 (
41 (
16~
42(
" 17 ~
43(
18 (
44 ~
;
19E
45 ~
;
20 (
46 (
;
21 (
47 (
22(
4B(
23 (
49(
24 (
50 (
25 (
;
5
<
<
<
<
(W-BL)
(BL-W)
(W-!!j
(O-W)
(W-G)
(G-W)
III-BRI
(BR-W)
111-9)
(S-W)
(R-BL)
(BL-R!
(R-O)
(O-R)
(R-G)
(G R)
(R-BR)
(BR-R)
(R-!:j
(S-R)
(BK-BL)
(BL-BK)
(BK-O)
(O-BK)
(BK-G)
(G-BK)
(BK-BR)
(BR-BK)
(BK-S)
(S-BK)
IY-Ei[l
(BL-Y)
(Y-O)
(O-Y)
(Y-G)
(G-Y)
(Y-BR)
(BR-Y)
(Y-S)
(S-Y)
(V-BL)
IEi[-111
(V-O)
(O-V)
(V-G)
(G-V)
(V-BR)
(BR-Vj
111-9)
(S-V)
0 1
) 26)
a
) 1 )
a
) 27)
0 5
) 2 )
a
) 28)
) 3 )
a
) 29)
) 4 >--0
0
) 30)
10
) 5 )
a
) 31)
a
) 6 )
a
) 32)
) 7 >--0
) 33)
0 15
) 8 )
) 34)
) 9 )
) 35)
0
20
a
) 10)
) 36)
) 11)
0
0
) 37)
) 12)
0 25
a
) 38)
) 13)
0
a
) 39)
) 14)
) 40)
0 30
a
) 15)
) 41)
a
) 16)
) 42)
a
)17>--0
) 43)
0 35
) 18)
a
) 44)
0
) 19)
0
) 45)
0
0 40
) 20)
) 46)
0
) 21)
a
) 47)
) 22)
0 45
a
) 48)
a
) 23)
) 49)
) 24)
a
) 50)
0 50
) 25)
0
T
R
A
L
LG
H
B
BZ
BZl
T
R
A
TO
STATION 40
L
LG
H
B
BZ
BZl
T
R
A
TO
STATION 41
L
LG
TO
STATION 42
Fi
B
BZ
BZl
T
R
A
L
LG
H
B
BZ
BZ1
T
R
A
L
LG
H
B
BZ
BZ1
TO
STATION 43
TO
STATION 44
Fig. 33-Connections Between Plugs 5 to 8 of 572Al Key Service Unit and 184Cl Backboard (Sheet 3 of 4)
Page 63
SECTION 518-411-100
572Al KSU
To J14B
9TH 48 4A KTU
819)
B39)
838>817)
TO
FUSE 9
818)
837)
B36)
>B22)
86 )
826)
B7 )
B28)
B27
BB
89'
BO
B12
B32
B31
Bl0
Bll
o
T J15B
10TH 48 4A KTU
B3~(
B29
B20
B13
B33
814
B35
83~(
B15
816~
B2
819
B39'
B3B
TO
FUSE 10
B17
B18)
B37)
836)
.... B22)
184Cl BACKBOARD
(SEE TABLE E)
A25B
CONNECTOR CABLE
P8
BLOCK B
COLUMN G
-« 26 ~1
( 26~(_ _ _..l(~W,..:-B:;L+-)_ _
(BL-W)
( 1 (
(W-O)
( 27 (
2 (
(O-W)
(W-G)
( 28 (
(G-W)
3 (
(W-BR)
( 29 (
(BR-W)
( 4 (
(W-s)
( 30 (
(S-W)
(5 ~
( 31(
( 6 (
( 32 (
7 (
( 33(
B (
34 (
"'; 9
(
35 (
10(
36(
11 (
37 (
12 (
3B (
13(
39 (
; 14 (
40(
15(
41 (
16 (
42 (
, 17 (
43 (
lB(
44 (
19 (
; 45 (
20 (
48 (
21 (
47 (
22 (
48(
23 (
( 49(
( 24(
( 50 (
( 25 (
"'
"'
(R-BL)
(BL-R)
(R-O)
(O-R)
(R-G)
(G-R)
(R-BR )
(BR-R)
(R-S)
(S-R)
(BK-BL)
(BL-BK)
(BK-O)
(O-BK)
(BK-il)
(G-BK)
(BK-BR)
(M-BK)
(BK-S)
(S-BK)
(y-B[)
(BL-Y)
(Y-O)
(O-V)
(Y-G)
(G-V)
(Y-BR)
(BR-Y)
(Y-S)
(S-Y)
(V-BL)
(BL-V)
(V-O)
(O-V)
(V-G)
(G-V)
(V-BR)
(BR-V)
(V-SJ
(S-V)
( 1
~
( 27
~
(2
~5
28 ~
3 ~
29 ~
4 ~
30 ~10
(5 ~
(31
~
(6
~
( 32
~
( 7
(33 ~15
~
( 8
~
( 34
~
(9 ~
( 35 ~20
(10 ~
(36 ~
( 11 ~
( 37 ~
( 12 ~25
( 38 ~
(13 ~
39 ~
( 14 ~
(40 ~30
(15 ~
( 41 ~
16 ~
( 42 ~
( 17 ~35
< 43 ~
-0 1
(Bl-W)
<
<1 (
(
<27
2 (
28 (
<
0
(O-W)
) 27 )
) 2 )
) 28)
Os
(W-G )
(G-W)
0
0
(W-BRI
) 3 >-0
(BR-W)
) 29)
0
4 (
(W-Sl
)4 )
0
30 (
(S-W)
) 30 )
0
) 5 )
0
"' 5
(
31 (
8 (
32 (
7 (
33 (
)8 (
;
(W-Ol
)1 )
29 (
3 (
34 (
9 (
35 (
10 (
38 (
) 11 (
37 (
12(
38 (
) 13(
39 (
14 (
40 (
15(
41 (
18 (
42 (
17 (
43 (
18(
B18)
B37)
B38)
>B22)
B8 )
828)
To J17B B7 )
12TH 48 4A KTU
B28)
TO
FUSE 12
B27)
B8 )
B9 )
.... BO )
184C1 BACKBOARD
(SEE TABLE E)
<44(
<19 (
<45 (
<20(
<48(
<21 (
47 (
<22
<48 ((
<
23 (
<49 (
24 (
<
(
50(
( 25 (
(R-Bl)
(Bl-R)
(R-O)
(O-R)
(R-G)
(G-R)
(R-BR)
(BR-R)
(R-Sl
(S-R)
(BK-Bl)
(Bl-BK)
(BK-O)
(O-BK)
(BK-G)
(G-BK)
(BK-BR)
( BR-BK)
(BK-S)
(S-8K)
(V-Sll
(Bl-Y)
(Y-O)
(O-V)
(Y-G)
(G-Y)
(V-SR)
(BR-Y)
(Y-Sl
(S-Y)
(V-Bl)
(Bl-V)
(V-O)
(O-V)
(V-G)
(G-V)
(V-BR)
(BR-V)
(V-Sl
(S-V)
10
) 31) 0
)8 )
0
) 32 )
0
) 7 >-0
) 33 >-0 15
) 8 >-0
) 34 )
0
)9 ) 0
0
) 35 )
20
10 >-0
)
0
38
0
) 11 )
0
) 37 )
)12 >-0 25
) 38 >-0
0
13 )
0
) 39 )
0
) 14 )
) 40 >-0 30
) 15 >-0
) 41 >-0
0
) 18 )
) 42 >-0
) 17 )
0
35
) 43 )
0
)18 >-0
) 44 >-0
0
) 19 )
0
) 45 )
40
)20 >-0
)
0
)48
0
) 21 )
0
) 47 )
) 22 >-0 45
) 48
>-0
23 >-0
49 >-0
)
)
0
) 24 )
)50 >-0 50
) 25 )
0
T
R
A
To STATION 50,
CODE 70 (All
ZONE PAGING)
OR STATION 25
l
lG
H
B
BZ
BZ1
T
R
A
l
lG
H
B
BZ
BZ1
T
R
A
l
lG
H
B
BZ
BZ1
T
R
TO STATION 51,
CODE 71
( PAGING ZONE 1)
OR STATION 28
<
TO STATION 52,
CODE 72
( PAGING lONE 2)
OR STATION 27
<
A
TO STATION 53,
CODE 73
( PAGING ZONE 3)
OR STATION 28
l
lG
H
B
BZ
BZ1
T
R
A
l
lG
TO
STATION 54
OR 29
H
B
BZ
BZ1
"
Fig. 34-Connections Between Plugs 9 to 11 of 572A 1 Key Service Unit and 184Cl 8ackboard (Sheet 1 of
3)
Page 65
SECTION 518-411-100
572Al KSU
/' 812)
B32)
B31)
B10)
TO
Plo
BLOCK C
COLUMN A
1
26~(_ _ _.J..;(W;,..-B::.;:l;.!-)_~) 26 )
0
(Bl-W)
<
<1 (
<27(
2 (
<28(
3 (
FUSE 12
Bl1
B3O~
829
) 27)
) 2 )
)28)
0
3 )
0
(W~G)
(G-W)
(W-SR)
0
5
0
29)
0
) 4 )
0
B2o~
3D (
5 (
(S-W)
) 30)--0 10
B13
B33/
B14
31 (
6 (
32(
7 (
33(
(R-Bl)
CBl-R)
(R-o)
(o-R)
(R-G)
(G-R)
(R-BR)
(BR-R)
31 )
6 ;:.
)32)
) 7 )
) 33)
) 8 )
)34)
(R-S)
) 9 )
(S-R)
(BK-Bl)
(Bl-BK)
(8K-0)
(o-BK)
(BK-G)
(G-SK)
(BK-BR)
(BR-BK)
(BK-S)
(S-BK)
0
)35)
20
10)--0
0
)36)
0
11)
0
37)
0 25
12)
0
38 )
0
13 )
0
39 )
0
14 )
0 30
40 )
0
15 )
0
41 )
0
) 16 ;:.
0
) 42 )
0 35
) 17 )
0
) 43
0
18
0
) 44
0
) 19 )
0
) 45 )
40
0
)20
0
)
)46
0
) 21
0
) 47 )
) 22
0 45
0
) 48
0
23
0
49 )
0
) 24
0 50
) 50
0
) 25 )
B34
815
B16/
B2
Bl~~
B17
818)
837)
B36)
:. B22)
B6 )
B26)
B7 )
B28)
TO
FUSE 13
) 1 )
(O-W)
(W-S)
B39
B38
To J188
13TH 48 4A KTU
(W-O)
0
4 (
B35
To J17B
12TH 48 4B KTU
184C 1 BACKBOARD
(SEE TABLE F)
A25B
CONNECTOR CABLE
B27,.
B8
B9
80
B12,.
B32
B31
Blo
Bl1)
B30)
829)
B2o)
; 29 (
"8 (
34(
9 (
35(
10 (
36(
11 (
"- 37 (
12 (
~ 38 (
13 (
39 (
14 (
40 (
15(
41 (
16 (
42 (
17 (
43 (
18 (
44 (
19 (
; 45(
2o(
46(
21 (
47 (
22 (
4B (
"- 23
49 (
24 (
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
50 (
<25
(
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
I
0
TO
STATION 55
l
lG
H
B
Bl
Bl1
T
0
R
A
0
0
0
T
R
A
15
0
0
0
0
l
lG
H
B
BZ
Bl1
T
R
A
TO .
STATION 56
•
l
lG
H
B
TO
STATION 57
81
Bl1
T
R
A
l
lG
H
B
Bl
Bl1
T
R
A
TO
STATION 58
.
l
TO
STATION 59
III
H
B
Bl
Bl1
,
Fig. 34-Connections Between Plugs 9 to 11 of 572A 1 Key Service Unit and 184Cl Backboard (Sheet 2 of
3)
Page 66
ISS 1, SECTION 518-411-100
572A1 KSU
A25B
CONNECTOR CABLE
184C 1 BACKBOARD
(SEE TABLE E)
BLOCK C
COLUMN E
(W-Bl)
P11 < 26~(----+=,...:;:::+---+
) 28 }-o1
" B13)
(Bl-W)
B33)
) 1 }-o
( 1 ~(--.......,m.:,,;r--~
(W-O)
B14)
) 27 )
( 27~(----in--;:ri---7
(O-W)
) 2 }-o
2 ~(--.......,m-;;Cf--~
(W-G)
) 28 }-o5
B35)
< 28~(----+=~---+
TO
(G-W)
3 ~(--.......,m-;;iin--~
) 3 )
FUSE 13
(W-BR)
B34
) 29 }-o
29~(--~1=--m--~
(BR-W)
4 ~(----m"",,",':"""---+
) 4 )
B1~,
(
worn
B16
30~(----in--;:ri---7
) 30 ) • 10
(S-W)
To J18B B2
) 5 }-o
5 ~(---....;.:....:+-:-----+
(R-Bl)
13TH 48 4A KTU B19
) 31 )
31~(---~..::;.!'--7
(Bl-R)
B39
) 6 )
8 ~(---~~'---~
)
(R-O)
B38
) 32 )
32~(----+=-*--7
(O-R)
) 7 ) '15
7 ~(---~i+----7
(R-G)
B17
) 33 }-o
33~(---~~--~
(G-R)
) 8 )
8~(---~:i;!:-;--~
(R-BR)
B18)
( 34~(---~~+--_+
) 34 ) II
(BR-R)
B37)
( 9 ~(-----i~:r--~
) 9 ) II
(R-S)
B38)
) 35 )
< 35~(---~~--~
'20
(S-R)
B22)
( 10~(----mr-:7;;"'--7
) 10 )
(BK-Bl)
) 38 )
)~-----~<38~(--.......,~~-~
(Bl-BK)
) 11 )
) > - - - - - - - « 11~(--.......,=-?-~
(BK-O)
) 37 )
)>-------«37~(--.......,~~-~
(O-BK)
) 12 ) 'l!5
12~(---~~+---+
(BR-il)
) 38 )
)~-----~<38~(--.......,~~-~
(G-BK)
) 13 )
------~<13~(---~F:~-~
(BK-BR)
) 39 )
)
(39~(--.......,~~-~
(BR-BK)
) 14 }-o
)
< 14+-(----ifiiT-.;n:.<--~
(BK-S)
) 40 ) '30
)
<40~(--.......,~~-~
(S-BK)
) 15 )
)
( 15~(------irv--B;ri--~
(Y-Bl)
)
( 41 ~(----,:-::,-.,.,.;--~) 41 }-o
(Bl-Y)
) 18 ) •
)
<16~(--.......,~oi-"--~
(Y-O)
) 42 }-o
)
<42~(----,~~-~
(O-Y)
)17 ) '35
17~(---**--7
(Y-G)
) 43 ) II
)~-------«43~(---~~--~
(G-Y)
) 18 )
-------«18~(--.......,~~-~
(Y-BR)
) 44 )
)
<44~(----'1=-~---7
(BR-Y)
) 19 )
)
<19 ~(---;v-;,.,r--~
(Y-S)
) 45 )
)
<45~(---**--7
"40
(S-Y)
) 20 ) •
)
<20~(--~~~---7
(V-Bl)
)
48
}-o
)
<48~(----'~~---7
(Bl-V)
) 21 )
)
<21+-(---~~-~
(V-O)
) 47 ) •
)
(47~(---~i+----7
(O-V)
<22~(---~rr----7
) 22 ) ''15
(H)
) 48 }-o
)>--------«48~(--.......,~~-~
(G-V)
) 23 }-o
------~<23~(---~~~--+
(V-BR)
) 49 }-o
)
<49~(--.......,~~-~
(BR-V)
) 24 )
)
<24~(------i~r--~
(V-S)
)
<50+-(----,~~-~
) 50 ) "!5o
(S-V)
)
(25~(--~~~-~
) 25 }-o
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
T
R
A
l
lG
H
B
BZ
BZ1
T
R
A
TO
STATION 80
l
lG
H
B
8Z
BZ1
TO
STATION 61
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
I
Fig. 34-Connections Between Plugs 9 to 11 of 572A 1 Key Service Unit and 184Cl Backboard (Sheet 3 of
3)
Page 67
SECTION 518-411-100
P13
P9
~------
572A1
KSU
P4
PO
------~------~
,,
,
L
, __________
(SEE NOTE) ,
,,
BLOCK A
2
3
BLOCK B
4
5
2
:
NOTE: IF BLOCK B IS
ADDED FOR EXPANSION
ROUTE CABLE SHOWN BY
DASHED LINE TO ACCESS
CODES 25-29.
3
PAGING CODES _ _ _-'
70-73 AND
STATION 54
STATIONS 25-29
A. SMALL SYSTEM USING ONE BLOCK INITIALLY AND HAVING PAGING ACCESS
P13
572A1
KSU
P9
~------
P4
PO
------~
BLOCK A
BLOCK B
2
234
3
STATIONS 25-29 _ _ _-'
5
STATIONS 50-54 OR
PAGING CODES 70-73
AND STATION 54
B. LARGER SYSTEM INITIALLY USING TWO BLOCKS WITH OR WITHOUT PAGING ACCESS
Fig. 35-Cabling Methods When Paging Access is Supplied
Page 68
ISS I, SECTKm518-411-100
IIOA APP
r10UNTING
(NOTES 2
AND 5)
oFF-PREr1ISES
TELEPHONE SET
(NOTE 1)
R
4
T
3
420A KTU
13
12
(NOTE 4)
,..
R
BB KTS
(NOTE 3)
TBI
r--
T
.~
1
2
~
~ r-1l
A
;;:
BZ
BZl
d
14
9
10
I
1
5
---l
5
ADD
STRAPS
B
~A BAT
45
A GRo
4B
B BAT
47
B.GRD
48
lo5!
39
KTS POWER
SUPPLY RG
8
l.
18
~
3
17
15
10
8
9
NOTES:
1. r1AXIPlUPI STATION CONDUCTOR GROUP IS 500 OHPlS. TelEPHONE
SET PlAX 8E EQUIPPED WITH A TOUCH-TONE DIAL PROVIDED 6B KTS
IS SO EQUIPPED. WIRE SET WITH BRIDGED RINGER.
2. PlAKE CONNECTIONS ON LEFT BLOCK IF 420A IS IN PI OR ON
RIGHT BLOCK IF IN P =
3. ANY DIGIT PlAY BE ASS NED TO oFF-PREr1ISES STATION. TERr1INATE
LEADS ON 184Cl BACKBoA 0 DEPENDING ON CODE ASSIGNED.
4. 518A DIODES r1UST BE INStALLED FRo/'l TIP AND RING TO GROUND
AS SHOWN. USE CONNECTING BLOCK AS SHOWN AS TER/'lINA TING POINT.
5, IF /'lORE THAN TWO-420A KTUSA.RE REQUIRED, A B42A PANEL CAN
BE USED.
I
I
Fig. 36-Connection~ for Off-Premises Extension
Page 69
69 Pages
VOL II
'j: \ "/ /' .
:1'
\
J,>
I
@
OCT 1978
d
@ Bell System
,
I
~,
,
\
'
. .. .
.
I
I
I
.,.J.
•
.
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37 Create Date : 2014:07:22 14:57:24-08:00 Modify Date : 2014:07:22 14:38:59-07:00 Metadata Date : 2014:07:22 14:38:59-07:00 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.55 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:3c0b450a-5d16-fc4b-bd54-d44c2faec7f3 Instance ID : uuid:41443ae8-aca7-894d-96d9-46ed4429c7a4 Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 980EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools